diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 1283-0.txt | 5771 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 1283-h/1283-h.htm | 8787 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/1283-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 99407 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/1283-h/1283-h.htm | 9201 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/1283.txt | 6163 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/1283.zip | bin | 0 -> 97055 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/old/14tom10.txt | 6331 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/old/14tom10.zip | bin | 0 -> 95123 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/old/14tom10h.htm | 6413 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/old/14tom10h.zip | bin | 0 -> 97628 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/old/14tom10l.lit | bin | 0 -> 97069 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/old/14tom10l.zip | bin | 0 -> 88328 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/old/14tom10p.prc | bin | 0 -> 147033 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/old/14tom10p.zip | bin | 0 -> 131358 bytes |
17 files changed, 42682 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/1283-0.txt b/1283-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e087d77 --- /dev/null +++ b/1283-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,5771 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 1283 *** + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA + +or + +Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving Pictures + + +by + +VICTOR APPLETON + + + + +CONTENTS + +CHAPTER + + + I A STRANGE OFFER + II A MAN IN THE SNOW BANK + III TOM MAKES UP HIS MIND + IV HELD FAST + V TOM GETS A WARNING + VI TRYING THE CAMERA + VII WHAT THE CAMERA CAUGHT + VIII PHOTOS FROM THE AIRSHIP + IX OFF FOR INDIA + X UNEXPECTED EXCITEMENT + XI AN ELEPHANT STAMPEDE + XII THE LION FIGHT + XIII A SHOT IN TIME + XIV IN A GREAT GALE + XV SNAPPING AN AVALANCHE + XVI TELEGRAPH ORDERS + XVII SUSPICIOUS STRANGERS + XVIII THE NATIVE BATTLE + XIX A HEAVY LOSS + XX AFTER THE ENGLISHMEN + XXI THE JUNGLE FIRE + XXII A DANGEROUS COMMISSION + XXIII AT THE VOLCANO + XXIV THE MOLTEN RIM + XXV THE EARTHQUAKE--CONCLUSION + + + + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA + + +CHAPTER I + +A STRANGE OFFER + + +"Some one to see you, Mr. Tom." + +It was Koku, or August, as he was sometimes called, the new giant +servant of Tom Swift, who made this announcement to the young inventor. + +"Who is it, Koku?" inquired Tom, looking up from his work-bench in the +machine shop, where he was busy over a part of the motor for his new +noiseless airship. "Any one I know? Is it the 'Blessing Man?'" for so +Koku had come to call Mr. Damon, an eccentric friend of Tom's. + +"No, not him. A strange man. I never see before. He say he got quick +business." + +"Quick business; eh? I guess you mean important, Koku," for this +gigantic man, one of a pair that Tom had brought with him after his +captivity in "Giant Land," as he called it, could not speak English +very well, as yet. "Important business; eh, Koku? Did he send in his +card?" + +"No, Mr. Tom. Him say he have no card. You not know him, but he very +much what you call--recited." + +"Excited I guess you mean, Koku. Well, tell him to wait a few minutes, +and I'll see him. You can show him in then. But I say, Koku," and Tom +paused as he looked at the big man, who had attached himself to our +hero, as a sort of personal helper and bodyguard. + +"Yes, Mr. Tom; what is it?" + +"Don't let him go poking around the shop. He might look at some of my +machines that I haven't got fully patented yet. Is he in the front +office?" + +"That's where him am. He be lookin' at pictures on the walls." + +"Oh, that's all right then. Just keep him there. And, Koku, don't let +him come back in the shop here, until I get ready to see him. I'll ring +the bell when I am." + +"All right, Mr. Tom." + +Koku, very proud of his mission of keeping guard over the strange +visitor, marched from the room with his big strides, his long arms and +powerful hands swinging at his sides, for Koku, or August, as Tom had +rechristened him, and as he often called him (for it was in the month +of August that he had located the giants) was a very powerful man. A +veritable giant, being extremely tall, and big in proportion. + +"Be sure. Don't let him in here, Koku!" called Tom, in an additional +warning, as his new servant left the main shop. + +"Sure not!" exclaimed Koku, very earnestly. + +"I don't know who he may be," mused Tom, as he began putting away the +parts to his new noiseless motor, so that the stranger could not see +them, and profit thereby. "It looks rather funny, not sending in his +name. It may be some one who thinks he can spring a trick on me, and +get some points about my inventions, or dad's. + +"It may even be somebody sent on by Andy Foger, or his father. I can't +be too careful. I'll just put everything away that isn't fully covered +by patents, and then if he wants to infringe on any of the machines I +can sue him." + +Tom looked about the shop, which was filled with strange machinery, +most of which had been made by himself, or his father, or under their +combined directions. There was a big biplane in one corner, a small +monoplane in another, parts of a submarine boat hanging up overhead, +and a small, but very powerful, electric auto waiting to have some +repairs made to it, for on his last trip in it Tom Swift had suffered a +slight accident. + +"There, I guess he can't see anything but what I want him to," mused +Tom, as he put away the last part of a new kind of motor, from which he +hoped great things. "Let's see, yes, it's out of sight now. I wish Ned +Newton, or Mr. Damon were here to be a witness in case he starts +anything. But then I have Koku, even if he doesn't speak much English +yet. If it comes to blows--well, I wouldn't want that giant to hit me," +finished Tom with a laugh, as he rang the bell to announce to his +servant that the visitor might be shown in. + +There was a sound outside the door that separated the business office +from the main shop, and Tom heard Koku exclaim: + +"Hold on! Wait! I go first. You wait!" + +"What's the matter with me going ahead?" demanded a quick, snappy +voice. "I'm in a hurry, and--" + +"You wait! I go first," was the giant's reply, and then came the sound +of a scuffle. + +"Ouch! Say! Hold on there, my man! Take your hand off my shoulder! +You're crushing me with those big fingers of yours!" + +This was evidently the visitor remonstrating with the giant. + +"Humph! I guess Koku must have grabbed him," said Tom softly. "I don't +like that sort of a visitor. What's his hurry getting in here?" and our +hero looked about, to see if he had a weapon at hand in case of an +attack. Often cranks had forced their way into his shop, with pet +inventions which they wanted him to perfect after they had themselves +failed. Tom saw a heavy iron bar at hand, and knew this would serve to +protect him. + +"You come after me!" exclaimed Koku, when the voice of the other had +ceased. "Do you stand under me?" + +"Oh, yes, I understand all right. I'll keep back. But I didn't mean +anything. I'm just in a hurry to see Tom Swift, that is all. I'm +always in a hurry in fact. I've lost nearly a thousand dollars this +morning, just by this delay. I want to see Mr. Swift at once; and have +a talk with him." + +"Another crank, I guess," mused Tom. "Well, I'm not going to waste much +time on him." + +A moment later the door opened, and into the shop stepped Koku, +followed by a short, stout, fussy little man, wearing a flaming red +tie, but otherwise his clothes were not remarkable. + +"Is this Mr. Tom Swift?" asked the stranger, as he advanced and held +out his hand to the young man. + +"Yes," answered Tom, looking carefully at the visitor. He did not seem +to be dangerous, he had no weapon, and, Tom was relieved to note that +he did not carry some absurd machine, or appliance, that he had made, +hoping to get help in completing it. The youth was trying to remember +if he had ever seen the stranger before, but came to the conclusion +that he had not. + +"Sorry to take up your time," went on the man, "but I just had to see +you. No one else will do. I've heard lots about you. That was a great +stunt you pulled off, getting those giants for the circus. This is one; +isn't he?" and he nodded toward Koku. + +"Yes," replied Tom, wondering if the little man was in such a hurry why +he did not get down to business. + +"I thought so," the caller went on, as he shook hands with Tom. "Once +you felt his grip you'd know he was a giant, even if you didn't see +him. Yes, that was a great stunt. And going to the caves of ice, too, +and that diamond-making affair. All of 'em great. I--" + +"How did you know about them?" interrupted Tom, wishing the man would +tell his errand. + +"Oh, you're better known than you have any idea of, Tom Swift. As soon +as I got this idea of mine I said right away, to some of the others in +my business, I says, says I, 'Tom Swift is the boy for us. I'll get him +to undertake this work, and then it will be done to the Queen's taste. +Tom's the boy who can do it,' I says, and they all agreed with me. So I +came here to-day, and I'm sorry I had to wait to see you, for I'm the +busiest man in the world, I believe, and, as I said, I've lost about a +thousand dollars waiting to have a talk with you. I--" + +"I am sorry," interrupted Tom, and he was not very cordial. "But I was +busy, and--" + +"All right! All right! Don't apologize!" broke in the man in rapid +tones, while both Tom, and his servant, Koku, looked in surprise at the +quick flow of language that came from him. "Don't apologize for the +world. It's my fault for bothering you. And I'll lose several thousand +dollars, willingly, if you'll undertake this job. I'll make money from +it as it is. It's worth ten thousand dollars to you, I should say, and +I'm willing to pay that." + +He looked about, as though for a seat, and Tom, apologizing for his +neglect in offering one, shoved a box forward. + +"We don't have chairs in here," said the young inventor with a smile. +"Now if you will tell me what you--" + +"I'm coming right to it. I'll get down to business in a moment," +interrupted the man as he sat down on the box, not without a grunt or +two, for he was very stout. "I'm going to introduce myself in just a +second, and then I'm going to tell you who I am. And I hope you'll take +up my offer, though it may seem a strange one." + +The man took out a pocketbook, and began searching through it, +evidently for some card or paper. + +"He's as odd as Mr. Damon is, when he's blessing everything," mused +Tom, as he watched the man. + +"I thought I had a card with me, but I haven't," the visitor went on. +"No matter. I'm James Period--promoter of all kinds of amusement +enterprises, from a merry-go-'round to a theatrical performance. I want +you to--" + +"No more going after giants," interrupted. Tom. "It's too dangerous, +and I haven't time--" + +"No, it has nothing to do with giants," spoke Mr. Period, as he glanced +up at Koku, who towered over him as he sat on the box near Tom. + +"Well?" returned Tom. + +"This is something entirely new. It has never been done before, though +if you should happen to be able to get a picture of giants don't miss +the opportunity." + +"Get a picture?" exclaimed Tom, wondering if, after all, his visitor +might not be a little insane. + +"Pictures, yes. Listen. I'm James Period. Jim, if you like it better, +or just plain 'Spotty.' That's what most of my friends call me. Get the +idea? A period is a spot. I'm a Period, therefor I'm a spot. But that +isn't the real reason. It's because I'm always Johnny on the Spot when +anything is happening. If it's a big boxing exhibition, I'm there. If +it's a coronation, I'm there, or some of my men are. If it's a Durbar +in India, you'll find Spotty on the spot. That's me. If there's going +to be a building blown up with dynamite--I'm on hand; or some of my +men. If there's a fire I get there as soon as the engines do--if it's +a big one. Always on the spot--that's me--James Period--Spotty for +short. Do you get me?" and he drew a long breath and looked at Tom, his +head on one side. + +"I understand that you are--" + +"In the moving picture business," interrupted Mr. Period, who never +seemed to let Tom finish a sentence. "I'm the biggest moving picture +man in the world--not in size, but in business. I make all the best +films. You've seen some of 'em I guess. Every one of 'em has my picture +on the end of the film. Shows up great. Advertising scheme--get me?" + +"Yes," replied Tom, as he recalled that he had seen some of the films +in question, and good ones they were too. "I see your point, but--" + +"You want to know why I come to you; don't you?" again interrupted +"Spotty," with a laugh. "Well, I'll tell you. I need you in my +business. I want you to invent a new kind of moving picture camera. A +small light one--worked by electricity--a regular wizard camera. I want +you to take it up in an airship with you, and then go to all sorts of +wild and strange countries, Africa, India--the jungles--get pictures of +wild animals at peace and fighting--herds of elephants--get scenes of +native wars--earthquakes--eruptions of volcanoes--all the newest and +most wonderful pictures you can. You'll have to make a new kind of +camera to do it. The kind we use won't do the trick. + +"Now do you get me? I'm going to give you ten thousand dollars, above +all your expenses, for some films such as I've been speaking of. I want +novelty. Got to have it in my business! You can do it. Now will you?" + +"I hardly think--" began Tom. + +"Don't answer me now," broke in Mr. Period. "Take four minutes to think +it over. Or even five. I guess I can wait that long. Take five +minutes. I'll wait while you make up your mind, but I know you'll do +it. Five minutes--no more," and hastily getting up off the box Mr. +Period began impatiently pacing up and down the shop. + + + + +CHAPTER II + +A MAN IN THE SNOW BANK + + +Tom Swift looked somewhat in surprise at his strange visitor. It had +all happened so suddenly, the offer had been such a strange one, the +man himself--Mr. Period--was so odd, that our hero hardly knew what to +think. The moving picture agent continued pacing up and down the room +now and then looking at his watch as if to note when the five minutes +had passed. + +"No," said Tom to himself. "I'm not going to take this offer. There's +too much work and risk attached to it. I want to stay at home and work +on my noiseless motor for the airship. After that--well--I don't know +what I'll do. I'll tell Mr. Period that he needn't wait the five +minutes. My mind is made up now!" + +But as Tom was about to make this announcement, and dismiss his caller, +he looked again at the visitor. There was something attractive about +him--about his hasty way of talking, about his manner of interrupting, +about the way he proposed matters. Tom was interested in spite of +himself. + +"Well," he reflected, "I may as well wait until the five minutes are +up, anyhow." + +Koku, the giant servant, glanced at his young master, as if to ask if +there was anything that he could do. Tom shook his head, and then the +big man strolled over to the other side of the machine shop, at the +same time keeping a careful eye on Mr. Period. + +While Tom is waiting for the time to expire, I will take a few minutes +to tell you something more about him. Those of my friends who have read +the previous books in this series need no introduction to my hero, but +those who may chance upon this as their first book in the Tom Swift +series, will like to be more formally introduced. + +Tom, whose mother had been dead some years, lived with his father, +Barton Swift, in the town of Shopton. Mr. Swift was an inventor of +prominence, and his son was fast following in his footsteps. A Mrs. +Baggert kept house for the Swifts, and another member of the household +was Eradicate Sampson, an aged colored man, who said he used to +"eradicate" the dirt. He had been with Tom on many trips, but of late +was getting old and feeble. Then there was Garret Jackson, an engineer +employed by the Swifts. These were all the immediate members of the +household. + +Tom had a chum, Ned Newton, who used to work in a bank, and there was a +girl, Mary Nestor, a daughter of Amos Nestor, in which young lady Tom +was much interested. + +Eradicate Sampson had a mule, Boomerang, of whom he thought almost as +much as he did of Tom. Eradicate was a faithful friend and servant, +but, of late, Koku, or August, the giant, had rather supplanted him. I +must not forget Mr. Wakefield Damon, of Waterfield, a village near +Shopton. Mr. Damon was an odd man, always blessing everything. He and +Tom were good friends, and had been on many trips together. + +The first book of the series was called "Tom Swift and His +Motor-Cycle," and related how Tom bought the cycle from Mr. Damon, +after the latter had met with an accident on it, and it was in this way +that our hero became acquainted with the odd man. + +Tom had many adventures on his motor-cycle, and, later on he secured a +motor-boat, in which he beat his enemy, Andy Foger, in a race. Next Tom +built an airship, and in this he went on a wonderful trip. Returning +from this he and his father heard about a treasure sunken under the +ocean. In his submarine boat Tom secured the valuables, and made a +large sum for himself. + +In his electric runabout, which was the swiftest car on the road, Tom +was able to save from ruin a bank in which his father was interested, +and, a short time after that, he went on a trip in an airship, with a +man who had invented a new kind. The airship was smashed, and fell to +Earthquake Island, where there were some refugees from a shipwreck, +among them being the parents of Mary Nestor. In the volume called "Tom +Swift and His Wireless Message," I told how he saved these people. + +When Tom went among the diamond makers he had more strange adventures, +on that trip discovering the secret of phantom mountain. He had bad +luck when he went to the caves of ice, for there his airship was +wrecked. + +When Tom made the trip in his sky racer he broke all records for an +aerial flight, incidentally saving his father's life. It was some time +after this when he invented an electric rifle, and went to elephant +land, to rescue some missionaries from the red pygmies. + +The eleventh volume of the series is called "Tom Swift in the Land of +Gold," and relates his adventures underground, while the next one tells +of a new machine he invented--an air-glider--which he used to save the +exiles of Siberia, incidentally, on that trip, finding a valuable +deposit of platinum. + +As I have said, it was on his trip to giant land that Tom got his big +servant. This book, the thirteenth of the series, is called "Tom Swift +in Captivity," for the giants captured him and his friends, and it was +only by means of their airship that they made their daring escape. + +Tom had been back from the strange land some time now. One giant he had +turned over to the circus representative for whom he had undertaken the +mission, and the other he retained to work around his shop, as +Eradicate was getting too old. It was now winter, and there had been +quite a fall of snow the day before Mr. Period, the odd moving picture +man, called on Tom. There were many big drifts outside the building. + +Tom had fitted up a well-equipped shop, where he and his father worked +on their inventions. Occasionally Ned Newton, or Mr. Damon, would come +over to help them, but of late Tom had been so busy on his noiseless +motor that he had not had time to even see his friends. + +"Well, I guess the five minutes have passed, and my mind is made up," +thought Tom, as he looked at his watch. "I might as well tell Mr. +Period that I can't undertake his commission. In the first place it +isn't going to be an easy matter to make an electric moving picture +camera. I'd have to spend a lot of time studying up the subject, and +then I might not be able to get it to work right. + +"And, again, I can't spare the time to go to all sorts of wild and +impossible places to get the pictures. It's all well enough to talk +about getting moving pictures of natives in battle, or wild beasts +fighting, or volcanoes in action, but it isn't so easy to do it. Then, +too, I'd have to make some changes in my airship if I went on that +trip. No, I can't go. I'll tell him he'll have to find some one else." + +Mr. Period pulled out his watch, opened it quickly, snapped it shut +again, and exclaimed: + +"Well, how about it, Tom Swift? When can you start! The sooner the +better for me! You'll want some money for expenses I think. I brought +my check book along, also a fountain pen. I'll give you a thousand +dollars now, for I know making an electric moving picture camera isn't +going to be cheap work. Then, when you get ready to start off in your +airship, you'll need more money. I'll be Johnny-on-the-spot all right, +and have it ready for you. Now when do you think you can start?" + +He sat down at a bench, and began filling out a check. + +"Hold on!" cried Tom, amused in spite of himself. "Don't sign that +check, Mr. Period. I'm not going." + +"Not going?" The man's face showed blank amazement. + +"No," went on Tom. "I can't spare the time. I'm sorry, but you'll have +to get some one else." + +"Some one else? But who can I get?" + +"Why, there are plenty who would be glad of the chance." + +"But they can't invent an electric moving picture camera, and, if they +could, they wouldn't know enough to take pictures with it. It's got to +be you or no one, Tom Swift. Look here, I'll make it fifteen thousand +dollars above expenses." + +"No, I'm sorry, but I can't go. My work here keeps me too busy. + +"Oh, pshaw! Now, look here, Tom Swift! Do you know who sent me to see +you?" + +"It was Mr. Nestor, who has a daughter named Mary, I believe. Mr. +Nestor is one of the directors in our company, and one day, when he +told me about you sending a wireless message from Earthquake Island, I +knew you would be the very man for me. So now you see you'll be doing +Mr. Nestor a favor, as well as me, if you go on this trip." + +Tom was somewhat surprised, yet he realized that Mr. Period was +speaking the truth. Mr. Nestor was identified with many new +enterprises. Yet the youth was firm. + +"I really can't go," said our hero. "I'd like to, but I can't. I'd +like to oblige Mr. Nestor, for--well, for more reasons than one," and +Tom blushed slightly. "But it is out of the question. I really can't +go." + +"But you must!" insisted the camera man. "I won't take 'no' for an +answer. You've got to go, Tom Swift, do you hear that? You've go to go?" + +Mr. Period was apparently very much excited. He strode over to Tom and +smote his hands together to emphasize what he said. Then he shook his +finger at Tom, to impress the importance of the matter on our hero. + +"You've just got to go!" he cried. "You're the only one who can help +me, Tom. Do go! I'll pay you well, and--oh, well, I know you don't need +the money, exactly, but--say, you've got to go!" + +In his earnestness Mr. Period laid his hand on Tom's arm. The next +instant something happened. + +With a few big strides Koku was beside the picture man. With great +quickness he grasped Mr. Period by the coat collar, lifted him off his +feet with one hand, and walked over to a window with him, easily +lifting him above the floor. + +With one fling the giant tossed the short, stout gentleman out into a +snow bank, while Tom looked on, too surprised to do anything, even if +he had had the chance. + +"There. You touch Tom Swift again, and I sit on you and keep you under +snow!" cried the giant, while Mr. Period kicked and squirmed about in +the drift, as Tom made a leap forward to help him out. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +TOM MAKES UP HIS MIND + + +"Great Scott!" yelled the picture man. "What in the world happened to +me? Did I get kicked by that mule Boomerang of Eradicate's, that I've +heard so much about? Or was it an earthquake, such as I want to get a +picture of? What happened?" + +He was still floundering about in the deep bank of snow that was just +outside the window. Fortunately the sash had been up, and Koku had +tossed Mr. Period through the open window. Otherwise, had there been +glass, the well-meaning, but unreasoning giant would probably have +thrown his victim through that, and he might have been badly cut. Tom +had the window open for fresh air, as it was rather close in the shop. + +"Why, Koku!" exclaimed the young inventor, as he leaned out of the +window, and extended his hand to the moving picture man to help him out +of the drift. "What do you mean by that? Have you gone crazy?" + +"No, but no one shall lay hands on my master!" declared the giant half +savagely. "I have vowed to always protect you from danger, in return +for what you did for me. I saw this man lay his hand on you. In another +moment he might have killed you, had not Koku been here. There is no +danger when I am by," and he stretched out his huge arms, and looked +ferocious. "I have turned over that man, your enemy!" he added. + +"Yes, you overturned me all right," admitted Mr. Period, as he got to +his feet, and crawled in through the window to the shop again. "I went +head over heels. I'm glad it was clean snow, and not a mud bank, Tom. +What in the world is the matter with him?" + +"I guess he thought you were going to harm me," said Tom in a low +voice, as the picture man came in the shop. "Koku is very devoted to +me, and sometimes he makes trouble," the youth went on. "But he means +it all for the best. I am very sorry for what happened," and Tom aided +Mr. Period in brushing the snow off his garments. "Koku, you must beg +the pardon of this gentleman," Tom directed. + +"What for?" the giant wanted to know. + +"For throwing him into the snow. It is not allowed to do such things in +this country, even though it is in Giant Land. Beg his pardon. + +"I shall not," said the giant calmly, for Tom had taught him to speak +fairly good English, though sometimes he got his words backwards. + +"The man was about to kill you, and I stopped him--I will stop him once +more, though if he does not like the snow, I can throw him somewhere +else." + +"No! No! You must not do it!" cried Tom. "He meant no harm. He is my +friend." + +"I am glad to hear you say that," exclaimed the picture man. "I have +hopes that you will do what I want." + +"He your friend?" asked Koku wonderingly. + +"Certainly; and you must beg his pardon for what you did," insisted Tom. + +"Very well. I am glad you did not hurt yourself," said the giant, and +with that "apology" he stalked out of the room, his feelings evidently +very much disturbed. + +"Ha! Ha!" laughed Mr. Period. "I guess he can't see any one but you, +Tom. But never mind. I know he didn't mean anything, and, as I'm none +the worse I'll forgive him. My necktie isn't spotted; is it?" + +"No, the snow didn't seem to do that any harm," replied the young +inventor, as he looked at the brilliant piece of red silk around Mr. +Period's collar. + +"I am very particular about my neckties," went on the picture man. "I +always wear one color. My friends never forget me then." + +Tom wondered how they could ever forget him, even though he wore no +tie, for his figure and face were such as to not easily be forgotten. + +"I'm glad it's not soiled," went on "Spotty" as he liked to be called. +"Now, Tom, you said you were my friend. Prove it by accepting my offer. +Build that wizard camera, and get me some moving pictures that will be +a sensation. Say you will!" + +He looked appealingly at Tom, and, remembering the rather rude and +unexpected treatment to which Koku had submitted the gentleman, Tom +felt his mind changing. Still he was not yet ready to give in. He +rather liked the idea the more he thought of it, but he felt that he +had other duties, and much to occupy him at home, especially if he +perfected his silent motor. + +"Will you go?" asked Mr. Period, picking up his fountain pen and check +book, that he had laid aside when he walked over to Tom, just before +the giant grasped him. "Say you will." + +The young inventor was silent a moment. He thought over the many +adventures he had gone through--in the caves of ice, in the city of +gold, escaping from the giants, and the red pygmies--He went over the +details of his trips through the air, of the dangers under the seas, of +those he had escaped from on Earthquake Island. Surely he was entitled +to a little rest at home. + +And yet there was a lure to it all. A certain fascination that was hard +to resist. Mr. Period must have seen what was going on in Tom's mind, +for he said: + +"I know you're going. I can see it. Why, it will be just the very thing +you need. You'll get more fame out of this thing than from any of your +other inventions. Come, say you'll do it. + +"I'll tell you what I'll do!" he went on eagerly. "After you make the +camera, and take a lot of films, showing strange and wonderful scenes, +I'll put at the end of each film, next to my picture, your name, and a +statement showing that you took the originals. How's that? Talk about +being advertised! Why you can't beat it! Millions of people will read +your name at the picture shows every night." + +"I am not looking for advertisements," said Tom, with a laugh. + +"Well, then, think of the benefit you will be to science," went on Mr. +Period quickly. "Think of the few people who have seen wild animals as +they are, of those who have ever seen an earthquake, or a volcano in +action. You can go to Japan, and get pictures of earthquakes. They have +them on tap there. And as for volcanoes, why the Andes mountains are +full of 'em. Think of how many people will be thankful to you for +showing them these wonderful scenes." + +"And think of what might happen if I should take a tumble into a crack +in the earth, or down a hot volcano, or fall into a jungle when there +was a fight on among the elephants," suggested Tom. "My airship might +take a notion to go down when I was doing the photographing," he added. + +"No. Nothing like that will happen to Tom Swift," was the confident +answer of the picture man. "I've read of your doings. You don't have +accidents that you can't get the better of. But come, I know you're +thinking of it, and I'm sure you'll go. Let me make you out this check, +sign a contract which I have all ready, and then get to work on the +camera." + +Tom was silent a moment. Then he said: + +"Well, I admit that there is something attractive about it. I hoped I +was going to stay home for a long time. But--" + +"Then you'll go!" cried Mr. Period eagerly. "Here's the money," and he +quickly filled out a check for Tom's first expenses, holding the slip +of paper toward the young inventor. + +"Wait a minute! Hold on!" cried Tom. "Not so fast if you please. I +haven't yet made up my mind." + +"But you will; won't you?" asked Mr. Period. + +"Well, I'll make up my mind, one way or the other," replied the young +man. "I won't say I'll go, but--" + +"I'll tell you what I'll do!" interrupted Mr. Period. "I'm a busy man, +and every second is worth money to me. But I'll wait for you to make up +your mind. I'll give you until to-morrow night. How's that? Fair, isn't +it?" + +"Yes--I think so. I am afraid--" + +"I'm not!" broke in the picture man. "I know you'll decide to go. Think +of the fun and excitement you'll have. Now I've taken up a lot of your +time, and I'm going to leave you alone. I'll be back tomorrow evening +for my answer. But I know you're going to get those moving pictures for +me. Is that giant of yours anywhere about?" he asked, as he looked +cautiously around before leaving the shop. "I don't want to fall into +his hands again." + +"I don't blame you," agreed Tom. "I never knew him to act that way +before. But I'll go to the gate with you, and Koku will behave himself. +I am sorry--" + +"Don't mention it!" broke in the picture man. "It was worth all I +suffered, if you go, and I know you will. Don't trouble yourself to +come out. I can find my way, and if your giant comes after me, I'll +call for help." + +He hurried out before Tom could follow, and, hearing the gate click a +little later, and no call for help coming, our hero concluded that his +visitor had gotten safely away. + +"Well, what am I going to do about it?" mused Tom, as he resumed work +on his silent motor. He had not been long engaged in readjusting some +of the valves, when he was again interrupted. + +This time it was his chum, Ned Newton, who entered, and, as Ned was +well known to the giant, nothing happened. + +"Well, what's up, Tom?" asked Ned. + +"Why, did you notice anything unusual?" asked Tom. + +"I saw Koku standing at the gate a while ago, looking down the road at +a short stout man, with a red tie. Your giant seemed rather excited +about something." + +"Oh, yes. I'll tell you about it," and Tom related the details of Mr. +Period's visit. + +"Are you going to take his offer?" asked Ned. + +"I've got until tomorrow to make up my mind. What would you do, Ned?" + +"Why, I'd take it in a minute, if I knew how to make an electric +camera. I suppose it has to be a very speedy one, to take the kind of +pictures he wants. Wait, hold on, I've just thought of a joke. It must +be a swift camera--catch on--you're Swift, and you make a swift camera; +see the point?" + +"I do," confessed Tom, with a laugh. "Well, Ned, I've been thinking it +over, but I can't decide right away. I will tomorrow night, though." + +"Then I'm coming over, and hear what it is. If you decide to go, maybe +you'll take me along." + +"I certainly will, and Mr. Damon, too." + +"How about the giant?" + +"Well, I guess there'll be room for him. But I haven't decided yet. +Hand me that wrench over there; will you," and then Tom and Ned began +talking about the new apparatus on which the young inventor was working. + +True to his promise Mr. Period called the next evening. He found Tom, +Ned and Mr. Swift in the library, talking over various matters. + +"Well, Tom, have you made up your mind?" asked the caller, when Mrs. +Baggert, the housekeeper, had shown him into the room. "I hope you +have, and I hope it is favorable to me." + +"Yes," said Tom slowly, "I've thought it all over, and I have decided +that I will--" + +At that moment there was a loud shouting outside the house, and the +sound of some one running rapidly through the garden that was just +outside the low library window--a garden now buried deep under snow. + +"What's that?" cried Ned, jumping to his feet. + +"That was Koku's voice," replied Tom, "and I guess he was chasing after +some one." + +"They'll need help if that giant gets hold of them," spoke Mr. Period +solemnly, while the noise outside increased in volume. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +HELD FAST + + +"Here, Tom! Come back! Where are you going?" cried aged Mr. Swift, as +his son started toward the window. + +"I'm going to see what's up, and who it is that Koku is chasing," +replied the young inventor. + +As he spoke he opened the window, which went all the way down to the +floor. He stepped out on a small balcony, put his hand on the railing, +and was about to leap over. Back of him was his father, Mr. Period and +Ned. + +"Come back! You may get hurt!" urged Mr. Swift. He had aged rapidly in +the last few months, and had been obliged to give up most of his +inventive work. Naturally, he was very nervous about his son. + +"Don't worry, dad," replied the youth. "I'm not in much danger when +Koku is around." + +"That's right," agreed the moving picture man. "I'd sooner have that +giant look after me than half a dozen policemen." + +The noise had now grown fainter, but the sound of the pursuit could +still be heard. Koku was shouting in his hearty tones, and there was +the noise of breaking twigs as the chase wound in and out of the garden +shrubbery. + +Tom paused a moment, to let his eyes get somewhat used to the darkness. +There was a crescent moon, that gave a little light, and the snow on +the ground made it possible to notice objects fairly well. + +"See anything?" asked Ned, as he joined his chum on the balcony. + +"No, but I'm going to have a closer look. Here goes!" and Tom leaped to +the ground. + +"I'm with you," added Ned, as he followed. + +Then came another voice, shouting: + +"Dat's de way! Catch him! I'se comm', I is! Ef we gits him we'll tie +him up, an' let Boomerang walk on him!" + +"Here comes Eradicate," announced Tom, with a look back toward his +chum, and a moment later the aged colored man, who had evidently +started on the chase with Koku, but who had been left far behind, swung +totteringly around the corner of the house. + +"Did ye cotch him, Massa Tom?" asked Eradicate. "Did ye cotch de +raskil?" + +"Not yet, Rad. But Koku is after him. Who was he, and what did he do?" + +"Didn't do nuffin yit, Massa Tom, 'case as how he didn't git no +chance," replied the colored man, as he hurried along as rapidly as he +could beside the two youths. "Koku and I was too quick for him. Koku +an' me was a-sittin' in my shack, sort of talkin' togedder, when we +hears a racket neah de chicken house. I'se mighty partial t' de +chickens, an' I didn't want nobody t' 'sturb 'em. Koku was jes' de +same, an' when we hears dat noise, up we jumps, an' gits t' chasm.' He +runned dis way, an' us was arter him, but land lub yo', ole Eradicate +ain't so spry as he uster be an' Koku an' de chicken thief got ahead ob +me. Leastwise he ain't no chicken thief yit, 'case as how he didn't git +in de coop, but he meant t' be one, jes' de same." + +"Are you sure he was after the chickens?" asked Tom, with quick +suspicion in his mind, for, several times of late, unscrupulous persons +had tried to enter his shop, to get knowledge of his valuable +inventions before they were patented. + +"Course he were arter de chickens," replied Eradicate. "But he didn't +git none." + +"Come on, Ned!" cried Tom, breaking into a run. "I want to catch +whoever this was. Did you see him, Rad?" + +"Only jes' had a glimpse ob his back." + +"Well, you go back to the house and tell father and Mr. Period about +it. Ned and I will go on with Koku. I hope to get the fellow." + +"Why, Tom?" asked his chum. + +"Because I think he was after bigger game than chickens. My noiseless +motor, for the new airship, is nearly complete, and it may have been +some one trying to get that. I received an offer from a concern the +other day, who wished to purchase it, and, when I refused to sell, they +seemed rather put out." + +The two lads raced on, while Eradicate tottered back to the house, +where he found Mr. Swift and the picture man awaiting him. + +"I guess he got away," remarked Ned, after he and his chum had covered +nearly the length of the big garden. + +"I'm afraid so," agreed Tom. "I can't hear Koku any more. Still, I'm +not going to give up." + +Pantingly they ran on, and, a little later, they met the big man coming +back. + +"Did he get away?" asked Tom. + +"Yes, Mr. Tom, he scaped me all right." + +"Escaped you mean, Koku. Well, never mind. You did your best." + +"I would like to have hold of him," spoke the giant, as he stretched +out his big arms. + +"Did you know who he was?" inquired Ned. + +"No, I couldn't see his face," and he gave the same description of the +affair as had Eradicate. + +"Was it a full grown man, or some one about my size?" Tom wanted to +know. + +"A man," replied the giant. + +"Why do you ask that?" inquired Ned, as the big fellow went on to +resume his talk with Eradicate, and the two chums turned to go into the +house, after the fruitless chase. + +"Because, I thought it might be Andy Foger," was Tom's reply. "It +would be just like him, but if it was a man, it couldn't be him. Andy's +rather short." + +"Besides, he doesn't live here any more," said Ned. + +"I know, but I heard Sam Snedecker, who used to be pretty thick with +him, saying the other day that he expected a visit from Andy. I hope he +doesn't come back to Shopton, even for a day, for he always tries to +make trouble for me. Well, let's go in, and tell 'em all about our +chase after a chicken thief." + +"And so he got away?" remarked Mr. Swift, when Tom had completed his +story. + +"Yes," answered the young inventor, as he closed, and locked, the low +library window, for there was a chilly breeze blowing. "I think I will +have to rig up the burglar alarm on my shop again. I don't want to take +any chances." + +"Do you remember what we were talking about, when that interruption +came?" asked Mr. Period, after a pause. "You were saying, Tom, that you +had made up your mind, and that was as far as you got. What is your +answer to my offer?" + +"Well," spoke the lad slowly, and with a smile, "I think I will--" + +"Now don't say 'no'"; interrupted the picture man. "If you are going to +say 'no' take five minutes more, or even ten, and think it over +carefully. I want you--" + +"I wasn't going to say 'no,'" replied Tom. "I have decided to accept +your offer, and I'll get right at work on the electrical camera, and +see what I can do in the way of getting moving pictures for you." + +"You will? Say, that's great! That's fine! I knew you would accept, but +I was the least bit afraid you might not, without more urging." + +"Of course," began Tom, "it will take--" + +"Not another word. Just wait a minute," interrupted Mr. Period in his +breezy fashion. "Take this." + +He quickly filled out a check and handed it to Tom. + +"Now sign this contract, which merely says that you will do your best +to get pictures for me, and that you won't do it for any other concern, +and everything will be all right. Sign there," he added, pointing to a +dotted line, and thrusting a fountain pen into Tom's hand. The lad read +over the agreement, which was fair enough, and signed it, and Ned +affixed his name as a witness. + +"Now when can you go?" asked Mr. Period eagerly. + +"Not before Spring, I'm afraid," replied Torn. "I have first to make +the camera, and then my airship needs overhauling if I am to go on such +long trips as will be necessary in case I am to get views of wild +beasts in the jungle." + +"Well, make it as soon as you can," begged Mr. Period. "I can have the +films early next Fall then, and they will be in season for the Winter +runs at the theatres. Now, I'm the busiest man in the world, and I +believe I have lost five hundred dollars by coming here to-night. +Still, I don't regret it. I'm going back now, and I'll expect to hear +from you when you are ready to start. There's my address. Good-bye," +and thrusting a card into Tom's hand he hurried out of the room. + +"Won't you stop all night?" called Mr. Swift after him. + +"Sorry. I'd like to but can't. Got a big contract I must close in New +York to-morrow morning. I've ordered a special train to be at the +Shopton station in half an hour, and I must catch that. Good night!" +and Mr. Period hurried away. + +"Say, he's a hustler all right!" exclaimed Ned. + +"Yes, and I've got to hustle if I invent that camera," added Tom. "It's +got to be a specially fast one, and one that can take pictures from a +long distance. Electricity is the thing to use, I guess." + +"Then you are really going off on this trip. Tom?" asked his father, +rather wistfully. + +"I'm afraid I am," replied his son. "I thought I could stay at home for +a while, but it seems not." + +"I was in hopes you could give me a little time to help me on my +gyroscope invention," went on the aged man. "But I suppose it will keep +until you come back. It is nearly finished." + +"Yes, and I don't like stopping work on my noiseless motor," spoke Tom. +"But that will have to wait, too." + +"Do you know where you are going?" inquired Ned. + +"Well, I'll have to do considerable traveling I suppose to get all the +films he wants. But once I'm started I'll like it I guess. Of course +you're coming, Ned." + +"I hope so." + +"Of course you are!" insisted Tom, as if that settled it. "And I'm sure +Mr. Damon will go also. I haven't seen him in some time. I hope he +isn't ill." + +Tom started work on his Wizard Camera, as he called it, the next +day--that is he began drawing the designs, and planning how to +construct it. Ned helped him, and Koku was on hand in case he was +needed, but there was little he could do, as yet. Tom made an +inspection of his shop the morning after the chicken thief scare, but +nothing seemed to have been disturbed. + +A week passed, and Tom had all the plans drawn for the camera. He had +made several experiments with different forms of electricity for +operating the mechanism, and had decided on a small, but very powerful, +storage battery to move the film, and take the pictures. + +This storage battery, which would be inside the camera, would operate +it automatically. That is, the camera could be set up any place, in the +jungle, or on the desert, it could be left alone, and would take +pictures without any one being near it. Tom planned to have it operate +at a certain set time, and stop at a certain time, and he could set the +dials to make this time any moment of the day or night. For there was +to be a powerful light in connection with the camera, in order that +night views might be taken. Besides being automatic the camera could be +worked by hand. + +When it was not necessary to have the camera operate by the storage +battery, it could be connected to wires and worked by an ordinary set +of batteries, or by a dynamo. This was for use on the airship, where +there was a big electrical machine. I shall tell you more about the +camera as the story proceeds. + +One afternoon Tom was alone in the shop, for he had sent Koku on an +errand, and Eradicate was off in a distant part of the grounds, doing +some whitewashing, which was his specialty. Ned had not come over, and +Mr. Swift, having gone to see some friends, and Mrs. Baggert being at +the store, Tom, at this particular time, was rather isolated. + +He was conducting some delicate electrical experiments, and to keep the +measuring instruments steady he had closed all the windows and doors of +his shop. The young inventor was working at a bench in one corner, and +near him, standing upright, was a heavy shaft of iron, part of his +submarine, wrapped in burlap, and padded, to keep it from rusting. + +"Now," said Tom to himself, as he mixed two kinds of acid in a jar, to +produce a new sort of electrical current, "I will see if this is any +better than the first way in which I did it." + +He was careful about pouring out the powerful stuff, but, in spite of +this, he spilled a drop on his finger. It burned like fire, and, +instinctively, he jerked his hand back. + +The next instant there was a series of happenings. Tom's elbow came in +contact with another jar of acid, knocking it over, and spilling it +into the retort where he had been mixing the first two liquids. There +was a hissing sound, as the acids combined, and a thick, white vapor +arose, puffing into Tom's face, and making him gasp. + +He staggered back, brushed against the heavy iron shaft in the corner, +and it fell sideways against him, knocking him to the floor, and +dropping across his thighs. The padding on it saved him from broken +bones, but the shaft was so heavy, that after it was on him, Tom could +not move. He was held fast on the floor of his shop, unable to use his +legs, and prevented from getting up. + +For a moment Tom was stunned, and then he called: + +"Help! Help! Eradicate! Koku! Help!" + +He waited a moment, but there was only a silence. + +And then Tom smelled a strange odor--an odor of a choking gas that +seemed to smother him. + +"It's the acids!" he cried. "They're generating gas! And I'm held fast +here! The place is closed up tight, and I can't move! Help! Help!" + +But there was no one at hand to aid Tom, and every moment the fumes of +the gas became stronger. Desperately the youth struggled to rid himself +of the weight of the shaft, but he could not. And then he felt his +senses leaving him, for the powerful gas was making him unconscious. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +TOM GETS A WARNING + + +"Bless my shoe buttons!" exclaimed a voice, as a man came toward Tom's +shop, a little later. "Bless my very necktie! This is odd. I go to the +house, and find no one there. I come out here, and not a soul is about. +Tom Swift can't have gone off on another one of his wonderful trips, +without sending me word. I know he wouldn't do that. And yet, bless my +watch and chain, I can't find any one!" + +It was Mr. Damon who spoke, as my old readers have already guessed. He +peered into one of the shop windows, and saw something like a fog +filling the place. + +"That's strange," he went on. "I don't see Tom there, and yet it looks +as if an experiment was going on. I wonder--" + +Mr. Damon heard some one coming up behind him, and turned to see Koku +the giant, who was returning from the errand on which Tom had sent him. + +"Oh, Koku, it's you; is it?" the odd man asked. "Bless my cuff buttons! +Where is Tom?" + +"In shop I guess." + +"I don't see him. Still I had better look. There doesn't seem to be any +one about." + +Mr. Damon opened the shop door, and was met by such an outward rush of +choking gas that he staggered back. + +"Bless my--" he began but he had to stop, to cough and gasp. "There +must have been some sort of an accident," he cried, as he got his lungs +full of fresh air. "A bad accident! Tom could never work in that +atmosphere. Whew!" + +"Accident! What is matter?" cried Koku stepping to the doorway. He, +too choked and gasped, but his was such a strong and rugged nature, and +his lungs held such a supply of air, that it took more than mere gas to +knock him out. He peered in through the wreaths of the acid vapor, and +saw the body of his master, lying on the floor--held down by the heavy +iron. + +In another instant Koku had rushed in, holding his breath, for, now +that he was inside the place, the gas made even him feel weak. + +"Come back! Come back!" cried Mr. Damon. "You'll be smothered! Wait +until the gas escapes!" + +"Then Mr. Tom die!" cried the giant. "I get him--or I no come out." + +With one heave of his powerful right arm, Koku lifted the heavy shaft +from Tom's legs. Then, gathering the lad up in his left arm, as if he +were a baby, Koku staggered out into the fresh air, almost falling with +his burden, as he neared Mr. Damon, for the giant was, well-nigh +overcome. + +"Bless my soul!" cried the odd man. "Is he--is he--" + +He did not finish the sentence, but, as Koku laid Tom down on the +overcoat of Mr. Damon, which the latter quickly spread on the snow, the +eccentric man put his hand over the heart of the young inventor. + +"It beats!" he murmured. "He's alive, but very weak. We must get a +doctor at once. I'll do what I can. There's no time to spare. Bless +my--" + +But Mr. Damon concluded that there was no time for blessing anything, +and so he stopped short. + +"Carry him up to the house, Koku," he said. "I know where there are +some medicines, and I'll try to revive him while we're waiting for the +doctor Hurry!" + +Tom was laid on a lounge, and, just then, Mrs. Baggert came in. + +"Telephone for the doctor!" cried Mr. Damon to the housekeeper, who +kept her nerve, and did not get excited. "I'll give Tom some ammonia, +and other stimulants, and see if I can bring him around. Koku, get me +some cold water." + +The telephone was soon carrying the message to the doctor, who promised +to come at once. Koku, in spite of his size, was quick, and soon +brought the water, into which Mr. Damon put some strong medicine, that +he found in a closet. Tom's eyelids fluttered as the others forced some +liquid between his lips. + +"He's coming around!" cried the eccentric man. "I guess he'll be all +right, Koku." + +"Koku glad," said the giant simply, for he loved Tom with a deep +devotion. + +"Yes, Koku, if it hadn't been for you, though, I don't believe that he +would be alive. That was powerful gas, and a few seconds more in there +might have meant the end of Tom. I didn't see him lying on the floor, +until after you rushed in. Bless my thermometer! It is very strange." + +They gave Tom more medicine, rubbed his arms and legs, and held ammonia +under his nose. Slowly he opened his eyes, and in a faint voice asked: + +"Where--am--I?" + +"In your own house," replied Mr. Damon, cheerfully. "How do you feel?" + +"I'm--all--right--now," said Tom slowly. He, felt his strength coming +gradually back, and he remembered what had happened, though he did not +yet know how he had been saved. The doctor came in at this moment, with +a small medical battery, which completed the restorative work begun by +the others. Soon Tom could sit up, though he was still weak and rather +sick. + +"Who brought me out?" he asked, when he had briefly told how the +accident occurred. + +"Koku did," replied Mr. Damon. "I guess none of the rest of us could +have lifted the iron shaft from your legs." + +"It's queer how that fell," said Tom, with a puzzled look on his face. +"I didn't hit it hard enough to bring it down. Beside, I had it tied to +nails, driven into the wall, to prevent just such an accident as this. +I must see about it when I get well." + +"Not for a couple of days," exclaimed the doctor grimly. "You've got +to stay in bed a while yet. You had a narrow escape, Tom Swift." + +"Well, I'm glad I went to Giant Land," said the young inventor, with a +wan smile. "Otherwise I'd never have Koku," and he looked +affectionately at the big man, who laughed happily. In nature Koku was +much like a child. + +Mr. Swift came home a little later, and Ned Newton called, both being +very much surprised to hear of the accident. As for Eradicate, the poor +old colored man was much affected, and would have sat beside Tom's bed +all night, had they allowed him. + +Our hero recovered rapidly, once the fumes of the gas left his system, +and, two days later, he was able to go out to the shop again. At his +request everything had been left just as it was after he had been +brought out. Of course the fumes of the gas were soon dissipated, when +the door was opened, and the acids, after mingling and giving off the +vapor, had become neutralized, so that they were now harmless. + +"Now I'm going to see what made that shaft fall," said Tom to Ned, as +the two chums walked over to the bench where the young inventor had +been working. "The tap I gave it never ought to have brought it down." + +Together they examined the thin, but strong, cords that had been passed +around the shaft, having been fastened to two nails, driven into the +wall. + +"Look!" cried Tom, pointing to one of the cords. + +"What is it?" asked Ned. + +"The strands were partly cut through, so that only a little jar was +enough to break the remaining ones," went on Tom. "They've been cut +with a knife, too, and not frayed by vibration against the nail, as +might be the case. Ned, someone has been in my shop, meddling, and he +wanted this shaft to fall. This is a trick!" + +"Great Scott, Tom! You don't suppose any one wanted that shaft to fall +on you; do you?" + +"No, I don't believe that. Probably some one wanted to damage the +shaft, or he might have thought it would topple over against the bench, +and break some of my tools, instruments or machinery. I do delicate +experiments here, and it wouldn't take much of a blow to spoil them. +That's why those cords were cut." + +"Who did it? Do you think Andy Foger--" + +"No, I think it was the man Koku thought was a chicken thief, and whom +we chased the other night. I've got to be on my guard. I wonder if--" + +Tom was interrupted by the appearance of Koku, who came out of the shop +with a letter the postman had just left. + +"I don't know that writing very well, and yet it looks familiar," said +Tom, as he tore open the missive. "Hello, here's more trouble!" he +exclaimed as he hastily read it. + +"What's up now?" asked Ned. + +"This is from Mr. Period, the picture man," went on the young inventor. +"It's a warning." + +"A warning?" + +"Yes. He says: + + +"'Dear Tom. Be on your guard. I understand that a rival moving picture +concern is after you. They want to make you an offer, and get you away +from me. But I trust you. Don't have anything to do with these other +fellows. And, at the same time, don't give them a hint as to our plans. +Don't tell them anything about your new camera. There is a lot of +jealousy and rivalry in this business and they are all after me. +They'll probably come to see you, but be on your guard. They know that +I have been negotiating with you. Remember the alarm the other night.'" + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +TRYING THE CAMERA + + +"Well, what do you think of that?" cried Ned, as his chum finished. + +"It certainly isn't very pleasant," replied Tom. "I wonder why those +chaps can't let me alone? Why don't they invent cameras of their own? +Why are they always trying to get my secret inventions?" + +"I suppose they can't do things for themselves," answered Ned. "And +then, again, your machinery always works, Tom, and some that your +rivals make, doesn't." + +"Well, maybe that's it," admitted our hero, as he put away the letter. +"I will be on the watch, just as I have been before. I've got the +burglar alarm wires adjusted on the shop now, and when these rival +moving picture men come after me they'll get a short answer." + +For several days nothing happened, and Tom and Ned worked hard on the +Wizard Camera. It was nearing completion, and they were planning, soon, +to give it a test, when, one afternoon, two strangers, in a powerful +automobile, came to the Swift homestead. They inquired for Tom, and, +as he was out in the shop, with Ned and Koku, and as he often received +visitors out there, Mrs. Baggert sent out the two men, who left their +car in front of the house. + +As usual, Tom had the inner door to his shop locked, and when Koku +brought in a message that two strangers would like to see the young +inventor, Tom remarked: + +"I guess it's the rival picture men, Ned. We'll see what they have to +say." + +"Which of you is Tom Swift?" asked the elder of the two men, as Tom and +Ned entered the front office, for our hero knew better than to admit +the strangers to the shop. + +"I am," replied Tom. + +"Well, we're men of business," went on the speaker, "and there is no +use beating about the bush. I am Mr. Wilson Turbot, and this is my +partner, Mr. William Eckert. We are in the business of making moving +picture films, and I understand that you are associated with Mr. Period +in this line. 'Spotty' we call him." + +"Yes, I am doing some work for Mr. Period," admitted Tom, cautiously. + +"Have you done any yet?" + +"No, but I expect to." + +"What kind of a camera are you going to use?" asked Mr. Eckert eagerly. + +"I must decline to answer that," replied Tom, a bit stiffly. + +"Oh, that's all right," spoke Mr. Turbot, good naturedly. "Only +'Spotty' was bragging that you were making a new kind of film for him, +and we wondered if it was on the market." + +"We are always looking for improvements," added Mr. Eckert. + +"This camera isn't on the market," replied Tom, on his guard as to how +he answered. + +The two men whispered together for a moment, and then Mr. Turbot said: + +"Well, as I remarked, we're men of business, and there's no use beating +about the bush. We've heard of you, Tom Swift, and we know you can do +things. Usually, in this world, every man has his price, and we're +willing to pay big to get what we want. I don't know what offer Mr. +Period made to you, but I'll say this: We'll give you double what he +offered, for the exclusive rights to your camera, whenever it's on the +market, and we'll pay you a handsome salary to work for us." + +"I'm sorry, but I can't consider the offer," replied Tom firmly. "I +have given my word to Mr. Period. I have a contract with him, and I +cannot break it." + +"Offer him three times what Period did," said Mr. Eckert, in a hoarse +whisper that Tom heard. + +"It would be useless!" exclaimed our hero. "I wouldn't go back on my +word for a hundred times the price I am to get. I am not in this +business so much for the money, as I am for the pleasure of it." + +The men were silent a moment. There were ugly looks on their faces. +They looked sharply at Tom and Ned. Then Mr. Eckert said: + +"You'll regret this, Tom Swift. We are the biggest firm of moving +picture promoters in the world. We always get what we want." + +"You won't get my camera," replied Tom calmly. + +"I don't know about that!" exclaimed Mr. Turbot, as he made a hasty +stride toward Tom, who stood in front of the door leading to the +shop--the shop where his camera, almost ready for use, was on a bench. +"I guess if we--" + +"Koku!" suddenly called Tom. + +The giant stepped into the front office. He had been standing near the +door, inside the main shop. Mr. Turbot who had stretched forth his +hand, as though to seize Tom, and his companion, who had advanced +toward Ned, fairly jumped back in fright at the sight of the big man. + +"Koku," went on Tom, in even tones, "just show these gentlemen to the +front door--and lock it after them," he added significantly, as he +turned back into the shop, followed by Ned. + +"Yes, Mr. Tom," answered the giant, and then, with his big hand, and +brawny fist, he gently turned the two men toward the outer door. They +were gasping in surprise as they looked at the giant. + +"You'll be sorry for this, Tom Swift!" exclaimed Mr. Turbot. "You'll +regret not having taken our offer. This Period chat is only a small +dealer. We can do better by you. You'll regret--" + +"You'll regret coming here again," snapped Tom, as he closed the door +of his shop, leaving Koku to escort the baffled plotters to their auto. +Shortly afterward Tom and Ned heard the car puffing away. + +"Well, they came, just as Mr. Period said they would," spoke Tom, +slowly. + +"Yes, and they went away again!" exclaimed Ned with a laugh. "They had +their trip for nothing. Say, did you see how they stared at Koku?" + +"Yes, he's a helper worth having, in cases like these." + +Tom wrote a full account of what had happened and sent it to Mr. +Period. He received in reply a few words, thanking him for his loyalty, +and again warning him to be on his guard. + +In the meanwhile, work went on rapidly on the Wizard Camera. Briefly +described it was a small square box, with a lens projecting from it. +Inside, however, was complicated machinery, much too complicated for me +to describe. Tom Swift had put in his best work on this wonderful +machine. As I have said, it could be worked by a storage battery, by +ordinary electric current from a dynamo, or by hand. On top was a new +kind of electric light. This was small and compact, but it threw out +powerful beams. With the automatic arrangement set, and the light +turned on, the camera could be left at a certain place after dark, and +whatever went on in front of it would be reproduced on the moving roll +of film inside. + +In the morning the film could be taken out, developed, and the pictures +thrown on a screen in the usual way, familiar to all who have been in a +moving picture theatre. With the reproducing machines Tom had nothing +to do, as they were already perfected. His task had been to make the +new-style camera, and it was nearly completed. + +A number of rolls of films could be packed into the camera, and they +could be taken out, or inserted, in daylight. Of course after one film +had been made, showing any particular scene any number of films could +be made from this "master" one. Just as is done with the ordinary +moving picture camera. Tom had an attachment to show when one roll was +used, and when another needed inserting. + +For some time after the visit of the rival moving picture men, Tom was +on his guard. Both house and shop were fitted with burglar alarms, but +they did not ring. Eradicate and Koku were told to be on watch, but +there was nothing for them to do. + +"Well," remarked Tom to Ned, one afternoon, when they had both worked +hard, "I think it's about finished. Of course it needs polishing, and +there may be some adjusting to do, but my camera is now ready to take +pictures--at least I'm going to give it a test." + +"Have you the rolls of films?" + +"Yes, half a dozen of 'em And I'm going to try the hardest test first." + +"Which one is that?" + +"The night test. I'm going to place the camera out in the yard, facing +my shop. Then you and I, and some of the others, will go out, pass in +front of it, do various stunts, and, in the morning we'll develop the +films and see what we have." + +"Why, are you going to leave the camera out, all night?" + +"Sure. I'm going to give it the hardest kind of a test." + +"But are you and I going to stay up all night to do stunts in front of +it?" + +"No, indeed. I'm going to let it take what ever pictures happen to come +along to be taken after we get through making some special early ones. +You see my camera will be a sort of watch dog, only of course it won't +catch any one--that is, only their images will be caught on the film. + +"Oh, I see," exclaimed Ned, and then he helped Tom fix the machine for +the test. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +WHAT THE CAMERA CAUGHT + + +"Well, is she working, Tom?" asked our hero's chum, a little later, +when they had set the camera up on a box in the garden. It pointed +toward the main shop door, and from the machine came a clicking sound. +The electric light was glowing. + +"Yes, it's all ready," replied Tom. "Now just act as if it wasn't +there. You walk toward the shop. Do anything you please. Pretend you +are coming in to see me on business. Act as if it was daytime. I'll +stand here and receive you. Later, I'll get dad out here, Koku and +Eradicate. I wish Mr. Period was here to see the test, but perhaps it's +just as well for me to make sure it works before he sees it." + +"All right, Tom, here I come." + +Ned advanced toward the shop. He tried to act as though the camera was +not taking pictures of him, at the rate of several a second, but he +forgot himself, and turned to look at the staring lens. Then Tom, with +a laugh, advanced to meet him, shaking hands with him. Then the lads +indulged in a little skylarking. They threw snowballs at each other, +taking care, however to keep within range of the lens. Of course when +Tom worked the camera himself, he could point it wherever he wanted to, +but it was now automatic. + +Then the lads went to the shop, and came out again. They did several +other things. Later Koku, and Eradicate did some "stunts," as Tom +called them. Mr. Swift, too, was snapped, but Mrs. Baggert refused to +come out. + +"Well, I guess that will do for now," said Tom, as he stopped the +mechanism. "I've just thought of something," he added. "If I leave the +light burning, it will scare away, before they got in front of the +lens, any one who might come along. I'll have to change that part of +it." + +"How can you fix it?" asked Ned. + +"Easily. I'll rig up some flash lights, just ordinary photographing +flashlights, you know. I'll time them to go off one after the other, +and connect them with an electric wire to the door of my shop." + +"Then your idea is--" began Ned. + +"That some rascals may try to enter my shop at night. Not this +particular night, but any night. If they come to-night we'll be ready +for them." + +"An' can't yo'-all take a picture ob de chicken coop?" asked Eradicate. +"Dat feller may come back t' rob mah hens." + +"With the lens pointing toward the shop," spoke Tom, "it will also take +snap shots of any one who tries to enter the coop. So, if the chicken +thief does come, Rad, we'll have a picture of him." + +Tom and Ned soon had the flashlights in place, and then they went to +bed, listening, at times, for the puff that would indicate that the +camera was working. But the night passed without incident, rather to +Tom's disappointment. However, in the morning, he developed the film of +the first pictures taken in the evening. Soon they were dry enough to +be used in the moving picture machine, which Tom had bought, and set up +in a dark room. + +"There we are!" he cried, as the first images were thrown on the white +screen. "As natural as life, Ned! My camera works all right!" + +"That's so. Look! There's where I hit you with a snowball!" cried his +chum, as the skylarking scene was reached. + +"Mah goodness!" cried Eradicate, when he saw himself walking about on +the screen, as large as life. "Dat shorely am wonderful." + +"It is spirits!" cried Koku, as he saw himself depicted. + +"I wish we had some of the other pictures to show," spoke Tom. "I mean +some unexpected midnight visitors." + +For several nights in succession the camera was set to "snap" any one +who might try to enter the shop. The flashlights were also in place. +Tom and Ned, the latter staying at his chum's house that week, were +beginning to think they would have their trouble for their pains. But +one night something happened. + +It was very dark, but the snow on the ground made a sort of glow that +relieved the blackness. The camera had been set as usual, and Tom and +Ned went to bed. + +It must have been about midnight when they were both awakened by +hearing the burglar alarm go off. At the same time there were several +flashes of fire from the garden. + +"There she goes!" cried Ned. + +"Yes, they're trying to get into the shed," added Tom, as a glance at +the burglar-alarm indicator on the wall of the room, showed that the +shop door was being tried. "Come on!" + +"I'm with you!" yelled Ned. + +They lost little time getting into their clothes, for they had laid +them out in readiness for putting on quickly. Down the stairs they +raced, but ere they reached the garden they heard footsteps running +along the wall toward the road. + +"Who's there?" cried Tom, but there was no answer. + +"Koku! Eradicate!" yelled Ned. + +"Yais, sah, I'se comm'!" answered the colored man, and the voice of the +giant was also heard. The flashlights had ceased popping before this, +and when the two lads and their helpers had reached the shop, there was +no one in sight. + +"The camera's there all right!" cried Tom in relief as he picked it up +from the box. "Now to see what it caught. Did you see anything of the +fellows, Koku, or Eradicate?" Both said they had not, but Eradicate, +after examining the chicken house door by the aid of a lighted match, +cried out: + +"Somebody's been tryin' t' git in heah, Massa Tom. I kin see where de +do's been scratched." + +"Well, maybe we'll have the picture for you to look at in the morning," +said Tom. + +The films were developed in the usual way in the morning, but the +pictures were so small that Tom could not make out the features or +forms of the men. And it was plain that at least three men had been +around the coop and shop. + +By the use of alcohol and an electric fan Tom soon had the films dry +enough to use. Then the moving picture machine was set up in a dark +room, and all gathered to see what would be thrown on the screen, +greatly enlarged. + +First came several brilliant flashes of light, and then, as the +entrance to the shop loomed into view, a dark figure seemed to walk +across the canvas. But it did not stop at the shop door. Instead it +went to the chicken coop, and, as the man reached that door, he began +working to get it open. Of course it had all taken place in a few +seconds, for, as soon as the flashlights went off, the intruders had +run away. But they had been there long enough to have their pictures +taken. + +The man at the chicken coop turned around as the lights flashed, and he +was looking squarely at the camera. Of course this made his face very +plain to the audience, as Tom turned the crank of the reproducing +machine. + +"Why, it's a colored man!" cried Ned in surprise. + +"Yes, I guess it's only an ordinary chicken thief, after all," remarked +Tom. + +There was a gasp from Eradicate. + +"Fo' de land sakes!" he cried. "De raskil! Ef dat ain't mah own second +cousin, what libs down by de ribber! An' to t'ink dat Samuel 'Rastus +Washington Jackson Johnson, mah own second cousin, should try t' rob +mah chicken coop! Oh, won't I gib it t' him!" + +"Are you sure, Rad?" asked Tom. + +"Suah? Sartin I'se suah, Massa Tom," was the answer as the startled +colored man on the screen stared at the small audience. "I'd know dat +face ob his'n anywhere." + +"Well, I guess he's the only one we caught last night," said Tom, as +the disappointed chicken thief ran away, and so out of focus. But the +next instant there came another series of flashlight explosions on the +screen, and there, almost as plainly as if our friends were looking at +them, they saw two men stealthily approaching the shop. They, too, as +the chicken thief had done, tried the door, and then, they also, +startled by the flashes, turned around. + +"Look!" cried Ned. + +"Great Scott!" exclaimed Tom. "Those are the two rivals of Mr. Period! +They are Mr. Turbot and Mr. Eckert!" + +"Same men I pushed out!" cried Koku, much excited. + +There was no doubt of it, and, as the images faded from the screen, +caused by the men running away, Tom and Ned realized that their rivals +had tried to put their threat into execution--the threat of making Tom +wish he had taken their offer. + +"I guess they came to take my camera,--but, instead the camera took +them," said the young inventor grimly. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +PHOTOS FROM THE AIRSHIP + + +"Well, Tom, how is it going?" asked a voice at the door of the shop +where the young inventor was working. He looked up quickly to behold +Mr. Nestor, father of Mary, in which young lady, as I have said, Tom +was much interested. "How is the moving picture camera coming on?" + +"Pretty good, Mr. Nestor. Come in. I guess Koku knew you all right. I +told him to let in any of my friends, but I have to keep him there on +guard." + +"So I understand. They nearly got in the other night, but I hear that +your camera caught them." + +"Yes, that proved that the machine is a success, even if we didn't +succeed in arresting the men." + +"Did you try?" + +"Yes, I sent copies of the film, showing Turbot and Eckert trying to +break into my shop, to Mr. Period, and he had enlarged photographs +made, and went to the police. They said it was rather flimsy evidence +on which to arrest anybody, and so they didn't act. However, we sent +copies of the pictures to Turbot and Eckert themselves, so they know +that we know they were here, and I guess they'll steer clear of me +after this." + +"I guess so, Tom," agreed Mr. Nestor with a laugh. "But what about the +chicken thief?" + +"Oh, Eradicate attended to his second cousin. He went to see him, +showed him a print from the film, and gave him to understand that he'd +be blown up with dynamite, or kicked by Boomerang, if he ever came +around here again, and so Samuel 'Rastus Washington Jackson Johnson +will be careful about visiting strange chicken coops, after this." + +"I believe you, Tom. But how is the camera coming on?" + +"Very well. I am making a few changes in it, and I expect to get my +biggest airship in readiness for the trip in about a week, and then +I'll try taking pictures from her. But I understand that you are +interested in Mr. Period's business, Mr. Nestor?" + +"Yes, I own some stock in the company, and, Tom, that's what I came +over to see you about. I need a vacation. Mary and her mother are going +away this Spring for a long visit, and I was wondering if you couldn't +take me with you on the trips you will make to get moving pictures for +our concern." + +"Of course I can, Mr. Nestor. I'll be glad to do it." + +"And there is another thing, Tom," went on Mr. Nestor, soberly. "I've +got a good deal of my fortune tied up in this moving picture affair. I +want to see you win out--I don't want our rivals to get ahead of us." + +"They shan't get ahead of us." + +"You see, Tom, it's this way. There is a bitter fight on between our +concern and that controlled by our rivals. Each is trying to get the +business of a large chain of moving picture theatres throughout the +United States. These theatre men are watching us both, and the +contracts for next season will go to the concern showing the best line +of films. If our rivals get ahead of us--well, it will just about ruin +our company,--and about ruin me too, I guess." + +"I shall do my very best," answered our hero. + +"Is Mr. Damon going along?" + +"Well, I have just written to ask him. I sent the letter yesterday. + +"Doesn't he know what you contemplate?" + +"Not exactly. You see when he came, that time I was overcome by the +fumes from the acids, everything was so upset that I didn't get a +chance to tell him. He's been away on business ever since, but returned +yesterday. I certainly hope that he goes with us. Ned Newton is +coming, and with you, and Koku and myself, it will be a nicer party." + +"Then you are going to take Koku?" + +"I think I will. I'm a little worried about what these rival moving +picture men might do, and if I get into trouble with them, my giant +helper would come in very useful, to pick one up and throw him over a +tree top, for instance." + +"Indeed, yes," agreed Mr. Nestor, with a laugh. "But I hope nothing +like that happens." + +"Nothing like that happens?" suddenly asked a voice. "Bless my +bookcase! but there always seems to be something going on here. What's +up now, Tom Swift?" + +"Nothing much, Mr. Damon," replied our hero, as he recognized his odd +friend. "We were just talking about moving pictures, Mr. Damon, and +about you. Did you get my letter?" + +"I did, Tom." + +"And are you going with us?" + +"Tom, did you ever know me to refuse an invitation from you? I guess +not! Of course I'm going. But, for mercy sakes, don't tell my wife! She +mustn't know about it until the last minute, and then she'll be so +surprised, when I tell her, that she won't think of objecting. Don't +let her know." + +Tom laughed, and promised, and then the three began talking of the +prospective trip. After a bit Ned Newton joined the party. + +Tom showed the two men how his new camera worked. He had made several +improvements on it since the first pictures were taken, and now it was +almost perfect. Mr. Period had been out to see it work, and said it was +just the apparatus needed. + +"You can get films with that machine," he said, "that will be better +than any pictures ever thrown on a screen. My fortune will be made, +Tom, and yours too, if you can only get pictures that are out of the +ordinary. There will be some hair-raising work, I expect, but you can +do it." + +"I'll try," spoke Tom. "I have--" + +"Hold on! I know what you are going to say," interrupted Mr. Period. +"You are going to say that you've gone through some strenuous times +already. I know you have, but you're going to have more soon. I think +I'll send you to India first." + +"To India!" exclaimed Tom, for Mr. Period had spoken of that as if it +was but a journey downtown. + +"Yes, India. I want a picture of an elephant drive, and if you can get +pictures of the big beasts in a stampede, so much the better. Then, +too, the Durbar is on now, and that will make a good film. How soon can +you start for Calcutta?" + +"Well, I've got to overhaul the airship," said Tom. "That will take +about three weeks. The camera is practically finished. I can leave in a +month, I guess." + +"Good. We'll have fine weather by that time. Are you going all the way +by your airship?" + +"No, I think it will be best to take that apart, ship it by steamer, +and go that way ourselves. I can put the airship together in India, and +then use it to get to any other part of Europe, Asia or Africa you +happen to want pictures from." + +"Good! Well, get to work now, and I'll see you again." + +In the days that followed, Tom and Ned were kept busy. There was +considerable to do on the airship, in the way of overhauling it. This +craft was Tom's largest, and was almost like the one in which he had +gone to the caves of ice, where it was wrecked. It had been, however, +much improved. + +The craft was a sort of combined dirigible balloon, and aeroplane, and +could be used as either. There was a machine on board for generating +gas, to use in the balloon part of it, and the ship, which was named +the Flyer, could carry several persons. + +"Bless my shoe laces!" cried Mr. Damon one day as he looked at Koku. +"If we take him along in the airship, will we be able to float, Tom?" + +"Oh, yes. The airship is plenty big enough. Besides, we are not going +to take along a very large party, and the camera is not heavy. Oh, +we'll be all right. I suppose you'll be on hand to-morrow, Mr. Damon?" + +"To-morrow? What for?" + +"We're going to take the picture machine up in the airship, and get +some photos from the sky. I expect to make some films from high in the +air, as well as some in the regular way, on the ground, and I want a +little practice. Come around about two o'clock, and we'll have a trial +flight." + +"All right. I will. But don't let my wife know I'm going up in an +airship again. She's read of so many accidents lately, that she's +nervous about having me take a trip." + +"Oh, I won't tell," promised Tom with a laugh, and he worked away +harder than ever, for there were many little details to perfect. The +weather was now getting warm, as there was an early spring, and it was +pleasant out of doors. + +The moving picture camera was gotten in readiness. Extra rolls of films +were on hand, and the big airship, in which they were to go up, for +their first test of taking pictures from high in the air, had been +wheeled out of the shed. + +"Are you going up very far?" asked Mr. Nestor of Tom, and the young +inventor thought that Mary's father was a trifle nervous. He had not +made many flights, and then only a little way above the ground, with +Tom. + +"Not very high," replied our hero. "You see I want to get pictures that +will be large, and if I'm too far away I can't do it." + +"Glad to hear it," replied Mr. Nestor, with a note of relief in his +voice. "Though I suppose to fall a thousand feet isn't much different +from falling a hundred when you consider the results." + +"Not much," admitted Tom frankly. + +"Bless my feather bed!" cried Mr. Damon. "Please don't talk of falling, +when we're going up in an airship. It makes me nervous." + +"We'll not fall!" declared Tom confidently. + +Mr. Period sent his regrets, that he could not be present at the trial, +stating in his letter that he was the busiest man in the world, and +that his time was worth about a dollar a minute just at present. He, +however, wished Tom all success. Tom's first effort was to sail along, +with the lens of the camera pointed straight toward the earth. He would +thus get, if successful, a picture that, when thrown on the screen, +would give the spectators the idea that they were looking down from a +moving balloon. For that reason Tom was not going to fly very high, as +he wanted to get all the details possible. + +"All aboard!" cried the young inventor, when he had seen to it that his +airship was in readiness for a flight. The camera had been put aboard, +and the lens pointed toward earth through a hole in the main cabin +floor. All who were expected to make the trip with Tom were on hand, +Koku taking the place of Eradicate this time, as the colored man was +too aged and feeble to go along. + +"All ready?" asked Ned, who stood in the steering tower, with his hand +on the starting lever, while Tom was at the camera to see that it +worked properly. + +"All ready," answered the young inventor, and, an instant later, they +shot upward, as the big propellers whizzed around. + +Tom at once started the camera to taking pictures rapidly, as he wanted +the future audience to get a perfect idea of how it looked to go up in +a balloon, leaving the earth behind. Then as the Flyer moved swiftly +over woods and fields, Tom moved the lens from side to side, to get +different views. + +"Say! This is great!" cried Mr. Nestor, to whom air-riding was much of +a novelty. "Are you getting good pictures, Tom?" + +"I can't tell until we develop them. But the machine seems to be +working all right. I'm going to sail back now, and get some views of +our own house from up above." + +They had sailed around the town of Shopton, to the neighboring +villages, over woods and fields. Now they were approaching Shopton +again. + +"Bless my heart!" suddenly exclaimed Mr. Damon, who was looking toward +the earth, as they neared Tom's house. + +"What is it?" asked our hero, glancing up from the picture machine, the +registering dial of which he was examining. + +"Look there! At your shop, Tom! There seems to be a lot of smoke coming +from it!" + +They were almost over Tom's shop now, and, as Mr. Damon had said, there +was considerable smoke rolling above it. + +"I guess Eradicate is burning up papers and trash," was Ned's opinion. + +Tom looked to where the camera pointed, he was right over his shop now, +and could see a dense vapor issuing from the door. + +"That isn't Eradicate!" cried the young inventor. "My shop is on fire! +I've got to make a quick drop, and save it! There are a lot of valuable +models, and machines in there! Send us down, Ned, as fast as she'll go!" + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +OFF FOR INDIA + + +"Bless my hose reel!" cried Mr. Damon, as the airship took a quick +lurch toward the earth. "Things are always happening to you, Tom Swift! +Your shop on fire! How did it happen?" + +"Look!" suddenly cried Ned, before Tom had a chance to answer. +"There's a man running away from the shop, Tom!" + +All saw him, and, as the airship rushed downward it could be seen that +he was a fellow dressed in ragged garments, a veritable tramp. + +"I guess that fire didn't happen," said Tom significantly. "It was +deliberately set. Oh, if we can only get there before it gains too much +headway!" + +"I like to catch that fellow!" exclaimed Koku, shaking his big fist at +the retreating tramp. "I fix him!" + +On rushed the airship, and the man who had probably started the fire, +glanced up at it. Tom suddenly turned the lens of his Wizard Camera +toward him. The mechanism inside, which had been stopped, started +clicking again, as the young inventor switched on the electric current. + +"What are you doing?" cried Ned, as he guided the airship toward the +shop, whence clouds of smoke were rolling. + +"Taking his picture," replied Tom. "It may come in useful for evidence." + +But he was not able to get many views of the fellow, for the latter +must have suspected what was going on. He quickly made a dive for the +bushes, and was soon lost to sight. Tom shut off his camera. + +"Bless my life preserver!" cried Mr. Damon. "There comes your father, +Tom, and Mrs. Baggert! They've got buckets! They're going to put out +the fire!" + +"Why don't they think to use the hose?" cried the young inventor, for +he had his shop equipped with many hose lines, and an electrically +driven pump. "The hose! The hose, dad!" shouted Tom, but it is doubtful +if his father or Mrs. Baggert heard him, for the engine of the airship +was making much noise. However, the two with the buckets looked up, and +waved their hands to those on the Flyer. + +"There's Eradicate!" yelled Ned. "He's got the hose all right!" The +colored man was beginning to unreel a line. + +"That's what it needs!" exclaimed Tom. "Now there's some chance to save +the shop." + +"We'll be there ourselves to take a hand in a few seconds!" cried Mr. +Damon, forgetting to bless anything. + +"The scoundrel who started this fire, and those back of him, ought to +be imprisoned for life!" declared Mr. Nestor. + +A moment later Ned had landed the airship within a short distance of +the shop. In an instant the occupants of the craft had leaped out, and +Tom, after a hasty glance to see that his valuable camera was safe, +dashed toward the building crying: + +"Never mind the pails, dad! Use the hose! there's a nozzle at the back +door. Go around there, and play the water on from that end." + +Eradicate, with his line of hose, had disappeared into the shop through +the front door, and the others pressed in after him, heedless of the +dense smoke. + +"Is it blazing much, Rad?" cried Tom. + +"Can't see no blaze at all, Massa Tom," replied the colored man. +"Dere's a heap of suffin in de middle ob de flo', an' dat's what's +raisin' all de rumpus." + +They all saw it a moment later, a smoldering heap of rags and paper on +the concrete floor of the shop. Eradicate turned his hose on it, there +was a hissing sound, a cloud of steam arose, and the fire was +practically out, though much smoke remained. + +"Jove! that was a lucky escape!" exclaimed Tom, as he looked around +when the vapor had partly cleared away. "No damage done at all, as far +as I can see. I wonder what the game was? Did you see anything of a +tramp around here?" he asked of his father. + +"No, Tom. I have been busy in the house. So has Mrs. Baggert. Suddenly +she called my attention to the smoke coming from the door, and we ran +out." + +"I seen it, too," added Eradicate. "I was doin' some whitewashin', an' +I run up as soon as I could." + +"We saw the tramp all right, but he got away," said Tom, and he told +how he had taken pictures of him. "I don't believe it would be much use +to look for him now, though." + +"Me look," spoke Koku significantly, as he hurried off in the direction +taken by the tramp. He came back later, not having found him. + +"What do you think of it, Tom?" asked Ned, when the excitement had +calmed down, and the pile of burned rags had been removed. It was found +that oil and chemicals had been put on them to cause a dense smoke. + +"I think it was the work of those fellows who are after my camera," +replied the young inventor. "They are evidently watching me, and when +they saw us all go off in the airship they thought probably that the +coast was clear." + +"But why should they start a fire?" + +"I don't know, but probably to create a lot of smoke, and excitement, +so that they could search, and not be detected. Maybe the fellow after +he found that the camera was gone, wanted to draw those in the house +out to the shop, so he could have a clear field to search in my room +for any drawings that would give him a clew as to how my machine works. +They certainly did not want to burn the shop, for that pile of rags +could have smoldered all day on the concrete floor, without doing any +harm. Robbery was the motive, I think." + +"The police ought to be notified," declared Mr. Nestor. "Develop those +pictures, Tom, and I'll take the matter up with the police. Maybe they +can identify the tramp from the photographs." + +But this proved impossible. Tom had secured several good films, not +only in the first views he took, giving the spectators the impression +that they were going up in an airship, but also those showing the shop +on fire, and the tramp running away, were very plain. + +The police made a search for the incendiary, but of course did not find +him. Mr. Period came to Shopton, and declared it was his belief that +his rivals, Turbot and Eckert, had had a hand in the matter. But it was +only a suspicion, though Tom himself believed the same thing. Still +nothing could be accomplished. + +"The thing to do, now that the camera works all right, is for you to +hit the trail for India at once," suggested the picture man. "They +won't follow you there. Get me some pictures of the Durbar, of +elephants being captured, of tiger fights, anything exciting." + +"I'll do my--" began Tom. + +"Wait, I'm not through," interrupted the excitable man. "Then go get +some volcanoes, earthquakes--anything that you think would be +interesting. I'll keep in touch with you, and cable occasionally. Get +all the films you can. When will you start?" + +"I can leave inside of two weeks," replied Tom. + +"Then do it, and, meanwhile, be on your guard." + +It was found that a few changes were needed on the camera, and some +adjustments to the airship. Another trial flight was made, and some +excellent pictures taken. Then Tom and his friends prepared to take the +airship apart, and pack it for shipment to Calcutta. It was to go on +the same steamer as themselves, and of course the Wizard Camera would +accompany Tom. He took along many rolls of films, enough, he thought, +for many views. He was also to send back to Mr. Period from time to +time, the exposed rolls of film, so they could be developed, and +printed in the United States, as Tom would not have very good +facilities for this on the airship, and to reproduce them there was +almost out of the question. Still he did fit up a small dark room +aboard the Flyer, where he could develop pictures if he wished. + +There was much to be done, but hard work accomplished it, and finally +the party was ready to start for India. Tom said good-bye to Mary +Nestor, of course, and her father accompanied our hero from the Nestor +house to the Swift homestead, where the start was to take place. + +Eradicate bade his master a tearful good-bye, and there was moisture in +the eyes of Mr. Swift, as he shook hands with his son. + +"Take care of yourself, Tom," he said. "Don't run too many risks. This +moving picture taking isn't as easy as it sounds. It's more than just +pointing your camera at things. Write if you get a chance, or send me a +message." + +Tom promised, and then bade farewell to Mrs. Baggert. All were +assembled, Koku, Mr. Damon, who blessed everything he saw, and some +things he did not, Ned, Mr. Nestor and Tom. The five were to go by +train to New York, there to go aboard the steamer. + +Their journey to the metropolis was uneventful. Mr. Period met them at +the steamship dock, after Tom had seen to it that the baggage, and the +parts of the airship were safely aboard. + +"I wish I were going along!" exclaimed the picture man. "It's going to +be a great trip. But I can't spare the time. I'm the busiest man in the +world. I lose about a thousand dollars just coming down to see you off, +but it's a good investment. I don't mind it. Now, Tom, good luck, and +don't forget, I want exciting views." + +"I'll try--" began our hero. + +"Wait, I know what you're going to say!" interrupted Mr. Period. +"You'll do it, of course. Well, I must be going. I will-- Great +Scott!" and Mr. Period interrupted himself. "He has the nerve to come +here!" + +"Who?" asked Tom. + +"Wilson Turbot, the rascal! He's trying to balk me at the last minute, +I believe. I'm going to see what he means!" and with this, the excited +Mr. Period rushed down the gangplank, toward the man at whom he had +pointed--one of the men who had tried to buy Tom's picture taking +camera. + +A moment later the steamer's whistle blew, the last belated passenger +rushed up the gangplank, it was drawn in, and the vessel began to move +away from the dock. Tom and his friends were on their way to India, and +the last glimpse they had of Mr. Period was as he was chasing along the +pier, after Mr. Turbot. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +UNEXPECTED EXCITEMENT + + +"Well, what do you know about that, Tom?" asked Ned, as they stood on +deck watching the chase. "Isn't he the greatest ever--Mr. Period, I +mean?" + +"He certainly is. I'd like to see what happens when he catches that +Turbot chap." + +"Bless my pocket handkerchief!" cried Mr. Damon. "I don't believe he +will. Mr. Period's legs aren't long enough for fast running." + +"Those scoundrels were after us, up to the last minute," spoke Mr. +Nestor, as the ship moved farther out from the dock. Tom and his +friends could no longer see the excitable picture man after his rival, +but there was a commotion in the crowd, and it seemed as if he had +caught the fellow. + +"Well, we're free of him now," spoke the young inventor, with a breath +of relief. "That is, unless they have set some one else on our trail," +and he looked carefully at the passengers near him, to detect, if +possible, any who might look like spies in the pay of the rival moving +picture concern, or any suspicious characters who might try to steal +the valuable camera, that was now safely locked in Tom's cabin. Our +hero, however, saw no one to worry about. He resolved to remain on his +guard. + +Friends and relatives were waving farewells to one another, and the +band was playing, as the big vessel drew out into the North, or Hudson, +river, and steamed for the open sea. + +Little of interest marked the first week of the voyage. All save Koku +had done much traveling before, and it was no novelty to them. The +giant, however, was amused and delighted with everything, even the most +commonplace things he saw. He was a source of wonder to all the other +passengers, and, in a way, he furnished much excitement. + +One day several of the sailors were on deck, shifting one of the heavy +anchors. They went about it in their usual way, all taking hold, and +"heaving" together with a "chanty," or song, to enliven their work. But +they did not make much progress, and one of the mates got rather +excited about it. + +"Here, shiver my timbers!" he cried. "Lively now! Lay about you, and +get that over to the side!" + +"Yo! Heave! Ho!" called the leader of the sailor gang. + +The anchor did not move, for it had either caught on some projection, +or the men were not using their strength. + +"Lively! Lively!" cried the mate. + +Suddenly Koku, who was in the crowd of passengers watching the work, +pushed his way to where the anchor lay. With a powerful, but not rough +action, he shoved the sailors aside. Then, stooping over, he took a +firm grip of the big piece of iron, planted his feet well apart on the +deck, and lifted the immense mass in his arms. There was a round of +applause from the group of passengers. + +"Where you want him?" Koku calmly asked of the mate, as he stood +holding the anchor. + +"Blast my marlin spikes!" cried the mate. "I never see the like of this +afore! Put her over there, shipmate. If I had you on a voyage or two +you'd be running the ship, instead of letting the screw push her along. +Put her over there," and he indicated where he wanted the anchor. + +Koku calmly walked along the deck, laid the anchor down as if it was an +ordinary weight, and passed over to where Tom stood looking on in +amused silence. There were murmurs of surprise from the passengers at +the giant's strength, and the sailors went forward much abashed. + +"Say, I'd give a good bit to have a bodyguard like that," exclaimed a +well-known millionaire passenger, who, it was reported, was in constant +fear of attacks, though they had never taken place. "I wonder if I +could get him." + +He spoke to Tom about it, but our hero would not listen to a +proposition to part with Koku. Besides, it is doubtful if the simple +giant would leave the lad who had brought him away from his South +American home. But, if Koku was wonderfully strong, and, seemingly +afraid of nothing, there were certain things he feared. + +One afternoon, for the amusement of the passengers, a net was put +overboard, sunk to a considerable depth, and hauled up with a number of +fishes in it. Some of the finny specimens were good for eating, and +others were freaks, strange and curious. + +Koku was in the throng that gathered on deck to look at the haul. +Suddenly a small fish, but very hideous to look at, leaped from the net +and flopped toward the giant. With a scream of fear Koku jumped to one +side, and ran down to his stateroom. He could not be induced to come on +deck until Tom assured him that the fishes had been disposed of. Thus +Koku was a mixture of giant and baby. But he was a general favorite on +the ship, and often gave exhibitions of his strength. + +Meanwhile Tom and his friends had been on the lookout for any one who +might be trailing them. But they saw no suspicious characters among the +passengers, and, gradually, they began to feel that they had left their +enemies behind. + +The weather was pleasant, and the voyage very enjoyable. Tom and the +others had little to do, and they were getting rather impatient for the +time to come when they could put the airship together, and sail off +over the jungle, to get moving pictures of the elephants. + +"Have you any films in the camera now?" asked Ned of his chum on day, +as they sat on deck together. + +"Yes, it's all ready for instant use. Even the storage battery is +charged. Why?" + +"Oh, I was just wondering. I was thinking we might somehow see +something we could take pictures of." + +"Not much out here," said Tom, as he looked across the watery expanse. +As he did so, he saw a haze of smoke dead ahead. "We'll pass a steamer +soon," he went on, "but that wouldn't make a good picture. It's too +common." + +As the two lads watched, the smoke became blacker, and the cloud it +formed grew much larger. + +"They're burning a lot of coal on that ship," remarked Ned. "Must be +trying for a speed record." + +A little later a sailor stationed himself in the crow's nest, and +focused a telescope on the smoke. An officer, on deck, seemed to be +waiting for a report from the man aloft. + +"That's rather odd," remarked Ned. "I never knew them to take so much +interest in a passing steamer before; and we've gone by several of +late." + +"That's right," agreed Tom. "I wonder--" + +At that moment the officer, looking up, called out: + +"Main top!" + +"Aye, aye, sir," answered the sailor with the glass. "She's a small +steamer, sir, and she's on fire!" + +"That's what I feared. Come down. I'll tell the captain. We must crowd +on all steam, and go to the rescue." + +"Did you hear that?" cried Ned to Tom, as the officer hurried to the +bridge, where the captain awaited him. "A steamer on fire at sea, Tom! +why don't you--" + +"I'm going to!" interrupted the young inventor, as he started for his +cabin on the run. "I'm going to get some moving pictures of the rescue! +That will be a film worth having." + +A moment later the Belchar, the vessel on which our friends had +embarked, increased her speed, while sudden excitement developed on +board. + +As the Belchar approached the burning steamer, which had evidently seen +her, and was making all speed toward her, the cloud of smoke became +more dense, and a dull flame could be seen reflected in the water. + +"She's going fast!" cried Mr. Nestor, as he joined Ned on deck. + +"Bless my insurance policy!" cried Mr. Damon. "What a strange +happening! Where's Tom Swift?" + +"Gone for his camera," answered his chum. "He's going to get some +pictures of the rescue." + +"All hands man the life boats!" cried an officer, and several sailors +sprang to the davits, ready to lower the boats, when the steamers +should be near enough together. + +Up on deck came Tom, with his wonderful camera. + +"Here you go, Ned!" he called. "Give me a hand. I'm going to start the +film now." + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +AN ELEPHANT STAMPEDE + + +"Lower away!" + +"Stand by the life boats!" + +"Let go! Pull hearty!" + +These and other commands marked the beginning of the rescue, as the +sailors manned the davit-falls, and put the boats into the water. The +burning steamer had now come to a stop, not far away from the Belchar, +which was also lay-to. There was scarcely any sea running, and no wind, +so that the work of rescuing was not difficult from an ordinary +standpoint. But there was grave danger, because the fire on the doomed +vessel was gaining rapidly. + +"That's oil burning," remarked an officer, and it seemed so, from the +dense clouds of smoke that rolled upward. + +"Is she working, Tom?" asked Ned, as he helped his chum to hold the +wonderful camera steady on the rail, so that a good view of the burning +steamer could be had. + +"Yes, the film is running. Say, I wonder if they'll get 'em all off?" + +"Oh, I think so. There aren't many passengers. I guess it's a tramp +freighter." + +They could look across the gap of water, and see the terrified +passengers and crew crowding to the rail, holding out their hands +appealingly to the brave sailors who were lustily and rapidly, pulling +toward them in life boats. + +At times a swirl of smoke would hide those on the doomed vessel from +the sight of the passengers on the Belchar, and on such occasions the +frightened screams of women could be heard. Once, as the smoke cleared +away, a woman, with a child in her arms, giving a backward glance +toward the flames that were now enveloping the stern of the vessel, +attempted to leap overboard. + +Many hands caught her, however, and all this was registered on the film +of Tom's camera, which was working automatically. As the two vessels +drifted along, Tom and Ned shifted the lens so as to keep the burning +steamer, and the approaching lifeboats, in focus. + +"There's the first rescue!" cried Ned, as the woman who had attempted +to leap overboard, was, with her child, carefully lowered into a boat. +"Did you get that, Tom?" + +"I certainly did. This will make a good picture. I think I'll send it +back to Mr. Period as soon as we reach port." + +"Maybe you could develop it on board here, and show it. I understand +there's a dark room, and the captain said one of his officers, who used +to be in the moving picture business, had a reproducing machine." + +"Then that's what I'll do!" cried Tom. "I'll have our captain charge +all the Belchar passengers admission, and we'll get up a fund for the +fire sufferers. They'll probably lose all their baggage." + +"That will be great!" exclaimed Ned. + +The rescue was now in full swing, and, in a short time all the +passengers and crew had been transferred to the life boats. Tom got a +good picture of the captain of the burning steamer being the last to +leave his vessel. Then the approaching life boats, with their loads of +sailors, and rescued ones, were caught on the films. + +"Are you all off?" cried the captain of the Belchar to the unfortunate +skipper of the doomed ship. + +"All off, yes, thank you. It is a mercy you were at hand. I have a +cargo of oil. You had better stand off, for she'll explode in a few +minutes." + +"I must get a picture of that!" declared Tom as the Belchar got under +way again. "That will cap the climax, and make a film that will be hard +to beat." + +A few moments later there was a tremendous explosion on the tramp +oiler. A column of wreckage and black smoke shot skyward, and Tom +secured a fine view of it. Then the wreck disappeared beneath the +waves, while the rescuing steamer sailed on, with those who had been +saved. They had brought off only the things they wore, for the fire had +occurred suddenly, and spread rapidly. Kind persons aboard the Belchar +looked after the unfortunates. Luckily there was not a large passenger +list on the tramp. And the crew was comparatively small, so it was not +hard work to make room for them, or take care of them, aboard the +Belchar. + +Tom developed his pictures, and produced them in one of the large +saloons, on a machine he borrowed from the man of whom Ned had spoken. +A dollar admission was charged, and the crowd was so large that Tom had +to give two performances. The films, showing the burning steamer and +the rescue, were excellent, and enough money was realized to aid, most +substantially, the unfortunate passengers and crew. + +A few days later a New York bound steamer was spoken, and on it Tom +sent the roll of developed films to Mr. Period, with a letter of +explanation. + +I will not give all the details of the rest of the voyage. Sufficient +to say that no accidents marred it, nor did Tom discover any suspicious +characters aboard. In due time our friends arrived at Calcutta, and +were met by an agent of Mr. Period, for he had men in all quarters of +the world, making films for him. + +This agent took Tom and his party to a hotel, and arranged to have the +airship parts sent to a large open shed, not far away, where it could +be put together. The wonderful scenes in the Indian city interested Tom +and his companions for a time, but they had observed so many strange +sights from time to time that they did not marvel greatly. Koku, +however, was much delighted. He was like a child. + +"What are you going to do first?" asked Ned, when they had recovered +from the fatigue of the ocean voyage and had settled themselves in the +hotel. + +"Put the airship together," replied our hero, "and then, after getting +some Durbar pictures, we'll head for the jungle. I want to get some +elephant pictures, showing the big beasts being captured." + +Mr. Period's agent was a great help to them in this. He secured native +helpers, who aided Tom in assembling the airship, and in a week or two +it was ready for a flight. The wonderful camera, too, was looked over, +and the picture agent said he had never seen a better one. + +"It can take the kind of pictures I never could," he said. "I get +Calcutta street scenes for Mr. Period, and occasionally I strike a good +one. But I wish I had your chance." + +Tom invited him to come along in the airship, but the agent, who only +looked after Mr. Period's interests as a side issue, could not leave +his work. + +The airship was ready for a flight, stores and provisions had been put +on board, there was enough gasoline for the motor, and gas for the +balloon bag, to carry the Flyer thousands of miles. The moving picture +camera had been tested after the sea voyage, and had been found to work +perfectly. Many rolls of films were taken along. Tom got some fine +views of the Durbar of India, and his airship created a great sensation. + +"Now I guess we're all ready for the elephants," said Tom one day as he +came back from an inspection of the airship as it rested in the big +shed. "We'll start to-morrow morning, and head for the jungle." + +Amid the cries from a throng of wondering and awed natives, and with +the farewells of Mr. Period's agent ringing in their ears, Tom and his +party made an early start. The Flyer rose like a bird, and shot across +the city, while on the house tops many people watched the strange +sight. Tom did not start his camera working, as Mr. Period's agent said +he had made many pictures of the Indian city, and even one taken from +an airship, would not be much of a novelty. + +Tom had made inquiries, and learned that by a day's travel in his +airship (though it would have been much longer ordinarily) he could +reach a jungle where elephants might be found. Of course there was +nothing certain about it, as the big animals roamed all over, being in +one district one day, and on the next, many miles off. + +Gradually the city was left behind, and some time later the airship was +sailing along over the jungle. After the start, when Ned and Tom, with +Mr. Damon helping occasionally, had gotten the machinery into proper +adjustment, the Flyer almost ran herself. Then Tom took his station +forward, with his camera in readiness, and a powerful spyglass at hand, +so that he might see the elephants from a distance. + +He had been told that, somewhere in the district for which he was +headed, an elephant drive was contemplated. He hoped to be on hand to +get pictures of it, and so sent his airship ahead at top speed. + +On and on they rode, being as much at ease in the air as they would +have been if traveling in a parlor car. They did not fly high, as it +was necessary to be fairly close to the earth to get good pictures. + +"Well, I guess we won't have any luck to-day," remarked Ned, as night +approached, and they had had no sight of the elephants. They had gone +over mile after mile of jungle, but had seen few wild beasts in +sufficient numbers to make it worth while to focus the camera on them. + +"We'll float along to-night," decided Tom, "and try again in the +morning." + +It was about ten o'clock the next day, when Ned, who had relieved Tom +on watch, uttered a cry: + +"What is it?" asked his chum, as he rushed forward. "Has anything +happened?" + +"Lots!" cried Ned. "Look!" He pointed down below. Tom saw, crashing +through the jungle, a big herd of elephants. Behind them, almost +surrounding them, in fact, was a crowd of natives in charge of white +hunters, who were driving the herd toward a stockade. + +"There's a chance for a grand picture!" exclaimed Tom, as he got the +camera ready. "Take charge of the ship, Ned. Keep her right over the +big animals, and I'll work the camera." + +Quickly he focused the lens on the strange scene below him. There was +a riot of trumpeting from the elephants. The beaters and hunters +shouted and yelled. Then they saw the airship and waved their hands to +Tom and his friends, but whether to welcome them, or warn them away, +could not be told. + +The elephants were slowly advancing toward the stockade. Tom was taking +picture after picture of them, when suddenly as the airship came lower, +in response to a signal to Ned from the young inventor, one of the huge +pachyderms looked up, and saw the strange sight. He might have taken it +for an immense bird. At any rate he gave a trumpet of alarm, and the +next minute, with screams of rage and fear, the elephants turned, and +charged in a wild stampede on those who were driving them toward the +stockade. + +"Look!" cried Ned. "Those hunters and natives will be killed!" + +"I'm afraid so!" shouted Tom, as he continued to focus his camera on +the wonderful sight. + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +THE LION FIGHT + + +Crashing through the jungle the huge beasts turned against those who +had, been driving them on toward the stockade. With wild shouts and +yells, the hunters and their native helpers tried to turn back the +elephant tide, but it was useless. The animals had been frightened by +the airship, and were following their leader, a big bull, that went +crashing against great trees, snapping them off as if they were pipe +stems. + +"Say, this is something like!" cried Ned, as he guided the airship over +the closely packed body of elephants, so Tom could get good pictures, +for the herd had divided, and a small number had gone off with one of +the other bulls. + +"Yes, I'll get some great pictures," agreed Tom, as he looked in +through a red covered opening in the camera, to see how much film was +left. + +The airship was now so low down that Tom, and the others, could easily +make out the faces of the hunters, and the native helpers. One of the +hunters, evidently the chief, shaking his fist at our hero, cried: + +"Can't you take your blooming ship out of the way, my man? It's scaring +the beasts, and we've been a couple of weeks on this drive. We don't +want to lose all our work. Take your bloody ship away!" + +"I guess he must be an Englishman," remarked Mr. Nestor, with a laugh. + +"Bless my dictionary, I should say so," agreed Mr. Damon. "Bloody, +blooming ship! The idea!" + +"Well, I suppose we have scared the beasts," said Tom. "We ought to get +out of the way. Put her up, Ned, and we'll come down some distance in +advance." + +"Why, aren't you going to take any more views of the elephants?" + +"Yes, but I've got enough of a view from above. Besides, I've got to +put in a fresh reel of film, and I might as well get out of their sight +to do it. Maybe that will quiet them, and the hunters can turn them +back toward the stockade. If they do, I have another plan." + +"What is it?" his chum wanted to know. + +"I'm going to make a landing, set up my camera at the entrance to the +stockade, and get a series of pictures as the animals come in. I think +that will be a novelty. + +"That certainly will," agreed Mr. Nestor. "I am sure Mr. Period will +appreciate that. But won't it be dangerous, Tom?" + +"I suppose so, but I'm getting used to danger," replied our hero, with +a laugh. + +Ned put the ship high into the air, as Tom shut off the power from the +camera. Then the Flyer was sent well on in advance of the stampede of +elephants, so they could no longer see it, or hear the throb of the +powerful engines. Tom hoped that this would serve to quiet the immense +creatures. + +As the travelers flew on, over the jungle, they could still hear the +racket made by the hunters and beaters, and the shrill trumpeting of +the elephants, as they crashed through the forest. + +Tom at once began changing the film in the camera, and Ned altered the +course of the airship, to send it back toward the stockade, which they +had passed just before coming upon the herd of elephants. + +I presume most of my readers know what an elephant drive is like. A +stockade, consisting of heavy trees, is made in the jungle. It is like +the old fashioned forts our forefathers used to make, for a defense +against the Indians. There is a broad entrance to it, and, when all is +in readiness, the beaters go out into the jungle, with the white +hunters, to round up the elephants. A number of tame pachyderms are +taken along to persuade the wild ones to follow. + +Gradually the elephants are gathered together in a large body, and +gently driven toward the stockade. The tame elephants go in first, and +the others follow. Then the entrance is closed, and all that remains to +be done is to tame the wild beasts, a not very easy task. + +"Are you all ready?" asked Ned, after a bit, as he saw Tom come forward +with the camera. + +"Yes, I'm loaded for some more excitement. You can put me right over +the stockade now, Ned, and when we see the herd coming back I'll go +down, and take some views from the ground." + +"I think they've got 'em turned," said Mr. Damon. "It sounds as if they +were coming back this way." + +A moment later they had a glimpse of the herd down below. It was true +that the hunters had succeeded in stopping the stampede, and once more +the huge beasts were going in the right direction. + +"There's a good place to make a landing," suggested Tom, as he saw a +comparatively clear place in the jungle. "It's near the stockade, and, +in case of danger, I can make a quick get-away." + +"What kind of danger are you looking for?" asked Ned, as he shifted the +deflecting rudder. + +"Oh, one of the beasts might take a notion to chase me." + +The landing was made, and Tom, taking Ned and Mr. Nestor with him, and +leaving the others to manage the airship in case a quick flight would +be necessary, made his way along a jungle trail to the entrance to the +stockade. He carried his camera with him, for it was not heavy. + +On came the elephants, frightened by the shouts and cries of the +beaters, and the firing of guns. The young inventor took his place near +the stockade entrance, and, as the elephants advanced through the +forest, tearing up trees and bushes, Tom got some good pictures of them. + +Suddenly the advance of the brutes was checked, and the foremost of +them raised their trunks, trumpeted in anger, and were about to turn +back again. + +"Get away from that bloomin' gate!" shouted a hunter to Tom. "You're +scaring them as bad as your airship did." + +"Yes, they won't go in with you there!" added another man. + +Tom slipped around the corner of the stockade, out of sight, and from +that vantage point he took scores of pictures, as the tame animals led +the wild ones into the fenced enclosure. Then began another wild scene +as the gate was closed. + +The terrified animals rushed about, trying in vain to find a way of +escape. Tom managed to climb up on top of the logs, and got some +splendid pictures. But this was nearly his undoing. For, just as the +last elephant rushed in, a big bull charged against the stockade, and +jarred Tom so that he was on the point of falling. His one thought was +about his camera, and he looked to see if he could drop it on the soft +grass, so it would not be damaged. + +He saw Koku standing below him, the giant having slipped out of the +airship, to see the beasts at closer range. + +"Catch this, Koku!" cried Tom, tossing the big man his precious camera, +and the giant caught it safely. But Tom's troubles were not over. A +moment later, as the huge elephant again rammed the fence, Tom fell +off, but fortunately outside. Then the large beast, seeing a small +opening in the gate that was not yet entirely closed, made for it. A +moment later he was rushing straight at Tom, who was somewhat stunned +by his fall, though it was not a severe one. + +"Look out!" yelled Ned. + +"Take a tree, Tom!" cried Mr. Nestor. + +The elephant paid no attention to any one but Tom, whom he seemed to +think had caused all his trouble. The young inventor dashed to one +side, and then started to run toward the airship, for which Ned and Mr. +Nestor were already making. The elephant hunters at last succeeded in +closing the gate, blocking the chance of any more animals to escape. + +"Run, Tom! Run!" yelled Ned, and Tom ran as he had never run before. +The elephant was close after him though, crashing through the jungle. +Tom could see the airship just ahead of him. + +Suddenly he felt something grasp him from behind. He thought surely it +was the elephant's trunk, but a quick glance over his shoulder showed +him the friendly face of Koku, the giant. + +"Me run for you," said Koku, as he caught Tom up under one arm, and, +carrying the camera under the other, he set off at top speed. Now Koku +could run well at times, and this time he did. He easily outdistanced +the elephant, and, a little later, he set Tom down on the deck of the +airship, with the camera beside him. Then Ned and Mr. Nestor came up +panting, having run to one side. + +"Quick!" cried Tom. "We must get away before the elephant charges the +Flyer." + +"He has stopped," shouted Mr. Nestor, and it was indeed so. The big +beast, seeing again the strange craft that had frightened him before, +stood still for a moment, and then plunged off into the jungle, +trumpeting with rage. + +"Safe!" gasped Tom, as he looked at his camera to see if it had been +damaged. It seemed all right. + +"Bless my latch key!" cried Mr. Damon. "This moving picture business +isn't the most peaceful one in the world." + +"No, it has plenty of perils," agreed Mr. Nestor. + +"Come on, let's get out of here while we have the chance," suggested +Tom. "There may be another herd upon us before we know it." + +The airship was soon ascending, and Tom and his companions could look +down and see the tame elephants in the stockade trying to calm the wild +ones. Then the scene faded from sight. + +"Well, if these pictures come out all right I'll have some fine ones," +exclaimed Tom as he carried his camera to the room where he kept the +films. "I fancy an elephant drive and stampede are novelties in this +line." + +"Indeed they are," agreed Mr. Nestor. "Mr. Period made no mistake when +he picked you out, Tom, for this work. What are you going to try for +next?" + +"I'd like to get some lion and tiger pictures," said the young +inventor. "I understand this is a good district for that. As soon as +those elephants get quieted down, I'm going back to the stockade and +have a talk with the hunters." + +This he did, circling about in the airship until nearly evening. When +they again approached the stockade all was quiet, and they came to +earth. A native showed them where the white hunters had their +headquarters, in some bungalows, and Tom and his party were made +welcome. They apologized for frightening the big beasts, and the +hunters accepted their excuses. + +"As long as we got 'em, it's all right," said the head man, "though for +awhile, I didn't like your bloomin' machine." Tom entertained the +hunters aboard his craft, at which they marvelled much, and they gave +him all the information they had about the lions and tigers in the +vicinity. + +"You won't find lions and tigers in herds, like elephants though," said +the head hunter. "And you may have to photograph 'em at night, as then +is when they come out to hunt, and drink." + +"Well, I can take pictures at night," said Tom, as he showed his camera +apparatus. + +The next day, in the airship, they left for another district, where, so +the natives reported, several lions had been seen of late. They had +done much damage, too, carrying off the native cattle, and killing +several Indians. + +For nearly a week Tom circled about in his airship, keeping a sharp +lookout down below for a sign of lions that he might photograph them. +But he saw none, though he did get some pictures of a herd of Indian +deer that were well worth his trouble. + +"I think I'll have to try for a night photograph," decided Tom at last. +"I'll locate a spring where wild beasts are in the habit of coming, set +the camera with the light going, and leave it there." + +"But will the lions come up if they see the light?" asked Ned. + +"I think so," replied his chum. "I'll take a chance, anyhow. If that +doesn't work then I'll hide near by, and see what happens." + +"Bless my cartridge belt!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't mean that; do +you Tom?" + +"Of course. Come to think of it, I'm not going to leave my camera out +there for a lion to jump on, and break. As soon as I get a series of +pictures I'll bring it back to the ship, I think." + +By inquiry among the natives they learned the location of a spring +where, it was said, lions were in the habit of coming nightly to drink. + +"That's the place I want!" cried Tom. + +Accordingly the airship was headed for it, and one evening it came +gently to earth in a little clearing on the edge of the jungle, while +Koku, as was his habit, got supper. + +After the meal Tom and Ned set the camera, and then, picking out a good +spot nearby, they hid themselves to wait for what might happen. The +lens was focused on the spring, and the powerful electric light set +going. It glowed brightly, and our hero thought it might have the +effect of keeping the beasts away, but Tom figured that, after they had +looked at it for a while, and seen that it did not harm them, they +would lose their suspicions, and come within range of his machine. + +"The camera will do the rest," he said. In order not to waste films +uselessly Tom arranged a long electric wire, running it from the camera +to where he and Ned were hid. By pressing a button he could start or +stop the camera any time he wished, and, as he had a view of the spring +from his vantage point, he could have the apparatus begin taking +pictures as soon as there was some animal within focus. + +"Well, I'm getting stiff," said Ned, after an hour or so had passed in +silent darkness, the only light being the distant one on the camera. + +"So am I," said Tom. + +"I don't believe anything will come to-night," went on his chum. "Let's +go back and--" + +He stopped suddenly, for there was a crackling in the underbrush, and +the next moment the jungle vibrated to the mighty roar of a lion. + +"He's coming!" hoarsely whispered Tom. + +Both lads glanced through the trees toward the camera, and, in the +light, they saw a magnificent, tawny beast standing on the edge of the +spring. Once more he roared, as if in defiance, and then, as if +deciding that the light was not harmful, he stooped to lap up the water. + +Hardly had he done so than there was another roar, and a moment later a +second lion leaped from the dense jungle into the clearing about the +spring. The two monarchs of the forest stood there in the glare of the +light, and Tom excitedly pressed the button that started the shutter to +working, and the film to moving back of the lens. + +There was a slight clicking sound in the camera, and the lions turned +startedly. Then both growled again, and the next instant they sprang at +each other, roaring mightily. + +"A fight!" cried Tom. "A lion fight, and right in front of my camera! +It couldn't be better. This is great! This will be a film." + +"Quiet!" begged Ned. "They'll hear you, and come for us. I don't want +to be chewed up!" + +"No danger of them hearing me!" cried Tom, and he had to shout to be +heard above the roaring of the two tawny beasts, as they bit and clawed +each other, while the camera took picture after picture of them. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +A SHOT IN TIME + + +"Tom, did you ever see anything like it in your life?" + +"I never did, Ned! It's wonderful! fearful! And to think that we are +here watching it, and that thousands of people will see the same thing +thrown on a screen. Oh, look at the big one. The small lion has him +down!" + +The two lads, much thrilled, crouched down behind a screen of bushes, +watching the midnight fight between the lions. On the airship, not far +distant, there was no little alarm, for those left behind heard the +terrific roars, and feared Tom and Ned might be in some danger. But the +lions were too much occupied with their battle, to pay any attention to +anything else, and no other wild beasts were likely to come to the +spring while the two "kings" were at each other. + +It was a magnificent, but terrible battle. The big cats bit and tore at +each other, using their terrific claws and their powerful paws, one +stroke of which is said to be sufficient to break a bullock's back. +Sometimes they would roll out of the focus of the camera, and, at such +times, Tom wished he was at the machine to swing the lens around, but +he knew it would be dangerous to move. Then the beasts would roll back +into the rays of light again, and more pictures of them would be taken. + +"I guess the small one is going to win!" said Tom, after the two lions +had fought for ten minutes, and the bigger one had been down several +times. + +"He's younger," agreed Ned, "and I guess the other one has had his +share of fights. Maybe this is a battle to see which one is to rule +this part of the jungle." + +"I guess so," spoke the young inventor, as he pressed the button to +stop the camera, as the lions rolled out of focus. "Oh, look!" he cried +a moment later, as the animals again rolled into view. Tom started the +camera once more. "This is near the end," he said. + +The small lion had, by a sudden spring, landed on the back of his +rival. There was a terrific struggle, and the older beast went down, +the younger one clawing him terribly. Then, so quickly did it happen +that the boys could not take in all the details, the older lion rolled +over and over, and rid himself of his antagonist. Quickly he got to his +feet, while the smaller lion did the same. They stood for a moment +eyeing each other, their tails twitching, the hair on their backs +bristling, and all the while they uttered frightful roars. + +An instant later the larger beast sprang toward his rival. One terrible +paw was upraised. The small lion tried to dodge, but was not quick +enough. Down came the paw with terrific force, and the boys could hear +the back bone snap. Then, clawing his antagonist terribly, as he lay +disabled, the older lion, with a roar of triumph, lapped up water, and +sprang off through the jungle, leaving his dying rival beside the +spring. + +"That's the end," cried Tom, as the small lion died, and the young +inventor pressed the button stopping his camera. There was a rustle in +the leaves back of Tom and Ned, and they sprang up in alarm, but they +need not have feared, for it was only Koku, the giant, who, with a +portable electrical torch, had come to see how they had fared. + +"Mr. Tom all right?" asked the big man, anxiously. + +"Yes, and I got some fine pictures. You can carry the camera back now, +Koku. I think that roll of film is pretty well filled." + +The three of them looked at the body of the dead lion, before they went +back to the airship. I have called him "small," but, in reality, the +beast was small only in comparison with his rival, who was a tremendous +lion in size. I might add that of all the pictures Tom took, few were +more highly prized than that reel of the lion fight. + +"Bless my bear cage!" cried Mr. Damon, as Tom came back, "you certainly +have nerve, my boy." + +"You have to, in this business," agreed Tom with a laugh. "I never did +this before, and I don't know that I would want it for a steady +position, but it's exciting for a change." + +They remained near the "lion spring" as they called it all night, and +in the morning, after Koku had served a tasty breakfast, Tom headed the +airship for a district where it was said there were many antelope, and +buffaloes, also zebus. + +"I don't want to get all exciting pictures," our hero said to Mr. +Nestor. "I think that films showing wild animals at play, or quietly +feeding, will be good." + +"I'm sure they will," said Mary's father. "Get some peaceful scenes, by +all means." + +They sailed on for several days, taking a number of pictures from the +airship, when they passed over a part of the country where the view was +magnificent, and finally, stopping at a good sized village they learned +that, about ten miles out, was a district where antelope abounded. + +"We'll go there," decided Tom, "and I'll take the camera around with me +on a sort of walking trip. In that way I'll get a variety of views, and +I can make a good film." + +This plan was followed out. The airship came to rest in a beautiful +green valley, and Ned and Tom, with Mr. Damon, who begged to be taken +along, started off. + +"You can follow me in about half an hour, Koku," said Tom, "and carry +the camera back. I guess you can easily pick up our trail." + +"Oh, sure," replied the giant. Indeed, to one who had lived in the +forest, as he had all his life, before Tom found him, it was no +difficult matter to follow a trail, such as the three friends would +leave. + +Tom found signs that showed him where the antelopes were in the habit +of passing, and, with Ned and Mr. Damon, stationed himself in a +secluded spot. + +He had not long to wait before a herd of deer came past. Tom took many +pictures of the graceful creatures, for it was daylight now, and he +needed no light. Consequently there was nothing to alarm the herd. + +After having made several films of the antelope, Tom and his two +companions went farther on. They were fortunate enough to find a place +that seemed to be a regular playground of the deer. There was a large +herd there, and, getting as near as he dared, Tom focused his camera, +and began taking pictures. + +"It's as good as a play," whispered Mr. Damon, as he and Ned watched +the creatures, for they had to speak quietly. The camera made scarcely +any noise. "I'm glad I came on this trip." + +"So am I," said Ned. "Look, Tom, see the mother deer all together, and +the fawns near them. It's just as if it was a kindergarten meeting." + +"I see," whispered Tom. "I'm getting a picture of that." + +For some little time longer Tom photographed the deer, and then, +suddenly, the timid creatures all at once lifted up their heads, and +darted off. Tom and Ned, wondering what had startled them, looked +across the glade just in time to see a big tiger leap out of the tall +grass. The striped animal had been stalking the antelope, but they had +scented him just in time. + +"Get him, Tom," urged Ned, and the young inventor did so, securing +several fine views before the tiger bounded into the grass again, and +took after his prey. + +"Bless my china teacup! What's that!" suddenly cried Mr. Damon. As he +spoke there was a crashing in the bushes and, an instant later as +two-horned rhinoceros sprang into view, charging straight for the group. + +"Look out!" yelled Ned. + +"Bless my--" began Mr. Damon, but he did not finish, for, in starting +to run his foot caught in the grass, and he went down heavily. + +Tom leaped to one side, holding his camera so as not to damage it. But +he stumbled over Mr. Damon, and went down. + +With a "wuff" of rage the clumsy beast, came on, moving more rapidly +than Tom had any idea he was capable of. Hampered by his camera our +hero could not arise. The rhinoceros was almost upon him, and Ned, +catching up a club, was just going to make a rush to the rescue, when +the brute seemed suddenly to crumple up. It fell down in a heap, not +five feet from where Tom and Mr. Damon lay. + +"Good!" cried Ned. "He's dead. Shot through the heart! Who did it?" + +"I did," answered Koku quietly, stepping out of the bushes, with one of +Tom's Swift's electric rifles in his hand. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +IN A GREAT GALE + + +Tom Swift rose slowly to his feet, carefully setting his camera down, +after making sure that it was not injured. Then he looked at the huge +beast which lay dead in front of him, and, going over to the giant he +held out his hand to him. + +"Koku, you saved my life," spoke Tom. "Probably the life of Mr. Damon +also. I can't begin to thank you. It isn't the first time you've done +it, either. But I want to say that you can have anything you want, that +I've got." + +"Me like this gun pretty much," said the giant simply. + +"Then it's yours!" exclaimed Tom. "And you're the only one, except +myself, who has ever owned one." Tom's wonderful electric rifle, of +which I have told you in the book bearing that name, was one of his +most cherished inventions. + +He guarded jealously the secret of how it worked, and never sold or +gave one away, for fear that unscrupulous men might learn how to make +them, and to cause fearful havoc. For the rifle was a terrible weapon. +Koku seemed to appreciate the honor done him, as he handled the gun, +and looked from it to the dead rhinoceros. + +"Bless my blank cartridge!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, as he also got up and +came to examine the dead beast. It was the first thing he had said +since the animal had rushed at him, and he had not moved after he fell +down. He had seemingly been in a daze, but when the others heard him +use one of his favorite expressions they knew that he was all right +again. "Bless my hat!" went on the odd man. "What happened, Tom? Is +that beast really dead? How did Koku come to arrive in time?" + +"I guess he's dead all right," said Tom, giving the rhinoceros a kick. +"But I don't know how Koku happened to arrive in the nick of time, and +with the gun, too." + +"I think maybe I see something to shoot when I come after you, like you +tell me to do," spoke the giant. "I follow your trail, but I see +nothing to shoot until I come here. Then I see that animal run for you, +and I shoot." + +"And a good thing you did, too," put in Ned. "Well let's go back. My +nerves are on edge, and I want to sit quiet for a while." + +"Take the camera, Koku," ordered Tom, "and I'll carry the electric +rifle--your rifle, now," he added, and the giant grinned in delight. +They reached the airship without further incident, and, after a cup of +tea, Tom took out the exposed films and put a fresh roll in his camera, +ready for whatever new might happen. + +"Where is your next stopping place, Tom?" asked Ned, as they sat in the +main room of the airship that evening, talking over the events of the +day. They had decided to stay all night anchored on the ground, and +start off in the morning. + +"I hardly know," answered the young inventor. "I am going to set the +camera to-night, near a small spring I saw, to get some pictures of +deer coming to drink. I may get a picture of a lion or a tiger +attacking them. If I could it would be another fine film. To-morrow I +think we will start for Switzerland. But now I'm going to get the +camera ready for a night exposure. + +"Bless my check book!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't mean to say that you +are going to stay out at a spring again, Tom, and run the chance of a +tiger getting you." + +"No, I'm merely going to set the camera, attach the light and let it +work automatically this time. I've put in an extra long roll of film, +for I'm going to keep it going for a long while, and part of the time +there may be no animals there to take pictures of. No, I'm not going to +sit out to-night. I'm too tired. I'll conceal the camera in the bushes +so it won't be damaged if there's a fight. Then, as I said, we'll start +for Switzerland to-morrow." + +"Switzerland!" cried Ned. "What in the world do you want to go make a +big jump like that for? And what do you expect to get in that mountain +land?" + +"I'm going to try for a picture of an avalanche," said Tom. "Mr. +Period wants one, if I can get it. It is quite a jump, but then we'll +be flying over civilized countries most of the time, and if any +accident happens we can go down and easily make repairs. We can also +get gasolene for the motor, though I have quite a supply in the tanks, +and perhaps enough for the entire trip. At the same time we won't take +any chances. So we'll be off for Switzerland in the morning. + +"I think some avalanche pictures will be great, if you can get them," +remarked Mr. Nestor. "But, Tom, you know those big slides of ice, snow +and earth aren't made to order." + +"Oh, I know," agreed the young inventor with a smile. "I'll just have +to take my chances, and wait until one happens." + +"Bless my insurance policy!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "And when it does +happen, Tom, are you going to stand in front of it, and snap-shot it?" + +"Indeed I'm not. This business is risky and dangerous enough, without +looking for trouble. I'm going to the mountain region, and hover around +in the air, until we see an avalanche 'happen' if that is the right +word. Then I'll focus the camera on it, and the films and machinery +will do the rest." + +"Oh, that's different," remarked the odd man, with an air of relief. + +Tom and Ned soon had the camera set near the spring and then, everyone +being tired with the day's work and excitement, they retired. In the +morning there were signs around the spring that many animals had been +there in the night. There were also marks as if there had been a fight, +but of course what sort, or how desperate, no one could say. + +"If anything happened the camera got it, I'm sure of that much," +remarked Tom, as he brought in the apparatus. "I'm not going to develop +the roll, for I don't want to take the time now. I guess we must have +something, anyhow." + +"If there isn't it won't so much matter for you have plenty of other +good views," said Mr. Nestor. + +I will not go into details of the long trip to Switzerland, where, amid +the mountains of that country, Tom hoped to get the view he wanted. + +Sufficient to say that the airship made good time after leaving India. +Sometimes Tom sent the craft low down, in order to get views, and +again, it would be above the clouds. + +"Well, another day will bring us there," said Tom one evening, as he +was loading the camera with a fresh roll of films. "Then we'll have to +be on the lookout for an avalanche." + +"Yes, we're making pretty good time," remarked Ned, as he looked at the +speed gage. "I didn't know you had the motor working so fast, Tom." + +"I haven't," was the young inventor's answer, as he looked up in +surprise. "Why, we are going quite fast! It's the wind, Ned. It's +right with us, and it's carrying us along." + +Tom arose and went to the anemometer, or wind-registering instrument. +He gave a low whistle, half of alarm. + +"Fifty miles an hour she's blowing now," he said. "It came on suddenly, +too, for a little while ago it was only ten." + +"Is there any danger?" asked Mr. Nestor, for he was not very familiar +with airship perils. + +"Well, we've been in big blows before, and we generally came out all +right," returned Tom. "Still, I don't like this. Why she went up five +points since I've been looking at it!" and he pointed to the needle of +the gage, which now registered fifty-five miles an hour. + +"Bless my appendix!" gasped Mr. Damon. "It's a hurricane Tom!" + +"Something like that," put in Ned, in a low voice. + +With a suddenness that was startling, the wind increased in violence +still more. Tom ran to the pilot house. + +"What are you going to do?" Ned called. + +"See if we can't go down a bit," was Tom's answer. "I don't like this. +It may be calmer below. We're up too high as it is." + +He tried to throw over the lever controlling the deflecting rudder, +which would send the Flyer down, but he could not move it. + +"Give me a hand!" he called to Ned, but even the strength of the two +lads was not sufficient to shift it. + +"Call Koku!" gasped Tom. "If anybody can budge it the giant can!" + +Meanwhile the airship was being carried onward in the grip of a mighty +wind, so strong that its pressure on the surface of the deflecting +rudder prevented it from being shifted. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +SNAPPING AN AVALANCHE + + +"Bless my thermometer!" gasped Mr. Damon. "This is terrible!" The +airship was plunging and swaying about in the awful gale. "Can't +something be done, Tom?" + +"What has happened?" cried Mr. Nestor. "We were on a level keel before. +What is it?" + +"It's the automatic balancing rudder!" answered Tom. "Something has +happened to it. The wind may have broken it! Come on, Ned!" and he led +the way to the engine room. + +"What are you going to do? Don't you want Koku to shift the deflecting +rudder? Here he is," Ned added, as the giant came forward, in response +to a signal bell that Tom's chum had rung. + +"It's too late to try the deflecting rudder!" tried Tom. "I must see +what is the matter with our balancer." As he spoke the ship gave a +terrific plunge, and the occupants were thrown sideways. The next +moment it was on a level keel again, scudding along with the gale, but +there was no telling when the craft would again nearly capsize. + +Tom looked at the mechanism controlling the equalizing and equilibrium +rudder. It was out of order, and he guessed that the terrific wind was +responsible for it. + +"What can we do?" cried Ned, as the airship nearly rolled over. "Can't +we do anything, Tom?" + +"Yes. I'm going to try. Keep calm now. We may come out all right. This +is the worst blow we've been in since we were in Russia. Start the gas +machine full blast. I want all the vapor I can get." + +As I have explained the Flyer was a combined dirigible balloon and +aeroplane. It could be used as either, or both, in combination. At +present the gas bag was not fully inflated, and Tom had been sending +his craft along as an aeroplane. + +"What are you going to do?" cried Ned, as he pulled over the lever that +set the gas generating machine in operation. + +"I'm going up as high as I can go!" cried Tom. "If we can't go down we +must go up. I'll get above the hurricane instead of below it. Give me +all the gas you can, Ned!" + +The vapor hissed as it rushed into the big bag overhead. Tom carried +aboard his craft the chemicals needed to generate the powerful lifting +gas, of which he alone had the secret. It was more powerful than +hydrogen, and simple to make. The balloon of the Flyer was now being +distended. + +Meanwhile Tom, with Koku, Mr. Damon and Mr. Nestor to help him, worked +over the deflecting rudder, and also on the equilibrium mechanism. But +they could not get either to operate. + +Ned stood by the gas machine, and worked it to the limit. But even with +all that energy, so powerful was the wind, that the Flyer rose slowly, +the gale actually holding her down as a water-logged craft is held +below the waves. Ordinarily, with the gas machine set at its limit the +craft would have shot up rapidly. + +At times the airship would skim along on the level, and again it would +be pitched and tossed about, until it was all the occupants could do to +keep their feet. Mr. Damon was continually blessing everything he could +remember. + +"Now she's going!" suddenly cried Ned, as he looked at the dials +registering the pressure of the gas, and showing the height of the +airship above the earth. + +"Going how?" gasped Tom, as he looked over from where he was working at +the equilibrium apparatus. "Going down?" + +"Going up!" shouted Ned. "I guess we'll be all right soon!" + +It was true. Now that the bag was filled with the powerful lifting gas, +under pressure, the Flyer was beginning to get out of the dangerous +predicament into which the gale had blown her. Up and up she went, and +every foot she climbed the power of the wind became less. + +"Maybe it all happened for the best," said Tom, as he noted the height +gage. "If we had gone down, the wind might have been worse nearer the +earth." + +Later they learned that this was so. The most destructive wind storm +ever known swept across the southern part of Europe, over which they +were flying that night, and, had the airship gone down, she would +probably have been destroyed. But, going up, she got above the +wind-strata. Up and up she climbed, until, when three miles above the +earth, she was in a calm zone. It was rather hard to breathe at this +height, and Tom set the oxygen apparatus at work. + +This created in the interior of the craft an atmosphere almost like +that on the earth, and the travelers were made more at their ease. +Getting out of the terrible wind pressure made it possible to work the +deflecting rudder, though Tom had no idea of going down, as long as the +blow lasted. + +"We'll just sail along at this height until morning," he said, "and by +then the gale may be over, or we may be beyond the zone of it. Start +the propellers, Ned. I think I can manage to repair the equilibrium +rudder now." + +The propellers, which gave the forward motion to the airship, had been +stopped when it was found that the wind was carrying her along, but +they were now put in motion again, sending the Flyer forward. In a +short time Tom had the equilibrium machine in order, and matters were +now normal again. + +"But that was a strenuous time while it lasted," remarked the young +inventor, as he sat down. + +"It sure was," agreed Ned. + +"Bless my pen wiper!" cried Mr. Damon. "That was one of the few times +when I wish I'd never come with you, Tom Swift," and everyone laughed +at that. + +The Flyer was now out of danger, going along high in the air through +the night, while the gale raged below her. At Tom's suggestion, Koku +got a lunch ready, for they were all tired with their labors, and +somewhat nervous from the danger and excitement. + +"And now for sleep!" exclaimed Tom, as he pushed back his plate. "Ned, +set the automatic steering gear, and we'll see where we bring up by +morning." + +An examination, through a powerful telescope in the bright light of +morning, showed the travelers that they were over the outskirts of a +large city, which, later, they learned was Rome, Italy. + +"We've made a good trip," said Tom. "The gale had us worried, but it +sent us along at a lively clip. Now for Switzerland, and the +avalanches!" + +They made a landing at a village just outside the "Holy City," as Rome +is often called, and renewed their supply of gasolene. Naturally they +attracted a crowd of curious persons, many of whom had never seen an +airship before. Certainly few of them had ever seen one like Tom +Swift's. + +The next day found them hovering over the Alps, where Tom hoped to be +able to get the pictures of snow slides. They went down to earth at a +town near one of the big mountain ranges, and there made inquiries as +to where would be the best location to look for big avalanches. If they +went but a few miles to the north, they were told, they would be in the +desired region, and they departed for that vicinity. + +"And now we've just got to take our time, and wait for an avalanche to +happen," remarked Tom, as they were flying along over the mountain +ranges. "As Mr. Damon said, these things aren't made to order. They +just happen." + +For three days they sailed in and out over the great snow-covered peaks +of the Alps. They did not go high up, for they wanted to be near earth +when an avalanche would occur, so that near-view pictures could be +secured. Occasionally they saw parties of mountain climbers ascending +some celebrated peak, and for want of something better to photograph, +Tom "snapped" the tourists. + +"Well, I guess they're all out of avalanches this season," remarked Ned +one afternoon, when they had circled back and forth over a mountain +where, so it was said, the big snow slides were frequent. + +"It does seem so," agreed Tom. "Still, we're in no hurry. It is easier +to be up here, than it is walking around in a jungle, not knowing what +minute a tiger may jump out at you." + +"Bless my rubbers, yes!" agreed Mr. Damon. + +The sky was covered with lowering clouds, and there were occasionally +flurries of snow. Tom's airship was well above the snow line on the +mountains. The young inventor and Ned sat in the pilot house, taking +observations through a spyglass of the mountain chain below them. + +Suddenly Ned, who had the glass focused on a mighty peak, cried out: + +"There she is, Tom!" + +"What?" + +"The avalanche! The snow is beginning to slide down the mountain! Say, +it's going to be a big one, too. Got your camera ready?" + +"Sure! I've had it ready for the last three days. Put me over there, +Ned. You look after the airship, and I'll take the pictures!" + +Tom sprang to get his apparatus, while his chum hurried to the levers, +wheels and handles that controlled the Flyer. As they approached the +avalanche they could see the great mass of ice, snow, big stones, and +earth sliding down the mountain side, carrying tall trees with it. + +"This is just what I wanted!" cried Tom, as he set his camera working. +"Put me closer, Ned." + +Ned obeyed, and the airship was now hovering directly over the +avalanche, and right in its path. The big landslide, as it would have +been called in this country, met no village in its path, fortunately, +or it would have wiped it out completely. It was in a wild and desolate +region that it occurred. + +"I want to get a real close view!" cried Tom, as he got some pictures +showing a whole grove of giant trees uprooted and carried off. "Get +closer Ned, and--" + +Tom was interrupted by a cry of alarm from his chum. + +"We're falling!" yelled Ned. "Something has gone wrong. We're going +down into the avalanche!". + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +TELEGRAPH ORDERS + + +There was confusion aboard the airship. Tom, hearing Ned's cry, left +his camera, to rush to the engine room, but not before he had set the +picture apparatus to working automatically. Mr. Damon, Mr. Nestor and +Koku, alarmed by Ned's cries, ran back from the forward part of the +craft, where they had been watching the mighty mass of ice and earth as +it rushed down the side of the mountain. + +"What's wrong, Ned?" cried Tom excitedly. + +"I don't know! The propellers have stopped! We were running as an +aeroplane you know. Now we're going down!" + +"Bless my suspenders!" shouted Mr. Damon. "If we land in the midst of +that conglomeration of ice it will be the end of us." + +"But we're not going to land there!" cried Tom. + +"How are you going to stop it?" demanded Mr. Nestor. + +"By the gas machine!" answered Tom. "That will stop us from falling. +Start it up, Ned!" + +"That's right! I always forget about that! I'll have it going in a +second!" + +"Less than a second," called Tom, as he saw how near to the mighty, +rushing avalanche they were coming. + +Ned worked rapidly, and in a very short time the downward course of the +airship was checked. It floated easily above the rushing flood of ice +and earth, and Tom, seeing that his craft, and those on it, were safe, +hurried back to his camera. Meanwhile the machine had automatically +been taking pictures, but now with the young inventor to manage it, +better results would be obtained. + +Tom aimed it here and there, at the most spectacular parts of the +avalanche. The others gathered around him, after Ned had made an +inspection, and found that a broken electrical wire had caused the +propellers to stop. This was soon repaired and then, as they were +hanging in the air like a balloon, Tom took picture after picture of +the wonderful sight below them. Forest after forest was demolished. + +"This will be a great film!" Tom shouted to Ned, as the latter informed +him that the machinery was all right again. "Send me up a little. I +want to get a view from the top, looking down." + +His chum made the necessary adjustments to the mechanism and then, +there being nothing more to slide down the mountainside the avalanche +was ended. But what a mass of wreck and ruin there was! It was as if a +mighty earthquake had torn the mountain asunder. + +"It's a good thing it wasn't on a side of the mountain where people +lived," commented Ned, as the airship rose high toward the clouds. "If +it had been, there'd be nothing left of 'em. What hair-raising stunt +are you going to try next, Tom?" + +"I don't know. I expect to hear from Mr. Period soon. + +"Hear from Mr. Period?" exclaimed Mr. Nestor. "How are you going to do +that, Tom?" + +"He said he would telegraph me at Berne, Switzerland, at a certain +date, as he knew I was coming to the Alps to try for some avalanche +pictures. It's two or three days yet, before I can expect the telegram, +which of course will have to come part way by cable. In the meanwhile, +I think we'll take a little rest, and a vacation. I want to give the +airship an overhauling, and look to my camera. There's no telling what +Mr. Period may want next." + +"Then he didn't make out your programme completely before you started?" +asked Mr. Nestor. + +"No, he said he'd communicate with me from time to time. He is in touch +with what is going on in the world, you know, and if he hears of +anything exciting at any place, I'm to go there at once. You see he +wants the most sensational films he can get." + +"Yes, our company is out to give the best pictures we can secure," +spoke Mary's father, "and I think we are lucky to have Tom Swift +working for us. We already have films that no other concern can get. +And we need them." + +"I wonder what became of those men who started to make so much trouble +for you, Tom?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"Well, they seem to have disappeared," replied our hero. "Of course +they may be after me any day now, but for the time being, I've thrown +them off my track." + +"So then you don't know where you're going next?" asked Ned. + +"No, it may be to Japan, or to the North Pole. Well, I'm ready for +anything. We've got plenty of gasolene, and the Flyer can certainly +go," said Tom. + +They went down to earth in a quiet spot, just outside of a little +village, and there they remained three days, to the no small wonder of +the inhabitants. Tom wanted to see if his camera was working properly. +So he developed some of the avalanche pictures, and found them +excellent. The rest of the time was spent in making some needed repairs +to the airship, while the young inventor overhauled his Wizard machine, +that he found needed a few adjustments. + +Their arrival in Berne created quite a sensation, but they were used to +that. Tom anchored his airship just outside the city, and, accompanied +by Ned, made his way to the telegraph office. Some of the officials +there could speak English, though not very well. + +"I am expecting a message," said Tom. + +"Yes? Who for?" asked the clerk. + +"Tom Swift. It will be from America." + +As Tom said this he observed a man sitting in the corner of the office +get up hurriedly and go out. All at once his suspicions were aroused. +He thought of the attempts that had been made to get his Wizard Camera +away from him. + +"Who was that man?" he quickly asked the agent. + +"Him? Oh, he, too, is expecting a message from America. He has been +here some time." + +"Why did he go out so quickly?" Ned wanted to know. + +"Why, I can not tell. He is an Englishman. They do strange things." + +"My telegram? Is it here?" asked Tom impatiently. He wanted to get +whatever word there was from Mr. Period, and be on his way to whatever +destination the picture man might select. Perhaps, after all, his +suspicions, against the man who had so suddenly left, were unfounded. + +"Yes, there is a cablegram here for you, Monsieur Swift," said the man, +who was French. "There are charges on it, however." + +"Pay 'em, Ned, while I see what this is," directed the young inventor, +as he tore open the envelope. + +"Whew!" he whistled a moment later. "This is going some." + +"Where to now?" asked Ned. "The North Pole?" + +"No, just the opposite. Mr. Period wants me to go to Africa--the Congo +Free State. There's an uprising among the natives there, and he wants +some war pictures. Well, I guess I'll have to go." + +As Tom spoke he looked toward the door of the telegraph office, and he +saw the man, who had so hurriedly gone out a few moments before, +looking in at him. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +SUSPICIOUS STRANGERS + + +"Off to Africa; eh?" remarked Ned, as Tom put the envelope in his +pocket. "That's another long jump. But I guess the Flyer can do it." + +"Yes, I think so. I say Ned, not so loud," said Tom, who had hurried to +the side of his chum, whispered the last words. + +"What's up?" inquired Ned quickly. "Anything wrong?" + +"I don't know. But I think we are being watched. Did you notice that +fellow who was in here a minute ago, when I asked for a telegram?" + +"Yes, what about him?" + +"Well, he's looking in the door now I think. Don't turn round. Just +look up into that mirror on the wall, and you can see his reflection." + +"I understand," whispered Ned, as he turned his gaze toward the mirror +in question, a large one, with advertisements around the frame. "I see +him," he went on. "There's some one with him." + +"That's what I thought," replied Tom. "Take a good look. Whom do you +think the other chap is?" + +Ned looked long and earnestly. By means of the mirror, he could see, +perfectly plain, two men standing just outside the door of the +telegraph office. The portal was only partly open. Ned drew an old +letter from his pocket, and pretended to be showing it to Tom. But, all +the while he was gazing earnestly at the two men. Suddenly one of them +moved, giving Tom's chum a better view of his face. + +"By Jove, Tom!" the lad exclaimed in a tense whisper. "If it isn't that +Eckert fellow I'm a cow." + +"That's what I thought," spoke Tom coolly. "Not that you're a cow, Ned, +but I believe that this man is one of the moving picture partners, who +are rivals of Mr. Period. I wasn't quite sure myself after the first +glance I had of him, so I wanted you to take a look. Do you know the +other chap--the one who ran out when I asked for my telegram?" + +"No, I've never seen him before as far as I know." + +"Same here. Come on." + +"What are you going to do?" + +"Go back to the airship, and tell Mr. Nestor. As one of the directors +in the concern I'm working for. I want his advice." + +"Good idea," replied Ned, and they turned to leave the office. The +spying stranger, and William Eckert, were not in sight when the two +lads came out. + +"They got away mighty quick," remarked Tom, as he looked up and down +the street. + +"Yes, they probably saw us turn to come out, and made a quick get-away. +They might be in any one of these places along here," for the street, +on either side of the telegraph office, contained a number of hotels, +with doors opening on the sidewalk. + +"They must be on your trail yet," decided Mr. Nestor when Tom, reaching +the anchored airship, told what had happened. "Well, my advice is to go +to Africa as soon as we can. In that way we'll leave them behind, and +they won't have any chance to get your camera." + +"But what I can't understand," said Tom, "is how they knew I was coming +here. It was just as if that one man had been waiting in the telegraph +office for me to appear. I'm sorry, now, that I mentioned to Ned where +we were ordered to. But I didn't think." + +"They probably knew, anyway," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "I think this +may explain it. The rival concern in New York has been keeping track of +Mr. Period's movements. Probably they have a paid spy who may be in his +employ. They knew when he sent you a telegram, what it contained, and +where it was directed to. Then, of course, they knew you would call +here for it. What they did not know was when you would come, and so +they had to wait. That one spy was on guard, and, as soon as you came, +he went and summoned Eckert, who was waiting somewhere in the +neighborhood." + +"Bless my detective story!" cried Mr. Damon. "What a state of affairs! +They ought to be arrested, Tom." + +"It would be useless," said Mr. Nestor. "They are probably far enough +away by this time. Or else they have put others on Tom's track." + +"I'll fight my own battles!" exclaimed the young inventor. "I don't go +much on the police in a case like this, especially foreign police. +Well, my camera is all right, so far," he went on, as he took a look at +it, in the compartment where he kept it. "Some one must always remain +near it, after this. But we'll soon start for Africa, to get some +pictures of a native battle. I hope it isn't the red pygmies we have to +photograph." + +"Bless my shoe laces! Don't suggest such a thing," begged Mr. Damon, as +he recalled the strenuous times when the dwarfs held the missionaries +captive. + +It was necessary to lay in some stores and provisions, and for this +reason Tom could not at once head the airship for the African jungles. +As she remained at anchor, just outside the city, crowds of Swiss +people came out to look at the wonderful craft. But Tom and his +companions took care that no one got aboard, and they kept a strict +lookout for Americans, or Englishmen, thinking perhaps that Mr. Eckert, +or the spy, might try to get the camera. However, they did not see +them, and a few days after the receipt of the message from Mr. Period, +having stocked up, they rose high into the air, and set out to cross +the Mediterranean Sea for Africa. Tom laid a route over Tripoli, the +Sahara Desert, the French Congo, and so into the Congo Free State. In +his telegram, Mr. Period had said that the expected uprising was to +take place near Stanley Falls, on the Congo River. + +"And supposing it does not happen?" asked Mr. Damon. "What if the +natives don't fight, Tom? You'll have your trip for nothing, and will +run a lot of risk besides." + +"It's one of the chances I'm taking," replied the young inventor, and +truly, as he thought of it, he realized that the perils of the moving +picture business were greater than he had imagined. Tom hoped to get a +quick trip to the Congo, but, as they were sailing over the big desert, +there was an accident to the main motor, and the airship suddenly began +shooting toward the sands. She was easily brought up, by means of the +gas bags, and allowed to settle gently to the ground, in the vicinity +of a large oasis. But, when Tom looked at the broken machinery, he said: + +"This means a week's delay. It will take that, and longer, to fix it so +we can go on." + +"Too bad!" exclaimed Mr. Nestor. "The war may be over when we get +there. But it can't be helped." + +It took Tom and his friends even longer than he had thought to make the +repairs. In the meanwhile they camped in the desert place, which was +far from being unpleasant. Occasionally a caravan halted there, but, +for the most part, they were alone. + +"No danger of Eckert, or any of his spies coming here, I guess," said +Tom grimly as he blew on a portable forge, to weld two pieces of iron +together. + +In due time they were again on the wing, and without further incident +they were soon in the vicinity of Stanley Falls. They managed to locate +a village where there were some American missionaries established. They +were friends of Mr. and Mrs. Illington, the missionaries whom Tom had +saved from the red pygmies, as told in the "Electric Rifle" volume of +this series, and they made our hero and his friends welcome. + +"Is it true?" asked Tom, of the missionaries who lived not far from +Stanley Falls, "that there is to be a native battle? Or are we too late +for it?" + +"I am sorry to say, I fear there will be fighting among the tribesmen," +replied Mr. Janeway, one of the Christian workers. "It has not yet +taken place, though." + +"Then I'm not too late!" cried Tom, and there was exultation in his +voice. "I don't mean to be barbarous," he went on, as he saw that the +missionaries looked shocked, "but as long as they are going to fight I +want to get the pictures." + +"Oh, they'll fight all right," spoke Mrs. Janeway. "The poor, ignorant +natives here are always ready to fight. This time I think it is about +some cattle that one tribe took from another." + +"And where will the battle take place?" asked Tom. + +"Well, the rumors we have, seem to indicate that the fight will take +place about ten miles north of here. We will have notice of it before +it starts, as some of the natives, whom we have succeeded in +converting, belong to the tribe that is to be attacked. They will be +summoned to the defense of their town and then it will be time enough +for you to go. Oh, war is a terrible thing! I do not like to talk about +it. Tell me how you rescued our friends from the red pygmies," and Tom +was obliged to relate that story, which I have told in detail elsewhere. + +Several days passed, and Tom and his friends spent a pleasant time in +the African village with the missionaries. The airship and camera were +in readiness for instant use, and during this period of idleness our +hero got several fine films of animal scenes, including a number of +night-fights among the beasts at the drinking pools. One tiger battle +was especially good, from a photographic standpoint. + +One afternoon, a number of native bearers came into the town. They +preceded two white men, who were evidently sportsmen, or explorers, and +the latter had a well equipped caravan. The strangers sought the advice +of the missionaries about where big game might be found, and Tom +happened to be at the cottage of Mr. Janeway when the strangers arrived. + +The young inventor looked at them critically, as he was introduced to +them. Both men spoke with an English accent, one introducing himself as +Bruce Montgomery, and the other as Wade Kenneth. Tom decided that they +were of the ordinary type of globe-trotting Britishers, until, on his +way to his airship, he passed the place where the native bearers had +set down the luggage of the Englishmen. + +"Whew!" whistled Tom, as he caught sight of a peculiarly shaped box. +"See that, Ned?" + +"Yes, what is it? A new kind of magazine gun?" + +"It's a moving picture camera, or I lose my guess!" whispered Tom. "One +of the old fashioned kind. Those men are no more tourists, or after big +game, than I am! They're moving picture men, and they're here to get +views of that native battle! Ned, we've got to be on our guard. They +may be in the pay of that Turbot and Eckert firm, and they may try to +do us some harm!" + +"That's so!" exclaimed Ned. "We'll keep watch of them, Tom." + +As they neared their airship, there came, running down what served as +the main village street, an African who showed evidence of having come +from afar. As he ran on, he called out something in a strange tongue. +Instantly from their huts the other natives swarmed. + +"What's up now?" cried Ned. + +"Something important, I'll wager," replied Tom. "Ned, you go back to +the missionaries house, and find out what it is. I'm going to stand +guard over my camera." + +"It's come!" cried Ned a little later, as he hurried into the interior +of the airship, where Tom was busy working over a new attachment he +intended putting on his picture machine. + +"What has?" + +"War! That native, whom we saw running in, brought news that the battle +would take place day after to-morrow. The enemies of his tribe are on +the march, so the African spies say, and he came to summon all the +warriors from this town. We've got to get busy!" + +"That's so. What about those Englishmen?" + +"They were talking to the missionaries when the runner came in. They +pretended to have no interest in it, but I saw one wink to the other, +and then, very soon, they went out, and I saw them talking to their +native bearers, while they were busy over that box you said was a +picture machine." + +"I knew it, Ned! I was sure of it! Those fellows came here to trick us, +though how they ever followed our trail I don't know. Probably they +came by a fast steamer to the West Coast, and struck inland, while we +were delayed on the desert. I don't care if they are only straight +out-and-out rivals--and not chaps that are trying to take an unfair +advantage. I suppose all the big picture concerns have a tip about this +war, and they may have representatives here. I hope we get the best +views. Now come on, and give me a hand. We've got our work cut out for +us, all right." + +"Bless my red cross bandage!" cried Mr. Damon, when he heard the news. +"A native fight, eh? That will be something I haven't seen in some +time. Will there be any danger, Tom, do you think?" + +"Not unless our airship tumbles down between the two African forces," +replied our hero, "and I'll take care that it doesn't do that. We'll be +well out of reach of any of their blow guns, or arrows." + +"But I understand that many of the tribes have powder weapons," said +Mr. Nestor. + +"They have," admitted Tom, "but they are 'trader's' rifles, and don't +carry far. We won't run any risk from such old-fashioned guns." + +"A big fight; eh?" asked Koku when they told him what was before them. +"Me like to help." + +"Yes, and I guess both sides would give a premium for your services," +remarked Tom, as he gazed at his big servant. "But we'll need you with +us, Koku." + +"Oh, me stay with you, Mr. Tom," exclaimed the big man, with a grin. + +Somewhat to Tom's surprise the two Englishmen showed no further +interest in him and his airship, after the introduction at the +missionaries' bungalow. + +With the stolidity of their race the Britishers did not show any +surprise, as, some time afterward, they strolled down toward Tom's big +craft, after supper, and looked it over. Soon they went back to their +own camp, and a little later, Koku, who walked toward it, brought word +that the Englishmen were packing up. + +"They're going to start for the seat of war the first thing in the +morning," decided Tom. "Well, we'll get ahead of them. Though we can +travel faster than they can, we'll start now, and be on the ground in +good season. Besides, I don't like staying all night in the same +neighborhood with them. Get ready for a start, Ned." + +Tom did not stop to say good-bye to the Englishmen, though he bade +farewell to the missionaries, who had been so kind to him. There was +much excitement in the native town, for many of the tribesmen were +getting ready to depart to help their friends or relatives in the +impending battle. + +As dusk was falling, the big airship arose, and soon her powerful +propellers were sending her across the jungle, toward Stanley Falls in +the vicinity of which the battle was expected to take place. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +THE NATIVE BATTLE + + +"By Jove, Tom, here they come!" + +"From over by that drinking pool?" + +"Yes, just as the spies said they would. Wow, what a crowd of the black +beggars there are! And some of 'em have regular guns, too. But most of +'em have clubs, bows and arrows, blow guns, or spears." + +Tom and Ned were standing on the forward part of the airship, which was +moving slowly along, over an open plateau, in the jungle where the +native battle was about to take place. Our friends had left the town +where the missionaries lived, and had hovered over the jungle, until +they saw signs of the coming struggle. They had seen nothing of their +English rivals since coming away, but had no doubt but that the +Britishers were somewhere in the neighborhood. + +The two forces of black men, who had gone to war over a dispute about +some cattle, approached each other. There was the beating of tom-toms, +and skin drums, and many weird shouts. From their vantage point in the +air, Tom and his companions had an excellent view. The Wizard Camera +was loaded with a long reel of film, and ready for action. + +"Bless my handkerchief!" cried Mr. Damon, as he looked down on the +forces that were about to clash. "I never saw anything like this +before!" + +"I either," admitted Tom. "But, if things go right, I'm going to get +some dandy films!" + +Nearer and nearer the rival forces advanced. At first they had stared, +and shouted in wonder at the sight of the airship, hovering above them, +but their anger soon drew their attention to the fighting at hand, and, +after useless gestures toward the craft of the air, and after some of +them had vainly fired their guns or arrows at it, they paid no more +attention, but rushed on with their shouts and cries and amid the +beating of their rude drums. + +"I think I'll begin to take pictures now," said Tom, as Ned, in charge +of the ship, sent it about in a circle, giving a general view of the +rival forces. "I'll show a scene of the two crowds getting ready for +business, and, later on, when they're actually giving each other cats +and dogs, I'll get all the pictures possible." + +The camera was started while, safe in the air those on the Flyer watched +what went on below them. + +Suddenly the forward squads of the two small armies of blacks met. With +wild, weird yells they rushed at each other. The air was filled with +flying arrows and spears. The sound of the old-fashioned muzzle-loading +guns could be heard, and clouds of smoke arose. Tilting his camera, and +arranging the newly attached reflecting mirrors so as to give the +effect as if a spectator was looking at the battle from in front, +instead of from above, Tom Swift took picture after picture. + +The fight was now on. With yells of rage and defiance the Africans came +together, giving blow for blow. It was a wild melee, and those on the +airship looked on fascinated, though greatly wishing that such horrors +could be stopped. + +"How about it, Tom?" cried Ned. + +"Everything going good! I don't like this business, but now I'm in it +I'm going to stick. Put me down a little lower," answered the young +inventor. + +"All right. I say Tom, look over there." + +"Where?" + +"By that lightning-struck gum tree. See those two men, and some sort of +a machine they've got stuck up on stilts? See it?" + +"Sure. Those are the two Englishmen--my rivals! They're taking +pictures, too!" + +And then, with a crash and roar, with wild shouts and yells, with +volley after volley of firearms, clouds of smoke and flights of arrows +and spears, the native battle was in full swing, while the young +inventor, sailing above it in his airship, reeled off view after view +of the strange sight. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +A HEAVY LOSS + + +"Bless my battle axe, but this is awful!" cried Mr. Damon. + +"War is always a fearful thing," spoke Mr. Nestor. "But this is not as +bad as if the natives fought with modern weapons. See! most of them +are fighting with clubs, and their fists. They don't seem to hurt each +other very much." + +"That's so," agreed Mr. Damon. The two gentlemen were in the main +cabin, looking down on the fight below them, while Tom, with Ned to +help him change the reels of films, as they became filled with +pictures, attended to the camera. Koku was steering the craft, as he +had readily learned how to manage it. + +"Are those Englishmen taking pictures yet?" asked Tom, too busy to turn +his head, and look for himself. + +"Yes, they're still at," replied Ned. "But they seem to be having +trouble with their machine," he added as he saw one of the men leave +the apparatus, and run hurriedly back to where they had made a +temporary camp. + +"I guess it's an old-fashioned kind," commented Tom. "Say, this is +getting fierce!" he cried, as the natives got in closer contact with +each other. It was now a hand-to-hand battle. + +"I should say so!" yelled Ned. "It's a wonder those Englishmen aren't +afraid to be down on the same level with the black fighters." + +"Oh, a white person is considered almost sacred by the natives here, so +the missionaries told me," said Tom. "A black man would never think of +raising his hand to one, and the Englishmen probably know this. They're +safe enough. In fact I'm thinking of soon going down myself, and +getting some views from the ground." + +"Bless my gizzard, Tom!" cried Mr. Damon. "Don't do it!" + +"Yes, I think I will. Why, it's safe enough. Besides, if they attack us +we have the electric rifles. Ned, you tell Koku to get the guns out, to +have in readiness, and then you put the ship down. I'll take a chance." + +"Jove! You've been doing nothing but take chances since we came on this +trip!" exclaimed Ned, admiringly. "All right! Here we go," and he went +to relieve Koku at the wheel, while the giant, grinning cheerfully at +the prospect of taking part in the fight himself, got out the rifles, +including his own. + +Meanwhile the native battle went on fiercely. Many on both sides fell, +and not a few ran away, when they got the chance, their companions +yelling at them, evidently trying to shame them into coming back. + +As the airship landed, Mr. Damon, Mr. Nestor, Ned and Koku stood ready +with the deadly electric rifles, in case an attack should be made on +them. But the fighting natives paid no more attention to our friends +than they did to the two Englishmen. The latter moved their clumsy +camera from place to place, in order to get various views of the +fighting. + +"This is the best yet!" cried Tom, as, after a lull in the fight, when +the two opposing armies had drawn a little apart, they came together +again more desperately than before. "I hope the pictures are being +recorded all right. I have to go at this thing pretty much in the dark. +Say, look at the beggars fight!" he finished. + +But a battle, even between uncivilized blacks, cannot go on for very +long at a time. Many had fallen, some being quite severely injured it +seemed, being carried off by their friends. Then, with a sudden rush, +the side which, as our friends learned later, had been robbed of their +cattle, made a fierce attack, overwhelming their enemies, and +compelling them to retreat. Across the open plain the vanquished army +fled, with the others after them. Tom, meanwhile, taking pictures as +fast as he could. + +"This ends it!" he remarked to Ned, when the warriors were too far away +to make any more good views. "Now we can take a rest." + +"The Englishmen gave up some time ago," said his chum, motioning to the +two men who were taking their machine off the tripod. + +"Guess their films gave out," spoke Tom. "Well, you see it didn't do +any harm to come down, and I got some better views here." + +"Here they come back!" exclaimed Ned, as a horde of the black fellows +emerged from the jungle, and came on over the plain. + +"Hear 'em sing!" commented Tom, as the sound of a rude chant came to +their ears. "They must be the winners all right." + +"I guess so," agreed Ned. "But what about staying here now? Maybe they +won't be so friendly to us when they haven't any fighting to occupy +their minds." + +"Don't worry," advised Tom. "They won't bother us." + +And the blacks did not. They were caring for their wounded, who had not +already been taken from the field, and they paid no attention to our +friends, save to look curiously at the airship. + +"Bless my newspaper!" cried Mr. Damon, with an air of relief. "I'm +glad that's over, and we didn't have to use the electric rifles, after +all." + +"Here come the Englishmen to pay us a visit," spoke Ned a little later, +as they sat about the cabin of the Flyer. The two rival picture men +soon climbed on deck. + +"Beg pardon," said the taller of the two, addressing our hero, "but +could you lend us a roll of film? Ours are all used up, and we want to +get some more pictures before going back to our main camp." + +"I'm sorry," replied Tom, "but I use a special size, and it fits no +camera but my own." + +"Ah! might we see your camera?" asked the other Englishman. "That is, +see how it works?" + +"I don't like to be disobliging," was Tom's answer, "but it is not yet +patented and--well--" he hesitated. + +"Oh, I see!" sneered the taller visitor. "You're afraid we might steal +some of your ideas. Hum! Come on Montgomery," and, swinging on his +heels, with a military air, he hurried away, followed by his companion. + +"They don't like that, but I can't help it," remarked Tom to his +friends a little later. "I can't afford to take any chances." + +"No, you did just right," said Mr. Nestor. "Those men may be all right, +but from the fact that they are in the picture taking business I'd be +suspicious of them." + +"Well, what's next on the programme?" asked Ned as Tom put his camera +away. + +"Oh, I think we'll stay here over night," was our hero's reply. "It's +a nice location, and the gas machine needs cleaning. We can do it here, +and maybe I can get some more pictures." + +They were busy the rest of the day on the gas generator, but the main +body of natives did not come back, and the Englishmen seemed to have +disappeared. + +Everyone slept soundly that night. So soundly, in fact, that the sun +was very high when Koku was the first to awaken, His head felt +strangely dizzy, and he wondered at a queer smell in the room he had to +himself. + +"Nobody up yet," he exclaimed in surprise, as he staggered into the +main cabin. There, too, was the strange, sweetish, sickly smell. "Mr. +Tom, where you be? Time to get up!" the giant called to his master, as +he went in, and gently shook the young inventor by the shoulder. + +"Eh? What's that? What's the matter?" began Tom, and then he suddenly +sat up. "Oh, my head!" he exclaimed, putting his hands to his aching +temples. + +"And that queer smell!" added Ned, who was also awake now. + +"Bless my talcum powder!" cried Mr. Damon. "I have a splitting +headache." + +"Hum! Chloroform, if I'm any judge!" called Mr. Nestor from his berth. + +"Chloroform!" cried Tom, staggering to his feet. "I wonder." He did not +finish his sentence, but made his way to the room where his camera was +kept. "It's gone!" he cried. "We have been chloroformed in the night, +and some one has taken my Wizard Camera." + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +AFTER THE ENGLISHMEN + + +"The camera gone!" gasped Ned. + +"Did they chloroform us?" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "Bless my--" but for one +of the few times in his life, he did not know what to bless. + +"Get all the fresh air you can," hastily advised Mr. Nestor. "Koku, +open all the doors and windows," for, though it was hot during the day +in the jungle, the nights were cool, and the airship was generally +closed up. With the inrush of the fresh air every one soon felt better. + +"Is anything else gone?" asked Ned, as he followed Tom into the camera +room. + +"Yes, several rolls of unexposed films. Oh, if only they haven't got +too much of a start! I'll get it away from them!" declared Tom with +energy. + +"From who? Who took it?" asked Ned. + +"Those Englishmen, of course! Who else? I believe they are in the pay +of Turbot and Eckert. Their taking pictures was only a bluff! They got +on my trail and stuck to it. The delays we had, gave them a chance to +catch up to us. They came over to the airship, to pretend to borrow +films, just to get a look at the place, and size it up, so they could +chloroform us, and get the camera." + +"I believe you're right," declared Mr. Nestor. "We must get after those +scoundrels as quickly as possible!" + +"Bless my shoulder braces!" cried Mr. Damon. "How do you imagine they +worked that trick on us?" + +"Easily enough," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "We were all dead tired last +night, and slept like tops. They watched their chance, sneaked up, and +got in. After that it was no hard matter to chloroform each one of us +in turn, and they had the ship to themselves. They looked around, found +the camera, and made off with it." + +"Well, I'm going to get right after them!" cried Tom. "Ned, start the +motor. I'll steer for a while." + +"Hold on! Wait a minute," suggested Mr. Nestor. "I wouldn't go off in +the ship just yet, Tom." + +"Why not?" + +"Because you don't know which way to go. We must find out which trail +the Englishmen took. They have African porters with them, and those +porters doubtless know some of the blacks around here. We must inquire +of the natives which way the porters went, in carrying the goods of our +rivals, for those Englishmen would not abandon camp without taking +their baggage with them." + +"That's so," admitted the young inventor. "That will be the best plan. +Once I find which way they have gone I can easily overtake them in the +airship. And when I find 'em--" Tom paused significantly. + +"Me help you fix 'em!" cried Koku, clenching his big fist. + +"They will probably figure it out that you will take after them," said +Mr. Nestor, "but they may not count on you doing it in the Flyer, and +so they may not try to hide. It isn't going to be an easy matter to +pick a small party out of the jungle though, Tom." + +"Well, I've done more difficult things in my airships," spoke our hero. +"I'll fly low, and use the glass. I guess we can pick out their crowd +of porters, though they won't have many. Oh, my camera! I hope they +won't damage it." + +"They won't," was Ned's opinion. "It's too valuable. They want it to +take pictures with, themselves." + +"Maybe. I hope they don't open it, and see how it's made. And I'm glad +I thought to hide the picture films I've taken so far. They didn't get +those away from us, only some of the blank ones," and Tom looked again +in a secret closet, where he kept the battle-films, and the others, in +the dark, to prevent them from being light-struck, by any possible +chance. + +"Well, if we're going to make some inquiries, let's do it," suggested +Mr. Nestor. "I think I see some of the Africans over there. They have +made a temporary camp, it seems, to attend to some of their wounded." + +"Do you think we can make them understand what we want?" asked Ned. "I +don't believe they speak English." + +"Oh these blacks have been trading with white men," said Tom, "for they +have 'trader's' guns, built to look at, and not to shoot very well. I +fancy we can make ourselves understood. If not, we can use signs." + +Leaving Koku and Mr. Damon to guard the airship, Tom, Ned and Mr. +Nestor went to the African camp. There was a large party of men there, +and they seemed friendly enough. Probably winning the battle the day +before had put them in good humor, even though many of them were hurt. + +To Tom's delight he found one native who could speak a little English, +and of him they made inquiries as to what direction the Englishmen had +taken. The black talked for a while among his fellows, and then +reported to our friends that, late in the night, one of the porters, +hired by Montgomery and Kenneth, had come to camp to bid a brother +good-bye. This porter had said that his masters were in a hurry to get +away, and had started west. + +"That's it!" cried Mr. Nestor. "They're going to get somewhere so they +can make their way to the coast. They want to get out of Africa as fast +as they can." + +"And I'm going to get after 'em as fast as I can!" cried Tom grimly. +"Come on!" + +They hurried back to the airship, finding Koku and Mr. Damon peacefully +engaged in talk, no one having disturbed them. + +"Start the motor, Ned!" called his chum. "We'll see what luck we have!" + +Up into the air went the Flyer, her great propellers revolving rapidly. +Over the jungle she shot, and then, when he found that everything was +working well, and that the cleaned gas generator was operating as good +as when it was new, the young inventor slowed up, and brought the craft +down to a lower level. + +"For we don't want to run past these fellows, or shoot over their heads +in our hurry," Tom explained. "Ned, get out the binoculars. They're +easier to handle than the telescope. Then go up forward, and keep a +sharp lookout. There is something like a jungle trail below us, and it +looks to be the only one around here. They probably took that." Soon +after leaving the place where they had camped after the battle, Tom had +seen a rude path through the forest, and had followed that lead. + +On sped the Flyer, after the two Englishmen, while Tom thought +regretfully of his stolen camera. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +THE JUNGLE FIRE + + +"Well, Tom, I don't seem to see anything of them," remarked Ned that +afternoon, as he sat in the bow of the air craft, gazing from time to +time through the powerful glasses. + +"No, and I can't understand it, either," responded the young inventor, +who had come forward to relieve his chum. "They didn't have much the +start of us, and they'll have to travel very slowly. It isn't as if +they could hop on a train; and, even if they did, I could overtake them +in a short time. But they have to travel on foot through the jungle, +and can't have gone far." + +"Maybe they have bullock carts," suggested Mr. Damon. + +"The trail isn't wide enough for that," declared Tom. "We've come quite +a distance now, even if we have been running at low speed, and we +haven't seen even a black man on the trail," and he motioned to the +rude path below them. + +"They may have taken a boat and slipped down that river we crossed a +little while ago," suggested Ned. + +"That's so!" cried Tom. "Why didn't I think of it? Say! I'm going to +turn back." + +"Turn back?" + +"Yes, and go up and down the stream a way. We have time, for we can +easily run at top speed on the return trip. Then, if we don't see +anything of them on the water, we'll pick up the trail again. Put her +around, Ned, and I'll take the glasses for a while." + +The Flyer was soon shooting back over the same trail our friends had +covered, and, as Ned set the propellers going at top speed, they were +quickly hovering over a broad but shallow river, which cut through the +jungle. + +"Try it down stream first," suggested Tom, who was peering through the +binoculars. "They'd be most likely to go down, as it would be easier." + +Along over the stream swept the airship, covering several miles. + +"There's a boat!" suddenly exclaimed Mr. Nestor, pointing to a native +canoe below them. + +"Bless my paddle wheel! So it is!" cried Mr. Damon. "I believe it's +them, Tom!" + +"No, there are only natives in that craft," answered the young inventor +a moment later, as he brought the binoculars into focus. "I wish it +was them, though." + +A few more miles were covered down stream, and then Tom tried the +opposite direction. But all to no purpose. A number of boats were seen, +and several rafts, but they had no white men on them. + +"Maybe the Englishmen disguised themselves like natives, Tom," +suggested Ned. + +Our hero shook his head. + +"I could see everything in the boats, through these powerful glasses," +he replied, "and there was nothing like my camera. I'd know that a mile +off. No, they didn't take to this stream, though they probably crossed +it. We'll have to keep on the way we were going. It will soon be night, +and we'll have to camp. Then we'll take up the search to-morrow." + +It was just getting dusk, and Tom was looking about for a good place to +land in the jungle, when Ned, who was standing in the bow, cried: + +"I say, Tom, here's a native village just ahead. There's a good place +to stop, and we can stay there over night." + +"Good!" exclaimed Tom. "And, what's more, we can make some inquiries as +to whether or not the Englishmen have passed here. This is great! +Maybe we'll come out all right, after all! They can't travel at +night--or at least I don't believe they will--and if they have passed +this village we can catch them to-morrow. We'll go down." + +They were now over the native town, which was in a natural clearing in +the jungle. The natives had by this time caught sight of the big +airship over them, and were running about in terror. There was not a +man, woman or child in sight when the Flyer came down, for the +inhabitants had all fled in fright. + +"Not much of a chance to make inquiries of these folks," said Mr. +Nestor. + +"Oh, they'll come back," predicted Tom. "They are naturally curious, +and when they see that the thing isn't going to blow up, they'll gather +around. I've seen the same thing happen before." + +Tom proved a true prophet. In a little while some of the men began +straggling back, when they saw our friends walking about the airship, +as it rested on the ground. Then came the children, and then the women, +until the whole population was gathered about the airship, staring at +it wonderingly. Tom made signs of friendship, and was lucky enough to +find a native who knew a few French words. Tom was not much of a French +scholar, but he could frame a question as to the Englishmen. + +"Oui!" exclaimed the native, when he understood. Then he rattled off +something, which Tom, after having it repeated, and making signs to the +man to make sure he understood, said meant that the Englishmen had +passed through the village that morning. + +"We're on the right trail!" cried the young inventor. "They're only a +day's travel ahead of us. We'll catch them to-morrow, and get my camera +back." + +The natives soon lost all fear of the airship, and some of the chief +men even consented to come aboard. Tom gave them a few trifles for +presents, and won their friendship to such an extent that a great feast +was hastily gotten up in honor of the travelers. Big fires were +lighted, and fowls by the score were roasted. + +"Say, I'm glad we struck this place!" exclaimed Ned, as he sat on the +ground with the others, eating roast fowl. "This is all to the chicken +salad!" + +"Things are coming our way at last," remarked Tom. "We'll start the +first thing in the morning. I wish I had my camera now. I'd take a +picture of this scene. Dad would enjoy it, and so would Mrs. Baggert. +Oh, I almost wish I was home again. But if I get my camera I've got a +lot more work ahead of me." + +"What kind?" asked Ned. + +"I don't know. I'm to stop in Paris for the next instructions from Mr. +Period. He is keeping in touch with the big happenings of the world, +and he may send us to Japan, to get some earthquake pictures." + +The night was quiet after the feast, and in the morning Tom and his +friends sailed off in their airship, leaving behind the wondering and +pleased natives, for our hero handed out more presents, of small value +to him, but yet such things as the blacks prized highly. + +Once more they were flying over the trail, and they put on more speed +now, for they were fairly sure that the men they sought were ahead of +them about a day's travel. This meant perhaps twenty miles, and Tom +figured that he could cover fifteen in a hurry, and then go over the +remaining five slowly, so as not to miss his quarry. + +"Say, don't you smell something?" asked Ned a little later, when the +airship had been slowed down. "Something like smoke?" + +"Humph! I believe I do get an odor of something burning," admitted Tom, +sniffing the atmosphere. + +"Bless my pocket book!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, "look down there, boys!" +He pointed below, and, to the surprise of the lads, and no less of +himself, he saw many animals hurrying back along the jungle trail. + +There were scores of deer, leaping along, here and there a tawny lion, +and one or two tigers. Off to one side a rhinoceros crashed his way +through the tangle, and occasionally an elephant was seen. + +"That's queer," cried Ned. "And they're not paying any attention to +each other, either." + +"Something is happening," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "Those animals are +running away from something." + +"Maybe it's an elephant drive," spoke Tom. "I think--" + +But he did not finish. The smell of smoke suddenly became stronger, +and, a moment later, as the airship rose higher, in response to a +change in the angle of the deflecting rudder, which Ned shifted, all on +board saw a great volume of black smoke rolling toward the sky. + +"A jungle fire!" cried Tom. "The jungle is burning! That's why the +animals are running back this way." + +"We'd better not go on!" shouted Ned, choking a bit, as the smoke +rolled nearer. + +"No, we've got to turn back!" decided Tom. "Say, this will stop the +Englishmen! They can't go on. We'll go back to the village we left, and +wait for them. They're trapped!" And then he added soberly: "I hope my +camera doesn't get burnt up!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXII + +A DANGEROUS COMMISSION + + +"Look at that smoke!" yelled Ned, as he sent the airship about in a +great circle on the backward trail. + +"And there's plenty of blaze, too," added Tom. "See the flames eating +away! This stuff is as dry as tinder for there hasn't been any rain for +months." + +"Much hot!" was the comment of the giant, when he felt the warm wind of +the fire. + +"Bless my fountain pen!" gasped Mr. Damon, as he looked down into the +jungle. "See all those animals!" + +The trail was now thick with deer, and many small beasts, the names of +which Tom did not know. On either side could be heard larger brutes, +crashing their way forward to escape the fire behind them. + +"Oh, if you only had your camera now!" cried Ned. "You could get a +wonderful picture, Tom." + +"What's the use of wishing for it. Those Englishmen have it, and--" + +"Maybe they're using it!" interrupted Ned. "No, I don't think they +would know how to work it. Do you see anything of them, Ned?" + +"Not a sight. But they'll surely have to come back, just as you said, +unless they got ahead of the fire. They can't go on, and it would be +madness to get off the trail in a jungle like this." + +"I don't believe they could have gotten ahead of the fire," spoke Tom. +"They couldn't travel fast enough for that, and see how broad the blaze +is." + +They were now higher up, well out of the heat and smoke of the +conflagration, and they could see that it extended for many miles along +the trail, and for a mile or so on either side of it. + +"We're far enough in advance, now, to go down a bit, I guess," said +Tom, a little later. "I want to get a good view of the path, and I +can't do that from up here. I have an idea that--" + +Tom did not finish, for as the airship approached nearer the ground, he +caught up a pair of binoculars, and focussed them on something on the +trail below. + +"What is it?" cried Ned, startled by something in his chum's manner. + +"It's them! The Englishmen!" cried Tom. "See, they are racing back +along the trail. Their porters have deserted them. But they have my +camera! I can see it! I'm going down, and get it! Ned, stand by the +wheel, and make a quick landing. Then we'll go up again!" + +Tom handed the glasses to his chum, and Ned quickly verified the young +inventor's statement. There were the two rascally Englishmen. The fire +was still some distance in the rear, but was coming on rapidly. There +were no animals to be seen, for they had probably gone off on a side +trail, or had slunk deeper into the jungle. Above the distant roar of +the blaze sounded the throb of the airship's motor. The Englishmen +heard it, and looked up. Then, suddenly, they motioned to Tom to +descend. + +"That's what I'm going to do," he said aloud, but of course they could +not hear him. + +"They're waiting for us!" cried Ned. "I wonder why?" for the rascals +had come to a halt, setting down the packs they carried on the trail. +One of the things they had was undoubtedly Tom's camera. + +"They probably want us to save their lives," said Tom. "They know they +can't out-run this fire. They've given up! We have them now!" + +"Are you going to save them?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"Of course. I wouldn't let my worst enemy run the chances of danger in +that terrible blaze. I'd save them even if they had smashed my camera. +I'll go down, and get them, and take them back to the native village, +but that's as far as I will carry them. They'll have to get away as +best they can, after that." + +It was the work of but a few minutes to lower the airship to the trail. +Fortunately it widened a bit at this point, or Tom could never have +gotten his craft down through the trees. + +"Hand up that camera!" ordered our hero curtly, when he had stopped +near the Englishmen. + +"Yes, my dear chap," spoke the tall Britisher, "but will you oblige us, +by taking us--" + +"Hand up the camera first!" sharply ordered Tom again. + +They passed it to him. + +"I know we treated you beastly mean," went on Kenneth, "but, my dear +chap--" + +"Get aboard," was all Tom said, and when the rascals, with fearful +glances back into the burning jungle, did so, our hero sent his craft +high into the air again. + +"Where are you taking us, my dear chap?" asked the tall rascal. + +"Don't 'dear chap' me!" retorted Tom. "I don't want to talk to you. I'm +going to drop you at the native village." + +"But that will burn!" cried the Englishman. + +"The wind is changing," was our hero's answer. "The fire won't get to +the village. You'll be safe. Have you damaged my camera?" he asked as +he began to examine it, while Ned managed the ship. + +"No, my dear chap. You mustn't think too hard of us. We were both down +on our luck, and a chap offered us a big sum to get on your trail, and +secure the camera. He said you had filched it from him, and that he had +a right to it. Understand, we wouldn't have taken it had we known--" + +"Don't talk to me!" interrupted Tom, as he saw that his apparatus had +not been damaged. "The man who hired you was a rascal--that's all I'll +say. Put on a little more speed, Ned. I want to get rid of these 'dear +chaps' and take some pictures of the jungle fire." + +As Tom had said, the wind had changed, and was blowing the flames away +off to one side, so that the native village would be in no danger. It +was soon reached, and the Africans were surprised to see Tom's airship +back again. But he did not stay long, descending only to let the +Englishmen alight. They pleaded to be taken to the coast, making all +sorts of promises, and stating that, had they known that Turbot and +Eckert (for whom they admitted they had acted) were not telling the +truth, they never would have taken Tom's camera. + +"Don't leave us here!" they pleaded. + +"I wouldn't have you on board my airship another minute for a fortune!" +declared Tom, as he signalled to Ned to start the motor. Then the Flyer +ascended on high, leaving the plotters and started back for the fire, +of which Tom got a series of fine moving pictures. + +A week later our friends were in Paris, having made a quick trip, on +which little of incident occurred, though Tom managed to get quite a +number of good views on the way. + +He found a message awaiting him, from Mr. Period. + +"Well, where to now?" asked Ned, as his chum read the cablegram. + +"Great Scott!" cried our hero. "Talk about hair-raising jobs, this +certainly is the limit!" + +"Why, what's the matter?" + +"I've got to get some moving pictures of a volcano in action," was the +answer. "Say, if I'd known what sort of things 'Spotty' wanted, I'd +never have consented to take this trip. A volcano in action, and maybe +an earthquake on the side! This is certainly going some!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII + +AT THE VOLCANO + + +"And you've got to snap-shot a volcano?" remarked Ned to his chum, +after a moment of surprised silence. "Any particular one? Is it +Vesuvius? If it is we haven't far to go. But how does Mr. Period know +that it's going to get into action when we want it to?" + +"No, it isn't Vesuvius," replied Tom. "We've got to take another long +trip, and we'll have to go by steamer again. The message says that the +Arequipa volcano, near the city of the same name, in Peru, has started +to 'erupt,' and, according to rumor, it's acting as it did many years +ago, just before a big upheaval." + +"Bless my Pumice stones!" cried Mr. Damon. "And are you expected to get +pictures of it shooting out flames and smoke, Tom?" + +"Of course. An inactive volcano wouldn't make much of a moving picture. +Well, if we go to Peru, we won't be far from the United States, and we +can fly back home in the airship. But we've got to take the Flyer +apart, and pack up again." + +"Will you have time?" asked Mr. Nestor. "Maybe the volcano will get +into action before you arrive, and the performance will be all over +with." + +"I think not," spoke Tom, as he again read the cablegram. "Mr. Period +says he has advices from Peru to the effect that, on other occasions, +it took about a month from the time smoke was first seen coming from +the crater, before the fireworks started up. I guess we've got time +enough, but we won't waste any." + +"And I guess Montgomery and Kenneth won't be there to make trouble for +us," put in Ned. "It will be some time before they get away from that +African town, I think." + +They began work that day on taking the airship apart for transportation +to the steamer that was to carry them across the ocean. Tom decided on +going to Panama, to get a series of pictures on the work of digging +that vast canal. On inquiry he learned that a steamer was soon to sail +for Colon, so he took passage for his friends and himself on that, also +arranging for the carrying of the parts of his airship. + +It was rather hard work to take the Flyer apart, but it was finally +done, and, in about a week from the time of arriving in Paris, they +left that beautiful city. The pictures already taken were forwarded to +Mr. Period, with a letter of explanation of Tom's adventures thus far, +and an account of how his rivals had acted. + +Just before sailing, Tom received another message from his strange +employer. The cablegram read: + + +"Understand our rivals are also going to try for volcano pictures. +Can't find out who will represent Turbot and Eckert, but watch out. Be +suspicious of strangers." + + +"That's what I will!" cried Tom. "If they get my camera away from me +again, it will be my own fault." + +The voyage to Colon was not specially interesting. They ran into a +terrific storm, about half way over, and Tom took some pictures from +the steamer's bridge, the captain allowing him to do so, but warning +him to be careful. + +"I'll take Koku up there with me," said the young inventor, "and if a +wave tries to wash me overboard he'll grab me." + +And it was a good thing that he took this precaution, for, while a wave +did not get as high as the bridge, one big, green roller smashed over +the bow of the vessel, staggering her so that Tom was tossed against +the rail. He would have been seriously hurt, and his camera might have +been broken, but for the quickness of the giant. + +Koku caught his master, camera and all, in a mighty arm, and with the +other clung to a stanchion, holding Tom in safety until the ship was on +a level keel once more. + +"Thanks, Koku!" gasped Tom. "You always seem to be around when I need +you." The giant grinned happily. + +The storm blew out in a few days, and, from then on, there was pleasant +sailing. When Tom's airship had been reassembled at Colon, it created +quite a sensation among the small army of canal workers, and, for their +benefit, our hero gave several flying exhibitions. + +He then took some of the engineers on a little trip, and in turn, they +did him the favor of letting him get moving pictures of parts of the +work not usually seen. + +"And now for the volcano!" cried Tom one morning, when having shipped +to Mr. Period the canal pictures, the Flyer was sent aloft, and her +nose pointed toward Arequipa. "We've got quite a run before us." + +"How long?" asked Ned. + +"About two thousand miles. But I'm going to speed her up to the limit." +Tom was as good as his word, and soon the Flyer was shooting along at +her best rate, reeling off mile after mile, just below the clouds. + +It was a wild and desolate region over which the travelers found +themselves most of the time, though the scenery was magnificent. They +sailed over Quito, that city on the equator, and, a little later, they +passed above the Cotopaxi and Chimbarazo volcanoes. But neither of them +was in action. The Andes Mountains, as you all know, has many volcanoes +scattered along the range. Lima was the next large city, and there Tom +made a descent to inquire about the burning mountain he was shortly to +photograph. + +"It will soon be in action," the United States counsel said. "I had a +letter from a correspondent near there only yesterday, and he said the +people in the town were getting anxious. They are fearing a shower of +burning ashes, or that the eruption may be accompanied by an +earthquake." + +"Good!" cried Tom. "Oh, I don't mean it exactly that way," he hastened +to add, as he saw the counsel looking queerly at him. "I meant that I +could get pictures of both earthquake and volcano then. I don't wish +the poor people any harm." + +"Well, you're the first one I ever saw who was anxious to get next door +to a volcano," remarked the counsel. "Hold on, though, that's not quite +right. I heard yesterday that a couple of young fellows passed through +here on their way to the same place. Come to think of it, they were +moving picture men, also." + +"Great Scott!" cried Tom. "Those must be my rivals, I'll wager. I must +get right on the job. Thanks for the information," and hurrying from +the office he joined his friends on the airship, and was soon aloft +again. + +"Look, Tom, what's that?" cried Ned, about noon the next day when the +Flyer, according to their calculations must be nearing the city of +Arequipa. "See that black cloud over there. I hope it isn't a tornado, +or a cyclone, or whatever they call the big wind storms down here." + +Tom, and the others, looked to where Ned pointed. There was a column of +dense smoke hovering in the air, lazily swirling this way and that. The +airship was rapidly approaching it. + +"Why that--" began Tom, but before he could complete the sentence the +smoke was blown violently upward. It became streaked with fire, and, a +moment later, there was the echo of a tremendous explosion. + +"The volcano!" cried Tom. "The Arequipa volcano! We're here just in +time, for she's in eruption now! Come on, Ned, help me get out the +camera! Mr. Damon, you and Mr. Nestor manage the airship! Put us as +close as you dare! I'm going to get some crackerjack pictures!" + +Once more came a great report. + +"Bless my toothpick!" gasped Mr. Damon. "This is awful!" And the +airship rushed on toward the volcano which could be plainly seen now, +belching forth fire, smoke and ashes. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV + +THE MOLTEN RIVER + + +"Whew!" gasped Ned, as he stood beside Tom in the bow of the airship. +"What's that choking us, Tom?" + +"Sulphur, I guess, and gases from the volcano. The wind blew 'em over +this way. They're not dangerous, as long as there is no carbonic acid +gas given off, and I don't smell any of that, yet. Say, Ned, it's +erupting all right, isn't it?" + +"I should say so!" cried his chum. + +"Put us a little to one side, Mr. Damon," called Tom to his friend, who +was in the pilot house. "I can't get good pictures through so much +smoke. It's clearer off to the left." + +"Bless my bath robe!" cried the odd man. "You're as cool about it, Tom, +as though you were just in an ordinary race, at an aeroplane meet." + +"And why shouldn't I be?" asked our hero with a laugh, as he stopped +the mechanism of the camera until he should have a clearer view of the +volcano. "There's not much danger up here, but I want to get some views +from the level, later, and then--" + +"You don't get me down there!" interrupted Mr. Nestor, with a grim +laugh. + +They were now hovering over the volcano, but high enough up so that +none of the great stones that were being thrown out could reach them. +The column of black smoke, amid which could be seen the gleams of the +molten fires in the crater, rolled toward them, and the smell of +sulphur became stronger. + +But when, in accordance with Tom's suggestion, the airship had been +sent over to one side, they were clear of the vapor and the noxious +gas. Then, too, a better view could be had of the volcano below them. + +"Hold her down!" cried Tom, as he got in a good position, and the +propellers were slowed down so that they just overcame the influence of +a slight wind. Thus the Flyer hovered in the air, while below her the +volcano belched forth red-hot rocks, some of them immense in size, and +quantities of hot ashes and cinders. Tom had the camera going again +now, and there was every prospect of getting a startling and wonderful, +as well as rare series of moving pictures. + +"Wow! That was a big one!" cried Ned, as an unusually large mass of +rocks was thrown out, and the column of fire and smoke ascended nearly +to the hovering craft. A moment later came an explosion, louder than +any that had preceded. "We'd better be going up; hadn't we Tom?" his +chum asked. + +"A little, yes, but not too far. I want to get as many near views as I +can." + +"Bless my overshoes!" gasped Mr. Damon, as he heard Tom say that. Then +he sent some of the vapor from the generating machine into the gas bag, +and the Flyer arose slightly. + +Ned looked in the direction of the town, but could not see it, on +account of the haze. Then he directed his attention to the terrifying +sight below him. + +"It's a good thing it isn't very near the city," he said to Tom, who +was engaged in watching the automatic apparatus of the camera, to see +when he would have to put in a fresh film. "It wouldn't take much of +this sort of thing to destroy a big city. But I don't see any streams +of burning lava, such as they always say come out of a volcano." + +"It isn't time for that yet," replied Tom. "The lava comes out last, +after the top layer of stones and ashes have been blown out. They are a +sort of stopper to the volcano, I guess, like the cork of a bottle, +and, when they're out of the way, the red-hot melted rock comes out. +Then there's trouble. I want to get pictures of that." + +"Well, keep far enough away," advised Mr. Nestor, who had come forward. +"Don't take any chances. I guess your rivals won't get here in time to +take any pictures, for they can't travel as fast as we did." + +"No," agreed the young inventor, "unless some other party of them were +here ahead of us. They'll have their own troubles, though, making +pictures anything like as good as we're getting." + +"There goes another blast!" cried Ned, as a terrific explosion sounded, +and a shower of hot stuff was thrown high into the air. "If I lived in +Arequipa I'd be moving out about now." + +"There isn't much danger I guess, except from showers of burning ashes, +and volcanic dust," spoke Mr. Nestor, "and the wind is blowing it away +from the town. If it continues this way the people will be saved." + +"Unless there is so much of the red-hot lava that it will bury the +city," suggested Tom. "I hope that doesn't happen," and he could not +repress a shudder as he looked down on the awful scene below him. + +After that last explosion the volcano appeared to subside somewhat, +though great clouds of smoke and tongues of fire leaped upward. + +"I've got to put in a new reel of film!" suddenly exclaimed Tom. "While +I stop the camera, Mr. Damon, I think you and Mr. Nestor might put the +airship down to the ground. I want some views on the level." + +"What! Go down to earth with this awful volcano spouting fire?" cried +Mr. Damon. "Bless my comb and brush!" + +"We can get well down the side of the mountain," said Tom. "I won't go +into any danger, much less ask any one else to do so, and I certainly +don't want my ship damaged. We can land down there," he said, pointing +to a spot on the side of the volcanic mountain, that was some distance +removed from the mouth of the crater. "It won't take me long to get one +reel of views, and then I'll come up again." + +The two men finally gave in to Tom's argument, that there was +comparatively little danger, for they admitted that they could quickly +rise up at the first sign of danger, and accordingly the Flyer +descended. Tom quickly had a fresh reel of film inserted, and started +his camera to working, standing it on a tripod some distance from the +airship. + +Once more the volcano was "doing its prettiest," as Tom expressed it. +He glanced around, as another big explosion took place, to see if any +other picture men were on hand, but the terrible mountain seemed +deserted, though of course someone might be on the other side. + +"What's that?" suddenly cried Ned, looking apprehensively at his chum. +At the same time Tom jumped to his feet, for he had been kneeling near +the camera. + +"Bless my--" began Mr. Damon, but he got no farther, for suddenly the +solid ground began to tremble and shake. + +"An earthquake!" shouted Mr. Nestor. "Come, Tom! Get back to the ship!" +The young inventor and Ned had been the only ones to leave it, as it +rested on a spur of the mountain. + +As Tom and Ned leaped forward to save the camera which was toppling to +one side, there came a great fissure in the side of the volcano, and a +stream of molten rock, glowing white with heat, gushed out. It was a +veritable river of melted stone, and it was coming straight for the two +lads. + +"Run! Run!" cried Mr. Nestor. "We have everything ready for a quick +flight. Run, Tom! Ned!" + +The lads leaped for the Flyer, the molten rock coming nearer and +nearer, and then with a cry Koku sprang overboard and made a dash +toward his master. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV + +THE EARTHQUAKE--CONCLUSION + + +"Here, Mr. Tom. Me carry you an' Ned. You hold picture machine!" cried +the giant. "Me run faster." + +As he spoke he lifted Ned up under one arm, and caught Tom in the +other. For they were but as children to his immense strength. Tom held +on to his camera, and, thus laden down, Koku ran as he had never run +before, toward the waiting airship. + +"Come on! Come on!" shouted Mr. Damon, for he could see what Tom, Ned +and Koku could not, that the stream of lava was nearing them rapidly. + +"It's hot!" cried Ned, as a wave of warm air fanned his cheek. + +"I should say so!" cried Tom. "The volcano is full of red-hot melted +stone." + +There came a sickening shake of the earth. Koku staggered as he ran on, +but he kept his feet, and did not fall. Again came a tremendous +explosion, and a shower of fine ashes sifted over the airship, and on +Koku and his living burdens. + +"This is the worst ever!" gasped Tom. "But I've got some dandy +pictures, if we ever get away from here alive to develop them." + +"Hurry, Koku! Hurry!" begged Mr. Nestor. "Bless my shoe laces!" yelled +Mr. Damon, who was fairly jumping up and down on the deck of the Flyer. +"I'll never go near a volcano again!" + +Once more the ground shook and trembled, as the earthquake rent it. +Several cracks appeared in Koku's path, but he leaped over them with +tremendous energy. A moment later he had thrust Tom and Ned over the +rail, to the deck, and leaped aboard himself. + +"Let her go!" cried Tom. "I'll do the rest of my moving picture work, +around volcanoes and earthquakes, from up in the air!" + +The Flyer shot upward, and scarcely a moment too soon, for, an instant +after she left the ground, the stream of hot, burning and bubbling lava +rolled beneath her, and those on board could feel the heat of it +ascending. + +"Say, I'm glad we got out of that when we did," gasped Ned, as he +looked down. "You're all right, Koku." + +"That no trouble," replied the giant with a cheerful grin. "Me carry +four fellows like you," and he stretched out his big arms. Tom had at +once set his camera to working again, taking view after view. + +It was a terrifying but magnificent sight that our friends beheld, for +the earth was trembling and heaving. Great fissures opened in many +places. Into some of them streams of lava poured, for now the volcano +had opened in several places, and from each crack the melted rocks +belched out. The crater, however, was not sending into the air such +volumes of smoke and ashes as before, as most of the tremendous energy +had passed, or was being used to spout out the lava. + +The earthquake was confined to the region right about the volcano, or +there might have been a great loss of life in the city. As it was, the +damage done was comparatively slight. + +Tom continued to take views, some showing the earth as it was twisted +and torn, and other different aspects of the crater. Then, as suddenly +as the earthquake had begun, it subsided, and the volcano was less +active. + +"My! I'm glad to see that!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "I've had about enough +of horrors!" + +"And I have too," added Tom. "I'm on my last roll of film, and I can't +take many more pictures. But I guess I have all Mr. Period needs, and +we'll start for home, as soon as I finish the next roll. But I'm going +to save that for a night view. That will be a novelty." + +The volcano became active again after dark, and presented a magnificent +though terrifying aspect. As the airship hovered above it, Tom got some +of his best pictures, and then, as the last bit of film slipped along +back of the lens, the airship was headed north. + +"Now for Shopton!" cried Tom. "Our trip is ended." + +"It's too had you didn't have more film," said Ned. "I thought you had +plenty." + +"Well, I used more than I counted on, but there are enough pictures as +it is." + +"Plenty," agreed Mr. Nestor. "I'm sure our company will be very well +satisfied with them, Tom. We can't get home any too soon to suit me. +I've had enough excitement." + +"And we didn't see anything of those other fellows whom we heard +about," spoke Mr. Damon, as the big airship flew on. + +"No," said Tom. "But I'm not worrying about them." + +They made another stop in Lima, on their homeward trip, to renew their +supply of gasolene, and there learned that the rival picture men had +arrived at the volcano too late to see it in operation. This news came +to a relative of one of the two men who lived in Lima. + +"Then our views of the earthquake and the smoking mountain will be the +only ones, and your company can control the rights," said Tom to Mr. +Nestor, who agreed with him. + +In due time, and without anything out of the ordinary happening the +Flyer reached Shopton, where Tom found a warm welcome awaiting him, not +only from his father, but from a certain young lady, whose name I do +not need to mention. + +"And so you got everything you went after, didn't you, Tom," exclaimed +Mr. Period, a few days later, when he had come from New York to get the +remainder of the films. + +"Yes, and some things I didn't expect," replied Tom. "There was--" + +"Yes! Yes! I know!" interrupted the odd picture man. "It was that +jungle fire. That's a magnificent series. None better. And those +scoundrels took your camera; eh?" + +"Yes. Could you connect them with Turbot and Eckert?" asked Tom. + +"No, but I'm sure they were acting for them just the same. I had no +legal evidence to act on, however, so I had to let it go. Turbot and +Eckert won't be in it when I start selling duplicates of the films you +have. And these last ought to be the best of all. I didn't catch that +fellow when I raced after him on the dock. He got away, and has steered +clear of me since," finished Mr. Period. + +"And our rivals didn't secure any views like ours," said Tom. + +"I'm glad of it," spoke Mr. Period. "Turbot and Eckert bribed one of my +men, and so found out where I was sending messages to you. They even +got a copy of my cablegram. But it did them no good." + +"Were all the films clear that I sent you?" asked our hero. + +"Every one. Couldn't be better. The animal views were particularly +fine. You must have had your nerve with you to get some of 'em." + +"Oh, Tom always has his nerve," laughed Ned. + +"Well, how soon will you be ready to start out again?" asked the +picture man, as he packed up the last of the films which Tom gave him. +"I'd like to get some views of a Japanese earthquake, and we haven't +any polar views. I want some of them, taken as near the North Pole as +you can get." + +Tom gently shook his head. + +"What! You don't mean to say you won't get them for me?" cried Mr. +Period. "With that wonderful camera of yours you can get views no one +else ever could." + +"Then some one else will have to take them," remarked the young +inventor. "I'll lend you the camera, and an airship, and you can go +yourself, Mr. Period. I'm going to stay home for a while. I did what I +set out to do, and that's enough." + +"I'm glad you'll stay home, Tom," said his father. "Now perhaps I'll +get my gyroscope finished." + +"And I, my noiseless airship," went on our hero. "No, Mr. Period, +you'll have to excuse me this time. Why don't you go yourself?" he +asked. "You would know just what kind of pictures you wanted." + +"No, I'm a promoter of the moving picture business, and I sell films, +but I don't know how to take them," was the answer. "Besides +I--er--well, I don't exactly care for airships, Tom Swift," he finished +with a laugh. "Well, I can't thank you enough for what you did for me, +and I've brought you a check to cover your expenses, and pay you as I +agreed. All the same I'm sorry you won't start for Japan, or the North +Pole." + +"Nothing doing," said Tom with a laugh; and Mr. Period departed. + +"Have you any idea what you will do next?" asked Ned, a day or so +later, when he and Tom were in the workshop. + +"I can't tell until I finish my noiseless airship," was the answer. +"Then something may happen." + +Something did, as I shall have the pleasure of telling you about in the +next volume of this series, to be called, "Tom Swift and His Great +Searchlight; or, On the Border for Uncle Sam," and in it will be given +an account of a great lantern our hero made, and how he baffled the +smugglers with it. + +"Oh, Tom, weren't you dreadfully frightened when you saw that burning +river of lava coming toward you?" asked Mary Nestor, when the young +inventor called on her later and told her some of his adventures. "I +should have been scared to death." + +"Well, I didn't have time to get scared," answered Tom. "It all +happened so quickly, and then, too I was thinking of my camera. Next I +knew Koku grabbed me, and it was all over." + +"But those wild beasts! Didn't they frighten you, especially when the +rhinoceros charged you?" + +"If you won't let it get out, I'll make a confession to you," said Tom, +lowering his voice. "I was scared stiff that time, but don't let Ned +know it." + +"I won't," promised Mary with a laugh. And now, when Tom is in such +pleasant company, we will take leave of him for a while, knowing that, +sooner or later, he will be seeking new adventures as exciting as those +of the past. + + + + +THE END + + + +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +THE TOM SWIFT SERIES + +By VICTOR APPLETON 12mo. CLOTH. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING. COLORED +WRAPPERS. + + +These spirited tales convey In a realistic way the wonderful advances +in land and sea locomotion. Stories like these are impressed upon the +memory and their reading is productive only of good. + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR CYCLE + Or Fun and Adventure on the Road + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR BOAT + Or The Rivals of Lake Carlopa + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP + Or The Stirring cruise of the Red Cloud + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT + Or Under the Ocean for Sunken Treasure + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT + Or The Speediest car on the Road + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE + Or The castaways of Earthquake Island + +TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS + Or The Secret of Phantom Mountain + +TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE + Or The Wreck of the Airship + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER + Or The Quickest Flight on Record + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE + Or Daring Adventures In Elephant Land + +TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD + Or Marvelous Adventures Underground + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER + Or Seeking the Platinum Treasure + +TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY + Or A Daring Escape by Airship + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA + Or The Perils of Moving Picture Taking + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT + Or On the Border for Uncle Sam + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS GIANT CANNON + Or The Longest Shots on Record + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS PHOTO TELEPHONE + Or The Picture that Saved a Fortune + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AERIAL WARSHIP + Or The Naval Terror of the Seas + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL + Or The Hidden city of the Andes + + +THE BUNNY BROWN SERIES + +By LAURA LEE HOPE + +Author of the Popular "Bobbsey Twins" Books + +wrapper and text illustrations drawn by + +FLORENCE ENGLAND NOSWORTHY 12mo. DURABLY BOUND. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM +STYLE OF BINDING + + +These stories by the author of the "Bobbsey Twins" Books are eagerly +welcomed by the little folks from about five to ten years of age. Their +eyes fairly dance with delight at the lively doings of inquisitive +little Bunny Brown and his cunning, trustful sister Sue. + +Bunny was a lively little boy, very inquisitive. When he did anything, +Sue followed his leadership. They had many adventures, some comical in +the extreme. + + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE ON GRANDPA'S FARM + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE PLAYING CIRCUS + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT CAMP REST-A-WHILE + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT AUNT LU'S CITY HOME + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE IN THE BIG WOODS + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE ON AN AUTO TOUR + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AND THEIR SHETLAND PONY + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE GIVING A SHOW + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT CHRISTMAS TREE COVE + + +THE BOBBSEY TWINS BOOKS + +For Little Men and Women + +By LAURA LEE HOPE + +Author of "The Bunny Brown" Series. Etc. 12mo. DURABLY BOUND. +ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING + + +Copyright publications which cannot be obtained elsewhere. Books that +charm the hearts of the little ones, and of which they never tire. + + THE BOBBSEY TWINS + THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN THE COUNTRY + THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT THE SEASHORE + THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT SCHOOL + THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT SNOW LODGE + THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON A HOUSEBOAT + THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT MEADOW BROOK + THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT HOME + THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN A GREAT CITY + THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON BLUEBERRY ISLAND + THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON THE DEEP BLUE SEA + THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN THE GREAT WEST + + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS SERIES + +By LAURA LEE HOPE + +Author of "The Bobbsey Twins Series." + +12mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING + +The adventures of Ruth and Alice DeVere. Their father, a widower, is an +actor who has taken up work for the "movies." Both girls wish to aid +him in his work and visit various localities to act in all sorts of +pictures. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS + Or First Appearance in Photo Dramas. + +Having lost his voice, the father of the girls goes into the movies and +the girls follow. Tells how many "parlor dramas" are filmed. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT OAK FARM + Or Queer Happenings While Taking Rural Plays. + +Full of fun in the country, the haps and mishaps of taking film plays, +and giving an account of two unusual discoveries. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS SNOWBOUND + Or The Proof on the Film. + +A tale of winter adventures in the wilderness, showing how the +photo-play actors sometimes suffer. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS UNDER THE PALMS + Or Lost in the Wilds of Florida. + +How they went to the land of palms, played many parts in dramas before +the camera; were lost, and aided others who were also lost. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT ROCKY RANCH + Or Great Days Among the Cowboys. + +All who have ever seen moving pictures of the rest west will want to +know just how they are made. This volume gives every detail and is full +of clean fun and excitement. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT SEA + Or a Pictured Shipwreck that Became Real. + +A thrilling account of the girls' experiences on the water. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS IN WAR PLAYS + Or The Sham Battles at Oak Farm. + +The girls play important parts in big battle scenes and have plenty of +hard work along with considerable fun. + + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS SERIES + +By CAPTAIN QUINCY ALLEN + +The outdoor chums are four wide-awake lads, sons of wealthy men of a +small city located on a lake. The boys love outdoor life, and are +greatly interested in hunting, fishing, and picture taking. They have +motor cycles, motor boats, canoes, etc., and during their vacations go +everywhere and have all sorts of thrilling adventures. The stories give +full directions for camping out, how to fish, how to hunt wild animals +and prepare the skins for stuffing, how to manage a canoe, how to swim, +etc. Full of the spirit of outdoor life. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS + Or The First Tour of the Rod, Gun and Camera Club. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON THE LAKE + Or Lively Adventures on Wildcat Island. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS IN THE FOREST + Or Laying the Ghost of Oak Ridge. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON THE GULF + Or Rescuing the Lost Balloonists. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS AFTER BIG GAME. + Or Perilous Adventures in the Wilderness. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON A HOUSEBOAT + Or The Rivals of the Mississippi. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS IN THE BIG WOODS + Or The Rival Hunters at Lumber Run. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS AT CABIN POINT + Or The Golden Cup Mystery. + +12mo. Averaging 240 pages. Illustrated. Handsomely bound in Cloth. + + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH SERIES + +By GERTRUDE W. MORRISON + +12mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING. + +Here is a series full of the spirit of high school life of today. The +girls are real flesh-and-blood characters, and we follow them with +interest in school and out. There are many contested matches on track +and field, and on the water, as well as doings in the classroom and on +the school stage. There it plenty of fun and excitement, all clean, +pure and wholesome. + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH + Or Rivals for all Honors. + +A stirring tale of high school life, full of fun, with a tomb of +mystery and a strange initiation. + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON LAKE LUNA + Or The Crew That Won. + +Telling of water sports and fun galore, and of fine times in camp. + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH AT BASKETBALL + Or The Great Gymnasium Mystery. + +Here we have a number of thrilling contests at basketball and in +addition, the solving of a mystery which had bothered the high school +authorities for a long while. + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON THE STAGE + Or The Play That Took the Prize. + +How the girls went In for theatricals and how one of them wrote a play +which afterward was made over for the professional stage and brought in +some much-needed money. + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON TRACK AND FIELD + Or The Girl Champions of the School League + +This story takes in high school athletics In their most approved and +up-to-date fashion. Full of fun and excitement. + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH IN CAMP + Or The Old Professor's Secret + +The girls went camping on Acorn Island and had a delightful time at +boating, swimming and picnic parties. + + + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH SERIES + +By GRAHAM B. FORBES + +Never was there a cleaner, brighter, more manly boy than Frank Allen, +the hero of this series of boys' tales, and never was there a better +crowd of lads to associate with than the students of the School. All +boys will read these stories with deep interest. The rivalry between +the towns along the river was of the keenest, and plots and counterplot +to win the champions, at baseball, at football, at boat racing, at +track athletics, and at ice hockey, were without number. Any lad +reading one volume of this series will surely want the others. + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH + Or The All Around Rivals of the School + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE DIAMOND + Or Winning Out by Pluck + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE RIVER + Or The Boat Race Plot that Failed + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE GRIDIRON + Or The Struggle for the Silver Cup + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE ICE + Or Out for the Hockey Championship + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH IN TRACK ATHLETICS + Or A Long Run that Won + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH IN WINTER SPORTS + Or Stirring Doings on Skates and Iceboats + +12mo. Illustrated. Handsomely bound In cloth, with cover design and +wrappers in color. + + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS SERIES + +By VICTOR APPLETON + +12mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING. + + +Moving pictures and photo plays are famous the world over, and in this +line of books the reader is given a full description of how the films +are made--the scenes of little dramas, indoors and out, trick pictures +to satisfy the curious, soul-stirring pictures of city affairs, life in +the Wild West, among the cowboys and Indians, thrilling rescues along +the seacoast, the daring of picture hunters in the jungle among savage +beasts, and the great risks run in picturing conditions in a land of +earthquakes. The volumes teem with adventures and will be found +interesting from first chapter to last. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS + Or Perils of a Great City Depicted. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN THE WEST + Or Taking Scenes Among the Cowboys and Indians. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS ON THE COAST + Or Showing the Perils of the Deep. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN THE JUNGLE + Or Stirring Times Among the Wild Animals. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN EARTHQUAKE LAND + Or Working Amid Many Perils. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS AND THE FLOOD + Or Perilous Days on the Mississippi. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS AT PANAMA + Or Stirring Adventures Along the Great Canal. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS UNDER THE SEA + Or The Treasure of the Lost Ship. + + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS SERIES + +By LAURA LEE HOPE Author of the "Bobbsey Twin Books" and "Bunny Brown" +Series. + + +These tales take in the various adventures participated in by several +bright, up-to-date girls who love outdoor life. They are clean and +wholesome, free from sensationalism, absorbing from the first chapter +to the last. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS OF DEEPDALE + Or Camping and Tramping for Fun and Health. + +Telling bow the girls organized their Camping and Tramping Club, how +they went on a tour, and of various adventures which befell them. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS AT RAINBOW LAKE + Or Stirring Cruise of the Motor Boat Gem. + +One of the girls becomes the proud possessor of a motor boat and +invites her club members to take a trip down the river to Rainbow Lake, +a beautiful sheet of water lying between the mountains. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN A MOTOR CAR + Or The Haunted Mansion of Shadow Valley. + +One of the girls has learned to run a big motor ear, and she invited +the club to go on a tour to visit some distant relatives. On the way +they stop at a deserted mansion and make a surprising discovery. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN A WINTER CAMP + Or Glorious Days on Skates and Ice Boats. + +In this story, the scene is shifted to a winter season. The girls have +some jolly times skating and ice boating, and visit a hunters ramp in +the big woods. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN FLORIDA + Or Wintering in the Sunny South. + +The parents of one of the girls have bought an orange grove in Florida, +and her companions are invited to visit the place. They take a trip +into the interior, where several unusual things happen. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS AT OCEAN VIEW + Or The Box that Was Found in the Sand. + +The girls have great fun and solve a mystery while on an outing along +the New England coast. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS ON PINE ISLAND + Or A Cave and What it Contained. + +A bright, healthful story, full of good times at a bungalow camp on +Pine Island. + + + +CHARMING BOOKS FOR GIRLS + + +WHEN PATTY WENT TO COLLEGE, By Jean Webster. Illustrated by C. D. +Williams. + +One of the best stories of life in a girl's college that has ever been +written. It is bright, whimsical and entertaining, lifelike, laughable +and thoroughly human. + +JUST PATTY, By Jean Webster. Illustrated by C. M. Relyea. + +Patty is full of the joy of living, fun-loving, given to ingenious +mischief for its own sake, with a disregard for pretty convention which +is an unfailing source of joy to her fellows. + +THE POOR LITTLE RICH GIRL, By Eleanor Gates. With four full page +illustrations. + +This story relates the experience of one of those unfortunate children +whose early days are passed in the companionship of a governess, seldom +seeing either parent, and famishing for natural love and tenderness. A +charming play as dramatized by the author. + +REBECCA OF SUNNYBROOK FARM, By Kate Douglas Wiggin. + +One of the most beautiful studies of childhood--Rebecca's artistic, +unusual and quaintly charming qualities stand out midst a circle of +austere New Englanders. The stage version is making a phenomenal +dramatic record. + +NEW CHRONICLES OF REBECCA, By Kate Douglas Wiggin. Illustrated by F. +C. Yohn. + +Additional episodes in the girlhood of this delightful heroine that +carry Rebecca through various stages to her eighteenth birthday. + +REBECCA MARY, By Annie Hamilton Donnell. Illustrated by Elizabeth +Shippen Green. + +This author possesses the rare gift of portraying all the grotesque +little joys and sorrows and scruples of this very small girl with a +pathos that is peculiarly genuine and appealing. + +EMMY LOU: Her Book and Heart, By George Madden Martin, illustrated by +Charles Louis Hinton. + +Emmy Lou is irresistibly lovable, because she is so absolutely real. +She is just a bewitchingly innocent, hugable little maid. The book is +wonderfully human. + + + + +BOOKS BY VICTOR APPLETON + +THE TOM SWIFT SERIES + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR-CYCLE + Or Fun and Adventures on the Road + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR-BOAT + Or The Rivals of Lake Carlopa + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP + Or the Stirring Cruise of the Red cloud + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT + Or Under the Ocean for Sunken Treasure + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT + Or the Speediest Car on the Road + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE + Or the castaways of Earthquake Island + +TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS + Or the Secret of Phantom Mountain + +TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE + Or the Wreck of the Airship + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER + Or The Quickest Flight on Record + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE + Or Daring Adventures in Elephant Land + +TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD + Or Marvelous Adventures Underground + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER + Or Seeking the Platinum Treasure + +TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY + Or A Daring Escape by Airship + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA + Or Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving Pictures + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT + Or On the Border for Uncle Sam + + + + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Tom Swift and his Wizard Camera, by Victor Appleton + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 1283 *** diff --git a/1283-h/1283-h.htm b/1283-h/1283-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c0030a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/1283-h/1283-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,8787 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<HTML> +<HEAD> + +<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=UTF-8"> + +<TITLE> +The Project Gutenberg E-text of Tom Swift and his Wizard Camera, +by Victor Appleton +</TITLE> + +<STYLE TYPE="text/css"> +BODY { color: Black; + background: White; + margin-right: 10%; + margin-left: 10%; + font-family: "Times New Roman", serif; + text-align: justify } + +P {text-indent: 4% } + +P.noindent {text-indent: 0% } + +P.poem {text-indent: 0%; + margin-left: 10%; + font-size: small } + +P.finis { text-align: center ; + text-indent: 0% ; + margin-left: 0% ; + margin-right: 0% } + +</STYLE> + +</HEAD> + +<BODY> +<div>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 1283 ***</div> + +<BR><BR> + +<H1 ALIGN="center"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA +</H1> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +or +</H3> + +<H2 ALIGN="center"> +Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving Pictures +</H2> + +<BR> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +by +</H3> + +<H2 ALIGN="center"> +VICTOR APPLETON +</H2> + + +<H2 ALIGN="center"> +CONTENTS +</H2> + +<TABLE ALIGN="center" WIDTH="80%"> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">CHAPTER</TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> </TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">I </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap01">A STRANGE OFFER</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">II </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap02">A MAN IN THE SNOW BANK</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">III </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap03">TOM MAKES UP HIS MIND</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">IV </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap04">HELD FAST</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">V </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap05">TOM GETS A WARNING</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VI </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap06">TRYING THE CAMERA</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap07">WHAT THE CAMERA CAUGHT</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VIII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap08">PHOTOS FROM THE AIRSHIP</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">IX </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap09">OFF FOR INDIA</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">X </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap10">UNEXPECTED EXCITEMENT</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XI </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap11">AN ELEPHANT STAMPEDE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap12">THE LION FIGHT</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap13">A SHOT IN TIME</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIV </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap14">IN A GREAT GALE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XV </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap15">SNAPPING AN AVALANCHE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVI </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap16">TELEGRAPH ORDERS</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap17">SUSPICIOUS STRANGERS</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVIII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap18">THE NATIVE BATTLE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIX </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap19">A HEAVY LOSS</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XX </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap20">AFTER THE ENGLISHMEN</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXI </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap21">THE JUNGLE FIRE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap22">A DANGEROUS COMMISSION</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXIII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap23">AT THE VOLCANO</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXIV </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap24">THE MOLTEN RIM</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXV </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap25">THE EARTHQUAKE—CONCLUSION</A></TD> +</TR> + +</TABLE> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap01"></A> +<H1 ALIGN="center"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA +</H1> + +<BR> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER I +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +A STRANGE OFFER +</H3> + +<P> +"Some one to see you, Mr. Tom." +</P> + +<P> +It was Koku, or August, as he was sometimes called, the new giant +servant of Tom Swift, who made this announcement to the young inventor. +</P> + +<P> +"Who is it, Koku?" inquired Tom, looking up from his work-bench in the +machine shop, where he was busy over a part of the motor for his new +noiseless airship. "Any one I know? Is it the 'Blessing Man?'" for so +Koku had come to call Mr. Damon, an eccentric friend of Tom's. +</P> + +<P> +"No, not him. A strange man. I never see before. He say he got quick +business." +</P> + +<P> +"Quick business; eh? I guess you mean important, Koku," for this +gigantic man, one of a pair that Tom had brought with him after his +captivity in "Giant Land," as he called it, could not speak English +very well, as yet. "Important business; eh, Koku? Did he send in his +card?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, Mr. Tom. Him say he have no card. You not know him, but he very +much what you call—recited." +</P> + +<P> +"Excited I guess you mean, Koku. Well, tell him to wait a few minutes, +and I'll see him. You can show him in then. But I say, Koku," and Tom +paused as he looked at the big man, who had attached himself to our +hero, as a sort of personal helper and bodyguard. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, Mr. Tom; what is it?" +</P> + +<P> +"Don't let him go poking around the shop. He might look at some of my +machines that I haven't got fully patented yet. Is he in the front +office?" +</P> + +<P> +"That's where him am. He be lookin' at pictures on the walls." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, that's all right then. Just keep him there. And, Koku, don't let +him come back in the shop here, until I get ready to see him. I'll ring +the bell when I am." +</P> + +<P> +"All right, Mr. Tom." +</P> + +<P> +Koku, very proud of his mission of keeping guard over the strange +visitor, marched from the room with his big strides, his long arms and +powerful hands swinging at his sides, for Koku, or August, as Tom had +rechristened him, and as he often called him (for it was in the month +of August that he had located the giants) was a very powerful man. A +veritable giant, being extremely tall, and big in proportion. +</P> + +<P> +"Be sure. Don't let him in here, Koku!" called Tom, in an additional +warning, as his new servant left the main shop. +</P> + +<P> +"Sure not!" exclaimed Koku, very earnestly. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know who he may be," mused Tom, as he began putting away the +parts to his new noiseless motor, so that the stranger could not see +them, and profit thereby. "It looks rather funny, not sending in his +name. It may be some one who thinks he can spring a trick on me, and +get some points about my inventions, or dad's. +</P> + +<P> +"It may even be somebody sent on by Andy Foger, or his father. I can't +be too careful. I'll just put everything away that isn't fully covered +by patents, and then if he wants to infringe on any of the machines I +can sue him." +</P> + +<P> +Tom looked about the shop, which was filled with strange machinery, +most of which had been made by himself, or his father, or under their +combined directions. There was a big biplane in one corner, a small +monoplane in another, parts of a submarine boat hanging up overhead, +and a small, but very powerful, electric auto waiting to have some +repairs made to it, for on his last trip in it Tom Swift had suffered a +slight accident. +</P> + +<P> +"There, I guess he can't see anything but what I want him to," mused +Tom, as he put away the last part of a new kind of motor, from which he +hoped great things. "Let's see, yes, it's out of sight now. I wish Ned +Newton, or Mr. Damon were here to be a witness in case he starts +anything. But then I have Koku, even if he doesn't speak much English +yet. If it comes to blows—well, I wouldn't want that giant to hit me," +finished Tom with a laugh, as he rang the bell to announce to his +servant that the visitor might be shown in. +</P> + +<P> +There was a sound outside the door that separated the business office +from the main shop, and Tom heard Koku exclaim: +</P> + +<P> +"Hold on! Wait! I go first. You wait!" +</P> + +<P> +"What's the matter with me going ahead?" demanded a quick, snappy +voice. "I'm in a hurry, and—" +</P> + +<P> +"You wait! I go first," was the giant's reply, and then came the sound +of a scuffle. +</P> + +<P> +"Ouch! Say! Hold on there, my man! Take your hand off my shoulder! +You're crushing me with those big fingers of yours!" +</P> + +<P> +This was evidently the visitor remonstrating with the giant. +</P> + +<P> +"Humph! I guess Koku must have grabbed him," said Tom softly. "I don't +like that sort of a visitor. What's his hurry getting in here?" and our +hero looked about, to see if he had a weapon at hand in case of an +attack. Often cranks had forced their way into his shop, with pet +inventions which they wanted him to perfect after they had themselves +failed. Tom saw a heavy iron bar at hand, and knew this would serve to +protect him. +</P> + +<P> +"You come after me!" exclaimed Koku, when the voice of the other had +ceased. "Do you stand under me?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, yes, I understand all right. I'll keep back. But I didn't mean +anything. I'm just in a hurry to see Tom Swift, that is all. I'm +always in a hurry in fact. I've lost nearly a thousand dollars this +morning, just by this delay. I want to see Mr. Swift at once; and have +a talk with him." +</P> + +<P> +"Another crank, I guess," mused Tom. "Well, I'm not going to waste much +time on him." +</P> + +<P> +A moment later the door opened, and into the shop stepped Koku, +followed by a short, stout, fussy little man, wearing a flaming red +tie, but otherwise his clothes were not remarkable. +</P> + +<P> +"Is this Mr. Tom Swift?" asked the stranger, as he advanced and held +out his hand to the young man. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," answered Tom, looking carefully at the visitor. He did not seem +to be dangerous, he had no weapon, and, Tom was relieved to note that +he did not carry some absurd machine, or appliance, that he had made, +hoping to get help in completing it. The youth was trying to remember +if he had ever seen the stranger before, but came to the conclusion +that he had not. +</P> + +<P> +"Sorry to take up your time," went on the man, "but I just had to see +you. No one else will do. I've heard lots about you. That was a great +stunt you pulled off, getting those giants for the circus. This is one; +isn't he?" and he nodded toward Koku. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," replied Tom, wondering if the little man was in such a hurry why +he did not get down to business. +</P> + +<P> +"I thought so," the caller went on, as he shook hands with Tom. "Once +you felt his grip you'd know he was a giant, even if you didn't see +him. Yes, that was a great stunt. And going to the caves of ice, too, +and that diamond-making affair. All of 'em great. I—" +</P> + +<P> +"How did you know about them?" interrupted Tom, wishing the man would +tell his errand. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, you're better known than you have any idea of, Tom Swift. As soon +as I got this idea of mine I said right away, to some of the others in +my business, I says, says I, 'Tom Swift is the boy for us. I'll get him +to undertake this work, and then it will be done to the Queen's taste. +Tom's the boy who can do it,' I says, and they all agreed with me. So I +came here to-day, and I'm sorry I had to wait to see you, for I'm the +busiest man in the world, I believe, and, as I said, I've lost about a +thousand dollars waiting to have a talk with you. I—" +</P> + +<P> +"I am sorry," interrupted Tom, and he was not very cordial. "But I was +busy, and—" +</P> + +<P> +"All right! All right! Don't apologize!" broke in the man in rapid +tones, while both Tom, and his servant, Koku, looked in surprise at the +quick flow of language that came from him. "Don't apologize for the +world. It's my fault for bothering you. And I'll lose several thousand +dollars, willingly, if you'll undertake this job. I'll make money from +it as it is. It's worth ten thousand dollars to you, I should say, and +I'm willing to pay that." +</P> + +<P> +He looked about, as though for a seat, and Tom, apologizing for his +neglect in offering one, shoved a box forward. +</P> + +<P> +"We don't have chairs in here," said the young inventor with a smile. +"Now if you will tell me what you—" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm coming right to it. I'll get down to business in a moment," +interrupted the man as he sat down on the box, not without a grunt or +two, for he was very stout. "I'm going to introduce myself in just a +second, and then I'm going to tell you who I am. And I hope you'll take +up my offer, though it may seem a strange one." +</P> + +<P> +The man took out a pocketbook, and began searching through it, +evidently for some card or paper. +</P> + +<P> +"He's as odd as Mr. Damon is, when he's blessing everything," mused +Tom, as he watched the man. +</P> + +<P> +"I thought I had a card with me, but I haven't," the visitor went on. +"No matter. I'm James Period—promoter of all kinds of amusement +enterprises, from a merry-go-'round to a theatrical performance. I want +you to—" +</P> + +<P> +"No more going after giants," interrupted. Tom. "It's too dangerous, +and I haven't time—" +</P> + +<P> +"No, it has nothing to do with giants," spoke Mr. Period, as he glanced +up at Koku, who towered over him as he sat on the box near Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Well?" returned Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"This is something entirely new. It has never been done before, though +if you should happen to be able to get a picture of giants don't miss +the opportunity." +</P> + +<P> +"Get a picture?" exclaimed Tom, wondering if, after all, his visitor +might not be a little insane. +</P> + +<P> +"Pictures, yes. Listen. I'm James Period. Jim, if you like it better, +or just plain 'Spotty.' That's what most of my friends call me. Get the +idea? A period is a spot. I'm a Period, therefor I'm a spot. But that +isn't the real reason. It's because I'm always Johnny on the Spot when +anything is happening. If it's a big boxing exhibition, I'm there. If +it's a coronation, I'm there, or some of my men are. If it's a Durbar +in India, you'll find Spotty on the spot. That's me. If there's going +to be a building blown up with dynamite—I'm on hand; or some of my +men. If there's a fire I get there as soon as the engines do—if it's +a big one. Always on the spot—that's me—James Period—Spotty for +short. Do you get me?" and he drew a long breath and looked at Tom, his +head on one side. +</P> + +<P> +"I understand that you are—" +</P> + +<P> +"In the moving picture business," interrupted Mr. Period, who never +seemed to let Tom finish a sentence. "I'm the biggest moving picture +man in the world—not in size, but in business. I make all the best +films. You've seen some of 'em I guess. Every one of 'em has my picture +on the end of the film. Shows up great. Advertising scheme—get me?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," replied Tom, as he recalled that he had seen some of the films +in question, and good ones they were too. "I see your point, but—" +</P> + +<P> +"You want to know why I come to you; don't you?" again interrupted +"Spotty," with a laugh. "Well, I'll tell you. I need you in my +business. I want you to invent a new kind of moving picture camera. A +small light one—worked by electricity—a regular wizard camera. I want +you to take it up in an airship with you, and then go to all sorts of +wild and strange countries, Africa, India—the jungles—get pictures of +wild animals at peace and fighting—herds of elephants—get scenes of +native wars—earthquakes—eruptions of volcanoes—all the newest and +most wonderful pictures you can. You'll have to make a new kind of +camera to do it. The kind we use won't do the trick. +</P> + +<P> +"Now do you get me? I'm going to give you ten thousand dollars, above +all your expenses, for some films such as I've been speaking of. I want +novelty. Got to have it in my business! You can do it. Now will you?" +</P> + +<P> +"I hardly think—" began Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't answer me now," broke in Mr. Period. "Take four minutes to think +it over. Or even five. I guess I can wait that long. Take five +minutes. I'll wait while you make up your mind, but I know you'll do +it. Five minutes—no more," and hastily getting up off the box Mr. +Period began impatiently pacing up and down the shop. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap02"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER II +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +A MAN IN THE SNOW BANK +</H3> + +<P> +Tom Swift looked somewhat in surprise at his strange visitor. It had +all happened so suddenly, the offer had been such a strange one, the +man himself—Mr. Period—was so odd, that our hero hardly knew what to +think. The moving picture agent continued pacing up and down the room +now and then looking at his watch as if to note when the five minutes +had passed. +</P> + +<P> +"No," said Tom to himself. "I'm not going to take this offer. There's +too much work and risk attached to it. I want to stay at home and work +on my noiseless motor for the airship. After that—well—I don't know +what I'll do. I'll tell Mr. Period that he needn't wait the five +minutes. My mind is made up now!" +</P> + +<P> +But as Tom was about to make this announcement, and dismiss his caller, +he looked again at the visitor. There was something attractive about +him—about his hasty way of talking, about his manner of interrupting, +about the way he proposed matters. Tom was interested in spite of +himself. +</P> + +<P> +"Well," he reflected, "I may as well wait until the five minutes are +up, anyhow." +</P> + +<P> +Koku, the giant servant, glanced at his young master, as if to ask if +there was anything that he could do. Tom shook his head, and then the +big man strolled over to the other side of the machine shop, at the +same time keeping a careful eye on Mr. Period. +</P> + +<P> +While Tom is waiting for the time to expire, I will take a few minutes +to tell you something more about him. Those of my friends who have read +the previous books in this series need no introduction to my hero, but +those who may chance upon this as their first book in the Tom Swift +series, will like to be more formally introduced. +</P> + +<P> +Tom, whose mother had been dead some years, lived with his father, +Barton Swift, in the town of Shopton. Mr. Swift was an inventor of +prominence, and his son was fast following in his footsteps. A Mrs. +Baggert kept house for the Swifts, and another member of the household +was Eradicate Sampson, an aged colored man, who said he used to +"eradicate" the dirt. He had been with Tom on many trips, but of late +was getting old and feeble. Then there was Garret Jackson, an engineer +employed by the Swifts. These were all the immediate members of the +household. +</P> + +<P> +Tom had a chum, Ned Newton, who used to work in a bank, and there was a +girl, Mary Nestor, a daughter of Amos Nestor, in which young lady Tom +was much interested. +</P> + +<P> +Eradicate Sampson had a mule, Boomerang, of whom he thought almost as +much as he did of Tom. Eradicate was a faithful friend and servant, +but, of late, Koku, or August, the giant, had rather supplanted him. I +must not forget Mr. Wakefield Damon, of Waterfield, a village near +Shopton. Mr. Damon was an odd man, always blessing everything. He and +Tom were good friends, and had been on many trips together. +</P> + +<P> +The first book of the series was called "Tom Swift and His +Motor-Cycle," and related how Tom bought the cycle from Mr. Damon, +after the latter had met with an accident on it, and it was in this way +that our hero became acquainted with the odd man. +</P> + +<P> +Tom had many adventures on his motor-cycle, and, later on he secured a +motor-boat, in which he beat his enemy, Andy Foger, in a race. Next Tom +built an airship, and in this he went on a wonderful trip. Returning +from this he and his father heard about a treasure sunken under the +ocean. In his submarine boat Tom secured the valuables, and made a +large sum for himself. +</P> + +<P> +In his electric runabout, which was the swiftest car on the road, Tom +was able to save from ruin a bank in which his father was interested, +and, a short time after that, he went on a trip in an airship, with a +man who had invented a new kind. The airship was smashed, and fell to +Earthquake Island, where there were some refugees from a shipwreck, +among them being the parents of Mary Nestor. In the volume called "Tom +Swift and His Wireless Message," I told how he saved these people. +</P> + +<P> +When Tom went among the diamond makers he had more strange adventures, +on that trip discovering the secret of phantom mountain. He had bad +luck when he went to the caves of ice, for there his airship was +wrecked. +</P> + +<P> +When Tom made the trip in his sky racer he broke all records for an +aerial flight, incidentally saving his father's life. It was some time +after this when he invented an electric rifle, and went to elephant +land, to rescue some missionaries from the red pygmies. +</P> + +<P> +The eleventh volume of the series is called "Tom Swift in the Land of +Gold," and relates his adventures underground, while the next one tells +of a new machine he invented—an air-glider—which he used to save the +exiles of Siberia, incidentally, on that trip, finding a valuable +deposit of platinum. +</P> + +<P> +As I have said, it was on his trip to giant land that Tom got his big +servant. This book, the thirteenth of the series, is called "Tom Swift +in Captivity," for the giants captured him and his friends, and it was +only by means of their airship that they made their daring escape. +</P> + +<P> +Tom had been back from the strange land some time now. One giant he had +turned over to the circus representative for whom he had undertaken the +mission, and the other he retained to work around his shop, as +Eradicate was getting too old. It was now winter, and there had been +quite a fall of snow the day before Mr. Period, the odd moving picture +man, called on Tom. There were many big drifts outside the building. +</P> + +<P> +Tom had fitted up a well-equipped shop, where he and his father worked +on their inventions. Occasionally Ned Newton, or Mr. Damon, would come +over to help them, but of late Tom had been so busy on his noiseless +motor that he had not had time to even see his friends. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess the five minutes have passed, and my mind is made up," +thought Tom, as he looked at his watch. "I might as well tell Mr. +Period that I can't undertake his commission. In the first place it +isn't going to be an easy matter to make an electric moving picture +camera. I'd have to spend a lot of time studying up the subject, and +then I might not be able to get it to work right. +</P> + +<P> +"And, again, I can't spare the time to go to all sorts of wild and +impossible places to get the pictures. It's all well enough to talk +about getting moving pictures of natives in battle, or wild beasts +fighting, or volcanoes in action, but it isn't so easy to do it. Then, +too, I'd have to make some changes in my airship if I went on that +trip. No, I can't go. I'll tell him he'll have to find some one else." +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Period pulled out his watch, opened it quickly, snapped it shut +again, and exclaimed: +</P> + +<P> +"Well, how about it, Tom Swift? When can you start! The sooner the +better for me! You'll want some money for expenses I think. I brought +my check book along, also a fountain pen. I'll give you a thousand +dollars now, for I know making an electric moving picture camera isn't +going to be cheap work. Then, when you get ready to start off in your +airship, you'll need more money. I'll be Johnny-on-the-spot all right, +and have it ready for you. Now when do you think you can start?" +</P> + +<P> +He sat down at a bench, and began filling out a check. +</P> + +<P> +"Hold on!" cried Tom, amused in spite of himself. "Don't sign that +check, Mr. Period. I'm not going." +</P> + +<P> +"Not going?" The man's face showed blank amazement. +</P> + +<P> +"No," went on Tom. "I can't spare the time. I'm sorry, but you'll have +to get some one else." +</P> + +<P> +"Some one else? But who can I get?" +</P> + +<P> +"Why, there are plenty who would be glad of the chance." +</P> + +<P> +"But they can't invent an electric moving picture camera, and, if they +could, they wouldn't know enough to take pictures with it. It's got to +be you or no one, Tom Swift. Look here, I'll make it fifteen thousand +dollars above expenses." +</P> + +<P> +"No, I'm sorry, but I can't go. My work here keeps me too busy. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, pshaw! Now, look here, Tom Swift! Do you know who sent me to see +you?" +</P> + +<P> +"It was Mr. Nestor, who has a daughter named Mary, I believe. Mr. +Nestor is one of the directors in our company, and one day, when he +told me about you sending a wireless message from Earthquake Island, I +knew you would be the very man for me. So now you see you'll be doing +Mr. Nestor a favor, as well as me, if you go on this trip." +</P> + +<P> +Tom was somewhat surprised, yet he realized that Mr. Period was +speaking the truth. Mr. Nestor was identified with many new +enterprises. Yet the youth was firm. +</P> + +<P> +"I really can't go," said our hero. "I'd like to, but I can't. I'd +like to oblige Mr. Nestor, for—well, for more reasons than one," and +Tom blushed slightly. "But it is out of the question. I really can't +go." +</P> + +<P> +"But you must!" insisted the camera man. "I won't take 'no' for an +answer. You've got to go, Tom Swift, do you hear that? You've go to go?" +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Period was apparently very much excited. He strode over to Tom and +smote his hands together to emphasize what he said. Then he shook his +finger at Tom, to impress the importance of the matter on our hero. +</P> + +<P> +"You've just got to go!" he cried. "You're the only one who can help +me, Tom. Do go! I'll pay you well, and—oh, well, I know you don't need +the money, exactly, but—say, you've got to go!" +</P> + +<P> +In his earnestness Mr. Period laid his hand on Tom's arm. The next +instant something happened. +</P> + +<P> +With a few big strides Koku was beside the picture man. With great +quickness he grasped Mr. Period by the coat collar, lifted him off his +feet with one hand, and walked over to a window with him, easily +lifting him above the floor. +</P> + +<P> +With one fling the giant tossed the short, stout gentleman out into a +snow bank, while Tom looked on, too surprised to do anything, even if +he had had the chance. +</P> + +<P> +"There. You touch Tom Swift again, and I sit on you and keep you under +snow!" cried the giant, while Mr. Period kicked and squirmed about in +the drift, as Tom made a leap forward to help him out. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap03"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER III +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +TOM MAKES UP HIS MIND +</H3> + +<P> +"Great Scott!" yelled the picture man. "What in the world happened to +me? Did I get kicked by that mule Boomerang of Eradicate's, that I've +heard so much about? Or was it an earthquake, such as I want to get a +picture of? What happened?" +</P> + +<P> +He was still floundering about in the deep bank of snow that was just +outside the window. Fortunately the sash had been up, and Koku had +tossed Mr. Period through the open window. Otherwise, had there been +glass, the well-meaning, but unreasoning giant would probably have +thrown his victim through that, and he might have been badly cut. Tom +had the window open for fresh air, as it was rather close in the shop. +</P> + +<P> +"Why, Koku!" exclaimed the young inventor, as he leaned out of the +window, and extended his hand to the moving picture man to help him out +of the drift. "What do you mean by that? Have you gone crazy?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, but no one shall lay hands on my master!" declared the giant half +savagely. "I have vowed to always protect you from danger, in return +for what you did for me. I saw this man lay his hand on you. In another +moment he might have killed you, had not Koku been here. There is no +danger when I am by," and he stretched out his huge arms, and looked +ferocious. "I have turned over that man, your enemy!" he added. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, you overturned me all right," admitted Mr. Period, as he got to +his feet, and crawled in through the window to the shop again. "I went +head over heels. I'm glad it was clean snow, and not a mud bank, Tom. +What in the world is the matter with him?" +</P> + +<P> +"I guess he thought you were going to harm me," said Tom in a low +voice, as the picture man came in the shop. "Koku is very devoted to +me, and sometimes he makes trouble," the youth went on. "But he means +it all for the best. I am very sorry for what happened," and Tom aided +Mr. Period in brushing the snow off his garments. "Koku, you must beg +the pardon of this gentleman," Tom directed. +</P> + +<P> +"What for?" the giant wanted to know. +</P> + +<P> +"For throwing him into the snow. It is not allowed to do such things in +this country, even though it is in Giant Land. Beg his pardon. +</P> + +<P> +"I shall not," said the giant calmly, for Tom had taught him to speak +fairly good English, though sometimes he got his words backwards. +</P> + +<P> +"The man was about to kill you, and I stopped him—I will stop him once +more, though if he does not like the snow, I can throw him somewhere +else." +</P> + +<P> +"No! No! You must not do it!" cried Tom. "He meant no harm. He is my +friend." +</P> + +<P> +"I am glad to hear you say that," exclaimed the picture man. "I have +hopes that you will do what I want." +</P> + +<P> +"He your friend?" asked Koku wonderingly.</p> + +<p>"Certainly; and you must beg +his pardon for what you did," insisted Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Very well. I am glad you did not hurt yourself," said the giant, and +with that "apology" he stalked out of the room, his feelings evidently +very much disturbed. +</P> + +<P> +"Ha! Ha!" laughed Mr. Period. "I guess he can't see any one but you, +Tom. But never mind. I know he didn't mean anything, and, as I'm none +the worse I'll forgive him. My necktie isn't spotted; is it?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, the snow didn't seem to do that any harm," replied the young +inventor, as he looked at the brilliant piece of red silk around Mr. +Period's collar. +</P> + +<P> +"I am very particular about my neckties," went on the picture man. "I +always wear one color. My friends never forget me then." +</P> + +<P> +Tom wondered how they could ever forget him, even though he wore no +tie, for his figure and face were such as to not easily be forgotten. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm glad it's not soiled," went on "Spotty" as he liked to be called. +"Now, Tom, you said you were my friend. Prove it by accepting my offer. +Build that wizard camera, and get me some moving pictures that will be +a sensation. Say you will!" +</P> + +<P> +He looked appealingly at Tom, and, remembering the rather rude and +unexpected treatment to which Koku had submitted the gentleman, Tom +felt his mind changing. Still he was not yet ready to give in. He +rather liked the idea the more he thought of it, but he felt that he +had other duties, and much to occupy him at home, especially if he +perfected his silent motor. +</P> + +<P> +"Will you go?" asked Mr. Period, picking up his fountain pen and check +book, that he had laid aside when he walked over to Tom, just before +the giant grasped him. "Say you will." +</P> + +<P> +The young inventor was silent a moment. He thought over the many +adventures he had gone through—in the caves of ice, in the city of +gold, escaping from the giants, and the red pygmies—He went over the +details of his trips through the air, of the dangers under the seas, of +those he had escaped from on Earthquake Island. Surely he was entitled +to a little rest at home. +</P> + +<P> +And yet there was a lure to it all. A certain fascination that was hard +to resist. Mr. Period must have seen what was going on in Tom's mind, +for he said: +</P> + +<P> +"I know you're going. I can see it. Why, it will be just the very thing +you need. You'll get more fame out of this thing than from any of your +other inventions. Come, say you'll do it. +</P> + +<P> +"I'll tell you what I'll do!" he went on eagerly. "After you make the +camera, and take a lot of films, showing strange and wonderful scenes, +I'll put at the end of each film, next to my picture, your name, and a +statement showing that you took the originals. How's that? Talk about +being advertised! Why you can't beat it! Millions of people will read +your name at the picture shows every night." +</P> + +<P> +"I am not looking for advertisements," said Tom, with a laugh. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, then, think of the benefit you will be to science," went on Mr. +Period quickly. "Think of the few people who have seen wild animals as +they are, of those who have ever seen an earthquake, or a volcano in +action. You can go to Japan, and get pictures of earthquakes. They have +them on tap there. And as for volcanoes, why the Andes mountains are +full of 'em. Think of how many people will be thankful to you for +showing them these wonderful scenes." +</P> + +<P> +"And think of what might happen if I should take a tumble into a crack +in the earth, or down a hot volcano, or fall into a jungle when there +was a fight on among the elephants," suggested Tom. "My airship might +take a notion to go down when I was doing the photographing," he added. +</P> + +<P> +"No. Nothing like that will happen to Tom Swift," was the confident +answer of the picture man. "I've read of your doings. You don't have +accidents that you can't get the better of. But come, I know you're +thinking of it, and I'm sure you'll go. Let me make you out this check, +sign a contract which I have all ready, and then get to work on the +camera." +</P> + +<P> +Tom was silent a moment. Then he said: +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I admit that there is something attractive about it. I hoped I +was going to stay home for a long time. But—" +</P> + +<P> +"Then you'll go!" cried Mr. Period eagerly. "Here's the money," and he +quickly filled out a check for Tom's first expenses, holding the slip +of paper toward the young inventor. +</P> + +<P> +"Wait a minute! Hold on!" cried Tom. "Not so fast if you please. I +haven't yet made up my mind." +</P> + +<P> +"But you will; won't you?" asked Mr. Period. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I'll make up my mind, one way or the other," replied the young +man. "I won't say I'll go, but—" +</P> + +<P> +"I'll tell you what I'll do!" interrupted Mr. Period. "I'm a busy man, +and every second is worth money to me. But I'll wait for you to make up +your mind. I'll give you until to-morrow night. How's that? Fair, isn't +it?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes—I think so. I am afraid—" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm not!" broke in the picture man. "I know you'll decide to go. Think +of the fun and excitement you'll have. Now I've taken up a lot of your +time, and I'm going to leave you alone. I'll be back tomorrow evening +for my answer. But I know you're going to get those moving pictures for +me. Is that giant of yours anywhere about?" he asked, as he looked +cautiously around before leaving the shop. "I don't want to fall into +his hands again." +</P> + +<P> +"I don't blame you," agreed Tom. "I never knew him to act that way +before. But I'll go to the gate with you, and Koku will behave himself. +I am sorry—" +</P> + +<P> +"Don't mention it!" broke in the picture man. "It was worth all I +suffered, if you go, and I know you will. Don't trouble yourself to +come out. I can find my way, and if your giant comes after me, I'll +call for help." +</P> + +<P> +He hurried out before Tom could follow, and, hearing the gate click a +little later, and no call for help coming, our hero concluded that his +visitor had gotten safely away. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, what am I going to do about it?" mused Tom, as he resumed work +on his silent motor. He had not been long engaged in readjusting some +of the valves, when he was again interrupted. +</P> + +<P> +This time it was his chum, Ned Newton, who entered, and, as Ned was +well known to the giant, nothing happened. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, what's up, Tom?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Why, did you notice anything unusual?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"I saw Koku standing at the gate a while ago, looking down the road at +a short stout man, with a red tie. Your giant seemed rather excited +about something." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, yes. I'll tell you about it," and Tom related the details of Mr. +Period's visit. +</P> + +<P> +"Are you going to take his offer?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"I've got until tomorrow to make up my mind. What would you do, Ned?" +</P> + +<P> +"Why, I'd take it in a minute, if I knew how to make an electric +camera. I suppose it has to be a very speedy one, to take the kind of +pictures he wants. Wait, hold on, I've just thought of a joke. It must +be a swift camera—catch on—you're Swift, and you make a swift camera; +see the point?" +</P> + +<P> +"I do," confessed Tom, with a laugh. "Well, Ned, I've been thinking it +over, but I can't decide right away. I will tomorrow night, though." +</P> + +<P> +"Then I'm coming over, and hear what it is. If you decide to go, maybe +you'll take me along." +</P> + +<P> +"I certainly will, and Mr. Damon, too." +</P> + +<P> +"How about the giant?" +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess there'll be room for him. But I haven't decided yet. +Hand me that wrench over there; will you," and then Tom and Ned began +talking about the new apparatus on which the young inventor was working. +</P> + +<P> +True to his promise Mr. Period called the next evening. He found Tom, +Ned and Mr. Swift in the library, talking over various matters. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, Tom, have you made up your mind?" asked the caller, when Mrs. +Baggert, the housekeeper, had shown him into the room. "I hope you +have, and I hope it is favorable to me." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," said Tom slowly, "I've thought it all over, and I have decided +that I will—" +</P> + +<P> +At that moment there was a loud shouting outside the house, and the +sound of some one running rapidly through the garden that was just +outside the low library window—a garden now buried deep under snow. +</P> + +<P> +"What's that?" cried Ned, jumping to his feet. +</P> + +<P> +"That was Koku's voice," replied Tom, "and I guess he was chasing after +some one." +</P> + +<P> +"They'll need help if that giant gets hold of them," spoke Mr. Period +solemnly, while the noise outside increased in volume. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap04"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER IV +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +HELD FAST +</H3> + +<P> +"Here, Tom! Come back! Where are you going?" cried aged Mr. Swift, as +his son started toward the window. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm going to see what's up, and who it is that Koku is chasing," +replied the young inventor. +</P> + +<P> +As he spoke he opened the window, which went all the way down to the +floor. He stepped out on a small balcony, put his hand on the railing, +and was about to leap over. Back of him was his father, Mr. Period and +Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Come back! You may get hurt!" urged Mr. Swift. He had aged rapidly in +the last few months, and had been obliged to give up most of his +inventive work. Naturally, he was very nervous about his son. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't worry, dad," replied the youth. "I'm not in much danger when +Koku is around." +</P> + +<P> +"That's right," agreed the moving picture man. "I'd sooner have that +giant look after me than half a dozen policemen." +</P> + +<P> +The noise had now grown fainter, but the sound of the pursuit could +still be heard. Koku was shouting in his hearty tones, and there was +the noise of breaking twigs as the chase wound in and out of the garden +shrubbery. +</P> + +<P> +Tom paused a moment, to let his eyes get somewhat used to the darkness. +There was a crescent moon, that gave a little light, and the snow on +the ground made it possible to notice objects fairly well. +</P> + +<P> +"See anything?" asked Ned, as he joined his chum on the balcony. +</P> + +<P> +"No, but I'm going to have a closer look. Here goes!" and Tom leaped to +the ground. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm with you," added Ned, as he followed. +</P> + +<P> +Then came another voice, shouting: +</P> + +<P> +"Dat's de way! Catch him! I'se comm', I is! Ef we gits him we'll tie +him up, an' let Boomerang walk on him!" +</P> + +<P> +"Here comes Eradicate," announced Tom, with a look back toward his +chum, and a moment later the aged colored man, who had evidently +started on the chase with Koku, but who had been left far behind, swung +totteringly around the corner of the house. +</P> + +<P> +"Did ye cotch him, Massa Tom?" asked Eradicate. "Did ye cotch de +raskil?" +</P> + +<P> +"Not yet, Rad. But Koku is after him. Who was he, and what did he do?" +</P> + +<P> +"Didn't do nuffin yit, Massa Tom, 'case as how he didn't git no +chance," replied the colored man, as he hurried along as rapidly as he +could beside the two youths. "Koku and I was too quick for him. Koku +an' me was a-sittin' in my shack, sort of talkin' togedder, when we +hears a racket neah de chicken house. I'se mighty partial t' de +chickens, an' I didn't want nobody t' 'sturb 'em. Koku was jes' de +same, an' when we hears dat noise, up we jumps, an' gits t' chasm.' He +runned dis way, an' us was arter him, but land lub yo', ole Eradicate +ain't so spry as he uster be an' Koku an' de chicken thief got ahead ob +me. Leastwise he ain't no chicken thief yit, 'case as how he didn't git +in de coop, but he meant t' be one, jes' de same." +</P> + +<P> +"Are you sure he was after the chickens?" asked Tom, with quick +suspicion in his mind, for, several times of late, unscrupulous persons +had tried to enter his shop, to get knowledge of his valuable +inventions before they were patented. +</P> + +<P> +"Course he were arter de chickens," replied Eradicate. "But he didn't +git none." +</P> + +<P> +"Come on, Ned!" cried Tom, breaking into a run. "I want to catch +whoever this was. Did you see him, Rad?" +</P> + +<P> +"Only jes' had a glimpse ob his back." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, you go back to the house and tell father and Mr. Period about +it. Ned and I will go on with Koku. I hope to get the fellow." +</P> + +<P> +"Why, Tom?" asked his chum. +</P> + +<P> +"Because I think he was after bigger game than chickens. My noiseless +motor, for the new airship, is nearly complete, and it may have been +some one trying to get that. I received an offer from a concern the +other day, who wished to purchase it, and, when I refused to sell, they +seemed rather put out." +</P> + +<P> +The two lads raced on, while Eradicate tottered back to the house, +where he found Mr. Swift and the picture man awaiting him. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess he got away," remarked Ned, after he and his chum had covered +nearly the length of the big garden. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm afraid so," agreed Tom. "I can't hear Koku any more. Still, I'm +not going to give up." +</P> + +<P> +Pantingly they ran on, and, a little later, they met the big man coming +back. +</P> + +<P> +"Did he get away?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, Mr. Tom, he scaped me all right." +</P> + +<P> +"Escaped you mean, Koku. Well, never mind. You did your best." +</P> + +<P> +"I would like to have hold of him," spoke the giant, as he stretched +out his big arms. +</P> + +<P> +"Did you know who he was?" inquired Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"No, I couldn't see his face," and he gave the same description of the +affair as had Eradicate. +</P> + +<P> +"Was it a full grown man, or some one about my size?" Tom wanted to +know. +</P> + +<P> +"A man," replied the giant. +</P> + +<P> +"Why do you ask that?" inquired Ned, as the big fellow went on to +resume his talk with Eradicate, and the two chums turned to go into the +house, after the fruitless chase. +</P> + +<P> +"Because, I thought it might be Andy Foger," was Tom's reply. "It +would be just like him, but if it was a man, it couldn't be him. Andy's +rather short." +</P> + +<P> +"Besides, he doesn't live here any more," said Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"I know, but I heard Sam Snedecker, who used to be pretty thick with +him, saying the other day that he expected a visit from Andy. I hope he +doesn't come back to Shopton, even for a day, for he always tries to +make trouble for me. Well, let's go in, and tell 'em all about our +chase after a chicken thief." +</P> + +<P> +"And so he got away?" remarked Mr. Swift, when Tom had completed his +story. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," answered the young inventor, as he closed, and locked, the low +library window, for there was a chilly breeze blowing. "I think I will +have to rig up the burglar alarm on my shop again. I don't want to take +any chances." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you remember what we were talking about, when that interruption +came?" asked Mr. Period, after a pause. "You were saying, Tom, that you +had made up your mind, and that was as far as you got. What is your +answer to my offer?" +</P> + +<P> +"Well," spoke the lad slowly, and with a smile, "I think I will—" +</P> + +<P> +"Now don't say 'no'"; interrupted the picture man. "If you are going to +say 'no' take five minutes more, or even ten, and think it over +carefully. I want you—" +</P> + +<P> +"I wasn't going to say 'no,'" replied Tom. "I have decided to accept +your offer, and I'll get right at work on the electrical camera, and +see what I can do in the way of getting moving pictures for you." +</P> + +<P> +"You will? Say, that's great! That's fine! I knew you would accept, but +I was the least bit afraid you might not, without more urging." +</P> + +<P> +"Of course," began Tom, "it will take—" +</P> + +<P> +"Not another word. Just wait a minute," interrupted Mr. Period in his +breezy fashion. "Take this." +</P> + +<P> +He quickly filled out a check and handed it to Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Now sign this contract, which merely says that you will do your best +to get pictures for me, and that you won't do it for any other concern, +and everything will be all right. Sign there," he added, pointing to a +dotted line, and thrusting a fountain pen into Tom's hand. The lad read +over the agreement, which was fair enough, and signed it, and Ned +affixed his name as a witness. +</P> + +<P> +"Now when can you go?" asked Mr. Period eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +"Not before Spring, I'm afraid," replied Torn. "I have first to make +the camera, and then my airship needs overhauling if I am to go on such +long trips as will be necessary in case I am to get views of wild +beasts in the jungle." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, make it as soon as you can," begged Mr. Period. "I can have the +films early next Fall then, and they will be in season for the Winter +runs at the theatres. Now, I'm the busiest man in the world, and I +believe I have lost five hundred dollars by coming here to-night. +Still, I don't regret it. I'm going back now, and I'll expect to hear +from you when you are ready to start. There's my address. Good-bye," +and thrusting a card into Tom's hand he hurried out of the room. +</P> + +<P> +"Won't you stop all night?" called Mr. Swift after him. +</P> + +<P> +"Sorry. I'd like to but can't. Got a big contract I must close in New +York to-morrow morning. I've ordered a special train to be at the +Shopton station in half an hour, and I must catch that. Good night!" +and Mr. Period hurried away. +</P> + +<P> +"Say, he's a hustler all right!" exclaimed Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, and I've got to hustle if I invent that camera," added Tom. "It's +got to be a specially fast one, and one that can take pictures from a +long distance. Electricity is the thing to use, I guess." +</P> + +<P> +"Then you are really going off on this trip. Tom?" asked his father, +rather wistfully. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm afraid I am," replied his son. "I thought I could stay at home for +a while, but it seems not." +</P> + +<P> +"I was in hopes you could give me a little time to help me on my +gyroscope invention," went on the aged man. "But I suppose it will keep +until you come back. It is nearly finished." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, and I don't like stopping work on my noiseless motor," spoke Tom. +"But that will have to wait, too." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you know where you are going?" inquired Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I'll have to do considerable traveling I suppose to get all the +films he wants. But once I'm started I'll like it I guess. Of course +you're coming, Ned." +</P> + +<P> +"I hope so." +</P> + +<P> +"Of course you are!" insisted Tom, as if that settled it. "And I'm sure +Mr. Damon will go also. I haven't seen him in some time. I hope he +isn't ill." +</P> + +<P> +Tom started work on his Wizard Camera, as he called it, the next +day—that is he began drawing the designs, and planning how to +construct it. Ned helped him, and Koku was on hand in case he was +needed, but there was little he could do, as yet. Tom made an +inspection of his shop the morning after the chicken thief scare, but +nothing seemed to have been disturbed. +</P> + +<P> +A week passed, and Tom had all the plans drawn for the camera. He had +made several experiments with different forms of electricity for +operating the mechanism, and had decided on a small, but very powerful, +storage battery to move the film, and take the pictures. +</P> + +<P> +This storage battery, which would be inside the camera, would operate +it automatically. That is, the camera could be set up any place, in the +jungle, or on the desert, it could be left alone, and would take +pictures without any one being near it. Tom planned to have it operate +at a certain set time, and stop at a certain time, and he could set the +dials to make this time any moment of the day or night. For there was +to be a powerful light in connection with the camera, in order that +night views might be taken. Besides being automatic the camera could be +worked by hand. +</P> + +<P> +When it was not necessary to have the camera operate by the storage +battery, it could be connected to wires and worked by an ordinary set +of batteries, or by a dynamo. This was for use on the airship, where +there was a big electrical machine. I shall tell you more about the +camera as the story proceeds. +</P> + +<P> +One afternoon Tom was alone in the shop, for he had sent Koku on an +errand, and Eradicate was off in a distant part of the grounds, doing +some whitewashing, which was his specialty. Ned had not come over, and +Mr. Swift, having gone to see some friends, and Mrs. Baggert being at +the store, Tom, at this particular time, was rather isolated. +</P> + +<P> +He was conducting some delicate electrical experiments, and to keep the +measuring instruments steady he had closed all the windows and doors of +his shop. The young inventor was working at a bench in one corner, and +near him, standing upright, was a heavy shaft of iron, part of his +submarine, wrapped in burlap, and padded, to keep it from rusting. +</P> + +<P> +"Now," said Tom to himself, as he mixed two kinds of acid in a jar, to +produce a new sort of electrical current, "I will see if this is any +better than the first way in which I did it." +</P> + +<P> +He was careful about pouring out the powerful stuff, but, in spite of +this, he spilled a drop on his finger. It burned like fire, and, +instinctively, he jerked his hand back. +</P> + +<P> +The next instant there was a series of happenings. Tom's elbow came in +contact with another jar of acid, knocking it over, and spilling it +into the retort where he had been mixing the first two liquids. There +was a hissing sound, as the acids combined, and a thick, white vapor +arose, puffing into Tom's face, and making him gasp. +</P> + +<P> +He staggered back, brushed against the heavy iron shaft in the corner, +and it fell sideways against him, knocking him to the floor, and +dropping across his thighs. The padding on it saved him from broken +bones, but the shaft was so heavy, that after it was on him, Tom could +not move. He was held fast on the floor of his shop, unable to use his +legs, and prevented from getting up. +</P> + +<P> +For a moment Tom was stunned, and then he called: +</P> + +<P> +"Help! Help! Eradicate! Koku! Help!" +</P> + +<P> +He waited a moment, but there was only a silence. +</P> + +<P> +And then Tom smelled a strange odor—an odor of a choking gas that +seemed to smother him. +</P> + +<P> +"It's the acids!" he cried. "They're generating gas! And I'm held fast +here! The place is closed up tight, and I can't move! Help! Help!" +</P> + +<P> +But there was no one at hand to aid Tom, and every moment the fumes of +the gas became stronger. Desperately the youth struggled to rid himself +of the weight of the shaft, but he could not. And then he felt his +senses leaving him, for the powerful gas was making him unconscious. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap05"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER V +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +TOM GETS A WARNING +</H3> + +<P> +"Bless my shoe buttons!" exclaimed a voice, as a man came toward Tom's +shop, a little later. "Bless my very necktie! This is odd. I go to the +house, and find no one there. I come out here, and not a soul is about. +Tom Swift can't have gone off on another one of his wonderful trips, +without sending me word. I know he wouldn't do that. And yet, bless my +watch and chain, I can't find any one!" +</P> + +<P> +It was Mr. Damon who spoke, as my old readers have already guessed. He +peered into one of the shop windows, and saw something like a fog +filling the place. +</P> + +<P> +"That's strange," he went on. "I don't see Tom there, and yet it looks +as if an experiment was going on. I wonder—" +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Damon heard some one coming up behind him, and turned to see Koku +the giant, who was returning from the errand on which Tom had sent him. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, Koku, it's you; is it?" the odd man asked. "Bless my cuff buttons! +Where is Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"In shop I guess." +</P> + +<P> +"I don't see him. Still I had better look. There doesn't seem to be any +one about." +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Damon opened the shop door, and was met by such an outward rush of +choking gas that he staggered back. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my—" he began but he had to stop, to cough and gasp. "There +must have been some sort of an accident," he cried, as he got his lungs +full of fresh air. "A bad accident! Tom could never work in that +atmosphere. Whew!" +</P> + +<P> +"Accident! What is matter?" cried Koku stepping to the doorway. He, +too choked and gasped, but his was such a strong and rugged nature, and +his lungs held such a supply of air, that it took more than mere gas to +knock him out. He peered in through the wreaths of the acid vapor, and +saw the body of his master, lying on the floor—held down by the heavy +iron. +</P> + +<P> +In another instant Koku had rushed in, holding his breath, for, now +that he was inside the place, the gas made even him feel weak. +</P> + +<P> +"Come back! Come back!" cried Mr. Damon. "You'll be smothered! Wait +until the gas escapes!" +</P> + +<P> +"Then Mr. Tom die!" cried the giant. "I get him—or I no come out." +</P> + +<P> +With one heave of his powerful right arm, Koku lifted the heavy shaft +from Tom's legs. Then, gathering the lad up in his left arm, as if he +were a baby, Koku staggered out into the fresh air, almost falling with +his burden, as he neared Mr. Damon, for the giant was, well-nigh +overcome. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my soul!" cried the odd man. "Is he—is he—" +</P> + +<P> +He did not finish the sentence, but, as Koku laid Tom down on the +overcoat of Mr. Damon, which the latter quickly spread on the snow, the +eccentric man put his hand over the heart of the young inventor. +</P> + +<P> +"It beats!" he murmured. "He's alive, but very weak. We must get a +doctor at once. I'll do what I can. There's no time to spare. Bless +my—" +</P> + +<P> +But Mr. Damon concluded that there was no time for blessing anything, +and so he stopped short. +</P> + +<P> +"Carry him up to the house, Koku," he said. "I know where there are +some medicines, and I'll try to revive him while we're waiting for the +doctor Hurry!" +</P> + +<P> +Tom was laid on a lounge, and, just then, Mrs. Baggert came in. +</P> + +<P> +"Telephone for the doctor!" cried Mr. Damon to the housekeeper, who +kept her nerve, and did not get excited. "I'll give Tom some ammonia, +and other stimulants, and see if I can bring him around. Koku, get me +some cold water." +</P> + +<P> +The telephone was soon carrying the message to the doctor, who promised +to come at once. Koku, in spite of his size, was quick, and soon +brought the water, into which Mr. Damon put some strong medicine, that +he found in a closet. Tom's eyelids fluttered as the others forced some +liquid between his lips. +</P> + +<P> +"He's coming around!" cried the eccentric man. "I guess he'll be all +right, Koku." +</P> + +<P> +"Koku glad," said the giant simply, for he loved Tom with a deep +devotion. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, Koku, if it hadn't been for you, though, I don't believe that he +would be alive. That was powerful gas, and a few seconds more in there +might have meant the end of Tom. I didn't see him lying on the floor, +until after you rushed in. Bless my thermometer! It is very strange." +</P> + +<P> +They gave Tom more medicine, rubbed his arms and legs, and held ammonia +under his nose. Slowly he opened his eyes, and in a faint voice asked: +</P> + +<P> +"Where—am—I?" +</P> + +<P> +"In your own house," replied Mr. Damon, cheerfully. "How do you feel?" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm—all—right—now," said Tom slowly. He, felt his strength coming +gradually back, and he remembered what had happened, though he did not +yet know how he had been saved. The doctor came in at this moment, with +a small medical battery, which completed the restorative work begun by +the others. Soon Tom could sit up, though he was still weak and rather +sick. +</P> + +<P> +"Who brought me out?" he asked, when he had briefly told how the +accident occurred. +</P> + +<P> +"Koku did," replied Mr. Damon. "I guess none of the rest of us could +have lifted the iron shaft from your legs." +</P> + +<P> +"It's queer how that fell," said Tom, with a puzzled look on his face. +"I didn't hit it hard enough to bring it down. Beside, I had it tied to +nails, driven into the wall, to prevent just such an accident as this. +I must see about it when I get well." +</P> + +<P> +"Not for a couple of days," exclaimed the doctor grimly. "You've got +to stay in bed a while yet. You had a narrow escape, Tom Swift." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I'm glad I went to Giant Land," said the young inventor, with a +wan smile. "Otherwise I'd never have Koku," and he looked +affectionately at the big man, who laughed happily. In nature Koku was +much like a child. +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Swift came home a little later, and Ned Newton called, both being +very much surprised to hear of the accident. As for Eradicate, the poor +old colored man was much affected, and would have sat beside Tom's bed +all night, had they allowed him. +</P> + +<P> +Our hero recovered rapidly, once the fumes of the gas left his system, +and, two days later, he was able to go out to the shop again. At his +request everything had been left just as it was after he had been +brought out. Of course the fumes of the gas were soon dissipated, when +the door was opened, and the acids, after mingling and giving off the +vapor, had become neutralized, so that they were now harmless. +</P> + +<P> +"Now I'm going to see what made that shaft fall," said Tom to Ned, as +the two chums walked over to the bench where the young inventor had +been working. "The tap I gave it never ought to have brought it down." +</P> + +<P> +Together they examined the thin, but strong, cords that had been passed +around the shaft, having been fastened to two nails, driven into the +wall. +</P> + +<P> +"Look!" cried Tom, pointing to one of the cords. +</P> + +<P> +"What is it?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"The strands were partly cut through, so that only a little jar was +enough to break the remaining ones," went on Tom. "They've been cut +with a knife, too, and not frayed by vibration against the nail, as +might be the case. Ned, someone has been in my shop, meddling, and he +wanted this shaft to fall. This is a trick!" +</P> + +<P> +"Great Scott, Tom! You don't suppose any one wanted that shaft to fall +on you; do you?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, I don't believe that. Probably some one wanted to damage the +shaft, or he might have thought it would topple over against the bench, +and break some of my tools, instruments or machinery. I do delicate +experiments here, and it wouldn't take much of a blow to spoil them. +That's why those cords were cut." +</P> + +<P> +"Who did it? Do you think Andy Foger—" +</P> + +<P> +"No, I think it was the man Koku thought was a chicken thief, and whom +we chased the other night. I've got to be on my guard. I wonder if—" +</P> + +<P> +Tom was interrupted by the appearance of Koku, who came out of the shop +with a letter the postman had just left. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know that writing very well, and yet it looks familiar," said +Tom, as he tore open the missive. "Hello, here's more trouble!" he +exclaimed as he hastily read it. +</P> + +<P> +"What's up now?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"This is from Mr. Period, the picture man," went on the young inventor. +"It's a warning." +</P> + +<P> +"A warning?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. He says: +</P> + +<BR> + +<P> +"'Dear Tom. Be on your guard. I understand that a rival moving picture +concern is after you. They want to make you an offer, and get you away +from me. But I trust you. Don't have anything to do with these other +fellows. And, at the same time, don't give them a hint as to our plans. +Don't tell them anything about your new camera. There is a lot of +jealousy and rivalry in this business and they are all after me. +They'll probably come to see you, but be on your guard. They know that +I have been negotiating with you. Remember the alarm the other night.'" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap06"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER VI +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +TRYING THE CAMERA +</H3> + +<P> +"Well, what do you think of that?" cried Ned, as his chum finished. +</P> + +<P> +"It certainly isn't very pleasant," replied Tom. "I wonder why those +chaps can't let me alone? Why don't they invent cameras of their own? +Why are they always trying to get my secret inventions?" +</P> + +<P> +"I suppose they can't do things for themselves," answered Ned. "And +then, again, your machinery always works, Tom, and some that your +rivals make, doesn't." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, maybe that's it," admitted our hero, as he put away the letter. +"I will be on the watch, just as I have been before. I've got the +burglar alarm wires adjusted on the shop now, and when these rival +moving picture men come after me they'll get a short answer." +</P> + +<P> +For several days nothing happened, and Tom and Ned worked hard on the +Wizard Camera. It was nearing completion, and they were planning, soon, +to give it a test, when, one afternoon, two strangers, in a powerful +automobile, came to the Swift homestead. They inquired for Tom, and, +as he was out in the shop, with Ned and Koku, and as he often received +visitors out there, Mrs. Baggert sent out the two men, who left their +car in front of the house. +</P> + +<P> +As usual, Tom had the inner door to his shop locked, and when Koku +brought in a message that two strangers would like to see the young +inventor, Tom remarked: +</P> + +<P> +"I guess it's the rival picture men, Ned. We'll see what they have to +say." +</P> + +<P> +"Which of you is Tom Swift?" asked the elder of the two men, as Tom and +Ned entered the front office, for our hero knew better than to admit +the strangers to the shop. +</P> + +<P> +"I am," replied Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, we're men of business," went on the speaker, "and there is no +use beating about the bush. I am Mr. Wilson Turbot, and this is my +partner, Mr. William Eckert. We are in the business of making moving +picture films, and I understand that you are associated with Mr. Period +in this line. 'Spotty' we call him." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I am doing some work for Mr. Period," admitted Tom, cautiously. +</P> + +<P> +"Have you done any yet?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, but I expect to." +</P> + +<P> +"What kind of a camera are you going to use?" asked Mr. Eckert eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +"I must decline to answer that," replied Tom, a bit stiffly. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, that's all right," spoke Mr. Turbot, good naturedly. "Only +'Spotty' was bragging that you were making a new kind of film for him, +and we wondered if it was on the market." +</P> + +<P> +"We are always looking for improvements," added Mr. Eckert. +</P> + +<P> +"This camera isn't on the market," replied Tom, on his guard as to how +he answered. +</P> + +<P> +The two men whispered together for a moment, and then Mr. Turbot said: +</P> + +<P> +"Well, as I remarked, we're men of business, and there's no use beating +about the bush. We've heard of you, Tom Swift, and we know you can do +things. Usually, in this world, every man has his price, and we're +willing to pay big to get what we want. I don't know what offer Mr. +Period made to you, but I'll say this: We'll give you double what he +offered, for the exclusive rights to your camera, whenever it's on the +market, and we'll pay you a handsome salary to work for us." +</P> + +<P> +"I'm sorry, but I can't consider the offer," replied Tom firmly. "I +have given my word to Mr. Period. I have a contract with him, and I +cannot break it." +</P> + +<P> +"Offer him three times what Period did," said Mr. Eckert, in a hoarse +whisper that Tom heard. +</P> + +<P> +"It would be useless!" exclaimed our hero. "I wouldn't go back on my +word for a hundred times the price I am to get. I am not in this +business so much for the money, as I am for the pleasure of it." +</P> + +<P> +The men were silent a moment. There were ugly looks on their faces. +They looked sharply at Tom and Ned. Then Mr. Eckert said: +</P> + +<P> +"You'll regret this, Tom Swift. We are the biggest firm of moving +picture promoters in the world. We always get what we want." +</P> + +<P> +"You won't get my camera," replied Tom calmly. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know about that!" exclaimed Mr. Turbot, as he made a hasty +stride toward Tom, who stood in front of the door leading to the +shop—the shop where his camera, almost ready for use, was on a bench. +"I guess if we—" +</P> + +<P> +"Koku!" suddenly called Tom. +</P> + +<P> +The giant stepped into the front office. He had been standing near the +door, inside the main shop. Mr. Turbot who had stretched forth his +hand, as though to seize Tom, and his companion, who had advanced +toward Ned, fairly jumped back in fright at the sight of the big man. +</P> + +<P> +"Koku," went on Tom, in even tones, "just show these gentlemen to the +front door—and lock it after them," he added significantly, as he +turned back into the shop, followed by Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, Mr. Tom," answered the giant, and then, with his big hand, and +brawny fist, he gently turned the two men toward the outer door. They +were gasping in surprise as they looked at the giant. +</P> + +<P> +"You'll be sorry for this, Tom Swift!" exclaimed Mr. Turbot. "You'll +regret not having taken our offer. This Period chat is only a small +dealer. We can do better by you. You'll regret—" +</P> + +<P> +"You'll regret coming here again," snapped Tom, as he closed the door +of his shop, leaving Koku to escort the baffled plotters to their auto. +Shortly afterward Tom and Ned heard the car puffing away. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, they came, just as Mr. Period said they would," spoke Tom, +slowly. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, and they went away again!" exclaimed Ned with a laugh. "They had +their trip for nothing. Say, did you see how they stared at Koku?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, he's a helper worth having, in cases like these." +</P> + +<P> +Tom wrote a full account of what had happened and sent it to Mr. +Period. He received in reply a few words, thanking him for his loyalty, +and again warning him to be on his guard. +</P> + +<P> +In the meanwhile, work went on rapidly on the Wizard Camera. Briefly +described it was a small square box, with a lens projecting from it. +Inside, however, was complicated machinery, much too complicated for me +to describe. Tom Swift had put in his best work on this wonderful +machine. As I have said, it could be worked by a storage battery, by +ordinary electric current from a dynamo, or by hand. On top was a new +kind of electric light. This was small and compact, but it threw out +powerful beams. With the automatic arrangement set, and the light +turned on, the camera could be left at a certain place after dark, and +whatever went on in front of it would be reproduced on the moving roll +of film inside. +</P> + +<P> +In the morning the film could be taken out, developed, and the pictures +thrown on a screen in the usual way, familiar to all who have been in a +moving picture theatre. With the reproducing machines Tom had nothing +to do, as they were already perfected. His task had been to make the +new-style camera, and it was nearly completed. +</P> + +<P> +A number of rolls of films could be packed into the camera, and they +could be taken out, or inserted, in daylight. Of course after one film +had been made, showing any particular scene any number of films could +be made from this "master" one. Just as is done with the ordinary +moving picture camera. Tom had an attachment to show when one roll was +used, and when another needed inserting. +</P> + +<P> +For some time after the visit of the rival moving picture men, Tom was +on his guard. Both house and shop were fitted with burglar alarms, but +they did not ring. Eradicate and Koku were told to be on watch, but +there was nothing for them to do. +</P> + +<P> +"Well," remarked Tom to Ned, one afternoon, when they had both worked +hard, "I think it's about finished. Of course it needs polishing, and +there may be some adjusting to do, but my camera is now ready to take +pictures—at least I'm going to give it a test." +</P> + +<P> +"Have you the rolls of films?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, half a dozen of 'em And I'm going to try the hardest test first." +</P> + +<P> +"Which one is that?" +</P> + +<P> +"The night test. I'm going to place the camera out in the yard, facing +my shop. Then you and I, and some of the others, will go out, pass in +front of it, do various stunts, and, in the morning we'll develop the +films and see what we have." +</P> + +<P> +"Why, are you going to leave the camera out, all night?" +</P> + +<P> +"Sure. I'm going to give it the hardest kind of a test." +</P> + +<P> +"But are you and I going to stay up all night to do stunts in front of +it?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, indeed. I'm going to let it take what ever pictures happen to come +along to be taken after we get through making some special early ones. +You see my camera will be a sort of watch dog, only of course it won't +catch any one—that is, only their images will be caught on the film. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I see," exclaimed Ned, and then he helped Tom fix the machine for +the test. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap07"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER VII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +WHAT THE CAMERA CAUGHT +</H3> + +<P> +"Well, is she working, Tom?" asked our hero's chum, a little later, +when they had set the camera up on a box in the garden. It pointed +toward the main shop door, and from the machine came a clicking sound. +The electric light was glowing. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, it's all ready," replied Tom. "Now just act as if it wasn't +there. You walk toward the shop. Do anything you please. Pretend you +are coming in to see me on business. Act as if it was daytime. I'll +stand here and receive you. Later, I'll get dad out here, Koku and +Eradicate. I wish Mr. Period was here to see the test, but perhaps it's +just as well for me to make sure it works before he sees it." +</P> + +<P> +"All right, Tom, here I come." +</P> + +<P> +Ned advanced toward the shop. He tried to act as though the camera was +not taking pictures of him, at the rate of several a second, but he +forgot himself, and turned to look at the staring lens. Then Tom, with +a laugh, advanced to meet him, shaking hands with him. Then the lads +indulged in a little skylarking. They threw snowballs at each other, +taking care, however to keep within range of the lens. Of course when +Tom worked the camera himself, he could point it wherever he wanted to, +but it was now automatic. +</P> + +<P> +Then the lads went to the shop, and came out again. They did several +other things. Later Koku, and Eradicate did some "stunts," as Tom +called them. Mr. Swift, too, was snapped, but Mrs. Baggert refused to +come out. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess that will do for now," said Tom, as he stopped the +mechanism. "I've just thought of something," he added. "If I leave the +light burning, it will scare away, before they got in front of the +lens, any one who might come along. I'll have to change that part of +it." +</P> + +<P> +"How can you fix it?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Easily. I'll rig up some flash lights, just ordinary photographing +flashlights, you know. I'll time them to go off one after the other, +and connect them with an electric wire to the door of my shop." +</P> + +<P> +"Then your idea is—" began Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"That some rascals may try to enter my shop at night. Not this +particular night, but any night. If they come to-night we'll be ready +for them." +</P> + +<P> +"An' can't yo'-all take a picture ob de chicken coop?" asked Eradicate. +"Dat feller may come back t' rob mah hens." +</P> + +<P> +"With the lens pointing toward the shop," spoke Tom, "it will also take +snap shots of any one who tries to enter the coop. So, if the chicken +thief does come, Rad, we'll have a picture of him." +</P> + +<P> +Tom and Ned soon had the flashlights in place, and then they went to +bed, listening, at times, for the puff that would indicate that the +camera was working. But the night passed without incident, rather to +Tom's disappointment. However, in the morning, he developed the film of +the first pictures taken in the evening. Soon they were dry enough to +be used in the moving picture machine, which Tom had bought, and set up +in a dark room. +</P> + +<P> +"There we are!" he cried, as the first images were thrown on the white +screen. "As natural as life, Ned! My camera works all right!" +</P> + +<P> +"That's so. Look! There's where I hit you with a snowball!" cried his +chum, as the skylarking scene was reached. +</P> + +<P> +"Mah goodness!" cried Eradicate, when he saw himself walking about on +the screen, as large as life. "Dat shorely am wonderful." +</P> + +<P> +"It is spirits!" cried Koku, as he saw himself depicted. +</P> + +<P> +"I wish we had some of the other pictures to show," spoke Tom. "I mean +some unexpected midnight visitors." +</P> + +<P> +For several nights in succession the camera was set to "snap" any one +who might try to enter the shop. The flashlights were also in place. +Tom and Ned, the latter staying at his chum's house that week, were +beginning to think they would have their trouble for their pains. But +one night something happened. +</P> + +<P> +It was very dark, but the snow on the ground made a sort of glow that +relieved the blackness. The camera had been set as usual, and Tom and +Ned went to bed. +</P> + +<P> +It must have been about midnight when they were both awakened by +hearing the burglar alarm go off. At the same time there were several +flashes of fire from the garden. +</P> + +<P> +"There she goes!" cried Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, they're trying to get into the shed," added Tom, as a glance at +the burglar-alarm indicator on the wall of the room, showed that the +shop door was being tried. "Come on!" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm with you!" yelled Ned. +</P> + +<P> +They lost little time getting into their clothes, for they had laid +them out in readiness for putting on quickly. Down the stairs they +raced, but ere they reached the garden they heard footsteps running +along the wall toward the road. +</P> + +<P> +"Who's there?" cried Tom, but there was no answer. +</P> + +<P> +"Koku! Eradicate!" yelled Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Yais, sah, I'se comm'!" answered the colored man, and the voice of the +giant was also heard. The flashlights had ceased popping before this, +and when the two lads and their helpers had reached the shop, there was +no one in sight. +</P> + +<P> +"The camera's there all right!" cried Tom in relief as he picked it up +from the box. "Now to see what it caught. Did you see anything of the +fellows, Koku, or Eradicate?" Both said they had not, but Eradicate, +after examining the chicken house door by the aid of a lighted match, +cried out: +</P> + +<P> +"Somebody's been tryin' t' git in heah, Massa Tom. I kin see where de +do's been scratched." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, maybe we'll have the picture for you to look at in the morning," +said Tom. +</P> + +<P> +The films were developed in the usual way in the morning, but the +pictures were so small that Tom could not make out the features or +forms of the men. And it was plain that at least three men had been +around the coop and shop. +</P> + +<P> +By the use of alcohol and an electric fan Tom soon had the films dry +enough to use. Then the moving picture machine was set up in a dark +room, and all gathered to see what would be thrown on the screen, +greatly enlarged. +</P> + +<P> +First came several brilliant flashes of light, and then, as the +entrance to the shop loomed into view, a dark figure seemed to walk +across the canvas. But it did not stop at the shop door. Instead it +went to the chicken coop, and, as the man reached that door, he began +working to get it open. Of course it had all taken place in a few +seconds, for, as soon as the flashlights went off, the intruders had +run away. But they had been there long enough to have their pictures +taken. +</P> + +<P> +The man at the chicken coop turned around as the lights flashed, and he +was looking squarely at the camera. Of course this made his face very +plain to the audience, as Tom turned the crank of the reproducing +machine. +</P> + +<P> +"Why, it's a colored man!" cried Ned in surprise. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I guess it's only an ordinary chicken thief, after all," remarked +Tom. +</P> + +<P> +There was a gasp from Eradicate. +</P> + +<P> +"Fo' de land sakes!" he cried. "De raskil! Ef dat ain't mah own second +cousin, what libs down by de ribber! An' to t'ink dat Samuel 'Rastus +Washington Jackson Johnson, mah own second cousin, should try t' rob +mah chicken coop! Oh, won't I gib it t' him!" +</P> + +<P> +"Are you sure, Rad?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Suah? Sartin I'se suah, Massa Tom," was the answer as the startled +colored man on the screen stared at the small audience. "I'd know dat +face ob his'n anywhere." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess he's the only one we caught last night," said Tom, as +the disappointed chicken thief ran away, and so out of focus. But the +next instant there came another series of flashlight explosions on the +screen, and there, almost as plainly as if our friends were looking at +them, they saw two men stealthily approaching the shop. They, too, as +the chicken thief had done, tried the door, and then, they also, +startled by the flashes, turned around. +</P> + +<P> +"Look!" cried Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Great Scott!" exclaimed Tom. "Those are the two rivals of Mr. Period! +They are Mr. Turbot and Mr. Eckert!" +</P> + +<P> +"Same men I pushed out!" cried Koku, much excited. +</P> + +<P> +There was no doubt of it, and, as the images faded from the screen, +caused by the men running away, Tom and Ned realized that their rivals +had tried to put their threat into execution—the threat of making Tom +wish he had taken their offer. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess they came to take my camera,—but, instead the camera took +them," said the young inventor grimly. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap08"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER VIII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +PHOTOS FROM THE AIRSHIP +</H3> + +<P> +"Well, Tom, how is it going?" asked a voice at the door of the shop +where the young inventor was working. He looked up quickly to behold +Mr. Nestor, father of Mary, in which young lady, as I have said, Tom +was much interested. "How is the moving picture camera coming on?" +</P> + +<P> +"Pretty good, Mr. Nestor. Come in. I guess Koku knew you all right. I +told him to let in any of my friends, but I have to keep him there on +guard." +</P> + +<P> +"So I understand. They nearly got in the other night, but I hear that +your camera caught them." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, that proved that the machine is a success, even if we didn't +succeed in arresting the men." +</P> + +<P> +"Did you try?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I sent copies of the film, showing Turbot and Eckert trying to +break into my shop, to Mr. Period, and he had enlarged photographs +made, and went to the police. They said it was rather flimsy evidence +on which to arrest anybody, and so they didn't act. However, we sent +copies of the pictures to Turbot and Eckert themselves, so they know +that we know they were here, and I guess they'll steer clear of me +after this." +</P> + +<P> +"I guess so, Tom," agreed Mr. Nestor with a laugh. "But what about the +chicken thief?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, Eradicate attended to his second cousin. He went to see him, +showed him a print from the film, and gave him to understand that he'd +be blown up with dynamite, or kicked by Boomerang, if he ever came +around here again, and so Samuel 'Rastus Washington Jackson Johnson +will be careful about visiting strange chicken coops, after this." +</P> + +<P> +"I believe you, Tom. But how is the camera coming on?" +</P> + +<P> +"Very well. I am making a few changes in it, and I expect to get my +biggest airship in readiness for the trip in about a week, and then +I'll try taking pictures from her. But I understand that you are +interested in Mr. Period's business, Mr. Nestor?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I own some stock in the company, and, Tom, that's what I came +over to see you about. I need a vacation. Mary and her mother are going +away this Spring for a long visit, and I was wondering if you couldn't +take me with you on the trips you will make to get moving pictures for +our concern." +</P> + +<P> +"Of course I can, Mr. Nestor. I'll be glad to do it." +</P> + +<P> +"And there is another thing, Tom," went on Mr. Nestor, soberly. "I've +got a good deal of my fortune tied up in this moving picture affair. I +want to see you win out—I don't want our rivals to get ahead of us." +</P> + +<P> +"They shan't get ahead of us." +</P> + +<P> +"You see, Tom, it's this way. There is a bitter fight on between our +concern and that controlled by our rivals. Each is trying to get the +business of a large chain of moving picture theatres throughout the +United States. These theatre men are watching us both, and the +contracts for next season will go to the concern showing the best line +of films. If our rivals get ahead of us—well, it will just about ruin +our company,—and about ruin me too, I guess." +</P> + +<P> +"I shall do my very best," answered our hero. +</P> + +<P> +"Is Mr. Damon going along?" +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I have just written to ask him. I sent the letter yesterday. +</P> + +<P> +"Doesn't he know what you contemplate?" +</P> + +<P> +"Not exactly. You see when he came, that time I was overcome by the +fumes from the acids, everything was so upset that I didn't get a +chance to tell him. He's been away on business ever since, but returned +yesterday. I certainly hope that he goes with us. Ned Newton is +coming, and with you, and Koku and myself, it will be a nicer party." +</P> + +<P> +"Then you are going to take Koku?" +</P> + +<P> +"I think I will. I'm a little worried about what these rival moving +picture men might do, and if I get into trouble with them, my giant +helper would come in very useful, to pick one up and throw him over a +tree top, for instance." +</P> + +<P> +"Indeed, yes," agreed Mr. Nestor, with a laugh. "But I hope nothing +like that happens." +</P> + +<P> +"Nothing like that happens?" suddenly asked a voice. "Bless my +bookcase! but there always seems to be something going on here. What's +up now, Tom Swift?" +</P> + +<P> +"Nothing much, Mr. Damon," replied our hero, as he recognized his odd +friend. "We were just talking about moving pictures, Mr. Damon, and +about you. Did you get my letter?" +</P> + +<P> +"I did, Tom." +</P> + +<P> +"And are you going with us?" +</P> + +<P> +"Tom, did you ever know me to refuse an invitation from you? I guess +not! Of course I'm going. But, for mercy sakes, don't tell my wife! She +mustn't know about it until the last minute, and then she'll be so +surprised, when I tell her, that she won't think of objecting. Don't +let her know." +</P> + +<P> +Tom laughed, and promised, and then the three began talking of the +prospective trip. After a bit Ned Newton joined the party. +</P> + +<P> +Tom showed the two men how his new camera worked. He had made several +improvements on it since the first pictures were taken, and now it was +almost perfect. Mr. Period had been out to see it work, and said it was +just the apparatus needed. +</P> + +<P> +"You can get films with that machine," he said, "that will be better +than any pictures ever thrown on a screen. My fortune will be made, +Tom, and yours too, if you can only get pictures that are out of the +ordinary. There will be some hair-raising work, I expect, but you can +do it." +</P> + +<P> +"I'll try," spoke Tom. "I have—" +</P> + +<P> +"Hold on! I know what you are going to say," interrupted Mr. Period. +"You are going to say that you've gone through some strenuous times +already. I know you have, but you're going to have more soon. I think +I'll send you to India first." +</P> + +<P> +"To India!" exclaimed Tom, for Mr. Period had spoken of that as if it +was but a journey downtown. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, India. I want a picture of an elephant drive, and if you can get +pictures of the big beasts in a stampede, so much the better. Then, +too, the Durbar is on now, and that will make a good film. How soon can +you start for Calcutta?" +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I've got to overhaul the airship," said Tom. "That will take +about three weeks. The camera is practically finished. I can leave in a +month, I guess." +</P> + +<P> +"Good. We'll have fine weather by that time. Are you going all the way +by your airship?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, I think it will be best to take that apart, ship it by steamer, +and go that way ourselves. I can put the airship together in India, and +then use it to get to any other part of Europe, Asia or Africa you +happen to want pictures from." +</P> + +<P> +"Good! Well, get to work now, and I'll see you again." +</P> + +<P> +In the days that followed, Tom and Ned were kept busy. There was +considerable to do on the airship, in the way of overhauling it. This +craft was Tom's largest, and was almost like the one in which he had +gone to the caves of ice, where it was wrecked. It had been, however, +much improved. +</P> + +<P> +The craft was a sort of combined dirigible balloon, and aeroplane, and +could be used as either. There was a machine on board for generating +gas, to use in the balloon part of it, and the ship, which was named +the Flyer, could carry several persons. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my shoe laces!" cried Mr. Damon one day as he looked at Koku. +"If we take him along in the airship, will we be able to float, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, yes. The airship is plenty big enough. Besides, we are not going +to take along a very large party, and the camera is not heavy. Oh, +we'll be all right. I suppose you'll be on hand to-morrow, Mr. Damon?" +</P> + +<P> +"To-morrow? What for?" +</P> + +<P> +"We're going to take the picture machine up in the airship, and get +some photos from the sky. I expect to make some films from high in the +air, as well as some in the regular way, on the ground, and I want a +little practice. Come around about two o'clock, and we'll have a trial +flight." +</P> + +<P> +"All right. I will. But don't let my wife know I'm going up in an +airship again. She's read of so many accidents lately, that she's +nervous about having me take a trip." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I won't tell," promised Tom with a laugh, and he worked away +harder than ever, for there were many little details to perfect. The +weather was now getting warm, as there was an early spring, and it was +pleasant out of doors. +</P> + +<P> +The moving picture camera was gotten in readiness. Extra rolls of films +were on hand, and the big airship, in which they were to go up, for +their first test of taking pictures from high in the air, had been +wheeled out of the shed. +</P> + +<P> +"Are you going up very far?" asked Mr. Nestor of Tom, and the young +inventor thought that Mary's father was a trifle nervous. He had not +made many flights, and then only a little way above the ground, with +Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Not very high," replied our hero. "You see I want to get pictures that +will be large, and if I'm too far away I can't do it." +</P> + +<P> +"Glad to hear it," replied Mr. Nestor, with a note of relief in his +voice. "Though I suppose to fall a thousand feet isn't much different +from falling a hundred when you consider the results." +</P> + +<P> +"Not much," admitted Tom frankly. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my feather bed!" cried Mr. Damon. "Please don't talk of falling, +when we're going up in an airship. It makes me nervous." +</P> + +<P> +"We'll not fall!" declared Tom confidently. +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Period sent his regrets, that he could not be present at the trial, +stating in his letter that he was the busiest man in the world, and +that his time was worth about a dollar a minute just at present. He, +however, wished Tom all success. Tom's first effort was to sail along, +with the lens of the camera pointed straight toward the earth. He would +thus get, if successful, a picture that, when thrown on the screen, +would give the spectators the idea that they were looking down from a +moving balloon. For that reason Tom was not going to fly very high, as +he wanted to get all the details possible. +</P> + +<P> +"All aboard!" cried the young inventor, when he had seen to it that his +airship was in readiness for a flight. The camera had been put aboard, +and the lens pointed toward earth through a hole in the main cabin +floor. All who were expected to make the trip with Tom were on hand, +Koku taking the place of Eradicate this time, as the colored man was +too aged and feeble to go along. +</P> + +<P> +"All ready?" asked Ned, who stood in the steering tower, with his hand +on the starting lever, while Tom was at the camera to see that it +worked properly. +</P> + +<P> +"All ready," answered the young inventor, and, an instant later, they +shot upward, as the big propellers whizzed around. +</P> + +<P> +Tom at once started the camera to taking pictures rapidly, as he wanted +the future audience to get a perfect idea of how it looked to go up in +a balloon, leaving the earth behind. Then as the Flyer moved swiftly +over woods and fields, Tom moved the lens from side to side, to get +different views. +</P> + +<P> +"Say! This is great!" cried Mr. Nestor, to whom air-riding was much of +a novelty. "Are you getting good pictures, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"I can't tell until we develop them. But the machine seems to be +working all right. I'm going to sail back now, and get some views of +our own house from up above." +</P> + +<P> +They had sailed around the town of Shopton, to the neighboring +villages, over woods and fields. Now they were approaching Shopton +again. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my heart!" suddenly exclaimed Mr. Damon, who was looking toward +the earth, as they neared Tom's house. +</P> + +<P> +"What is it?" asked our hero, glancing up from the picture machine, the +registering dial of which he was examining. +</P> + +<P> +"Look there! At your shop, Tom! There seems to be a lot of smoke coming +from it!" +</P> + +<P> +They were almost over Tom's shop now, and, as Mr. Damon had said, there +was considerable smoke rolling above it. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess Eradicate is burning up papers and trash," was Ned's opinion. +</P> + +<P> +Tom looked to where the camera pointed, he was right over his shop now, +and could see a dense vapor issuing from the door. +</P> + +<P> +"That isn't Eradicate!" cried the young inventor. "My shop is on fire! +I've got to make a quick drop, and save it! There are a lot of valuable +models, and machines in there! Send us down, Ned, as fast as she'll go!" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap09"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER IX +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +OFF FOR INDIA +</H3> + +<P> +"Bless my hose reel!" cried Mr. Damon, as the airship took a quick +lurch toward the earth. "Things are always happening to you, Tom Swift! +Your shop on fire! How did it happen?" +</P> + +<P> +"Look!" suddenly cried Ned, before Tom had a chance to answer. +"There's a man running away from the shop, Tom!" +</P> + +<P> +All saw him, and, as the airship rushed downward it could be seen that +he was a fellow dressed in ragged garments, a veritable tramp. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess that fire didn't happen," said Tom significantly. "It was +deliberately set. Oh, if we can only get there before it gains too much +headway!" +</P> + +<P> +"I like to catch that fellow!" exclaimed Koku, shaking his big fist at +the retreating tramp. "I fix him!" +</P> + +<P> +On rushed the airship, and the man who had probably started the fire, +glanced up at it. Tom suddenly turned the lens of his Wizard Camera +toward him. The mechanism inside, which had been stopped, started +clicking again, as the young inventor switched on the electric current. +</P> + +<P> +"What are you doing?" cried Ned, as he guided the airship toward the +shop, whence clouds of smoke were rolling. +</P> + +<P> +"Taking his picture," replied Tom. "It may come in useful for evidence." +</P> + +<P> +But he was not able to get many views of the fellow, for the latter +must have suspected what was going on. He quickly made a dive for the +bushes, and was soon lost to sight. Tom shut off his camera. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my life preserver!" cried Mr. Damon. "There comes your father, +Tom, and Mrs. Baggert! They've got buckets! They're going to put out +the fire!" +</P> + +<P> +"Why don't they think to use the hose?" cried the young inventor, for +he had his shop equipped with many hose lines, and an electrically +driven pump. "The hose! The hose, dad!" shouted Tom, but it is doubtful +if his father or Mrs. Baggert heard him, for the engine of the airship +was making much noise. However, the two with the buckets looked up, and +waved their hands to those on the Flyer. +</P> + +<P> +"There's Eradicate!" yelled Ned. "He's got the hose all right!" The +colored man was beginning to unreel a line. +</P> + +<P> +"That's what it needs!" exclaimed Tom. "Now there's some chance to save +the shop." +</P> + +<P> +"We'll be there ourselves to take a hand in a few seconds!" cried Mr. +Damon, forgetting to bless anything. +</P> + +<P> +"The scoundrel who started this fire, and those back of him, ought to +be imprisoned for life!" declared Mr. Nestor. +</P> + +<P> +A moment later Ned had landed the airship within a short distance of +the shop. In an instant the occupants of the craft had leaped out, and +Tom, after a hasty glance to see that his valuable camera was safe, +dashed toward the building crying: +</P> + +<P> +"Never mind the pails, dad! Use the hose! there's a nozzle at the back +door. Go around there, and play the water on from that end." +</P> + +<P> +Eradicate, with his line of hose, had disappeared into the shop through +the front door, and the others pressed in after him, heedless of the +dense smoke. +</P> + +<P> +"Is it blazing much, Rad?" cried Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Can't see no blaze at all, Massa Tom," replied the colored man. +"Dere's a heap of suffin in de middle ob de flo', an' dat's what's +raisin' all de rumpus." +</P> + +<P> +They all saw it a moment later, a smoldering heap of rags and paper on +the concrete floor of the shop. Eradicate turned his hose on it, there +was a hissing sound, a cloud of steam arose, and the fire was +practically out, though much smoke remained. +</P> + +<P> +"Jove! that was a lucky escape!" exclaimed Tom, as he looked around +when the vapor had partly cleared away. "No damage done at all, as far +as I can see. I wonder what the game was? Did you see anything of a +tramp around here?" he asked of his father. +</P> + +<P> +"No, Tom. I have been busy in the house. So has Mrs. Baggert. Suddenly +she called my attention to the smoke coming from the door, and we ran +out." +</P> + +<P> +"I seen it, too," added Eradicate. "I was doin' some whitewashin', an' +I run up as soon as I could." +</P> + +<P> +"We saw the tramp all right, but he got away," said Tom, and he told +how he had taken pictures of him. "I don't believe it would be much use +to look for him now, though." +</P> + +<P> +"Me look," spoke Koku significantly, as he hurried off in the direction +taken by the tramp. He came back later, not having found him. +</P> + +<P> +"What do you think of it, Tom?" asked Ned, when the excitement had +calmed down, and the pile of burned rags had been removed. It was found +that oil and chemicals had been put on them to cause a dense smoke. +</P> + +<P> +"I think it was the work of those fellows who are after my camera," +replied the young inventor. "They are evidently watching me, and when +they saw us all go off in the airship they thought probably that the +coast was clear." +</P> + +<P> +"But why should they start a fire?" +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know, but probably to create a lot of smoke, and excitement, +so that they could search, and not be detected. Maybe the fellow after +he found that the camera was gone, wanted to draw those in the house +out to the shop, so he could have a clear field to search in my room +for any drawings that would give him a clew as to how my machine works. +They certainly did not want to burn the shop, for that pile of rags +could have smoldered all day on the concrete floor, without doing any +harm. Robbery was the motive, I think." +</P> + +<P> +"The police ought to be notified," declared Mr. Nestor. "Develop those +pictures, Tom, and I'll take the matter up with the police. Maybe they +can identify the tramp from the photographs." +</P> + +<P> +But this proved impossible. Tom had secured several good films, not +only in the first views he took, giving the spectators the impression +that they were going up in an airship, but also those showing the shop +on fire, and the tramp running away, were very plain. +</P> + +<P> +The police made a search for the incendiary, but of course did not find +him. Mr. Period came to Shopton, and declared it was his belief that +his rivals, Turbot and Eckert, had had a hand in the matter. But it was +only a suspicion, though Tom himself believed the same thing. Still +nothing could be accomplished. +</P> + +<P> +"The thing to do, now that the camera works all right, is for you to +hit the trail for India at once," suggested the picture man. "They +won't follow you there. Get me some pictures of the Durbar, of +elephants being captured, of tiger fights, anything exciting." +</P> + +<P> +"I'll do my—" began Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Wait, I'm not through," interrupted the excitable man. "Then go get +some volcanoes, earthquakes—anything that you think would be +interesting. I'll keep in touch with you, and cable occasionally. Get +all the films you can. When will you start?" +</P> + +<P> +"I can leave inside of two weeks," replied Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Then do it, and, meanwhile, be on your guard." +</P> + +<P> +It was found that a few changes were needed on the camera, and some +adjustments to the airship. Another trial flight was made, and some +excellent pictures taken. Then Tom and his friends prepared to take the +airship apart, and pack it for shipment to Calcutta. It was to go on +the same steamer as themselves, and of course the Wizard Camera would +accompany Tom. He took along many rolls of films, enough, he thought, +for many views. He was also to send back to Mr. Period from time to +time, the exposed rolls of film, so they could be developed, and +printed in the United States, as Tom would not have very good +facilities for this on the airship, and to reproduce them there was +almost out of the question. Still he did fit up a small dark room +aboard the Flyer, where he could develop pictures if he wished. +</P> + +<P> +There was much to be done, but hard work accomplished it, and finally +the party was ready to start for India. Tom said good-bye to Mary +Nestor, of course, and her father accompanied our hero from the Nestor +house to the Swift homestead, where the start was to take place. +</P> + +<P> +Eradicate bade his master a tearful good-bye, and there was moisture in +the eyes of Mr. Swift, as he shook hands with his son. +</P> + +<P> +"Take care of yourself, Tom," he said. "Don't run too many risks. This +moving picture taking isn't as easy as it sounds. It's more than just +pointing your camera at things. Write if you get a chance, or send me a +message." +</P> + +<P> +Tom promised, and then bade farewell to Mrs. Baggert. All were +assembled, Koku, Mr. Damon, who blessed everything he saw, and some +things he did not, Ned, Mr. Nestor and Tom. The five were to go by +train to New York, there to go aboard the steamer. +</P> + +<P> +Their journey to the metropolis was uneventful. Mr. Period met them at +the steamship dock, after Tom had seen to it that the baggage, and the +parts of the airship were safely aboard. +</P> + +<P> +"I wish I were going along!" exclaimed the picture man. "It's going to +be a great trip. But I can't spare the time. I'm the busiest man in the +world. I lose about a thousand dollars just coming down to see you off, +but it's a good investment. I don't mind it. Now, Tom, good luck, and +don't forget, I want exciting views." +</P> + +<P> +"I'll try—" began our hero. +</P> + +<P> +"Wait, I know what you're going to say!" interrupted Mr. Period. +"You'll do it, of course. Well, I must be going. I will— Great +Scott!" and Mr. Period interrupted himself. "He has the nerve to come +here!" +</P> + +<P> +"Who?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Wilson Turbot, the rascal! He's trying to balk me at the last minute, +I believe. I'm going to see what he means!" and with this, the excited +Mr. Period rushed down the gangplank, toward the man at whom he had +pointed—one of the men who had tried to buy Tom's picture taking +camera. +</P> + +<P> +A moment later the steamer's whistle blew, the last belated passenger +rushed up the gangplank, it was drawn in, and the vessel began to move +away from the dock. Tom and his friends were on their way to India, and +the last glimpse they had of Mr. Period was as he was chasing along the +pier, after Mr. Turbot. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap10"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER X +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +UNEXPECTED EXCITEMENT +</H3> + +<P> +"Well, what do you know about that, Tom?" asked Ned, as they stood on +deck watching the chase. "Isn't he the greatest ever—Mr. Period, I +mean?" +</P> + +<P> +"He certainly is. I'd like to see what happens when he catches that +Turbot chap." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my pocket handkerchief!" cried Mr. Damon. "I don't believe he +will. Mr. Period's legs aren't long enough for fast running." +</P> + +<P> +"Those scoundrels were after us, up to the last minute," spoke Mr. +Nestor, as the ship moved farther out from the dock. Tom and his +friends could no longer see the excitable picture man after his rival, +but there was a commotion in the crowd, and it seemed as if he had +caught the fellow. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, we're free of him now," spoke the young inventor, with a breath +of relief. "That is, unless they have set some one else on our trail," +and he looked carefully at the passengers near him, to detect, if +possible, any who might look like spies in the pay of the rival moving +picture concern, or any suspicious characters who might try to steal +the valuable camera, that was now safely locked in Tom's cabin. Our +hero, however, saw no one to worry about. He resolved to remain on his +guard. +</P> + +<P> +Friends and relatives were waving farewells to one another, and the +band was playing, as the big vessel drew out into the North, or Hudson, +river, and steamed for the open sea. +</P> + +<P> +Little of interest marked the first week of the voyage. All save Koku +had done much traveling before, and it was no novelty to them. The +giant, however, was amused and delighted with everything, even the most +commonplace things he saw. He was a source of wonder to all the other +passengers, and, in a way, he furnished much excitement. +</P> + +<P> +One day several of the sailors were on deck, shifting one of the heavy +anchors. They went about it in their usual way, all taking hold, and +"heaving" together with a "chanty," or song, to enliven their work. But +they did not make much progress, and one of the mates got rather +excited about it. +</P> + +<P> +"Here, shiver my timbers!" he cried. "Lively now! Lay about you, and +get that over to the side!" +</P> + +<P> +"Yo! Heave! Ho!" called the leader of the sailor gang. +</P> + +<P> +The anchor did not move, for it had either caught on some projection, +or the men were not using their strength. +</P> + +<P> +"Lively! Lively!" cried the mate. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly Koku, who was in the crowd of passengers watching the work, +pushed his way to where the anchor lay. With a powerful, but not rough +action, he shoved the sailors aside. Then, stooping over, he took a +firm grip of the big piece of iron, planted his feet well apart on the +deck, and lifted the immense mass in his arms. There was a round of +applause from the group of passengers. +</P> + +<P> +"Where you want him?" Koku calmly asked of the mate, as he stood +holding the anchor. +</P> + +<P> +"Blast my marlin spikes!" cried the mate. "I never see the like of this +afore! Put her over there, shipmate. If I had you on a voyage or two +you'd be running the ship, instead of letting the screw push her along. +Put her over there," and he indicated where he wanted the anchor. +</P> + +<P> +Koku calmly walked along the deck, laid the anchor down as if it was an +ordinary weight, and passed over to where Tom stood looking on in +amused silence. There were murmurs of surprise from the passengers at +the giant's strength, and the sailors went forward much abashed. +</P> + +<P> +"Say, I'd give a good bit to have a bodyguard like that," exclaimed a +well-known millionaire passenger, who, it was reported, was in constant +fear of attacks, though they had never taken place. "I wonder if I +could get him." +</P> + +<P> +He spoke to Tom about it, but our hero would not listen to a +proposition to part with Koku. Besides, it is doubtful if the simple +giant would leave the lad who had brought him away from his South +American home. But, if Koku was wonderfully strong, and, seemingly +afraid of nothing, there were certain things he feared. +</P> + +<P> +One afternoon, for the amusement of the passengers, a net was put +overboard, sunk to a considerable depth, and hauled up with a number of +fishes in it. Some of the finny specimens were good for eating, and +others were freaks, strange and curious. +</P> + +<P> +Koku was in the throng that gathered on deck to look at the haul. +Suddenly a small fish, but very hideous to look at, leaped from the net +and flopped toward the giant. With a scream of fear Koku jumped to one +side, and ran down to his stateroom. He could not be induced to come on +deck until Tom assured him that the fishes had been disposed of. Thus +Koku was a mixture of giant and baby. But he was a general favorite on +the ship, and often gave exhibitions of his strength. +</P> + +<P> +Meanwhile Tom and his friends had been on the lookout for any one who +might be trailing them. But they saw no suspicious characters among the +passengers, and, gradually, they began to feel that they had left their +enemies behind. +</P> + +<P> +The weather was pleasant, and the voyage very enjoyable. Tom and the +others had little to do, and they were getting rather impatient for the +time to come when they could put the airship together, and sail off +over the jungle, to get moving pictures of the elephants. +</P> + +<P> +"Have you any films in the camera now?" asked Ned of his chum on day, +as they sat on deck together. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, it's all ready for instant use. Even the storage battery is +charged. Why?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I was just wondering. I was thinking we might somehow see +something we could take pictures of." +</P> + +<P> +"Not much out here," said Tom, as he looked across the watery expanse. +As he did so, he saw a haze of smoke dead ahead. "We'll pass a steamer +soon," he went on, "but that wouldn't make a good picture. It's too +common." +</P> + +<P> +As the two lads watched, the smoke became blacker, and the cloud it +formed grew much larger. +</P> + +<P> +"They're burning a lot of coal on that ship," remarked Ned. "Must be +trying for a speed record." +</P> + +<P> +A little later a sailor stationed himself in the crow's nest, and +focused a telescope on the smoke. An officer, on deck, seemed to be +waiting for a report from the man aloft. +</P> + +<P> +"That's rather odd," remarked Ned. "I never knew them to take so much +interest in a passing steamer before; and we've gone by several of +late." +</P> + +<P> +"That's right," agreed Tom. "I wonder—" +</P> + +<P> +At that moment the officer, looking up, called out: +</P> + +<P> +"Main top!" +</P> + +<P> +"Aye, aye, sir," answered the sailor with the glass. "She's a small +steamer, sir, and she's on fire!" +</P> + +<P> +"That's what I feared. Come down. I'll tell the captain. We must crowd +on all steam, and go to the rescue." +</P> + +<P> +"Did you hear that?" cried Ned to Tom, as the officer hurried to the +bridge, where the captain awaited him. "A steamer on fire at sea, Tom! +why don't you—" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm going to!" interrupted the young inventor, as he started for his +cabin on the run. "I'm going to get some moving pictures of the rescue! +That will be a film worth having." +</P> + +<P> +A moment later the Belchar, the vessel on which our friends had +embarked, increased her speed, while sudden excitement developed on +board. +</P> + +<P> +As the Belchar approached the burning steamer, which had evidently seen +her, and was making all speed toward her, the cloud of smoke became +more dense, and a dull flame could be seen reflected in the water. +</P> + +<P> +"She's going fast!" cried Mr. Nestor, as he joined Ned on deck. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my insurance policy!" cried Mr. Damon. "What a strange +happening! Where's Tom Swift?" +</P> + +<P> +"Gone for his camera," answered his chum. "He's going to get some +pictures of the rescue." +</P> + +<P> +"All hands man the life boats!" cried an officer, and several sailors +sprang to the davits, ready to lower the boats, when the steamers +should be near enough together. +</P> + +<P> +Up on deck came Tom, with his wonderful camera. +</P> + +<P> +"Here you go, Ned!" he called. "Give me a hand. I'm going to start the +film now." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap11"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XI +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +AN ELEPHANT STAMPEDE +</H3> + +<P> +"Lower away!" +</P> + +<P> +"Stand by the life boats!" +</P> + +<P> +"Let go! Pull hearty!" +</P> + +<P> +These and other commands marked the beginning of the rescue, as the +sailors manned the davit-falls, and put the boats into the water. The +burning steamer had now come to a stop, not far away from the Belchar, +which was also lay-to. There was scarcely any sea running, and no wind, +so that the work of rescuing was not difficult from an ordinary +standpoint. But there was grave danger, because the fire on the doomed +vessel was gaining rapidly. +</P> + +<P> +"That's oil burning," remarked an officer, and it seemed so, from the +dense clouds of smoke that rolled upward. +</P> + +<P> +"Is she working, Tom?" asked Ned, as he helped his chum to hold the +wonderful camera steady on the rail, so that a good view of the burning +steamer could be had. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, the film is running. Say, I wonder if they'll get 'em all off?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I think so. There aren't many passengers. I guess it's a tramp +freighter." +</P> + +<P> +They could look across the gap of water, and see the terrified +passengers and crew crowding to the rail, holding out their hands +appealingly to the brave sailors who were lustily and rapidly, pulling +toward them in life boats. +</P> + +<P> +At times a swirl of smoke would hide those on the doomed vessel from +the sight of the passengers on the Belchar, and on such occasions the +frightened screams of women could be heard. Once, as the smoke cleared +away, a woman, with a child in her arms, giving a backward glance +toward the flames that were now enveloping the stern of the vessel, +attempted to leap overboard. +</P> + +<P> +Many hands caught her, however, and all this was registered on the film +of Tom's camera, which was working automatically. As the two vessels +drifted along, Tom and Ned shifted the lens so as to keep the burning +steamer, and the approaching lifeboats, in focus. +</P> + +<P> +"There's the first rescue!" cried Ned, as the woman who had attempted +to leap overboard, was, with her child, carefully lowered into a boat. +"Did you get that, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"I certainly did. This will make a good picture. I think I'll send it +back to Mr. Period as soon as we reach port." +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe you could develop it on board here, and show it. I understand +there's a dark room, and the captain said one of his officers, who used +to be in the moving picture business, had a reproducing machine." +</P> + +<P> +"Then that's what I'll do!" cried Tom. "I'll have our captain charge +all the Belchar passengers admission, and we'll get up a fund for the +fire sufferers. They'll probably lose all their baggage." +</P> + +<P> +"That will be great!" exclaimed Ned. +</P> + +<P> +The rescue was now in full swing, and, in a short time all the +passengers and crew had been transferred to the life boats. Tom got a +good picture of the captain of the burning steamer being the last to +leave his vessel. Then the approaching life boats, with their loads of +sailors, and rescued ones, were caught on the films. +</P> + +<P> +"Are you all off?" cried the captain of the Belchar to the unfortunate +skipper of the doomed ship. +</P> + +<P> +"All off, yes, thank you. It is a mercy you were at hand. I have a +cargo of oil. You had better stand off, for she'll explode in a few +minutes." +</P> + +<P> +"I must get a picture of that!" declared Tom as the Belchar got under +way again. "That will cap the climax, and make a film that will be hard +to beat." +</P> + +<P> +A few moments later there was a tremendous explosion on the tramp +oiler. A column of wreckage and black smoke shot skyward, and Tom +secured a fine view of it. Then the wreck disappeared beneath the +waves, while the rescuing steamer sailed on, with those who had been +saved. They had brought off only the things they wore, for the fire had +occurred suddenly, and spread rapidly. Kind persons aboard the Belchar +looked after the unfortunates. Luckily there was not a large passenger +list on the tramp. And the crew was comparatively small, so it was not +hard work to make room for them, or take care of them, aboard the +Belchar. +</P> + +<P> +Tom developed his pictures, and produced them in one of the large +saloons, on a machine he borrowed from the man of whom Ned had spoken. +A dollar admission was charged, and the crowd was so large that Tom had +to give two performances. The films, showing the burning steamer and +the rescue, were excellent, and enough money was realized to aid, most +substantially, the unfortunate passengers and crew. +</P> + +<P> +A few days later a New York bound steamer was spoken, and on it Tom +sent the roll of developed films to Mr. Period, with a letter of +explanation. +</P> + +<P> +I will not give all the details of the rest of the voyage. Sufficient +to say that no accidents marred it, nor did Tom discover any suspicious +characters aboard. In due time our friends arrived at Calcutta, and +were met by an agent of Mr. Period, for he had men in all quarters of +the world, making films for him. +</P> + +<P> +This agent took Tom and his party to a hotel, and arranged to have the +airship parts sent to a large open shed, not far away, where it could +be put together. The wonderful scenes in the Indian city interested Tom +and his companions for a time, but they had observed so many strange +sights from time to time that they did not marvel greatly. Koku, +however, was much delighted. He was like a child. +</P> + +<P> +"What are you going to do first?" asked Ned, when they had recovered +from the fatigue of the ocean voyage and had settled themselves in the +hotel. +</P> + +<P> +"Put the airship together," replied our hero, "and then, after getting +some Durbar pictures, we'll head for the jungle. I want to get some +elephant pictures, showing the big beasts being captured." +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Period's agent was a great help to them in this. He secured native +helpers, who aided Tom in assembling the airship, and in a week or two +it was ready for a flight. The wonderful camera, too, was looked over, +and the picture agent said he had never seen a better one. +</P> + +<P> +"It can take the kind of pictures I never could," he said. "I get +Calcutta street scenes for Mr. Period, and occasionally I strike a good +one. But I wish I had your chance." +</P> + +<P> +Tom invited him to come along in the airship, but the agent, who only +looked after Mr. Period's interests as a side issue, could not leave +his work. +</P> + +<P> +The airship was ready for a flight, stores and provisions had been put +on board, there was enough gasoline for the motor, and gas for the +balloon bag, to carry the Flyer thousands of miles. The moving picture +camera had been tested after the sea voyage, and had been found to work +perfectly. Many rolls of films were taken along. Tom got some fine +views of the Durbar of India, and his airship created a great sensation. +</P> + +<P> +"Now I guess we're all ready for the elephants," said Tom one day as he +came back from an inspection of the airship as it rested in the big +shed. "We'll start to-morrow morning, and head for the jungle." +</P> + +<P> +Amid the cries from a throng of wondering and awed natives, and with +the farewells of Mr. Period's agent ringing in their ears, Tom and his +party made an early start. The Flyer rose like a bird, and shot across +the city, while on the house tops many people watched the strange +sight. Tom did not start his camera working, as Mr. Period's agent said +he had made many pictures of the Indian city, and even one taken from +an airship, would not be much of a novelty. +</P> + +<P> +Tom had made inquiries, and learned that by a day's travel in his +airship (though it would have been much longer ordinarily) he could +reach a jungle where elephants might be found. Of course there was +nothing certain about it, as the big animals roamed all over, being in +one district one day, and on the next, many miles off. +</P> + +<P> +Gradually the city was left behind, and some time later the airship was +sailing along over the jungle. After the start, when Ned and Tom, with +Mr. Damon helping occasionally, had gotten the machinery into proper +adjustment, the Flyer almost ran herself. Then Tom took his station +forward, with his camera in readiness, and a powerful spyglass at hand, +so that he might see the elephants from a distance. +</P> + +<P> +He had been told that, somewhere in the district for which he was +headed, an elephant drive was contemplated. He hoped to be on hand to +get pictures of it, and so sent his airship ahead at top speed. +</P> + +<P> +On and on they rode, being as much at ease in the air as they would +have been if traveling in a parlor car. They did not fly high, as it +was necessary to be fairly close to the earth to get good pictures. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess we won't have any luck to-day," remarked Ned, as night +approached, and they had had no sight of the elephants. They had gone +over mile after mile of jungle, but had seen few wild beasts in +sufficient numbers to make it worth while to focus the camera on them. +</P> + +<P> +"We'll float along to-night," decided Tom, "and try again in the +morning." +</P> + +<P> +It was about ten o'clock the next day, when Ned, who had relieved Tom +on watch, uttered a cry: +</P> + +<P> +"What is it?" asked his chum, as he rushed forward. "Has anything +happened?" +</P> + +<P> +"Lots!" cried Ned. "Look!" He pointed down below. Tom saw, crashing +through the jungle, a big herd of elephants. Behind them, almost +surrounding them, in fact, was a crowd of natives in charge of white +hunters, who were driving the herd toward a stockade. +</P> + +<P> +"There's a chance for a grand picture!" exclaimed Tom, as he got the +camera ready. "Take charge of the ship, Ned. Keep her right over the +big animals, and I'll work the camera." +</P> + +<P> +Quickly he focused the lens on the strange scene below him. There was +a riot of trumpeting from the elephants. The beaters and hunters +shouted and yelled. Then they saw the airship and waved their hands to +Tom and his friends, but whether to welcome them, or warn them away, +could not be told. +</P> + +<P> +The elephants were slowly advancing toward the stockade. Tom was taking +picture after picture of them, when suddenly as the airship came lower, +in response to a signal to Ned from the young inventor, one of the huge +pachyderms looked up, and saw the strange sight. He might have taken it +for an immense bird. At any rate he gave a trumpet of alarm, and the +next minute, with screams of rage and fear, the elephants turned, and +charged in a wild stampede on those who were driving them toward the +stockade. +</P> + +<P> +"Look!" cried Ned. "Those hunters and natives will be killed!" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm afraid so!" shouted Tom, as he continued to focus his camera on +the wonderful sight. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap12"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE LION FIGHT +</H3> + +<P> +Crashing through the jungle the huge beasts turned against those who +had, been driving them on toward the stockade. With wild shouts and +yells, the hunters and their native helpers tried to turn back the +elephant tide, but it was useless. The animals had been frightened by +the airship, and were following their leader, a big bull, that went +crashing against great trees, snapping them off as if they were pipe +stems. +</P> + +<P> +"Say, this is something like!" cried Ned, as he guided the airship over +the closely packed body of elephants, so Tom could get good pictures, +for the herd had divided, and a small number had gone off with one of +the other bulls. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I'll get some great pictures," agreed Tom, as he looked in +through a red covered opening in the camera, to see how much film was +left. +</P> + +<P> +The airship was now so low down that Tom, and the others, could easily +make out the faces of the hunters, and the native helpers. One of the +hunters, evidently the chief, shaking his fist at our hero, cried: +</P> + +<P> +"Can't you take your blooming ship out of the way, my man? It's scaring +the beasts, and we've been a couple of weeks on this drive. We don't +want to lose all our work. Take your bloody ship away!" +</P> + +<P> +"I guess he must be an Englishman," remarked Mr. Nestor, with a laugh. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my dictionary, I should say so," agreed Mr. Damon. "Bloody, +blooming ship! The idea!" +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I suppose we have scared the beasts," said Tom. "We ought to get +out of the way. Put her up, Ned, and we'll come down some distance in +advance." +</P> + +<P> +"Why, aren't you going to take any more views of the elephants?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, but I've got enough of a view from above. Besides, I've got to +put in a fresh reel of film, and I might as well get out of their sight +to do it. Maybe that will quiet them, and the hunters can turn them +back toward the stockade. If they do, I have another plan." +</P> + +<P> +"What is it?" his chum wanted to know. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm going to make a landing, set up my camera at the entrance to the +stockade, and get a series of pictures as the animals come in. I think +that will be a novelty. +</P> + +<P> +"That certainly will," agreed Mr. Nestor. "I am sure Mr. Period will +appreciate that. But won't it be dangerous, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"I suppose so, but I'm getting used to danger," replied our hero, with +a laugh. +</P> + +<P> +Ned put the ship high into the air, as Tom shut off the power from the +camera. Then the Flyer was sent well on in advance of the stampede of +elephants, so they could no longer see it, or hear the throb of the +powerful engines. Tom hoped that this would serve to quiet the immense +creatures. +</P> + +<P> +As the travelers flew on, over the jungle, they could still hear the +racket made by the hunters and beaters, and the shrill trumpeting of +the elephants, as they crashed through the forest. +</P> + +<P> +Tom at once began changing the film in the camera, and Ned altered the +course of the airship, to send it back toward the stockade, which they +had passed just before coming upon the herd of elephants. +</P> + +<P> +I presume most of my readers know what an elephant drive is like. A +stockade, consisting of heavy trees, is made in the jungle. It is like +the old fashioned forts our forefathers used to make, for a defense +against the Indians. There is a broad entrance to it, and, when all is +in readiness, the beaters go out into the jungle, with the white +hunters, to round up the elephants. A number of tame pachyderms are +taken along to persuade the wild ones to follow. +</P> + +<P> +Gradually the elephants are gathered together in a large body, and +gently driven toward the stockade. The tame elephants go in first, and +the others follow. Then the entrance is closed, and all that remains to +be done is to tame the wild beasts, a not very easy task. +</P> + +<P> +"Are you all ready?" asked Ned, after a bit, as he saw Tom come forward +with the camera. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I'm loaded for some more excitement. You can put me right over +the stockade now, Ned, and when we see the herd coming back I'll go +down, and take some views from the ground." +</P> + +<P> +"I think they've got 'em turned," said Mr. Damon. "It sounds as if they +were coming back this way." +</P> + +<P> +A moment later they had a glimpse of the herd down below. It was true +that the hunters had succeeded in stopping the stampede, and once more +the huge beasts were going in the right direction. +</P> + +<P> +"There's a good place to make a landing," suggested Tom, as he saw a +comparatively clear place in the jungle. "It's near the stockade, and, +in case of danger, I can make a quick get-away." +</P> + +<P> +"What kind of danger are you looking for?" asked Ned, as he shifted the +deflecting rudder. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, one of the beasts might take a notion to chase me." +</P> + +<P> +The landing was made, and Tom, taking Ned and Mr. Nestor with him, and +leaving the others to manage the airship in case a quick flight would +be necessary, made his way along a jungle trail to the entrance to the +stockade. He carried his camera with him, for it was not heavy. +</P> + +<P> +On came the elephants, frightened by the shouts and cries of the +beaters, and the firing of guns. The young inventor took his place near +the stockade entrance, and, as the elephants advanced through the +forest, tearing up trees and bushes, Tom got some good pictures of them. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly the advance of the brutes was checked, and the foremost of +them raised their trunks, trumpeted in anger, and were about to turn +back again. +</P> + +<P> +"Get away from that bloomin' gate!" shouted a hunter to Tom. "You're +scaring them as bad as your airship did." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, they won't go in with you there!" added another man. +</P> + +<P> +Tom slipped around the corner of the stockade, out of sight, and from +that vantage point he took scores of pictures, as the tame animals led +the wild ones into the fenced enclosure. Then began another wild scene +as the gate was closed. +</P> + +<P> +The terrified animals rushed about, trying in vain to find a way of +escape. Tom managed to climb up on top of the logs, and got some +splendid pictures. But this was nearly his undoing. For, just as the +last elephant rushed in, a big bull charged against the stockade, and +jarred Tom so that he was on the point of falling. His one thought was +about his camera, and he looked to see if he could drop it on the soft +grass, so it would not be damaged. +</P> + +<P> +He saw Koku standing below him, the giant having slipped out of the +airship, to see the beasts at closer range. +</P> + +<P> +"Catch this, Koku!" cried Tom, tossing the big man his precious camera, +and the giant caught it safely. But Tom's troubles were not over. A +moment later, as the huge elephant again rammed the fence, Tom fell +off, but fortunately outside. Then the large beast, seeing a small +opening in the gate that was not yet entirely closed, made for it. A +moment later he was rushing straight at Tom, who was somewhat stunned +by his fall, though it was not a severe one. +</P> + +<P> +"Look out!" yelled Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Take a tree, Tom!" cried Mr. Nestor. +</P> + +<P> +The elephant paid no attention to any one but Tom, whom he seemed to +think had caused all his trouble. The young inventor dashed to one +side, and then started to run toward the airship, for which Ned and Mr. +Nestor were already making. The elephant hunters at last succeeded in +closing the gate, blocking the chance of any more animals to escape. +</P> + +<P> +"Run, Tom! Run!" yelled Ned, and Tom ran as he had never run before. +The elephant was close after him though, crashing through the jungle. +Tom could see the airship just ahead of him. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly he felt something grasp him from behind. He thought surely it +was the elephant's trunk, but a quick glance over his shoulder showed +him the friendly face of Koku, the giant. +</P> + +<P> +"Me run for you," said Koku, as he caught Tom up under one arm, and, +carrying the camera under the other, he set off at top speed. Now Koku +could run well at times, and this time he did. He easily outdistanced +the elephant, and, a little later, he set Tom down on the deck of the +airship, with the camera beside him. Then Ned and Mr. Nestor came up +panting, having run to one side. +</P> + +<P> +"Quick!" cried Tom. "We must get away before the elephant charges the +Flyer." +</P> + +<P> +"He has stopped," shouted Mr. Nestor, and it was indeed so. The big +beast, seeing again the strange craft that had frightened him before, +stood still for a moment, and then plunged off into the jungle, +trumpeting with rage. +</P> + +<P> +"Safe!" gasped Tom, as he looked at his camera to see if it had been +damaged. It seemed all right. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my latch key!" cried Mr. Damon. "This moving picture business +isn't the most peaceful one in the world." +</P> + +<P> +"No, it has plenty of perils," agreed Mr. Nestor. +</P> + +<P> +"Come on, let's get out of here while we have the chance," suggested +Tom. "There may be another herd upon us before we know it." +</P> + +<P> +The airship was soon ascending, and Tom and his companions could look +down and see the tame elephants in the stockade trying to calm the wild +ones. Then the scene faded from sight. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, if these pictures come out all right I'll have some fine ones," +exclaimed Tom as he carried his camera to the room where he kept the +films. "I fancy an elephant drive and stampede are novelties in this +line." +</P> + +<P> +"Indeed they are," agreed Mr. Nestor. "Mr. Period made no mistake when +he picked you out, Tom, for this work. What are you going to try for +next?" +</P> + +<P> +"I'd like to get some lion and tiger pictures," said the young +inventor. "I understand this is a good district for that. As soon as +those elephants get quieted down, I'm going back to the stockade and +have a talk with the hunters." +</P> + +<P> +This he did, circling about in the airship until nearly evening. When +they again approached the stockade all was quiet, and they came to +earth. A native showed them where the white hunters had their +headquarters, in some bungalows, and Tom and his party were made +welcome. They apologized for frightening the big beasts, and the +hunters accepted their excuses. +</P> + +<P> +"As long as we got 'em, it's all right," said the head man, "though for +awhile, I didn't like your bloomin' machine." Tom entertained the +hunters aboard his craft, at which they marvelled much, and they gave +him all the information they had about the lions and tigers in the +vicinity. +</P> + +<P> +"You won't find lions and tigers in herds, like elephants though," said +the head hunter. "And you may have to photograph 'em at night, as then +is when they come out to hunt, and drink." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I can take pictures at night," said Tom, as he showed his camera +apparatus. +</P> + +<P> +The next day, in the airship, they left for another district, where, so +the natives reported, several lions had been seen of late. They had +done much damage, too, carrying off the native cattle, and killing +several Indians. +</P> + +<P> +For nearly a week Tom circled about in his airship, keeping a sharp +lookout down below for a sign of lions that he might photograph them. +But he saw none, though he did get some pictures of a herd of Indian +deer that were well worth his trouble. +</P> + +<P> +"I think I'll have to try for a night photograph," decided Tom at last. +"I'll locate a spring where wild beasts are in the habit of coming, set +the camera with the light going, and leave it there." +</P> + +<P> +"But will the lions come up if they see the light?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"I think so," replied his chum. "I'll take a chance, anyhow. If that +doesn't work then I'll hide near by, and see what happens." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my cartridge belt!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't mean that; do +you Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"Of course. Come to think of it, I'm not going to leave my camera out +there for a lion to jump on, and break. As soon as I get a series of +pictures I'll bring it back to the ship, I think." +</P> + +<P> +By inquiry among the natives they learned the location of a spring +where, it was said, lions were in the habit of coming nightly to drink. +</P> + +<P> +"That's the place I want!" cried Tom. +</P> + +<P> +Accordingly the airship was headed for it, and one evening it came +gently to earth in a little clearing on the edge of the jungle, while +Koku, as was his habit, got supper. +</P> + +<P> +After the meal Tom and Ned set the camera, and then, picking out a good +spot nearby, they hid themselves to wait for what might happen. The +lens was focused on the spring, and the powerful electric light set +going. It glowed brightly, and our hero thought it might have the +effect of keeping the beasts away, but Tom figured that, after they had +looked at it for a while, and seen that it did not harm them, they +would lose their suspicions, and come within range of his machine. +</P> + +<P> +"The camera will do the rest," he said. In order not to waste films +uselessly Tom arranged a long electric wire, running it from the camera +to where he and Ned were hid. By pressing a button he could start or +stop the camera any time he wished, and, as he had a view of the spring +from his vantage point, he could have the apparatus begin taking +pictures as soon as there was some animal within focus. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I'm getting stiff," said Ned, after an hour or so had passed in +silent darkness, the only light being the distant one on the camera. +</P> + +<P> +"So am I," said Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't believe anything will come to-night," went on his chum. "Let's +go back and—" +</P> + +<P> +He stopped suddenly, for there was a crackling in the underbrush, and +the next moment the jungle vibrated to the mighty roar of a lion. +</P> + +<P> +"He's coming!" hoarsely whispered Tom. +</P> + +<P> +Both lads glanced through the trees toward the camera, and, in the +light, they saw a magnificent, tawny beast standing on the edge of the +spring. Once more he roared, as if in defiance, and then, as if +deciding that the light was not harmful, he stooped to lap up the water. +</P> + +<P> +Hardly had he done so than there was another roar, and a moment later a +second lion leaped from the dense jungle into the clearing about the +spring. The two monarchs of the forest stood there in the glare of the +light, and Tom excitedly pressed the button that started the shutter to +working, and the film to moving back of the lens. +</P> + +<P> +There was a slight clicking sound in the camera, and the lions turned +startedly. Then both growled again, and the next instant they sprang at +each other, roaring mightily. +</P> + +<P> +"A fight!" cried Tom. "A lion fight, and right in front of my camera! +It couldn't be better. This is great! This will be a film." +</P> + +<P> +"Quiet!" begged Ned. "They'll hear you, and come for us. I don't want +to be chewed up!" +</P> + +<P> +"No danger of them hearing me!" cried Tom, and he had to shout to be +heard above the roaring of the two tawny beasts, as they bit and clawed +each other, while the camera took picture after picture of them. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap13"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XIII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +A SHOT IN TIME +</H3> + +<P> +"Tom, did you ever see anything like it in your life?" +</P> + +<P> +"I never did, Ned! It's wonderful! fearful! And to think that we are +here watching it, and that thousands of people will see the same thing +thrown on a screen. Oh, look at the big one. The small lion has him +down!" +</P> + +<P> +The two lads, much thrilled, crouched down behind a screen of bushes, +watching the midnight fight between the lions. On the airship, not far +distant, there was no little alarm, for those left behind heard the +terrific roars, and feared Tom and Ned might be in some danger. But the +lions were too much occupied with their battle, to pay any attention to +anything else, and no other wild beasts were likely to come to the +spring while the two "kings" were at each other. +</P> + +<P> +It was a magnificent, but terrible battle. The big cats bit and tore at +each other, using their terrific claws and their powerful paws, one +stroke of which is said to be sufficient to break a bullock's back. +Sometimes they would roll out of the focus of the camera, and, at such +times, Tom wished he was at the machine to swing the lens around, but +he knew it would be dangerous to move. Then the beasts would roll back +into the rays of light again, and more pictures of them would be taken. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess the small one is going to win!" said Tom, after the two lions +had fought for ten minutes, and the bigger one had been down several +times. +</P> + +<P> +"He's younger," agreed Ned, "and I guess the other one has had his +share of fights. Maybe this is a battle to see which one is to rule +this part of the jungle." +</P> + +<P> +"I guess so," spoke the young inventor, as he pressed the button to +stop the camera, as the lions rolled out of focus. "Oh, look!" he cried +a moment later, as the animals again rolled into view. Tom started the +camera once more. "This is near the end," he said. +</P> + +<P> +The small lion had, by a sudden spring, landed on the back of his +rival. There was a terrific struggle, and the older beast went down, +the younger one clawing him terribly. Then, so quickly did it happen +that the boys could not take in all the details, the older lion rolled +over and over, and rid himself of his antagonist. Quickly he got to his +feet, while the smaller lion did the same. They stood for a moment +eyeing each other, their tails twitching, the hair on their backs +bristling, and all the while they uttered frightful roars. +</P> + +<P> +An instant later the larger beast sprang toward his rival. One terrible +paw was upraised. The small lion tried to dodge, but was not quick +enough. Down came the paw with terrific force, and the boys could hear +the back bone snap. Then, clawing his antagonist terribly, as he lay +disabled, the older lion, with a roar of triumph, lapped up water, and +sprang off through the jungle, leaving his dying rival beside the +spring. +</P> + +<P> +"That's the end," cried Tom, as the small lion died, and the young +inventor pressed the button stopping his camera. There was a rustle in +the leaves back of Tom and Ned, and they sprang up in alarm, but they +need not have feared, for it was only Koku, the giant, who, with a +portable electrical torch, had come to see how they had fared. +</P> + +<P> +"Mr. Tom all right?" asked the big man, anxiously. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, and I got some fine pictures. You can carry the camera back now, +Koku. I think that roll of film is pretty well filled." +</P> + +<P> +The three of them looked at the body of the dead lion, before they went +back to the airship. I have called him "small," but, in reality, the +beast was small only in comparison with his rival, who was a tremendous +lion in size. I might add that of all the pictures Tom took, few were +more highly prized than that reel of the lion fight. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my bear cage!" cried Mr. Damon, as Tom came back, "you certainly +have nerve, my boy." +</P> + +<P> +"You have to, in this business," agreed Tom with a laugh. "I never did +this before, and I don't know that I would want it for a steady +position, but it's exciting for a change." +</P> + +<P> +They remained near the "lion spring" as they called it all night, and +in the morning, after Koku had served a tasty breakfast, Tom headed the +airship for a district where it was said there were many antelope, and +buffaloes, also zebus. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't want to get all exciting pictures," our hero said to Mr. +Nestor. "I think that films showing wild animals at play, or quietly +feeding, will be good." +</P> + +<P> +"I'm sure they will," said Mary's father. "Get some peaceful scenes, by +all means." +</P> + +<P> +They sailed on for several days, taking a number of pictures from the +airship, when they passed over a part of the country where the view was +magnificent, and finally, stopping at a good sized village they learned +that, about ten miles out, was a district where antelope abounded. +</P> + +<P> +"We'll go there," decided Tom, "and I'll take the camera around with me +on a sort of walking trip. In that way I'll get a variety of views, and +I can make a good film." +</P> + +<P> +This plan was followed out. The airship came to rest in a beautiful +green valley, and Ned and Tom, with Mr. Damon, who begged to be taken +along, started off. +</P> + +<P> +"You can follow me in about half an hour, Koku," said Tom, "and carry +the camera back. I guess you can easily pick up our trail." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, sure," replied the giant. Indeed, to one who had lived in the +forest, as he had all his life, before Tom found him, it was no +difficult matter to follow a trail, such as the three friends would +leave. +</P> + +<P> +Tom found signs that showed him where the antelopes were in the habit +of passing, and, with Ned and Mr. Damon, stationed himself in a +secluded spot. +</P> + +<P> +He had not long to wait before a herd of deer came past. Tom took many +pictures of the graceful creatures, for it was daylight now, and he +needed no light. Consequently there was nothing to alarm the herd. +</P> + +<P> +After having made several films of the antelope, Tom and his two +companions went farther on. They were fortunate enough to find a place +that seemed to be a regular playground of the deer. There was a large +herd there, and, getting as near as he dared, Tom focused his camera, +and began taking pictures. +</P> + +<P> +"It's as good as a play," whispered Mr. Damon, as he and Ned watched +the creatures, for they had to speak quietly. The camera made scarcely +any noise. "I'm glad I came on this trip." +</P> + +<P> +"So am I," said Ned. "Look, Tom, see the mother deer all together, and +the fawns near them. It's just as if it was a kindergarten meeting." +</P> + +<P> +"I see," whispered Tom. "I'm getting a picture of that." +</P> + +<P> +For some little time longer Tom photographed the deer, and then, +suddenly, the timid creatures all at once lifted up their heads, and +darted off. Tom and Ned, wondering what had startled them, looked +across the glade just in time to see a big tiger leap out of the tall +grass. The striped animal had been stalking the antelope, but they had +scented him just in time. +</P> + +<P> +"Get him, Tom," urged Ned, and the young inventor did so, securing +several fine views before the tiger bounded into the grass again, and +took after his prey. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my china teacup! What's that!" suddenly cried Mr. Damon. As he +spoke there was a crashing in the bushes and, an instant later as +two-horned rhinoceros sprang into view, charging straight for the group. +</P> + +<P> +"Look out!" yelled Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my—" began Mr. Damon, but he did not finish, for, in starting +to run his foot caught in the grass, and he went down heavily. +</P> + +<P> +Tom leaped to one side, holding his camera so as not to damage it. But +he stumbled over Mr. Damon, and went down. +</P> + +<P> +With a "wuff" of rage the clumsy beast, came on, moving more rapidly +than Tom had any idea he was capable of. Hampered by his camera our +hero could not arise. The rhinoceros was almost upon him, and Ned, +catching up a club, was just going to make a rush to the rescue, when +the brute seemed suddenly to crumple up. It fell down in a heap, not +five feet from where Tom and Mr. Damon lay. +</P> + +<P> +"Good!" cried Ned. "He's dead. Shot through the heart! Who did it?" +</P> + +<P> +"I did," answered Koku quietly, stepping out of the bushes, with one of +Tom's Swift's electric rifles in his hand. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap14"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XIV +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +IN A GREAT GALE +</H3> + +<P> +Tom Swift rose slowly to his feet, carefully setting his camera down, +after making sure that it was not injured. Then he looked at the huge +beast which lay dead in front of him, and, going over to the giant he +held out his hand to him. +</P> + +<P> +"Koku, you saved my life," spoke Tom. "Probably the life of Mr. Damon +also. I can't begin to thank you. It isn't the first time you've done +it, either. But I want to say that you can have anything you want, that +I've got." +</P> + +<P> +"Me like this gun pretty much," said the giant simply. +</P> + +<P> +"Then it's yours!" exclaimed Tom. "And you're the only one, except +myself, who has ever owned one." Tom's wonderful electric rifle, of +which I have told you in the book bearing that name, was one of his +most cherished inventions. +</P> + +<P> +He guarded jealously the secret of how it worked, and never sold or +gave one away, for fear that unscrupulous men might learn how to make +them, and to cause fearful havoc. For the rifle was a terrible weapon. +Koku seemed to appreciate the honor done him, as he handled the gun, +and looked from it to the dead rhinoceros. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my blank cartridge!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, as he also got up and +came to examine the dead beast. It was the first thing he had said +since the animal had rushed at him, and he had not moved after he fell +down. He had seemingly been in a daze, but when the others heard him +use one of his favorite expressions they knew that he was all right +again. "Bless my hat!" went on the odd man. "What happened, Tom? Is +that beast really dead? How did Koku come to arrive in time?" +</P> + +<P> +"I guess he's dead all right," said Tom, giving the rhinoceros a kick. +"But I don't know how Koku happened to arrive in the nick of time, and +with the gun, too." +</P> + +<P> +"I think maybe I see something to shoot when I come after you, like you +tell me to do," spoke the giant. "I follow your trail, but I see +nothing to shoot until I come here. Then I see that animal run for you, +and I shoot." +</P> + +<P> +"And a good thing you did, too," put in Ned. "Well let's go back. My +nerves are on edge, and I want to sit quiet for a while." +</P> + +<P> +"Take the camera, Koku," ordered Tom, "and I'll carry the electric +rifle—your rifle, now," he added, and the giant grinned in delight. +They reached the airship without further incident, and, after a cup of +tea, Tom took out the exposed films and put a fresh roll in his camera, +ready for whatever new might happen. +</P> + +<P> +"Where is your next stopping place, Tom?" asked Ned, as they sat in the +main room of the airship that evening, talking over the events of the +day. They had decided to stay all night anchored on the ground, and +start off in the morning. +</P> + +<P> +"I hardly know," answered the young inventor. "I am going to set the +camera to-night, near a small spring I saw, to get some pictures of +deer coming to drink. I may get a picture of a lion or a tiger +attacking them. If I could it would be another fine film. To-morrow I +think we will start for Switzerland. But now I'm going to get the +camera ready for a night exposure. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my check book!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't mean to say that you +are going to stay out at a spring again, Tom, and run the chance of a +tiger getting you." +</P> + +<P> +"No, I'm merely going to set the camera, attach the light and let it +work automatically this time. I've put in an extra long roll of film, +for I'm going to keep it going for a long while, and part of the time +there may be no animals there to take pictures of. No, I'm not going to +sit out to-night. I'm too tired. I'll conceal the camera in the bushes +so it won't be damaged if there's a fight. Then, as I said, we'll start +for Switzerland to-morrow." +</P> + +<P> +"Switzerland!" cried Ned. "What in the world do you want to go make a +big jump like that for? And what do you expect to get in that mountain +land?" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm going to try for a picture of an avalanche," said Tom. "Mr. +Period wants one, if I can get it. It is quite a jump, but then we'll +be flying over civilized countries most of the time, and if any +accident happens we can go down and easily make repairs. We can also +get gasolene for the motor, though I have quite a supply in the tanks, +and perhaps enough for the entire trip. At the same time we won't take +any chances. So we'll be off for Switzerland in the morning. +</P> + +<P> +"I think some avalanche pictures will be great, if you can get them," +remarked Mr. Nestor. "But, Tom, you know those big slides of ice, snow +and earth aren't made to order." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I know," agreed the young inventor with a smile. "I'll just have +to take my chances, and wait until one happens." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my insurance policy!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "And when it does +happen, Tom, are you going to stand in front of it, and snap-shot it?" +</P> + +<P> +"Indeed I'm not. This business is risky and dangerous enough, without +looking for trouble. I'm going to the mountain region, and hover around +in the air, until we see an avalanche 'happen' if that is the right +word. Then I'll focus the camera on it, and the films and machinery +will do the rest." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, that's different," remarked the odd man, with an air of relief. +</P> + +<P> +Tom and Ned soon had the camera set near the spring and then, everyone +being tired with the day's work and excitement, they retired. In the +morning there were signs around the spring that many animals had been +there in the night. There were also marks as if there had been a fight, +but of course what sort, or how desperate, no one could say. +</P> + +<P> +"If anything happened the camera got it, I'm sure of that much," +remarked Tom, as he brought in the apparatus. "I'm not going to develop +the roll, for I don't want to take the time now. I guess we must have +something, anyhow." +</P> + +<P> +"If there isn't it won't so much matter for you have plenty of other +good views," said Mr. Nestor. +</P> + +<P> +I will not go into details of the long trip to Switzerland, where, amid +the mountains of that country, Tom hoped to get the view he wanted. +</P> + +<P> +Sufficient to say that the airship made good time after leaving India. +Sometimes Tom sent the craft low down, in order to get views, and +again, it would be above the clouds. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, another day will bring us there," said Tom one evening, as he +was loading the camera with a fresh roll of films. "Then we'll have to +be on the lookout for an avalanche." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, we're making pretty good time," remarked Ned, as he looked at the +speed gage. "I didn't know you had the motor working so fast, Tom." +</P> + +<P> +"I haven't," was the young inventor's answer, as he looked up in +surprise. "Why, we are going quite fast! It's the wind, Ned. It's +right with us, and it's carrying us along." +</P> + +<P> +Tom arose and went to the anemometer, or wind-registering instrument. +He gave a low whistle, half of alarm. +</P> + +<P> +"Fifty miles an hour she's blowing now," he said. "It came on suddenly, +too, for a little while ago it was only ten." +</P> + +<P> +"Is there any danger?" asked Mr. Nestor, for he was not very familiar +with airship perils. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, we've been in big blows before, and we generally came out all +right," returned Tom. "Still, I don't like this. Why she went up five +points since I've been looking at it!" and he pointed to the needle of +the gage, which now registered fifty-five miles an hour. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my appendix!" gasped Mr. Damon. "It's a hurricane Tom!" +</P> + +<P> +"Something like that," put in Ned, in a low voice. +</P> + +<P> +With a suddenness that was startling, the wind increased in violence +still more. Tom ran to the pilot house. +</P> + +<P> +"What are you going to do?" Ned called. +</P> + +<P> +"See if we can't go down a bit," was Tom's answer. "I don't like this. +It may be calmer below. We're up too high as it is." +</P> + +<P> +He tried to throw over the lever controlling the deflecting rudder, +which would send the Flyer down, but he could not move it. +</P> + +<P> +"Give me a hand!" he called to Ned, but even the strength of the two +lads was not sufficient to shift it. +</P> + +<P> +"Call Koku!" gasped Tom. "If anybody can budge it the giant can!" +</P> + +<P> +Meanwhile the airship was being carried onward in the grip of a mighty +wind, so strong that its pressure on the surface of the deflecting +rudder prevented it from being shifted. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap15"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XV +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +SNAPPING AN AVALANCHE +</H3> + +<P> +"Bless my thermometer!" gasped Mr. Damon. "This is terrible!" The +airship was plunging and swaying about in the awful gale. "Can't +something be done, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"What has happened?" cried Mr. Nestor. "We were on a level keel before. +What is it?" +</P> + +<P> +"It's the automatic balancing rudder!" answered Tom. "Something has +happened to it. The wind may have broken it! Come on, Ned!" and he led +the way to the engine room. +</P> + +<P> +"What are you going to do? Don't you want Koku to shift the deflecting +rudder? Here he is," Ned added, as the giant came forward, in response +to a signal bell that Tom's chum had rung. +</P> + +<P> +"It's too late to try the deflecting rudder!" tried Tom. "I must see +what is the matter with our balancer." As he spoke the ship gave a +terrific plunge, and the occupants were thrown sideways. The next +moment it was on a level keel again, scudding along with the gale, but +there was no telling when the craft would again nearly capsize. +</P> + +<P> +Tom looked at the mechanism controlling the equalizing and equilibrium +rudder. It was out of order, and he guessed that the terrific wind was +responsible for it. +</P> + +<P> +"What can we do?" cried Ned, as the airship nearly rolled over. "Can't +we do anything, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. I'm going to try. Keep calm now. We may come out all right. This +is the worst blow we've been in since we were in Russia. Start the gas +machine full blast. I want all the vapor I can get." +</P> + +<P> +As I have explained the Flyer was a combined dirigible balloon and +aeroplane. It could be used as either, or both, in combination. At +present the gas bag was not fully inflated, and Tom had been sending +his craft along as an aeroplane. +</P> + +<P> +"What are you going to do?" cried Ned, as he pulled over the lever that +set the gas generating machine in operation. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm going up as high as I can go!" cried Tom. "If we can't go down we +must go up. I'll get above the hurricane instead of below it. Give me +all the gas you can, Ned!" +</P> + +<P> +The vapor hissed as it rushed into the big bag overhead. Tom carried +aboard his craft the chemicals needed to generate the powerful lifting +gas, of which he alone had the secret. It was more powerful than +hydrogen, and simple to make. The balloon of the Flyer was now being +distended. +</P> + +<P> +Meanwhile Tom, with Koku, Mr. Damon and Mr. Nestor to help him, worked +over the deflecting rudder, and also on the equilibrium mechanism. But +they could not get either to operate. +</P> + +<P> +Ned stood by the gas machine, and worked it to the limit. But even with +all that energy, so powerful was the wind, that the Flyer rose slowly, +the gale actually holding her down as a water-logged craft is held +below the waves. Ordinarily, with the gas machine set at its limit the +craft would have shot up rapidly. +</P> + +<P> +At times the airship would skim along on the level, and again it would +be pitched and tossed about, until it was all the occupants could do to +keep their feet. Mr. Damon was continually blessing everything he could +remember. +</P> + +<P> +"Now she's going!" suddenly cried Ned, as he looked at the dials +registering the pressure of the gas, and showing the height of the +airship above the earth. +</P> + +<P> +"Going how?" gasped Tom, as he looked over from where he was working at +the equilibrium apparatus. "Going down?" +</P> + +<P> +"Going up!" shouted Ned. "I guess we'll be all right soon!" +</P> + +<P> +It was true. Now that the bag was filled with the powerful lifting gas, +under pressure, the Flyer was beginning to get out of the dangerous +predicament into which the gale had blown her. Up and up she went, and +every foot she climbed the power of the wind became less. +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe it all happened for the best," said Tom, as he noted the height +gage. "If we had gone down, the wind might have been worse nearer the +earth." +</P> + +<P> +Later they learned that this was so. The most destructive wind storm +ever known swept across the southern part of Europe, over which they +were flying that night, and, had the airship gone down, she would +probably have been destroyed. But, going up, she got above the +wind-strata. Up and up she climbed, until, when three miles above the +earth, she was in a calm zone. It was rather hard to breathe at this +height, and Tom set the oxygen apparatus at work. +</P> + +<P> +This created in the interior of the craft an atmosphere almost like +that on the earth, and the travelers were made more at their ease. +Getting out of the terrible wind pressure made it possible to work the +deflecting rudder, though Tom had no idea of going down, as long as the +blow lasted. +</P> + +<P> +"We'll just sail along at this height until morning," he said, "and by +then the gale may be over, or we may be beyond the zone of it. Start +the propellers, Ned. I think I can manage to repair the equilibrium +rudder now." +</P> + +<P> +The propellers, which gave the forward motion to the airship, had been +stopped when it was found that the wind was carrying her along, but +they were now put in motion again, sending the Flyer forward. In a +short time Tom had the equilibrium machine in order, and matters were +now normal again. +</P> + +<P> +"But that was a strenuous time while it lasted," remarked the young +inventor, as he sat down. +</P> + +<P> +"It sure was," agreed Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my pen wiper!" cried Mr. Damon. "That was one of the few times +when I wish I'd never come with you, Tom Swift," and everyone laughed +at that. +</P> + +<P> +The Flyer was now out of danger, going along high in the air through +the night, while the gale raged below her. At Tom's suggestion, Koku +got a lunch ready, for they were all tired with their labors, and +somewhat nervous from the danger and excitement. +</P> + +<P> +"And now for sleep!" exclaimed Tom, as he pushed back his plate. "Ned, +set the automatic steering gear, and we'll see where we bring up by +morning." +</P> + +<P> +An examination, through a powerful telescope in the bright light of +morning, showed the travelers that they were over the outskirts of a +large city, which, later, they learned was Rome, Italy. +</P> + +<P> +"We've made a good trip," said Tom. "The gale had us worried, but it +sent us along at a lively clip. Now for Switzerland, and the +avalanches!" +</P> + +<P> +They made a landing at a village just outside the "Holy City," as Rome +is often called, and renewed their supply of gasolene. Naturally they +attracted a crowd of curious persons, many of whom had never seen an +airship before. Certainly few of them had ever seen one like Tom +Swift's. +</P> + +<P> +The next day found them hovering over the Alps, where Tom hoped to be +able to get the pictures of snow slides. They went down to earth at a +town near one of the big mountain ranges, and there made inquiries as +to where would be the best location to look for big avalanches. If they +went but a few miles to the north, they were told, they would be in the +desired region, and they departed for that vicinity. +</P> + +<P> +"And now we've just got to take our time, and wait for an avalanche to +happen," remarked Tom, as they were flying along over the mountain +ranges. "As Mr. Damon said, these things aren't made to order. They +just happen." +</P> + +<P> +For three days they sailed in and out over the great snow-covered peaks +of the Alps. They did not go high up, for they wanted to be near earth +when an avalanche would occur, so that near-view pictures could be +secured. Occasionally they saw parties of mountain climbers ascending +some celebrated peak, and for want of something better to photograph, +Tom "snapped" the tourists. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess they're all out of avalanches this season," remarked Ned +one afternoon, when they had circled back and forth over a mountain +where, so it was said, the big snow slides were frequent. +</P> + +<P> +"It does seem so," agreed Tom. "Still, we're in no hurry. It is easier +to be up here, than it is walking around in a jungle, not knowing what +minute a tiger may jump out at you." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my rubbers, yes!" agreed Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +The sky was covered with lowering clouds, and there were occasionally +flurries of snow. Tom's airship was well above the snow line on the +mountains. The young inventor and Ned sat in the pilot house, taking +observations through a spyglass of the mountain chain below them. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly Ned, who had the glass focused on a mighty peak, cried out: +</P> + +<P> +"There she is, Tom!" +</P> + +<P> +"What?" +</P> + +<P> +"The avalanche! The snow is beginning to slide down the mountain! Say, +it's going to be a big one, too. Got your camera ready?" +</P> + +<P> +"Sure! I've had it ready for the last three days. Put me over there, +Ned. You look after the airship, and I'll take the pictures!" +</P> + +<P> +Tom sprang to get his apparatus, while his chum hurried to the levers, +wheels and handles that controlled the Flyer. As they approached the +avalanche they could see the great mass of ice, snow, big stones, and +earth sliding down the mountain side, carrying tall trees with it. +</P> + +<P> +"This is just what I wanted!" cried Tom, as he set his camera working. +"Put me closer, Ned." +</P> + +<P> +Ned obeyed, and the airship was now hovering directly over the +avalanche, and right in its path. The big landslide, as it would have +been called in this country, met no village in its path, fortunately, +or it would have wiped it out completely. It was in a wild and desolate +region that it occurred. +</P> + +<P> +"I want to get a real close view!" cried Tom, as he got some pictures +showing a whole grove of giant trees uprooted and carried off. "Get +closer Ned, and—" +</P> + +<P> +Tom was interrupted by a cry of alarm from his chum. +</P> + +<P> +"We're falling!" yelled Ned. "Something has gone wrong. We're going +down into the avalanche!". +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap16"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XVI +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +TELEGRAPH ORDERS +</H3> + +<P> +There was confusion aboard the airship. Tom, hearing Ned's cry, left +his camera, to rush to the engine room, but not before he had set the +picture apparatus to working automatically. Mr. Damon, Mr. Nestor and +Koku, alarmed by Ned's cries, ran back from the forward part of the +craft, where they had been watching the mighty mass of ice and earth as +it rushed down the side of the mountain. +</P> + +<P> +"What's wrong, Ned?" cried Tom excitedly. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know! The propellers have stopped! We were running as an +aeroplane you know. Now we're going down!" +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my suspenders!" shouted Mr. Damon. "If we land in the midst of +that conglomeration of ice it will be the end of us." +</P> + +<P> +"But we're not going to land there!" cried Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"How are you going to stop it?" demanded Mr. Nestor. +</P> + +<P> +"By the gas machine!" answered Tom. "That will stop us from falling. +Start it up, Ned!" +</P> + +<P> +"That's right! I always forget about that! I'll have it going in a +second!" +</P> + +<P> +"Less than a second," called Tom, as he saw how near to the mighty, +rushing avalanche they were coming. +</P> + +<P> +Ned worked rapidly, and in a very short time the downward course of the +airship was checked. It floated easily above the rushing flood of ice +and earth, and Tom, seeing that his craft, and those on it, were safe, +hurried back to his camera. Meanwhile the machine had automatically +been taking pictures, but now with the young inventor to manage it, +better results would be obtained. +</P> + +<P> +Tom aimed it here and there, at the most spectacular parts of the +avalanche. The others gathered around him, after Ned had made an +inspection, and found that a broken electrical wire had caused the +propellers to stop. This was soon repaired and then, as they were +hanging in the air like a balloon, Tom took picture after picture of +the wonderful sight below them. Forest after forest was demolished. +</P> + +<P> +"This will be a great film!" Tom shouted to Ned, as the latter informed +him that the machinery was all right again. "Send me up a little. I +want to get a view from the top, looking down." +</P> + +<P> +His chum made the necessary adjustments to the mechanism and then, +there being nothing more to slide down the mountainside the avalanche +was ended. But what a mass of wreck and ruin there was! It was as if a +mighty earthquake had torn the mountain asunder. +</P> + +<P> +"It's a good thing it wasn't on a side of the mountain where people +lived," commented Ned, as the airship rose high toward the clouds. "If +it had been, there'd be nothing left of 'em. What hair-raising stunt +are you going to try next, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know. I expect to hear from Mr. Period soon. +</P> + +<P> +"Hear from Mr. Period?" exclaimed Mr. Nestor. "How are you going to do +that, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"He said he would telegraph me at Berne, Switzerland, at a certain +date, as he knew I was coming to the Alps to try for some avalanche +pictures. It's two or three days yet, before I can expect the telegram, +which of course will have to come part way by cable. In the meanwhile, +I think we'll take a little rest, and a vacation. I want to give the +airship an overhauling, and look to my camera. There's no telling what +Mr. Period may want next." +</P> + +<P> +"Then he didn't make out your programme completely before you started?" +asked Mr. Nestor. +</P> + +<P> +"No, he said he'd communicate with me from time to time. He is in touch +with what is going on in the world, you know, and if he hears of +anything exciting at any place, I'm to go there at once. You see he +wants the most sensational films he can get." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, our company is out to give the best pictures we can secure," +spoke Mary's father, "and I think we are lucky to have Tom Swift +working for us. We already have films that no other concern can get. +And we need them." +</P> + +<P> +"I wonder what became of those men who started to make so much trouble +for you, Tom?" asked Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, they seem to have disappeared," replied our hero. "Of course +they may be after me any day now, but for the time being, I've thrown +them off my track." +</P> + +<P> +"So then you don't know where you're going next?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"No, it may be to Japan, or to the North Pole. Well, I'm ready for +anything. We've got plenty of gasolene, and the Flyer can certainly +go," said Tom. +</P> + +<P> +They went down to earth in a quiet spot, just outside of a little +village, and there they remained three days, to the no small wonder of +the inhabitants. Tom wanted to see if his camera was working properly. +So he developed some of the avalanche pictures, and found them +excellent. The rest of the time was spent in making some needed repairs +to the airship, while the young inventor overhauled his Wizard machine, +that he found needed a few adjustments. +</P> + +<P> +Their arrival in Berne created quite a sensation, but they were used to +that. Tom anchored his airship just outside the city, and, accompanied +by Ned, made his way to the telegraph office. Some of the officials +there could speak English, though not very well. +</P> + +<P> +"I am expecting a message," said Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes? Who for?" asked the clerk. +</P> + +<P> +"Tom Swift. It will be from America." +</P> + +<P> +As Tom said this he observed a man sitting in the corner of the office +get up hurriedly and go out. All at once his suspicions were aroused. +He thought of the attempts that had been made to get his Wizard Camera +away from him. +</P> + +<P> +"Who was that man?" he quickly asked the agent. +</P> + +<P> +"Him? Oh, he, too, is expecting a message from America. He has been +here some time." +</P> + +<P> +"Why did he go out so quickly?" Ned wanted to know. +</P> + +<P> +"Why, I can not tell. He is an Englishman. They do strange things." +</P> + +<P> +"My telegram? Is it here?" asked Tom impatiently. He wanted to get +whatever word there was from Mr. Period, and be on his way to whatever +destination the picture man might select. Perhaps, after all, his +suspicions, against the man who had so suddenly left, were unfounded. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, there is a cablegram here for you, Monsieur Swift," said the man, +who was French. "There are charges on it, however." +</P> + +<P> +"Pay 'em, Ned, while I see what this is," directed the young inventor, +as he tore open the envelope. +</P> + +<P> +"Whew!" he whistled a moment later. "This is going some." +</P> + +<P> +"Where to now?" asked Ned. "The North Pole?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, just the opposite. Mr. Period wants me to go to Africa—the Congo +Free State. There's an uprising among the natives there, and he wants +some war pictures. Well, I guess I'll have to go." +</P> + +<P> +As Tom spoke he looked toward the door of the telegraph office, and he +saw the man, who had so hurriedly gone out a few moments before, +looking in at him. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap17"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XVII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +SUSPICIOUS STRANGERS +</H3> + +<P> +"Off to Africa; eh?" remarked Ned, as Tom put the envelope in his +pocket. "That's another long jump. But I guess the Flyer can do it." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I think so. I say Ned, not so loud," said Tom, who had hurried to +the side of his chum, whispered the last words. +</P> + +<P> +"What's up?" inquired Ned quickly. "Anything wrong?" +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know. But I think we are being watched. Did you notice that +fellow who was in here a minute ago, when I asked for a telegram?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, what about him?" +</P> + +<P> +"Well, he's looking in the door now I think. Don't turn round. Just +look up into that mirror on the wall, and you can see his reflection." +</P> + +<P> +"I understand," whispered Ned, as he turned his gaze toward the mirror +in question, a large one, with advertisements around the frame. "I see +him," he went on. "There's some one with him." +</P> + +<P> +"That's what I thought," replied Tom. "Take a good look. Whom do you +think the other chap is?" +</P> + +<P> +Ned looked long and earnestly. By means of the mirror, he could see, +perfectly plain, two men standing just outside the door of the +telegraph office. The portal was only partly open. Ned drew an old +letter from his pocket, and pretended to be showing it to Tom. But, all +the while he was gazing earnestly at the two men. Suddenly one of them +moved, giving Tom's chum a better view of his face. +</P> + +<P> +"By Jove, Tom!" the lad exclaimed in a tense whisper. "If it isn't that +Eckert fellow I'm a cow." +</P> + +<P> +"That's what I thought," spoke Tom coolly. "Not that you're a cow, Ned, +but I believe that this man is one of the moving picture partners, who +are rivals of Mr. Period. I wasn't quite sure myself after the first +glance I had of him, so I wanted you to take a look. Do you know the +other chap—the one who ran out when I asked for my telegram?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, I've never seen him before as far as I know." +</P> + +<P> +"Same here. Come on." +</P> + +<P> +"What are you going to do?" +</P> + +<P> +"Go back to the airship, and tell Mr. Nestor. As one of the directors +in the concern I'm working for. I want his advice." +</P> + +<P> +"Good idea," replied Ned, and they turned to leave the office. The +spying stranger, and William Eckert, were not in sight when the two +lads came out. +</P> + +<P> +"They got away mighty quick," remarked Tom, as he looked up and down +the street. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, they probably saw us turn to come out, and made a quick get-away. +They might be in any one of these places along here," for the street, +on either side of the telegraph office, contained a number of hotels, +with doors opening on the sidewalk. +</P> + +<P> +"They must be on your trail yet," decided Mr. Nestor when Tom, reaching +the anchored airship, told what had happened. "Well, my advice is to go +to Africa as soon as we can. In that way we'll leave them behind, and +they won't have any chance to get your camera." +</P> + +<P> +"But what I can't understand," said Tom, "is how they knew I was coming +here. It was just as if that one man had been waiting in the telegraph +office for me to appear. I'm sorry, now, that I mentioned to Ned where +we were ordered to. But I didn't think." +</P> + +<P> +"They probably knew, anyway," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "I think this +may explain it. The rival concern in New York has been keeping track of +Mr. Period's movements. Probably they have a paid spy who may be in his +employ. They knew when he sent you a telegram, what it contained, and +where it was directed to. Then, of course, they knew you would call +here for it. What they did not know was when you would come, and so +they had to wait. That one spy was on guard, and, as soon as you came, +he went and summoned Eckert, who was waiting somewhere in the +neighborhood." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my detective story!" cried Mr. Damon. "What a state of affairs! +They ought to be arrested, Tom." +</P> + +<P> +"It would be useless," said Mr. Nestor. "They are probably far enough +away by this time. Or else they have put others on Tom's track." +</P> + +<P> +"I'll fight my own battles!" exclaimed the young inventor. "I don't go +much on the police in a case like this, especially foreign police. +Well, my camera is all right, so far," he went on, as he took a look at +it, in the compartment where he kept it. "Some one must always remain +near it, after this. But we'll soon start for Africa, to get some +pictures of a native battle. I hope it isn't the red pygmies we have to +photograph." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my shoe laces! Don't suggest such a thing," begged Mr. Damon, as +he recalled the strenuous times when the dwarfs held the missionaries +captive. +</P> + +<P> +It was necessary to lay in some stores and provisions, and for this +reason Tom could not at once head the airship for the African jungles. +As she remained at anchor, just outside the city, crowds of Swiss +people came out to look at the wonderful craft. But Tom and his +companions took care that no one got aboard, and they kept a strict +lookout for Americans, or Englishmen, thinking perhaps that Mr. Eckert, +or the spy, might try to get the camera. However, they did not see +them, and a few days after the receipt of the message from Mr. Period, +having stocked up, they rose high into the air, and set out to cross +the Mediterranean Sea for Africa. Tom laid a route over Tripoli, the +Sahara Desert, the French Congo, and so into the Congo Free State. In +his telegram, Mr. Period had said that the expected uprising was to +take place near Stanley Falls, on the Congo River. +</P> + +<P> +"And supposing it does not happen?" asked Mr. Damon. "What if the +natives don't fight, Tom? You'll have your trip for nothing, and will +run a lot of risk besides." +</P> + +<P> +"It's one of the chances I'm taking," replied the young inventor, and +truly, as he thought of it, he realized that the perils of the moving +picture business were greater than he had imagined. Tom hoped to get a +quick trip to the Congo, but, as they were sailing over the big desert, +there was an accident to the main motor, and the airship suddenly began +shooting toward the sands. She was easily brought up, by means of the +gas bags, and allowed to settle gently to the ground, in the vicinity +of a large oasis. But, when Tom looked at the broken machinery, he said: +</P> + +<P> +"This means a week's delay. It will take that, and longer, to fix it so +we can go on." +</P> + +<P> +"Too bad!" exclaimed Mr. Nestor. "The war may be over when we get +there. But it can't be helped." +</P> + +<P> +It took Tom and his friends even longer than he had thought to make the +repairs. In the meanwhile they camped in the desert place, which was +far from being unpleasant. Occasionally a caravan halted there, but, +for the most part, they were alone. +</P> + +<P> +"No danger of Eckert, or any of his spies coming here, I guess," said +Tom grimly as he blew on a portable forge, to weld two pieces of iron +together. +</P> + +<P> +In due time they were again on the wing, and without further incident +they were soon in the vicinity of Stanley Falls. They managed to locate +a village where there were some American missionaries established. They +were friends of Mr. and Mrs. Illington, the missionaries whom Tom had +saved from the red pygmies, as told in the "Electric Rifle" volume of +this series, and they made our hero and his friends welcome. +</P> + +<P> +"Is it true?" asked Tom, of the missionaries who lived not far from +Stanley Falls, "that there is to be a native battle? Or are we too late +for it?" +</P> + +<P> +"I am sorry to say, I fear there will be fighting among the tribesmen," +replied Mr. Janeway, one of the Christian workers. "It has not yet +taken place, though." +</P> + +<P> +"Then I'm not too late!" cried Tom, and there was exultation in his +voice. "I don't mean to be barbarous," he went on, as he saw that the +missionaries looked shocked, "but as long as they are going to fight I +want to get the pictures." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, they'll fight all right," spoke Mrs. Janeway. "The poor, ignorant +natives here are always ready to fight. This time I think it is about +some cattle that one tribe took from another." +</P> + +<P> +"And where will the battle take place?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, the rumors we have, seem to indicate that the fight will take +place about ten miles north of here. We will have notice of it before +it starts, as some of the natives, whom we have succeeded in +converting, belong to the tribe that is to be attacked. They will be +summoned to the defense of their town and then it will be time enough +for you to go. Oh, war is a terrible thing! I do not like to talk about +it. Tell me how you rescued our friends from the red pygmies," and Tom +was obliged to relate that story, which I have told in detail elsewhere. +</P> + +<P> +Several days passed, and Tom and his friends spent a pleasant time in +the African village with the missionaries. The airship and camera were +in readiness for instant use, and during this period of idleness our +hero got several fine films of animal scenes, including a number of +night-fights among the beasts at the drinking pools. One tiger battle +was especially good, from a photographic standpoint. +</P> + +<P> +One afternoon, a number of native bearers came into the town. They +preceded two white men, who were evidently sportsmen, or explorers, and +the latter had a well equipped caravan. The strangers sought the advice +of the missionaries about where big game might be found, and Tom +happened to be at the cottage of Mr. Janeway when the strangers arrived. +</P> + +<P> +The young inventor looked at them critically, as he was introduced to +them. Both men spoke with an English accent, one introducing himself as +Bruce Montgomery, and the other as Wade Kenneth. Tom decided that they +were of the ordinary type of globe-trotting Britishers, until, on his +way to his airship, he passed the place where the native bearers had +set down the luggage of the Englishmen. +</P> + +<P> +"Whew!" whistled Tom, as he caught sight of a peculiarly shaped box. +"See that, Ned?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, what is it? A new kind of magazine gun?" +</P> + +<P> +"It's a moving picture camera, or I lose my guess!" whispered Tom. "One +of the old fashioned kind. Those men are no more tourists, or after big +game, than I am! They're moving picture men, and they're here to get +views of that native battle! Ned, we've got to be on our guard. They +may be in the pay of that Turbot and Eckert firm, and they may try to +do us some harm!" +</P> + +<P> +"That's so!" exclaimed Ned. "We'll keep watch of them, Tom." +</P> + +<P> +As they neared their airship, there came, running down what served as +the main village street, an African who showed evidence of having come +from afar. As he ran on, he called out something in a strange tongue. +Instantly from their huts the other natives swarmed. +</P> + +<P> +"What's up now?" cried Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Something important, I'll wager," replied Tom. "Ned, you go back to +the missionaries house, and find out what it is. I'm going to stand +guard over my camera." +</P> + +<P> +"It's come!" cried Ned a little later, as he hurried into the interior +of the airship, where Tom was busy working over a new attachment he +intended putting on his picture machine. +</P> + +<P> +"What has?" +</P> + +<P> +"War! That native, whom we saw running in, brought news that the battle +would take place day after to-morrow. The enemies of his tribe are on +the march, so the African spies say, and he came to summon all the +warriors from this town. We've got to get busy!" +</P> + +<P> +"That's so. What about those Englishmen?" +</P> + +<P> +"They were talking to the missionaries when the runner came in. They +pretended to have no interest in it, but I saw one wink to the other, +and then, very soon, they went out, and I saw them talking to their +native bearers, while they were busy over that box you said was a +picture machine." +</P> + +<P> +"I knew it, Ned! I was sure of it! Those fellows came here to trick us, +though how they ever followed our trail I don't know. Probably they +came by a fast steamer to the West Coast, and struck inland, while we +were delayed on the desert. I don't care if they are only straight +out-and-out rivals—and not chaps that are trying to take an unfair +advantage. I suppose all the big picture concerns have a tip about this +war, and they may have representatives here. I hope we get the best +views. Now come on, and give me a hand. We've got our work cut out for +us, all right." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my red cross bandage!" cried Mr. Damon, when he heard the news. +"A native fight, eh? That will be something I haven't seen in some +time. Will there be any danger, Tom, do you think?" +</P> + +<P> +"Not unless our airship tumbles down between the two African forces," +replied our hero, "and I'll take care that it doesn't do that. We'll be +well out of reach of any of their blow guns, or arrows." +</P> + +<P> +"But I understand that many of the tribes have powder weapons," said +Mr. Nestor. +</P> + +<P> +"They have," admitted Tom, "but they are 'trader's' rifles, and don't +carry far. We won't run any risk from such old-fashioned guns." +</P> + +<P> +"A big fight; eh?" asked Koku when they told him what was before them. +"Me like to help." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, and I guess both sides would give a premium for your services," +remarked Tom, as he gazed at his big servant. "But we'll need you with +us, Koku." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, me stay with you, Mr. Tom," exclaimed the big man, with a grin. +</P> + +<P> +Somewhat to Tom's surprise the two Englishmen showed no further +interest in him and his airship, after the introduction at the +missionaries' bungalow. +</P> + +<P> +With the stolidity of their race the Britishers did not show any +surprise, as, some time afterward, they strolled down toward Tom's big +craft, after supper, and looked it over. Soon they went back to their +own camp, and a little later, Koku, who walked toward it, brought word +that the Englishmen were packing up. +</P> + +<P> +"They're going to start for the seat of war the first thing in the +morning," decided Tom. "Well, we'll get ahead of them. Though we can +travel faster than they can, we'll start now, and be on the ground in +good season. Besides, I don't like staying all night in the same +neighborhood with them. Get ready for a start, Ned." +</P> + +<P> +Tom did not stop to say good-bye to the Englishmen, though he bade +farewell to the missionaries, who had been so kind to him. There was +much excitement in the native town, for many of the tribesmen were +getting ready to depart to help their friends or relatives in the +impending battle. +</P> + +<P> +As dusk was falling, the big airship arose, and soon her powerful +propellers were sending her across the jungle, toward Stanley Falls in +the vicinity of which the battle was expected to take place. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap18"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XVIII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE NATIVE BATTLE +</H3> + +<P> +"By Jove, Tom, here they come!" +</P> + +<P> +"From over by that drinking pool?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, just as the spies said they would. Wow, what a crowd of the black +beggars there are! And some of 'em have regular guns, too. But most of +'em have clubs, bows and arrows, blow guns, or spears." +</P> + +<P> +Tom and Ned were standing on the forward part of the airship, which was +moving slowly along, over an open plateau, in the jungle where the +native battle was about to take place. Our friends had left the town +where the missionaries lived, and had hovered over the jungle, until +they saw signs of the coming struggle. They had seen nothing of their +English rivals since coming away, but had no doubt but that the +Britishers were somewhere in the neighborhood. +</P> + +<P> +The two forces of black men, who had gone to war over a dispute about +some cattle, approached each other. There was the beating of tom-toms, +and skin drums, and many weird shouts. From their vantage point in the +air, Tom and his companions had an excellent view. The Wizard Camera +was loaded with a long reel of film, and ready for action. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my handkerchief!" cried Mr. Damon, as he looked down on the +forces that were about to clash. "I never saw anything like this +before!" +</P> + +<P> +"I either," admitted Tom. "But, if things go right, I'm going to get +some dandy films!" +</P> + +<P> +Nearer and nearer the rival forces advanced. At first they had stared, +and shouted in wonder at the sight of the airship, hovering above them, +but their anger soon drew their attention to the fighting at hand, and, +after useless gestures toward the craft of the air, and after some of +them had vainly fired their guns or arrows at it, they paid no more +attention, but rushed on with their shouts and cries and amid the +beating of their rude drums. +</P> + +<P> +"I think I'll begin to take pictures now," said Tom, as Ned, in charge +of the ship, sent it about in a circle, giving a general view of the +rival forces. "I'll show a scene of the two crowds getting ready for +business, and, later on, when they're actually giving each other cats +and dogs, I'll get all the pictures possible." +</P> + +<P> +The camera was started while, safe in the air those on the Flyer watched +what went on below them. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly the forward squads of the two small armies of blacks met. With +wild, weird yells they rushed at each other. The air was filled with +flying arrows and spears. The sound of the old-fashioned muzzle-loading +guns could be heard, and clouds of smoke arose. Tilting his camera, and +arranging the newly attached reflecting mirrors so as to give the +effect as if a spectator was looking at the battle from in front, +instead of from above, Tom Swift took picture after picture. +</P> + +<P> +The fight was now on. With yells of rage and defiance the Africans came +together, giving blow for blow. It was a wild melee, and those on the +airship looked on fascinated, though greatly wishing that such horrors +could be stopped. +</P> + +<P> +"How about it, Tom?" cried Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Everything going good! I don't like this business, but now I'm in it +I'm going to stick. Put me down a little lower," answered the young +inventor. +</P> + +<P> +"All right. I say Tom, look over there." +</P> + +<P> +"Where?" +</P> + +<P> +"By that lightning-struck gum tree. See those two men, and some sort of +a machine they've got stuck up on stilts? See it?" +</P> + +<P> +"Sure. Those are the two Englishmen—my rivals! They're taking +pictures, too!" +</P> + +<P> +And then, with a crash and roar, with wild shouts and yells, with +volley after volley of firearms, clouds of smoke and flights of arrows +and spears, the native battle was in full swing, while the young +inventor, sailing above it in his airship, reeled off view after view +of the strange sight. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap19"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XIX +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +A HEAVY LOSS +</H3> + +<P> +"Bless my battle axe, but this is awful!" cried Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"War is always a fearful thing," spoke Mr. Nestor. "But this is not as +bad as if the natives fought with modern weapons. See! most of them +are fighting with clubs, and their fists. They don't seem to hurt each +other very much." +</P> + +<P> +"That's so," agreed Mr. Damon. The two gentlemen were in the main +cabin, looking down on the fight below them, while Tom, with Ned to +help him change the reels of films, as they became filled with +pictures, attended to the camera. Koku was steering the craft, as he +had readily learned how to manage it. +</P> + +<P> +"Are those Englishmen taking pictures yet?" asked Tom, too busy to turn +his head, and look for himself. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, they're still at," replied Ned. "But they seem to be having +trouble with their machine," he added as he saw one of the men leave +the apparatus, and run hurriedly back to where they had made a +temporary camp. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess it's an old-fashioned kind," commented Tom. "Say, this is +getting fierce!" he cried, as the natives got in closer contact with +each other. It was now a hand-to-hand battle. +</P> + +<P> +"I should say so!" yelled Ned. "It's a wonder those Englishmen aren't +afraid to be down on the same level with the black fighters." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, a white person is considered almost sacred by the natives here, so +the missionaries told me," said Tom. "A black man would never think of +raising his hand to one, and the Englishmen probably know this. They're +safe enough. In fact I'm thinking of soon going down myself, and +getting some views from the ground." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my gizzard, Tom!" cried Mr. Damon. "Don't do it!" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I think I will. Why, it's safe enough. Besides, if they attack us +we have the electric rifles. Ned, you tell Koku to get the guns out, to +have in readiness, and then you put the ship down. I'll take a chance." +</P> + +<P> +"Jove! You've been doing nothing but take chances since we came on this +trip!" exclaimed Ned, admiringly. "All right! Here we go," and he went +to relieve Koku at the wheel, while the giant, grinning cheerfully at +the prospect of taking part in the fight himself, got out the rifles, +including his own. +</P> + +<P> +Meanwhile the native battle went on fiercely. Many on both sides fell, +and not a few ran away, when they got the chance, their companions +yelling at them, evidently trying to shame them into coming back. +</P> + +<P> +As the airship landed, Mr. Damon, Mr. Nestor, Ned and Koku stood ready +with the deadly electric rifles, in case an attack should be made on +them. But the fighting natives paid no more attention to our friends +than they did to the two Englishmen. The latter moved their clumsy +camera from place to place, in order to get various views of the +fighting. +</P> + +<P> +"This is the best yet!" cried Tom, as, after a lull in the fight, when +the two opposing armies had drawn a little apart, they came together +again more desperately than before. "I hope the pictures are being +recorded all right. I have to go at this thing pretty much in the dark. +Say, look at the beggars fight!" he finished. +</P> + +<P> +But a battle, even between uncivilized blacks, cannot go on for very +long at a time. Many had fallen, some being quite severely injured it +seemed, being carried off by their friends. Then, with a sudden rush, +the side which, as our friends learned later, had been robbed of their +cattle, made a fierce attack, overwhelming their enemies, and +compelling them to retreat. Across the open plain the vanquished army +fled, with the others after them. Tom, meanwhile, taking pictures as +fast as he could. +</P> + +<P> +"This ends it!" he remarked to Ned, when the warriors were too far away +to make any more good views. "Now we can take a rest." +</P> + +<P> +"The Englishmen gave up some time ago," said his chum, motioning to the +two men who were taking their machine off the tripod. +</P> + +<P> +"Guess their films gave out," spoke Tom. "Well, you see it didn't do +any harm to come down, and I got some better views here." +</P> + +<P> +"Here they come back!" exclaimed Ned, as a horde of the black fellows +emerged from the jungle, and came on over the plain. +</P> + +<P> +"Hear 'em sing!" commented Tom, as the sound of a rude chant came to +their ears. "They must be the winners all right." +</P> + +<P> +"I guess so," agreed Ned. "But what about staying here now? Maybe they +won't be so friendly to us when they haven't any fighting to occupy +their minds." +</P> + +<P> +"Don't worry," advised Tom. "They won't bother us." +</P> + +<P> +And the blacks did not. They were caring for their wounded, who had not +already been taken from the field, and they paid no attention to our +friends, save to look curiously at the airship. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my newspaper!" cried Mr. Damon, with an air of relief. "I'm +glad that's over, and we didn't have to use the electric rifles, after +all." +</P> + +<P> +"Here come the Englishmen to pay us a visit," spoke Ned a little later, +as they sat about the cabin of the Flyer. The two rival picture men +soon climbed on deck. +</P> + +<P> +"Beg pardon," said the taller of the two, addressing our hero, "but +could you lend us a roll of film? Ours are all used up, and we want to +get some more pictures before going back to our main camp." +</P> + +<P> +"I'm sorry," replied Tom, "but I use a special size, and it fits no +camera but my own." +</P> + +<P> +"Ah! might we see your camera?" asked the other Englishman. "That is, +see how it works?" +</P> + +<P> +"I don't like to be disobliging," was Tom's answer, "but it is not yet +patented and—well—" he hesitated. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I see!" sneered the taller visitor. "You're afraid we might steal +some of your ideas. Hum! Come on Montgomery," and, swinging on his +heels, with a military air, he hurried away, followed by his companion. +</P> + +<P> +"They don't like that, but I can't help it," remarked Tom to his +friends a little later. "I can't afford to take any chances." +</P> + +<P> +"No, you did just right," said Mr. Nestor. "Those men may be all right, +but from the fact that they are in the picture taking business I'd be +suspicious of them." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, what's next on the programme?" asked Ned as Tom put his camera +away. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I think we'll stay here over night," was our hero's reply. "It's +a nice location, and the gas machine needs cleaning. We can do it here, +and maybe I can get some more pictures." +</P> + +<P> +They were busy the rest of the day on the gas generator, but the main +body of natives did not come back, and the Englishmen seemed to have +disappeared. +</P> + +<P> +Everyone slept soundly that night. So soundly, in fact, that the sun +was very high when Koku was the first to awaken, His head felt +strangely dizzy, and he wondered at a queer smell in the room he had to +himself. +</P> + +<P> +"Nobody up yet," he exclaimed in surprise, as he staggered into the +main cabin. There, too, was the strange, sweetish, sickly smell. "Mr. +Tom, where you be? Time to get up!" the giant called to his master, as +he went in, and gently shook the young inventor by the shoulder. +</P> + +<P> +"Eh? What's that? What's the matter?" began Tom, and then he suddenly +sat up. "Oh, my head!" he exclaimed, putting his hands to his aching +temples. +</P> + +<P> +"And that queer smell!" added Ned, who was also awake now. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my talcum powder!" cried Mr. Damon. "I have a splitting +headache." +</P> + +<P> +"Hum! Chloroform, if I'm any judge!" called Mr. Nestor from his berth. +</P> + +<P> +"Chloroform!" cried Tom, staggering to his feet. "I wonder." He did not +finish his sentence, but made his way to the room where his camera was +kept. "It's gone!" he cried. "We have been chloroformed in the night, +and some one has taken my Wizard Camera." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap20"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XX +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +AFTER THE ENGLISHMEN +</H3> + +<P> +"The camera gone!" gasped Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Did they chloroform us?" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "Bless my—" but for one +of the few times in his life, he did not know what to bless. +</P> + +<P> +"Get all the fresh air you can," hastily advised Mr. Nestor. "Koku, +open all the doors and windows," for, though it was hot during the day +in the jungle, the nights were cool, and the airship was generally +closed up. With the inrush of the fresh air every one soon felt better. +</P> + +<P> +"Is anything else gone?" asked Ned, as he followed Tom into the camera +room. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, several rolls of unexposed films. Oh, if only they haven't got +too much of a start! I'll get it away from them!" declared Tom with +energy. +</P> + +<P> +"From who? Who took it?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Those Englishmen, of course! Who else? I believe they are in the pay +of Turbot and Eckert. Their taking pictures was only a bluff! They got +on my trail and stuck to it. The delays we had, gave them a chance to +catch up to us. They came over to the airship, to pretend to borrow +films, just to get a look at the place, and size it up, so they could +chloroform us, and get the camera." +</P> + +<P> +"I believe you're right," declared Mr. Nestor. "We must get after those +scoundrels as quickly as possible!" +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my shoulder braces!" cried Mr. Damon. "How do you imagine they +worked that trick on us?" +</P> + +<P> +"Easily enough," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "We were all dead tired last +night, and slept like tops. They watched their chance, sneaked up, and +got in. After that it was no hard matter to chloroform each one of us +in turn, and they had the ship to themselves. They looked around, found +the camera, and made off with it." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I'm going to get right after them!" cried Tom. "Ned, start the +motor. I'll steer for a while." +</P> + +<P> +"Hold on! Wait a minute," suggested Mr. Nestor. "I wouldn't go off in +the ship just yet, Tom." +</P> + +<P> +"Why not?" +</P> + +<P> +"Because you don't know which way to go. We must find out which trail +the Englishmen took. They have African porters with them, and those +porters doubtless know some of the blacks around here. We must inquire +of the natives which way the porters went, in carrying the goods of our +rivals, for those Englishmen would not abandon camp without taking +their baggage with them." +</P> + +<P> +"That's so," admitted the young inventor. "That will be the best plan. +Once I find which way they have gone I can easily overtake them in the +airship. And when I find 'em—" Tom paused significantly. +</P> + +<P> +"Me help you fix 'em!" cried Koku, clenching his big fist. +</P> + +<P> +"They will probably figure it out that you will take after them," said +Mr. Nestor, "but they may not count on you doing it in the Flyer, and +so they may not try to hide. It isn't going to be an easy matter to +pick a small party out of the jungle though, Tom." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I've done more difficult things in my airships," spoke our hero. +"I'll fly low, and use the glass. I guess we can pick out their crowd +of porters, though they won't have many. Oh, my camera! I hope they +won't damage it." +</P> + +<P> +"They won't," was Ned's opinion. "It's too valuable. They want it to +take pictures with, themselves." +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe. I hope they don't open it, and see how it's made. And I'm glad +I thought to hide the picture films I've taken so far. They didn't get +those away from us, only some of the blank ones," and Tom looked again +in a secret closet, where he kept the battle-films, and the others, in +the dark, to prevent them from being light-struck, by any possible +chance. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, if we're going to make some inquiries, let's do it," suggested +Mr. Nestor. "I think I see some of the Africans over there. They have +made a temporary camp, it seems, to attend to some of their wounded." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you think we can make them understand what we want?" asked Ned. "I +don't believe they speak English." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh these blacks have been trading with white men," said Tom, "for they +have 'trader's' guns, built to look at, and not to shoot very well. I +fancy we can make ourselves understood. If not, we can use signs." +</P> + +<P> +Leaving Koku and Mr. Damon to guard the airship, Tom, Ned and Mr. +Nestor went to the African camp. There was a large party of men there, +and they seemed friendly enough. Probably winning the battle the day +before had put them in good humor, even though many of them were hurt. +</P> + +<P> +To Tom's delight he found one native who could speak a little English, +and of him they made inquiries as to what direction the Englishmen had +taken. The black talked for a while among his fellows, and then +reported to our friends that, late in the night, one of the porters, +hired by Montgomery and Kenneth, had come to camp to bid a brother +good-bye. This porter had said that his masters were in a hurry to get +away, and had started west. +</P> + +<P> +"That's it!" cried Mr. Nestor. "They're going to get somewhere so they +can make their way to the coast. They want to get out of Africa as fast +as they can." +</P> + +<P> +"And I'm going to get after 'em as fast as I can!" cried Tom grimly. +"Come on!" +</P> + +<P> +They hurried back to the airship, finding Koku and Mr. Damon peacefully +engaged in talk, no one having disturbed them. +</P> + +<P> +"Start the motor, Ned!" called his chum. "We'll see what luck we have!" +</P> + +<P> +Up into the air went the Flyer, her great propellers revolving rapidly. +Over the jungle she shot, and then, when he found that everything was +working well, and that the cleaned gas generator was operating as good +as when it was new, the young inventor slowed up, and brought the craft +down to a lower level. +</P> + +<P> +"For we don't want to run past these fellows, or shoot over their heads +in our hurry," Tom explained. "Ned, get out the binoculars. They're +easier to handle than the telescope. Then go up forward, and keep a +sharp lookout. There is something like a jungle trail below us, and it +looks to be the only one around here. They probably took that." Soon +after leaving the place where they had camped after the battle, Tom had +seen a rude path through the forest, and had followed that lead. +</P> + +<P> +On sped the Flyer, after the two Englishmen, while Tom thought +regretfully of his stolen camera. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap21"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXI +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE JUNGLE FIRE +</H3> + +<P> +"Well, Tom, I don't seem to see anything of them," remarked Ned that +afternoon, as he sat in the bow of the air craft, gazing from time to +time through the powerful glasses. +</P> + +<P> +"No, and I can't understand it, either," responded the young inventor, +who had come to relieve his chum. "They didn't have much the +start of us, and they'll have to travel very slowly. It isn't as if +they could hop on a train; and, even if they did, I could overtake them +in a short time. But they have to travel on foot through the jungle, +and can't have gone far." +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe they have bullock carts," suggested Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"The trail isn't wide enough for that," declared Tom. "We've come quite +a distance now, even if we have been running at low speed, and we +haven't seen even a black man on the trail," and he motioned to the +rude path below them. +</P> + +<P> +"They may have taken a boat and slipped down that river we crossed a +little while ago," suggested Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"That's so!" cried Tom. "Why didn't I think of it? Say! I'm going to +turn back." +</P> + +<P> +"Turn back?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, and go up and down the stream a way. We have time, for we can +easily run at top speed on the return trip. Then, if we don't see +anything of them on the water, we'll pick up the trail again. Put her +around, Ned, and I'll take the glasses for a while." +</P> + +<P> +The Flyer was soon shooting back over the same trail our friends had +covered, and, as Ned set the propellers going at top speed, they were +quickly hovering over a broad but shallow river, which cut through the +jungle. +</P> + +<P> +"Try it down stream first," suggested Tom, who was peering through the +binoculars. "They'd be most likely to go down, as it would be easier." +</P> + +<P> +Along over the stream swept the airship, covering several miles. +</P> + +<P> +"There's a boat!" suddenly exclaimed Mr. Nestor, pointing to a native +canoe below them. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my paddle wheel! So it is!" cried Mr. Damon. "I believe it's +them, Tom!" +</P> + +<P> +"No, there are only natives in that craft," answered the young inventor +a moment later, as he brought the binoculars into focus. "I wish it +was them, though." +</P> + +<P> +A few more miles were covered down stream, and then Tom tried the +opposite direction. But all to no purpose. A number of boats were seen, +and several rafts, but they had no white men on them. +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe the Englishmen disguised themselves like natives, Tom," +suggested Ned. +</P> + +<P> +Our hero shook his head. +</P> + +<P> +"I could see everything in the boats, through these powerful glasses," +he replied, "and there was nothing like my camera. I'd know that a mile +off. No, they didn't take to this stream, though they probably crossed +it. We'll have to keep on the way we were going. It will soon be night, +and we'll have to camp. Then we'll take up the search to-morrow." +</P> + +<P> +It was just getting dusk, and Tom was looking about for a good place to +land in the jungle, when Ned, who was standing in the bow, cried: +</P> + +<P> +"I say, Tom, here's a native village just ahead. There's a good place +to stop, and we can stay there over night." +</P> + +<P> +"Good!" exclaimed Tom. "And, what's more, we can make some inquiries as +to whether or not the Englishmen have passed here. This is great! +Maybe we'll come out all right, after all! They can't travel at +night—or at least I don't believe they will—and if they have passed +this village we can catch them to-morrow. We'll go down." +</P> + +<P> +They were now over the native town, which was in a natural clearing in +the jungle. The natives had by this time caught sight of the big +airship over them, and were running about in terror. There was not a +man, woman or child in sight when the Flyer came down, for the +inhabitants had all fled in fright. +</P> + +<P> +"Not much of a chance to make inquiries of these folks," said Mr. +Nestor. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, they'll come back," predicted Tom. "They are naturally curious, +and when they see that the thing isn't going to blow up, they'll gather +around. I've seen the same thing happen before." +</P> + +<P> +Tom proved a true prophet. In a little while some of the men began +straggling back, when they saw our friends walking about the airship, +as it rested on the ground. Then came the children, and then the women, +until the whole population was gathered about the airship, staring at +it wonderingly. Tom made signs of friendship, and was lucky enough to +find a native who knew a few French words. Tom was not much of a French +scholar, but he could frame a question as to the Englishmen. +</P> + +<P> +"Oui!" exclaimed the native, when he understood. Then he rattled off +something, which Tom, after having it repeated, and making signs to the +man to make sure he understood, said meant that the Englishmen had +passed through the village that morning. +</P> + +<P> +"We're on the right trail!" cried the young inventor. "They're only a +day's travel ahead of us. We'll catch them to-morrow, and get my camera +back." +</P> + +<P> +The natives soon lost all fear of the airship, and some of the chief +men even consented to come aboard. Tom gave them a few trifles for +presents, and won their friendship to such an extent that a great feast +was hastily gotten up in honor of the travelers. Big fires were +lighted, and fowls by the score were roasted. +</P> + +<P> +"Say, I'm glad we struck this place!" exclaimed Ned, as he sat on the +ground with the others, eating roast fowl. "This is all to the chicken +salad!" +</P> + +<P> +"Things are coming our way at last," remarked Tom. "We'll start the +first thing in the morning. I wish I had my camera now. I'd take a +picture of this scene. Dad would enjoy it, and so would Mrs. Baggert. +Oh, I almost wish I was home again. But if I get my camera I've got a +lot more work ahead of me." +</P> + +<P> +"What kind?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know. I'm to stop in Paris for the next instructions from Mr. +Period. He is keeping in touch with the big happenings of the world, +and he may send us to Japan, to get some earthquake pictures." +</P> + +<P> +The night was quiet after the feast, and in the morning Tom and his +friends sailed off in their airship, leaving behind the wondering and +pleased natives, for our hero handed out more presents, of small value +to him, but yet such things as the blacks prized highly. +</P> + +<P> +Once more they were flying over the trail, and they put on more speed +now, for they were fairly sure that the men they sought were ahead of +them about a day's travel. This meant perhaps twenty miles, and Tom +figured that he could cover fifteen in a hurry, and then go over the +remaining five slowly, so as not to miss his quarry. +</P> + +<P> +"Say, don't you smell something?" asked Ned a little later, when the +airship had been slowed down. "Something like smoke?" +</P> + +<P> +"Humph! I believe I do get an odor of something burning," admitted Tom, +sniffing the atmosphere. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my pocket book!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, "look down there, boys!" +He pointed below, and, to the surprise of the lads, and no less of +himself, he saw many animals hurrying back along the jungle trail. +</P> + +<P> +There were scores of deer, leaping along, here and there a tawny lion, +and one or two tigers. Off to one side a rhinoceros crashed his way +through the tangle, and occasionally an elephant was seen. +</P> + +<P> +"That's queer," cried Ned. "And they're not paying any attention to +each other, either." +</P> + +<P> +"Something is happening," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "Those animals are +running away from something." +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe it's an elephant drive," spoke Tom. "I think—" +</P> + +<P> +But he did not finish. The smell of smoke suddenly became stronger, +and, a moment later, as the airship rose higher, in response to a +change in the angle of the deflecting rudder, which Ned shifted, all on +board saw a great volume of black smoke rolling toward the sky. +</P> + +<P> +"A jungle fire!" cried Tom. "The jungle is burning! That's why the +animals are running back this way." +</P> + +<P> +"We'd better not go on!" shouted Ned, choking a bit, as the smoke +rolled nearer. +</P> + +<P> +"No, we've got to turn back!" decided Tom. "Say, this will stop the +Englishmen! They can't go on. We'll go back to the village we left, and +wait for them. They're trapped!" And then he added soberly: "I hope my +camera doesn't get burnt up!" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap22"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +A DANGEROUS COMMISSION +</H3> + +<P> +"Look at that smoke!" yelled Ned, as he sent the airship about in a +great circle on the backward trail. +</P> + +<P> +"And there's plenty of blaze, too," added Tom. "See the flames eating +away! This stuff is as dry as tinder for there hasn't been any rain for +months." +</P> + +<P> +"Much hot!" was the comment of the giant, when he felt the warm wind of +the fire. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my fountain pen!" gasped Mr. Damon, as he looked down into the +jungle. "See all those animals!" +</P> + +<P> +The trail was now thick with deer, and many small beasts, the names of +which Tom did not know. On either side could be heard larger brutes, +crashing their way forward to escape the fire behind them. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, if you only had your camera now!" cried Ned. "You could get a +wonderful picture, Tom." +</P> + +<P> +"What's the use of wishing for it. Those Englishmen have it, and—" +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe they're using it!" interrupted Ned. "No, I don't think they +would know how to work it. Do you see anything of them, Ned?" +</P> + +<P> +"Not a sight. But they'll surely have to come back, just as you said, +unless they got ahead of the fire. They can't go on, and it would be +madness to get off the trail in a jungle like this." +</P> + +<P> +"I don't believe they could have gotten ahead of the fire," spoke Tom. +"They couldn't travel fast enough for that, and see how broad the blaze +is." +</P> + +<P> +They were now higher up, well out of the heat and smoke of the +conflagration, and they could see that it extended for many miles along +the trail, and for a mile or so on either side of it. +</P> + +<P> +"We're far enough in advance, now, to go down a bit, I guess," said +Tom, a little later. "I want to get a good view of the path, and I +can't do that from up here. I have an idea that—" +</P> + +<P> +Tom did not finish, for as the airship approached nearer the ground, he +caught up a pair of binoculars, and focussed them on something on the +trail below. +</P> + +<P> +"What is it?" cried Ned, startled by something in his chum's manner. +</P> + +<P> +"It's them! The Englishmen!" cried Tom. "See, they are racing back +along the trail. Their porters have deserted them. But they have my +camera! I can see it! I'm going down, and get it! Ned, stand by the +wheel, and make a quick landing. Then we'll go up again!" +</P> + +<P> +Tom handed the glasses to his chum, and Ned quickly verified the young +inventor's statement. There were the two rascally Englishmen. The fire +was still some distance in the rear, but was coming on rapidly. There +were no animals to be seen, for they had probably gone off on a side +trail, or had slunk deeper into the jungle. Above the distant roar of +the blaze sounded the throb of the airship's motor. The Englishmen +heard it, and looked up. Then, suddenly, they motioned to Tom to +descend. +</P> + +<P> +"That's what I'm going to do," he said aloud, but of course they could +not hear him. +</P> + +<P> +"They're waiting for us!" cried Ned. "I wonder why?" for the rascals +had come to a halt, setting down the packs they carried on the trail. +One of the things they had was undoubtedly Tom's camera. +</P> + +<P> +"They probably want us to save their lives," said Tom. "They know they +can't out-run this fire. They've given up! We have them now!" +</P> + +<P> +"Are you going to save them?" asked Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"Of course. I wouldn't let my worst enemy run the chances of danger in +that terrible blaze. I'd save them even if they had smashed my camera. +I'll go down, and get them, and take them back to the native village, +but that's as far as I will carry them. They'll have to get away as +best they can, after that." +</P> + +<P> +It was the work of but a few minutes to lower the airship to the trail. +Fortunately it widened a bit at this point, or Tom could never have +gotten his craft down through the trees. +</P> + +<P> +"Hand up that camera!" ordered our hero curtly, when he had stopped +near the Englishmen. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, my dear chap," spoke the tall Britisher, "but will you oblige us, +by taking us—" +</P> + +<P> +"Hand up the camera first!" sharply ordered Tom again. +</P> + +<P> +They passed it to him. +</P> + +<P> +"I know we treated you beastly mean," went on Kenneth, "but, my dear +chap—" +</P> + +<P> +"Get aboard," was all Tom said, and when the rascals, with fearful +glances back into the burning jungle, did so, our hero sent his craft +high into the air again. +</P> + +<P> +"Where are you taking us, my dear chap?" asked the tall rascal. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't 'dear chap' me!" retorted Tom. "I don't want to talk to you. I'm +going to drop you at the native village." +</P> + +<P> +"But that will burn!" cried the Englishman. +</P> + +<P> +"The wind is changing," was our hero's answer. "The fire won't get to +the village. You'll be safe. Have you damaged my camera?" he asked as +he began to examine it, while Ned managed the ship. +</P> + +<P> +"No, my dear chap. You mustn't think too hard of us. We were both down +on our luck, and a chap offered us a big sum to get on your trail, and +secure the camera. He said you had filched it from him, and that he had +a right to it. Understand, we wouldn't have taken it had we known—" +</P> + +<P> +"Don't talk to me!" interrupted Tom, as he saw that his apparatus had +not been damaged. "The man who hired you was a rascal—that's all I'll +say. Put on a little more speed, Ned. I want to get rid of these 'dear +chaps' and take some pictures of the jungle fire." +</P> + +<P> +As Tom had said, the wind had changed, and was blowing the flames away +off to one side, so that the native village would be in no danger. It +was soon reached, and the Africans were surprised to see Tom's airship +back again. But he did not stay long, descending only to let the +Englishmen alight. They pleaded to be taken to the coast, making all +sorts of promises, and stating that, had they known that Turbot and +Eckert (for whom they admitted they had acted) were not telling the +truth, they never would have taken Tom's camera. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't leave us here!" they pleaded. +</P> + +<P> +"I wouldn't have you on board my airship another minute for a fortune!" +declared Tom, as he signalled to Ned to start the motor. Then the Flyer +ascended on high, leaving the plotters and started back for the fire, +of which Tom got a series of fine moving pictures. +</P> + +<P> +A week later our friends were in Paris, having made a quick trip, on +which little of incident occurred, though Tom managed to get quite a +number of good views on the way. +</P> + +<P> +He found a message awaiting him, from Mr. Period. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, where to now?" asked Ned, as his chum read the cablegram. +</P> + +<P> +"Great Scott!" cried our hero. "Talk about hair-raising jobs, this +certainly is the limit!" +</P> + +<P> +"Why, what's the matter?" +</P> + +<P> +"I've got to get some moving pictures of a volcano in action," was the +answer. "Say, if I'd known what sort of things 'Spotty' wanted, I'd +never have consented to take this trip. A volcano in action, and maybe +an earthquake on the side! This is certainly going some!" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap23"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXIII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +AT THE VOLCANO +</H3> + +<P> +"And you've got to snap-shot a volcano?" remarked Ned to his chum, +after a moment of surprised silence. "Any particular one? Is it +Vesuvius? If it is we haven't far to go. But how does Mr. Period know +that it's going to get into action when we want it to?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, it isn't Vesuvius," replied Tom. "We've got to take another long +trip, and we'll have to go by steamer again. The message says that the +Arequipa volcano, near the city of the same name, in Peru, has started +to 'erupt,' and, according to rumor, it's acting as it did many years +ago, just before a big upheaval." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my Pumice stones!" cried Mr. Damon. "And are you expected to get +pictures of it shooting out flames and smoke, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"Of course. An inactive volcano wouldn't make much of a moving picture. +Well, if we go to Peru, we won't be far from the United States, and we +can fly back home in the airship. But we've got to take the Flyer +apart, and pack up again." +</P> + +<P> +"Will you have time?" asked Mr. Nestor. "Maybe the volcano will get +into action before you arrive, and the performance will be all over +with." +</P> + +<P> +"I think not," spoke Tom, as he again read the cablegram. "Mr. Period +says he has advices from Peru to the effect that, on other occasions, +it took about a month from the time smoke was first seen coming from +the crater, before the fireworks started up. I guess we've got time +enough, but we won't waste any." +</P> + +<P> +"And I guess Montgomery and Kenneth won't be there to make trouble for +us," put in Ned. "It will be some time before they get away from that +African town, I think." +</P> + +<P> +They began work that day on taking the airship apart for transportation +to the steamer that was to carry them across the ocean. Tom decided on +going to Panama, to get a series of pictures on the work of digging +that vast canal. On inquiry he learned that a steamer was soon to sail +for Colon, so he took passage for his friends and himself on that, also +arranging for the carrying of the parts of his airship. +</P> + +<P> +It was rather hard work to take the Flyer apart, but it was finally +done, and, in about a week from the time of arriving in Paris, they +left that beautiful city. The pictures already taken were forwarded to +Mr. Period, with a letter of explanation of Tom's adventures thus far, +and an account of how his rivals had acted. +</P> + +<P> +Just before sailing, Tom received another message from his strange +employer. The cablegram read: +</P> + +<BR> + +<P> +"Understand our rivals are also going to try for volcano pictures. +Can't find out who will represent Turbot and Eckert, but watch out. Be +suspicious of strangers." +</P> + +<BR> + +<P> +"That's what I will!" cried Tom. "If they get my camera away from me +again, it will be my own fault." +</P> + +<P> +The voyage to Colon was not specially interesting. They ran into a +terrific storm, about half way over, and Tom took some pictures from +the steamer's bridge, the captain allowing him to do so, but warning +him to be careful. +</P> + +<P> +"I'll take Koku up there with me," said the young inventor, "and if a +wave tries to wash me overboard he'll grab me." +</P> + +<P> +And it was a good thing that he took this precaution, for, while a wave +did not get as high as the bridge, one big, green roller smashed over +the bow of the vessel, staggering her so that Tom was tossed against +the rail. He would have been seriously hurt, and his camera might have +been broken, but for the quickness of the giant. +</P> + +<P> +Koku caught his master, camera and all, in a mighty arm, and with the +other clung to a stanchion, holding Tom in safety until the ship was on +a level keel once more. +</P> + +<P> +"Thanks, Koku!" gasped Tom. "You always seem to be around when I need +you." The giant grinned happily. +</P> + +<P> +The storm blew out in a few days, and, from then on, there was pleasant +sailing. When Tom's airship had been reassembled at Colon, it created +quite a sensation among the small army of canal workers, and, for their +benefit, our hero gave several flying exhibitions. +</P> + +<P> +He then took some of the engineers on a little trip, and in turn, they +did him the favor of letting him get moving pictures of parts of the +work not usually seen. +</P> + +<P> +"And now for the volcano!" cried Tom one morning, when having shipped +to Mr. Period the canal pictures, the Flyer was sent aloft, and her +nose pointed toward Arequipa. "We've got quite a run before us." +</P> + +<P> +"How long?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"About two thousand miles. But I'm going to speed her up to the limit." +Tom was as good as his word, and soon the Flyer was shooting along at +her best rate, reeling off mile after mile, just below the clouds. +</P> + +<P> +It was a wild and desolate region over which the travelers found +themselves most of the time, though the scenery was magnificent. They +sailed over Quito, that city on the equator, and, a little later, they +passed above the Cotopaxi and Chimbarazo volcanoes. But neither of them +was in action. The Andes Mountains, as you all know, has many volcanoes +scattered along the range. Lima was the next large city, and there Tom +made a descent to inquire about the burning mountain he was shortly to +photograph. +</P> + +<P> +"It will soon be in action," the United States counsel said. "I had a +letter from a correspondent near there only yesterday, and he said the +people in the town were getting anxious. They are fearing a shower of +burning ashes, or that the eruption may be accompanied by an +earthquake." +</P> + +<P> +"Good!" cried Tom. "Oh, I don't mean it exactly that way," he hastened +to add, as he saw the counsel looking queerly at him. "I meant that I +could get pictures of both earthquake and volcano then. I don't wish +the poor people any harm." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, you're the first one I ever saw who was anxious to get next door +to a volcano," remarked the counsel. "Hold on, though, that's not quite +right. I heard yesterday that a couple of young fellows passed through +here on their way to the same place. Come to think of it, they were +moving picture men, also." +</P> + +<P> +"Great Scott!" cried Tom. "Those must be my rivals, I'll wager. I must +get right on the job. Thanks for the information," and hurrying from +the office he joined his friends on the airship, and was soon aloft +again. +</P> + +<P> +"Look, Tom, what's that?" cried Ned, about noon the next day when the +Flyer, according to their calculations must be nearing the city of +Arequipa. "See that black cloud over there. I hope it isn't a tornado, +or a cyclone, or whatever they call the big wind storms down here." +</P> + +<P> +Tom, and the others, looked to where Ned pointed. There was a column of +dense smoke hovering in the air, lazily swirling this way and that. The +airship was rapidly approaching it. +</P> + +<P> +"Why that—" began Tom, but before he could complete the sentence the +smoke was blown violently upward. It became streaked with fire, and, a +moment later, there was the echo of a tremendous explosion. +</P> + +<P> +"The volcano!" cried Tom. "The Arequipa volcano! We're here just in +time, for she's in eruption now! Come on, Ned, help me get out the +camera! Mr. Damon, you and Mr. Nestor manage the airship! Put us as +close as you dare! I'm going to get some crackerjack pictures!" +</P> + +<P> +Once more came a great report. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my toothpick!" gasped Mr. Damon. "This is awful!" And the +airship rushed on toward the volcano which could be plainly seen now, +belching forth fire, smoke and ashes. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap24"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXIV +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE MOLTEN RIVER +</H3> + +<P> +"Whew!" gasped Ned, as he stood beside Tom in the bow of the airship. +"What's that choking us, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"Sulphur, I guess, and gases from the volcano. The wind blew 'em over +this way. They're not dangerous, as long as there is no carbonic acid +gas given off, and I don't smell any of that, yet. Say, Ned, it's +erupting all right, isn't it?" +</P> + +<P> +"I should say so!" cried his chum. +</P> + +<P> +"Put us a little to one side, Mr. Damon," called Tom to his friend, who +was in the pilot house. "I can't get good pictures through so much +smoke. It's clearer off to the left." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my bath robe!" cried the odd man. "You're as cool about it, Tom, +as though you were just in an ordinary race, at an aeroplane meet." +</P> + +<P> +"And why shouldn't I be?" asked our hero with a laugh, as he stopped +the mechanism of the camera until he should have a clearer view of the +volcano. "There's not much danger up here, but I want to get some views +from the level, later, and then—" +</P> + +<P> +"You don't get me down there!" interrupted Mr. Nestor, with a grim +laugh. +</P> + +<P> +They were now hovering over the volcano, but high enough up so that +none of the great stones that were being thrown out could reach them. +The column of black smoke, amid which could be seen the gleams of the +molten fires in the crater, rolled toward them, and the smell of +sulphur became stronger. +</P> + +<P> +But when, in accordance with Tom's suggestion, the airship had been +sent over to one side, they were clear of the vapor and the noxious +gas. Then, too, a better view could be had of the volcano below them. +</P> + +<P> +"Hold her down!" cried Tom, as he got in a good position, and the +propellers were slowed down so that they just overcame the influence of +a slight wind. Thus the Flyer hovered in the air, while below her the +volcano belched forth red-hot rocks, some of them immense in size, and +quantities of hot ashes and cinders. Tom had the camera going again +now, and there was every prospect of getting a startling and wonderful, +as well as rare series of moving pictures. +</P> + +<P> +"Wow! That was a big one!" cried Ned, as an unusually large mass of +rocks was thrown out, and the column of fire and smoke ascended nearly +to the hovering craft. A moment later came an explosion, louder than +any that had preceded. "We'd better be going up; hadn't we Tom?" his +chum asked. +</P> + +<P> +"A little, yes, but not too far. I want to get as many near views as I +can." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my overshoes!" gasped Mr. Damon, as he heard Tom say that. Then +he sent some of the vapor from the generating machine into the gas bag, +and the Flyer arose slightly. +</P> + +<P> +Ned looked in the direction of the town, but could not see it, on +account of the haze. Then he directed his attention to the terrifying +sight below him. +</P> + +<P> +"It's a good thing it isn't very near the city," he said to Tom, who +was engaged in watching the automatic apparatus of the camera, to see +when he would have to put in a fresh film. "It wouldn't take much of +this sort of thing to destroy a big city. But I don't see any streams +of burning lava, such as they always say come out of a volcano." +</P> + +<P> +"It isn't time for that yet," replied Tom. "The lava comes out last, +after the top layer of stones and ashes have been blown out. They are a +sort of stopper to the volcano, I guess, like the cork of a bottle, +and, when they're out of the way, the red-hot melted rock comes out. +Then there's trouble. I want to get pictures of that." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, keep far enough away," advised Mr. Nestor, who had come forward. +"Don't take any chances. I guess your rivals won't get here in time to +take any pictures, for they can't travel as fast as we did." +</P> + +<P> +"No," agreed the young inventor, "unless some other party of them were +here ahead of us. They'll have their own troubles, though, making +pictures anything like as good as we're getting." +</P> + +<P> +"There goes another blast!" cried Ned, as a terrific explosion sounded, +and a shower of hot stuff was thrown high into the air. "If I lived in +Arequipa I'd be moving out about now." +</P> + +<P> +"There isn't much danger I guess, except from showers of burning ashes, +and volcanic dust," spoke Mr. Nestor, "and the wind is blowing it away +from the town. If it continues this way the people will be saved." +</P> + +<P> +"Unless there is so much of the red-hot lava that it will bury the +city," suggested Tom. "I hope that doesn't happen," and he could not +repress a shudder as he looked down on the awful scene below him. +</P> + +<P> +After that last explosion the volcano appeared to subside somewhat, +though great clouds of smoke and tongues of fire leaped upward. +</P> + +<P> +"I've got to put in a new reel of film!" suddenly exclaimed Tom. "While +I stop the camera, Mr. Damon, I think you and Mr. Nestor might put the +airship down to the ground. I want some views on the level." +</P> + +<P> +"What! Go down to earth with this awful volcano spouting fire?" cried +Mr. Damon. "Bless my comb and brush!" +</P> + +<P> +"We can get well down the side of the mountain," said Tom. "I won't go +into any danger, much less ask any one else to do so, and I certainly +don't want my ship damaged. We can land down there," he said, pointing +to a spot on the side of the volcanic mountain, that was some distance +removed from the mouth of the crater. "It won't take me long to get one +reel of views, and then I'll come up again." +</P> + +<P> +The two men finally gave in to Tom's argument, that there was +comparatively little danger, for they admitted that they could quickly +rise up at the first sign of danger, and accordingly the Flyer +descended. Tom quickly had a fresh reel of film inserted, and started +his camera to working, standing it on a tripod some distance from the +airship. +</P> + +<P> +Once more the volcano was "doing its prettiest," as Tom expressed it. +He glanced around, as another big explosion took place, to see if any +other picture men were on hand, but the terrible mountain seemed +deserted, though of course someone might be on the other side. +</P> + +<P> +"What's that?" suddenly cried Ned, looking apprehensively at his chum. +At the same time Tom jumped to his feet, for he had been kneeling near +the camera. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my—" began Mr. Damon, but he got no farther, for suddenly the +solid ground began to tremble and shake. +</P> + +<P> +"An earthquake!" shouted Mr. Nestor. "Come, Tom! Get back to the ship!" +The young inventor and Ned had been the only ones to leave it, as it +rested on a spur of the mountain. +</P> + +<P> +As Tom and Ned leaped forward to save the camera which was toppling to +one side, there came a great fissure in the side of the volcano, and a +stream of molten rock, glowing white with heat, gushed out. It was a +veritable river of melted stone, and it was coming straight for the two +lads. +</P> + +<P> +"Run! Run!" cried Mr. Nestor. "We have everything ready for a quick +flight. Run, Tom! Ned!" +</P> + +<P> +The lads leaped for the Flyer, the molten rock coming nearer and +nearer, and then with a cry Koku sprang overboard and made a dash +toward his master. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap25"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXV +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE EARTHQUAKE—CONCLUSION +</H3> + +<P> +"Here, Mr. Tom. Me carry you an' Ned. You hold picture machine!" cried +the giant. "Me run faster." +</P> + +<P> +As he spoke he lifted Ned up under one arm, and caught Tom in the +other. For they were but as children to his immense strength. Tom held +on to his camera, and, thus laden down, Koku ran as he had never run +before, toward the waiting airship. +</P> + +<P> +"Come on! Come on!" shouted Mr. Damon, for he could see what Tom, Ned +and Koku could not, that the stream of lava was nearing them rapidly. +</P> + +<P> +"It's hot!" cried Ned, as a wave of warm air fanned his cheek. +</P> + +<P> +"I should say so!" cried Tom. "The volcano is full of red-hot melted +stone." +</P> + +<P> +There came a sickening shake of the earth. Koku staggered as he ran on, +but he kept his feet, and did not fall. Again came a tremendous +explosion, and a shower of fine ashes sifted over the airship, and on +Koku and his living burdens. +</P> + +<P> +"This is the worst ever!" gasped Tom. "But I've got some dandy +pictures, if we ever get away from here alive to develop them." +</P> + +<P> +"Hurry, Koku! Hurry!" begged Mr. Nestor. "Bless my shoe laces!" yelled +Mr. Damon, who was fairly jumping up and down on the deck of the Flyer. +"I'll never go near a volcano again!" +</P> + +<P> +Once more the ground shook and trembled, as the earthquake rent it. +Several cracks appeared in Koku's path, but he leaped over them with +tremendous energy. A moment later he had thrust Tom and Ned over the +rail, to the deck, and leaped aboard himself. +</P> + +<P> +"Let her go!" cried Tom. "I'll do the rest of my moving picture work, +around volcanoes and earthquakes, from up in the air!" +</P> + +<P> +The Flyer shot upward, and scarcely a moment too soon, for, an instant +after she left the ground, the stream of hot, burning and bubbling lava +rolled beneath her, and those on board could feel the heat of it +ascending. +</P> + +<P> +"Say, I'm glad we got out of that when we did," gasped Ned, as he +looked down. "You're all right, Koku." +</P> + +<P> +"That no trouble," replied the giant with a cheerful grin. "Me carry +four fellows like you," and he stretched out his big arms. Tom had at +once set his camera to working again, taking view after view. +</P> + +<P> +It was a terrifying but magnificent sight that our friends beheld, for +the earth was trembling and heaving. Great fissures opened in many +places. Into some of them streams of lava poured, for now the volcano +had opened in several places, and from each crack the melted rocks +belched out. The crater, however, was not sending into the air such +volumes of smoke and ashes as before, as most of the tremendous energy +had passed, or was being used to spout out the lava. +</P> + +<P> +The earthquake was confined to the region right about the volcano, or +there might have been a great loss of life in the city. As it was, the +damage done was comparatively slight. +</P> + +<P> +Tom continued to take views, some showing the earth as it was twisted +and torn, and other different aspects of the crater. Then, as suddenly +as the earthquake had begun, it subsided, and the volcano was less +active. +</P> + +<P> +"My! I'm glad to see that!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "I've had about enough +of horrors!" +</P> + +<P> +"And I have too," added Tom. "I'm on my last roll of film, and I can't +take many more pictures. But I guess I have all Mr. Period needs, and +we'll start for home, as soon as I finish the next roll. But I'm going +to save that for a night view. That will be a novelty." +</P> + +<P> +The volcano became active again after dark, and presented a magnificent +though terrifying aspect. As the airship hovered above it, Tom got some +of his best pictures, and then, as the last bit of film slipped along +back of the lens, the airship was headed north. +</P> + +<P> +"Now for Shopton!" cried Tom. "Our trip is ended." +</P> + +<P> +"It's too had you didn't have more film," said Ned. "I thought you had +plenty." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I used more than I counted on, but there are enough pictures as +it is." +</P> + +<P> +"Plenty," agreed Mr. Nestor. "I'm sure our company will be very well +satisfied with them, Tom. We can't get home any too soon to suit me. +I've had enough excitement." +</P> + +<P> +"And we didn't see anything of those other fellows whom we heard +about," spoke Mr. Damon, as the big airship flew on. +</P> + +<P> +"No," said Tom. "But I'm not worrying about them." +</P> + +<P> +They made another stop in Lima, on their homeward trip, to renew their +supply of gasolene, and there learned that the rival picture men had +arrived at the volcano too late to see it in operation. This news came +to a relative of one of the two men who lived in Lima. +</P> + +<P> +"Then our views of the earthquake and the smoking mountain will be the +only ones, and your company can control the rights," said Tom to Mr. +Nestor, who agreed with him. +</P> + +<P> +In due time, and without anything out of the ordinary happening the +Flyer reached Shopton, where Tom found a warm welcome awaiting him, not +only from his father, but from a certain young lady, whose name I do +not need to mention. +</P> + +<P> +"And so you got everything you went after, didn't you, Tom," exclaimed +Mr. Period, a few days later, when he had come from New York to get the +remainder of the films. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, and some things I didn't expect," replied Tom. "There was—" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes! Yes! I know!" interrupted the odd picture man. "It was that +jungle fire. That's a magnificent series. None better. And those +scoundrels took your camera; eh?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. Could you connect them with Turbot and Eckert?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"No, but I'm sure they were acting for them just the same. I had no +legal evidence to act on, however, so I had to let it go. Turbot and +Eckert won't be in it when I start selling duplicates of the films you +have. And these last ought to be the best of all. I didn't catch that +fellow when I raced after him on the dock. He got away, and has steered +clear of me since," finished Mr. Period. +</P> + +<P> +"And our rivals didn't secure any views like ours," said Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm glad of it," spoke Mr. Period. "Turbot and Eckert bribed one of my +men, and so found out where I was sending messages to you. They even +got a copy of my cablegram. But it did them no good." +</P> + +<P> +"Were all the films clear that I sent you?" asked our hero. +</P> + +<P> +"Every one. Couldn't be better. The animal views were particularly +fine. You must have had your nerve with you to get some of 'em." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, Tom always has his nerve," laughed Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, how soon will you be ready to start out again?" asked the +picture man, as he packed up the last of the films which Tom gave him. +"I'd like to get some views of a Japanese earthquake, and we haven't +any polar views. I want some of them, taken as near the North Pole as +you can get." +</P> + +<P> +Tom gently shook his head. +</P> + +<P> +"What! You don't mean to say you won't get them for me?" cried Mr. +Period. "With that wonderful camera of yours you can get views no one +else ever could." +</P> + +<P> +"Then some one else will have to take them," remarked the young +inventor. "I'll lend you the camera, and an airship, and you can go +yourself, Mr. Period. I'm going to stay home for a while. I did what I +set out to do, and that's enough." +</P> + +<P> +"I'm glad you'll stay home, Tom," said his father. "Now perhaps I'll +get my gyroscope finished." +</P> + +<P> +"And I, my noiseless airship," went on our hero. "No, Mr. Period, +you'll have to excuse me this time. Why don't you go yourself?" he +asked. "You would know just what kind of pictures you wanted." +</P> + +<P> +"No, I'm a promoter of the moving picture business, and I sell films, +but I don't know how to take them," was the answer. "Besides +I—er—well, I don't exactly care for airships, Tom Swift," he finished +with a laugh. "Well, I can't thank you enough for what you did for me, +and I've brought you a check to cover your expenses, and pay you as I +agreed. All the same I'm sorry you won't start for Japan, or the North +Pole." +</P> + +<P> +"Nothing doing," said Tom with a laugh; and Mr. Period departed. +</P> + +<P> +"Have you any idea what you will do next?" asked Ned, a day or so +later, when he and Tom were in the workshop. +</P> + +<P> +"I can't tell until I finish my noiseless airship," was the answer. +"Then something may happen." +</P> + +<P> +Something did, as I shall have the pleasure of telling you about in the +next volume of this series, to be called, "Tom Swift and His Great +Searchlight; or, On the Border for Uncle Sam," and in it will be given +an account of a great lantern our hero made, and how he baffled the +smugglers with it. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, Tom, weren't you dreadfully frightened when you saw that burning +river of lava coming toward you?" asked Mary Nestor, when the young +inventor called on her later and told her some of his adventures. "I +should have been scared to death." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I didn't have time to get scared," answered Tom. "It all +happened so quickly, and then, too I was thinking of my camera. Next I +knew Koku grabbed me, and it was all over." +</P> + +<P> +"But those wild beasts! Didn't they frighten you, especially when the +rhinoceros charged you?" +</P> + +<P> +"If you won't let it get out, I'll make a confession to you," said Tom, +lowering his voice. "I was scared stiff that time, but don't let Ned +know it." +</P> + +<P> +"I won't," promised Mary with a laugh. And now, when Tom is in such +pleasant company, we will take leave of him for a while, knowing that, +sooner or later, he will be seeking new adventures as exciting as those +of the past. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<P CLASS="finis"> +THE END +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<HR> + +<BR><BR> + + +<H3> +THE TOM SWIFT SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By VICTOR APPLETON 12mo. CLOTH. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING. COLORED +WRAPPERS. +</P> + +<P> +These spirited tales convey In a realistic way the wonderful advances +in land and sea locomotion. Stories like these are impressed upon the +memory and their reading is productive only of good. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR CYCLE<BR> +Or Fun and Adventure on the Road +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR BOAT<BR> +Or The Rivals of Lake Carlopa +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP<BR> +Or The Stirring cruise of the Red Cloud +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT<BR> +Or Under the Ocean for Sunken Treasure +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT<BR> +Or The Speediest car on the Road +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE<BR> +Or The castaways of Earthquake Island +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS<BR> +Or The Secret of Phantom Mountain +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE<BR> +Or The Wreck of the Airship +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER<BR> +Or The Quickest Flight on Record +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE<BR> +Or Daring Adventures In Elephant Land +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD<BR> +Or Marvelous Adventures Underground +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER<BR> +Or Seeking the Platinum Treasure +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY<BR> +Or A Daring Escape by Airship +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA<BR> +Or The Perils of Moving Picture Taking +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT<BR> +Or On the Border for Uncle Sam +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS GIANT CANNON<BR> +Or The Longest Shots on Record +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS PHOTO TELEPHONE<BR> +Or The Picture that Saved a Fortune +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AERIAL WARSHIP<BR> +Or The Naval Terror of the Seas +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL<BR> +Or The Hidden city of the Andes +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +THE BUNNY BROWN SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By LAURA LEE HOPE +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +Author of the Popular "Bobbsey Twins" Books +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +wrapper and text illustrations drawn by +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +FLORENCE ENGLAND NOSWORTHY 12mo. DURABLY BOUND. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM +STYLE OF BINDING +</P> + +<P> +These stories by the author of the "Bobbsey Twins" Books are eagerly +welcomed by the little folks from about five to ten years of age. Their +eyes fairly dance with delight at the lively doings of inquisitive +little Bunny Brown and his cunning, trustful sister Sue. +</P> + +<P> +Bunny was a lively little boy, very inquisitive. When he did anything, +Sue followed his leadership. They had many adventures, some comical in +the extreme. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE ON GRANDPA'S FARM<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE PLAYING CIRCUS<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT CAMP REST-A-WHILE<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT AUNT LU'S CITY HOME<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE IN THE BIG WOODS<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE ON AN AUTO TOUR<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AND THEIR SHETLAND PONY<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE GIVING A SHOW<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT CHRISTMAS TREE COVE<BR> +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS BOOKS +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +For Little Men and Women +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By LAURA LEE HOPE +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +Author of "The Bunny Brown" Series. Etc. 12mo. DURABLY BOUND. +ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING +</P> + +<BR> + +<P> +Copyright publications which cannot be obtained elsewhere. Books that +charm the hearts of the little ones, and of which they never tire. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN THE COUNTRY<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT THE SEASHORE<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT SCHOOL<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT SNOW LODGE<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON A HOUSEBOAT<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT MEADOW BROOK<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT HOME<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN A GREAT CITY<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON BLUEBERRY ISLAND<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON THE DEEP BLUE SEA<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN THE GREAT WEST<BR> +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By LAURA LEE HOPE +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +Author of "The Bobbsey Twins Series." +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +12mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING +</P> + +<P> +The adventures of Ruth and Alice DeVere. Their father, a widower, is an +actor who has taken up work for the "movies." Both girls wish to aid +him in his work and visit various localities to act in all sorts of +pictures. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS<BR> +Or First Appearance in Photo Dramas. +</P> + +<P> +Having lost his voice, the father of the girls goes into the movies and +the girls follow. Tells how many "parlor dramas" are filmed. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT OAK FARM<BR> +Or Queer Happenings While Taking Rural Plays. +</P> + +<P> +Full of fun in the country, the haps and mishaps of taking film plays, +and giving an account of two unusual discoveries. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS SNOWBOUND<BR> +Or The Proof on the Film. +</P> + +<P> +A tale of winter adventures in the wilderness, showing how the +photo-play actors sometimes suffer. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS UNDER THE PALMS<BR> +Or Lost in the Wilds of Florida. +</P> + +<P> +How they went to the land of palms, played many parts in dramas before +the camera; were lost, and aided others who were also lost. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT ROCKY RANCH<BR> +Or Great Days Among the Cowboys. +</P> + +<P> +All who have ever seen moving pictures of the rest west will want to +know just how they are made. This volume gives every detail and is full +of clean fun and excitement. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT SEA<BR> +Or a Pictured Shipwreck that Became Real. +</P> + +<P> +A thrilling account of the girls' experiences on the water. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS IN WAR PLAYS<BR> +Or The Sham Battles at Oak Farm. +</P> + +<P> +The girls play important parts in big battle scenes and have plenty of +hard work along with considerable fun. +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By CAPTAIN QUINCY ALLEN +</P> + +<P> +The outdoor chums are four wide-awake lads, sons of wealthy men of a +small city located on a lake. The boys love outdoor life, and are +greatly interested in hunting, fishing, and picture taking. They have +motor cycles, motor boats, canoes, etc., and during their vacations go +everywhere and have all sorts of thrilling adventures. The stories give +full directions for camping out, how to fish, how to hunt wild animals +and prepare the skins for stuffing, how to manage a canoe, how to swim, +etc. Full of the spirit of outdoor life. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS<BR> +Or The First Tour of the Rod, Gun and Camera Club. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON THE LAKE<BR> +Or Lively Adventures on Wildcat Island. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS IN THE FOREST<BR> +Or Laying the Ghost of Oak Ridge. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON THE GULF<BR> +Or Rescuing the Lost Balloonists. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS AFTER BIG GAME.<BR> +Or Perilous Adventures in the Wilderness. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON A HOUSEBOAT<BR> +Or The Rivals of the Mississippi. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS IN THE BIG WOODS<BR> +Or The Rival Hunters at Lumber Run. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS AT CABIN POINT<BR> +Or The Golden Cup Mystery. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +12mo. Averaging 240 pages. Illustrated. Handsomely bound in Cloth. +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By GERTRUDE W. MORRISON +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +12mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING. +</P> + +<P> +Here is a series full of the spirit of high school life of today. The +girls are real flesh-and-blood characters, and we follow them with +interest in school and out. There are many contested matches on track +and field, and on the water, as well as doings in the classroom and on +the school stage. There it plenty of fun and excitement, all clean, +pure and wholesome. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH<BR> +Or Rivals for all Honors. +</P> + +<P> +A stirring tale of high school life, full of fun, with a tomb of +mystery and a strange initiation. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON LAKE LUNA<BR> +Or The Crew That Won. +</P> + +<P> +Telling of water sports and fun galore, and of fine times in camp. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH AT BASKETBALL<BR> +Or The Great Gymnasium Mystery. +</P> + +<P> +Here we have a number of thrilling contests at basketball and in +addition, the solving of a mystery which had bothered the high school +authorities for a long while. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON THE STAGE<BR> +Or The Play That Took the Prize. +</P> + +<P> +How the girls went In for theatricals and how one of them wrote a play +which afterward was made over for the professional stage and brought in +some much-needed money. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON TRACK AND FIELD<BR> +Or The Girl Champions of the School League +</P> + +<P> +This story takes in high school athletics In their most approved and +up-to-date fashion. Full of fun and excitement. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH IN CAMP<BR> +Or The Old Professor's Secret +</P> + +<P> +The girls went camping on Acorn Island and had a delightful time at +boating, swimming and picnic parties. +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By GRAHAM B. FORBES +</P> + +<P> +Never was there a cleaner, brighter, more manly boy than Frank Allen, +the hero of this series of boys' tales, and never was there a better +crowd of lads to associate with than the students of the School. All +boys will read these stories with deep interest. The rivalry between +the towns along the river was of the keenest, and plots and counterplot +to win the champions, at baseball, at football, at boat racing, at +track athletics, and at ice hockey, were without number. Any lad +reading one volume of this series will surely want the others. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH<BR> +Or The All Around Rivals of the School +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE DIAMOND<BR> +Or Winning Out by Pluck +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE RIVER<BR> +Or The Boat Race Plot that Failed +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE GRIDIRON<BR> +Or The Struggle for the Silver Cup +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE ICE<BR> +Or Out for the Hockey Championship +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH IN TRACK ATHLETICS<BR> +Or A Long Run that Won +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH IN WINTER SPORTS<BR> +Or Stirring Doings on Skates and Iceboats +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent">Illustrated. Handsomely bound In cloth, with cover design and +wrappers in color. +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By VICTOR APPLETON +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +12mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING. +</P> + +<P> +Moving pictures and photo plays are famous the world over, and in this +line of books the reader is given a full description of how the films +are made—the scenes of little dramas, indoors and out, trick pictures +to satisfy the curious, soul-stirring pictures of city affairs, life in +the Wild West, among the cowboys and Indians, thrilling rescues along +the seacoast, the daring of picture hunters in the jungle among savage +beasts, and the great risks run in picturing conditions in a land of +earthquakes. The volumes teem with adventures and will be found +interesting from first chapter to last. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS<BR> +Or Perils of a Great City Depicted. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN THE WEST<BR> +Or Taking Scenes Among the Cowboys and Indians. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS ON THE COAST<BR> +Or Showing the Perils of the Deep. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN THE JUNGLE<BR> +Or Stirring Times Among the Wild Animals. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN EARTHQUAKE LAND<BR> +Or Working Amid Many Perils. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS AND THE FLOOD<BR> +Or Perilous Days on the Mississippi. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS AT PANAMA<BR> +Or Stirring Adventures Along the Great Canal. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS UNDER THE SEA<BR> +Or The Treasure of the Lost Ship. +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By LAURA LEE HOPE Author of the "Bobbsey Twin Books" and "Bunny Brown" +Series. +</P> + +<P> +These tales take in the various adventures participated in by several +bright, up-to-date girls who love outdoor life. They are clean and +wholesome, free from sensationalism, absorbing from the first chapter +to the last. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS OF DEEPDALE<BR> +Or Camping and Tramping for Fun and Health. +</P> + +<P> +Telling bow the girls organized their Camping and Tramping Club, how +they went on a tour, and of various adventures which befell them. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS AT RAINBOW LAKE<BR> +Or Stirring Cruise of the Motor Boat Gem. +</P> + +<P> +One of the girls becomes the proud possessor of a motor boat and +invites her club members to take a trip down the river to Rainbow Lake, +a beautiful sheet of water lying between the mountains. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN A MOTOR CAR<BR> +Or The Haunted Mansion of Shadow Valley. +</P> + +<P> +One of the girls has learned to run a big motor ear, and she invited +the club to go on a tour to visit some distant relatives. On the way +they stop at a deserted mansion and make a surprising discovery. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN A WINTER CAMP<BR> +Or Glorious Days on Skates and Ice Boats. +</P> + +<P> +In this story, the scene is shifted to a winter season. The girls have +some jolly times skating and ice boating, and visit a hunters ramp in +the big woods. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN FLORIDA<BR> +Or Wintering in the Sunny South. +</P> + +<P> +The parents of one of the girls have bought an orange grove in Florida, +and her companions are invited to visit the place. They take a trip +into the interior, where several unusual things happen. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS AT OCEAN VIEW<BR> +Or The Box that Was Found in the Sand. +</P> + +<P> +The girls have great fun and solve a mystery while on an outing along +the New England coast. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS ON PINE ISLAND<BR> +Or A Cave and What it Contained. +</P> + +<P> +A bright, healthful story, full of good times at a bungalow camp on +Pine Island. +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +CHARMING BOOKS FOR GIRLS +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +WHEN PATTY WENT TO COLLEGE, By Jean Webster. Illustrated by C. D. +Williams. +</P> + +<P> +One of the best stories of life in a girl's college that has ever been +written. It is bright, whimsical and entertaining, lifelike, laughable +and thoroughly human. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +JUST PATTY, By Jean Webster. Illustrated by C. M. Relyea. +</P> + +<P> +Patty is full of the joy of living, fun-loving, given to ingenious +mischief for its own sake, with a disregard for pretty convention which +is an unfailing source of joy to her fellows. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE POOR LITTLE RICH GIRL, By Eleanor Gates. With four full page +illustrations. +</P> + +<P> +This story relates the experience of one of those unfortunate children +whose early days are passed in the companionship of a governess, seldom +seeing either parent, and famishing for natural love and tenderness. A +charming play as dramatized by the author. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +REBECCA OF SUNNYBROOK FARM, By Kate Douglas Wiggin. +</P> + +<P> +One of the most beautiful studies of childhood—Rebecca's artistic, +unusual and quaintly charming qualities stand out midst a circle of +austere New Englanders. The stage version is making a phenomenal +dramatic record. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +NEW CHRONICLES OF REBECCA, By Kate Douglas Wiggin. Illustrated by F. +C. Yohn. +</P> + +<P> +Additional episodes in the girlhood of this delightful heroine that +carry Rebecca through various stages to her eighteenth birthday. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +REBECCA MARY, By Annie Hamilton Donnell. Illustrated by Elizabeth +Shippen Green. +</P> + +<P> +This author possesses the rare gift of portraying all the grotesque +little joys and sorrows and scruples of this very small girl with a +pathos that is peculiarly genuine and appealing. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +EMMY LOU: Her Book and Heart, By George Madden Martin, illustrated by +Charles Louis Hinton. +</P> + +<P> +Emmy Lou is irresistibly lovable, because she is so absolutely real. +She is just a bewitchingly innocent, hugable little maid. The book is +wonderfully human. +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +BOOKS BY VICTOR APPLETON +</H3> + +<H3> +THE TOM SWIFT SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR-CYCLE<BR> +Or Fun and Adventures on the Road +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR-BOAT<BR> +Or The Rivals of Lake Carlopa +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP<BR> +Or the Stirring Cruise of the Red cloud +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT<BR> +Or Under the Ocean for Sunken Treasure +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT<BR> +Or the Speediest Car on the Road +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE<BR> +Or the castaways of Earthquake Island +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS<BR> +Or the Secret of Phantom Mountain +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE<BR> +Or the Wreck of the Airship +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER<BR> +Or The Quickest Flight on Record +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE<BR> +Or Daring Adventures in Elephant Land +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD<BR> +Or Marvelous Adventures Underground +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER<BR> +Or Seeking the Platinum Treasure +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY<BR> +Or A Daring Escape by Airship +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA<BR> +Or Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving Pictures +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT<BR> +Or On the Border for Uncle Sam +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR><BR> + +<div>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 1283 ***</div> +</BODY> + +</HTML> + + diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e77f2d --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #1283 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/1283) diff --git a/old/1283-h.zip b/old/1283-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3a7f62d --- /dev/null +++ b/old/1283-h.zip diff --git a/old/1283-h/1283-h.htm b/old/1283-h/1283-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8b12a15 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/1283-h/1283-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,9201 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<HTML> +<HEAD> + +<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> + +<TITLE> +The Project Gutenberg E-text of Tom Swift and his Wizard Camera, +by Victor Appleton +</TITLE> + +<STYLE TYPE="text/css"> +BODY { color: Black; + background: White; + margin-right: 10%; + margin-left: 10%; + font-family: "Times New Roman", serif; + text-align: justify } + +P {text-indent: 4% } + +P.noindent {text-indent: 0% } + +P.poem {text-indent: 0%; + margin-left: 10%; + font-size: small } + +P.finis { text-align: center ; + text-indent: 0% ; + margin-left: 0% ; + margin-right: 0% } + +</STYLE> + +</HEAD> + +<BODY> + + +<pre> + +Project Gutenberg's Tom Swift and his Wizard Camera, by Victor Appleton + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Tom Swift and his Wizard Camera + or, Thrilling Adventures while taking Moving Pictures + +Author: Victor Appleton + +Posting Date: July 17, 2008 [EBook #1283] +Release Date: April, 1998 +[This file last updated on August 26, 2010] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA *** + + + + +Produced by Anthony Matonac + + + + + +</pre> + + +<BR><BR> + +<H1 ALIGN="center"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA +</H1> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +or +</H3> + +<H2 ALIGN="center"> +Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving Pictures +</H2> + +<BR> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +by +</H3> + +<H2 ALIGN="center"> +VICTOR APPLETON +</H2> + + +<H2 ALIGN="center"> +CONTENTS +</H2> + +<TABLE ALIGN="center" WIDTH="80%"> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">CHAPTER</TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> </TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">I </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap01">A STRANGE OFFER</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">II </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap02">A MAN IN THE SNOW BANK</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">III </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap03">TOM MAKES UP HIS MIND</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">IV </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap04">HELD FAST</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">V </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap05">TOM GETS A WARNING</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VI </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap06">TRYING THE CAMERA</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap07">WHAT THE CAMERA CAUGHT</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VIII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap08">PHOTOS FROM THE AIRSHIP</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">IX </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap09">OFF FOR INDIA</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">X </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap10">UNEXPECTED EXCITEMENT</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XI </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap11">AN ELEPHANT STAMPEDE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap12">THE LION FIGHT</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap13">A SHOT IN TIME</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIV </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap14">IN A GREAT GALE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XV </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap15">SNAPPING AN AVALANCHE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVI </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap16">TELEGRAPH ORDERS</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap17">SUSPICIOUS STRANGERS</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVIII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap18">THE NATIVE BATTLE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIX </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap19">A HEAVY LOSS</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XX </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap20">AFTER THE ENGLISHMEN</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXI </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap21">THE JUNGLE FIRE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap22">A DANGEROUS COMMISSION</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXIII </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap23">AT THE VOLCANO</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXIV </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap24">THE MOLTEN RIM</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXV </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap25">THE EARTHQUAKE—CONCLUSION</A></TD> +</TR> + +</TABLE> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap01"></A> +<H1 ALIGN="center"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA +</H1> + +<BR> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER I +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +A STRANGE OFFER +</H3> + +<P> +"Some one to see you, Mr. Tom." +</P> + +<P> +It was Koku, or August, as he was sometimes called, the new giant +servant of Tom Swift, who made this announcement to the young inventor. +</P> + +<P> +"Who is it, Koku?" inquired Tom, looking up from his work-bench in the +machine shop, where he was busy over a part of the motor for his new +noiseless airship. "Any one I know? Is it the 'Blessing Man?'" for so +Koku had come to call Mr. Damon, an eccentric friend of Tom's. +</P> + +<P> +"No, not him. A strange man. I never see before. He say he got quick +business." +</P> + +<P> +"Quick business; eh? I guess you mean important, Koku," for this +gigantic man, one of a pair that Tom had brought with him after his +captivity in "Giant Land," as he called it, could not speak English +very well, as yet. "Important business; eh, Koku? Did he send in his +card?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, Mr. Tom. Him say he have no card. You not know him, but he very +much what you call—recited." +</P> + +<P> +"Excited I guess you mean, Koku. Well, tell him to wait a few minutes, +and I'll see him. You can show him in then. But I say, Koku," and Tom +paused as he looked at the big man, who had attached himself to our +hero, as a sort of personal helper and bodyguard. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, Mr. Tom; what is it?" +</P> + +<P> +"Don't let him go poking around the shop. He might look at some of my +machines that I haven't got fully patented yet. Is he in the front +office?" +</P> + +<P> +"That's where him am. He be lookin' at pictures on the walls." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, that's all right then. Just keep him there. And, Koku, don't let +him come back in the shop here, until I get ready to see him. I'll ring +the bell when I am." +</P> + +<P> +"All right, Mr. Tom." +</P> + +<P> +Koku, very proud of his mission of keeping guard over the strange +visitor, marched from the room with his big strides, his long arms and +powerful hands swinging at his sides, for Koku, or August, as Tom had +rechristened him, and as he often called him (for it was in the month +of August that he had located the giants) was a very powerful man. A +veritable giant, being extremely tall, and big in proportion. +</P> + +<P> +"Be sure. Don't let him in here, Koku!" called Tom, in an additional +warning, as his new servant left the main shop. +</P> + +<P> +"Sure not!" exclaimed Koku, very earnestly. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know who he may be," mused Tom, as he began putting away the +parts to his new noiseless motor, so that the stranger could not see +them, and profit thereby. "It looks rather funny, not sending in his +name. It may be some one who thinks he can spring a trick on me, and +get some points about my inventions, or dad's. +</P> + +<P> +"It may even be somebody sent on by Andy Foger, or his father. I can't +be too careful. I'll just put everything away that isn't fully covered +by patents, and then if he wants to infringe on any of the machines I +can sue him." +</P> + +<P> +Tom looked about the shop, which was filled with strange machinery, +most of which had been made by himself, or his father, or under their +combined directions. There was a big biplane in one corner, a small +monoplane in another, parts of a submarine boat hanging up overhead, +and a small, but very powerful, electric auto waiting to have some +repairs made to it, for on his last trip in it Tom Swift had suffered a +slight accident. +</P> + +<P> +"There, I guess he can't see anything but what I want him to," mused +Tom, as he put away the last part of a new kind of motor, from which he +hoped great things. "Let's see, yes, it's out of sight now. I wish Ned +Newton, or Mr. Damon were here to be a witness in case he starts +anything. But then I have Koku, even if he doesn't speak much English +yet. If it comes to blows—well, I wouldn't want that giant to hit me," +finished Tom with a laugh, as he rang the bell to announce to his +servant that the visitor might be shown in. +</P> + +<P> +There was a sound outside the door that separated the business office +from the main shop, and Tom heard Koku exclaim: +</P> + +<P> +"Hold on! Wait! I go first. You wait!" +</P> + +<P> +"What's the matter with me going ahead?" demanded a quick, snappy +voice. "I'm in a hurry, and—" +</P> + +<P> +"You wait! I go first," was the giant's reply, and then came the sound +of a scuffle. +</P> + +<P> +"Ouch! Say! Hold on there, my man! Take your hand off my shoulder! +You're crushing me with those big fingers of yours!" +</P> + +<P> +This was evidently the visitor remonstrating with the giant. +</P> + +<P> +"Humph! I guess Koku must have grabbed him," said Tom softly. "I don't +like that sort of a visitor. What's his hurry getting in here?" and our +hero looked about, to see if he had a weapon at hand in case of an +attack. Often cranks had forced their way into his shop, with pet +inventions which they wanted him to perfect after they had themselves +failed. Tom saw a heavy iron bar at hand, and knew this would serve to +protect him. +</P> + +<P> +"You come after me!" exclaimed Koku, when the voice of the other had +ceased. "Do you stand under me?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, yes, I understand all right. I'll keep back. But I didn't mean +anything. I'm just in a hurry to see Tom Swift, that is all. I'm +always in a hurry in fact. I've lost nearly a thousand dollars this +morning, just by this delay. I want to see Mr. Swift at once; and have +a talk with him." +</P> + +<P> +"Another crank, I guess," mused Tom. "Well, I'm not going to waste much +time on him." +</P> + +<P> +A moment later the door opened, and into the shop stepped Koku, +followed by a short, stout, fussy little man, wearing a flaming red +tie, but otherwise his clothes were not remarkable. +</P> + +<P> +"Is this Mr. Tom Swift?" asked the stranger, as he advanced and held +out his hand to the young man. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," answered Tom, looking carefully at the visitor. He did not seem +to be dangerous, he had no weapon, and, Tom was relieved to note that +he did not carry some absurd machine, or appliance, that he had made, +hoping to get help in completing it. The youth was trying to remember +if he had ever seen the stranger before, but came to the conclusion +that he had not. +</P> + +<P> +"Sorry to take up your time," went on the man, "but I just had to see +you. No one else will do. I've heard lots about you. That was a great +stunt you pulled off, getting those giants for the circus. This is one; +isn't he?" and he nodded toward Koku. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," replied Tom, wondering if the little man was in such a hurry why +he did not get down to business. +</P> + +<P> +"I thought so," the caller went on, as he shook hands with Tom. "Once +you felt his grip you'd know he was a giant, even if you didn't see +him. Yes, that was a great stunt. And going to the caves of ice, too, +and that diamond-making affair. All of 'em great. I—" +</P> + +<P> +"How did you know about them?" interrupted Tom, wishing the man would +tell his errand. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, you're better known than you have any idea of, Tom Swift. As soon +as I got this idea of mine I said right away, to some of the others in +my business, I says, says I, 'Tom Swift is the boy for us. I'll get him +to undertake this work, and then it will be done to the Queen's taste. +Tom's the boy who can do it,' I says, and they all agreed with me. So I +came here to-day, and I'm sorry I had to wait to see you, for I'm the +busiest man in the world, I believe, and, as I said, I've lost about a +thousand dollars waiting to have a talk with you. I—" +</P> + +<P> +"I am sorry," interrupted Tom, and he was not very cordial. "But I was +busy, and—" +</P> + +<P> +"All right! All right! Don't apologize!" broke in the man in rapid +tones, while both Tom, and his servant, Koku, looked in surprise at the +quick flow of language that came from him. "Don't apologize for the +world. It's my fault for bothering you. And I'll lose several thousand +dollars, willingly, if you'll undertake this job. I'll make money from +it as it is. It's worth ten thousand dollars to you, I should say, and +I'm willing to pay that." +</P> + +<P> +He looked about, as though for a seat, and Tom, apologizing for his +neglect in offering one, shoved a box forward. +</P> + +<P> +"We don't have chairs in here," said the young inventor with a smile. +"Now if you will tell me what you—" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm coming right to it. I'll get down to business in a moment," +interrupted the man as he sat down on the box, not without a grunt or +two, for he was very stout. "I'm going to introduce myself in just a +second, and then I'm going to tell you who I am. And I hope you'll take +up my offer, though it may seem a strange one." +</P> + +<P> +The man took out a pocketbook, and began searching through it, +evidently for some card or paper. +</P> + +<P> +"He's as odd as Mr. Damon is, when he's blessing everything," mused +Tom, as he watched the man. +</P> + +<P> +"I thought I had a card with me, but I haven't," the visitor went on. +"No matter. I'm James Period—promoter of all kinds of amusement +enterprises, from a merry-go-'round to a theatrical performance. I want +you to—" +</P> + +<P> +"No more going after giants," interrupted. Tom. "It's too dangerous, +and I haven't time—" +</P> + +<P> +"No, it has nothing to do with giants," spoke Mr. Period, as he glanced +up at Koku, who towered over him as he sat on the box near Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Well?" returned Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"This is something entirely new. It has never been done before, though +if you should happen to be able to get a picture of giants don't miss +the opportunity." +</P> + +<P> +"Get a picture?" exclaimed Tom, wondering if, after all, his visitor +might not be a little insane. +</P> + +<P> +"Pictures, yes. Listen. I'm James Period. Jim, if you like it better, +or just plain 'Spotty.' That's what most of my friends call me. Get the +idea? A period is a spot. I'm a Period, therefor I'm a spot. But that +isn't the real reason. It's because I'm always Johnny on the Spot when +anything is happening. If it's a big boxing exhibition, I'm there. If +it's a coronation, I'm there, or some of my men are. If it's a Durbar +in India, you'll find Spotty on the spot. That's me. If there's going +to be a building blown up with dynamite—I'm on hand; or some of my +men. If there's a fire I get there as soon as the engines do—if it's +a big one. Always on the spot—that's me—James Period—Spotty for +short. Do you get me?" and he drew a long breath and looked at Tom, his +head on one side. +</P> + +<P> +"I understand that you are—" +</P> + +<P> +"In the moving picture business," interrupted Mr. Period, who never +seemed to let Tom finish a sentence. "I'm the biggest moving picture +man in the world—not in size, but in business. I make all the best +films. You've seen some of 'em I guess. Every one of 'em has my picture +on the end of the film. Shows up great. Advertising scheme—get me?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," replied Tom, as he recalled that he had seen some of the films +in question, and good ones they were too. "I see your point, but—" +</P> + +<P> +"You want to know why I come to you; don't you?" again interrupted +"Spotty," with a laugh. "Well, I'll tell you. I need you in my +business. I want you to invent a new kind of moving picture camera. A +small light one—worked by electricity—a regular wizard camera. I want +you to take it up in an airship with you, and then go to all sorts of +wild and strange countries, Africa, India—the jungles—get pictures of +wild animals at peace and fighting—herds of elephants—get scenes of +native wars—earthquakes—eruptions of volcanoes—all the newest and +most wonderful pictures you can. You'll have to make a new kind of +camera to do it. The kind we use won't do the trick. +</P> + +<P> +"Now do you get me? I'm going to give you ten thousand dollars, above +all your expenses, for some films such as I've been speaking of. I want +novelty. Got to have it in my business! You can do it. Now will you?" +</P> + +<P> +"I hardly think—" began Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't answer me now," broke in Mr. Period. "Take four minutes to think +it over. Or even five. I guess I can wait that long. Take five +minutes. I'll wait while you make up your mind, but I know you'll do +it. Five minutes—no more," and hastily getting up off the box Mr. +Period began impatiently pacing up and down the shop. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap02"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER II +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +A MAN IN THE SNOW BANK +</H3> + +<P> +Tom Swift looked somewhat in surprise at his strange visitor. It had +all happened so suddenly, the offer had been such a strange one, the +man himself—Mr. Period—was so odd, that our hero hardly knew what to +think. The moving picture agent continued pacing up and down the room +now and then looking at his watch as if to note when the five minutes +had passed. +</P> + +<P> +"No," said Tom to himself. "I'm not going to take this offer. There's +too much work and risk attached to it. I want to stay at home and work +on my noiseless motor for the airship. After that—well—I don't know +what I'll do. I'll tell Mr. Period that he needn't wait the five +minutes. My mind is made up now!" +</P> + +<P> +But as Tom was about to make this announcement, and dismiss his caller, +he looked again at the visitor. There was something attractive about +him—about his hasty way of talking, about his manner of interrupting, +about the way he proposed matters. Tom was interested in spite of +himself. +</P> + +<P> +"Well," he reflected, "I may as well wait until the five minutes are +up, anyhow." +</P> + +<P> +Koku, the giant servant, glanced at his young master, as if to ask if +there was anything that he could do. Tom shook his head, and then the +big man strolled over to the other side of the machine shop, at the +same time keeping a careful eye on Mr. Period. +</P> + +<P> +While Tom is waiting for the time to expire, I will take a few minutes +to tell you something more about him. Those of my friends who have read +the previous books in this series need no introduction to my hero, but +those who may chance upon this as their first book in the Tom Swift +series, will like to be more formally introduced. +</P> + +<P> +Tom, whose mother had been dead some years, lived with his father, +Barton Swift, in the town of Shopton. Mr. Swift was an inventor of +prominence, and his son was fast following in his footsteps. A Mrs. +Baggert kept house for the Swifts, and another member of the household +was Eradicate Sampson, an aged colored man, who said he used to +"eradicate" the dirt. He had been with Tom on many trips, but of late +was getting old and feeble. Then there was Garret Jackson, an engineer +employed by the Swifts. These were all the immediate members of the +household. +</P> + +<P> +Tom had a chum, Ned Newton, who used to work in a bank, and there was a +girl, Mary Nestor, a daughter of Amos Nestor, in which young lady Tom +was much interested. +</P> + +<P> +Eradicate Sampson had a mule, Boomerang, of whom he thought almost as +much as he did of Tom. Eradicate was a faithful friend and servant, +but, of late, Koku, or August, the giant, had rather supplanted him. I +must not forget Mr. Wakefield Damon, of Waterfield, a village near +Shopton. Mr. Damon was an odd man, always blessing everything. He and +Tom were good friends, and had been on many trips together. +</P> + +<P> +The first book of the series was called "Tom Swift and His +Motor-Cycle," and related how Tom bought the cycle from Mr. Damon, +after the latter had met with an accident on it, and it was in this way +that our hero became acquainted with the odd man. +</P> + +<P> +Tom had many adventures on his motor-cycle, and, later on he secured a +motor-boat, in which he beat his enemy, Andy Foger, in a race. Next Tom +built an airship, and in this he went on a wonderful trip. Returning +from this he and his father heard about a treasure sunken under the +ocean. In his submarine boat Tom secured the valuables, and made a +large sum for himself. +</P> + +<P> +In his electric runabout, which was the swiftest car on the road, Tom +was able to save from ruin a bank in which his father was interested, +and, a short time after that, he went on a trip in an airship, with a +man who had invented a new kind. The airship was smashed, and fell to +Earthquake Island, where there were some refugees from a shipwreck, +among them being the parents of Mary Nestor. In the volume called "Tom +Swift and His Wireless Message," I told how he saved these people. +</P> + +<P> +When Tom went among the diamond makers he had more strange adventures, +on that trip discovering the secret of phantom mountain. He had bad +luck when he went to the caves of ice, for there his airship was +wrecked. +</P> + +<P> +When Tom made the trip in his sky racer he broke all records for an +aerial flight, incidentally saving his father's life. It was some time +after this when he invented an electric rifle, and went to elephant +land, to rescue some missionaries from the red pygmies. +</P> + +<P> +The eleventh volume of the series is called "Tom Swift in the Land of +Gold," and relates his adventures underground, while the next one tells +of a new machine he invented—an air-glider—which he used to save the +exiles of Siberia, incidentally, on that trip, finding a valuable +deposit of platinum. +</P> + +<P> +As I have said, it was on his trip to giant land that Tom got his big +servant. This book, the thirteenth of the series, is called "Tom Swift +in Captivity," for the giants captured him and his friends, and it was +only by means of their airship that they made their daring escape. +</P> + +<P> +Tom had been back from the strange land some time now. One giant he had +turned over to the circus representative for whom he had undertaken the +mission, and the other he retained to work around his shop, as +Eradicate was getting too old. It was now winter, and there had been +quite a fall of snow the day before Mr. Period, the odd moving picture +man, called on Tom. There were many big drifts outside the building. +</P> + +<P> +Tom had fitted up a well-equipped shop, where he and his father worked +on their inventions. Occasionally Ned Newton, or Mr. Damon, would come +over to help them, but of late Tom had been so busy on his noiseless +motor that he had not had time to even see his friends. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess the five minutes have passed, and my mind is made up," +thought Tom, as he looked at his watch. "I might as well tell Mr. +Period that I can't undertake his commission. In the first place it +isn't going to be an easy matter to make an electric moving picture +camera. I'd have to spend a lot of time studying up the subject, and +then I might not be able to get it to work right. +</P> + +<P> +"And, again, I can't spare the time to go to all sorts of wild and +impossible places to get the pictures. It's all well enough to talk +about getting moving pictures of natives in battle, or wild beasts +fighting, or volcanoes in action, but it isn't so easy to do it. Then, +too, I'd have to make some changes in my airship if I went on that +trip. No, I can't go. I'll tell him he'll have to find some one else." +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Period pulled out his watch, opened it quickly, snapped it shut +again, and exclaimed: +</P> + +<P> +"Well, how about it, Tom Swift? When can you start! The sooner the +better for me! You'll want some money for expenses I think. I brought +my check book along, also a fountain pen. I'll give you a thousand +dollars now, for I know making an electric moving picture camera isn't +going to be cheap work. Then, when you get ready to start off in your +airship, you'll need more money. I'll be Johnny-on-the-spot all right, +and have it ready for you. Now when do you think you can start?" +</P> + +<P> +He sat down at a bench, and began filling out a check. +</P> + +<P> +"Hold on!" cried Tom, amused in spite of himself. "Don't sign that +check, Mr. Period. I'm not going." +</P> + +<P> +"Not going?" The man's face showed blank amazement. +</P> + +<P> +"No," went on Tom. "I can't spare the time. I'm sorry, but you'll have +to get some one else." +</P> + +<P> +"Some one else? But who can I get?" +</P> + +<P> +"Why, there are plenty who would be glad of the chance." +</P> + +<P> +"But they can't invent an electric moving picture camera, and, if they +could, they wouldn't know enough to take pictures with it. It's got to +be you or no one, Tom Swift. Look here, I'll make it fifteen thousand +dollars above expenses." +</P> + +<P> +"No, I'm sorry, but I can't go. My work here keeps me too busy. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, pshaw! Now, look here, Tom Swift! Do you know who sent me to see +you?" +</P> + +<P> +"It was Mr. Nestor, who has a daughter named Mary, I believe. Mr. +Nestor is one of the directors in our company, and one day, when he +told me about you sending a wireless message from Earthquake Island, I +knew you would be the very man for me. So now you see you'll be doing +Mr. Nestor a favor, as well as me, if you go on this trip." +</P> + +<P> +Tom was somewhat surprised, yet he realized that Mr. Period was +speaking the truth. Mr. Nestor was identified with many new +enterprises. Yet the youth was firm. +</P> + +<P> +"I really can't go," said our hero. "I'd like to, but I can't. I'd +like to oblige Mr. Nestor, for—well, for more reasons than one," and +Tom blushed slightly. "But it is out of the question. I really can't +go." +</P> + +<P> +"But you must!" insisted the camera man. "I won't take 'no' for an +answer. You've got to go, Tom Swift, do you hear that? You've go to go?" +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Period was apparently very much excited. He strode over to Tom and +smote his hands together to emphasize what he said. Then he shook his +finger at Tom, to impress the importance of the matter on our hero. +</P> + +<P> +"You've just got to go!" he cried. "You're the only one who can help +me, Tom. Do go! I'll pay you well, and—oh, well, I know you don't need +the money, exactly, but—say, you've got to go!" +</P> + +<P> +In his earnestness Mr. Period laid his hand on Tom's arm. The next +instant something happened. +</P> + +<P> +With a few big strides Koku was beside the picture man. With great +quickness he grasped Mr. Period by the coat collar, lifted him off his +feet with one hand, and walked over to a window with him, easily +lifting him above the floor. +</P> + +<P> +With one fling the giant tossed the short, stout gentleman out into a +snow bank, while Tom looked on, too surprised to do anything, even if +he had had the chance. +</P> + +<P> +"There. You touch Tom Swift again, and I sit on you and keep you under +snow!" cried the giant, while Mr. Period kicked and squirmed about in +the drift, as Tom made a leap forward to help him out. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap03"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER III +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +TOM MAKES UP HIS MIND +</H3> + +<P> +"Great Scott!" yelled the picture man. "What in the world happened to +me? Did I get kicked by that mule Boomerang of Eradicate's, that I've +heard so much about? Or was it an earthquake, such as I want to get a +picture of? What happened?" +</P> + +<P> +He was still floundering about in the deep bank of snow that was just +outside the window. Fortunately the sash had been up, and Koku had +tossed Mr. Period through the open window. Otherwise, had there been +glass, the well-meaning, but unreasoning giant would probably have +thrown his victim through that, and he might have been badly cut. Tom +had the window open for fresh air, as it was rather close in the shop. +</P> + +<P> +"Why, Koku!" exclaimed the young inventor, as he leaned out of the +window, and extended his hand to the moving picture man to help him out +of the drift. "What do you mean by that? Have you gone crazy?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, but no one shall lay hands on my master!" declared the giant half +savagely. "I have vowed to always protect you from danger, in return +for what you did for me. I saw this man lay his hand on you. In another +moment he might have killed you, had not Koku been here. There is no +danger when I am by," and he stretched out his huge arms, and looked +ferocious. "I have turned over that man, your enemy!" he added. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, you overturned me all right," admitted Mr. Period, as he got to +his feet, and crawled in through the window to the shop again. "I went +head over heels. I'm glad it was clean snow, and not a mud bank, Tom. +What in the world is the matter with him?" +</P> + +<P> +"I guess he thought you were going to harm me," said Tom in a low +voice, as the picture man came in the shop. "Koku is very devoted to +me, and sometimes he makes trouble," the youth went on. "But he means +it all for the best. I am very sorry for what happened," and Tom aided +Mr. Period in brushing the snow off his garments. "Koku, you must beg +the pardon of this gentleman," Tom directed. +</P> + +<P> +"What for?" the giant wanted to know. +</P> + +<P> +"For throwing him into the snow. It is not allowed to do such things in +this country, even though it is in Giant Land. Beg his pardon. +</P> + +<P> +"I shall not," said the giant calmly, for Tom had taught him to speak +fairly good English, though sometimes he got his words backwards. +</P> + +<P> +"The man was about to kill you, and I stopped him—I will stop him once +more, though if he does not like the snow, I can throw him somewhere +else." +</P> + +<P> +"No! No! You must not do it!" cried Tom. "He meant no harm. He is my +friend." +</P> + +<P> +"I am glad to hear you say that," exclaimed the picture man. "I have +hopes that you will do what I want." +</P> + +<P> +"He your friend?" asked Koku wonderingly.</p> + +<p>"Certainly; and you must beg +his pardon for what you did," insisted Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Very well. I am glad you did not hurt yourself," said the giant, and +with that "apology" he stalked out of the room, his feelings evidently +very much disturbed. +</P> + +<P> +"Ha! Ha!" laughed Mr. Period. "I guess he can't see any one but you, +Tom. But never mind. I know he didn't mean anything, and, as I'm none +the worse I'll forgive him. My necktie isn't spotted; is it?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, the snow didn't seem to do that any harm," replied the young +inventor, as he looked at the brilliant piece of red silk around Mr. +Period's collar. +</P> + +<P> +"I am very particular about my neckties," went on the picture man. "I +always wear one color. My friends never forget me then." +</P> + +<P> +Tom wondered how they could ever forget him, even though he wore no +tie, for his figure and face were such as to not easily be forgotten. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm glad it's not soiled," went on "Spotty" as he liked to be called. +"Now, Tom, you said you were my friend. Prove it by accepting my offer. +Build that wizard camera, and get me some moving pictures that will be +a sensation. Say you will!" +</P> + +<P> +He looked appealingly at Tom, and, remembering the rather rude and +unexpected treatment to which Koku had submitted the gentleman, Tom +felt his mind changing. Still he was not yet ready to give in. He +rather liked the idea the more he thought of it, but he felt that he +had other duties, and much to occupy him at home, especially if he +perfected his silent motor. +</P> + +<P> +"Will you go?" asked Mr. Period, picking up his fountain pen and check +book, that he had laid aside when he walked over to Tom, just before +the giant grasped him. "Say you will." +</P> + +<P> +The young inventor was silent a moment. He thought over the many +adventures he had gone through—in the caves of ice, in the city of +gold, escaping from the giants, and the red pygmies—He went over the +details of his trips through the air, of the dangers under the seas, of +those he had escaped from on Earthquake Island. Surely he was entitled +to a little rest at home. +</P> + +<P> +And yet there was a lure to it all. A certain fascination that was hard +to resist. Mr. Period must have seen what was going on in Tom's mind, +for he said: +</P> + +<P> +"I know you're going. I can see it. Why, it will be just the very thing +you need. You'll get more fame out of this thing than from any of your +other inventions. Come, say you'll do it. +</P> + +<P> +"I'll tell you what I'll do!" he went on eagerly. "After you make the +camera, and take a lot of films, showing strange and wonderful scenes, +I'll put at the end of each film, next to my picture, your name, and a +statement showing that you took the originals. How's that? Talk about +being advertised! Why you can't beat it! Millions of people will read +your name at the picture shows every night." +</P> + +<P> +"I am not looking for advertisements," said Tom, with a laugh. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, then, think of the benefit you will be to science," went on Mr. +Period quickly. "Think of the few people who have seen wild animals as +they are, of those who have ever seen an earthquake, or a volcano in +action. You can go to Japan, and get pictures of earthquakes. They have +them on tap there. And as for volcanoes, why the Andes mountains are +full of 'em. Think of how many people will be thankful to you for +showing them these wonderful scenes." +</P> + +<P> +"And think of what might happen if I should take a tumble into a crack +in the earth, or down a hot volcano, or fall into a jungle when there +was a fight on among the elephants," suggested Tom. "My airship might +take a notion to go down when I was doing the photographing," he added. +</P> + +<P> +"No. Nothing like that will happen to Tom Swift," was the confident +answer of the picture man. "I've read of your doings. You don't have +accidents that you can't get the better of. But come, I know you're +thinking of it, and I'm sure you'll go. Let me make you out this check, +sign a contract which I have all ready, and then get to work on the +camera." +</P> + +<P> +Tom was silent a moment. Then he said: +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I admit that there is something attractive about it. I hoped I +was going to stay home for a long time. But—" +</P> + +<P> +"Then you'll go!" cried Mr. Period eagerly. "Here's the money," and he +quickly filled out a check for Tom's first expenses, holding the slip +of paper toward the young inventor. +</P> + +<P> +"Wait a minute! Hold on!" cried Tom. "Not so fast if you please. I +haven't yet made up my mind." +</P> + +<P> +"But you will; won't you?" asked Mr. Period. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I'll make up my mind, one way or the other," replied the young +man. "I won't say I'll go, but—" +</P> + +<P> +"I'll tell you what I'll do!" interrupted Mr. Period. "I'm a busy man, +and every second is worth money to me. But I'll wait for you to make up +your mind. I'll give you until to-morrow night. How's that? Fair, isn't +it?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes—I think so. I am afraid—" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm not!" broke in the picture man. "I know you'll decide to go. Think +of the fun and excitement you'll have. Now I've taken up a lot of your +time, and I'm going to leave you alone. I'll be back tomorrow evening +for my answer. But I know you're going to get those moving pictures for +me. Is that giant of yours anywhere about?" he asked, as he looked +cautiously around before leaving the shop. "I don't want to fall into +his hands again." +</P> + +<P> +"I don't blame you," agreed Tom. "I never knew him to act that way +before. But I'll go to the gate with you, and Koku will behave himself. +I am sorry—" +</P> + +<P> +"Don't mention it!" broke in the picture man. "It was worth all I +suffered, if you go, and I know you will. Don't trouble yourself to +come out. I can find my way, and if your giant comes after me, I'll +call for help." +</P> + +<P> +He hurried out before Tom could follow, and, hearing the gate click a +little later, and no call for help coming, our hero concluded that his +visitor had gotten safely away. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, what am I going to do about it?" mused Tom, as he resumed work +on his silent motor. He had not been long engaged in readjusting some +of the valves, when he was again interrupted. +</P> + +<P> +This time it was his chum, Ned Newton, who entered, and, as Ned was +well known to the giant, nothing happened. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, what's up, Tom?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Why, did you notice anything unusual?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"I saw Koku standing at the gate a while ago, looking down the road at +a short stout man, with a red tie. Your giant seemed rather excited +about something." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, yes. I'll tell you about it," and Tom related the details of Mr. +Period's visit. +</P> + +<P> +"Are you going to take his offer?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"I've got until tomorrow to make up my mind. What would you do, Ned?" +</P> + +<P> +"Why, I'd take it in a minute, if I knew how to make an electric +camera. I suppose it has to be a very speedy one, to take the kind of +pictures he wants. Wait, hold on, I've just thought of a joke. It must +be a swift camera—catch on—you're Swift, and you make a swift camera; +see the point?" +</P> + +<P> +"I do," confessed Tom, with a laugh. "Well, Ned, I've been thinking it +over, but I can't decide right away. I will tomorrow night, though." +</P> + +<P> +"Then I'm coming over, and hear what it is. If you decide to go, maybe +you'll take me along." +</P> + +<P> +"I certainly will, and Mr. Damon, too." +</P> + +<P> +"How about the giant?" +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess there'll be room for him. But I haven't decided yet. +Hand me that wrench over there; will you," and then Tom and Ned began +talking about the new apparatus on which the young inventor was working. +</P> + +<P> +True to his promise Mr. Period called the next evening. He found Tom, +Ned and Mr. Swift in the library, talking over various matters. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, Tom, have you made up your mind?" asked the caller, when Mrs. +Baggert, the housekeeper, had shown him into the room. "I hope you +have, and I hope it is favorable to me." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," said Tom slowly, "I've thought it all over, and I have decided +that I will—" +</P> + +<P> +At that moment there was a loud shouting outside the house, and the +sound of some one running rapidly through the garden that was just +outside the low library window—a garden now buried deep under snow. +</P> + +<P> +"What's that?" cried Ned, jumping to his feet. +</P> + +<P> +"That was Koku's voice," replied Tom, "and I guess he was chasing after +some one." +</P> + +<P> +"They'll need help if that giant gets hold of them," spoke Mr. Period +solemnly, while the noise outside increased in volume. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap04"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER IV +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +HELD FAST +</H3> + +<P> +"Here, Tom! Come back! Where are you going?" cried aged Mr. Swift, as +his son started toward the window. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm going to see what's up, and who it is that Koku is chasing," +replied the young inventor. +</P> + +<P> +As he spoke he opened the window, which went all the way down to the +floor. He stepped out on a small balcony, put his hand on the railing, +and was about to leap over. Back of him was his father, Mr. Period and +Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Come back! You may get hurt!" urged Mr. Swift. He had aged rapidly in +the last few months, and had been obliged to give up most of his +inventive work. Naturally, he was very nervous about his son. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't worry, dad," replied the youth. "I'm not in much danger when +Koku is around." +</P> + +<P> +"That's right," agreed the moving picture man. "I'd sooner have that +giant look after me than half a dozen policemen." +</P> + +<P> +The noise had now grown fainter, but the sound of the pursuit could +still be heard. Koku was shouting in his hearty tones, and there was +the noise of breaking twigs as the chase wound in and out of the garden +shrubbery. +</P> + +<P> +Tom paused a moment, to let his eyes get somewhat used to the darkness. +There was a crescent moon, that gave a little light, and the snow on +the ground made it possible to notice objects fairly well. +</P> + +<P> +"See anything?" asked Ned, as he joined his chum on the balcony. +</P> + +<P> +"No, but I'm going to have a closer look. Here goes!" and Tom leaped to +the ground. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm with you," added Ned, as he followed. +</P> + +<P> +Then came another voice, shouting: +</P> + +<P> +"Dat's de way! Catch him! I'se comm', I is! Ef we gits him we'll tie +him up, an' let Boomerang walk on him!" +</P> + +<P> +"Here comes Eradicate," announced Tom, with a look back toward his +chum, and a moment later the aged colored man, who had evidently +started on the chase with Koku, but who had been left far behind, swung +totteringly around the corner of the house. +</P> + +<P> +"Did ye cotch him, Massa Tom?" asked Eradicate. "Did ye cotch de +raskil?" +</P> + +<P> +"Not yet, Rad. But Koku is after him. Who was he, and what did he do?" +</P> + +<P> +"Didn't do nuffin yit, Massa Tom, 'case as how he didn't git no +chance," replied the colored man, as he hurried along as rapidly as he +could beside the two youths. "Koku and I was too quick for him. Koku +an' me was a-sittin' in my shack, sort of talkin' togedder, when we +hears a racket neah de chicken house. I'se mighty partial t' de +chickens, an' I didn't want nobody t' 'sturb 'em. Koku was jes' de +same, an' when we hears dat noise, up we jumps, an' gits t' chasm.' He +runned dis way, an' us was arter him, but land lub yo', ole Eradicate +ain't so spry as he uster be an' Koku an' de chicken thief got ahead ob +me. Leastwise he ain't no chicken thief yit, 'case as how he didn't git +in de coop, but he meant t' be one, jes' de same." +</P> + +<P> +"Are you sure he was after the chickens?" asked Tom, with quick +suspicion in his mind, for, several times of late, unscrupulous persons +had tried to enter his shop, to get knowledge of his valuable +inventions before they were patented. +</P> + +<P> +"Course he were arter de chickens," replied Eradicate. "But he didn't +git none." +</P> + +<P> +"Come on, Ned!" cried Tom, breaking into a run. "I want to catch +whoever this was. Did you see him, Rad?" +</P> + +<P> +"Only jes' had a glimpse ob his back." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, you go back to the house and tell father and Mr. Period about +it. Ned and I will go on with Koku. I hope to get the fellow." +</P> + +<P> +"Why, Tom?" asked his chum. +</P> + +<P> +"Because I think he was after bigger game than chickens. My noiseless +motor, for the new airship, is nearly complete, and it may have been +some one trying to get that. I received an offer from a concern the +other day, who wished to purchase it, and, when I refused to sell, they +seemed rather put out." +</P> + +<P> +The two lads raced on, while Eradicate tottered back to the house, +where he found Mr. Swift and the picture man awaiting him. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess he got away," remarked Ned, after he and his chum had covered +nearly the length of the big garden. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm afraid so," agreed Tom. "I can't hear Koku any more. Still, I'm +not going to give up." +</P> + +<P> +Pantingly they ran on, and, a little later, they met the big man coming +back. +</P> + +<P> +"Did he get away?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, Mr. Tom, he scaped me all right." +</P> + +<P> +"Escaped you mean, Koku. Well, never mind. You did your best." +</P> + +<P> +"I would like to have hold of him," spoke the giant, as he stretched +out his big arms. +</P> + +<P> +"Did you know who he was?" inquired Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"No, I couldn't see his face," and he gave the same description of the +affair as had Eradicate. +</P> + +<P> +"Was it a full grown man, or some one about my size?" Tom wanted to +know. +</P> + +<P> +"A man," replied the giant. +</P> + +<P> +"Why do you ask that?" inquired Ned, as the big fellow went on to +resume his talk with Eradicate, and the two chums turned to go into the +house, after the fruitless chase. +</P> + +<P> +"Because, I thought it might be Andy Foger," was Tom's reply. "It +would be just like him, but if it was a man, it couldn't be him. Andy's +rather short." +</P> + +<P> +"Besides, he doesn't live here any more," said Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"I know, but I heard Sam Snedecker, who used to be pretty thick with +him, saying the other day that he expected a visit from Andy. I hope he +doesn't come back to Shopton, even for a day, for he always tries to +make trouble for me. Well, let's go in, and tell 'em all about our +chase after a chicken thief." +</P> + +<P> +"And so he got away?" remarked Mr. Swift, when Tom had completed his +story. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," answered the young inventor, as he closed, and locked, the low +library window, for there was a chilly breeze blowing. "I think I will +have to rig up the burglar alarm on my shop again. I don't want to take +any chances." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you remember what we were talking about, when that interruption +came?" asked Mr. Period, after a pause. "You were saying, Tom, that you +had made up your mind, and that was as far as you got. What is your +answer to my offer?" +</P> + +<P> +"Well," spoke the lad slowly, and with a smile, "I think I will—" +</P> + +<P> +"Now don't say 'no'"; interrupted the picture man. "If you are going to +say 'no' take five minutes more, or even ten, and think it over +carefully. I want you—" +</P> + +<P> +"I wasn't going to say 'no,'" replied Tom. "I have decided to accept +your offer, and I'll get right at work on the electrical camera, and +see what I can do in the way of getting moving pictures for you." +</P> + +<P> +"You will? Say, that's great! That's fine! I knew you would accept, but +I was the least bit afraid you might not, without more urging." +</P> + +<P> +"Of course," began Tom, "it will take—" +</P> + +<P> +"Not another word. Just wait a minute," interrupted Mr. Period in his +breezy fashion. "Take this." +</P> + +<P> +He quickly filled out a check and handed it to Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Now sign this contract, which merely says that you will do your best +to get pictures for me, and that you won't do it for any other concern, +and everything will be all right. Sign there," he added, pointing to a +dotted line, and thrusting a fountain pen into Tom's hand. The lad read +over the agreement, which was fair enough, and signed it, and Ned +affixed his name as a witness. +</P> + +<P> +"Now when can you go?" asked Mr. Period eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +"Not before Spring, I'm afraid," replied Torn. "I have first to make +the camera, and then my airship needs overhauling if I am to go on such +long trips as will be necessary in case I am to get views of wild +beasts in the jungle." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, make it as soon as you can," begged Mr. Period. "I can have the +films early next Fall then, and they will be in season for the Winter +runs at the theatres. Now, I'm the busiest man in the world, and I +believe I have lost five hundred dollars by coming here to-night. +Still, I don't regret it. I'm going back now, and I'll expect to hear +from you when you are ready to start. There's my address. Good-bye," +and thrusting a card into Tom's hand he hurried out of the room. +</P> + +<P> +"Won't you stop all night?" called Mr. Swift after him. +</P> + +<P> +"Sorry. I'd like to but can't. Got a big contract I must close in New +York to-morrow morning. I've ordered a special train to be at the +Shopton station in half an hour, and I must catch that. Good night!" +and Mr. Period hurried away. +</P> + +<P> +"Say, he's a hustler all right!" exclaimed Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, and I've got to hustle if I invent that camera," added Tom. "It's +got to be a specially fast one, and one that can take pictures from a +long distance. Electricity is the thing to use, I guess." +</P> + +<P> +"Then you are really going off on this trip. Tom?" asked his father, +rather wistfully. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm afraid I am," replied his son. "I thought I could stay at home for +a while, but it seems not." +</P> + +<P> +"I was in hopes you could give me a little time to help me on my +gyroscope invention," went on the aged man. "But I suppose it will keep +until you come back. It is nearly finished." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, and I don't like stopping work on my noiseless motor," spoke Tom. +"But that will have to wait, too." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you know where you are going?" inquired Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I'll have to do considerable traveling I suppose to get all the +films he wants. But once I'm started I'll like it I guess. Of course +you're coming, Ned." +</P> + +<P> +"I hope so." +</P> + +<P> +"Of course you are!" insisted Tom, as if that settled it. "And I'm sure +Mr. Damon will go also. I haven't seen him in some time. I hope he +isn't ill." +</P> + +<P> +Tom started work on his Wizard Camera, as he called it, the next +day—that is he began drawing the designs, and planning how to +construct it. Ned helped him, and Koku was on hand in case he was +needed, but there was little he could do, as yet. Tom made an +inspection of his shop the morning after the chicken thief scare, but +nothing seemed to have been disturbed. +</P> + +<P> +A week passed, and Tom had all the plans drawn for the camera. He had +made several experiments with different forms of electricity for +operating the mechanism, and had decided on a small, but very powerful, +storage battery to move the film, and take the pictures. +</P> + +<P> +This storage battery, which would be inside the camera, would operate +it automatically. That is, the camera could be set up any place, in the +jungle, or on the desert, it could be left alone, and would take +pictures without any one being near it. Tom planned to have it operate +at a certain set time, and stop at a certain time, and he could set the +dials to make this time any moment of the day or night. For there was +to be a powerful light in connection with the camera, in order that +night views might be taken. Besides being automatic the camera could be +worked by hand. +</P> + +<P> +When it was not necessary to have the camera operate by the storage +battery, it could be connected to wires and worked by an ordinary set +of batteries, or by a dynamo. This was for use on the airship, where +there was a big electrical machine. I shall tell you more about the +camera as the story proceeds. +</P> + +<P> +One afternoon Tom was alone in the shop, for he had sent Koku on an +errand, and Eradicate was off in a distant part of the grounds, doing +some whitewashing, which was his specialty. Ned had not come over, and +Mr. Swift, having gone to see some friends, and Mrs. Baggert being at +the store, Tom, at this particular time, was rather isolated. +</P> + +<P> +He was conducting some delicate electrical experiments, and to keep the +measuring instruments steady he had closed all the windows and doors of +his shop. The young inventor was working at a bench in one corner, and +near him, standing upright, was a heavy shaft of iron, part of his +submarine, wrapped in burlap, and padded, to keep it from rusting. +</P> + +<P> +"Now," said Tom to himself, as he mixed two kinds of acid in a jar, to +produce a new sort of electrical current, "I will see if this is any +better than the first way in which I did it." +</P> + +<P> +He was careful about pouring out the powerful stuff, but, in spite of +this, he spilled a drop on his finger. It burned like fire, and, +instinctively, he jerked his hand back. +</P> + +<P> +The next instant there was a series of happenings. Tom's elbow came in +contact with another jar of acid, knocking it over, and spilling it +into the retort where he had been mixing the first two liquids. There +was a hissing sound, as the acids combined, and a thick, white vapor +arose, puffing into Tom's face, and making him gasp. +</P> + +<P> +He staggered back, brushed against the heavy iron shaft in the corner, +and it fell sideways against him, knocking him to the floor, and +dropping across his thighs. The padding on it saved him from broken +bones, but the shaft was so heavy, that after it was on him, Tom could +not move. He was held fast on the floor of his shop, unable to use his +legs, and prevented from getting up. +</P> + +<P> +For a moment Tom was stunned, and then he called: +</P> + +<P> +"Help! Help! Eradicate! Koku! Help!" +</P> + +<P> +He waited a moment, but there was only a silence. +</P> + +<P> +And then Tom smelled a strange odor—an odor of a choking gas that +seemed to smother him. +</P> + +<P> +"It's the acids!" he cried. "They're generating gas! And I'm held fast +here! The place is closed up tight, and I can't move! Help! Help!" +</P> + +<P> +But there was no one at hand to aid Tom, and every moment the fumes of +the gas became stronger. Desperately the youth struggled to rid himself +of the weight of the shaft, but he could not. And then he felt his +senses leaving him, for the powerful gas was making him unconscious. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap05"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER V +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +TOM GETS A WARNING +</H3> + +<P> +"Bless my shoe buttons!" exclaimed a voice, as a man came toward Tom's +shop, a little later. "Bless my very necktie! This is odd. I go to the +house, and find no one there. I come out here, and not a soul is about. +Tom Swift can't have gone off on another one of his wonderful trips, +without sending me word. I know he wouldn't do that. And yet, bless my +watch and chain, I can't find any one!" +</P> + +<P> +It was Mr. Damon who spoke, as my old readers have already guessed. He +peered into one of the shop windows, and saw something like a fog +filling the place. +</P> + +<P> +"That's strange," he went on. "I don't see Tom there, and yet it looks +as if an experiment was going on. I wonder—" +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Damon heard some one coming up behind him, and turned to see Koku +the giant, who was returning from the errand on which Tom had sent him. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, Koku, it's you; is it?" the odd man asked. "Bless my cuff buttons! +Where is Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"In shop I guess." +</P> + +<P> +"I don't see him. Still I had better look. There doesn't seem to be any +one about." +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Damon opened the shop door, and was met by such an outward rush of +choking gas that he staggered back. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my—" he began but he had to stop, to cough and gasp. "There +must have been some sort of an accident," he cried, as he got his lungs +full of fresh air. "A bad accident! Tom could never work in that +atmosphere. Whew!" +</P> + +<P> +"Accident! What is matter?" cried Koku stepping to the doorway. He, +too choked and gasped, but his was such a strong and rugged nature, and +his lungs held such a supply of air, that it took more than mere gas to +knock him out. He peered in through the wreaths of the acid vapor, and +saw the body of his master, lying on the floor—held down by the heavy +iron. +</P> + +<P> +In another instant Koku had rushed in, holding his breath, for, now +that he was inside the place, the gas made even him feel weak. +</P> + +<P> +"Come back! Come back!" cried Mr. Damon. "You'll be smothered! Wait +until the gas escapes!" +</P> + +<P> +"Then Mr. Tom die!" cried the giant. "I get him—or I no come out." +</P> + +<P> +With one heave of his powerful right arm, Koku lifted the heavy shaft +from Tom's legs. Then, gathering the lad up in his left arm, as if he +were a baby, Koku staggered out into the fresh air, almost falling with +his burden, as he neared Mr. Damon, for the giant was, well-nigh +overcome. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my soul!" cried the odd man. "Is he—is he—" +</P> + +<P> +He did not finish the sentence, but, as Koku laid Tom down on the +overcoat of Mr. Damon, which the latter quickly spread on the snow, the +eccentric man put his hand over the heart of the young inventor. +</P> + +<P> +"It beats!" he murmured. "He's alive, but very weak. We must get a +doctor at once. I'll do what I can. There's no time to spare. Bless +my—" +</P> + +<P> +But Mr. Damon concluded that there was no time for blessing anything, +and so he stopped short. +</P> + +<P> +"Carry him up to the house, Koku," he said. "I know where there are +some medicines, and I'll try to revive him while we're waiting for the +doctor Hurry!" +</P> + +<P> +Tom was laid on a lounge, and, just then, Mrs. Baggert came in. +</P> + +<P> +"Telephone for the doctor!" cried Mr. Damon to the housekeeper, who +kept her nerve, and did not get excited. "I'll give Tom some ammonia, +and other stimulants, and see if I can bring him around. Koku, get me +some cold water." +</P> + +<P> +The telephone was soon carrying the message to the doctor, who promised +to come at once. Koku, in spite of his size, was quick, and soon +brought the water, into which Mr. Damon put some strong medicine, that +he found in a closet. Tom's eyelids fluttered as the others forced some +liquid between his lips. +</P> + +<P> +"He's coming around!" cried the eccentric man. "I guess he'll be all +right, Koku." +</P> + +<P> +"Koku glad," said the giant simply, for he loved Tom with a deep +devotion. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, Koku, if it hadn't been for you, though, I don't believe that he +would be alive. That was powerful gas, and a few seconds more in there +might have meant the end of Tom. I didn't see him lying on the floor, +until after you rushed in. Bless my thermometer! It is very strange." +</P> + +<P> +They gave Tom more medicine, rubbed his arms and legs, and held ammonia +under his nose. Slowly he opened his eyes, and in a faint voice asked: +</P> + +<P> +"Where—am—I?" +</P> + +<P> +"In your own house," replied Mr. Damon, cheerfully. "How do you feel?" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm—all—right—now," said Tom slowly. He, felt his strength coming +gradually back, and he remembered what had happened, though he did not +yet know how he had been saved. The doctor came in at this moment, with +a small medical battery, which completed the restorative work begun by +the others. Soon Tom could sit up, though he was still weak and rather +sick. +</P> + +<P> +"Who brought me out?" he asked, when he had briefly told how the +accident occurred. +</P> + +<P> +"Koku did," replied Mr. Damon. "I guess none of the rest of us could +have lifted the iron shaft from your legs." +</P> + +<P> +"It's queer how that fell," said Tom, with a puzzled look on his face. +"I didn't hit it hard enough to bring it down. Beside, I had it tied to +nails, driven into the wall, to prevent just such an accident as this. +I must see about it when I get well." +</P> + +<P> +"Not for a couple of days," exclaimed the doctor grimly. "You've got +to stay in bed a while yet. You had a narrow escape, Tom Swift." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I'm glad I went to Giant Land," said the young inventor, with a +wan smile. "Otherwise I'd never have Koku," and he looked +affectionately at the big man, who laughed happily. In nature Koku was +much like a child. +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Swift came home a little later, and Ned Newton called, both being +very much surprised to hear of the accident. As for Eradicate, the poor +old colored man was much affected, and would have sat beside Tom's bed +all night, had they allowed him. +</P> + +<P> +Our hero recovered rapidly, once the fumes of the gas left his system, +and, two days later, he was able to go out to the shop again. At his +request everything had been left just as it was after he had been +brought out. Of course the fumes of the gas were soon dissipated, when +the door was opened, and the acids, after mingling and giving off the +vapor, had become neutralized, so that they were now harmless. +</P> + +<P> +"Now I'm going to see what made that shaft fall," said Tom to Ned, as +the two chums walked over to the bench where the young inventor had +been working. "The tap I gave it never ought to have brought it down." +</P> + +<P> +Together they examined the thin, but strong, cords that had been passed +around the shaft, having been fastened to two nails, driven into the +wall. +</P> + +<P> +"Look!" cried Tom, pointing to one of the cords. +</P> + +<P> +"What is it?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"The strands were partly cut through, so that only a little jar was +enough to break the remaining ones," went on Tom. "They've been cut +with a knife, too, and not frayed by vibration against the nail, as +might be the case. Ned, someone has been in my shop, meddling, and he +wanted this shaft to fall. This is a trick!" +</P> + +<P> +"Great Scott, Tom! You don't suppose any one wanted that shaft to fall +on you; do you?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, I don't believe that. Probably some one wanted to damage the +shaft, or he might have thought it would topple over against the bench, +and break some of my tools, instruments or machinery. I do delicate +experiments here, and it wouldn't take much of a blow to spoil them. +That's why those cords were cut." +</P> + +<P> +"Who did it? Do you think Andy Foger—" +</P> + +<P> +"No, I think it was the man Koku thought was a chicken thief, and whom +we chased the other night. I've got to be on my guard. I wonder if—" +</P> + +<P> +Tom was interrupted by the appearance of Koku, who came out of the shop +with a letter the postman had just left. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know that writing very well, and yet it looks familiar," said +Tom, as he tore open the missive. "Hello, here's more trouble!" he +exclaimed as he hastily read it. +</P> + +<P> +"What's up now?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"This is from Mr. Period, the picture man," went on the young inventor. +"It's a warning." +</P> + +<P> +"A warning?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. He says: +</P> + +<BR> + +<P> +"'Dear Tom. Be on your guard. I understand that a rival moving picture +concern is after you. They want to make you an offer, and get you away +from me. But I trust you. Don't have anything to do with these other +fellows. And, at the same time, don't give them a hint as to our plans. +Don't tell them anything about your new camera. There is a lot of +jealousy and rivalry in this business and they are all after me. +They'll probably come to see you, but be on your guard. They know that +I have been negotiating with you. Remember the alarm the other night.'" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap06"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER VI +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +TRYING THE CAMERA +</H3> + +<P> +"Well, what do you think of that?" cried Ned, as his chum finished. +</P> + +<P> +"It certainly isn't very pleasant," replied Tom. "I wonder why those +chaps can't let me alone? Why don't they invent cameras of their own? +Why are they always trying to get my secret inventions?" +</P> + +<P> +"I suppose they can't do things for themselves," answered Ned. "And +then, again, your machinery always works, Tom, and some that your +rivals make, doesn't." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, maybe that's it," admitted our hero, as he put away the letter. +"I will be on the watch, just as I have been before. I've got the +burglar alarm wires adjusted on the shop now, and when these rival +moving picture men come after me they'll get a short answer." +</P> + +<P> +For several days nothing happened, and Tom and Ned worked hard on the +Wizard Camera. It was nearing completion, and they were planning, soon, +to give it a test, when, one afternoon, two strangers, in a powerful +automobile, came to the Swift homestead. They inquired for Tom, and, +as he was out in the shop, with Ned and Koku, and as he often received +visitors out there, Mrs. Baggert sent out the two men, who left their +car in front of the house. +</P> + +<P> +As usual, Tom had the inner door to his shop locked, and when Koku +brought in a message that two strangers would like to see the young +inventor, Tom remarked: +</P> + +<P> +"I guess it's the rival picture men, Ned. We'll see what they have to +say." +</P> + +<P> +"Which of you is Tom Swift?" asked the elder of the two men, as Tom and +Ned entered the front office, for our hero knew better than to admit +the strangers to the shop. +</P> + +<P> +"I am," replied Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, we're men of business," went on the speaker, "and there is no +use beating about the bush. I am Mr. Wilson Turbot, and this is my +partner, Mr. William Eckert. We are in the business of making moving +picture films, and I understand that you are associated with Mr. Period +in this line. 'Spotty' we call him." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I am doing some work for Mr. Period," admitted Tom, cautiously. +</P> + +<P> +"Have you done any yet?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, but I expect to." +</P> + +<P> +"What kind of a camera are you going to use?" asked Mr. Eckert eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +"I must decline to answer that," replied Tom, a bit stiffly. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, that's all right," spoke Mr. Turbot, good naturedly. "Only +'Spotty' was bragging that you were making a new kind of film for him, +and we wondered if it was on the market." +</P> + +<P> +"We are always looking for improvements," added Mr. Eckert. +</P> + +<P> +"This camera isn't on the market," replied Tom, on his guard as to how +he answered. +</P> + +<P> +The two men whispered together for a moment, and then Mr. Turbot said: +</P> + +<P> +"Well, as I remarked, we're men of business, and there's no use beating +about the bush. We've heard of you, Tom Swift, and we know you can do +things. Usually, in this world, every man has his price, and we're +willing to pay big to get what we want. I don't know what offer Mr. +Period made to you, but I'll say this: We'll give you double what he +offered, for the exclusive rights to your camera, whenever it's on the +market, and we'll pay you a handsome salary to work for us." +</P> + +<P> +"I'm sorry, but I can't consider the offer," replied Tom firmly. "I +have given my word to Mr. Period. I have a contract with him, and I +cannot break it." +</P> + +<P> +"Offer him three times what Period did," said Mr. Eckert, in a hoarse +whisper that Tom heard. +</P> + +<P> +"It would be useless!" exclaimed our hero. "I wouldn't go back on my +word for a hundred times the price I am to get. I am not in this +business so much for the money, as I am for the pleasure of it." +</P> + +<P> +The men were silent a moment. There were ugly looks on their faces. +They looked sharply at Tom and Ned. Then Mr. Eckert said: +</P> + +<P> +"You'll regret this, Tom Swift. We are the biggest firm of moving +picture promoters in the world. We always get what we want." +</P> + +<P> +"You won't get my camera," replied Tom calmly. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know about that!" exclaimed Mr. Turbot, as he made a hasty +stride toward Tom, who stood in front of the door leading to the +shop—the shop where his camera, almost ready for use, was on a bench. +"I guess if we—" +</P> + +<P> +"Koku!" suddenly called Tom. +</P> + +<P> +The giant stepped into the front office. He had been standing near the +door, inside the main shop. Mr. Turbot who had stretched forth his +hand, as though to seize Tom, and his companion, who had advanced +toward Ned, fairly jumped back in fright at the sight of the big man. +</P> + +<P> +"Koku," went on Tom, in even tones, "just show these gentlemen to the +front door—and lock it after them," he added significantly, as he +turned back into the shop, followed by Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, Mr. Tom," answered the giant, and then, with his big hand, and +brawny fist, he gently turned the two men toward the outer door. They +were gasping in surprise as they looked at the giant. +</P> + +<P> +"You'll be sorry for this, Tom Swift!" exclaimed Mr. Turbot. "You'll +regret not having taken our offer. This Period chat is only a small +dealer. We can do better by you. You'll regret—" +</P> + +<P> +"You'll regret coming here again," snapped Tom, as he closed the door +of his shop, leaving Koku to escort the baffled plotters to their auto. +Shortly afterward Tom and Ned heard the car puffing away. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, they came, just as Mr. Period said they would," spoke Tom, +slowly. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, and they went away again!" exclaimed Ned with a laugh. "They had +their trip for nothing. Say, did you see how they stared at Koku?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, he's a helper worth having, in cases like these." +</P> + +<P> +Tom wrote a full account of what had happened and sent it to Mr. +Period. He received in reply a few words, thanking him for his loyalty, +and again warning him to be on his guard. +</P> + +<P> +In the meanwhile, work went on rapidly on the Wizard Camera. Briefly +described it was a small square box, with a lens projecting from it. +Inside, however, was complicated machinery, much too complicated for me +to describe. Tom Swift had put in his best work on this wonderful +machine. As I have said, it could be worked by a storage battery, by +ordinary electric current from a dynamo, or by hand. On top was a new +kind of electric light. This was small and compact, but it threw out +powerful beams. With the automatic arrangement set, and the light +turned on, the camera could be left at a certain place after dark, and +whatever went on in front of it would be reproduced on the moving roll +of film inside. +</P> + +<P> +In the morning the film could be taken out, developed, and the pictures +thrown on a screen in the usual way, familiar to all who have been in a +moving picture theatre. With the reproducing machines Tom had nothing +to do, as they were already perfected. His task had been to make the +new-style camera, and it was nearly completed. +</P> + +<P> +A number of rolls of films could be packed into the camera, and they +could be taken out, or inserted, in daylight. Of course after one film +had been made, showing any particular scene any number of films could +be made from this "master" one. Just as is done with the ordinary +moving picture camera. Tom had an attachment to show when one roll was +used, and when another needed inserting. +</P> + +<P> +For some time after the visit of the rival moving picture men, Tom was +on his guard. Both house and shop were fitted with burglar alarms, but +they did not ring. Eradicate and Koku were told to be on watch, but +there was nothing for them to do. +</P> + +<P> +"Well," remarked Tom to Ned, one afternoon, when they had both worked +hard, "I think it's about finished. Of course it needs polishing, and +there may be some adjusting to do, but my camera is now ready to take +pictures—at least I'm going to give it a test." +</P> + +<P> +"Have you the rolls of films?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, half a dozen of 'em And I'm going to try the hardest test first." +</P> + +<P> +"Which one is that?" +</P> + +<P> +"The night test. I'm going to place the camera out in the yard, facing +my shop. Then you and I, and some of the others, will go out, pass in +front of it, do various stunts, and, in the morning we'll develop the +films and see what we have." +</P> + +<P> +"Why, are you going to leave the camera out, all night?" +</P> + +<P> +"Sure. I'm going to give it the hardest kind of a test." +</P> + +<P> +"But are you and I going to stay up all night to do stunts in front of +it?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, indeed. I'm going to let it take what ever pictures happen to come +along to be taken after we get through making some special early ones. +You see my camera will be a sort of watch dog, only of course it won't +catch any one—that is, only their images will be caught on the film. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I see," exclaimed Ned, and then he helped Tom fix the machine for +the test. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap07"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER VII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +WHAT THE CAMERA CAUGHT +</H3> + +<P> +"Well, is she working, Tom?" asked our hero's chum, a little later, +when they had set the camera up on a box in the garden. It pointed +toward the main shop door, and from the machine came a clicking sound. +The electric light was glowing. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, it's all ready," replied Tom. "Now just act as if it wasn't +there. You walk toward the shop. Do anything you please. Pretend you +are coming in to see me on business. Act as if it was daytime. I'll +stand here and receive you. Later, I'll get dad out here, Koku and +Eradicate. I wish Mr. Period was here to see the test, but perhaps it's +just as well for me to make sure it works before he sees it." +</P> + +<P> +"All right, Tom, here I come." +</P> + +<P> +Ned advanced toward the shop. He tried to act as though the camera was +not taking pictures of him, at the rate of several a second, but he +forgot himself, and turned to look at the staring lens. Then Tom, with +a laugh, advanced to meet him, shaking hands with him. Then the lads +indulged in a little skylarking. They threw snowballs at each other, +taking care, however to keep within range of the lens. Of course when +Tom worked the camera himself, he could point it wherever he wanted to, +but it was now automatic. +</P> + +<P> +Then the lads went to the shop, and came out again. They did several +other things. Later Koku, and Eradicate did some "stunts," as Tom +called them. Mr. Swift, too, was snapped, but Mrs. Baggert refused to +come out. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess that will do for now," said Tom, as he stopped the +mechanism. "I've just thought of something," he added. "If I leave the +light burning, it will scare away, before they got in front of the +lens, any one who might come along. I'll have to change that part of +it." +</P> + +<P> +"How can you fix it?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Easily. I'll rig up some flash lights, just ordinary photographing +flashlights, you know. I'll time them to go off one after the other, +and connect them with an electric wire to the door of my shop." +</P> + +<P> +"Then your idea is—" began Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"That some rascals may try to enter my shop at night. Not this +particular night, but any night. If they come to-night we'll be ready +for them." +</P> + +<P> +"An' can't yo'-all take a picture ob de chicken coop?" asked Eradicate. +"Dat feller may come back t' rob mah hens." +</P> + +<P> +"With the lens pointing toward the shop," spoke Tom, "it will also take +snap shots of any one who tries to enter the coop. So, if the chicken +thief does come, Rad, we'll have a picture of him." +</P> + +<P> +Tom and Ned soon had the flashlights in place, and then they went to +bed, listening, at times, for the puff that would indicate that the +camera was working. But the night passed without incident, rather to +Tom's disappointment. However, in the morning, he developed the film of +the first pictures taken in the evening. Soon they were dry enough to +be used in the moving picture machine, which Tom had bought, and set up +in a dark room. +</P> + +<P> +"There we are!" he cried, as the first images were thrown on the white +screen. "As natural as life, Ned! My camera works all right!" +</P> + +<P> +"That's so. Look! There's where I hit you with a snowball!" cried his +chum, as the skylarking scene was reached. +</P> + +<P> +"Mah goodness!" cried Eradicate, when he saw himself walking about on +the screen, as large as life. "Dat shorely am wonderful." +</P> + +<P> +"It is spirits!" cried Koku, as he saw himself depicted. +</P> + +<P> +"I wish we had some of the other pictures to show," spoke Tom. "I mean +some unexpected midnight visitors." +</P> + +<P> +For several nights in succession the camera was set to "snap" any one +who might try to enter the shop. The flashlights were also in place. +Tom and Ned, the latter staying at his chum's house that week, were +beginning to think they would have their trouble for their pains. But +one night something happened. +</P> + +<P> +It was very dark, but the snow on the ground made a sort of glow that +relieved the blackness. The camera had been set as usual, and Tom and +Ned went to bed. +</P> + +<P> +It must have been about midnight when they were both awakened by +hearing the burglar alarm go off. At the same time there were several +flashes of fire from the garden. +</P> + +<P> +"There she goes!" cried Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, they're trying to get into the shed," added Tom, as a glance at +the burglar-alarm indicator on the wall of the room, showed that the +shop door was being tried. "Come on!" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm with you!" yelled Ned. +</P> + +<P> +They lost little time getting into their clothes, for they had laid +them out in readiness for putting on quickly. Down the stairs they +raced, but ere they reached the garden they heard footsteps running +along the wall toward the road. +</P> + +<P> +"Who's there?" cried Tom, but there was no answer. +</P> + +<P> +"Koku! Eradicate!" yelled Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Yais, sah, I'se comm'!" answered the colored man, and the voice of the +giant was also heard. The flashlights had ceased popping before this, +and when the two lads and their helpers had reached the shop, there was +no one in sight. +</P> + +<P> +"The camera's there all right!" cried Tom in relief as he picked it up +from the box. "Now to see what it caught. Did you see anything of the +fellows, Koku, or Eradicate?" Both said they had not, but Eradicate, +after examining the chicken house door by the aid of a lighted match, +cried out: +</P> + +<P> +"Somebody's been tryin' t' git in heah, Massa Tom. I kin see where de +do's been scratched." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, maybe we'll have the picture for you to look at in the morning," +said Tom. +</P> + +<P> +The films were developed in the usual way in the morning, but the +pictures were so small that Tom could not make out the features or +forms of the men. And it was plain that at least three men had been +around the coop and shop. +</P> + +<P> +By the use of alcohol and an electric fan Tom soon had the films dry +enough to use. Then the moving picture machine was set up in a dark +room, and all gathered to see what would be thrown on the screen, +greatly enlarged. +</P> + +<P> +First came several brilliant flashes of light, and then, as the +entrance to the shop loomed into view, a dark figure seemed to walk +across the canvas. But it did not stop at the shop door. Instead it +went to the chicken coop, and, as the man reached that door, he began +working to get it open. Of course it had all taken place in a few +seconds, for, as soon as the flashlights went off, the intruders had +run away. But they had been there long enough to have their pictures +taken. +</P> + +<P> +The man at the chicken coop turned around as the lights flashed, and he +was looking squarely at the camera. Of course this made his face very +plain to the audience, as Tom turned the crank of the reproducing +machine. +</P> + +<P> +"Why, it's a colored man!" cried Ned in surprise. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I guess it's only an ordinary chicken thief, after all," remarked +Tom. +</P> + +<P> +There was a gasp from Eradicate. +</P> + +<P> +"Fo' de land sakes!" he cried. "De raskil! Ef dat ain't mah own second +cousin, what libs down by de ribber! An' to t'ink dat Samuel 'Rastus +Washington Jackson Johnson, mah own second cousin, should try t' rob +mah chicken coop! Oh, won't I gib it t' him!" +</P> + +<P> +"Are you sure, Rad?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Suah? Sartin I'se suah, Massa Tom," was the answer as the startled +colored man on the screen stared at the small audience. "I'd know dat +face ob his'n anywhere." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess he's the only one we caught last night," said Tom, as +the disappointed chicken thief ran away, and so out of focus. But the +next instant there came another series of flashlight explosions on the +screen, and there, almost as plainly as if our friends were looking at +them, they saw two men stealthily approaching the shop. They, too, as +the chicken thief had done, tried the door, and then, they also, +startled by the flashes, turned around. +</P> + +<P> +"Look!" cried Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Great Scott!" exclaimed Tom. "Those are the two rivals of Mr. Period! +They are Mr. Turbot and Mr. Eckert!" +</P> + +<P> +"Same men I pushed out!" cried Koku, much excited. +</P> + +<P> +There was no doubt of it, and, as the images faded from the screen, +caused by the men running away, Tom and Ned realized that their rivals +had tried to put their threat into execution—the threat of making Tom +wish he had taken their offer. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess they came to take my camera,—but, instead the camera took +them," said the young inventor grimly. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap08"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER VIII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +PHOTOS FROM THE AIRSHIP +</H3> + +<P> +"Well, Tom, how is it going?" asked a voice at the door of the shop +where the young inventor was working. He looked up quickly to behold +Mr. Nestor, father of Mary, in which young lady, as I have said, Tom +was much interested. "How is the moving picture camera coming on?" +</P> + +<P> +"Pretty good, Mr. Nestor. Come in. I guess Koku knew you all right. I +told him to let in any of my friends, but I have to keep him there on +guard." +</P> + +<P> +"So I understand. They nearly got in the other night, but I hear that +your camera caught them." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, that proved that the machine is a success, even if we didn't +succeed in arresting the men." +</P> + +<P> +"Did you try?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I sent copies of the film, showing Turbot and Eckert trying to +break into my shop, to Mr. Period, and he had enlarged photographs +made, and went to the police. They said it was rather flimsy evidence +on which to arrest anybody, and so they didn't act. However, we sent +copies of the pictures to Turbot and Eckert themselves, so they know +that we know they were here, and I guess they'll steer clear of me +after this." +</P> + +<P> +"I guess so, Tom," agreed Mr. Nestor with a laugh. "But what about the +chicken thief?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, Eradicate attended to his second cousin. He went to see him, +showed him a print from the film, and gave him to understand that he'd +be blown up with dynamite, or kicked by Boomerang, if he ever came +around here again, and so Samuel 'Rastus Washington Jackson Johnson +will be careful about visiting strange chicken coops, after this." +</P> + +<P> +"I believe you, Tom. But how is the camera coming on?" +</P> + +<P> +"Very well. I am making a few changes in it, and I expect to get my +biggest airship in readiness for the trip in about a week, and then +I'll try taking pictures from her. But I understand that you are +interested in Mr. Period's business, Mr. Nestor?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I own some stock in the company, and, Tom, that's what I came +over to see you about. I need a vacation. Mary and her mother are going +away this Spring for a long visit, and I was wondering if you couldn't +take me with you on the trips you will make to get moving pictures for +our concern." +</P> + +<P> +"Of course I can, Mr. Nestor. I'll be glad to do it." +</P> + +<P> +"And there is another thing, Tom," went on Mr. Nestor, soberly. "I've +got a good deal of my fortune tied up in this moving picture affair. I +want to see you win out—I don't want our rivals to get ahead of us." +</P> + +<P> +"They shan't get ahead of us." +</P> + +<P> +"You see, Tom, it's this way. There is a bitter fight on between our +concern and that controlled by our rivals. Each is trying to get the +business of a large chain of moving picture theatres throughout the +United States. These theatre men are watching us both, and the +contracts for next season will go to the concern showing the best line +of films. If our rivals get ahead of us—well, it will just about ruin +our company,—and about ruin me too, I guess." +</P> + +<P> +"I shall do my very best," answered our hero. +</P> + +<P> +"Is Mr. Damon going along?" +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I have just written to ask him. I sent the letter yesterday. +</P> + +<P> +"Doesn't he know what you contemplate?" +</P> + +<P> +"Not exactly. You see when he came, that time I was overcome by the +fumes from the acids, everything was so upset that I didn't get a +chance to tell him. He's been away on business ever since, but returned +yesterday. I certainly hope that he goes with us. Ned Newton is +coming, and with you, and Koku and myself, it will be a nicer party." +</P> + +<P> +"Then you are going to take Koku?" +</P> + +<P> +"I think I will. I'm a little worried about what these rival moving +picture men might do, and if I get into trouble with them, my giant +helper would come in very useful, to pick one up and throw him over a +tree top, for instance." +</P> + +<P> +"Indeed, yes," agreed Mr. Nestor, with a laugh. "But I hope nothing +like that happens." +</P> + +<P> +"Nothing like that happens?" suddenly asked a voice. "Bless my +bookcase! but there always seems to be something going on here. What's +up now, Tom Swift?" +</P> + +<P> +"Nothing much, Mr. Damon," replied our hero, as he recognized his odd +friend. "We were just talking about moving pictures, Mr. Damon, and +about you. Did you get my letter?" +</P> + +<P> +"I did, Tom." +</P> + +<P> +"And are you going with us?" +</P> + +<P> +"Tom, did you ever know me to refuse an invitation from you? I guess +not! Of course I'm going. But, for mercy sakes, don't tell my wife! She +mustn't know about it until the last minute, and then she'll be so +surprised, when I tell her, that she won't think of objecting. Don't +let her know." +</P> + +<P> +Tom laughed, and promised, and then the three began talking of the +prospective trip. After a bit Ned Newton joined the party. +</P> + +<P> +Tom showed the two men how his new camera worked. He had made several +improvements on it since the first pictures were taken, and now it was +almost perfect. Mr. Period had been out to see it work, and said it was +just the apparatus needed. +</P> + +<P> +"You can get films with that machine," he said, "that will be better +than any pictures ever thrown on a screen. My fortune will be made, +Tom, and yours too, if you can only get pictures that are out of the +ordinary. There will be some hair-raising work, I expect, but you can +do it." +</P> + +<P> +"I'll try," spoke Tom. "I have—" +</P> + +<P> +"Hold on! I know what you are going to say," interrupted Mr. Period. +"You are going to say that you've gone through some strenuous times +already. I know you have, but you're going to have more soon. I think +I'll send you to India first." +</P> + +<P> +"To India!" exclaimed Tom, for Mr. Period had spoken of that as if it +was but a journey downtown. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, India. I want a picture of an elephant drive, and if you can get +pictures of the big beasts in a stampede, so much the better. Then, +too, the Durbar is on now, and that will make a good film. How soon can +you start for Calcutta?" +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I've got to overhaul the airship," said Tom. "That will take +about three weeks. The camera is practically finished. I can leave in a +month, I guess." +</P> + +<P> +"Good. We'll have fine weather by that time. Are you going all the way +by your airship?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, I think it will be best to take that apart, ship it by steamer, +and go that way ourselves. I can put the airship together in India, and +then use it to get to any other part of Europe, Asia or Africa you +happen to want pictures from." +</P> + +<P> +"Good! Well, get to work now, and I'll see you again." +</P> + +<P> +In the days that followed, Tom and Ned were kept busy. There was +considerable to do on the airship, in the way of overhauling it. This +craft was Tom's largest, and was almost like the one in which he had +gone to the caves of ice, where it was wrecked. It had been, however, +much improved. +</P> + +<P> +The craft was a sort of combined dirigible balloon, and aeroplane, and +could be used as either. There was a machine on board for generating +gas, to use in the balloon part of it, and the ship, which was named +the Flyer, could carry several persons. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my shoe laces!" cried Mr. Damon one day as he looked at Koku. +"If we take him along in the airship, will we be able to float, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, yes. The airship is plenty big enough. Besides, we are not going +to take along a very large party, and the camera is not heavy. Oh, +we'll be all right. I suppose you'll be on hand to-morrow, Mr. Damon?" +</P> + +<P> +"To-morrow? What for?" +</P> + +<P> +"We're going to take the picture machine up in the airship, and get +some photos from the sky. I expect to make some films from high in the +air, as well as some in the regular way, on the ground, and I want a +little practice. Come around about two o'clock, and we'll have a trial +flight." +</P> + +<P> +"All right. I will. But don't let my wife know I'm going up in an +airship again. She's read of so many accidents lately, that she's +nervous about having me take a trip." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I won't tell," promised Tom with a laugh, and he worked away +harder than ever, for there were many little details to perfect. The +weather was now getting warm, as there was an early spring, and it was +pleasant out of doors. +</P> + +<P> +The moving picture camera was gotten in readiness. Extra rolls of films +were on hand, and the big airship, in which they were to go up, for +their first test of taking pictures from high in the air, had been +wheeled out of the shed. +</P> + +<P> +"Are you going up very far?" asked Mr. Nestor of Tom, and the young +inventor thought that Mary's father was a trifle nervous. He had not +made many flights, and then only a little way above the ground, with +Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Not very high," replied our hero. "You see I want to get pictures that +will be large, and if I'm too far away I can't do it." +</P> + +<P> +"Glad to hear it," replied Mr. Nestor, with a note of relief in his +voice. "Though I suppose to fall a thousand feet isn't much different +from falling a hundred when you consider the results." +</P> + +<P> +"Not much," admitted Tom frankly. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my feather bed!" cried Mr. Damon. "Please don't talk of falling, +when we're going up in an airship. It makes me nervous." +</P> + +<P> +"We'll not fall!" declared Tom confidently. +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Period sent his regrets, that he could not be present at the trial, +stating in his letter that he was the busiest man in the world, and +that his time was worth about a dollar a minute just at present. He, +however, wished Tom all success. Tom's first effort was to sail along, +with the lens of the camera pointed straight toward the earth. He would +thus get, if successful, a picture that, when thrown on the screen, +would give the spectators the idea that they were looking down from a +moving balloon. For that reason Tom was not going to fly very high, as +he wanted to get all the details possible. +</P> + +<P> +"All aboard!" cried the young inventor, when he had seen to it that his +airship was in readiness for a flight. The camera had been put aboard, +and the lens pointed toward earth through a hole in the main cabin +floor. All who were expected to make the trip with Tom were on hand, +Koku taking the place of Eradicate this time, as the colored man was +too aged and feeble to go along. +</P> + +<P> +"All ready?" asked Ned, who stood in the steering tower, with his hand +on the starting lever, while Tom was at the camera to see that it +worked properly. +</P> + +<P> +"All ready," answered the young inventor, and, an instant later, they +shot upward, as the big propellers whizzed around. +</P> + +<P> +Tom at once started the camera to taking pictures rapidly, as he wanted +the future audience to get a perfect idea of how it looked to go up in +a balloon, leaving the earth behind. Then as the Flyer moved swiftly +over woods and fields, Tom moved the lens from side to side, to get +different views. +</P> + +<P> +"Say! This is great!" cried Mr. Nestor, to whom air-riding was much of +a novelty. "Are you getting good pictures, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"I can't tell until we develop them. But the machine seems to be +working all right. I'm going to sail back now, and get some views of +our own house from up above." +</P> + +<P> +They had sailed around the town of Shopton, to the neighboring +villages, over woods and fields. Now they were approaching Shopton +again. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my heart!" suddenly exclaimed Mr. Damon, who was looking toward +the earth, as they neared Tom's house. +</P> + +<P> +"What is it?" asked our hero, glancing up from the picture machine, the +registering dial of which he was examining. +</P> + +<P> +"Look there! At your shop, Tom! There seems to be a lot of smoke coming +from it!" +</P> + +<P> +They were almost over Tom's shop now, and, as Mr. Damon had said, there +was considerable smoke rolling above it. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess Eradicate is burning up papers and trash," was Ned's opinion. +</P> + +<P> +Tom looked to where the camera pointed, he was right over his shop now, +and could see a dense vapor issuing from the door. +</P> + +<P> +"That isn't Eradicate!" cried the young inventor. "My shop is on fire! +I've got to make a quick drop, and save it! There are a lot of valuable +models, and machines in there! Send us down, Ned, as fast as she'll go!" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap09"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER IX +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +OFF FOR INDIA +</H3> + +<P> +"Bless my hose reel!" cried Mr. Damon, as the airship took a quick +lurch toward the earth. "Things are always happening to you, Tom Swift! +Your shop on fire! How did it happen?" +</P> + +<P> +"Look!" suddenly cried Ned, before Tom had a chance to answer. +"There's a man running away from the shop, Tom!" +</P> + +<P> +All saw him, and, as the airship rushed downward it could be seen that +he was a fellow dressed in ragged garments, a veritable tramp. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess that fire didn't happen," said Tom significantly. "It was +deliberately set. Oh, if we can only get there before it gains too much +headway!" +</P> + +<P> +"I like to catch that fellow!" exclaimed Koku, shaking his big fist at +the retreating tramp. "I fix him!" +</P> + +<P> +On rushed the airship, and the man who had probably started the fire, +glanced up at it. Tom suddenly turned the lens of his Wizard Camera +toward him. The mechanism inside, which had been stopped, started +clicking again, as the young inventor switched on the electric current. +</P> + +<P> +"What are you doing?" cried Ned, as he guided the airship toward the +shop, whence clouds of smoke were rolling. +</P> + +<P> +"Taking his picture," replied Tom. "It may come in useful for evidence." +</P> + +<P> +But he was not able to get many views of the fellow, for the latter +must have suspected what was going on. He quickly made a dive for the +bushes, and was soon lost to sight. Tom shut off his camera. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my life preserver!" cried Mr. Damon. "There comes your father, +Tom, and Mrs. Baggert! They've got buckets! They're going to put out +the fire!" +</P> + +<P> +"Why don't they think to use the hose?" cried the young inventor, for +he had his shop equipped with many hose lines, and an electrically +driven pump. "The hose! The hose, dad!" shouted Tom, but it is doubtful +if his father or Mrs. Baggert heard him, for the engine of the airship +was making much noise. However, the two with the buckets looked up, and +waved their hands to those on the Flyer. +</P> + +<P> +"There's Eradicate!" yelled Ned. "He's got the hose all right!" The +colored man was beginning to unreel a line. +</P> + +<P> +"That's what it needs!" exclaimed Tom. "Now there's some chance to save +the shop." +</P> + +<P> +"We'll be there ourselves to take a hand in a few seconds!" cried Mr. +Damon, forgetting to bless anything. +</P> + +<P> +"The scoundrel who started this fire, and those back of him, ought to +be imprisoned for life!" declared Mr. Nestor. +</P> + +<P> +A moment later Ned had landed the airship within a short distance of +the shop. In an instant the occupants of the craft had leaped out, and +Tom, after a hasty glance to see that his valuable camera was safe, +dashed toward the building crying: +</P> + +<P> +"Never mind the pails, dad! Use the hose! there's a nozzle at the back +door. Go around there, and play the water on from that end." +</P> + +<P> +Eradicate, with his line of hose, had disappeared into the shop through +the front door, and the others pressed in after him, heedless of the +dense smoke. +</P> + +<P> +"Is it blazing much, Rad?" cried Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Can't see no blaze at all, Massa Tom," replied the colored man. +"Dere's a heap of suffin in de middle ob de flo', an' dat's what's +raisin' all de rumpus." +</P> + +<P> +They all saw it a moment later, a smoldering heap of rags and paper on +the concrete floor of the shop. Eradicate turned his hose on it, there +was a hissing sound, a cloud of steam arose, and the fire was +practically out, though much smoke remained. +</P> + +<P> +"Jove! that was a lucky escape!" exclaimed Tom, as he looked around +when the vapor had partly cleared away. "No damage done at all, as far +as I can see. I wonder what the game was? Did you see anything of a +tramp around here?" he asked of his father. +</P> + +<P> +"No, Tom. I have been busy in the house. So has Mrs. Baggert. Suddenly +she called my attention to the smoke coming from the door, and we ran +out." +</P> + +<P> +"I seen it, too," added Eradicate. "I was doin' some whitewashin', an' +I run up as soon as I could." +</P> + +<P> +"We saw the tramp all right, but he got away," said Tom, and he told +how he had taken pictures of him. "I don't believe it would be much use +to look for him now, though." +</P> + +<P> +"Me look," spoke Koku significantly, as he hurried off in the direction +taken by the tramp. He came back later, not having found him. +</P> + +<P> +"What do you think of it, Tom?" asked Ned, when the excitement had +calmed down, and the pile of burned rags had been removed. It was found +that oil and chemicals had been put on them to cause a dense smoke. +</P> + +<P> +"I think it was the work of those fellows who are after my camera," +replied the young inventor. "They are evidently watching me, and when +they saw us all go off in the airship they thought probably that the +coast was clear." +</P> + +<P> +"But why should they start a fire?" +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know, but probably to create a lot of smoke, and excitement, +so that they could search, and not be detected. Maybe the fellow after +he found that the camera was gone, wanted to draw those in the house +out to the shop, so he could have a clear field to search in my room +for any drawings that would give him a clew as to how my machine works. +They certainly did not want to burn the shop, for that pile of rags +could have smoldered all day on the concrete floor, without doing any +harm. Robbery was the motive, I think." +</P> + +<P> +"The police ought to be notified," declared Mr. Nestor. "Develop those +pictures, Tom, and I'll take the matter up with the police. Maybe they +can identify the tramp from the photographs." +</P> + +<P> +But this proved impossible. Tom had secured several good films, not +only in the first views he took, giving the spectators the impression +that they were going up in an airship, but also those showing the shop +on fire, and the tramp running away, were very plain. +</P> + +<P> +The police made a search for the incendiary, but of course did not find +him. Mr. Period came to Shopton, and declared it was his belief that +his rivals, Turbot and Eckert, had had a hand in the matter. But it was +only a suspicion, though Tom himself believed the same thing. Still +nothing could be accomplished. +</P> + +<P> +"The thing to do, now that the camera works all right, is for you to +hit the trail for India at once," suggested the picture man. "They +won't follow you there. Get me some pictures of the Durbar, of +elephants being captured, of tiger fights, anything exciting." +</P> + +<P> +"I'll do my—" began Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Wait, I'm not through," interrupted the excitable man. "Then go get +some volcanoes, earthquakes—anything that you think would be +interesting. I'll keep in touch with you, and cable occasionally. Get +all the films you can. When will you start?" +</P> + +<P> +"I can leave inside of two weeks," replied Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Then do it, and, meanwhile, be on your guard." +</P> + +<P> +It was found that a few changes were needed on the camera, and some +adjustments to the airship. Another trial flight was made, and some +excellent pictures taken. Then Tom and his friends prepared to take the +airship apart, and pack it for shipment to Calcutta. It was to go on +the same steamer as themselves, and of course the Wizard Camera would +accompany Tom. He took along many rolls of films, enough, he thought, +for many views. He was also to send back to Mr. Period from time to +time, the exposed rolls of film, so they could be developed, and +printed in the United States, as Tom would not have very good +facilities for this on the airship, and to reproduce them there was +almost out of the question. Still he did fit up a small dark room +aboard the Flyer, where he could develop pictures if he wished. +</P> + +<P> +There was much to be done, but hard work accomplished it, and finally +the party was ready to start for India. Tom said good-bye to Mary +Nestor, of course, and her father accompanied our hero from the Nestor +house to the Swift homestead, where the start was to take place. +</P> + +<P> +Eradicate bade his master a tearful good-bye, and there was moisture in +the eyes of Mr. Swift, as he shook hands with his son. +</P> + +<P> +"Take care of yourself, Tom," he said. "Don't run too many risks. This +moving picture taking isn't as easy as it sounds. It's more than just +pointing your camera at things. Write if you get a chance, or send me a +message." +</P> + +<P> +Tom promised, and then bade farewell to Mrs. Baggert. All were +assembled, Koku, Mr. Damon, who blessed everything he saw, and some +things he did not, Ned, Mr. Nestor and Tom. The five were to go by +train to New York, there to go aboard the steamer. +</P> + +<P> +Their journey to the metropolis was uneventful. Mr. Period met them at +the steamship dock, after Tom had seen to it that the baggage, and the +parts of the airship were safely aboard. +</P> + +<P> +"I wish I were going along!" exclaimed the picture man. "It's going to +be a great trip. But I can't spare the time. I'm the busiest man in the +world. I lose about a thousand dollars just coming down to see you off, +but it's a good investment. I don't mind it. Now, Tom, good luck, and +don't forget, I want exciting views." +</P> + +<P> +"I'll try—" began our hero. +</P> + +<P> +"Wait, I know what you're going to say!" interrupted Mr. Period. +"You'll do it, of course. Well, I must be going. I will— Great +Scott!" and Mr. Period interrupted himself. "He has the nerve to come +here!" +</P> + +<P> +"Who?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Wilson Turbot, the rascal! He's trying to balk me at the last minute, +I believe. I'm going to see what he means!" and with this, the excited +Mr. Period rushed down the gangplank, toward the man at whom he had +pointed—one of the men who had tried to buy Tom's picture taking +camera. +</P> + +<P> +A moment later the steamer's whistle blew, the last belated passenger +rushed up the gangplank, it was drawn in, and the vessel began to move +away from the dock. Tom and his friends were on their way to India, and +the last glimpse they had of Mr. Period was as he was chasing along the +pier, after Mr. Turbot. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap10"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER X +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +UNEXPECTED EXCITEMENT +</H3> + +<P> +"Well, what do you know about that, Tom?" asked Ned, as they stood on +deck watching the chase. "Isn't he the greatest ever—Mr. Period, I +mean?" +</P> + +<P> +"He certainly is. I'd like to see what happens when he catches that +Turbot chap." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my pocket handkerchief!" cried Mr. Damon. "I don't believe he +will. Mr. Period's legs aren't long enough for fast running." +</P> + +<P> +"Those scoundrels were after us, up to the last minute," spoke Mr. +Nestor, as the ship moved farther out from the dock. Tom and his +friends could no longer see the excitable picture man after his rival, +but there was a commotion in the crowd, and it seemed as if he had +caught the fellow. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, we're free of him now," spoke the young inventor, with a breath +of relief. "That is, unless they have set some one else on our trail," +and he looked carefully at the passengers near him, to detect, if +possible, any who might look like spies in the pay of the rival moving +picture concern, or any suspicious characters who might try to steal +the valuable camera, that was now safely locked in Tom's cabin. Our +hero, however, saw no one to worry about. He resolved to remain on his +guard. +</P> + +<P> +Friends and relatives were waving farewells to one another, and the +band was playing, as the big vessel drew out into the North, or Hudson, +river, and steamed for the open sea. +</P> + +<P> +Little of interest marked the first week of the voyage. All save Koku +had done much traveling before, and it was no novelty to them. The +giant, however, was amused and delighted with everything, even the most +commonplace things he saw. He was a source of wonder to all the other +passengers, and, in a way, he furnished much excitement. +</P> + +<P> +One day several of the sailors were on deck, shifting one of the heavy +anchors. They went about it in their usual way, all taking hold, and +"heaving" together with a "chanty," or song, to enliven their work. But +they did not make much progress, and one of the mates got rather +excited about it. +</P> + +<P> +"Here, shiver my timbers!" he cried. "Lively now! Lay about you, and +get that over to the side!" +</P> + +<P> +"Yo! Heave! Ho!" called the leader of the sailor gang. +</P> + +<P> +The anchor did not move, for it had either caught on some projection, +or the men were not using their strength. +</P> + +<P> +"Lively! Lively!" cried the mate. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly Koku, who was in the crowd of passengers watching the work, +pushed his way to where the anchor lay. With a powerful, but not rough +action, he shoved the sailors aside. Then, stooping over, he took a +firm grip of the big piece of iron, planted his feet well apart on the +deck, and lifted the immense mass in his arms. There was a round of +applause from the group of passengers. +</P> + +<P> +"Where you want him?" Koku calmly asked of the mate, as he stood +holding the anchor. +</P> + +<P> +"Blast my marlin spikes!" cried the mate. "I never see the like of this +afore! Put her over there, shipmate. If I had you on a voyage or two +you'd be running the ship, instead of letting the screw push her along. +Put her over there," and he indicated where he wanted the anchor. +</P> + +<P> +Koku calmly walked along the deck, laid the anchor down as if it was an +ordinary weight, and passed over to where Tom stood looking on in +amused silence. There were murmurs of surprise from the passengers at +the giant's strength, and the sailors went forward much abashed. +</P> + +<P> +"Say, I'd give a good bit to have a bodyguard like that," exclaimed a +well-known millionaire passenger, who, it was reported, was in constant +fear of attacks, though they had never taken place. "I wonder if I +could get him." +</P> + +<P> +He spoke to Tom about it, but our hero would not listen to a +proposition to part with Koku. Besides, it is doubtful if the simple +giant would leave the lad who had brought him away from his South +American home. But, if Koku was wonderfully strong, and, seemingly +afraid of nothing, there were certain things he feared. +</P> + +<P> +One afternoon, for the amusement of the passengers, a net was put +overboard, sunk to a considerable depth, and hauled up with a number of +fishes in it. Some of the finny specimens were good for eating, and +others were freaks, strange and curious. +</P> + +<P> +Koku was in the throng that gathered on deck to look at the haul. +Suddenly a small fish, but very hideous to look at, leaped from the net +and flopped toward the giant. With a scream of fear Koku jumped to one +side, and ran down to his stateroom. He could not be induced to come on +deck until Tom assured him that the fishes had been disposed of. Thus +Koku was a mixture of giant and baby. But he was a general favorite on +the ship, and often gave exhibitions of his strength. +</P> + +<P> +Meanwhile Tom and his friends had been on the lookout for any one who +might be trailing them. But they saw no suspicious characters among the +passengers, and, gradually, they began to feel that they had left their +enemies behind. +</P> + +<P> +The weather was pleasant, and the voyage very enjoyable. Tom and the +others had little to do, and they were getting rather impatient for the +time to come when they could put the airship together, and sail off +over the jungle, to get moving pictures of the elephants. +</P> + +<P> +"Have you any films in the camera now?" asked Ned of his chum on day, +as they sat on deck together. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, it's all ready for instant use. Even the storage battery is +charged. Why?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I was just wondering. I was thinking we might somehow see +something we could take pictures of." +</P> + +<P> +"Not much out here," said Tom, as he looked across the watery expanse. +As he did so, he saw a haze of smoke dead ahead. "We'll pass a steamer +soon," he went on, "but that wouldn't make a good picture. It's too +common." +</P> + +<P> +As the two lads watched, the smoke became blacker, and the cloud it +formed grew much larger. +</P> + +<P> +"They're burning a lot of coal on that ship," remarked Ned. "Must be +trying for a speed record." +</P> + +<P> +A little later a sailor stationed himself in the crow's nest, and +focused a telescope on the smoke. An officer, on deck, seemed to be +waiting for a report from the man aloft. +</P> + +<P> +"That's rather odd," remarked Ned. "I never knew them to take so much +interest in a passing steamer before; and we've gone by several of +late." +</P> + +<P> +"That's right," agreed Tom. "I wonder—" +</P> + +<P> +At that moment the officer, looking up, called out: +</P> + +<P> +"Main top!" +</P> + +<P> +"Aye, aye, sir," answered the sailor with the glass. "She's a small +steamer, sir, and she's on fire!" +</P> + +<P> +"That's what I feared. Come down. I'll tell the captain. We must crowd +on all steam, and go to the rescue." +</P> + +<P> +"Did you hear that?" cried Ned to Tom, as the officer hurried to the +bridge, where the captain awaited him. "A steamer on fire at sea, Tom! +why don't you—" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm going to!" interrupted the young inventor, as he started for his +cabin on the run. "I'm going to get some moving pictures of the rescue! +That will be a film worth having." +</P> + +<P> +A moment later the Belchar, the vessel on which our friends had +embarked, increased her speed, while sudden excitement developed on +board. +</P> + +<P> +As the Belchar approached the burning steamer, which had evidently seen +her, and was making all speed toward her, the cloud of smoke became +more dense, and a dull flame could be seen reflected in the water. +</P> + +<P> +"She's going fast!" cried Mr. Nestor, as he joined Ned on deck. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my insurance policy!" cried Mr. Damon. "What a strange +happening! Where's Tom Swift?" +</P> + +<P> +"Gone for his camera," answered his chum. "He's going to get some +pictures of the rescue." +</P> + +<P> +"All hands man the life boats!" cried an officer, and several sailors +sprang to the davits, ready to lower the boats, when the steamers +should be near enough together. +</P> + +<P> +Up on deck came Tom, with his wonderful camera. +</P> + +<P> +"Here you go, Ned!" he called. "Give me a hand. I'm going to start the +film now." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap11"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XI +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +AN ELEPHANT STAMPEDE +</H3> + +<P> +"Lower away!" +</P> + +<P> +"Stand by the life boats!" +</P> + +<P> +"Let go! Pull hearty!" +</P> + +<P> +These and other commands marked the beginning of the rescue, as the +sailors manned the davit-falls, and put the boats into the water. The +burning steamer had now come to a stop, not far away from the Belchar, +which was also lay-to. There was scarcely any sea running, and no wind, +so that the work of rescuing was not difficult from an ordinary +standpoint. But there was grave danger, because the fire on the doomed +vessel was gaining rapidly. +</P> + +<P> +"That's oil burning," remarked an officer, and it seemed so, from the +dense clouds of smoke that rolled upward. +</P> + +<P> +"Is she working, Tom?" asked Ned, as he helped his chum to hold the +wonderful camera steady on the rail, so that a good view of the burning +steamer could be had. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, the film is running. Say, I wonder if they'll get 'em all off?" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I think so. There aren't many passengers. I guess it's a tramp +freighter." +</P> + +<P> +They could look across the gap of water, and see the terrified +passengers and crew crowding to the rail, holding out their hands +appealingly to the brave sailors who were lustily and rapidly, pulling +toward them in life boats. +</P> + +<P> +At times a swirl of smoke would hide those on the doomed vessel from +the sight of the passengers on the Belchar, and on such occasions the +frightened screams of women could be heard. Once, as the smoke cleared +away, a woman, with a child in her arms, giving a backward glance +toward the flames that were now enveloping the stern of the vessel, +attempted to leap overboard. +</P> + +<P> +Many hands caught her, however, and all this was registered on the film +of Tom's camera, which was working automatically. As the two vessels +drifted along, Tom and Ned shifted the lens so as to keep the burning +steamer, and the approaching lifeboats, in focus. +</P> + +<P> +"There's the first rescue!" cried Ned, as the woman who had attempted +to leap overboard, was, with her child, carefully lowered into a boat. +"Did you get that, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"I certainly did. This will make a good picture. I think I'll send it +back to Mr. Period as soon as we reach port." +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe you could develop it on board here, and show it. I understand +there's a dark room, and the captain said one of his officers, who used +to be in the moving picture business, had a reproducing machine." +</P> + +<P> +"Then that's what I'll do!" cried Tom. "I'll have our captain charge +all the Belchar passengers admission, and we'll get up a fund for the +fire sufferers. They'll probably lose all their baggage." +</P> + +<P> +"That will be great!" exclaimed Ned. +</P> + +<P> +The rescue was now in full swing, and, in a short time all the +passengers and crew had been transferred to the life boats. Tom got a +good picture of the captain of the burning steamer being the last to +leave his vessel. Then the approaching life boats, with their loads of +sailors, and rescued ones, were caught on the films. +</P> + +<P> +"Are you all off?" cried the captain of the Belchar to the unfortunate +skipper of the doomed ship. +</P> + +<P> +"All off, yes, thank you. It is a mercy you were at hand. I have a +cargo of oil. You had better stand off, for she'll explode in a few +minutes." +</P> + +<P> +"I must get a picture of that!" declared Tom as the Belchar got under +way again. "That will cap the climax, and make a film that will be hard +to beat." +</P> + +<P> +A few moments later there was a tremendous explosion on the tramp +oiler. A column of wreckage and black smoke shot skyward, and Tom +secured a fine view of it. Then the wreck disappeared beneath the +waves, while the rescuing steamer sailed on, with those who had been +saved. They had brought off only the things they wore, for the fire had +occurred suddenly, and spread rapidly. Kind persons aboard the Belchar +looked after the unfortunates. Luckily there was not a large passenger +list on the tramp. And the crew was comparatively small, so it was not +hard work to make room for them, or take care of them, aboard the +Belchar. +</P> + +<P> +Tom developed his pictures, and produced them in one of the large +saloons, on a machine he borrowed from the man of whom Ned had spoken. +A dollar admission was charged, and the crowd was so large that Tom had +to give two performances. The films, showing the burning steamer and +the rescue, were excellent, and enough money was realized to aid, most +substantially, the unfortunate passengers and crew. +</P> + +<P> +A few days later a New York bound steamer was spoken, and on it Tom +sent the roll of developed films to Mr. Period, with a letter of +explanation. +</P> + +<P> +I will not give all the details of the rest of the voyage. Sufficient +to say that no accidents marred it, nor did Tom discover any suspicious +characters aboard. In due time our friends arrived at Calcutta, and +were met by an agent of Mr. Period, for he had men in all quarters of +the world, making films for him. +</P> + +<P> +This agent took Tom and his party to a hotel, and arranged to have the +airship parts sent to a large open shed, not far away, where it could +be put together. The wonderful scenes in the Indian city interested Tom +and his companions for a time, but they had observed so many strange +sights from time to time that they did not marvel greatly. Koku, +however, was much delighted. He was like a child. +</P> + +<P> +"What are you going to do first?" asked Ned, when they had recovered +from the fatigue of the ocean voyage and had settled themselves in the +hotel. +</P> + +<P> +"Put the airship together," replied our hero, "and then, after getting +some Durbar pictures, we'll head for the jungle. I want to get some +elephant pictures, showing the big beasts being captured." +</P> + +<P> +Mr. Period's agent was a great help to them in this. He secured native +helpers, who aided Tom in assembling the airship, and in a week or two +it was ready for a flight. The wonderful camera, too, was looked over, +and the picture agent said he had never seen a better one. +</P> + +<P> +"It can take the kind of pictures I never could," he said. "I get +Calcutta street scenes for Mr. Period, and occasionally I strike a good +one. But I wish I had your chance." +</P> + +<P> +Tom invited him to come along in the airship, but the agent, who only +looked after Mr. Period's interests as a side issue, could not leave +his work. +</P> + +<P> +The airship was ready for a flight, stores and provisions had been put +on board, there was enough gasoline for the motor, and gas for the +balloon bag, to carry the Flyer thousands of miles. The moving picture +camera had been tested after the sea voyage, and had been found to work +perfectly. Many rolls of films were taken along. Tom got some fine +views of the Durbar of India, and his airship created a great sensation. +</P> + +<P> +"Now I guess we're all ready for the elephants," said Tom one day as he +came back from an inspection of the airship as it rested in the big +shed. "We'll start to-morrow morning, and head for the jungle." +</P> + +<P> +Amid the cries from a throng of wondering and awed natives, and with +the farewells of Mr. Period's agent ringing in their ears, Tom and his +party made an early start. The Flyer rose like a bird, and shot across +the city, while on the house tops many people watched the strange +sight. Tom did not start his camera working, as Mr. Period's agent said +he had made many pictures of the Indian city, and even one taken from +an airship, would not be much of a novelty. +</P> + +<P> +Tom had made inquiries, and learned that by a day's travel in his +airship (though it would have been much longer ordinarily) he could +reach a jungle where elephants might be found. Of course there was +nothing certain about it, as the big animals roamed all over, being in +one district one day, and on the next, many miles off. +</P> + +<P> +Gradually the city was left behind, and some time later the airship was +sailing along over the jungle. After the start, when Ned and Tom, with +Mr. Damon helping occasionally, had gotten the machinery into proper +adjustment, the Flyer almost ran herself. Then Tom took his station +forward, with his camera in readiness, and a powerful spyglass at hand, +so that he might see the elephants from a distance. +</P> + +<P> +He had been told that, somewhere in the district for which he was +headed, an elephant drive was contemplated. He hoped to be on hand to +get pictures of it, and so sent his airship ahead at top speed. +</P> + +<P> +On and on they rode, being as much at ease in the air as they would +have been if traveling in a parlor car. They did not fly high, as it +was necessary to be fairly close to the earth to get good pictures. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess we won't have any luck to-day," remarked Ned, as night +approached, and they had had no sight of the elephants. They had gone +over mile after mile of jungle, but had seen few wild beasts in +sufficient numbers to make it worth while to focus the camera on them. +</P> + +<P> +"We'll float along to-night," decided Tom, "and try again in the +morning." +</P> + +<P> +It was about ten o'clock the next day, when Ned, who had relieved Tom +on watch, uttered a cry: +</P> + +<P> +"What is it?" asked his chum, as he rushed forward. "Has anything +happened?" +</P> + +<P> +"Lots!" cried Ned. "Look!" He pointed down below. Tom saw, crashing +through the jungle, a big herd of elephants. Behind them, almost +surrounding them, in fact, was a crowd of natives in charge of white +hunters, who were driving the herd toward a stockade. +</P> + +<P> +"There's a chance for a grand picture!" exclaimed Tom, as he got the +camera ready. "Take charge of the ship, Ned. Keep her right over the +big animals, and I'll work the camera." +</P> + +<P> +Quickly he focused the lens on the strange scene below him. There was +a riot of trumpeting from the elephants. The beaters and hunters +shouted and yelled. Then they saw the airship and waved their hands to +Tom and his friends, but whether to welcome them, or warn them away, +could not be told. +</P> + +<P> +The elephants were slowly advancing toward the stockade. Tom was taking +picture after picture of them, when suddenly as the airship came lower, +in response to a signal to Ned from the young inventor, one of the huge +pachyderms looked up, and saw the strange sight. He might have taken it +for an immense bird. At any rate he gave a trumpet of alarm, and the +next minute, with screams of rage and fear, the elephants turned, and +charged in a wild stampede on those who were driving them toward the +stockade. +</P> + +<P> +"Look!" cried Ned. "Those hunters and natives will be killed!" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm afraid so!" shouted Tom, as he continued to focus his camera on +the wonderful sight. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap12"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE LION FIGHT +</H3> + +<P> +Crashing through the jungle the huge beasts turned against those who +had, been driving them on toward the stockade. With wild shouts and +yells, the hunters and their native helpers tried to turn back the +elephant tide, but it was useless. The animals had been frightened by +the airship, and were following their leader, a big bull, that went +crashing against great trees, snapping them off as if they were pipe +stems. +</P> + +<P> +"Say, this is something like!" cried Ned, as he guided the airship over +the closely packed body of elephants, so Tom could get good pictures, +for the herd had divided, and a small number had gone off with one of +the other bulls. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I'll get some great pictures," agreed Tom, as he looked in +through a red covered opening in the camera, to see how much film was +left. +</P> + +<P> +The airship was now so low down that Tom, and the others, could easily +make out the faces of the hunters, and the native helpers. One of the +hunters, evidently the chief, shaking his fist at our hero, cried: +</P> + +<P> +"Can't you take your blooming ship out of the way, my man? It's scaring +the beasts, and we've been a couple of weeks on this drive. We don't +want to lose all our work. Take your bloody ship away!" +</P> + +<P> +"I guess he must be an Englishman," remarked Mr. Nestor, with a laugh. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my dictionary, I should say so," agreed Mr. Damon. "Bloody, +blooming ship! The idea!" +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I suppose we have scared the beasts," said Tom. "We ought to get +out of the way. Put her up, Ned, and we'll come down some distance in +advance." +</P> + +<P> +"Why, aren't you going to take any more views of the elephants?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, but I've got enough of a view from above. Besides, I've got to +put in a fresh reel of film, and I might as well get out of their sight +to do it. Maybe that will quiet them, and the hunters can turn them +back toward the stockade. If they do, I have another plan." +</P> + +<P> +"What is it?" his chum wanted to know. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm going to make a landing, set up my camera at the entrance to the +stockade, and get a series of pictures as the animals come in. I think +that will be a novelty. +</P> + +<P> +"That certainly will," agreed Mr. Nestor. "I am sure Mr. Period will +appreciate that. But won't it be dangerous, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"I suppose so, but I'm getting used to danger," replied our hero, with +a laugh. +</P> + +<P> +Ned put the ship high into the air, as Tom shut off the power from the +camera. Then the Flyer was sent well on in advance of the stampede of +elephants, so they could no longer see it, or hear the throb of the +powerful engines. Tom hoped that this would serve to quiet the immense +creatures. +</P> + +<P> +As the travelers flew on, over the jungle, they could still hear the +racket made by the hunters and beaters, and the shrill trumpeting of +the elephants, as they crashed through the forest. +</P> + +<P> +Tom at once began changing the film in the camera, and Ned altered the +course of the airship, to send it back toward the stockade, which they +had passed just before coming upon the herd of elephants. +</P> + +<P> +I presume most of my readers know what an elephant drive is like. A +stockade, consisting of heavy trees, is made in the jungle. It is like +the old fashioned forts our forefathers used to make, for a defense +against the Indians. There is a broad entrance to it, and, when all is +in readiness, the beaters go out into the jungle, with the white +hunters, to round up the elephants. A number of tame pachyderms are +taken along to persuade the wild ones to follow. +</P> + +<P> +Gradually the elephants are gathered together in a large body, and +gently driven toward the stockade. The tame elephants go in first, and +the others follow. Then the entrance is closed, and all that remains to +be done is to tame the wild beasts, a not very easy task. +</P> + +<P> +"Are you all ready?" asked Ned, after a bit, as he saw Tom come forward +with the camera. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I'm loaded for some more excitement. You can put me right over +the stockade now, Ned, and when we see the herd coming back I'll go +down, and take some views from the ground." +</P> + +<P> +"I think they've got 'em turned," said Mr. Damon. "It sounds as if they +were coming back this way." +</P> + +<P> +A moment later they had a glimpse of the herd down below. It was true +that the hunters had succeeded in stopping the stampede, and once more +the huge beasts were going in the right direction. +</P> + +<P> +"There's a good place to make a landing," suggested Tom, as he saw a +comparatively clear place in the jungle. "It's near the stockade, and, +in case of danger, I can make a quick get-away." +</P> + +<P> +"What kind of danger are you looking for?" asked Ned, as he shifted the +deflecting rudder. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, one of the beasts might take a notion to chase me." +</P> + +<P> +The landing was made, and Tom, taking Ned and Mr. Nestor with him, and +leaving the others to manage the airship in case a quick flight would +be necessary, made his way along a jungle trail to the entrance to the +stockade. He carried his camera with him, for it was not heavy. +</P> + +<P> +On came the elephants, frightened by the shouts and cries of the +beaters, and the firing of guns. The young inventor took his place near +the stockade entrance, and, as the elephants advanced through the +forest, tearing up trees and bushes, Tom got some good pictures of them. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly the advance of the brutes was checked, and the foremost of +them raised their trunks, trumpeted in anger, and were about to turn +back again. +</P> + +<P> +"Get away from that bloomin' gate!" shouted a hunter to Tom. "You're +scaring them as bad as your airship did." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, they won't go in with you there!" added another man. +</P> + +<P> +Tom slipped around the corner of the stockade, out of sight, and from +that vantage point he took scores of pictures, as the tame animals led +the wild ones into the fenced enclosure. Then began another wild scene +as the gate was closed. +</P> + +<P> +The terrified animals rushed about, trying in vain to find a way of +escape. Tom managed to climb up on top of the logs, and got some +splendid pictures. But this was nearly his undoing. For, just as the +last elephant rushed in, a big bull charged against the stockade, and +jarred Tom so that he was on the point of falling. His one thought was +about his camera, and he looked to see if he could drop it on the soft +grass, so it would not be damaged. +</P> + +<P> +He saw Koku standing below him, the giant having slipped out of the +airship, to see the beasts at closer range. +</P> + +<P> +"Catch this, Koku!" cried Tom, tossing the big man his precious camera, +and the giant caught it safely. But Tom's troubles were not over. A +moment later, as the huge elephant again rammed the fence, Tom fell +off, but fortunately outside. Then the large beast, seeing a small +opening in the gate that was not yet entirely closed, made for it. A +moment later he was rushing straight at Tom, who was somewhat stunned +by his fall, though it was not a severe one. +</P> + +<P> +"Look out!" yelled Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Take a tree, Tom!" cried Mr. Nestor. +</P> + +<P> +The elephant paid no attention to any one but Tom, whom he seemed to +think had caused all his trouble. The young inventor dashed to one +side, and then started to run toward the airship, for which Ned and Mr. +Nestor were already making. The elephant hunters at last succeeded in +closing the gate, blocking the chance of any more animals to escape. +</P> + +<P> +"Run, Tom! Run!" yelled Ned, and Tom ran as he had never run before. +The elephant was close after him though, crashing through the jungle. +Tom could see the airship just ahead of him. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly he felt something grasp him from behind. He thought surely it +was the elephant's trunk, but a quick glance over his shoulder showed +him the friendly face of Koku, the giant. +</P> + +<P> +"Me run for you," said Koku, as he caught Tom up under one arm, and, +carrying the camera under the other, he set off at top speed. Now Koku +could run well at times, and this time he did. He easily outdistanced +the elephant, and, a little later, he set Tom down on the deck of the +airship, with the camera beside him. Then Ned and Mr. Nestor came up +panting, having run to one side. +</P> + +<P> +"Quick!" cried Tom. "We must get away before the elephant charges the +Flyer." +</P> + +<P> +"He has stopped," shouted Mr. Nestor, and it was indeed so. The big +beast, seeing again the strange craft that had frightened him before, +stood still for a moment, and then plunged off into the jungle, +trumpeting with rage. +</P> + +<P> +"Safe!" gasped Tom, as he looked at his camera to see if it had been +damaged. It seemed all right. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my latch key!" cried Mr. Damon. "This moving picture business +isn't the most peaceful one in the world." +</P> + +<P> +"No, it has plenty of perils," agreed Mr. Nestor. +</P> + +<P> +"Come on, let's get out of here while we have the chance," suggested +Tom. "There may be another herd upon us before we know it." +</P> + +<P> +The airship was soon ascending, and Tom and his companions could look +down and see the tame elephants in the stockade trying to calm the wild +ones. Then the scene faded from sight. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, if these pictures come out all right I'll have some fine ones," +exclaimed Tom as he carried his camera to the room where he kept the +films. "I fancy an elephant drive and stampede are novelties in this +line." +</P> + +<P> +"Indeed they are," agreed Mr. Nestor. "Mr. Period made no mistake when +he picked you out, Tom, for this work. What are you going to try for +next?" +</P> + +<P> +"I'd like to get some lion and tiger pictures," said the young +inventor. "I understand this is a good district for that. As soon as +those elephants get quieted down, I'm going back to the stockade and +have a talk with the hunters." +</P> + +<P> +This he did, circling about in the airship until nearly evening. When +they again approached the stockade all was quiet, and they came to +earth. A native showed them where the white hunters had their +headquarters, in some bungalows, and Tom and his party were made +welcome. They apologized for frightening the big beasts, and the +hunters accepted their excuses. +</P> + +<P> +"As long as we got 'em, it's all right," said the head man, "though for +awhile, I didn't like your bloomin' machine." Tom entertained the +hunters aboard his craft, at which they marvelled much, and they gave +him all the information they had about the lions and tigers in the +vicinity. +</P> + +<P> +"You won't find lions and tigers in herds, like elephants though," said +the head hunter. "And you may have to photograph 'em at night, as then +is when they come out to hunt, and drink." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I can take pictures at night," said Tom, as he showed his camera +apparatus. +</P> + +<P> +The next day, in the airship, they left for another district, where, so +the natives reported, several lions had been seen of late. They had +done much damage, too, carrying off the native cattle, and killing +several Indians. +</P> + +<P> +For nearly a week Tom circled about in his airship, keeping a sharp +lookout down below for a sign of lions that he might photograph them. +But he saw none, though he did get some pictures of a herd of Indian +deer that were well worth his trouble. +</P> + +<P> +"I think I'll have to try for a night photograph," decided Tom at last. +"I'll locate a spring where wild beasts are in the habit of coming, set +the camera with the light going, and leave it there." +</P> + +<P> +"But will the lions come up if they see the light?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"I think so," replied his chum. "I'll take a chance, anyhow. If that +doesn't work then I'll hide near by, and see what happens." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my cartridge belt!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't mean that; do +you Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"Of course. Come to think of it, I'm not going to leave my camera out +there for a lion to jump on, and break. As soon as I get a series of +pictures I'll bring it back to the ship, I think." +</P> + +<P> +By inquiry among the natives they learned the location of a spring +where, it was said, lions were in the habit of coming nightly to drink. +</P> + +<P> +"That's the place I want!" cried Tom. +</P> + +<P> +Accordingly the airship was headed for it, and one evening it came +gently to earth in a little clearing on the edge of the jungle, while +Koku, as was his habit, got supper. +</P> + +<P> +After the meal Tom and Ned set the camera, and then, picking out a good +spot nearby, they hid themselves to wait for what might happen. The +lens was focused on the spring, and the powerful electric light set +going. It glowed brightly, and our hero thought it might have the +effect of keeping the beasts away, but Tom figured that, after they had +looked at it for a while, and seen that it did not harm them, they +would lose their suspicions, and come within range of his machine. +</P> + +<P> +"The camera will do the rest," he said. In order not to waste films +uselessly Tom arranged a long electric wire, running it from the camera +to where he and Ned were hid. By pressing a button he could start or +stop the camera any time he wished, and, as he had a view of the spring +from his vantage point, he could have the apparatus begin taking +pictures as soon as there was some animal within focus. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I'm getting stiff," said Ned, after an hour or so had passed in +silent darkness, the only light being the distant one on the camera. +</P> + +<P> +"So am I," said Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't believe anything will come to-night," went on his chum. "Let's +go back and—" +</P> + +<P> +He stopped suddenly, for there was a crackling in the underbrush, and +the next moment the jungle vibrated to the mighty roar of a lion. +</P> + +<P> +"He's coming!" hoarsely whispered Tom. +</P> + +<P> +Both lads glanced through the trees toward the camera, and, in the +light, they saw a magnificent, tawny beast standing on the edge of the +spring. Once more he roared, as if in defiance, and then, as if +deciding that the light was not harmful, he stooped to lap up the water. +</P> + +<P> +Hardly had he done so than there was another roar, and a moment later a +second lion leaped from the dense jungle into the clearing about the +spring. The two monarchs of the forest stood there in the glare of the +light, and Tom excitedly pressed the button that started the shutter to +working, and the film to moving back of the lens. +</P> + +<P> +There was a slight clicking sound in the camera, and the lions turned +startedly. Then both growled again, and the next instant they sprang at +each other, roaring mightily. +</P> + +<P> +"A fight!" cried Tom. "A lion fight, and right in front of my camera! +It couldn't be better. This is great! This will be a film." +</P> + +<P> +"Quiet!" begged Ned. "They'll hear you, and come for us. I don't want +to be chewed up!" +</P> + +<P> +"No danger of them hearing me!" cried Tom, and he had to shout to be +heard above the roaring of the two tawny beasts, as they bit and clawed +each other, while the camera took picture after picture of them. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap13"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XIII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +A SHOT IN TIME +</H3> + +<P> +"Tom, did you ever see anything like it in your life?" +</P> + +<P> +"I never did, Ned! It's wonderful! fearful! And to think that we are +here watching it, and that thousands of people will see the same thing +thrown on a screen. Oh, look at the big one. The small lion has him +down!" +</P> + +<P> +The two lads, much thrilled, crouched down behind a screen of bushes, +watching the midnight fight between the lions. On the airship, not far +distant, there was no little alarm, for those left behind heard the +terrific roars, and feared Tom and Ned might be in some danger. But the +lions were too much occupied with their battle, to pay any attention to +anything else, and no other wild beasts were likely to come to the +spring while the two "kings" were at each other. +</P> + +<P> +It was a magnificent, but terrible battle. The big cats bit and tore at +each other, using their terrific claws and their powerful paws, one +stroke of which is said to be sufficient to break a bullock's back. +Sometimes they would roll out of the focus of the camera, and, at such +times, Tom wished he was at the machine to swing the lens around, but +he knew it would be dangerous to move. Then the beasts would roll back +into the rays of light again, and more pictures of them would be taken. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess the small one is going to win!" said Tom, after the two lions +had fought for ten minutes, and the bigger one had been down several +times. +</P> + +<P> +"He's younger," agreed Ned, "and I guess the other one has had his +share of fights. Maybe this is a battle to see which one is to rule +this part of the jungle." +</P> + +<P> +"I guess so," spoke the young inventor, as he pressed the button to +stop the camera, as the lions rolled out of focus. "Oh, look!" he cried +a moment later, as the animals again rolled into view. Tom started the +camera once more. "This is near the end," he said. +</P> + +<P> +The small lion had, by a sudden spring, landed on the back of his +rival. There was a terrific struggle, and the older beast went down, +the younger one clawing him terribly. Then, so quickly did it happen +that the boys could not take in all the details, the older lion rolled +over and over, and rid himself of his antagonist. Quickly he got to his +feet, while the smaller lion did the same. They stood for a moment +eyeing each other, their tails twitching, the hair on their backs +bristling, and all the while they uttered frightful roars. +</P> + +<P> +An instant later the larger beast sprang toward his rival. One terrible +paw was upraised. The small lion tried to dodge, but was not quick +enough. Down came the paw with terrific force, and the boys could hear +the back bone snap. Then, clawing his antagonist terribly, as he lay +disabled, the older lion, with a roar of triumph, lapped up water, and +sprang off through the jungle, leaving his dying rival beside the +spring. +</P> + +<P> +"That's the end," cried Tom, as the small lion died, and the young +inventor pressed the button stopping his camera. There was a rustle in +the leaves back of Tom and Ned, and they sprang up in alarm, but they +need not have feared, for it was only Koku, the giant, who, with a +portable electrical torch, had come to see how they had fared. +</P> + +<P> +"Mr. Tom all right?" asked the big man, anxiously. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, and I got some fine pictures. You can carry the camera back now, +Koku. I think that roll of film is pretty well filled." +</P> + +<P> +The three of them looked at the body of the dead lion, before they went +back to the airship. I have called him "small," but, in reality, the +beast was small only in comparison with his rival, who was a tremendous +lion in size. I might add that of all the pictures Tom took, few were +more highly prized than that reel of the lion fight. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my bear cage!" cried Mr. Damon, as Tom came back, "you certainly +have nerve, my boy." +</P> + +<P> +"You have to, in this business," agreed Tom with a laugh. "I never did +this before, and I don't know that I would want it for a steady +position, but it's exciting for a change." +</P> + +<P> +They remained near the "lion spring" as they called it all night, and +in the morning, after Koku had served a tasty breakfast, Tom headed the +airship for a district where it was said there were many antelope, and +buffaloes, also zebus. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't want to get all exciting pictures," our hero said to Mr. +Nestor. "I think that films showing wild animals at play, or quietly +feeding, will be good." +</P> + +<P> +"I'm sure they will," said Mary's father. "Get some peaceful scenes, by +all means." +</P> + +<P> +They sailed on for several days, taking a number of pictures from the +airship, when they passed over a part of the country where the view was +magnificent, and finally, stopping at a good sized village they learned +that, about ten miles out, was a district where antelope abounded. +</P> + +<P> +"We'll go there," decided Tom, "and I'll take the camera around with me +on a sort of walking trip. In that way I'll get a variety of views, and +I can make a good film." +</P> + +<P> +This plan was followed out. The airship came to rest in a beautiful +green valley, and Ned and Tom, with Mr. Damon, who begged to be taken +along, started off. +</P> + +<P> +"You can follow me in about half an hour, Koku," said Tom, "and carry +the camera back. I guess you can easily pick up our trail." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, sure," replied the giant. Indeed, to one who had lived in the +forest, as he had all his life, before Tom found him, it was no +difficult matter to follow a trail, such as the three friends would +leave. +</P> + +<P> +Tom found signs that showed him where the antelopes were in the habit +of passing, and, with Ned and Mr. Damon, stationed himself in a +secluded spot. +</P> + +<P> +He had not long to wait before a herd of deer came past. Tom took many +pictures of the graceful creatures, for it was daylight now, and he +needed no light. Consequently there was nothing to alarm the herd. +</P> + +<P> +After having made several films of the antelope, Tom and his two +companions went farther on. They were fortunate enough to find a place +that seemed to be a regular playground of the deer. There was a large +herd there, and, getting as near as he dared, Tom focused his camera, +and began taking pictures. +</P> + +<P> +"It's as good as a play," whispered Mr. Damon, as he and Ned watched +the creatures, for they had to speak quietly. The camera made scarcely +any noise. "I'm glad I came on this trip." +</P> + +<P> +"So am I," said Ned. "Look, Tom, see the mother deer all together, and +the fawns near them. It's just as if it was a kindergarten meeting." +</P> + +<P> +"I see," whispered Tom. "I'm getting a picture of that." +</P> + +<P> +For some little time longer Tom photographed the deer, and then, +suddenly, the timid creatures all at once lifted up their heads, and +darted off. Tom and Ned, wondering what had startled them, looked +across the glade just in time to see a big tiger leap out of the tall +grass. The striped animal had been stalking the antelope, but they had +scented him just in time. +</P> + +<P> +"Get him, Tom," urged Ned, and the young inventor did so, securing +several fine views before the tiger bounded into the grass again, and +took after his prey. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my china teacup! What's that!" suddenly cried Mr. Damon. As he +spoke there was a crashing in the bushes and, an instant later as +two-horned rhinoceros sprang into view, charging straight for the group. +</P> + +<P> +"Look out!" yelled Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my—" began Mr. Damon, but he did not finish, for, in starting +to run his foot caught in the grass, and he went down heavily. +</P> + +<P> +Tom leaped to one side, holding his camera so as not to damage it. But +he stumbled over Mr. Damon, and went down. +</P> + +<P> +With a "wuff" of rage the clumsy beast, came on, moving more rapidly +than Tom had any idea he was capable of. Hampered by his camera our +hero could not arise. The rhinoceros was almost upon him, and Ned, +catching up a club, was just going to make a rush to the rescue, when +the brute seemed suddenly to crumple up. It fell down in a heap, not +five feet from where Tom and Mr. Damon lay. +</P> + +<P> +"Good!" cried Ned. "He's dead. Shot through the heart! Who did it?" +</P> + +<P> +"I did," answered Koku quietly, stepping out of the bushes, with one of +Tom's Swift's electric rifles in his hand. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap14"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XIV +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +IN A GREAT GALE +</H3> + +<P> +Tom Swift rose slowly to his feet, carefully setting his camera down, +after making sure that it was not injured. Then he looked at the huge +beast which lay dead in front of him, and, going over to the giant he +held out his hand to him. +</P> + +<P> +"Koku, you saved my life," spoke Tom. "Probably the life of Mr. Damon +also. I can't begin to thank you. It isn't the first time you've done +it, either. But I want to say that you can have anything you want, that +I've got." +</P> + +<P> +"Me like this gun pretty much," said the giant simply. +</P> + +<P> +"Then it's yours!" exclaimed Tom. "And you're the only one, except +myself, who has ever owned one." Tom's wonderful electric rifle, of +which I have told you in the book bearing that name, was one of his +most cherished inventions. +</P> + +<P> +He guarded jealously the secret of how it worked, and never sold or +gave one away, for fear that unscrupulous men might learn how to make +them, and to cause fearful havoc. For the rifle was a terrible weapon. +Koku seemed to appreciate the honor done him, as he handled the gun, +and looked from it to the dead rhinoceros. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my blank cartridge!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, as he also got up and +came to examine the dead beast. It was the first thing he had said +since the animal had rushed at him, and he had not moved after he fell +down. He had seemingly been in a daze, but when the others heard him +use one of his favorite expressions they knew that he was all right +again. "Bless my hat!" went on the odd man. "What happened, Tom? Is +that beast really dead? How did Koku come to arrive in time?" +</P> + +<P> +"I guess he's dead all right," said Tom, giving the rhinoceros a kick. +"But I don't know how Koku happened to arrive in the nick of time, and +with the gun, too." +</P> + +<P> +"I think maybe I see something to shoot when I come after you, like you +tell me to do," spoke the giant. "I follow your trail, but I see +nothing to shoot until I come here. Then I see that animal run for you, +and I shoot." +</P> + +<P> +"And a good thing you did, too," put in Ned. "Well let's go back. My +nerves are on edge, and I want to sit quiet for a while." +</P> + +<P> +"Take the camera, Koku," ordered Tom, "and I'll carry the electric +rifle—your rifle, now," he added, and the giant grinned in delight. +They reached the airship without further incident, and, after a cup of +tea, Tom took out the exposed films and put a fresh roll in his camera, +ready for whatever new might happen. +</P> + +<P> +"Where is your next stopping place, Tom?" asked Ned, as they sat in the +main room of the airship that evening, talking over the events of the +day. They had decided to stay all night anchored on the ground, and +start off in the morning. +</P> + +<P> +"I hardly know," answered the young inventor. "I am going to set the +camera to-night, near a small spring I saw, to get some pictures of +deer coming to drink. I may get a picture of a lion or a tiger +attacking them. If I could it would be another fine film. To-morrow I +think we will start for Switzerland. But now I'm going to get the +camera ready for a night exposure. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my check book!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't mean to say that you +are going to stay out at a spring again, Tom, and run the chance of a +tiger getting you." +</P> + +<P> +"No, I'm merely going to set the camera, attach the light and let it +work automatically this time. I've put in an extra long roll of film, +for I'm going to keep it going for a long while, and part of the time +there may be no animals there to take pictures of. No, I'm not going to +sit out to-night. I'm too tired. I'll conceal the camera in the bushes +so it won't be damaged if there's a fight. Then, as I said, we'll start +for Switzerland to-morrow." +</P> + +<P> +"Switzerland!" cried Ned. "What in the world do you want to go make a +big jump like that for? And what do you expect to get in that mountain +land?" +</P> + +<P> +"I'm going to try for a picture of an avalanche," said Tom. "Mr. +Period wants one, if I can get it. It is quite a jump, but then we'll +be flying over civilized countries most of the time, and if any +accident happens we can go down and easily make repairs. We can also +get gasolene for the motor, though I have quite a supply in the tanks, +and perhaps enough for the entire trip. At the same time we won't take +any chances. So we'll be off for Switzerland in the morning. +</P> + +<P> +"I think some avalanche pictures will be great, if you can get them," +remarked Mr. Nestor. "But, Tom, you know those big slides of ice, snow +and earth aren't made to order." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I know," agreed the young inventor with a smile. "I'll just have +to take my chances, and wait until one happens." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my insurance policy!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "And when it does +happen, Tom, are you going to stand in front of it, and snap-shot it?" +</P> + +<P> +"Indeed I'm not. This business is risky and dangerous enough, without +looking for trouble. I'm going to the mountain region, and hover around +in the air, until we see an avalanche 'happen' if that is the right +word. Then I'll focus the camera on it, and the films and machinery +will do the rest." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, that's different," remarked the odd man, with an air of relief. +</P> + +<P> +Tom and Ned soon had the camera set near the spring and then, everyone +being tired with the day's work and excitement, they retired. In the +morning there were signs around the spring that many animals had been +there in the night. There were also marks as if there had been a fight, +but of course what sort, or how desperate, no one could say. +</P> + +<P> +"If anything happened the camera got it, I'm sure of that much," +remarked Tom, as he brought in the apparatus. "I'm not going to develop +the roll, for I don't want to take the time now. I guess we must have +something, anyhow." +</P> + +<P> +"If there isn't it won't so much matter for you have plenty of other +good views," said Mr. Nestor. +</P> + +<P> +I will not go into details of the long trip to Switzerland, where, amid +the mountains of that country, Tom hoped to get the view he wanted. +</P> + +<P> +Sufficient to say that the airship made good time after leaving India. +Sometimes Tom sent the craft low down, in order to get views, and +again, it would be above the clouds. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, another day will bring us there," said Tom one evening, as he +was loading the camera with a fresh roll of films. "Then we'll have to +be on the lookout for an avalanche." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, we're making pretty good time," remarked Ned, as he looked at the +speed gage. "I didn't know you had the motor working so fast, Tom." +</P> + +<P> +"I haven't," was the young inventor's answer, as he looked up in +surprise. "Why, we are going quite fast! It's the wind, Ned. It's +right with us, and it's carrying us along." +</P> + +<P> +Tom arose and went to the anemometer, or wind-registering instrument. +He gave a low whistle, half of alarm. +</P> + +<P> +"Fifty miles an hour she's blowing now," he said. "It came on suddenly, +too, for a little while ago it was only ten." +</P> + +<P> +"Is there any danger?" asked Mr. Nestor, for he was not very familiar +with airship perils. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, we've been in big blows before, and we generally came out all +right," returned Tom. "Still, I don't like this. Why she went up five +points since I've been looking at it!" and he pointed to the needle of +the gage, which now registered fifty-five miles an hour. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my appendix!" gasped Mr. Damon. "It's a hurricane Tom!" +</P> + +<P> +"Something like that," put in Ned, in a low voice. +</P> + +<P> +With a suddenness that was startling, the wind increased in violence +still more. Tom ran to the pilot house. +</P> + +<P> +"What are you going to do?" Ned called. +</P> + +<P> +"See if we can't go down a bit," was Tom's answer. "I don't like this. +It may be calmer below. We're up too high as it is." +</P> + +<P> +He tried to throw over the lever controlling the deflecting rudder, +which would send the Flyer down, but he could not move it. +</P> + +<P> +"Give me a hand!" he called to Ned, but even the strength of the two +lads was not sufficient to shift it. +</P> + +<P> +"Call Koku!" gasped Tom. "If anybody can budge it the giant can!" +</P> + +<P> +Meanwhile the airship was being carried onward in the grip of a mighty +wind, so strong that its pressure on the surface of the deflecting +rudder prevented it from being shifted. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap15"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XV +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +SNAPPING AN AVALANCHE +</H3> + +<P> +"Bless my thermometer!" gasped Mr. Damon. "This is terrible!" The +airship was plunging and swaying about in the awful gale. "Can't +something be done, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"What has happened?" cried Mr. Nestor. "We were on a level keel before. +What is it?" +</P> + +<P> +"It's the automatic balancing rudder!" answered Tom. "Something has +happened to it. The wind may have broken it! Come on, Ned!" and he led +the way to the engine room. +</P> + +<P> +"What are you going to do? Don't you want Koku to shift the deflecting +rudder? Here he is," Ned added, as the giant came forward, in response +to a signal bell that Tom's chum had rung. +</P> + +<P> +"It's too late to try the deflecting rudder!" tried Tom. "I must see +what is the matter with our balancer." As he spoke the ship gave a +terrific plunge, and the occupants were thrown sideways. The next +moment it was on a level keel again, scudding along with the gale, but +there was no telling when the craft would again nearly capsize. +</P> + +<P> +Tom looked at the mechanism controlling the equalizing and equilibrium +rudder. It was out of order, and he guessed that the terrific wind was +responsible for it. +</P> + +<P> +"What can we do?" cried Ned, as the airship nearly rolled over. "Can't +we do anything, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. I'm going to try. Keep calm now. We may come out all right. This +is the worst blow we've been in since we were in Russia. Start the gas +machine full blast. I want all the vapor I can get." +</P> + +<P> +As I have explained the Flyer was a combined dirigible balloon and +aeroplane. It could be used as either, or both, in combination. At +present the gas bag was not fully inflated, and Tom had been sending +his craft along as an aeroplane. +</P> + +<P> +"What are you going to do?" cried Ned, as he pulled over the lever that +set the gas generating machine in operation. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm going up as high as I can go!" cried Tom. "If we can't go down we +must go up. I'll get above the hurricane instead of below it. Give me +all the gas you can, Ned!" +</P> + +<P> +The vapor hissed as it rushed into the big bag overhead. Tom carried +aboard his craft the chemicals needed to generate the powerful lifting +gas, of which he alone had the secret. It was more powerful than +hydrogen, and simple to make. The balloon of the Flyer was now being +distended. +</P> + +<P> +Meanwhile Tom, with Koku, Mr. Damon and Mr. Nestor to help him, worked +over the deflecting rudder, and also on the equilibrium mechanism. But +they could not get either to operate. +</P> + +<P> +Ned stood by the gas machine, and worked it to the limit. But even with +all that energy, so powerful was the wind, that the Flyer rose slowly, +the gale actually holding her down as a water-logged craft is held +below the waves. Ordinarily, with the gas machine set at its limit the +craft would have shot up rapidly. +</P> + +<P> +At times the airship would skim along on the level, and again it would +be pitched and tossed about, until it was all the occupants could do to +keep their feet. Mr. Damon was continually blessing everything he could +remember. +</P> + +<P> +"Now she's going!" suddenly cried Ned, as he looked at the dials +registering the pressure of the gas, and showing the height of the +airship above the earth. +</P> + +<P> +"Going how?" gasped Tom, as he looked over from where he was working at +the equilibrium apparatus. "Going down?" +</P> + +<P> +"Going up!" shouted Ned. "I guess we'll be all right soon!" +</P> + +<P> +It was true. Now that the bag was filled with the powerful lifting gas, +under pressure, the Flyer was beginning to get out of the dangerous +predicament into which the gale had blown her. Up and up she went, and +every foot she climbed the power of the wind became less. +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe it all happened for the best," said Tom, as he noted the height +gage. "If we had gone down, the wind might have been worse nearer the +earth." +</P> + +<P> +Later they learned that this was so. The most destructive wind storm +ever known swept across the southern part of Europe, over which they +were flying that night, and, had the airship gone down, she would +probably have been destroyed. But, going up, she got above the +wind-strata. Up and up she climbed, until, when three miles above the +earth, she was in a calm zone. It was rather hard to breathe at this +height, and Tom set the oxygen apparatus at work. +</P> + +<P> +This created in the interior of the craft an atmosphere almost like +that on the earth, and the travelers were made more at their ease. +Getting out of the terrible wind pressure made it possible to work the +deflecting rudder, though Tom had no idea of going down, as long as the +blow lasted. +</P> + +<P> +"We'll just sail along at this height until morning," he said, "and by +then the gale may be over, or we may be beyond the zone of it. Start +the propellers, Ned. I think I can manage to repair the equilibrium +rudder now." +</P> + +<P> +The propellers, which gave the forward motion to the airship, had been +stopped when it was found that the wind was carrying her along, but +they were now put in motion again, sending the Flyer forward. In a +short time Tom had the equilibrium machine in order, and matters were +now normal again. +</P> + +<P> +"But that was a strenuous time while it lasted," remarked the young +inventor, as he sat down. +</P> + +<P> +"It sure was," agreed Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my pen wiper!" cried Mr. Damon. "That was one of the few times +when I wish I'd never come with you, Tom Swift," and everyone laughed +at that. +</P> + +<P> +The Flyer was now out of danger, going along high in the air through +the night, while the gale raged below her. At Tom's suggestion, Koku +got a lunch ready, for they were all tired with their labors, and +somewhat nervous from the danger and excitement. +</P> + +<P> +"And now for sleep!" exclaimed Tom, as he pushed back his plate. "Ned, +set the automatic steering gear, and we'll see where we bring up by +morning." +</P> + +<P> +An examination, through a powerful telescope in the bright light of +morning, showed the travelers that they were over the outskirts of a +large city, which, later, they learned was Rome, Italy. +</P> + +<P> +"We've made a good trip," said Tom. "The gale had us worried, but it +sent us along at a lively clip. Now for Switzerland, and the +avalanches!" +</P> + +<P> +They made a landing at a village just outside the "Holy City," as Rome +is often called, and renewed their supply of gasolene. Naturally they +attracted a crowd of curious persons, many of whom had never seen an +airship before. Certainly few of them had ever seen one like Tom +Swift's. +</P> + +<P> +The next day found them hovering over the Alps, where Tom hoped to be +able to get the pictures of snow slides. They went down to earth at a +town near one of the big mountain ranges, and there made inquiries as +to where would be the best location to look for big avalanches. If they +went but a few miles to the north, they were told, they would be in the +desired region, and they departed for that vicinity. +</P> + +<P> +"And now we've just got to take our time, and wait for an avalanche to +happen," remarked Tom, as they were flying along over the mountain +ranges. "As Mr. Damon said, these things aren't made to order. They +just happen." +</P> + +<P> +For three days they sailed in and out over the great snow-covered peaks +of the Alps. They did not go high up, for they wanted to be near earth +when an avalanche would occur, so that near-view pictures could be +secured. Occasionally they saw parties of mountain climbers ascending +some celebrated peak, and for want of something better to photograph, +Tom "snapped" the tourists. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess they're all out of avalanches this season," remarked Ned +one afternoon, when they had circled back and forth over a mountain +where, so it was said, the big snow slides were frequent. +</P> + +<P> +"It does seem so," agreed Tom. "Still, we're in no hurry. It is easier +to be up here, than it is walking around in a jungle, not knowing what +minute a tiger may jump out at you." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my rubbers, yes!" agreed Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +The sky was covered with lowering clouds, and there were occasionally +flurries of snow. Tom's airship was well above the snow line on the +mountains. The young inventor and Ned sat in the pilot house, taking +observations through a spyglass of the mountain chain below them. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly Ned, who had the glass focused on a mighty peak, cried out: +</P> + +<P> +"There she is, Tom!" +</P> + +<P> +"What?" +</P> + +<P> +"The avalanche! The snow is beginning to slide down the mountain! Say, +it's going to be a big one, too. Got your camera ready?" +</P> + +<P> +"Sure! I've had it ready for the last three days. Put me over there, +Ned. You look after the airship, and I'll take the pictures!" +</P> + +<P> +Tom sprang to get his apparatus, while his chum hurried to the levers, +wheels and handles that controlled the Flyer. As they approached the +avalanche they could see the great mass of ice, snow, big stones, and +earth sliding down the mountain side, carrying tall trees with it. +</P> + +<P> +"This is just what I wanted!" cried Tom, as he set his camera working. +"Put me closer, Ned." +</P> + +<P> +Ned obeyed, and the airship was now hovering directly over the +avalanche, and right in its path. The big landslide, as it would have +been called in this country, met no village in its path, fortunately, +or it would have wiped it out completely. It was in a wild and desolate +region that it occurred. +</P> + +<P> +"I want to get a real close view!" cried Tom, as he got some pictures +showing a whole grove of giant trees uprooted and carried off. "Get +closer Ned, and—" +</P> + +<P> +Tom was interrupted by a cry of alarm from his chum. +</P> + +<P> +"We're falling!" yelled Ned. "Something has gone wrong. We're going +down into the avalanche!". +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap16"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XVI +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +TELEGRAPH ORDERS +</H3> + +<P> +There was confusion aboard the airship. Tom, hearing Ned's cry, left +his camera, to rush to the engine room, but not before he had set the +picture apparatus to working automatically. Mr. Damon, Mr. Nestor and +Koku, alarmed by Ned's cries, ran back from the forward part of the +craft, where they had been watching the mighty mass of ice and earth as +it rushed down the side of the mountain. +</P> + +<P> +"What's wrong, Ned?" cried Tom excitedly. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know! The propellers have stopped! We were running as an +aeroplane you know. Now we're going down!" +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my suspenders!" shouted Mr. Damon. "If we land in the midst of +that conglomeration of ice it will be the end of us." +</P> + +<P> +"But we're not going to land there!" cried Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"How are you going to stop it?" demanded Mr. Nestor. +</P> + +<P> +"By the gas machine!" answered Tom. "That will stop us from falling. +Start it up, Ned!" +</P> + +<P> +"That's right! I always forget about that! I'll have it going in a +second!" +</P> + +<P> +"Less than a second," called Tom, as he saw how near to the mighty, +rushing avalanche they were coming. +</P> + +<P> +Ned worked rapidly, and in a very short time the downward course of the +airship was checked. It floated easily above the rushing flood of ice +and earth, and Tom, seeing that his craft, and those on it, were safe, +hurried back to his camera. Meanwhile the machine had automatically +been taking pictures, but now with the young inventor to manage it, +better results would be obtained. +</P> + +<P> +Tom aimed it here and there, at the most spectacular parts of the +avalanche. The others gathered around him, after Ned had made an +inspection, and found that a broken electrical wire had caused the +propellers to stop. This was soon repaired and then, as they were +hanging in the air like a balloon, Tom took picture after picture of +the wonderful sight below them. Forest after forest was demolished. +</P> + +<P> +"This will be a great film!" Tom shouted to Ned, as the latter informed +him that the machinery was all right again. "Send me up a little. I +want to get a view from the top, looking down." +</P> + +<P> +His chum made the necessary adjustments to the mechanism and then, +there being nothing more to slide down the mountainside the avalanche +was ended. But what a mass of wreck and ruin there was! It was as if a +mighty earthquake had torn the mountain asunder. +</P> + +<P> +"It's a good thing it wasn't on a side of the mountain where people +lived," commented Ned, as the airship rose high toward the clouds. "If +it had been, there'd be nothing left of 'em. What hair-raising stunt +are you going to try next, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know. I expect to hear from Mr. Period soon. +</P> + +<P> +"Hear from Mr. Period?" exclaimed Mr. Nestor. "How are you going to do +that, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"He said he would telegraph me at Berne, Switzerland, at a certain +date, as he knew I was coming to the Alps to try for some avalanche +pictures. It's two or three days yet, before I can expect the telegram, +which of course will have to come part way by cable. In the meanwhile, +I think we'll take a little rest, and a vacation. I want to give the +airship an overhauling, and look to my camera. There's no telling what +Mr. Period may want next." +</P> + +<P> +"Then he didn't make out your programme completely before you started?" +asked Mr. Nestor. +</P> + +<P> +"No, he said he'd communicate with me from time to time. He is in touch +with what is going on in the world, you know, and if he hears of +anything exciting at any place, I'm to go there at once. You see he +wants the most sensational films he can get." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, our company is out to give the best pictures we can secure," +spoke Mary's father, "and I think we are lucky to have Tom Swift +working for us. We already have films that no other concern can get. +And we need them." +</P> + +<P> +"I wonder what became of those men who started to make so much trouble +for you, Tom?" asked Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, they seem to have disappeared," replied our hero. "Of course +they may be after me any day now, but for the time being, I've thrown +them off my track." +</P> + +<P> +"So then you don't know where you're going next?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"No, it may be to Japan, or to the North Pole. Well, I'm ready for +anything. We've got plenty of gasolene, and the Flyer can certainly +go," said Tom. +</P> + +<P> +They went down to earth in a quiet spot, just outside of a little +village, and there they remained three days, to the no small wonder of +the inhabitants. Tom wanted to see if his camera was working properly. +So he developed some of the avalanche pictures, and found them +excellent. The rest of the time was spent in making some needed repairs +to the airship, while the young inventor overhauled his Wizard machine, +that he found needed a few adjustments. +</P> + +<P> +Their arrival in Berne created quite a sensation, but they were used to +that. Tom anchored his airship just outside the city, and, accompanied +by Ned, made his way to the telegraph office. Some of the officials +there could speak English, though not very well. +</P> + +<P> +"I am expecting a message," said Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes? Who for?" asked the clerk. +</P> + +<P> +"Tom Swift. It will be from America." +</P> + +<P> +As Tom said this he observed a man sitting in the corner of the office +get up hurriedly and go out. All at once his suspicions were aroused. +He thought of the attempts that had been made to get his Wizard Camera +away from him. +</P> + +<P> +"Who was that man?" he quickly asked the agent. +</P> + +<P> +"Him? Oh, he, too, is expecting a message from America. He has been +here some time." +</P> + +<P> +"Why did he go out so quickly?" Ned wanted to know. +</P> + +<P> +"Why, I can not tell. He is an Englishman. They do strange things." +</P> + +<P> +"My telegram? Is it here?" asked Tom impatiently. He wanted to get +whatever word there was from Mr. Period, and be on his way to whatever +destination the picture man might select. Perhaps, after all, his +suspicions, against the man who had so suddenly left, were unfounded. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, there is a cablegram here for you, Monsieur Swift," said the man, +who was French. "There are charges on it, however." +</P> + +<P> +"Pay 'em, Ned, while I see what this is," directed the young inventor, +as he tore open the envelope. +</P> + +<P> +"Whew!" he whistled a moment later. "This is going some." +</P> + +<P> +"Where to now?" asked Ned. "The North Pole?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, just the opposite. Mr. Period wants me to go to Africa—the Congo +Free State. There's an uprising among the natives there, and he wants +some war pictures. Well, I guess I'll have to go." +</P> + +<P> +As Tom spoke he looked toward the door of the telegraph office, and he +saw the man, who had so hurriedly gone out a few moments before, +looking in at him. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap17"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XVII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +SUSPICIOUS STRANGERS +</H3> + +<P> +"Off to Africa; eh?" remarked Ned, as Tom put the envelope in his +pocket. "That's another long jump. But I guess the Flyer can do it." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I think so. I say Ned, not so loud," said Tom, who had hurried to +the side of his chum, whispered the last words. +</P> + +<P> +"What's up?" inquired Ned quickly. "Anything wrong?" +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know. But I think we are being watched. Did you notice that +fellow who was in here a minute ago, when I asked for a telegram?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, what about him?" +</P> + +<P> +"Well, he's looking in the door now I think. Don't turn round. Just +look up into that mirror on the wall, and you can see his reflection." +</P> + +<P> +"I understand," whispered Ned, as he turned his gaze toward the mirror +in question, a large one, with advertisements around the frame. "I see +him," he went on. "There's some one with him." +</P> + +<P> +"That's what I thought," replied Tom. "Take a good look. Whom do you +think the other chap is?" +</P> + +<P> +Ned looked long and earnestly. By means of the mirror, he could see, +perfectly plain, two men standing just outside the door of the +telegraph office. The portal was only partly open. Ned drew an old +letter from his pocket, and pretended to be showing it to Tom. But, all +the while he was gazing earnestly at the two men. Suddenly one of them +moved, giving Tom's chum a better view of his face. +</P> + +<P> +"By Jove, Tom!" the lad exclaimed in a tense whisper. "If it isn't that +Eckert fellow I'm a cow." +</P> + +<P> +"That's what I thought," spoke Tom coolly. "Not that you're a cow, Ned, +but I believe that this man is one of the moving picture partners, who +are rivals of Mr. Period. I wasn't quite sure myself after the first +glance I had of him, so I wanted you to take a look. Do you know the +other chap—the one who ran out when I asked for my telegram?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, I've never seen him before as far as I know." +</P> + +<P> +"Same here. Come on." +</P> + +<P> +"What are you going to do?" +</P> + +<P> +"Go back to the airship, and tell Mr. Nestor. As one of the directors +in the concern I'm working for. I want his advice." +</P> + +<P> +"Good idea," replied Ned, and they turned to leave the office. The +spying stranger, and William Eckert, were not in sight when the two +lads came out. +</P> + +<P> +"They got away mighty quick," remarked Tom, as he looked up and down +the street. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, they probably saw us turn to come out, and made a quick get-away. +They might be in any one of these places along here," for the street, +on either side of the telegraph office, contained a number of hotels, +with doors opening on the sidewalk. +</P> + +<P> +"They must be on your trail yet," decided Mr. Nestor when Tom, reaching +the anchored airship, told what had happened. "Well, my advice is to go +to Africa as soon as we can. In that way we'll leave them behind, and +they won't have any chance to get your camera." +</P> + +<P> +"But what I can't understand," said Tom, "is how they knew I was coming +here. It was just as if that one man had been waiting in the telegraph +office for me to appear. I'm sorry, now, that I mentioned to Ned where +we were ordered to. But I didn't think." +</P> + +<P> +"They probably knew, anyway," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "I think this +may explain it. The rival concern in New York has been keeping track of +Mr. Period's movements. Probably they have a paid spy who may be in his +employ. They knew when he sent you a telegram, what it contained, and +where it was directed to. Then, of course, they knew you would call +here for it. What they did not know was when you would come, and so +they had to wait. That one spy was on guard, and, as soon as you came, +he went and summoned Eckert, who was waiting somewhere in the +neighborhood." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my detective story!" cried Mr. Damon. "What a state of affairs! +They ought to be arrested, Tom." +</P> + +<P> +"It would be useless," said Mr. Nestor. "They are probably far enough +away by this time. Or else they have put others on Tom's track." +</P> + +<P> +"I'll fight my own battles!" exclaimed the young inventor. "I don't go +much on the police in a case like this, especially foreign police. +Well, my camera is all right, so far," he went on, as he took a look at +it, in the compartment where he kept it. "Some one must always remain +near it, after this. But we'll soon start for Africa, to get some +pictures of a native battle. I hope it isn't the red pygmies we have to +photograph." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my shoe laces! Don't suggest such a thing," begged Mr. Damon, as +he recalled the strenuous times when the dwarfs held the missionaries +captive. +</P> + +<P> +It was necessary to lay in some stores and provisions, and for this +reason Tom could not at once head the airship for the African jungles. +As she remained at anchor, just outside the city, crowds of Swiss +people came out to look at the wonderful craft. But Tom and his +companions took care that no one got aboard, and they kept a strict +lookout for Americans, or Englishmen, thinking perhaps that Mr. Eckert, +or the spy, might try to get the camera. However, they did not see +them, and a few days after the receipt of the message from Mr. Period, +having stocked up, they rose high into the air, and set out to cross +the Mediterranean Sea for Africa. Tom laid a route over Tripoli, the +Sahara Desert, the French Congo, and so into the Congo Free State. In +his telegram, Mr. Period had said that the expected uprising was to +take place near Stanley Falls, on the Congo River. +</P> + +<P> +"And supposing it does not happen?" asked Mr. Damon. "What if the +natives don't fight, Tom? You'll have your trip for nothing, and will +run a lot of risk besides." +</P> + +<P> +"It's one of the chances I'm taking," replied the young inventor, and +truly, as he thought of it, he realized that the perils of the moving +picture business were greater than he had imagined. Tom hoped to get a +quick trip to the Congo, but, as they were sailing over the big desert, +there was an accident to the main motor, and the airship suddenly began +shooting toward the sands. She was easily brought up, by means of the +gas bags, and allowed to settle gently to the ground, in the vicinity +of a large oasis. But, when Tom looked at the broken machinery, he said: +</P> + +<P> +"This means a week's delay. It will take that, and longer, to fix it so +we can go on." +</P> + +<P> +"Too bad!" exclaimed Mr. Nestor. "The war may be over when we get +there. But it can't be helped." +</P> + +<P> +It took Tom and his friends even longer than he had thought to make the +repairs. In the meanwhile they camped in the desert place, which was +far from being unpleasant. Occasionally a caravan halted there, but, +for the most part, they were alone. +</P> + +<P> +"No danger of Eckert, or any of his spies coming here, I guess," said +Tom grimly as he blew on a portable forge, to weld two pieces of iron +together. +</P> + +<P> +In due time they were again on the wing, and without further incident +they were soon in the vicinity of Stanley Falls. They managed to locate +a village where there were some American missionaries established. They +were friends of Mr. and Mrs. Illington, the missionaries whom Tom had +saved from the red pygmies, as told in the "Electric Rifle" volume of +this series, and they made our hero and his friends welcome. +</P> + +<P> +"Is it true?" asked Tom, of the missionaries who lived not far from +Stanley Falls, "that there is to be a native battle? Or are we too late +for it?" +</P> + +<P> +"I am sorry to say, I fear there will be fighting among the tribesmen," +replied Mr. Janeway, one of the Christian workers. "It has not yet +taken place, though." +</P> + +<P> +"Then I'm not too late!" cried Tom, and there was exultation in his +voice. "I don't mean to be barbarous," he went on, as he saw that the +missionaries looked shocked, "but as long as they are going to fight I +want to get the pictures." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, they'll fight all right," spoke Mrs. Janeway. "The poor, ignorant +natives here are always ready to fight. This time I think it is about +some cattle that one tribe took from another." +</P> + +<P> +"And where will the battle take place?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, the rumors we have, seem to indicate that the fight will take +place about ten miles north of here. We will have notice of it before +it starts, as some of the natives, whom we have succeeded in +converting, belong to the tribe that is to be attacked. They will be +summoned to the defense of their town and then it will be time enough +for you to go. Oh, war is a terrible thing! I do not like to talk about +it. Tell me how you rescued our friends from the red pygmies," and Tom +was obliged to relate that story, which I have told in detail elsewhere. +</P> + +<P> +Several days passed, and Tom and his friends spent a pleasant time in +the African village with the missionaries. The airship and camera were +in readiness for instant use, and during this period of idleness our +hero got several fine films of animal scenes, including a number of +night-fights among the beasts at the drinking pools. One tiger battle +was especially good, from a photographic standpoint. +</P> + +<P> +One afternoon, a number of native bearers came into the town. They +preceded two white men, who were evidently sportsmen, or explorers, and +the latter had a well equipped caravan. The strangers sought the advice +of the missionaries about where big game might be found, and Tom +happened to be at the cottage of Mr. Janeway when the strangers arrived. +</P> + +<P> +The young inventor looked at them critically, as he was introduced to +them. Both men spoke with an English accent, one introducing himself as +Bruce Montgomery, and the other as Wade Kenneth. Tom decided that they +were of the ordinary type of globe-trotting Britishers, until, on his +way to his airship, he passed the place where the native bearers had +set down the luggage of the Englishmen. +</P> + +<P> +"Whew!" whistled Tom, as he caught sight of a peculiarly shaped box. +"See that, Ned?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, what is it? A new kind of magazine gun?" +</P> + +<P> +"It's a moving picture camera, or I lose my guess!" whispered Tom. "One +of the old fashioned kind. Those men are no more tourists, or after big +game, than I am! They're moving picture men, and they're here to get +views of that native battle! Ned, we've got to be on our guard. They +may be in the pay of that Turbot and Eckert firm, and they may try to +do us some harm!" +</P> + +<P> +"That's so!" exclaimed Ned. "We'll keep watch of them, Tom." +</P> + +<P> +As they neared their airship, there came, running down what served as +the main village street, an African who showed evidence of having come +from afar. As he ran on, he called out something in a strange tongue. +Instantly from their huts the other natives swarmed. +</P> + +<P> +"What's up now?" cried Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Something important, I'll wager," replied Tom. "Ned, you go back to +the missionaries house, and find out what it is. I'm going to stand +guard over my camera." +</P> + +<P> +"It's come!" cried Ned a little later, as he hurried into the interior +of the airship, where Tom was busy working over a new attachment he +intended putting on his picture machine. +</P> + +<P> +"What has?" +</P> + +<P> +"War! That native, whom we saw running in, brought news that the battle +would take place day after to-morrow. The enemies of his tribe are on +the march, so the African spies say, and he came to summon all the +warriors from this town. We've got to get busy!" +</P> + +<P> +"That's so. What about those Englishmen?" +</P> + +<P> +"They were talking to the missionaries when the runner came in. They +pretended to have no interest in it, but I saw one wink to the other, +and then, very soon, they went out, and I saw them talking to their +native bearers, while they were busy over that box you said was a +picture machine." +</P> + +<P> +"I knew it, Ned! I was sure of it! Those fellows came here to trick us, +though how they ever followed our trail I don't know. Probably they +came by a fast steamer to the West Coast, and struck inland, while we +were delayed on the desert. I don't care if they are only straight +out-and-out rivals—and not chaps that are trying to take an unfair +advantage. I suppose all the big picture concerns have a tip about this +war, and they may have representatives here. I hope we get the best +views. Now come on, and give me a hand. We've got our work cut out for +us, all right." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my red cross bandage!" cried Mr. Damon, when he heard the news. +"A native fight, eh? That will be something I haven't seen in some +time. Will there be any danger, Tom, do you think?" +</P> + +<P> +"Not unless our airship tumbles down between the two African forces," +replied our hero, "and I'll take care that it doesn't do that. We'll be +well out of reach of any of their blow guns, or arrows." +</P> + +<P> +"But I understand that many of the tribes have powder weapons," said +Mr. Nestor. +</P> + +<P> +"They have," admitted Tom, "but they are 'trader's' rifles, and don't +carry far. We won't run any risk from such old-fashioned guns." +</P> + +<P> +"A big fight; eh?" asked Koku when they told him what was before them. +"Me like to help." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, and I guess both sides would give a premium for your services," +remarked Tom, as he gazed at his big servant. "But we'll need you with +us, Koku." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, me stay with you, Mr. Tom," exclaimed the big man, with a grin. +</P> + +<P> +Somewhat to Tom's surprise the two Englishmen showed no further +interest in him and his airship, after the introduction at the +missionaries' bungalow. +</P> + +<P> +With the stolidity of their race the Britishers did not show any +surprise, as, some time afterward, they strolled down toward Tom's big +craft, after supper, and looked it over. Soon they went back to their +own camp, and a little later, Koku, who walked toward it, brought word +that the Englishmen were packing up. +</P> + +<P> +"They're going to start for the seat of war the first thing in the +morning," decided Tom. "Well, we'll get ahead of them. Though we can +travel faster than they can, we'll start now, and be on the ground in +good season. Besides, I don't like staying all night in the same +neighborhood with them. Get ready for a start, Ned." +</P> + +<P> +Tom did not stop to say good-bye to the Englishmen, though he bade +farewell to the missionaries, who had been so kind to him. There was +much excitement in the native town, for many of the tribesmen were +getting ready to depart to help their friends or relatives in the +impending battle. +</P> + +<P> +As dusk was falling, the big airship arose, and soon her powerful +propellers were sending her across the jungle, toward Stanley Falls in +the vicinity of which the battle was expected to take place. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap18"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XVIII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE NATIVE BATTLE +</H3> + +<P> +"By Jove, Tom, here they come!" +</P> + +<P> +"From over by that drinking pool?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, just as the spies said they would. Wow, what a crowd of the black +beggars there are! And some of 'em have regular guns, too. But most of +'em have clubs, bows and arrows, blow guns, or spears." +</P> + +<P> +Tom and Ned were standing on the forward part of the airship, which was +moving slowly along, over an open plateau, in the jungle where the +native battle was about to take place. Our friends had left the town +where the missionaries lived, and had hovered over the jungle, until +they saw signs of the coming struggle. They had seen nothing of their +English rivals since coming away, but had no doubt but that the +Britishers were somewhere in the neighborhood. +</P> + +<P> +The two forces of black men, who had gone to war over a dispute about +some cattle, approached each other. There was the beating of tom-toms, +and skin drums, and many weird shouts. From their vantage point in the +air, Tom and his companions had an excellent view. The Wizard Camera +was loaded with a long reel of film, and ready for action. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my handkerchief!" cried Mr. Damon, as he looked down on the +forces that were about to clash. "I never saw anything like this +before!" +</P> + +<P> +"I either," admitted Tom. "But, if things go right, I'm going to get +some dandy films!" +</P> + +<P> +Nearer and nearer the rival forces advanced. At first they had stared, +and shouted in wonder at the sight of the airship, hovering above them, +but their anger soon drew their attention to the fighting at hand, and, +after useless gestures toward the craft of the air, and after some of +them had vainly fired their guns or arrows at it, they paid no more +attention, but rushed on with their shouts and cries and amid the +beating of their rude drums. +</P> + +<P> +"I think I'll begin to take pictures now," said Tom, as Ned, in charge +of the ship, sent it about in a circle, giving a general view of the +rival forces. "I'll show a scene of the two crowds getting ready for +business, and, later on, when they're actually giving each other cats +and dogs, I'll get all the pictures possible." +</P> + +<P> +The camera was started while, safe in the air those on the Flyer watched +what went on below them. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly the forward squads of the two small armies of blacks met. With +wild, weird yells they rushed at each other. The air was filled with +flying arrows and spears. The sound of the old-fashioned muzzle-loading +guns could be heard, and clouds of smoke arose. Tilting his camera, and +arranging the newly attached reflecting mirrors so as to give the +effect as if a spectator was looking at the battle from in front, +instead of from above, Tom Swift took picture after picture. +</P> + +<P> +The fight was now on. With yells of rage and defiance the Africans came +together, giving blow for blow. It was a wild melee, and those on the +airship looked on fascinated, though greatly wishing that such horrors +could be stopped. +</P> + +<P> +"How about it, Tom?" cried Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Everything going good! I don't like this business, but now I'm in it +I'm going to stick. Put me down a little lower," answered the young +inventor. +</P> + +<P> +"All right. I say Tom, look over there." +</P> + +<P> +"Where?" +</P> + +<P> +"By that lightning-struck gum tree. See those two men, and some sort of +a machine they've got stuck up on stilts? See it?" +</P> + +<P> +"Sure. Those are the two Englishmen—my rivals! They're taking +pictures, too!" +</P> + +<P> +And then, with a crash and roar, with wild shouts and yells, with +volley after volley of firearms, clouds of smoke and flights of arrows +and spears, the native battle was in full swing, while the young +inventor, sailing above it in his airship, reeled off view after view +of the strange sight. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap19"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XIX +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +A HEAVY LOSS +</H3> + +<P> +"Bless my battle axe, but this is awful!" cried Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"War is always a fearful thing," spoke Mr. Nestor. "But this is not as +bad as if the natives fought with modern weapons. See! most of them +are fighting with clubs, and their fists. They don't seem to hurt each +other very much." +</P> + +<P> +"That's so," agreed Mr. Damon. The two gentlemen were in the main +cabin, looking down on the fight below them, while Tom, with Ned to +help him change the reels of films, as they became filled with +pictures, attended to the camera. Koku was steering the craft, as he +had readily learned how to manage it. +</P> + +<P> +"Are those Englishmen taking pictures yet?" asked Tom, too busy to turn +his head, and look for himself. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, they're still at," replied Ned. "But they seem to be having +trouble with their machine," he added as he saw one of the men leave +the apparatus, and run hurriedly back to where they had made a +temporary camp. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess it's an old-fashioned kind," commented Tom. "Say, this is +getting fierce!" he cried, as the natives got in closer contact with +each other. It was now a hand-to-hand battle. +</P> + +<P> +"I should say so!" yelled Ned. "It's a wonder those Englishmen aren't +afraid to be down on the same level with the black fighters." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, a white person is considered almost sacred by the natives here, so +the missionaries told me," said Tom. "A black man would never think of +raising his hand to one, and the Englishmen probably know this. They're +safe enough. In fact I'm thinking of soon going down myself, and +getting some views from the ground." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my gizzard, Tom!" cried Mr. Damon. "Don't do it!" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I think I will. Why, it's safe enough. Besides, if they attack us +we have the electric rifles. Ned, you tell Koku to get the guns out, to +have in readiness, and then you put the ship down. I'll take a chance." +</P> + +<P> +"Jove! You've been doing nothing but take chances since we came on this +trip!" exclaimed Ned, admiringly. "All right! Here we go," and he went +to relieve Koku at the wheel, while the giant, grinning cheerfully at +the prospect of taking part in the fight himself, got out the rifles, +including his own. +</P> + +<P> +Meanwhile the native battle went on fiercely. Many on both sides fell, +and not a few ran away, when they got the chance, their companions +yelling at them, evidently trying to shame them into coming back. +</P> + +<P> +As the airship landed, Mr. Damon, Mr. Nestor, Ned and Koku stood ready +with the deadly electric rifles, in case an attack should be made on +them. But the fighting natives paid no more attention to our friends +than they did to the two Englishmen. The latter moved their clumsy +camera from place to place, in order to get various views of the +fighting. +</P> + +<P> +"This is the best yet!" cried Tom, as, after a lull in the fight, when +the two opposing armies had drawn a little apart, they came together +again more desperately than before. "I hope the pictures are being +recorded all right. I have to go at this thing pretty much in the dark. +Say, look at the beggars fight!" he finished. +</P> + +<P> +But a battle, even between uncivilized blacks, cannot go on for very +long at a time. Many had fallen, some being quite severely injured it +seemed, being carried off by their friends. Then, with a sudden rush, +the side which, as our friends learned later, had been robbed of their +cattle, made a fierce attack, overwhelming their enemies, and +compelling them to retreat. Across the open plain the vanquished army +fled, with the others after them. Tom, meanwhile, taking pictures as +fast as he could. +</P> + +<P> +"This ends it!" he remarked to Ned, when the warriors were too far away +to make any more good views. "Now we can take a rest." +</P> + +<P> +"The Englishmen gave up some time ago," said his chum, motioning to the +two men who were taking their machine off the tripod. +</P> + +<P> +"Guess their films gave out," spoke Tom. "Well, you see it didn't do +any harm to come down, and I got some better views here." +</P> + +<P> +"Here they come back!" exclaimed Ned, as a horde of the black fellows +emerged from the jungle, and came on over the plain. +</P> + +<P> +"Hear 'em sing!" commented Tom, as the sound of a rude chant came to +their ears. "They must be the winners all right." +</P> + +<P> +"I guess so," agreed Ned. "But what about staying here now? Maybe they +won't be so friendly to us when they haven't any fighting to occupy +their minds." +</P> + +<P> +"Don't worry," advised Tom. "They won't bother us." +</P> + +<P> +And the blacks did not. They were caring for their wounded, who had not +already been taken from the field, and they paid no attention to our +friends, save to look curiously at the airship. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my newspaper!" cried Mr. Damon, with an air of relief. "I'm +glad that's over, and we didn't have to use the electric rifles, after +all." +</P> + +<P> +"Here come the Englishmen to pay us a visit," spoke Ned a little later, +as they sat about the cabin of the Flyer. The two rival picture men +soon climbed on deck. +</P> + +<P> +"Beg pardon," said the taller of the two, addressing our hero, "but +could you lend us a roll of film? Ours are all used up, and we want to +get some more pictures before going back to our main camp." +</P> + +<P> +"I'm sorry," replied Tom, "but I use a special size, and it fits no +camera but my own." +</P> + +<P> +"Ah! might we see your camera?" asked the other Englishman. "That is, +see how it works?" +</P> + +<P> +"I don't like to be disobliging," was Tom's answer, "but it is not yet +patented and—well—" he hesitated. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I see!" sneered the taller visitor. "You're afraid we might steal +some of your ideas. Hum! Come on Montgomery," and, swinging on his +heels, with a military air, he hurried away, followed by his companion. +</P> + +<P> +"They don't like that, but I can't help it," remarked Tom to his +friends a little later. "I can't afford to take any chances." +</P> + +<P> +"No, you did just right," said Mr. Nestor. "Those men may be all right, +but from the fact that they are in the picture taking business I'd be +suspicious of them." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, what's next on the programme?" asked Ned as Tom put his camera +away. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I think we'll stay here over night," was our hero's reply. "It's +a nice location, and the gas machine needs cleaning. We can do it here, +and maybe I can get some more pictures." +</P> + +<P> +They were busy the rest of the day on the gas generator, but the main +body of natives did not come back, and the Englishmen seemed to have +disappeared. +</P> + +<P> +Everyone slept soundly that night. So soundly, in fact, that the sun +was very high when Koku was the first to awaken, His head felt +strangely dizzy, and he wondered at a queer smell in the room he had to +himself. +</P> + +<P> +"Nobody up yet," he exclaimed in surprise, as he staggered into the +main cabin. There, too, was the strange, sweetish, sickly smell. "Mr. +Tom, where you be? Time to get up!" the giant called to his master, as +he went in, and gently shook the young inventor by the shoulder. +</P> + +<P> +"Eh? What's that? What's the matter?" began Tom, and then he suddenly +sat up. "Oh, my head!" he exclaimed, putting his hands to his aching +temples. +</P> + +<P> +"And that queer smell!" added Ned, who was also awake now. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my talcum powder!" cried Mr. Damon. "I have a splitting +headache." +</P> + +<P> +"Hum! Chloroform, if I'm any judge!" called Mr. Nestor from his berth. +</P> + +<P> +"Chloroform!" cried Tom, staggering to his feet. "I wonder." He did not +finish his sentence, but made his way to the room where his camera was +kept. "It's gone!" he cried. "We have been chloroformed in the night, +and some one has taken my Wizard Camera." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap20"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XX +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +AFTER THE ENGLISHMEN +</H3> + +<P> +"The camera gone!" gasped Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Did they chloroform us?" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "Bless my—" but for one +of the few times in his life, he did not know what to bless. +</P> + +<P> +"Get all the fresh air you can," hastily advised Mr. Nestor. "Koku, +open all the doors and windows," for, though it was hot during the day +in the jungle, the nights were cool, and the airship was generally +closed up. With the inrush of the fresh air every one soon felt better. +</P> + +<P> +"Is anything else gone?" asked Ned, as he followed Tom into the camera +room. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, several rolls of unexposed films. Oh, if only they haven't got +too much of a start! I'll get it away from them!" declared Tom with +energy. +</P> + +<P> +"From who? Who took it?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Those Englishmen, of course! Who else? I believe they are in the pay +of Turbot and Eckert. Their taking pictures was only a bluff! They got +on my trail and stuck to it. The delays we had, gave them a chance to +catch up to us. They came over to the airship, to pretend to borrow +films, just to get a look at the place, and size it up, so they could +chloroform us, and get the camera." +</P> + +<P> +"I believe you're right," declared Mr. Nestor. "We must get after those +scoundrels as quickly as possible!" +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my shoulder braces!" cried Mr. Damon. "How do you imagine they +worked that trick on us?" +</P> + +<P> +"Easily enough," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "We were all dead tired last +night, and slept like tops. They watched their chance, sneaked up, and +got in. After that it was no hard matter to chloroform each one of us +in turn, and they had the ship to themselves. They looked around, found +the camera, and made off with it." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I'm going to get right after them!" cried Tom. "Ned, start the +motor. I'll steer for a while." +</P> + +<P> +"Hold on! Wait a minute," suggested Mr. Nestor. "I wouldn't go off in +the ship just yet, Tom." +</P> + +<P> +"Why not?" +</P> + +<P> +"Because you don't know which way to go. We must find out which trail +the Englishmen took. They have African porters with them, and those +porters doubtless know some of the blacks around here. We must inquire +of the natives which way the porters went, in carrying the goods of our +rivals, for those Englishmen would not abandon camp without taking +their baggage with them." +</P> + +<P> +"That's so," admitted the young inventor. "That will be the best plan. +Once I find which way they have gone I can easily overtake them in the +airship. And when I find 'em—" Tom paused significantly. +</P> + +<P> +"Me help you fix 'em!" cried Koku, clenching his big fist. +</P> + +<P> +"They will probably figure it out that you will take after them," said +Mr. Nestor, "but they may not count on you doing it in the Flyer, and +so they may not try to hide. It isn't going to be an easy matter to +pick a small party out of the jungle though, Tom." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I've done more difficult things in my airships," spoke our hero. +"I'll fly low, and use the glass. I guess we can pick out their crowd +of porters, though they won't have many. Oh, my camera! I hope they +won't damage it." +</P> + +<P> +"They won't," was Ned's opinion. "It's too valuable. They want it to +take pictures with, themselves." +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe. I hope they don't open it, and see how it's made. And I'm glad +I thought to hide the picture films I've taken so far. They didn't get +those away from us, only some of the blank ones," and Tom looked again +in a secret closet, where he kept the battle-films, and the others, in +the dark, to prevent them from being light-struck, by any possible +chance. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, if we're going to make some inquiries, let's do it," suggested +Mr. Nestor. "I think I see some of the Africans over there. They have +made a temporary camp, it seems, to attend to some of their wounded." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you think we can make them understand what we want?" asked Ned. "I +don't believe they speak English." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh these blacks have been trading with white men," said Tom, "for they +have 'trader's' guns, built to look at, and not to shoot very well. I +fancy we can make ourselves understood. If not, we can use signs." +</P> + +<P> +Leaving Koku and Mr. Damon to guard the airship, Tom, Ned and Mr. +Nestor went to the African camp. There was a large party of men there, +and they seemed friendly enough. Probably winning the battle the day +before had put them in good humor, even though many of them were hurt. +</P> + +<P> +To Tom's delight he found one native who could speak a little English, +and of him they made inquiries as to what direction the Englishmen had +taken. The black talked for a while among his fellows, and then +reported to our friends that, late in the night, one of the porters, +hired by Montgomery and Kenneth, had come to camp to bid a brother +good-bye. This porter had said that his masters were in a hurry to get +away, and had started west. +</P> + +<P> +"That's it!" cried Mr. Nestor. "They're going to get somewhere so they +can make their way to the coast. They want to get out of Africa as fast +as they can." +</P> + +<P> +"And I'm going to get after 'em as fast as I can!" cried Tom grimly. +"Come on!" +</P> + +<P> +They hurried back to the airship, finding Koku and Mr. Damon peacefully +engaged in talk, no one having disturbed them. +</P> + +<P> +"Start the motor, Ned!" called his chum. "We'll see what luck we have!" +</P> + +<P> +Up into the air went the Flyer, her great propellers revolving rapidly. +Over the jungle she shot, and then, when he found that everything was +working well, and that the cleaned gas generator was operating as good +as when it was new, the young inventor slowed up, and brought the craft +down to a lower level. +</P> + +<P> +"For we don't want to run past these fellows, or shoot over their heads +in our hurry," Tom explained. "Ned, get out the binoculars. They're +easier to handle than the telescope. Then go up forward, and keep a +sharp lookout. There is something like a jungle trail below us, and it +looks to be the only one around here. They probably took that." Soon +after leaving the place where they had camped after the battle, Tom had +seen a rude path through the forest, and had followed that lead. +</P> + +<P> +On sped the Flyer, after the two Englishmen, while Tom thought +regretfully of his stolen camera. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap21"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXI +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE JUNGLE FIRE +</H3> + +<P> +"Well, Tom, I don't seem to see anything of them," remarked Ned that +afternoon, as he sat in the bow of the air craft, gazing from time to +time through the powerful glasses. +</P> + +<P> +"No, and I can't understand it, either," responded the young inventor, +who had come to relieve his chum. "They didn't have much the +start of us, and they'll have to travel very slowly. It isn't as if +they could hop on a train; and, even if they did, I could overtake them +in a short time. But they have to travel on foot through the jungle, +and can't have gone far." +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe they have bullock carts," suggested Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"The trail isn't wide enough for that," declared Tom. "We've come quite +a distance now, even if we have been running at low speed, and we +haven't seen even a black man on the trail," and he motioned to the +rude path below them. +</P> + +<P> +"They may have taken a boat and slipped down that river we crossed a +little while ago," suggested Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"That's so!" cried Tom. "Why didn't I think of it? Say! I'm going to +turn back." +</P> + +<P> +"Turn back?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, and go up and down the stream a way. We have time, for we can +easily run at top speed on the return trip. Then, if we don't see +anything of them on the water, we'll pick up the trail again. Put her +around, Ned, and I'll take the glasses for a while." +</P> + +<P> +The Flyer was soon shooting back over the same trail our friends had +covered, and, as Ned set the propellers going at top speed, they were +quickly hovering over a broad but shallow river, which cut through the +jungle. +</P> + +<P> +"Try it down stream first," suggested Tom, who was peering through the +binoculars. "They'd be most likely to go down, as it would be easier." +</P> + +<P> +Along over the stream swept the airship, covering several miles. +</P> + +<P> +"There's a boat!" suddenly exclaimed Mr. Nestor, pointing to a native +canoe below them. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my paddle wheel! So it is!" cried Mr. Damon. "I believe it's +them, Tom!" +</P> + +<P> +"No, there are only natives in that craft," answered the young inventor +a moment later, as he brought the binoculars into focus. "I wish it +was them, though." +</P> + +<P> +A few more miles were covered down stream, and then Tom tried the +opposite direction. But all to no purpose. A number of boats were seen, +and several rafts, but they had no white men on them. +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe the Englishmen disguised themselves like natives, Tom," +suggested Ned. +</P> + +<P> +Our hero shook his head. +</P> + +<P> +"I could see everything in the boats, through these powerful glasses," +he replied, "and there was nothing like my camera. I'd know that a mile +off. No, they didn't take to this stream, though they probably crossed +it. We'll have to keep on the way we were going. It will soon be night, +and we'll have to camp. Then we'll take up the search to-morrow." +</P> + +<P> +It was just getting dusk, and Tom was looking about for a good place to +land in the jungle, when Ned, who was standing in the bow, cried: +</P> + +<P> +"I say, Tom, here's a native village just ahead. There's a good place +to stop, and we can stay there over night." +</P> + +<P> +"Good!" exclaimed Tom. "And, what's more, we can make some inquiries as +to whether or not the Englishmen have passed here. This is great! +Maybe we'll come out all right, after all! They can't travel at +night—or at least I don't believe they will—and if they have passed +this village we can catch them to-morrow. We'll go down." +</P> + +<P> +They were now over the native town, which was in a natural clearing in +the jungle. The natives had by this time caught sight of the big +airship over them, and were running about in terror. There was not a +man, woman or child in sight when the Flyer came down, for the +inhabitants had all fled in fright. +</P> + +<P> +"Not much of a chance to make inquiries of these folks," said Mr. +Nestor. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, they'll come back," predicted Tom. "They are naturally curious, +and when they see that the thing isn't going to blow up, they'll gather +around. I've seen the same thing happen before." +</P> + +<P> +Tom proved a true prophet. In a little while some of the men began +straggling back, when they saw our friends walking about the airship, +as it rested on the ground. Then came the children, and then the women, +until the whole population was gathered about the airship, staring at +it wonderingly. Tom made signs of friendship, and was lucky enough to +find a native who knew a few French words. Tom was not much of a French +scholar, but he could frame a question as to the Englishmen. +</P> + +<P> +"Oui!" exclaimed the native, when he understood. Then he rattled off +something, which Tom, after having it repeated, and making signs to the +man to make sure he understood, said meant that the Englishmen had +passed through the village that morning. +</P> + +<P> +"We're on the right trail!" cried the young inventor. "They're only a +day's travel ahead of us. We'll catch them to-morrow, and get my camera +back." +</P> + +<P> +The natives soon lost all fear of the airship, and some of the chief +men even consented to come aboard. Tom gave them a few trifles for +presents, and won their friendship to such an extent that a great feast +was hastily gotten up in honor of the travelers. Big fires were +lighted, and fowls by the score were roasted. +</P> + +<P> +"Say, I'm glad we struck this place!" exclaimed Ned, as he sat on the +ground with the others, eating roast fowl. "This is all to the chicken +salad!" +</P> + +<P> +"Things are coming our way at last," remarked Tom. "We'll start the +first thing in the morning. I wish I had my camera now. I'd take a +picture of this scene. Dad would enjoy it, and so would Mrs. Baggert. +Oh, I almost wish I was home again. But if I get my camera I've got a +lot more work ahead of me." +</P> + +<P> +"What kind?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know. I'm to stop in Paris for the next instructions from Mr. +Period. He is keeping in touch with the big happenings of the world, +and he may send us to Japan, to get some earthquake pictures." +</P> + +<P> +The night was quiet after the feast, and in the morning Tom and his +friends sailed off in their airship, leaving behind the wondering and +pleased natives, for our hero handed out more presents, of small value +to him, but yet such things as the blacks prized highly. +</P> + +<P> +Once more they were flying over the trail, and they put on more speed +now, for they were fairly sure that the men they sought were ahead of +them about a day's travel. This meant perhaps twenty miles, and Tom +figured that he could cover fifteen in a hurry, and then go over the +remaining five slowly, so as not to miss his quarry. +</P> + +<P> +"Say, don't you smell something?" asked Ned a little later, when the +airship had been slowed down. "Something like smoke?" +</P> + +<P> +"Humph! I believe I do get an odor of something burning," admitted Tom, +sniffing the atmosphere. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my pocket book!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, "look down there, boys!" +He pointed below, and, to the surprise of the lads, and no less of +himself, he saw many animals hurrying back along the jungle trail. +</P> + +<P> +There were scores of deer, leaping along, here and there a tawny lion, +and one or two tigers. Off to one side a rhinoceros crashed his way +through the tangle, and occasionally an elephant was seen. +</P> + +<P> +"That's queer," cried Ned. "And they're not paying any attention to +each other, either." +</P> + +<P> +"Something is happening," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "Those animals are +running away from something." +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe it's an elephant drive," spoke Tom. "I think—" +</P> + +<P> +But he did not finish. The smell of smoke suddenly became stronger, +and, a moment later, as the airship rose higher, in response to a +change in the angle of the deflecting rudder, which Ned shifted, all on +board saw a great volume of black smoke rolling toward the sky. +</P> + +<P> +"A jungle fire!" cried Tom. "The jungle is burning! That's why the +animals are running back this way." +</P> + +<P> +"We'd better not go on!" shouted Ned, choking a bit, as the smoke +rolled nearer. +</P> + +<P> +"No, we've got to turn back!" decided Tom. "Say, this will stop the +Englishmen! They can't go on. We'll go back to the village we left, and +wait for them. They're trapped!" And then he added soberly: "I hope my +camera doesn't get burnt up!" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap22"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +A DANGEROUS COMMISSION +</H3> + +<P> +"Look at that smoke!" yelled Ned, as he sent the airship about in a +great circle on the backward trail. +</P> + +<P> +"And there's plenty of blaze, too," added Tom. "See the flames eating +away! This stuff is as dry as tinder for there hasn't been any rain for +months." +</P> + +<P> +"Much hot!" was the comment of the giant, when he felt the warm wind of +the fire. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my fountain pen!" gasped Mr. Damon, as he looked down into the +jungle. "See all those animals!" +</P> + +<P> +The trail was now thick with deer, and many small beasts, the names of +which Tom did not know. On either side could be heard larger brutes, +crashing their way forward to escape the fire behind them. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, if you only had your camera now!" cried Ned. "You could get a +wonderful picture, Tom." +</P> + +<P> +"What's the use of wishing for it. Those Englishmen have it, and—" +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe they're using it!" interrupted Ned. "No, I don't think they +would know how to work it. Do you see anything of them, Ned?" +</P> + +<P> +"Not a sight. But they'll surely have to come back, just as you said, +unless they got ahead of the fire. They can't go on, and it would be +madness to get off the trail in a jungle like this." +</P> + +<P> +"I don't believe they could have gotten ahead of the fire," spoke Tom. +"They couldn't travel fast enough for that, and see how broad the blaze +is." +</P> + +<P> +They were now higher up, well out of the heat and smoke of the +conflagration, and they could see that it extended for many miles along +the trail, and for a mile or so on either side of it. +</P> + +<P> +"We're far enough in advance, now, to go down a bit, I guess," said +Tom, a little later. "I want to get a good view of the path, and I +can't do that from up here. I have an idea that—" +</P> + +<P> +Tom did not finish, for as the airship approached nearer the ground, he +caught up a pair of binoculars, and focussed them on something on the +trail below. +</P> + +<P> +"What is it?" cried Ned, startled by something in his chum's manner. +</P> + +<P> +"It's them! The Englishmen!" cried Tom. "See, they are racing back +along the trail. Their porters have deserted them. But they have my +camera! I can see it! I'm going down, and get it! Ned, stand by the +wheel, and make a quick landing. Then we'll go up again!" +</P> + +<P> +Tom handed the glasses to his chum, and Ned quickly verified the young +inventor's statement. There were the two rascally Englishmen. The fire +was still some distance in the rear, but was coming on rapidly. There +were no animals to be seen, for they had probably gone off on a side +trail, or had slunk deeper into the jungle. Above the distant roar of +the blaze sounded the throb of the airship's motor. The Englishmen +heard it, and looked up. Then, suddenly, they motioned to Tom to +descend. +</P> + +<P> +"That's what I'm going to do," he said aloud, but of course they could +not hear him. +</P> + +<P> +"They're waiting for us!" cried Ned. "I wonder why?" for the rascals +had come to a halt, setting down the packs they carried on the trail. +One of the things they had was undoubtedly Tom's camera. +</P> + +<P> +"They probably want us to save their lives," said Tom. "They know they +can't out-run this fire. They've given up! We have them now!" +</P> + +<P> +"Are you going to save them?" asked Mr. Damon. +</P> + +<P> +"Of course. I wouldn't let my worst enemy run the chances of danger in +that terrible blaze. I'd save them even if they had smashed my camera. +I'll go down, and get them, and take them back to the native village, +but that's as far as I will carry them. They'll have to get away as +best they can, after that." +</P> + +<P> +It was the work of but a few minutes to lower the airship to the trail. +Fortunately it widened a bit at this point, or Tom could never have +gotten his craft down through the trees. +</P> + +<P> +"Hand up that camera!" ordered our hero curtly, when he had stopped +near the Englishmen. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, my dear chap," spoke the tall Britisher, "but will you oblige us, +by taking us—" +</P> + +<P> +"Hand up the camera first!" sharply ordered Tom again. +</P> + +<P> +They passed it to him. +</P> + +<P> +"I know we treated you beastly mean," went on Kenneth, "but, my dear +chap—" +</P> + +<P> +"Get aboard," was all Tom said, and when the rascals, with fearful +glances back into the burning jungle, did so, our hero sent his craft +high into the air again. +</P> + +<P> +"Where are you taking us, my dear chap?" asked the tall rascal. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't 'dear chap' me!" retorted Tom. "I don't want to talk to you. I'm +going to drop you at the native village." +</P> + +<P> +"But that will burn!" cried the Englishman. +</P> + +<P> +"The wind is changing," was our hero's answer. "The fire won't get to +the village. You'll be safe. Have you damaged my camera?" he asked as +he began to examine it, while Ned managed the ship. +</P> + +<P> +"No, my dear chap. You mustn't think too hard of us. We were both down +on our luck, and a chap offered us a big sum to get on your trail, and +secure the camera. He said you had filched it from him, and that he had +a right to it. Understand, we wouldn't have taken it had we known—" +</P> + +<P> +"Don't talk to me!" interrupted Tom, as he saw that his apparatus had +not been damaged. "The man who hired you was a rascal—that's all I'll +say. Put on a little more speed, Ned. I want to get rid of these 'dear +chaps' and take some pictures of the jungle fire." +</P> + +<P> +As Tom had said, the wind had changed, and was blowing the flames away +off to one side, so that the native village would be in no danger. It +was soon reached, and the Africans were surprised to see Tom's airship +back again. But he did not stay long, descending only to let the +Englishmen alight. They pleaded to be taken to the coast, making all +sorts of promises, and stating that, had they known that Turbot and +Eckert (for whom they admitted they had acted) were not telling the +truth, they never would have taken Tom's camera. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't leave us here!" they pleaded. +</P> + +<P> +"I wouldn't have you on board my airship another minute for a fortune!" +declared Tom, as he signalled to Ned to start the motor. Then the Flyer +ascended on high, leaving the plotters and started back for the fire, +of which Tom got a series of fine moving pictures. +</P> + +<P> +A week later our friends were in Paris, having made a quick trip, on +which little of incident occurred, though Tom managed to get quite a +number of good views on the way. +</P> + +<P> +He found a message awaiting him, from Mr. Period. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, where to now?" asked Ned, as his chum read the cablegram. +</P> + +<P> +"Great Scott!" cried our hero. "Talk about hair-raising jobs, this +certainly is the limit!" +</P> + +<P> +"Why, what's the matter?" +</P> + +<P> +"I've got to get some moving pictures of a volcano in action," was the +answer. "Say, if I'd known what sort of things 'Spotty' wanted, I'd +never have consented to take this trip. A volcano in action, and maybe +an earthquake on the side! This is certainly going some!" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap23"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXIII +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +AT THE VOLCANO +</H3> + +<P> +"And you've got to snap-shot a volcano?" remarked Ned to his chum, +after a moment of surprised silence. "Any particular one? Is it +Vesuvius? If it is we haven't far to go. But how does Mr. Period know +that it's going to get into action when we want it to?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, it isn't Vesuvius," replied Tom. "We've got to take another long +trip, and we'll have to go by steamer again. The message says that the +Arequipa volcano, near the city of the same name, in Peru, has started +to 'erupt,' and, according to rumor, it's acting as it did many years +ago, just before a big upheaval." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my Pumice stones!" cried Mr. Damon. "And are you expected to get +pictures of it shooting out flames and smoke, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"Of course. An inactive volcano wouldn't make much of a moving picture. +Well, if we go to Peru, we won't be far from the United States, and we +can fly back home in the airship. But we've got to take the Flyer +apart, and pack up again." +</P> + +<P> +"Will you have time?" asked Mr. Nestor. "Maybe the volcano will get +into action before you arrive, and the performance will be all over +with." +</P> + +<P> +"I think not," spoke Tom, as he again read the cablegram. "Mr. Period +says he has advices from Peru to the effect that, on other occasions, +it took about a month from the time smoke was first seen coming from +the crater, before the fireworks started up. I guess we've got time +enough, but we won't waste any." +</P> + +<P> +"And I guess Montgomery and Kenneth won't be there to make trouble for +us," put in Ned. "It will be some time before they get away from that +African town, I think." +</P> + +<P> +They began work that day on taking the airship apart for transportation +to the steamer that was to carry them across the ocean. Tom decided on +going to Panama, to get a series of pictures on the work of digging +that vast canal. On inquiry he learned that a steamer was soon to sail +for Colon, so he took passage for his friends and himself on that, also +arranging for the carrying of the parts of his airship. +</P> + +<P> +It was rather hard work to take the Flyer apart, but it was finally +done, and, in about a week from the time of arriving in Paris, they +left that beautiful city. The pictures already taken were forwarded to +Mr. Period, with a letter of explanation of Tom's adventures thus far, +and an account of how his rivals had acted. +</P> + +<P> +Just before sailing, Tom received another message from his strange +employer. The cablegram read: +</P> + +<BR> + +<P> +"Understand our rivals are also going to try for volcano pictures. +Can't find out who will represent Turbot and Eckert, but watch out. Be +suspicious of strangers." +</P> + +<BR> + +<P> +"That's what I will!" cried Tom. "If they get my camera away from me +again, it will be my own fault." +</P> + +<P> +The voyage to Colon was not specially interesting. They ran into a +terrific storm, about half way over, and Tom took some pictures from +the steamer's bridge, the captain allowing him to do so, but warning +him to be careful. +</P> + +<P> +"I'll take Koku up there with me," said the young inventor, "and if a +wave tries to wash me overboard he'll grab me." +</P> + +<P> +And it was a good thing that he took this precaution, for, while a wave +did not get as high as the bridge, one big, green roller smashed over +the bow of the vessel, staggering her so that Tom was tossed against +the rail. He would have been seriously hurt, and his camera might have +been broken, but for the quickness of the giant. +</P> + +<P> +Koku caught his master, camera and all, in a mighty arm, and with the +other clung to a stanchion, holding Tom in safety until the ship was on +a level keel once more. +</P> + +<P> +"Thanks, Koku!" gasped Tom. "You always seem to be around when I need +you." The giant grinned happily. +</P> + +<P> +The storm blew out in a few days, and, from then on, there was pleasant +sailing. When Tom's airship had been reassembled at Colon, it created +quite a sensation among the small army of canal workers, and, for their +benefit, our hero gave several flying exhibitions. +</P> + +<P> +He then took some of the engineers on a little trip, and in turn, they +did him the favor of letting him get moving pictures of parts of the +work not usually seen. +</P> + +<P> +"And now for the volcano!" cried Tom one morning, when having shipped +to Mr. Period the canal pictures, the Flyer was sent aloft, and her +nose pointed toward Arequipa. "We've got quite a run before us." +</P> + +<P> +"How long?" asked Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"About two thousand miles. But I'm going to speed her up to the limit." +Tom was as good as his word, and soon the Flyer was shooting along at +her best rate, reeling off mile after mile, just below the clouds. +</P> + +<P> +It was a wild and desolate region over which the travelers found +themselves most of the time, though the scenery was magnificent. They +sailed over Quito, that city on the equator, and, a little later, they +passed above the Cotopaxi and Chimbarazo volcanoes. But neither of them +was in action. The Andes Mountains, as you all know, has many volcanoes +scattered along the range. Lima was the next large city, and there Tom +made a descent to inquire about the burning mountain he was shortly to +photograph. +</P> + +<P> +"It will soon be in action," the United States counsel said. "I had a +letter from a correspondent near there only yesterday, and he said the +people in the town were getting anxious. They are fearing a shower of +burning ashes, or that the eruption may be accompanied by an +earthquake." +</P> + +<P> +"Good!" cried Tom. "Oh, I don't mean it exactly that way," he hastened +to add, as he saw the counsel looking queerly at him. "I meant that I +could get pictures of both earthquake and volcano then. I don't wish +the poor people any harm." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, you're the first one I ever saw who was anxious to get next door +to a volcano," remarked the counsel. "Hold on, though, that's not quite +right. I heard yesterday that a couple of young fellows passed through +here on their way to the same place. Come to think of it, they were +moving picture men, also." +</P> + +<P> +"Great Scott!" cried Tom. "Those must be my rivals, I'll wager. I must +get right on the job. Thanks for the information," and hurrying from +the office he joined his friends on the airship, and was soon aloft +again. +</P> + +<P> +"Look, Tom, what's that?" cried Ned, about noon the next day when the +Flyer, according to their calculations must be nearing the city of +Arequipa. "See that black cloud over there. I hope it isn't a tornado, +or a cyclone, or whatever they call the big wind storms down here." +</P> + +<P> +Tom, and the others, looked to where Ned pointed. There was a column of +dense smoke hovering in the air, lazily swirling this way and that. The +airship was rapidly approaching it. +</P> + +<P> +"Why that—" began Tom, but before he could complete the sentence the +smoke was blown violently upward. It became streaked with fire, and, a +moment later, there was the echo of a tremendous explosion. +</P> + +<P> +"The volcano!" cried Tom. "The Arequipa volcano! We're here just in +time, for she's in eruption now! Come on, Ned, help me get out the +camera! Mr. Damon, you and Mr. Nestor manage the airship! Put us as +close as you dare! I'm going to get some crackerjack pictures!" +</P> + +<P> +Once more came a great report. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my toothpick!" gasped Mr. Damon. "This is awful!" And the +airship rushed on toward the volcano which could be plainly seen now, +belching forth fire, smoke and ashes. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap24"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXIV +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE MOLTEN RIVER +</H3> + +<P> +"Whew!" gasped Ned, as he stood beside Tom in the bow of the airship. +"What's that choking us, Tom?" +</P> + +<P> +"Sulphur, I guess, and gases from the volcano. The wind blew 'em over +this way. They're not dangerous, as long as there is no carbonic acid +gas given off, and I don't smell any of that, yet. Say, Ned, it's +erupting all right, isn't it?" +</P> + +<P> +"I should say so!" cried his chum. +</P> + +<P> +"Put us a little to one side, Mr. Damon," called Tom to his friend, who +was in the pilot house. "I can't get good pictures through so much +smoke. It's clearer off to the left." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my bath robe!" cried the odd man. "You're as cool about it, Tom, +as though you were just in an ordinary race, at an aeroplane meet." +</P> + +<P> +"And why shouldn't I be?" asked our hero with a laugh, as he stopped +the mechanism of the camera until he should have a clearer view of the +volcano. "There's not much danger up here, but I want to get some views +from the level, later, and then—" +</P> + +<P> +"You don't get me down there!" interrupted Mr. Nestor, with a grim +laugh. +</P> + +<P> +They were now hovering over the volcano, but high enough up so that +none of the great stones that were being thrown out could reach them. +The column of black smoke, amid which could be seen the gleams of the +molten fires in the crater, rolled toward them, and the smell of +sulphur became stronger. +</P> + +<P> +But when, in accordance with Tom's suggestion, the airship had been +sent over to one side, they were clear of the vapor and the noxious +gas. Then, too, a better view could be had of the volcano below them. +</P> + +<P> +"Hold her down!" cried Tom, as he got in a good position, and the +propellers were slowed down so that they just overcame the influence of +a slight wind. Thus the Flyer hovered in the air, while below her the +volcano belched forth red-hot rocks, some of them immense in size, and +quantities of hot ashes and cinders. Tom had the camera going again +now, and there was every prospect of getting a startling and wonderful, +as well as rare series of moving pictures. +</P> + +<P> +"Wow! That was a big one!" cried Ned, as an unusually large mass of +rocks was thrown out, and the column of fire and smoke ascended nearly +to the hovering craft. A moment later came an explosion, louder than +any that had preceded. "We'd better be going up; hadn't we Tom?" his +chum asked. +</P> + +<P> +"A little, yes, but not too far. I want to get as many near views as I +can." +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my overshoes!" gasped Mr. Damon, as he heard Tom say that. Then +he sent some of the vapor from the generating machine into the gas bag, +and the Flyer arose slightly. +</P> + +<P> +Ned looked in the direction of the town, but could not see it, on +account of the haze. Then he directed his attention to the terrifying +sight below him. +</P> + +<P> +"It's a good thing it isn't very near the city," he said to Tom, who +was engaged in watching the automatic apparatus of the camera, to see +when he would have to put in a fresh film. "It wouldn't take much of +this sort of thing to destroy a big city. But I don't see any streams +of burning lava, such as they always say come out of a volcano." +</P> + +<P> +"It isn't time for that yet," replied Tom. "The lava comes out last, +after the top layer of stones and ashes have been blown out. They are a +sort of stopper to the volcano, I guess, like the cork of a bottle, +and, when they're out of the way, the red-hot melted rock comes out. +Then there's trouble. I want to get pictures of that." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, keep far enough away," advised Mr. Nestor, who had come forward. +"Don't take any chances. I guess your rivals won't get here in time to +take any pictures, for they can't travel as fast as we did." +</P> + +<P> +"No," agreed the young inventor, "unless some other party of them were +here ahead of us. They'll have their own troubles, though, making +pictures anything like as good as we're getting." +</P> + +<P> +"There goes another blast!" cried Ned, as a terrific explosion sounded, +and a shower of hot stuff was thrown high into the air. "If I lived in +Arequipa I'd be moving out about now." +</P> + +<P> +"There isn't much danger I guess, except from showers of burning ashes, +and volcanic dust," spoke Mr. Nestor, "and the wind is blowing it away +from the town. If it continues this way the people will be saved." +</P> + +<P> +"Unless there is so much of the red-hot lava that it will bury the +city," suggested Tom. "I hope that doesn't happen," and he could not +repress a shudder as he looked down on the awful scene below him. +</P> + +<P> +After that last explosion the volcano appeared to subside somewhat, +though great clouds of smoke and tongues of fire leaped upward. +</P> + +<P> +"I've got to put in a new reel of film!" suddenly exclaimed Tom. "While +I stop the camera, Mr. Damon, I think you and Mr. Nestor might put the +airship down to the ground. I want some views on the level." +</P> + +<P> +"What! Go down to earth with this awful volcano spouting fire?" cried +Mr. Damon. "Bless my comb and brush!" +</P> + +<P> +"We can get well down the side of the mountain," said Tom. "I won't go +into any danger, much less ask any one else to do so, and I certainly +don't want my ship damaged. We can land down there," he said, pointing +to a spot on the side of the volcanic mountain, that was some distance +removed from the mouth of the crater. "It won't take me long to get one +reel of views, and then I'll come up again." +</P> + +<P> +The two men finally gave in to Tom's argument, that there was +comparatively little danger, for they admitted that they could quickly +rise up at the first sign of danger, and accordingly the Flyer +descended. Tom quickly had a fresh reel of film inserted, and started +his camera to working, standing it on a tripod some distance from the +airship. +</P> + +<P> +Once more the volcano was "doing its prettiest," as Tom expressed it. +He glanced around, as another big explosion took place, to see if any +other picture men were on hand, but the terrible mountain seemed +deserted, though of course someone might be on the other side. +</P> + +<P> +"What's that?" suddenly cried Ned, looking apprehensively at his chum. +At the same time Tom jumped to his feet, for he had been kneeling near +the camera. +</P> + +<P> +"Bless my—" began Mr. Damon, but he got no farther, for suddenly the +solid ground began to tremble and shake. +</P> + +<P> +"An earthquake!" shouted Mr. Nestor. "Come, Tom! Get back to the ship!" +The young inventor and Ned had been the only ones to leave it, as it +rested on a spur of the mountain. +</P> + +<P> +As Tom and Ned leaped forward to save the camera which was toppling to +one side, there came a great fissure in the side of the volcano, and a +stream of molten rock, glowing white with heat, gushed out. It was a +veritable river of melted stone, and it was coming straight for the two +lads. +</P> + +<P> +"Run! Run!" cried Mr. Nestor. "We have everything ready for a quick +flight. Run, Tom! Ned!" +</P> + +<P> +The lads leaped for the Flyer, the molten rock coming nearer and +nearer, and then with a cry Koku sprang overboard and made a dash +toward his master. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap25"></A> +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXV +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE EARTHQUAKE—CONCLUSION +</H3> + +<P> +"Here, Mr. Tom. Me carry you an' Ned. You hold picture machine!" cried +the giant. "Me run faster." +</P> + +<P> +As he spoke he lifted Ned up under one arm, and caught Tom in the +other. For they were but as children to his immense strength. Tom held +on to his camera, and, thus laden down, Koku ran as he had never run +before, toward the waiting airship. +</P> + +<P> +"Come on! Come on!" shouted Mr. Damon, for he could see what Tom, Ned +and Koku could not, that the stream of lava was nearing them rapidly. +</P> + +<P> +"It's hot!" cried Ned, as a wave of warm air fanned his cheek. +</P> + +<P> +"I should say so!" cried Tom. "The volcano is full of red-hot melted +stone." +</P> + +<P> +There came a sickening shake of the earth. Koku staggered as he ran on, +but he kept his feet, and did not fall. Again came a tremendous +explosion, and a shower of fine ashes sifted over the airship, and on +Koku and his living burdens. +</P> + +<P> +"This is the worst ever!" gasped Tom. "But I've got some dandy +pictures, if we ever get away from here alive to develop them." +</P> + +<P> +"Hurry, Koku! Hurry!" begged Mr. Nestor. "Bless my shoe laces!" yelled +Mr. Damon, who was fairly jumping up and down on the deck of the Flyer. +"I'll never go near a volcano again!" +</P> + +<P> +Once more the ground shook and trembled, as the earthquake rent it. +Several cracks appeared in Koku's path, but he leaped over them with +tremendous energy. A moment later he had thrust Tom and Ned over the +rail, to the deck, and leaped aboard himself. +</P> + +<P> +"Let her go!" cried Tom. "I'll do the rest of my moving picture work, +around volcanoes and earthquakes, from up in the air!" +</P> + +<P> +The Flyer shot upward, and scarcely a moment too soon, for, an instant +after she left the ground, the stream of hot, burning and bubbling lava +rolled beneath her, and those on board could feel the heat of it +ascending. +</P> + +<P> +"Say, I'm glad we got out of that when we did," gasped Ned, as he +looked down. "You're all right, Koku." +</P> + +<P> +"That no trouble," replied the giant with a cheerful grin. "Me carry +four fellows like you," and he stretched out his big arms. Tom had at +once set his camera to working again, taking view after view. +</P> + +<P> +It was a terrifying but magnificent sight that our friends beheld, for +the earth was trembling and heaving. Great fissures opened in many +places. Into some of them streams of lava poured, for now the volcano +had opened in several places, and from each crack the melted rocks +belched out. The crater, however, was not sending into the air such +volumes of smoke and ashes as before, as most of the tremendous energy +had passed, or was being used to spout out the lava. +</P> + +<P> +The earthquake was confined to the region right about the volcano, or +there might have been a great loss of life in the city. As it was, the +damage done was comparatively slight. +</P> + +<P> +Tom continued to take views, some showing the earth as it was twisted +and torn, and other different aspects of the crater. Then, as suddenly +as the earthquake had begun, it subsided, and the volcano was less +active. +</P> + +<P> +"My! I'm glad to see that!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "I've had about enough +of horrors!" +</P> + +<P> +"And I have too," added Tom. "I'm on my last roll of film, and I can't +take many more pictures. But I guess I have all Mr. Period needs, and +we'll start for home, as soon as I finish the next roll. But I'm going +to save that for a night view. That will be a novelty." +</P> + +<P> +The volcano became active again after dark, and presented a magnificent +though terrifying aspect. As the airship hovered above it, Tom got some +of his best pictures, and then, as the last bit of film slipped along +back of the lens, the airship was headed north. +</P> + +<P> +"Now for Shopton!" cried Tom. "Our trip is ended." +</P> + +<P> +"It's too had you didn't have more film," said Ned. "I thought you had +plenty." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I used more than I counted on, but there are enough pictures as +it is." +</P> + +<P> +"Plenty," agreed Mr. Nestor. "I'm sure our company will be very well +satisfied with them, Tom. We can't get home any too soon to suit me. +I've had enough excitement." +</P> + +<P> +"And we didn't see anything of those other fellows whom we heard +about," spoke Mr. Damon, as the big airship flew on. +</P> + +<P> +"No," said Tom. "But I'm not worrying about them." +</P> + +<P> +They made another stop in Lima, on their homeward trip, to renew their +supply of gasolene, and there learned that the rival picture men had +arrived at the volcano too late to see it in operation. This news came +to a relative of one of the two men who lived in Lima. +</P> + +<P> +"Then our views of the earthquake and the smoking mountain will be the +only ones, and your company can control the rights," said Tom to Mr. +Nestor, who agreed with him. +</P> + +<P> +In due time, and without anything out of the ordinary happening the +Flyer reached Shopton, where Tom found a warm welcome awaiting him, not +only from his father, but from a certain young lady, whose name I do +not need to mention. +</P> + +<P> +"And so you got everything you went after, didn't you, Tom," exclaimed +Mr. Period, a few days later, when he had come from New York to get the +remainder of the films. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, and some things I didn't expect," replied Tom. "There was—" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes! Yes! I know!" interrupted the odd picture man. "It was that +jungle fire. That's a magnificent series. None better. And those +scoundrels took your camera; eh?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes. Could you connect them with Turbot and Eckert?" asked Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"No, but I'm sure they were acting for them just the same. I had no +legal evidence to act on, however, so I had to let it go. Turbot and +Eckert won't be in it when I start selling duplicates of the films you +have. And these last ought to be the best of all. I didn't catch that +fellow when I raced after him on the dock. He got away, and has steered +clear of me since," finished Mr. Period. +</P> + +<P> +"And our rivals didn't secure any views like ours," said Tom. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm glad of it," spoke Mr. Period. "Turbot and Eckert bribed one of my +men, and so found out where I was sending messages to you. They even +got a copy of my cablegram. But it did them no good." +</P> + +<P> +"Were all the films clear that I sent you?" asked our hero. +</P> + +<P> +"Every one. Couldn't be better. The animal views were particularly +fine. You must have had your nerve with you to get some of 'em." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, Tom always has his nerve," laughed Ned. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, how soon will you be ready to start out again?" asked the +picture man, as he packed up the last of the films which Tom gave him. +"I'd like to get some views of a Japanese earthquake, and we haven't +any polar views. I want some of them, taken as near the North Pole as +you can get." +</P> + +<P> +Tom gently shook his head. +</P> + +<P> +"What! You don't mean to say you won't get them for me?" cried Mr. +Period. "With that wonderful camera of yours you can get views no one +else ever could." +</P> + +<P> +"Then some one else will have to take them," remarked the young +inventor. "I'll lend you the camera, and an airship, and you can go +yourself, Mr. Period. I'm going to stay home for a while. I did what I +set out to do, and that's enough." +</P> + +<P> +"I'm glad you'll stay home, Tom," said his father. "Now perhaps I'll +get my gyroscope finished." +</P> + +<P> +"And I, my noiseless airship," went on our hero. "No, Mr. Period, +you'll have to excuse me this time. Why don't you go yourself?" he +asked. "You would know just what kind of pictures you wanted." +</P> + +<P> +"No, I'm a promoter of the moving picture business, and I sell films, +but I don't know how to take them," was the answer. "Besides +I—er—well, I don't exactly care for airships, Tom Swift," he finished +with a laugh. "Well, I can't thank you enough for what you did for me, +and I've brought you a check to cover your expenses, and pay you as I +agreed. All the same I'm sorry you won't start for Japan, or the North +Pole." +</P> + +<P> +"Nothing doing," said Tom with a laugh; and Mr. Period departed. +</P> + +<P> +"Have you any idea what you will do next?" asked Ned, a day or so +later, when he and Tom were in the workshop. +</P> + +<P> +"I can't tell until I finish my noiseless airship," was the answer. +"Then something may happen." +</P> + +<P> +Something did, as I shall have the pleasure of telling you about in the +next volume of this series, to be called, "Tom Swift and His Great +Searchlight; or, On the Border for Uncle Sam," and in it will be given +an account of a great lantern our hero made, and how he baffled the +smugglers with it. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, Tom, weren't you dreadfully frightened when you saw that burning +river of lava coming toward you?" asked Mary Nestor, when the young +inventor called on her later and told her some of his adventures. "I +should have been scared to death." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I didn't have time to get scared," answered Tom. "It all +happened so quickly, and then, too I was thinking of my camera. Next I +knew Koku grabbed me, and it was all over." +</P> + +<P> +"But those wild beasts! Didn't they frighten you, especially when the +rhinoceros charged you?" +</P> + +<P> +"If you won't let it get out, I'll make a confession to you," said Tom, +lowering his voice. "I was scared stiff that time, but don't let Ned +know it." +</P> + +<P> +"I won't," promised Mary with a laugh. And now, when Tom is in such +pleasant company, we will take leave of him for a while, knowing that, +sooner or later, he will be seeking new adventures as exciting as those +of the past. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<P CLASS="finis"> +THE END +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<HR> + +<BR><BR> + + +<H3> +THE TOM SWIFT SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By VICTOR APPLETON 12mo. CLOTH. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING. COLORED +WRAPPERS. +</P> + +<P> +These spirited tales convey In a realistic way the wonderful advances +in land and sea locomotion. Stories like these are impressed upon the +memory and their reading is productive only of good. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR CYCLE<BR> +Or Fun and Adventure on the Road +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR BOAT<BR> +Or The Rivals of Lake Carlopa +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP<BR> +Or The Stirring cruise of the Red Cloud +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT<BR> +Or Under the Ocean for Sunken Treasure +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT<BR> +Or The Speediest car on the Road +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE<BR> +Or The castaways of Earthquake Island +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS<BR> +Or The Secret of Phantom Mountain +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE<BR> +Or The Wreck of the Airship +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER<BR> +Or The Quickest Flight on Record +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE<BR> +Or Daring Adventures In Elephant Land +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD<BR> +Or Marvelous Adventures Underground +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER<BR> +Or Seeking the Platinum Treasure +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY<BR> +Or A Daring Escape by Airship +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA<BR> +Or The Perils of Moving Picture Taking +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT<BR> +Or On the Border for Uncle Sam +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS GIANT CANNON<BR> +Or The Longest Shots on Record +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS PHOTO TELEPHONE<BR> +Or The Picture that Saved a Fortune +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AERIAL WARSHIP<BR> +Or The Naval Terror of the Seas +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL<BR> +Or The Hidden city of the Andes +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +THE BUNNY BROWN SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By LAURA LEE HOPE +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +Author of the Popular "Bobbsey Twins" Books +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +wrapper and text illustrations drawn by +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +FLORENCE ENGLAND NOSWORTHY 12mo. DURABLY BOUND. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM +STYLE OF BINDING +</P> + +<P> +These stories by the author of the "Bobbsey Twins" Books are eagerly +welcomed by the little folks from about five to ten years of age. Their +eyes fairly dance with delight at the lively doings of inquisitive +little Bunny Brown and his cunning, trustful sister Sue. +</P> + +<P> +Bunny was a lively little boy, very inquisitive. When he did anything, +Sue followed his leadership. They had many adventures, some comical in +the extreme. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE ON GRANDPA'S FARM<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE PLAYING CIRCUS<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT CAMP REST-A-WHILE<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT AUNT LU'S CITY HOME<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE IN THE BIG WOODS<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE ON AN AUTO TOUR<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AND THEIR SHETLAND PONY<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE GIVING A SHOW<BR> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT CHRISTMAS TREE COVE<BR> +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS BOOKS +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +For Little Men and Women +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By LAURA LEE HOPE +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +Author of "The Bunny Brown" Series. Etc. 12mo. DURABLY BOUND. +ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING +</P> + +<BR> + +<P> +Copyright publications which cannot be obtained elsewhere. Books that +charm the hearts of the little ones, and of which they never tire. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN THE COUNTRY<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT THE SEASHORE<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT SCHOOL<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT SNOW LODGE<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON A HOUSEBOAT<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT MEADOW BROOK<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT HOME<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN A GREAT CITY<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON BLUEBERRY ISLAND<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON THE DEEP BLUE SEA<BR> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN THE GREAT WEST<BR> +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By LAURA LEE HOPE +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +Author of "The Bobbsey Twins Series." +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +12mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING +</P> + +<P> +The adventures of Ruth and Alice DeVere. Their father, a widower, is an +actor who has taken up work for the "movies." Both girls wish to aid +him in his work and visit various localities to act in all sorts of +pictures. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS<BR> +Or First Appearance in Photo Dramas. +</P> + +<P> +Having lost his voice, the father of the girls goes into the movies and +the girls follow. Tells how many "parlor dramas" are filmed. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT OAK FARM<BR> +Or Queer Happenings While Taking Rural Plays. +</P> + +<P> +Full of fun in the country, the haps and mishaps of taking film plays, +and giving an account of two unusual discoveries. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS SNOWBOUND<BR> +Or The Proof on the Film. +</P> + +<P> +A tale of winter adventures in the wilderness, showing how the +photo-play actors sometimes suffer. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS UNDER THE PALMS<BR> +Or Lost in the Wilds of Florida. +</P> + +<P> +How they went to the land of palms, played many parts in dramas before +the camera; were lost, and aided others who were also lost. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT ROCKY RANCH<BR> +Or Great Days Among the Cowboys. +</P> + +<P> +All who have ever seen moving pictures of the rest west will want to +know just how they are made. This volume gives every detail and is full +of clean fun and excitement. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT SEA<BR> +Or a Pictured Shipwreck that Became Real. +</P> + +<P> +A thrilling account of the girls' experiences on the water. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS IN WAR PLAYS<BR> +Or The Sham Battles at Oak Farm. +</P> + +<P> +The girls play important parts in big battle scenes and have plenty of +hard work along with considerable fun. +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By CAPTAIN QUINCY ALLEN +</P> + +<P> +The outdoor chums are four wide-awake lads, sons of wealthy men of a +small city located on a lake. The boys love outdoor life, and are +greatly interested in hunting, fishing, and picture taking. They have +motor cycles, motor boats, canoes, etc., and during their vacations go +everywhere and have all sorts of thrilling adventures. The stories give +full directions for camping out, how to fish, how to hunt wild animals +and prepare the skins for stuffing, how to manage a canoe, how to swim, +etc. Full of the spirit of outdoor life. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS<BR> +Or The First Tour of the Rod, Gun and Camera Club. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON THE LAKE<BR> +Or Lively Adventures on Wildcat Island. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS IN THE FOREST<BR> +Or Laying the Ghost of Oak Ridge. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON THE GULF<BR> +Or Rescuing the Lost Balloonists. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS AFTER BIG GAME.<BR> +Or Perilous Adventures in the Wilderness. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON A HOUSEBOAT<BR> +Or The Rivals of the Mississippi. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS IN THE BIG WOODS<BR> +Or The Rival Hunters at Lumber Run. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS AT CABIN POINT<BR> +Or The Golden Cup Mystery. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +12mo. Averaging 240 pages. Illustrated. Handsomely bound in Cloth. +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By GERTRUDE W. MORRISON +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +12mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING. +</P> + +<P> +Here is a series full of the spirit of high school life of today. The +girls are real flesh-and-blood characters, and we follow them with +interest in school and out. There are many contested matches on track +and field, and on the water, as well as doings in the classroom and on +the school stage. There it plenty of fun and excitement, all clean, +pure and wholesome. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH<BR> +Or Rivals for all Honors. +</P> + +<P> +A stirring tale of high school life, full of fun, with a tomb of +mystery and a strange initiation. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON LAKE LUNA<BR> +Or The Crew That Won. +</P> + +<P> +Telling of water sports and fun galore, and of fine times in camp. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH AT BASKETBALL<BR> +Or The Great Gymnasium Mystery. +</P> + +<P> +Here we have a number of thrilling contests at basketball and in +addition, the solving of a mystery which had bothered the high school +authorities for a long while. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON THE STAGE<BR> +Or The Play That Took the Prize. +</P> + +<P> +How the girls went In for theatricals and how one of them wrote a play +which afterward was made over for the professional stage and brought in +some much-needed money. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON TRACK AND FIELD<BR> +Or The Girl Champions of the School League +</P> + +<P> +This story takes in high school athletics In their most approved and +up-to-date fashion. Full of fun and excitement. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH IN CAMP<BR> +Or The Old Professor's Secret +</P> + +<P> +The girls went camping on Acorn Island and had a delightful time at +boating, swimming and picnic parties. +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By GRAHAM B. FORBES +</P> + +<P> +Never was there a cleaner, brighter, more manly boy than Frank Allen, +the hero of this series of boys' tales, and never was there a better +crowd of lads to associate with than the students of the School. All +boys will read these stories with deep interest. The rivalry between +the towns along the river was of the keenest, and plots and counterplot +to win the champions, at baseball, at football, at boat racing, at +track athletics, and at ice hockey, were without number. Any lad +reading one volume of this series will surely want the others. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH<BR> +Or The All Around Rivals of the School +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE DIAMOND<BR> +Or Winning Out by Pluck +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE RIVER<BR> +Or The Boat Race Plot that Failed +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE GRIDIRON<BR> +Or The Struggle for the Silver Cup +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE ICE<BR> +Or Out for the Hockey Championship +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH IN TRACK ATHLETICS<BR> +Or A Long Run that Won +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH IN WINTER SPORTS<BR> +Or Stirring Doings on Skates and Iceboats +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent">Illustrated. Handsomely bound In cloth, with cover design and +wrappers in color. +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By VICTOR APPLETON +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +12mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING. +</P> + +<P> +Moving pictures and photo plays are famous the world over, and in this +line of books the reader is given a full description of how the films +are made—the scenes of little dramas, indoors and out, trick pictures +to satisfy the curious, soul-stirring pictures of city affairs, life in +the Wild West, among the cowboys and Indians, thrilling rescues along +the seacoast, the daring of picture hunters in the jungle among savage +beasts, and the great risks run in picturing conditions in a land of +earthquakes. The volumes teem with adventures and will be found +interesting from first chapter to last. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS<BR> +Or Perils of a Great City Depicted. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN THE WEST<BR> +Or Taking Scenes Among the Cowboys and Indians. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS ON THE COAST<BR> +Or Showing the Perils of the Deep. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN THE JUNGLE<BR> +Or Stirring Times Among the Wild Animals. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN EARTHQUAKE LAND<BR> +Or Working Amid Many Perils. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS AND THE FLOOD<BR> +Or Perilous Days on the Mississippi. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS AT PANAMA<BR> +Or Stirring Adventures Along the Great Canal. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS UNDER THE SEA<BR> +Or The Treasure of the Lost Ship. +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +By LAURA LEE HOPE Author of the "Bobbsey Twin Books" and "Bunny Brown" +Series. +</P> + +<P> +These tales take in the various adventures participated in by several +bright, up-to-date girls who love outdoor life. They are clean and +wholesome, free from sensationalism, absorbing from the first chapter +to the last. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS OF DEEPDALE<BR> +Or Camping and Tramping for Fun and Health. +</P> + +<P> +Telling bow the girls organized their Camping and Tramping Club, how +they went on a tour, and of various adventures which befell them. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS AT RAINBOW LAKE<BR> +Or Stirring Cruise of the Motor Boat Gem. +</P> + +<P> +One of the girls becomes the proud possessor of a motor boat and +invites her club members to take a trip down the river to Rainbow Lake, +a beautiful sheet of water lying between the mountains. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN A MOTOR CAR<BR> +Or The Haunted Mansion of Shadow Valley. +</P> + +<P> +One of the girls has learned to run a big motor ear, and she invited +the club to go on a tour to visit some distant relatives. On the way +they stop at a deserted mansion and make a surprising discovery. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN A WINTER CAMP<BR> +Or Glorious Days on Skates and Ice Boats. +</P> + +<P> +In this story, the scene is shifted to a winter season. The girls have +some jolly times skating and ice boating, and visit a hunters ramp in +the big woods. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN FLORIDA<BR> +Or Wintering in the Sunny South. +</P> + +<P> +The parents of one of the girls have bought an orange grove in Florida, +and her companions are invited to visit the place. They take a trip +into the interior, where several unusual things happen. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS AT OCEAN VIEW<BR> +Or The Box that Was Found in the Sand. +</P> + +<P> +The girls have great fun and solve a mystery while on an outing along +the New England coast. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS ON PINE ISLAND<BR> +Or A Cave and What it Contained. +</P> + +<P> +A bright, healthful story, full of good times at a bungalow camp on +Pine Island. +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +CHARMING BOOKS FOR GIRLS +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +WHEN PATTY WENT TO COLLEGE, By Jean Webster. Illustrated by C. D. +Williams. +</P> + +<P> +One of the best stories of life in a girl's college that has ever been +written. It is bright, whimsical and entertaining, lifelike, laughable +and thoroughly human. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +JUST PATTY, By Jean Webster. Illustrated by C. M. Relyea. +</P> + +<P> +Patty is full of the joy of living, fun-loving, given to ingenious +mischief for its own sake, with a disregard for pretty convention which +is an unfailing source of joy to her fellows. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE POOR LITTLE RICH GIRL, By Eleanor Gates. With four full page +illustrations. +</P> + +<P> +This story relates the experience of one of those unfortunate children +whose early days are passed in the companionship of a governess, seldom +seeing either parent, and famishing for natural love and tenderness. A +charming play as dramatized by the author. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +REBECCA OF SUNNYBROOK FARM, By Kate Douglas Wiggin. +</P> + +<P> +One of the most beautiful studies of childhood—Rebecca's artistic, +unusual and quaintly charming qualities stand out midst a circle of +austere New Englanders. The stage version is making a phenomenal +dramatic record. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +NEW CHRONICLES OF REBECCA, By Kate Douglas Wiggin. Illustrated by F. +C. Yohn. +</P> + +<P> +Additional episodes in the girlhood of this delightful heroine that +carry Rebecca through various stages to her eighteenth birthday. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +REBECCA MARY, By Annie Hamilton Donnell. Illustrated by Elizabeth +Shippen Green. +</P> + +<P> +This author possesses the rare gift of portraying all the grotesque +little joys and sorrows and scruples of this very small girl with a +pathos that is peculiarly genuine and appealing. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +EMMY LOU: Her Book and Heart, By George Madden Martin, illustrated by +Charles Louis Hinton. +</P> + +<P> +Emmy Lou is irresistibly lovable, because she is so absolutely real. +She is just a bewitchingly innocent, hugable little maid. The book is +wonderfully human. +</P> + +<BR><BR> + +<H3> +BOOKS BY VICTOR APPLETON +</H3> + +<H3> +THE TOM SWIFT SERIES +</H3> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR-CYCLE<BR> +Or Fun and Adventures on the Road +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR-BOAT<BR> +Or The Rivals of Lake Carlopa +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP<BR> +Or the Stirring Cruise of the Red cloud +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT<BR> +Or Under the Ocean for Sunken Treasure +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT<BR> +Or the Speediest Car on the Road +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE<BR> +Or the castaways of Earthquake Island +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS<BR> +Or the Secret of Phantom Mountain +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE<BR> +Or the Wreck of the Airship +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER<BR> +Or The Quickest Flight on Record +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE<BR> +Or Daring Adventures in Elephant Land +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD<BR> +Or Marvelous Adventures Underground +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER<BR> +Or Seeking the Platinum Treasure +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY<BR> +Or A Daring Escape by Airship +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA<BR> +Or Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving Pictures +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT<BR> +Or On the Border for Uncle Sam +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR><BR> + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Tom Swift and his Wizard Camera, by Victor Appleton + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA *** + +***** This file should be named 1283-h.htm or 1283-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/2/8/1283/ + +Produced by Anthony Matonac + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</BODY> + +</HTML> + + diff --git a/old/1283.txt b/old/1283.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6a74079 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/1283.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6163 @@ +Project Gutenberg's Tom Swift and his Wizard Camera, by Victor Appleton + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Tom Swift and his Wizard Camera + or, Thrilling Adventures while taking Moving Pictures + +Author: Victor Appleton + +Posting Date: July 17, 2008 [EBook #1283] +Release Date: April, 1998 +[This file last updated on August 26, 2010] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA *** + + + + +Produced by Anthony Matonac + + + + + + + + + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA + +or + +Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving Pictures + + +by + +VICTOR APPLETON + + + + +CONTENTS + +CHAPTER + + + I A STRANGE OFFER + II A MAN IN THE SNOW BANK + III TOM MAKES UP HIS MIND + IV HELD FAST + V TOM GETS A WARNING + VI TRYING THE CAMERA + VII WHAT THE CAMERA CAUGHT + VIII PHOTOS FROM THE AIRSHIP + IX OFF FOR INDIA + X UNEXPECTED EXCITEMENT + XI AN ELEPHANT STAMPEDE + XII THE LION FIGHT + XIII A SHOT IN TIME + XIV IN A GREAT GALE + XV SNAPPING AN AVALANCHE + XVI TELEGRAPH ORDERS + XVII SUSPICIOUS STRANGERS + XVIII THE NATIVE BATTLE + XIX A HEAVY LOSS + XX AFTER THE ENGLISHMEN + XXI THE JUNGLE FIRE + XXII A DANGEROUS COMMISSION + XXIII AT THE VOLCANO + XXIV THE MOLTEN RIM + XXV THE EARTHQUAKE--CONCLUSION + + + + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA + + +CHAPTER I + +A STRANGE OFFER + + +"Some one to see you, Mr. Tom." + +It was Koku, or August, as he was sometimes called, the new giant +servant of Tom Swift, who made this announcement to the young inventor. + +"Who is it, Koku?" inquired Tom, looking up from his work-bench in the +machine shop, where he was busy over a part of the motor for his new +noiseless airship. "Any one I know? Is it the 'Blessing Man?'" for so +Koku had come to call Mr. Damon, an eccentric friend of Tom's. + +"No, not him. A strange man. I never see before. He say he got quick +business." + +"Quick business; eh? I guess you mean important, Koku," for this +gigantic man, one of a pair that Tom had brought with him after his +captivity in "Giant Land," as he called it, could not speak English +very well, as yet. "Important business; eh, Koku? Did he send in his +card?" + +"No, Mr. Tom. Him say he have no card. You not know him, but he very +much what you call--recited." + +"Excited I guess you mean, Koku. Well, tell him to wait a few minutes, +and I'll see him. You can show him in then. But I say, Koku," and Tom +paused as he looked at the big man, who had attached himself to our +hero, as a sort of personal helper and bodyguard. + +"Yes, Mr. Tom; what is it?" + +"Don't let him go poking around the shop. He might look at some of my +machines that I haven't got fully patented yet. Is he in the front +office?" + +"That's where him am. He be lookin' at pictures on the walls." + +"Oh, that's all right then. Just keep him there. And, Koku, don't let +him come back in the shop here, until I get ready to see him. I'll ring +the bell when I am." + +"All right, Mr. Tom." + +Koku, very proud of his mission of keeping guard over the strange +visitor, marched from the room with his big strides, his long arms and +powerful hands swinging at his sides, for Koku, or August, as Tom had +rechristened him, and as he often called him (for it was in the month +of August that he had located the giants) was a very powerful man. A +veritable giant, being extremely tall, and big in proportion. + +"Be sure. Don't let him in here, Koku!" called Tom, in an additional +warning, as his new servant left the main shop. + +"Sure not!" exclaimed Koku, very earnestly. + +"I don't know who he may be," mused Tom, as he began putting away the +parts to his new noiseless motor, so that the stranger could not see +them, and profit thereby. "It looks rather funny, not sending in his +name. It may be some one who thinks he can spring a trick on me, and +get some points about my inventions, or dad's. + +"It may even be somebody sent on by Andy Foger, or his father. I can't +be too careful. I'll just put everything away that isn't fully covered +by patents, and then if he wants to infringe on any of the machines I +can sue him." + +Tom looked about the shop, which was filled with strange machinery, +most of which had been made by himself, or his father, or under their +combined directions. There was a big biplane in one corner, a small +monoplane in another, parts of a submarine boat hanging up overhead, +and a small, but very powerful, electric auto waiting to have some +repairs made to it, for on his last trip in it Tom Swift had suffered a +slight accident. + +"There, I guess he can't see anything but what I want him to," mused +Tom, as he put away the last part of a new kind of motor, from which he +hoped great things. "Let's see, yes, it's out of sight now. I wish Ned +Newton, or Mr. Damon were here to be a witness in case he starts +anything. But then I have Koku, even if he doesn't speak much English +yet. If it comes to blows--well, I wouldn't want that giant to hit me," +finished Tom with a laugh, as he rang the bell to announce to his +servant that the visitor might be shown in. + +There was a sound outside the door that separated the business office +from the main shop, and Tom heard Koku exclaim: + +"Hold on! Wait! I go first. You wait!" + +"What's the matter with me going ahead?" demanded a quick, snappy +voice. "I'm in a hurry, and--" + +"You wait! I go first," was the giant's reply, and then came the sound +of a scuffle. + +"Ouch! Say! Hold on there, my man! Take your hand off my shoulder! +You're crushing me with those big fingers of yours!" + +This was evidently the visitor remonstrating with the giant. + +"Humph! I guess Koku must have grabbed him," said Tom softly. "I don't +like that sort of a visitor. What's his hurry getting in here?" and our +hero looked about, to see if he had a weapon at hand in case of an +attack. Often cranks had forced their way into his shop, with pet +inventions which they wanted him to perfect after they had themselves +failed. Tom saw a heavy iron bar at hand, and knew this would serve to +protect him. + +"You come after me!" exclaimed Koku, when the voice of the other had +ceased. "Do you stand under me?" + +"Oh, yes, I understand all right. I'll keep back. But I didn't mean +anything. I'm just in a hurry to see Tom Swift, that is all. I'm +always in a hurry in fact. I've lost nearly a thousand dollars this +morning, just by this delay. I want to see Mr. Swift at once; and have +a talk with him." + +"Another crank, I guess," mused Tom. "Well, I'm not going to waste much +time on him." + +A moment later the door opened, and into the shop stepped Koku, +followed by a short, stout, fussy little man, wearing a flaming red +tie, but otherwise his clothes were not remarkable. + +"Is this Mr. Tom Swift?" asked the stranger, as he advanced and held +out his hand to the young man. + +"Yes," answered Tom, looking carefully at the visitor. He did not seem +to be dangerous, he had no weapon, and, Tom was relieved to note that +he did not carry some absurd machine, or appliance, that he had made, +hoping to get help in completing it. The youth was trying to remember +if he had ever seen the stranger before, but came to the conclusion +that he had not. + +"Sorry to take up your time," went on the man, "but I just had to see +you. No one else will do. I've heard lots about you. That was a great +stunt you pulled off, getting those giants for the circus. This is one; +isn't he?" and he nodded toward Koku. + +"Yes," replied Tom, wondering if the little man was in such a hurry why +he did not get down to business. + +"I thought so," the caller went on, as he shook hands with Tom. "Once +you felt his grip you'd know he was a giant, even if you didn't see +him. Yes, that was a great stunt. And going to the caves of ice, too, +and that diamond-making affair. All of 'em great. I--" + +"How did you know about them?" interrupted Tom, wishing the man would +tell his errand. + +"Oh, you're better known than you have any idea of, Tom Swift. As soon +as I got this idea of mine I said right away, to some of the others in +my business, I says, says I, 'Tom Swift is the boy for us. I'll get him +to undertake this work, and then it will be done to the Queen's taste. +Tom's the boy who can do it,' I says, and they all agreed with me. So I +came here to-day, and I'm sorry I had to wait to see you, for I'm the +busiest man in the world, I believe, and, as I said, I've lost about a +thousand dollars waiting to have a talk with you. I--" + +"I am sorry," interrupted Tom, and he was not very cordial. "But I was +busy, and--" + +"All right! All right! Don't apologize!" broke in the man in rapid +tones, while both Tom, and his servant, Koku, looked in surprise at the +quick flow of language that came from him. "Don't apologize for the +world. It's my fault for bothering you. And I'll lose several thousand +dollars, willingly, if you'll undertake this job. I'll make money from +it as it is. It's worth ten thousand dollars to you, I should say, and +I'm willing to pay that." + +He looked about, as though for a seat, and Tom, apologizing for his +neglect in offering one, shoved a box forward. + +"We don't have chairs in here," said the young inventor with a smile. +"Now if you will tell me what you--" + +"I'm coming right to it. I'll get down to business in a moment," +interrupted the man as he sat down on the box, not without a grunt or +two, for he was very stout. "I'm going to introduce myself in just a +second, and then I'm going to tell you who I am. And I hope you'll take +up my offer, though it may seem a strange one." + +The man took out a pocketbook, and began searching through it, +evidently for some card or paper. + +"He's as odd as Mr. Damon is, when he's blessing everything," mused +Tom, as he watched the man. + +"I thought I had a card with me, but I haven't," the visitor went on. +"No matter. I'm James Period--promoter of all kinds of amusement +enterprises, from a merry-go-'round to a theatrical performance. I want +you to--" + +"No more going after giants," interrupted. Tom. "It's too dangerous, +and I haven't time--" + +"No, it has nothing to do with giants," spoke Mr. Period, as he glanced +up at Koku, who towered over him as he sat on the box near Tom. + +"Well?" returned Tom. + +"This is something entirely new. It has never been done before, though +if you should happen to be able to get a picture of giants don't miss +the opportunity." + +"Get a picture?" exclaimed Tom, wondering if, after all, his visitor +might not be a little insane. + +"Pictures, yes. Listen. I'm James Period. Jim, if you like it better, +or just plain 'Spotty.' That's what most of my friends call me. Get the +idea? A period is a spot. I'm a Period, therefor I'm a spot. But that +isn't the real reason. It's because I'm always Johnny on the Spot when +anything is happening. If it's a big boxing exhibition, I'm there. If +it's a coronation, I'm there, or some of my men are. If it's a Durbar +in India, you'll find Spotty on the spot. That's me. If there's going +to be a building blown up with dynamite--I'm on hand; or some of my +men. If there's a fire I get there as soon as the engines do--if it's +a big one. Always on the spot--that's me--James Period--Spotty for +short. Do you get me?" and he drew a long breath and looked at Tom, his +head on one side. + +"I understand that you are--" + +"In the moving picture business," interrupted Mr. Period, who never +seemed to let Tom finish a sentence. "I'm the biggest moving picture +man in the world--not in size, but in business. I make all the best +films. You've seen some of 'em I guess. Every one of 'em has my picture +on the end of the film. Shows up great. Advertising scheme--get me?" + +"Yes," replied Tom, as he recalled that he had seen some of the films +in question, and good ones they were too. "I see your point, but--" + +"You want to know why I come to you; don't you?" again interrupted +"Spotty," with a laugh. "Well, I'll tell you. I need you in my +business. I want you to invent a new kind of moving picture camera. A +small light one--worked by electricity--a regular wizard camera. I want +you to take it up in an airship with you, and then go to all sorts of +wild and strange countries, Africa, India--the jungles--get pictures of +wild animals at peace and fighting--herds of elephants--get scenes of +native wars--earthquakes--eruptions of volcanoes--all the newest and +most wonderful pictures you can. You'll have to make a new kind of +camera to do it. The kind we use won't do the trick. + +"Now do you get me? I'm going to give you ten thousand dollars, above +all your expenses, for some films such as I've been speaking of. I want +novelty. Got to have it in my business! You can do it. Now will you?" + +"I hardly think--" began Tom. + +"Don't answer me now," broke in Mr. Period. "Take four minutes to think +it over. Or even five. I guess I can wait that long. Take five +minutes. I'll wait while you make up your mind, but I know you'll do +it. Five minutes--no more," and hastily getting up off the box Mr. +Period began impatiently pacing up and down the shop. + + + + +CHAPTER II + +A MAN IN THE SNOW BANK + + +Tom Swift looked somewhat in surprise at his strange visitor. It had +all happened so suddenly, the offer had been such a strange one, the +man himself--Mr. Period--was so odd, that our hero hardly knew what to +think. The moving picture agent continued pacing up and down the room +now and then looking at his watch as if to note when the five minutes +had passed. + +"No," said Tom to himself. "I'm not going to take this offer. There's +too much work and risk attached to it. I want to stay at home and work +on my noiseless motor for the airship. After that--well--I don't know +what I'll do. I'll tell Mr. Period that he needn't wait the five +minutes. My mind is made up now!" + +But as Tom was about to make this announcement, and dismiss his caller, +he looked again at the visitor. There was something attractive about +him--about his hasty way of talking, about his manner of interrupting, +about the way he proposed matters. Tom was interested in spite of +himself. + +"Well," he reflected, "I may as well wait until the five minutes are +up, anyhow." + +Koku, the giant servant, glanced at his young master, as if to ask if +there was anything that he could do. Tom shook his head, and then the +big man strolled over to the other side of the machine shop, at the +same time keeping a careful eye on Mr. Period. + +While Tom is waiting for the time to expire, I will take a few minutes +to tell you something more about him. Those of my friends who have read +the previous books in this series need no introduction to my hero, but +those who may chance upon this as their first book in the Tom Swift +series, will like to be more formally introduced. + +Tom, whose mother had been dead some years, lived with his father, +Barton Swift, in the town of Shopton. Mr. Swift was an inventor of +prominence, and his son was fast following in his footsteps. A Mrs. +Baggert kept house for the Swifts, and another member of the household +was Eradicate Sampson, an aged colored man, who said he used to +"eradicate" the dirt. He had been with Tom on many trips, but of late +was getting old and feeble. Then there was Garret Jackson, an engineer +employed by the Swifts. These were all the immediate members of the +household. + +Tom had a chum, Ned Newton, who used to work in a bank, and there was a +girl, Mary Nestor, a daughter of Amos Nestor, in which young lady Tom +was much interested. + +Eradicate Sampson had a mule, Boomerang, of whom he thought almost as +much as he did of Tom. Eradicate was a faithful friend and servant, +but, of late, Koku, or August, the giant, had rather supplanted him. I +must not forget Mr. Wakefield Damon, of Waterfield, a village near +Shopton. Mr. Damon was an odd man, always blessing everything. He and +Tom were good friends, and had been on many trips together. + +The first book of the series was called "Tom Swift and His +Motor-Cycle," and related how Tom bought the cycle from Mr. Damon, +after the latter had met with an accident on it, and it was in this way +that our hero became acquainted with the odd man. + +Tom had many adventures on his motor-cycle, and, later on he secured a +motor-boat, in which he beat his enemy, Andy Foger, in a race. Next Tom +built an airship, and in this he went on a wonderful trip. Returning +from this he and his father heard about a treasure sunken under the +ocean. In his submarine boat Tom secured the valuables, and made a +large sum for himself. + +In his electric runabout, which was the swiftest car on the road, Tom +was able to save from ruin a bank in which his father was interested, +and, a short time after that, he went on a trip in an airship, with a +man who had invented a new kind. The airship was smashed, and fell to +Earthquake Island, where there were some refugees from a shipwreck, +among them being the parents of Mary Nestor. In the volume called "Tom +Swift and His Wireless Message," I told how he saved these people. + +When Tom went among the diamond makers he had more strange adventures, +on that trip discovering the secret of phantom mountain. He had bad +luck when he went to the caves of ice, for there his airship was +wrecked. + +When Tom made the trip in his sky racer he broke all records for an +aerial flight, incidentally saving his father's life. It was some time +after this when he invented an electric rifle, and went to elephant +land, to rescue some missionaries from the red pygmies. + +The eleventh volume of the series is called "Tom Swift in the Land of +Gold," and relates his adventures underground, while the next one tells +of a new machine he invented--an air-glider--which he used to save the +exiles of Siberia, incidentally, on that trip, finding a valuable +deposit of platinum. + +As I have said, it was on his trip to giant land that Tom got his big +servant. This book, the thirteenth of the series, is called "Tom Swift +in Captivity," for the giants captured him and his friends, and it was +only by means of their airship that they made their daring escape. + +Tom had been back from the strange land some time now. One giant he had +turned over to the circus representative for whom he had undertaken the +mission, and the other he retained to work around his shop, as +Eradicate was getting too old. It was now winter, and there had been +quite a fall of snow the day before Mr. Period, the odd moving picture +man, called on Tom. There were many big drifts outside the building. + +Tom had fitted up a well-equipped shop, where he and his father worked +on their inventions. Occasionally Ned Newton, or Mr. Damon, would come +over to help them, but of late Tom had been so busy on his noiseless +motor that he had not had time to even see his friends. + +"Well, I guess the five minutes have passed, and my mind is made up," +thought Tom, as he looked at his watch. "I might as well tell Mr. +Period that I can't undertake his commission. In the first place it +isn't going to be an easy matter to make an electric moving picture +camera. I'd have to spend a lot of time studying up the subject, and +then I might not be able to get it to work right. + +"And, again, I can't spare the time to go to all sorts of wild and +impossible places to get the pictures. It's all well enough to talk +about getting moving pictures of natives in battle, or wild beasts +fighting, or volcanoes in action, but it isn't so easy to do it. Then, +too, I'd have to make some changes in my airship if I went on that +trip. No, I can't go. I'll tell him he'll have to find some one else." + +Mr. Period pulled out his watch, opened it quickly, snapped it shut +again, and exclaimed: + +"Well, how about it, Tom Swift? When can you start! The sooner the +better for me! You'll want some money for expenses I think. I brought +my check book along, also a fountain pen. I'll give you a thousand +dollars now, for I know making an electric moving picture camera isn't +going to be cheap work. Then, when you get ready to start off in your +airship, you'll need more money. I'll be Johnny-on-the-spot all right, +and have it ready for you. Now when do you think you can start?" + +He sat down at a bench, and began filling out a check. + +"Hold on!" cried Tom, amused in spite of himself. "Don't sign that +check, Mr. Period. I'm not going." + +"Not going?" The man's face showed blank amazement. + +"No," went on Tom. "I can't spare the time. I'm sorry, but you'll have +to get some one else." + +"Some one else? But who can I get?" + +"Why, there are plenty who would be glad of the chance." + +"But they can't invent an electric moving picture camera, and, if they +could, they wouldn't know enough to take pictures with it. It's got to +be you or no one, Tom Swift. Look here, I'll make it fifteen thousand +dollars above expenses." + +"No, I'm sorry, but I can't go. My work here keeps me too busy. + +"Oh, pshaw! Now, look here, Tom Swift! Do you know who sent me to see +you?" + +"It was Mr. Nestor, who has a daughter named Mary, I believe. Mr. +Nestor is one of the directors in our company, and one day, when he +told me about you sending a wireless message from Earthquake Island, I +knew you would be the very man for me. So now you see you'll be doing +Mr. Nestor a favor, as well as me, if you go on this trip." + +Tom was somewhat surprised, yet he realized that Mr. Period was +speaking the truth. Mr. Nestor was identified with many new +enterprises. Yet the youth was firm. + +"I really can't go," said our hero. "I'd like to, but I can't. I'd +like to oblige Mr. Nestor, for--well, for more reasons than one," and +Tom blushed slightly. "But it is out of the question. I really can't +go." + +"But you must!" insisted the camera man. "I won't take 'no' for an +answer. You've got to go, Tom Swift, do you hear that? You've go to go?" + +Mr. Period was apparently very much excited. He strode over to Tom and +smote his hands together to emphasize what he said. Then he shook his +finger at Tom, to impress the importance of the matter on our hero. + +"You've just got to go!" he cried. "You're the only one who can help +me, Tom. Do go! I'll pay you well, and--oh, well, I know you don't need +the money, exactly, but--say, you've got to go!" + +In his earnestness Mr. Period laid his hand on Tom's arm. The next +instant something happened. + +With a few big strides Koku was beside the picture man. With great +quickness he grasped Mr. Period by the coat collar, lifted him off his +feet with one hand, and walked over to a window with him, easily +lifting him above the floor. + +With one fling the giant tossed the short, stout gentleman out into a +snow bank, while Tom looked on, too surprised to do anything, even if +he had had the chance. + +"There. You touch Tom Swift again, and I sit on you and keep you under +snow!" cried the giant, while Mr. Period kicked and squirmed about in +the drift, as Tom made a leap forward to help him out. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +TOM MAKES UP HIS MIND + + +"Great Scott!" yelled the picture man. "What in the world happened to +me? Did I get kicked by that mule Boomerang of Eradicate's, that I've +heard so much about? Or was it an earthquake, such as I want to get a +picture of? What happened?" + +He was still floundering about in the deep bank of snow that was just +outside the window. Fortunately the sash had been up, and Koku had +tossed Mr. Period through the open window. Otherwise, had there been +glass, the well-meaning, but unreasoning giant would probably have +thrown his victim through that, and he might have been badly cut. Tom +had the window open for fresh air, as it was rather close in the shop. + +"Why, Koku!" exclaimed the young inventor, as he leaned out of the +window, and extended his hand to the moving picture man to help him out +of the drift. "What do you mean by that? Have you gone crazy?" + +"No, but no one shall lay hands on my master!" declared the giant half +savagely. "I have vowed to always protect you from danger, in return +for what you did for me. I saw this man lay his hand on you. In another +moment he might have killed you, had not Koku been here. There is no +danger when I am by," and he stretched out his huge arms, and looked +ferocious. "I have turned over that man, your enemy!" he added. + +"Yes, you overturned me all right," admitted Mr. Period, as he got to +his feet, and crawled in through the window to the shop again. "I went +head over heels. I'm glad it was clean snow, and not a mud bank, Tom. +What in the world is the matter with him?" + +"I guess he thought you were going to harm me," said Tom in a low +voice, as the picture man came in the shop. "Koku is very devoted to +me, and sometimes he makes trouble," the youth went on. "But he means +it all for the best. I am very sorry for what happened," and Tom aided +Mr. Period in brushing the snow off his garments. "Koku, you must beg +the pardon of this gentleman," Tom directed. + +"What for?" the giant wanted to know. + +"For throwing him into the snow. It is not allowed to do such things in +this country, even though it is in Giant Land. Beg his pardon. + +"I shall not," said the giant calmly, for Tom had taught him to speak +fairly good English, though sometimes he got his words backwards. + +"The man was about to kill you, and I stopped him--I will stop him once +more, though if he does not like the snow, I can throw him somewhere +else." + +"No! No! You must not do it!" cried Tom. "He meant no harm. He is my +friend." + +"I am glad to hear you say that," exclaimed the picture man. "I have +hopes that you will do what I want." + +"He your friend?" asked Koku wonderingly. + +"Certainly; and you must beg his pardon for what you did," insisted Tom. + +"Very well. I am glad you did not hurt yourself," said the giant, and +with that "apology" he stalked out of the room, his feelings evidently +very much disturbed. + +"Ha! Ha!" laughed Mr. Period. "I guess he can't see any one but you, +Tom. But never mind. I know he didn't mean anything, and, as I'm none +the worse I'll forgive him. My necktie isn't spotted; is it?" + +"No, the snow didn't seem to do that any harm," replied the young +inventor, as he looked at the brilliant piece of red silk around Mr. +Period's collar. + +"I am very particular about my neckties," went on the picture man. "I +always wear one color. My friends never forget me then." + +Tom wondered how they could ever forget him, even though he wore no +tie, for his figure and face were such as to not easily be forgotten. + +"I'm glad it's not soiled," went on "Spotty" as he liked to be called. +"Now, Tom, you said you were my friend. Prove it by accepting my offer. +Build that wizard camera, and get me some moving pictures that will be +a sensation. Say you will!" + +He looked appealingly at Tom, and, remembering the rather rude and +unexpected treatment to which Koku had submitted the gentleman, Tom +felt his mind changing. Still he was not yet ready to give in. He +rather liked the idea the more he thought of it, but he felt that he +had other duties, and much to occupy him at home, especially if he +perfected his silent motor. + +"Will you go?" asked Mr. Period, picking up his fountain pen and check +book, that he had laid aside when he walked over to Tom, just before +the giant grasped him. "Say you will." + +The young inventor was silent a moment. He thought over the many +adventures he had gone through--in the caves of ice, in the city of +gold, escaping from the giants, and the red pygmies--He went over the +details of his trips through the air, of the dangers under the seas, of +those he had escaped from on Earthquake Island. Surely he was entitled +to a little rest at home. + +And yet there was a lure to it all. A certain fascination that was hard +to resist. Mr. Period must have seen what was going on in Tom's mind, +for he said: + +"I know you're going. I can see it. Why, it will be just the very thing +you need. You'll get more fame out of this thing than from any of your +other inventions. Come, say you'll do it. + +"I'll tell you what I'll do!" he went on eagerly. "After you make the +camera, and take a lot of films, showing strange and wonderful scenes, +I'll put at the end of each film, next to my picture, your name, and a +statement showing that you took the originals. How's that? Talk about +being advertised! Why you can't beat it! Millions of people will read +your name at the picture shows every night." + +"I am not looking for advertisements," said Tom, with a laugh. + +"Well, then, think of the benefit you will be to science," went on Mr. +Period quickly. "Think of the few people who have seen wild animals as +they are, of those who have ever seen an earthquake, or a volcano in +action. You can go to Japan, and get pictures of earthquakes. They have +them on tap there. And as for volcanoes, why the Andes mountains are +full of 'em. Think of how many people will be thankful to you for +showing them these wonderful scenes." + +"And think of what might happen if I should take a tumble into a crack +in the earth, or down a hot volcano, or fall into a jungle when there +was a fight on among the elephants," suggested Tom. "My airship might +take a notion to go down when I was doing the photographing," he added. + +"No. Nothing like that will happen to Tom Swift," was the confident +answer of the picture man. "I've read of your doings. You don't have +accidents that you can't get the better of. But come, I know you're +thinking of it, and I'm sure you'll go. Let me make you out this check, +sign a contract which I have all ready, and then get to work on the +camera." + +Tom was silent a moment. Then he said: + +"Well, I admit that there is something attractive about it. I hoped I +was going to stay home for a long time. But--" + +"Then you'll go!" cried Mr. Period eagerly. "Here's the money," and he +quickly filled out a check for Tom's first expenses, holding the slip +of paper toward the young inventor. + +"Wait a minute! Hold on!" cried Tom. "Not so fast if you please. I +haven't yet made up my mind." + +"But you will; won't you?" asked Mr. Period. + +"Well, I'll make up my mind, one way or the other," replied the young +man. "I won't say I'll go, but--" + +"I'll tell you what I'll do!" interrupted Mr. Period. "I'm a busy man, +and every second is worth money to me. But I'll wait for you to make up +your mind. I'll give you until to-morrow night. How's that? Fair, isn't +it?" + +"Yes--I think so. I am afraid--" + +"I'm not!" broke in the picture man. "I know you'll decide to go. Think +of the fun and excitement you'll have. Now I've taken up a lot of your +time, and I'm going to leave you alone. I'll be back tomorrow evening +for my answer. But I know you're going to get those moving pictures for +me. Is that giant of yours anywhere about?" he asked, as he looked +cautiously around before leaving the shop. "I don't want to fall into +his hands again." + +"I don't blame you," agreed Tom. "I never knew him to act that way +before. But I'll go to the gate with you, and Koku will behave himself. +I am sorry--" + +"Don't mention it!" broke in the picture man. "It was worth all I +suffered, if you go, and I know you will. Don't trouble yourself to +come out. I can find my way, and if your giant comes after me, I'll +call for help." + +He hurried out before Tom could follow, and, hearing the gate click a +little later, and no call for help coming, our hero concluded that his +visitor had gotten safely away. + +"Well, what am I going to do about it?" mused Tom, as he resumed work +on his silent motor. He had not been long engaged in readjusting some +of the valves, when he was again interrupted. + +This time it was his chum, Ned Newton, who entered, and, as Ned was +well known to the giant, nothing happened. + +"Well, what's up, Tom?" asked Ned. + +"Why, did you notice anything unusual?" asked Tom. + +"I saw Koku standing at the gate a while ago, looking down the road at +a short stout man, with a red tie. Your giant seemed rather excited +about something." + +"Oh, yes. I'll tell you about it," and Tom related the details of Mr. +Period's visit. + +"Are you going to take his offer?" asked Ned. + +"I've got until tomorrow to make up my mind. What would you do, Ned?" + +"Why, I'd take it in a minute, if I knew how to make an electric +camera. I suppose it has to be a very speedy one, to take the kind of +pictures he wants. Wait, hold on, I've just thought of a joke. It must +be a swift camera--catch on--you're Swift, and you make a swift camera; +see the point?" + +"I do," confessed Tom, with a laugh. "Well, Ned, I've been thinking it +over, but I can't decide right away. I will tomorrow night, though." + +"Then I'm coming over, and hear what it is. If you decide to go, maybe +you'll take me along." + +"I certainly will, and Mr. Damon, too." + +"How about the giant?" + +"Well, I guess there'll be room for him. But I haven't decided yet. +Hand me that wrench over there; will you," and then Tom and Ned began +talking about the new apparatus on which the young inventor was working. + +True to his promise Mr. Period called the next evening. He found Tom, +Ned and Mr. Swift in the library, talking over various matters. + +"Well, Tom, have you made up your mind?" asked the caller, when Mrs. +Baggert, the housekeeper, had shown him into the room. "I hope you +have, and I hope it is favorable to me." + +"Yes," said Tom slowly, "I've thought it all over, and I have decided +that I will--" + +At that moment there was a loud shouting outside the house, and the +sound of some one running rapidly through the garden that was just +outside the low library window--a garden now buried deep under snow. + +"What's that?" cried Ned, jumping to his feet. + +"That was Koku's voice," replied Tom, "and I guess he was chasing after +some one." + +"They'll need help if that giant gets hold of them," spoke Mr. Period +solemnly, while the noise outside increased in volume. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +HELD FAST + + +"Here, Tom! Come back! Where are you going?" cried aged Mr. Swift, as +his son started toward the window. + +"I'm going to see what's up, and who it is that Koku is chasing," +replied the young inventor. + +As he spoke he opened the window, which went all the way down to the +floor. He stepped out on a small balcony, put his hand on the railing, +and was about to leap over. Back of him was his father, Mr. Period and +Ned. + +"Come back! You may get hurt!" urged Mr. Swift. He had aged rapidly in +the last few months, and had been obliged to give up most of his +inventive work. Naturally, he was very nervous about his son. + +"Don't worry, dad," replied the youth. "I'm not in much danger when +Koku is around." + +"That's right," agreed the moving picture man. "I'd sooner have that +giant look after me than half a dozen policemen." + +The noise had now grown fainter, but the sound of the pursuit could +still be heard. Koku was shouting in his hearty tones, and there was +the noise of breaking twigs as the chase wound in and out of the garden +shrubbery. + +Tom paused a moment, to let his eyes get somewhat used to the darkness. +There was a crescent moon, that gave a little light, and the snow on +the ground made it possible to notice objects fairly well. + +"See anything?" asked Ned, as he joined his chum on the balcony. + +"No, but I'm going to have a closer look. Here goes!" and Tom leaped to +the ground. + +"I'm with you," added Ned, as he followed. + +Then came another voice, shouting: + +"Dat's de way! Catch him! I'se comm', I is! Ef we gits him we'll tie +him up, an' let Boomerang walk on him!" + +"Here comes Eradicate," announced Tom, with a look back toward his +chum, and a moment later the aged colored man, who had evidently +started on the chase with Koku, but who had been left far behind, swung +totteringly around the corner of the house. + +"Did ye cotch him, Massa Tom?" asked Eradicate. "Did ye cotch de +raskil?" + +"Not yet, Rad. But Koku is after him. Who was he, and what did he do?" + +"Didn't do nuffin yit, Massa Tom, 'case as how he didn't git no +chance," replied the colored man, as he hurried along as rapidly as he +could beside the two youths. "Koku and I was too quick for him. Koku +an' me was a-sittin' in my shack, sort of talkin' togedder, when we +hears a racket neah de chicken house. I'se mighty partial t' de +chickens, an' I didn't want nobody t' 'sturb 'em. Koku was jes' de +same, an' when we hears dat noise, up we jumps, an' gits t' chasm.' He +runned dis way, an' us was arter him, but land lub yo', ole Eradicate +ain't so spry as he uster be an' Koku an' de chicken thief got ahead ob +me. Leastwise he ain't no chicken thief yit, 'case as how he didn't git +in de coop, but he meant t' be one, jes' de same." + +"Are you sure he was after the chickens?" asked Tom, with quick +suspicion in his mind, for, several times of late, unscrupulous persons +had tried to enter his shop, to get knowledge of his valuable +inventions before they were patented. + +"Course he were arter de chickens," replied Eradicate. "But he didn't +git none." + +"Come on, Ned!" cried Tom, breaking into a run. "I want to catch +whoever this was. Did you see him, Rad?" + +"Only jes' had a glimpse ob his back." + +"Well, you go back to the house and tell father and Mr. Period about +it. Ned and I will go on with Koku. I hope to get the fellow." + +"Why, Tom?" asked his chum. + +"Because I think he was after bigger game than chickens. My noiseless +motor, for the new airship, is nearly complete, and it may have been +some one trying to get that. I received an offer from a concern the +other day, who wished to purchase it, and, when I refused to sell, they +seemed rather put out." + +The two lads raced on, while Eradicate tottered back to the house, +where he found Mr. Swift and the picture man awaiting him. + +"I guess he got away," remarked Ned, after he and his chum had covered +nearly the length of the big garden. + +"I'm afraid so," agreed Tom. "I can't hear Koku any more. Still, I'm +not going to give up." + +Pantingly they ran on, and, a little later, they met the big man coming +back. + +"Did he get away?" asked Tom. + +"Yes, Mr. Tom, he scaped me all right." + +"Escaped you mean, Koku. Well, never mind. You did your best." + +"I would like to have hold of him," spoke the giant, as he stretched +out his big arms. + +"Did you know who he was?" inquired Ned. + +"No, I couldn't see his face," and he gave the same description of the +affair as had Eradicate. + +"Was it a full grown man, or some one about my size?" Tom wanted to +know. + +"A man," replied the giant. + +"Why do you ask that?" inquired Ned, as the big fellow went on to +resume his talk with Eradicate, and the two chums turned to go into the +house, after the fruitless chase. + +"Because, I thought it might be Andy Foger," was Tom's reply. "It +would be just like him, but if it was a man, it couldn't be him. Andy's +rather short." + +"Besides, he doesn't live here any more," said Ned. + +"I know, but I heard Sam Snedecker, who used to be pretty thick with +him, saying the other day that he expected a visit from Andy. I hope he +doesn't come back to Shopton, even for a day, for he always tries to +make trouble for me. Well, let's go in, and tell 'em all about our +chase after a chicken thief." + +"And so he got away?" remarked Mr. Swift, when Tom had completed his +story. + +"Yes," answered the young inventor, as he closed, and locked, the low +library window, for there was a chilly breeze blowing. "I think I will +have to rig up the burglar alarm on my shop again. I don't want to take +any chances." + +"Do you remember what we were talking about, when that interruption +came?" asked Mr. Period, after a pause. "You were saying, Tom, that you +had made up your mind, and that was as far as you got. What is your +answer to my offer?" + +"Well," spoke the lad slowly, and with a smile, "I think I will--" + +"Now don't say 'no'"; interrupted the picture man. "If you are going to +say 'no' take five minutes more, or even ten, and think it over +carefully. I want you--" + +"I wasn't going to say 'no,'" replied Tom. "I have decided to accept +your offer, and I'll get right at work on the electrical camera, and +see what I can do in the way of getting moving pictures for you." + +"You will? Say, that's great! That's fine! I knew you would accept, but +I was the least bit afraid you might not, without more urging." + +"Of course," began Tom, "it will take--" + +"Not another word. Just wait a minute," interrupted Mr. Period in his +breezy fashion. "Take this." + +He quickly filled out a check and handed it to Tom. + +"Now sign this contract, which merely says that you will do your best +to get pictures for me, and that you won't do it for any other concern, +and everything will be all right. Sign there," he added, pointing to a +dotted line, and thrusting a fountain pen into Tom's hand. The lad read +over the agreement, which was fair enough, and signed it, and Ned +affixed his name as a witness. + +"Now when can you go?" asked Mr. Period eagerly. + +"Not before Spring, I'm afraid," replied Torn. "I have first to make +the camera, and then my airship needs overhauling if I am to go on such +long trips as will be necessary in case I am to get views of wild +beasts in the jungle." + +"Well, make it as soon as you can," begged Mr. Period. "I can have the +films early next Fall then, and they will be in season for the Winter +runs at the theatres. Now, I'm the busiest man in the world, and I +believe I have lost five hundred dollars by coming here to-night. +Still, I don't regret it. I'm going back now, and I'll expect to hear +from you when you are ready to start. There's my address. Good-bye," +and thrusting a card into Tom's hand he hurried out of the room. + +"Won't you stop all night?" called Mr. Swift after him. + +"Sorry. I'd like to but can't. Got a big contract I must close in New +York to-morrow morning. I've ordered a special train to be at the +Shopton station in half an hour, and I must catch that. Good night!" +and Mr. Period hurried away. + +"Say, he's a hustler all right!" exclaimed Ned. + +"Yes, and I've got to hustle if I invent that camera," added Tom. "It's +got to be a specially fast one, and one that can take pictures from a +long distance. Electricity is the thing to use, I guess." + +"Then you are really going off on this trip. Tom?" asked his father, +rather wistfully. + +"I'm afraid I am," replied his son. "I thought I could stay at home for +a while, but it seems not." + +"I was in hopes you could give me a little time to help me on my +gyroscope invention," went on the aged man. "But I suppose it will keep +until you come back. It is nearly finished." + +"Yes, and I don't like stopping work on my noiseless motor," spoke Tom. +"But that will have to wait, too." + +"Do you know where you are going?" inquired Ned. + +"Well, I'll have to do considerable traveling I suppose to get all the +films he wants. But once I'm started I'll like it I guess. Of course +you're coming, Ned." + +"I hope so." + +"Of course you are!" insisted Tom, as if that settled it. "And I'm sure +Mr. Damon will go also. I haven't seen him in some time. I hope he +isn't ill." + +Tom started work on his Wizard Camera, as he called it, the next +day--that is he began drawing the designs, and planning how to +construct it. Ned helped him, and Koku was on hand in case he was +needed, but there was little he could do, as yet. Tom made an +inspection of his shop the morning after the chicken thief scare, but +nothing seemed to have been disturbed. + +A week passed, and Tom had all the plans drawn for the camera. He had +made several experiments with different forms of electricity for +operating the mechanism, and had decided on a small, but very powerful, +storage battery to move the film, and take the pictures. + +This storage battery, which would be inside the camera, would operate +it automatically. That is, the camera could be set up any place, in the +jungle, or on the desert, it could be left alone, and would take +pictures without any one being near it. Tom planned to have it operate +at a certain set time, and stop at a certain time, and he could set the +dials to make this time any moment of the day or night. For there was +to be a powerful light in connection with the camera, in order that +night views might be taken. Besides being automatic the camera could be +worked by hand. + +When it was not necessary to have the camera operate by the storage +battery, it could be connected to wires and worked by an ordinary set +of batteries, or by a dynamo. This was for use on the airship, where +there was a big electrical machine. I shall tell you more about the +camera as the story proceeds. + +One afternoon Tom was alone in the shop, for he had sent Koku on an +errand, and Eradicate was off in a distant part of the grounds, doing +some whitewashing, which was his specialty. Ned had not come over, and +Mr. Swift, having gone to see some friends, and Mrs. Baggert being at +the store, Tom, at this particular time, was rather isolated. + +He was conducting some delicate electrical experiments, and to keep the +measuring instruments steady he had closed all the windows and doors of +his shop. The young inventor was working at a bench in one corner, and +near him, standing upright, was a heavy shaft of iron, part of his +submarine, wrapped in burlap, and padded, to keep it from rusting. + +"Now," said Tom to himself, as he mixed two kinds of acid in a jar, to +produce a new sort of electrical current, "I will see if this is any +better than the first way in which I did it." + +He was careful about pouring out the powerful stuff, but, in spite of +this, he spilled a drop on his finger. It burned like fire, and, +instinctively, he jerked his hand back. + +The next instant there was a series of happenings. Tom's elbow came in +contact with another jar of acid, knocking it over, and spilling it +into the retort where he had been mixing the first two liquids. There +was a hissing sound, as the acids combined, and a thick, white vapor +arose, puffing into Tom's face, and making him gasp. + +He staggered back, brushed against the heavy iron shaft in the corner, +and it fell sideways against him, knocking him to the floor, and +dropping across his thighs. The padding on it saved him from broken +bones, but the shaft was so heavy, that after it was on him, Tom could +not move. He was held fast on the floor of his shop, unable to use his +legs, and prevented from getting up. + +For a moment Tom was stunned, and then he called: + +"Help! Help! Eradicate! Koku! Help!" + +He waited a moment, but there was only a silence. + +And then Tom smelled a strange odor--an odor of a choking gas that +seemed to smother him. + +"It's the acids!" he cried. "They're generating gas! And I'm held fast +here! The place is closed up tight, and I can't move! Help! Help!" + +But there was no one at hand to aid Tom, and every moment the fumes of +the gas became stronger. Desperately the youth struggled to rid himself +of the weight of the shaft, but he could not. And then he felt his +senses leaving him, for the powerful gas was making him unconscious. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +TOM GETS A WARNING + + +"Bless my shoe buttons!" exclaimed a voice, as a man came toward Tom's +shop, a little later. "Bless my very necktie! This is odd. I go to the +house, and find no one there. I come out here, and not a soul is about. +Tom Swift can't have gone off on another one of his wonderful trips, +without sending me word. I know he wouldn't do that. And yet, bless my +watch and chain, I can't find any one!" + +It was Mr. Damon who spoke, as my old readers have already guessed. He +peered into one of the shop windows, and saw something like a fog +filling the place. + +"That's strange," he went on. "I don't see Tom there, and yet it looks +as if an experiment was going on. I wonder--" + +Mr. Damon heard some one coming up behind him, and turned to see Koku +the giant, who was returning from the errand on which Tom had sent him. + +"Oh, Koku, it's you; is it?" the odd man asked. "Bless my cuff buttons! +Where is Tom?" + +"In shop I guess." + +"I don't see him. Still I had better look. There doesn't seem to be any +one about." + +Mr. Damon opened the shop door, and was met by such an outward rush of +choking gas that he staggered back. + +"Bless my--" he began but he had to stop, to cough and gasp. "There +must have been some sort of an accident," he cried, as he got his lungs +full of fresh air. "A bad accident! Tom could never work in that +atmosphere. Whew!" + +"Accident! What is matter?" cried Koku stepping to the doorway. He, +too choked and gasped, but his was such a strong and rugged nature, and +his lungs held such a supply of air, that it took more than mere gas to +knock him out. He peered in through the wreaths of the acid vapor, and +saw the body of his master, lying on the floor--held down by the heavy +iron. + +In another instant Koku had rushed in, holding his breath, for, now +that he was inside the place, the gas made even him feel weak. + +"Come back! Come back!" cried Mr. Damon. "You'll be smothered! Wait +until the gas escapes!" + +"Then Mr. Tom die!" cried the giant. "I get him--or I no come out." + +With one heave of his powerful right arm, Koku lifted the heavy shaft +from Tom's legs. Then, gathering the lad up in his left arm, as if he +were a baby, Koku staggered out into the fresh air, almost falling with +his burden, as he neared Mr. Damon, for the giant was, well-nigh +overcome. + +"Bless my soul!" cried the odd man. "Is he--is he--" + +He did not finish the sentence, but, as Koku laid Tom down on the +overcoat of Mr. Damon, which the latter quickly spread on the snow, the +eccentric man put his hand over the heart of the young inventor. + +"It beats!" he murmured. "He's alive, but very weak. We must get a +doctor at once. I'll do what I can. There's no time to spare. Bless +my--" + +But Mr. Damon concluded that there was no time for blessing anything, +and so he stopped short. + +"Carry him up to the house, Koku," he said. "I know where there are +some medicines, and I'll try to revive him while we're waiting for the +doctor Hurry!" + +Tom was laid on a lounge, and, just then, Mrs. Baggert came in. + +"Telephone for the doctor!" cried Mr. Damon to the housekeeper, who +kept her nerve, and did not get excited. "I'll give Tom some ammonia, +and other stimulants, and see if I can bring him around. Koku, get me +some cold water." + +The telephone was soon carrying the message to the doctor, who promised +to come at once. Koku, in spite of his size, was quick, and soon +brought the water, into which Mr. Damon put some strong medicine, that +he found in a closet. Tom's eyelids fluttered as the others forced some +liquid between his lips. + +"He's coming around!" cried the eccentric man. "I guess he'll be all +right, Koku." + +"Koku glad," said the giant simply, for he loved Tom with a deep +devotion. + +"Yes, Koku, if it hadn't been for you, though, I don't believe that he +would be alive. That was powerful gas, and a few seconds more in there +might have meant the end of Tom. I didn't see him lying on the floor, +until after you rushed in. Bless my thermometer! It is very strange." + +They gave Tom more medicine, rubbed his arms and legs, and held ammonia +under his nose. Slowly he opened his eyes, and in a faint voice asked: + +"Where--am--I?" + +"In your own house," replied Mr. Damon, cheerfully. "How do you feel?" + +"I'm--all--right--now," said Tom slowly. He, felt his strength coming +gradually back, and he remembered what had happened, though he did not +yet know how he had been saved. The doctor came in at this moment, with +a small medical battery, which completed the restorative work begun by +the others. Soon Tom could sit up, though he was still weak and rather +sick. + +"Who brought me out?" he asked, when he had briefly told how the +accident occurred. + +"Koku did," replied Mr. Damon. "I guess none of the rest of us could +have lifted the iron shaft from your legs." + +"It's queer how that fell," said Tom, with a puzzled look on his face. +"I didn't hit it hard enough to bring it down. Beside, I had it tied to +nails, driven into the wall, to prevent just such an accident as this. +I must see about it when I get well." + +"Not for a couple of days," exclaimed the doctor grimly. "You've got +to stay in bed a while yet. You had a narrow escape, Tom Swift." + +"Well, I'm glad I went to Giant Land," said the young inventor, with a +wan smile. "Otherwise I'd never have Koku," and he looked +affectionately at the big man, who laughed happily. In nature Koku was +much like a child. + +Mr. Swift came home a little later, and Ned Newton called, both being +very much surprised to hear of the accident. As for Eradicate, the poor +old colored man was much affected, and would have sat beside Tom's bed +all night, had they allowed him. + +Our hero recovered rapidly, once the fumes of the gas left his system, +and, two days later, he was able to go out to the shop again. At his +request everything had been left just as it was after he had been +brought out. Of course the fumes of the gas were soon dissipated, when +the door was opened, and the acids, after mingling and giving off the +vapor, had become neutralized, so that they were now harmless. + +"Now I'm going to see what made that shaft fall," said Tom to Ned, as +the two chums walked over to the bench where the young inventor had +been working. "The tap I gave it never ought to have brought it down." + +Together they examined the thin, but strong, cords that had been passed +around the shaft, having been fastened to two nails, driven into the +wall. + +"Look!" cried Tom, pointing to one of the cords. + +"What is it?" asked Ned. + +"The strands were partly cut through, so that only a little jar was +enough to break the remaining ones," went on Tom. "They've been cut +with a knife, too, and not frayed by vibration against the nail, as +might be the case. Ned, someone has been in my shop, meddling, and he +wanted this shaft to fall. This is a trick!" + +"Great Scott, Tom! You don't suppose any one wanted that shaft to fall +on you; do you?" + +"No, I don't believe that. Probably some one wanted to damage the +shaft, or he might have thought it would topple over against the bench, +and break some of my tools, instruments or machinery. I do delicate +experiments here, and it wouldn't take much of a blow to spoil them. +That's why those cords were cut." + +"Who did it? Do you think Andy Foger--" + +"No, I think it was the man Koku thought was a chicken thief, and whom +we chased the other night. I've got to be on my guard. I wonder if--" + +Tom was interrupted by the appearance of Koku, who came out of the shop +with a letter the postman had just left. + +"I don't know that writing very well, and yet it looks familiar," said +Tom, as he tore open the missive. "Hello, here's more trouble!" he +exclaimed as he hastily read it. + +"What's up now?" asked Ned. + +"This is from Mr. Period, the picture man," went on the young inventor. +"It's a warning." + +"A warning?" + +"Yes. He says: + + +"'Dear Tom. Be on your guard. I understand that a rival moving picture +concern is after you. They want to make you an offer, and get you away +from me. But I trust you. Don't have anything to do with these other +fellows. And, at the same time, don't give them a hint as to our plans. +Don't tell them anything about your new camera. There is a lot of +jealousy and rivalry in this business and they are all after me. +They'll probably come to see you, but be on your guard. They know that +I have been negotiating with you. Remember the alarm the other night.'" + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +TRYING THE CAMERA + + +"Well, what do you think of that?" cried Ned, as his chum finished. + +"It certainly isn't very pleasant," replied Tom. "I wonder why those +chaps can't let me alone? Why don't they invent cameras of their own? +Why are they always trying to get my secret inventions?" + +"I suppose they can't do things for themselves," answered Ned. "And +then, again, your machinery always works, Tom, and some that your +rivals make, doesn't." + +"Well, maybe that's it," admitted our hero, as he put away the letter. +"I will be on the watch, just as I have been before. I've got the +burglar alarm wires adjusted on the shop now, and when these rival +moving picture men come after me they'll get a short answer." + +For several days nothing happened, and Tom and Ned worked hard on the +Wizard Camera. It was nearing completion, and they were planning, soon, +to give it a test, when, one afternoon, two strangers, in a powerful +automobile, came to the Swift homestead. They inquired for Tom, and, +as he was out in the shop, with Ned and Koku, and as he often received +visitors out there, Mrs. Baggert sent out the two men, who left their +car in front of the house. + +As usual, Tom had the inner door to his shop locked, and when Koku +brought in a message that two strangers would like to see the young +inventor, Tom remarked: + +"I guess it's the rival picture men, Ned. We'll see what they have to +say." + +"Which of you is Tom Swift?" asked the elder of the two men, as Tom and +Ned entered the front office, for our hero knew better than to admit +the strangers to the shop. + +"I am," replied Tom. + +"Well, we're men of business," went on the speaker, "and there is no +use beating about the bush. I am Mr. Wilson Turbot, and this is my +partner, Mr. William Eckert. We are in the business of making moving +picture films, and I understand that you are associated with Mr. Period +in this line. 'Spotty' we call him." + +"Yes, I am doing some work for Mr. Period," admitted Tom, cautiously. + +"Have you done any yet?" + +"No, but I expect to." + +"What kind of a camera are you going to use?" asked Mr. Eckert eagerly. + +"I must decline to answer that," replied Tom, a bit stiffly. + +"Oh, that's all right," spoke Mr. Turbot, good naturedly. "Only +'Spotty' was bragging that you were making a new kind of film for him, +and we wondered if it was on the market." + +"We are always looking for improvements," added Mr. Eckert. + +"This camera isn't on the market," replied Tom, on his guard as to how +he answered. + +The two men whispered together for a moment, and then Mr. Turbot said: + +"Well, as I remarked, we're men of business, and there's no use beating +about the bush. We've heard of you, Tom Swift, and we know you can do +things. Usually, in this world, every man has his price, and we're +willing to pay big to get what we want. I don't know what offer Mr. +Period made to you, but I'll say this: We'll give you double what he +offered, for the exclusive rights to your camera, whenever it's on the +market, and we'll pay you a handsome salary to work for us." + +"I'm sorry, but I can't consider the offer," replied Tom firmly. "I +have given my word to Mr. Period. I have a contract with him, and I +cannot break it." + +"Offer him three times what Period did," said Mr. Eckert, in a hoarse +whisper that Tom heard. + +"It would be useless!" exclaimed our hero. "I wouldn't go back on my +word for a hundred times the price I am to get. I am not in this +business so much for the money, as I am for the pleasure of it." + +The men were silent a moment. There were ugly looks on their faces. +They looked sharply at Tom and Ned. Then Mr. Eckert said: + +"You'll regret this, Tom Swift. We are the biggest firm of moving +picture promoters in the world. We always get what we want." + +"You won't get my camera," replied Tom calmly. + +"I don't know about that!" exclaimed Mr. Turbot, as he made a hasty +stride toward Tom, who stood in front of the door leading to the +shop--the shop where his camera, almost ready for use, was on a bench. +"I guess if we--" + +"Koku!" suddenly called Tom. + +The giant stepped into the front office. He had been standing near the +door, inside the main shop. Mr. Turbot who had stretched forth his +hand, as though to seize Tom, and his companion, who had advanced +toward Ned, fairly jumped back in fright at the sight of the big man. + +"Koku," went on Tom, in even tones, "just show these gentlemen to the +front door--and lock it after them," he added significantly, as he +turned back into the shop, followed by Ned. + +"Yes, Mr. Tom," answered the giant, and then, with his big hand, and +brawny fist, he gently turned the two men toward the outer door. They +were gasping in surprise as they looked at the giant. + +"You'll be sorry for this, Tom Swift!" exclaimed Mr. Turbot. "You'll +regret not having taken our offer. This Period chat is only a small +dealer. We can do better by you. You'll regret--" + +"You'll regret coming here again," snapped Tom, as he closed the door +of his shop, leaving Koku to escort the baffled plotters to their auto. +Shortly afterward Tom and Ned heard the car puffing away. + +"Well, they came, just as Mr. Period said they would," spoke Tom, +slowly. + +"Yes, and they went away again!" exclaimed Ned with a laugh. "They had +their trip for nothing. Say, did you see how they stared at Koku?" + +"Yes, he's a helper worth having, in cases like these." + +Tom wrote a full account of what had happened and sent it to Mr. +Period. He received in reply a few words, thanking him for his loyalty, +and again warning him to be on his guard. + +In the meanwhile, work went on rapidly on the Wizard Camera. Briefly +described it was a small square box, with a lens projecting from it. +Inside, however, was complicated machinery, much too complicated for me +to describe. Tom Swift had put in his best work on this wonderful +machine. As I have said, it could be worked by a storage battery, by +ordinary electric current from a dynamo, or by hand. On top was a new +kind of electric light. This was small and compact, but it threw out +powerful beams. With the automatic arrangement set, and the light +turned on, the camera could be left at a certain place after dark, and +whatever went on in front of it would be reproduced on the moving roll +of film inside. + +In the morning the film could be taken out, developed, and the pictures +thrown on a screen in the usual way, familiar to all who have been in a +moving picture theatre. With the reproducing machines Tom had nothing +to do, as they were already perfected. His task had been to make the +new-style camera, and it was nearly completed. + +A number of rolls of films could be packed into the camera, and they +could be taken out, or inserted, in daylight. Of course after one film +had been made, showing any particular scene any number of films could +be made from this "master" one. Just as is done with the ordinary +moving picture camera. Tom had an attachment to show when one roll was +used, and when another needed inserting. + +For some time after the visit of the rival moving picture men, Tom was +on his guard. Both house and shop were fitted with burglar alarms, but +they did not ring. Eradicate and Koku were told to be on watch, but +there was nothing for them to do. + +"Well," remarked Tom to Ned, one afternoon, when they had both worked +hard, "I think it's about finished. Of course it needs polishing, and +there may be some adjusting to do, but my camera is now ready to take +pictures--at least I'm going to give it a test." + +"Have you the rolls of films?" + +"Yes, half a dozen of 'em And I'm going to try the hardest test first." + +"Which one is that?" + +"The night test. I'm going to place the camera out in the yard, facing +my shop. Then you and I, and some of the others, will go out, pass in +front of it, do various stunts, and, in the morning we'll develop the +films and see what we have." + +"Why, are you going to leave the camera out, all night?" + +"Sure. I'm going to give it the hardest kind of a test." + +"But are you and I going to stay up all night to do stunts in front of +it?" + +"No, indeed. I'm going to let it take what ever pictures happen to come +along to be taken after we get through making some special early ones. +You see my camera will be a sort of watch dog, only of course it won't +catch any one--that is, only their images will be caught on the film. + +"Oh, I see," exclaimed Ned, and then he helped Tom fix the machine for +the test. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +WHAT THE CAMERA CAUGHT + + +"Well, is she working, Tom?" asked our hero's chum, a little later, +when they had set the camera up on a box in the garden. It pointed +toward the main shop door, and from the machine came a clicking sound. +The electric light was glowing. + +"Yes, it's all ready," replied Tom. "Now just act as if it wasn't +there. You walk toward the shop. Do anything you please. Pretend you +are coming in to see me on business. Act as if it was daytime. I'll +stand here and receive you. Later, I'll get dad out here, Koku and +Eradicate. I wish Mr. Period was here to see the test, but perhaps it's +just as well for me to make sure it works before he sees it." + +"All right, Tom, here I come." + +Ned advanced toward the shop. He tried to act as though the camera was +not taking pictures of him, at the rate of several a second, but he +forgot himself, and turned to look at the staring lens. Then Tom, with +a laugh, advanced to meet him, shaking hands with him. Then the lads +indulged in a little skylarking. They threw snowballs at each other, +taking care, however to keep within range of the lens. Of course when +Tom worked the camera himself, he could point it wherever he wanted to, +but it was now automatic. + +Then the lads went to the shop, and came out again. They did several +other things. Later Koku, and Eradicate did some "stunts," as Tom +called them. Mr. Swift, too, was snapped, but Mrs. Baggert refused to +come out. + +"Well, I guess that will do for now," said Tom, as he stopped the +mechanism. "I've just thought of something," he added. "If I leave the +light burning, it will scare away, before they got in front of the +lens, any one who might come along. I'll have to change that part of +it." + +"How can you fix it?" asked Ned. + +"Easily. I'll rig up some flash lights, just ordinary photographing +flashlights, you know. I'll time them to go off one after the other, +and connect them with an electric wire to the door of my shop." + +"Then your idea is--" began Ned. + +"That some rascals may try to enter my shop at night. Not this +particular night, but any night. If they come to-night we'll be ready +for them." + +"An' can't yo'-all take a picture ob de chicken coop?" asked Eradicate. +"Dat feller may come back t' rob mah hens." + +"With the lens pointing toward the shop," spoke Tom, "it will also take +snap shots of any one who tries to enter the coop. So, if the chicken +thief does come, Rad, we'll have a picture of him." + +Tom and Ned soon had the flashlights in place, and then they went to +bed, listening, at times, for the puff that would indicate that the +camera was working. But the night passed without incident, rather to +Tom's disappointment. However, in the morning, he developed the film of +the first pictures taken in the evening. Soon they were dry enough to +be used in the moving picture machine, which Tom had bought, and set up +in a dark room. + +"There we are!" he cried, as the first images were thrown on the white +screen. "As natural as life, Ned! My camera works all right!" + +"That's so. Look! There's where I hit you with a snowball!" cried his +chum, as the skylarking scene was reached. + +"Mah goodness!" cried Eradicate, when he saw himself walking about on +the screen, as large as life. "Dat shorely am wonderful." + +"It is spirits!" cried Koku, as he saw himself depicted. + +"I wish we had some of the other pictures to show," spoke Tom. "I mean +some unexpected midnight visitors." + +For several nights in succession the camera was set to "snap" any one +who might try to enter the shop. The flashlights were also in place. +Tom and Ned, the latter staying at his chum's house that week, were +beginning to think they would have their trouble for their pains. But +one night something happened. + +It was very dark, but the snow on the ground made a sort of glow that +relieved the blackness. The camera had been set as usual, and Tom and +Ned went to bed. + +It must have been about midnight when they were both awakened by +hearing the burglar alarm go off. At the same time there were several +flashes of fire from the garden. + +"There she goes!" cried Ned. + +"Yes, they're trying to get into the shed," added Tom, as a glance at +the burglar-alarm indicator on the wall of the room, showed that the +shop door was being tried. "Come on!" + +"I'm with you!" yelled Ned. + +They lost little time getting into their clothes, for they had laid +them out in readiness for putting on quickly. Down the stairs they +raced, but ere they reached the garden they heard footsteps running +along the wall toward the road. + +"Who's there?" cried Tom, but there was no answer. + +"Koku! Eradicate!" yelled Ned. + +"Yais, sah, I'se comm'!" answered the colored man, and the voice of the +giant was also heard. The flashlights had ceased popping before this, +and when the two lads and their helpers had reached the shop, there was +no one in sight. + +"The camera's there all right!" cried Tom in relief as he picked it up +from the box. "Now to see what it caught. Did you see anything of the +fellows, Koku, or Eradicate?" Both said they had not, but Eradicate, +after examining the chicken house door by the aid of a lighted match, +cried out: + +"Somebody's been tryin' t' git in heah, Massa Tom. I kin see where de +do's been scratched." + +"Well, maybe we'll have the picture for you to look at in the morning," +said Tom. + +The films were developed in the usual way in the morning, but the +pictures were so small that Tom could not make out the features or +forms of the men. And it was plain that at least three men had been +around the coop and shop. + +By the use of alcohol and an electric fan Tom soon had the films dry +enough to use. Then the moving picture machine was set up in a dark +room, and all gathered to see what would be thrown on the screen, +greatly enlarged. + +First came several brilliant flashes of light, and then, as the +entrance to the shop loomed into view, a dark figure seemed to walk +across the canvas. But it did not stop at the shop door. Instead it +went to the chicken coop, and, as the man reached that door, he began +working to get it open. Of course it had all taken place in a few +seconds, for, as soon as the flashlights went off, the intruders had +run away. But they had been there long enough to have their pictures +taken. + +The man at the chicken coop turned around as the lights flashed, and he +was looking squarely at the camera. Of course this made his face very +plain to the audience, as Tom turned the crank of the reproducing +machine. + +"Why, it's a colored man!" cried Ned in surprise. + +"Yes, I guess it's only an ordinary chicken thief, after all," remarked +Tom. + +There was a gasp from Eradicate. + +"Fo' de land sakes!" he cried. "De raskil! Ef dat ain't mah own second +cousin, what libs down by de ribber! An' to t'ink dat Samuel 'Rastus +Washington Jackson Johnson, mah own second cousin, should try t' rob +mah chicken coop! Oh, won't I gib it t' him!" + +"Are you sure, Rad?" asked Tom. + +"Suah? Sartin I'se suah, Massa Tom," was the answer as the startled +colored man on the screen stared at the small audience. "I'd know dat +face ob his'n anywhere." + +"Well, I guess he's the only one we caught last night," said Tom, as +the disappointed chicken thief ran away, and so out of focus. But the +next instant there came another series of flashlight explosions on the +screen, and there, almost as plainly as if our friends were looking at +them, they saw two men stealthily approaching the shop. They, too, as +the chicken thief had done, tried the door, and then, they also, +startled by the flashes, turned around. + +"Look!" cried Ned. + +"Great Scott!" exclaimed Tom. "Those are the two rivals of Mr. Period! +They are Mr. Turbot and Mr. Eckert!" + +"Same men I pushed out!" cried Koku, much excited. + +There was no doubt of it, and, as the images faded from the screen, +caused by the men running away, Tom and Ned realized that their rivals +had tried to put their threat into execution--the threat of making Tom +wish he had taken their offer. + +"I guess they came to take my camera,--but, instead the camera took +them," said the young inventor grimly. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +PHOTOS FROM THE AIRSHIP + + +"Well, Tom, how is it going?" asked a voice at the door of the shop +where the young inventor was working. He looked up quickly to behold +Mr. Nestor, father of Mary, in which young lady, as I have said, Tom +was much interested. "How is the moving picture camera coming on?" + +"Pretty good, Mr. Nestor. Come in. I guess Koku knew you all right. I +told him to let in any of my friends, but I have to keep him there on +guard." + +"So I understand. They nearly got in the other night, but I hear that +your camera caught them." + +"Yes, that proved that the machine is a success, even if we didn't +succeed in arresting the men." + +"Did you try?" + +"Yes, I sent copies of the film, showing Turbot and Eckert trying to +break into my shop, to Mr. Period, and he had enlarged photographs +made, and went to the police. They said it was rather flimsy evidence +on which to arrest anybody, and so they didn't act. However, we sent +copies of the pictures to Turbot and Eckert themselves, so they know +that we know they were here, and I guess they'll steer clear of me +after this." + +"I guess so, Tom," agreed Mr. Nestor with a laugh. "But what about the +chicken thief?" + +"Oh, Eradicate attended to his second cousin. He went to see him, +showed him a print from the film, and gave him to understand that he'd +be blown up with dynamite, or kicked by Boomerang, if he ever came +around here again, and so Samuel 'Rastus Washington Jackson Johnson +will be careful about visiting strange chicken coops, after this." + +"I believe you, Tom. But how is the camera coming on?" + +"Very well. I am making a few changes in it, and I expect to get my +biggest airship in readiness for the trip in about a week, and then +I'll try taking pictures from her. But I understand that you are +interested in Mr. Period's business, Mr. Nestor?" + +"Yes, I own some stock in the company, and, Tom, that's what I came +over to see you about. I need a vacation. Mary and her mother are going +away this Spring for a long visit, and I was wondering if you couldn't +take me with you on the trips you will make to get moving pictures for +our concern." + +"Of course I can, Mr. Nestor. I'll be glad to do it." + +"And there is another thing, Tom," went on Mr. Nestor, soberly. "I've +got a good deal of my fortune tied up in this moving picture affair. I +want to see you win out--I don't want our rivals to get ahead of us." + +"They shan't get ahead of us." + +"You see, Tom, it's this way. There is a bitter fight on between our +concern and that controlled by our rivals. Each is trying to get the +business of a large chain of moving picture theatres throughout the +United States. These theatre men are watching us both, and the +contracts for next season will go to the concern showing the best line +of films. If our rivals get ahead of us--well, it will just about ruin +our company,--and about ruin me too, I guess." + +"I shall do my very best," answered our hero. + +"Is Mr. Damon going along?" + +"Well, I have just written to ask him. I sent the letter yesterday. + +"Doesn't he know what you contemplate?" + +"Not exactly. You see when he came, that time I was overcome by the +fumes from the acids, everything was so upset that I didn't get a +chance to tell him. He's been away on business ever since, but returned +yesterday. I certainly hope that he goes with us. Ned Newton is +coming, and with you, and Koku and myself, it will be a nicer party." + +"Then you are going to take Koku?" + +"I think I will. I'm a little worried about what these rival moving +picture men might do, and if I get into trouble with them, my giant +helper would come in very useful, to pick one up and throw him over a +tree top, for instance." + +"Indeed, yes," agreed Mr. Nestor, with a laugh. "But I hope nothing +like that happens." + +"Nothing like that happens?" suddenly asked a voice. "Bless my +bookcase! but there always seems to be something going on here. What's +up now, Tom Swift?" + +"Nothing much, Mr. Damon," replied our hero, as he recognized his odd +friend. "We were just talking about moving pictures, Mr. Damon, and +about you. Did you get my letter?" + +"I did, Tom." + +"And are you going with us?" + +"Tom, did you ever know me to refuse an invitation from you? I guess +not! Of course I'm going. But, for mercy sakes, don't tell my wife! She +mustn't know about it until the last minute, and then she'll be so +surprised, when I tell her, that she won't think of objecting. Don't +let her know." + +Tom laughed, and promised, and then the three began talking of the +prospective trip. After a bit Ned Newton joined the party. + +Tom showed the two men how his new camera worked. He had made several +improvements on it since the first pictures were taken, and now it was +almost perfect. Mr. Period had been out to see it work, and said it was +just the apparatus needed. + +"You can get films with that machine," he said, "that will be better +than any pictures ever thrown on a screen. My fortune will be made, +Tom, and yours too, if you can only get pictures that are out of the +ordinary. There will be some hair-raising work, I expect, but you can +do it." + +"I'll try," spoke Tom. "I have--" + +"Hold on! I know what you are going to say," interrupted Mr. Period. +"You are going to say that you've gone through some strenuous times +already. I know you have, but you're going to have more soon. I think +I'll send you to India first." + +"To India!" exclaimed Tom, for Mr. Period had spoken of that as if it +was but a journey downtown. + +"Yes, India. I want a picture of an elephant drive, and if you can get +pictures of the big beasts in a stampede, so much the better. Then, +too, the Durbar is on now, and that will make a good film. How soon can +you start for Calcutta?" + +"Well, I've got to overhaul the airship," said Tom. "That will take +about three weeks. The camera is practically finished. I can leave in a +month, I guess." + +"Good. We'll have fine weather by that time. Are you going all the way +by your airship?" + +"No, I think it will be best to take that apart, ship it by steamer, +and go that way ourselves. I can put the airship together in India, and +then use it to get to any other part of Europe, Asia or Africa you +happen to want pictures from." + +"Good! Well, get to work now, and I'll see you again." + +In the days that followed, Tom and Ned were kept busy. There was +considerable to do on the airship, in the way of overhauling it. This +craft was Tom's largest, and was almost like the one in which he had +gone to the caves of ice, where it was wrecked. It had been, however, +much improved. + +The craft was a sort of combined dirigible balloon, and aeroplane, and +could be used as either. There was a machine on board for generating +gas, to use in the balloon part of it, and the ship, which was named +the Flyer, could carry several persons. + +"Bless my shoe laces!" cried Mr. Damon one day as he looked at Koku. +"If we take him along in the airship, will we be able to float, Tom?" + +"Oh, yes. The airship is plenty big enough. Besides, we are not going +to take along a very large party, and the camera is not heavy. Oh, +we'll be all right. I suppose you'll be on hand to-morrow, Mr. Damon?" + +"To-morrow? What for?" + +"We're going to take the picture machine up in the airship, and get +some photos from the sky. I expect to make some films from high in the +air, as well as some in the regular way, on the ground, and I want a +little practice. Come around about two o'clock, and we'll have a trial +flight." + +"All right. I will. But don't let my wife know I'm going up in an +airship again. She's read of so many accidents lately, that she's +nervous about having me take a trip." + +"Oh, I won't tell," promised Tom with a laugh, and he worked away +harder than ever, for there were many little details to perfect. The +weather was now getting warm, as there was an early spring, and it was +pleasant out of doors. + +The moving picture camera was gotten in readiness. Extra rolls of films +were on hand, and the big airship, in which they were to go up, for +their first test of taking pictures from high in the air, had been +wheeled out of the shed. + +"Are you going up very far?" asked Mr. Nestor of Tom, and the young +inventor thought that Mary's father was a trifle nervous. He had not +made many flights, and then only a little way above the ground, with +Tom. + +"Not very high," replied our hero. "You see I want to get pictures that +will be large, and if I'm too far away I can't do it." + +"Glad to hear it," replied Mr. Nestor, with a note of relief in his +voice. "Though I suppose to fall a thousand feet isn't much different +from falling a hundred when you consider the results." + +"Not much," admitted Tom frankly. + +"Bless my feather bed!" cried Mr. Damon. "Please don't talk of falling, +when we're going up in an airship. It makes me nervous." + +"We'll not fall!" declared Tom confidently. + +Mr. Period sent his regrets, that he could not be present at the trial, +stating in his letter that he was the busiest man in the world, and +that his time was worth about a dollar a minute just at present. He, +however, wished Tom all success. Tom's first effort was to sail along, +with the lens of the camera pointed straight toward the earth. He would +thus get, if successful, a picture that, when thrown on the screen, +would give the spectators the idea that they were looking down from a +moving balloon. For that reason Tom was not going to fly very high, as +he wanted to get all the details possible. + +"All aboard!" cried the young inventor, when he had seen to it that his +airship was in readiness for a flight. The camera had been put aboard, +and the lens pointed toward earth through a hole in the main cabin +floor. All who were expected to make the trip with Tom were on hand, +Koku taking the place of Eradicate this time, as the colored man was +too aged and feeble to go along. + +"All ready?" asked Ned, who stood in the steering tower, with his hand +on the starting lever, while Tom was at the camera to see that it +worked properly. + +"All ready," answered the young inventor, and, an instant later, they +shot upward, as the big propellers whizzed around. + +Tom at once started the camera to taking pictures rapidly, as he wanted +the future audience to get a perfect idea of how it looked to go up in +a balloon, leaving the earth behind. Then as the Flyer moved swiftly +over woods and fields, Tom moved the lens from side to side, to get +different views. + +"Say! This is great!" cried Mr. Nestor, to whom air-riding was much of +a novelty. "Are you getting good pictures, Tom?" + +"I can't tell until we develop them. But the machine seems to be +working all right. I'm going to sail back now, and get some views of +our own house from up above." + +They had sailed around the town of Shopton, to the neighboring +villages, over woods and fields. Now they were approaching Shopton +again. + +"Bless my heart!" suddenly exclaimed Mr. Damon, who was looking toward +the earth, as they neared Tom's house. + +"What is it?" asked our hero, glancing up from the picture machine, the +registering dial of which he was examining. + +"Look there! At your shop, Tom! There seems to be a lot of smoke coming +from it!" + +They were almost over Tom's shop now, and, as Mr. Damon had said, there +was considerable smoke rolling above it. + +"I guess Eradicate is burning up papers and trash," was Ned's opinion. + +Tom looked to where the camera pointed, he was right over his shop now, +and could see a dense vapor issuing from the door. + +"That isn't Eradicate!" cried the young inventor. "My shop is on fire! +I've got to make a quick drop, and save it! There are a lot of valuable +models, and machines in there! Send us down, Ned, as fast as she'll go!" + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +OFF FOR INDIA + + +"Bless my hose reel!" cried Mr. Damon, as the airship took a quick +lurch toward the earth. "Things are always happening to you, Tom Swift! +Your shop on fire! How did it happen?" + +"Look!" suddenly cried Ned, before Tom had a chance to answer. +"There's a man running away from the shop, Tom!" + +All saw him, and, as the airship rushed downward it could be seen that +he was a fellow dressed in ragged garments, a veritable tramp. + +"I guess that fire didn't happen," said Tom significantly. "It was +deliberately set. Oh, if we can only get there before it gains too much +headway!" + +"I like to catch that fellow!" exclaimed Koku, shaking his big fist at +the retreating tramp. "I fix him!" + +On rushed the airship, and the man who had probably started the fire, +glanced up at it. Tom suddenly turned the lens of his Wizard Camera +toward him. The mechanism inside, which had been stopped, started +clicking again, as the young inventor switched on the electric current. + +"What are you doing?" cried Ned, as he guided the airship toward the +shop, whence clouds of smoke were rolling. + +"Taking his picture," replied Tom. "It may come in useful for evidence." + +But he was not able to get many views of the fellow, for the latter +must have suspected what was going on. He quickly made a dive for the +bushes, and was soon lost to sight. Tom shut off his camera. + +"Bless my life preserver!" cried Mr. Damon. "There comes your father, +Tom, and Mrs. Baggert! They've got buckets! They're going to put out +the fire!" + +"Why don't they think to use the hose?" cried the young inventor, for +he had his shop equipped with many hose lines, and an electrically +driven pump. "The hose! The hose, dad!" shouted Tom, but it is doubtful +if his father or Mrs. Baggert heard him, for the engine of the airship +was making much noise. However, the two with the buckets looked up, and +waved their hands to those on the Flyer. + +"There's Eradicate!" yelled Ned. "He's got the hose all right!" The +colored man was beginning to unreel a line. + +"That's what it needs!" exclaimed Tom. "Now there's some chance to save +the shop." + +"We'll be there ourselves to take a hand in a few seconds!" cried Mr. +Damon, forgetting to bless anything. + +"The scoundrel who started this fire, and those back of him, ought to +be imprisoned for life!" declared Mr. Nestor. + +A moment later Ned had landed the airship within a short distance of +the shop. In an instant the occupants of the craft had leaped out, and +Tom, after a hasty glance to see that his valuable camera was safe, +dashed toward the building crying: + +"Never mind the pails, dad! Use the hose! there's a nozzle at the back +door. Go around there, and play the water on from that end." + +Eradicate, with his line of hose, had disappeared into the shop through +the front door, and the others pressed in after him, heedless of the +dense smoke. + +"Is it blazing much, Rad?" cried Tom. + +"Can't see no blaze at all, Massa Tom," replied the colored man. +"Dere's a heap of suffin in de middle ob de flo', an' dat's what's +raisin' all de rumpus." + +They all saw it a moment later, a smoldering heap of rags and paper on +the concrete floor of the shop. Eradicate turned his hose on it, there +was a hissing sound, a cloud of steam arose, and the fire was +practically out, though much smoke remained. + +"Jove! that was a lucky escape!" exclaimed Tom, as he looked around +when the vapor had partly cleared away. "No damage done at all, as far +as I can see. I wonder what the game was? Did you see anything of a +tramp around here?" he asked of his father. + +"No, Tom. I have been busy in the house. So has Mrs. Baggert. Suddenly +she called my attention to the smoke coming from the door, and we ran +out." + +"I seen it, too," added Eradicate. "I was doin' some whitewashin', an' +I run up as soon as I could." + +"We saw the tramp all right, but he got away," said Tom, and he told +how he had taken pictures of him. "I don't believe it would be much use +to look for him now, though." + +"Me look," spoke Koku significantly, as he hurried off in the direction +taken by the tramp. He came back later, not having found him. + +"What do you think of it, Tom?" asked Ned, when the excitement had +calmed down, and the pile of burned rags had been removed. It was found +that oil and chemicals had been put on them to cause a dense smoke. + +"I think it was the work of those fellows who are after my camera," +replied the young inventor. "They are evidently watching me, and when +they saw us all go off in the airship they thought probably that the +coast was clear." + +"But why should they start a fire?" + +"I don't know, but probably to create a lot of smoke, and excitement, +so that they could search, and not be detected. Maybe the fellow after +he found that the camera was gone, wanted to draw those in the house +out to the shop, so he could have a clear field to search in my room +for any drawings that would give him a clew as to how my machine works. +They certainly did not want to burn the shop, for that pile of rags +could have smoldered all day on the concrete floor, without doing any +harm. Robbery was the motive, I think." + +"The police ought to be notified," declared Mr. Nestor. "Develop those +pictures, Tom, and I'll take the matter up with the police. Maybe they +can identify the tramp from the photographs." + +But this proved impossible. Tom had secured several good films, not +only in the first views he took, giving the spectators the impression +that they were going up in an airship, but also those showing the shop +on fire, and the tramp running away, were very plain. + +The police made a search for the incendiary, but of course did not find +him. Mr. Period came to Shopton, and declared it was his belief that +his rivals, Turbot and Eckert, had had a hand in the matter. But it was +only a suspicion, though Tom himself believed the same thing. Still +nothing could be accomplished. + +"The thing to do, now that the camera works all right, is for you to +hit the trail for India at once," suggested the picture man. "They +won't follow you there. Get me some pictures of the Durbar, of +elephants being captured, of tiger fights, anything exciting." + +"I'll do my--" began Tom. + +"Wait, I'm not through," interrupted the excitable man. "Then go get +some volcanoes, earthquakes--anything that you think would be +interesting. I'll keep in touch with you, and cable occasionally. Get +all the films you can. When will you start?" + +"I can leave inside of two weeks," replied Tom. + +"Then do it, and, meanwhile, be on your guard." + +It was found that a few changes were needed on the camera, and some +adjustments to the airship. Another trial flight was made, and some +excellent pictures taken. Then Tom and his friends prepared to take the +airship apart, and pack it for shipment to Calcutta. It was to go on +the same steamer as themselves, and of course the Wizard Camera would +accompany Tom. He took along many rolls of films, enough, he thought, +for many views. He was also to send back to Mr. Period from time to +time, the exposed rolls of film, so they could be developed, and +printed in the United States, as Tom would not have very good +facilities for this on the airship, and to reproduce them there was +almost out of the question. Still he did fit up a small dark room +aboard the Flyer, where he could develop pictures if he wished. + +There was much to be done, but hard work accomplished it, and finally +the party was ready to start for India. Tom said good-bye to Mary +Nestor, of course, and her father accompanied our hero from the Nestor +house to the Swift homestead, where the start was to take place. + +Eradicate bade his master a tearful good-bye, and there was moisture in +the eyes of Mr. Swift, as he shook hands with his son. + +"Take care of yourself, Tom," he said. "Don't run too many risks. This +moving picture taking isn't as easy as it sounds. It's more than just +pointing your camera at things. Write if you get a chance, or send me a +message." + +Tom promised, and then bade farewell to Mrs. Baggert. All were +assembled, Koku, Mr. Damon, who blessed everything he saw, and some +things he did not, Ned, Mr. Nestor and Tom. The five were to go by +train to New York, there to go aboard the steamer. + +Their journey to the metropolis was uneventful. Mr. Period met them at +the steamship dock, after Tom had seen to it that the baggage, and the +parts of the airship were safely aboard. + +"I wish I were going along!" exclaimed the picture man. "It's going to +be a great trip. But I can't spare the time. I'm the busiest man in the +world. I lose about a thousand dollars just coming down to see you off, +but it's a good investment. I don't mind it. Now, Tom, good luck, and +don't forget, I want exciting views." + +"I'll try--" began our hero. + +"Wait, I know what you're going to say!" interrupted Mr. Period. +"You'll do it, of course. Well, I must be going. I will-- Great +Scott!" and Mr. Period interrupted himself. "He has the nerve to come +here!" + +"Who?" asked Tom. + +"Wilson Turbot, the rascal! He's trying to balk me at the last minute, +I believe. I'm going to see what he means!" and with this, the excited +Mr. Period rushed down the gangplank, toward the man at whom he had +pointed--one of the men who had tried to buy Tom's picture taking +camera. + +A moment later the steamer's whistle blew, the last belated passenger +rushed up the gangplank, it was drawn in, and the vessel began to move +away from the dock. Tom and his friends were on their way to India, and +the last glimpse they had of Mr. Period was as he was chasing along the +pier, after Mr. Turbot. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +UNEXPECTED EXCITEMENT + + +"Well, what do you know about that, Tom?" asked Ned, as they stood on +deck watching the chase. "Isn't he the greatest ever--Mr. Period, I +mean?" + +"He certainly is. I'd like to see what happens when he catches that +Turbot chap." + +"Bless my pocket handkerchief!" cried Mr. Damon. "I don't believe he +will. Mr. Period's legs aren't long enough for fast running." + +"Those scoundrels were after us, up to the last minute," spoke Mr. +Nestor, as the ship moved farther out from the dock. Tom and his +friends could no longer see the excitable picture man after his rival, +but there was a commotion in the crowd, and it seemed as if he had +caught the fellow. + +"Well, we're free of him now," spoke the young inventor, with a breath +of relief. "That is, unless they have set some one else on our trail," +and he looked carefully at the passengers near him, to detect, if +possible, any who might look like spies in the pay of the rival moving +picture concern, or any suspicious characters who might try to steal +the valuable camera, that was now safely locked in Tom's cabin. Our +hero, however, saw no one to worry about. He resolved to remain on his +guard. + +Friends and relatives were waving farewells to one another, and the +band was playing, as the big vessel drew out into the North, or Hudson, +river, and steamed for the open sea. + +Little of interest marked the first week of the voyage. All save Koku +had done much traveling before, and it was no novelty to them. The +giant, however, was amused and delighted with everything, even the most +commonplace things he saw. He was a source of wonder to all the other +passengers, and, in a way, he furnished much excitement. + +One day several of the sailors were on deck, shifting one of the heavy +anchors. They went about it in their usual way, all taking hold, and +"heaving" together with a "chanty," or song, to enliven their work. But +they did not make much progress, and one of the mates got rather +excited about it. + +"Here, shiver my timbers!" he cried. "Lively now! Lay about you, and +get that over to the side!" + +"Yo! Heave! Ho!" called the leader of the sailor gang. + +The anchor did not move, for it had either caught on some projection, +or the men were not using their strength. + +"Lively! Lively!" cried the mate. + +Suddenly Koku, who was in the crowd of passengers watching the work, +pushed his way to where the anchor lay. With a powerful, but not rough +action, he shoved the sailors aside. Then, stooping over, he took a +firm grip of the big piece of iron, planted his feet well apart on the +deck, and lifted the immense mass in his arms. There was a round of +applause from the group of passengers. + +"Where you want him?" Koku calmly asked of the mate, as he stood +holding the anchor. + +"Blast my marlin spikes!" cried the mate. "I never see the like of this +afore! Put her over there, shipmate. If I had you on a voyage or two +you'd be running the ship, instead of letting the screw push her along. +Put her over there," and he indicated where he wanted the anchor. + +Koku calmly walked along the deck, laid the anchor down as if it was an +ordinary weight, and passed over to where Tom stood looking on in +amused silence. There were murmurs of surprise from the passengers at +the giant's strength, and the sailors went forward much abashed. + +"Say, I'd give a good bit to have a bodyguard like that," exclaimed a +well-known millionaire passenger, who, it was reported, was in constant +fear of attacks, though they had never taken place. "I wonder if I +could get him." + +He spoke to Tom about it, but our hero would not listen to a +proposition to part with Koku. Besides, it is doubtful if the simple +giant would leave the lad who had brought him away from his South +American home. But, if Koku was wonderfully strong, and, seemingly +afraid of nothing, there were certain things he feared. + +One afternoon, for the amusement of the passengers, a net was put +overboard, sunk to a considerable depth, and hauled up with a number of +fishes in it. Some of the finny specimens were good for eating, and +others were freaks, strange and curious. + +Koku was in the throng that gathered on deck to look at the haul. +Suddenly a small fish, but very hideous to look at, leaped from the net +and flopped toward the giant. With a scream of fear Koku jumped to one +side, and ran down to his stateroom. He could not be induced to come on +deck until Tom assured him that the fishes had been disposed of. Thus +Koku was a mixture of giant and baby. But he was a general favorite on +the ship, and often gave exhibitions of his strength. + +Meanwhile Tom and his friends had been on the lookout for any one who +might be trailing them. But they saw no suspicious characters among the +passengers, and, gradually, they began to feel that they had left their +enemies behind. + +The weather was pleasant, and the voyage very enjoyable. Tom and the +others had little to do, and they were getting rather impatient for the +time to come when they could put the airship together, and sail off +over the jungle, to get moving pictures of the elephants. + +"Have you any films in the camera now?" asked Ned of his chum on day, +as they sat on deck together. + +"Yes, it's all ready for instant use. Even the storage battery is +charged. Why?" + +"Oh, I was just wondering. I was thinking we might somehow see +something we could take pictures of." + +"Not much out here," said Tom, as he looked across the watery expanse. +As he did so, he saw a haze of smoke dead ahead. "We'll pass a steamer +soon," he went on, "but that wouldn't make a good picture. It's too +common." + +As the two lads watched, the smoke became blacker, and the cloud it +formed grew much larger. + +"They're burning a lot of coal on that ship," remarked Ned. "Must be +trying for a speed record." + +A little later a sailor stationed himself in the crow's nest, and +focused a telescope on the smoke. An officer, on deck, seemed to be +waiting for a report from the man aloft. + +"That's rather odd," remarked Ned. "I never knew them to take so much +interest in a passing steamer before; and we've gone by several of +late." + +"That's right," agreed Tom. "I wonder--" + +At that moment the officer, looking up, called out: + +"Main top!" + +"Aye, aye, sir," answered the sailor with the glass. "She's a small +steamer, sir, and she's on fire!" + +"That's what I feared. Come down. I'll tell the captain. We must crowd +on all steam, and go to the rescue." + +"Did you hear that?" cried Ned to Tom, as the officer hurried to the +bridge, where the captain awaited him. "A steamer on fire at sea, Tom! +why don't you--" + +"I'm going to!" interrupted the young inventor, as he started for his +cabin on the run. "I'm going to get some moving pictures of the rescue! +That will be a film worth having." + +A moment later the Belchar, the vessel on which our friends had +embarked, increased her speed, while sudden excitement developed on +board. + +As the Belchar approached the burning steamer, which had evidently seen +her, and was making all speed toward her, the cloud of smoke became +more dense, and a dull flame could be seen reflected in the water. + +"She's going fast!" cried Mr. Nestor, as he joined Ned on deck. + +"Bless my insurance policy!" cried Mr. Damon. "What a strange +happening! Where's Tom Swift?" + +"Gone for his camera," answered his chum. "He's going to get some +pictures of the rescue." + +"All hands man the life boats!" cried an officer, and several sailors +sprang to the davits, ready to lower the boats, when the steamers +should be near enough together. + +Up on deck came Tom, with his wonderful camera. + +"Here you go, Ned!" he called. "Give me a hand. I'm going to start the +film now." + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +AN ELEPHANT STAMPEDE + + +"Lower away!" + +"Stand by the life boats!" + +"Let go! Pull hearty!" + +These and other commands marked the beginning of the rescue, as the +sailors manned the davit-falls, and put the boats into the water. The +burning steamer had now come to a stop, not far away from the Belchar, +which was also lay-to. There was scarcely any sea running, and no wind, +so that the work of rescuing was not difficult from an ordinary +standpoint. But there was grave danger, because the fire on the doomed +vessel was gaining rapidly. + +"That's oil burning," remarked an officer, and it seemed so, from the +dense clouds of smoke that rolled upward. + +"Is she working, Tom?" asked Ned, as he helped his chum to hold the +wonderful camera steady on the rail, so that a good view of the burning +steamer could be had. + +"Yes, the film is running. Say, I wonder if they'll get 'em all off?" + +"Oh, I think so. There aren't many passengers. I guess it's a tramp +freighter." + +They could look across the gap of water, and see the terrified +passengers and crew crowding to the rail, holding out their hands +appealingly to the brave sailors who were lustily and rapidly, pulling +toward them in life boats. + +At times a swirl of smoke would hide those on the doomed vessel from +the sight of the passengers on the Belchar, and on such occasions the +frightened screams of women could be heard. Once, as the smoke cleared +away, a woman, with a child in her arms, giving a backward glance +toward the flames that were now enveloping the stern of the vessel, +attempted to leap overboard. + +Many hands caught her, however, and all this was registered on the film +of Tom's camera, which was working automatically. As the two vessels +drifted along, Tom and Ned shifted the lens so as to keep the burning +steamer, and the approaching lifeboats, in focus. + +"There's the first rescue!" cried Ned, as the woman who had attempted +to leap overboard, was, with her child, carefully lowered into a boat. +"Did you get that, Tom?" + +"I certainly did. This will make a good picture. I think I'll send it +back to Mr. Period as soon as we reach port." + +"Maybe you could develop it on board here, and show it. I understand +there's a dark room, and the captain said one of his officers, who used +to be in the moving picture business, had a reproducing machine." + +"Then that's what I'll do!" cried Tom. "I'll have our captain charge +all the Belchar passengers admission, and we'll get up a fund for the +fire sufferers. They'll probably lose all their baggage." + +"That will be great!" exclaimed Ned. + +The rescue was now in full swing, and, in a short time all the +passengers and crew had been transferred to the life boats. Tom got a +good picture of the captain of the burning steamer being the last to +leave his vessel. Then the approaching life boats, with their loads of +sailors, and rescued ones, were caught on the films. + +"Are you all off?" cried the captain of the Belchar to the unfortunate +skipper of the doomed ship. + +"All off, yes, thank you. It is a mercy you were at hand. I have a +cargo of oil. You had better stand off, for she'll explode in a few +minutes." + +"I must get a picture of that!" declared Tom as the Belchar got under +way again. "That will cap the climax, and make a film that will be hard +to beat." + +A few moments later there was a tremendous explosion on the tramp +oiler. A column of wreckage and black smoke shot skyward, and Tom +secured a fine view of it. Then the wreck disappeared beneath the +waves, while the rescuing steamer sailed on, with those who had been +saved. They had brought off only the things they wore, for the fire had +occurred suddenly, and spread rapidly. Kind persons aboard the Belchar +looked after the unfortunates. Luckily there was not a large passenger +list on the tramp. And the crew was comparatively small, so it was not +hard work to make room for them, or take care of them, aboard the +Belchar. + +Tom developed his pictures, and produced them in one of the large +saloons, on a machine he borrowed from the man of whom Ned had spoken. +A dollar admission was charged, and the crowd was so large that Tom had +to give two performances. The films, showing the burning steamer and +the rescue, were excellent, and enough money was realized to aid, most +substantially, the unfortunate passengers and crew. + +A few days later a New York bound steamer was spoken, and on it Tom +sent the roll of developed films to Mr. Period, with a letter of +explanation. + +I will not give all the details of the rest of the voyage. Sufficient +to say that no accidents marred it, nor did Tom discover any suspicious +characters aboard. In due time our friends arrived at Calcutta, and +were met by an agent of Mr. Period, for he had men in all quarters of +the world, making films for him. + +This agent took Tom and his party to a hotel, and arranged to have the +airship parts sent to a large open shed, not far away, where it could +be put together. The wonderful scenes in the Indian city interested Tom +and his companions for a time, but they had observed so many strange +sights from time to time that they did not marvel greatly. Koku, +however, was much delighted. He was like a child. + +"What are you going to do first?" asked Ned, when they had recovered +from the fatigue of the ocean voyage and had settled themselves in the +hotel. + +"Put the airship together," replied our hero, "and then, after getting +some Durbar pictures, we'll head for the jungle. I want to get some +elephant pictures, showing the big beasts being captured." + +Mr. Period's agent was a great help to them in this. He secured native +helpers, who aided Tom in assembling the airship, and in a week or two +it was ready for a flight. The wonderful camera, too, was looked over, +and the picture agent said he had never seen a better one. + +"It can take the kind of pictures I never could," he said. "I get +Calcutta street scenes for Mr. Period, and occasionally I strike a good +one. But I wish I had your chance." + +Tom invited him to come along in the airship, but the agent, who only +looked after Mr. Period's interests as a side issue, could not leave +his work. + +The airship was ready for a flight, stores and provisions had been put +on board, there was enough gasoline for the motor, and gas for the +balloon bag, to carry the Flyer thousands of miles. The moving picture +camera had been tested after the sea voyage, and had been found to work +perfectly. Many rolls of films were taken along. Tom got some fine +views of the Durbar of India, and his airship created a great sensation. + +"Now I guess we're all ready for the elephants," said Tom one day as he +came back from an inspection of the airship as it rested in the big +shed. "We'll start to-morrow morning, and head for the jungle." + +Amid the cries from a throng of wondering and awed natives, and with +the farewells of Mr. Period's agent ringing in their ears, Tom and his +party made an early start. The Flyer rose like a bird, and shot across +the city, while on the house tops many people watched the strange +sight. Tom did not start his camera working, as Mr. Period's agent said +he had made many pictures of the Indian city, and even one taken from +an airship, would not be much of a novelty. + +Tom had made inquiries, and learned that by a day's travel in his +airship (though it would have been much longer ordinarily) he could +reach a jungle where elephants might be found. Of course there was +nothing certain about it, as the big animals roamed all over, being in +one district one day, and on the next, many miles off. + +Gradually the city was left behind, and some time later the airship was +sailing along over the jungle. After the start, when Ned and Tom, with +Mr. Damon helping occasionally, had gotten the machinery into proper +adjustment, the Flyer almost ran herself. Then Tom took his station +forward, with his camera in readiness, and a powerful spyglass at hand, +so that he might see the elephants from a distance. + +He had been told that, somewhere in the district for which he was +headed, an elephant drive was contemplated. He hoped to be on hand to +get pictures of it, and so sent his airship ahead at top speed. + +On and on they rode, being as much at ease in the air as they would +have been if traveling in a parlor car. They did not fly high, as it +was necessary to be fairly close to the earth to get good pictures. + +"Well, I guess we won't have any luck to-day," remarked Ned, as night +approached, and they had had no sight of the elephants. They had gone +over mile after mile of jungle, but had seen few wild beasts in +sufficient numbers to make it worth while to focus the camera on them. + +"We'll float along to-night," decided Tom, "and try again in the +morning." + +It was about ten o'clock the next day, when Ned, who had relieved Tom +on watch, uttered a cry: + +"What is it?" asked his chum, as he rushed forward. "Has anything +happened?" + +"Lots!" cried Ned. "Look!" He pointed down below. Tom saw, crashing +through the jungle, a big herd of elephants. Behind them, almost +surrounding them, in fact, was a crowd of natives in charge of white +hunters, who were driving the herd toward a stockade. + +"There's a chance for a grand picture!" exclaimed Tom, as he got the +camera ready. "Take charge of the ship, Ned. Keep her right over the +big animals, and I'll work the camera." + +Quickly he focused the lens on the strange scene below him. There was +a riot of trumpeting from the elephants. The beaters and hunters +shouted and yelled. Then they saw the airship and waved their hands to +Tom and his friends, but whether to welcome them, or warn them away, +could not be told. + +The elephants were slowly advancing toward the stockade. Tom was taking +picture after picture of them, when suddenly as the airship came lower, +in response to a signal to Ned from the young inventor, one of the huge +pachyderms looked up, and saw the strange sight. He might have taken it +for an immense bird. At any rate he gave a trumpet of alarm, and the +next minute, with screams of rage and fear, the elephants turned, and +charged in a wild stampede on those who were driving them toward the +stockade. + +"Look!" cried Ned. "Those hunters and natives will be killed!" + +"I'm afraid so!" shouted Tom, as he continued to focus his camera on +the wonderful sight. + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +THE LION FIGHT + + +Crashing through the jungle the huge beasts turned against those who +had, been driving them on toward the stockade. With wild shouts and +yells, the hunters and their native helpers tried to turn back the +elephant tide, but it was useless. The animals had been frightened by +the airship, and were following their leader, a big bull, that went +crashing against great trees, snapping them off as if they were pipe +stems. + +"Say, this is something like!" cried Ned, as he guided the airship over +the closely packed body of elephants, so Tom could get good pictures, +for the herd had divided, and a small number had gone off with one of +the other bulls. + +"Yes, I'll get some great pictures," agreed Tom, as he looked in +through a red covered opening in the camera, to see how much film was +left. + +The airship was now so low down that Tom, and the others, could easily +make out the faces of the hunters, and the native helpers. One of the +hunters, evidently the chief, shaking his fist at our hero, cried: + +"Can't you take your blooming ship out of the way, my man? It's scaring +the beasts, and we've been a couple of weeks on this drive. We don't +want to lose all our work. Take your bloody ship away!" + +"I guess he must be an Englishman," remarked Mr. Nestor, with a laugh. + +"Bless my dictionary, I should say so," agreed Mr. Damon. "Bloody, +blooming ship! The idea!" + +"Well, I suppose we have scared the beasts," said Tom. "We ought to get +out of the way. Put her up, Ned, and we'll come down some distance in +advance." + +"Why, aren't you going to take any more views of the elephants?" + +"Yes, but I've got enough of a view from above. Besides, I've got to +put in a fresh reel of film, and I might as well get out of their sight +to do it. Maybe that will quiet them, and the hunters can turn them +back toward the stockade. If they do, I have another plan." + +"What is it?" his chum wanted to know. + +"I'm going to make a landing, set up my camera at the entrance to the +stockade, and get a series of pictures as the animals come in. I think +that will be a novelty. + +"That certainly will," agreed Mr. Nestor. "I am sure Mr. Period will +appreciate that. But won't it be dangerous, Tom?" + +"I suppose so, but I'm getting used to danger," replied our hero, with +a laugh. + +Ned put the ship high into the air, as Tom shut off the power from the +camera. Then the Flyer was sent well on in advance of the stampede of +elephants, so they could no longer see it, or hear the throb of the +powerful engines. Tom hoped that this would serve to quiet the immense +creatures. + +As the travelers flew on, over the jungle, they could still hear the +racket made by the hunters and beaters, and the shrill trumpeting of +the elephants, as they crashed through the forest. + +Tom at once began changing the film in the camera, and Ned altered the +course of the airship, to send it back toward the stockade, which they +had passed just before coming upon the herd of elephants. + +I presume most of my readers know what an elephant drive is like. A +stockade, consisting of heavy trees, is made in the jungle. It is like +the old fashioned forts our forefathers used to make, for a defense +against the Indians. There is a broad entrance to it, and, when all is +in readiness, the beaters go out into the jungle, with the white +hunters, to round up the elephants. A number of tame pachyderms are +taken along to persuade the wild ones to follow. + +Gradually the elephants are gathered together in a large body, and +gently driven toward the stockade. The tame elephants go in first, and +the others follow. Then the entrance is closed, and all that remains to +be done is to tame the wild beasts, a not very easy task. + +"Are you all ready?" asked Ned, after a bit, as he saw Tom come forward +with the camera. + +"Yes, I'm loaded for some more excitement. You can put me right over +the stockade now, Ned, and when we see the herd coming back I'll go +down, and take some views from the ground." + +"I think they've got 'em turned," said Mr. Damon. "It sounds as if they +were coming back this way." + +A moment later they had a glimpse of the herd down below. It was true +that the hunters had succeeded in stopping the stampede, and once more +the huge beasts were going in the right direction. + +"There's a good place to make a landing," suggested Tom, as he saw a +comparatively clear place in the jungle. "It's near the stockade, and, +in case of danger, I can make a quick get-away." + +"What kind of danger are you looking for?" asked Ned, as he shifted the +deflecting rudder. + +"Oh, one of the beasts might take a notion to chase me." + +The landing was made, and Tom, taking Ned and Mr. Nestor with him, and +leaving the others to manage the airship in case a quick flight would +be necessary, made his way along a jungle trail to the entrance to the +stockade. He carried his camera with him, for it was not heavy. + +On came the elephants, frightened by the shouts and cries of the +beaters, and the firing of guns. The young inventor took his place near +the stockade entrance, and, as the elephants advanced through the +forest, tearing up trees and bushes, Tom got some good pictures of them. + +Suddenly the advance of the brutes was checked, and the foremost of +them raised their trunks, trumpeted in anger, and were about to turn +back again. + +"Get away from that bloomin' gate!" shouted a hunter to Tom. "You're +scaring them as bad as your airship did." + +"Yes, they won't go in with you there!" added another man. + +Tom slipped around the corner of the stockade, out of sight, and from +that vantage point he took scores of pictures, as the tame animals led +the wild ones into the fenced enclosure. Then began another wild scene +as the gate was closed. + +The terrified animals rushed about, trying in vain to find a way of +escape. Tom managed to climb up on top of the logs, and got some +splendid pictures. But this was nearly his undoing. For, just as the +last elephant rushed in, a big bull charged against the stockade, and +jarred Tom so that he was on the point of falling. His one thought was +about his camera, and he looked to see if he could drop it on the soft +grass, so it would not be damaged. + +He saw Koku standing below him, the giant having slipped out of the +airship, to see the beasts at closer range. + +"Catch this, Koku!" cried Tom, tossing the big man his precious camera, +and the giant caught it safely. But Tom's troubles were not over. A +moment later, as the huge elephant again rammed the fence, Tom fell +off, but fortunately outside. Then the large beast, seeing a small +opening in the gate that was not yet entirely closed, made for it. A +moment later he was rushing straight at Tom, who was somewhat stunned +by his fall, though it was not a severe one. + +"Look out!" yelled Ned. + +"Take a tree, Tom!" cried Mr. Nestor. + +The elephant paid no attention to any one but Tom, whom he seemed to +think had caused all his trouble. The young inventor dashed to one +side, and then started to run toward the airship, for which Ned and Mr. +Nestor were already making. The elephant hunters at last succeeded in +closing the gate, blocking the chance of any more animals to escape. + +"Run, Tom! Run!" yelled Ned, and Tom ran as he had never run before. +The elephant was close after him though, crashing through the jungle. +Tom could see the airship just ahead of him. + +Suddenly he felt something grasp him from behind. He thought surely it +was the elephant's trunk, but a quick glance over his shoulder showed +him the friendly face of Koku, the giant. + +"Me run for you," said Koku, as he caught Tom up under one arm, and, +carrying the camera under the other, he set off at top speed. Now Koku +could run well at times, and this time he did. He easily outdistanced +the elephant, and, a little later, he set Tom down on the deck of the +airship, with the camera beside him. Then Ned and Mr. Nestor came up +panting, having run to one side. + +"Quick!" cried Tom. "We must get away before the elephant charges the +Flyer." + +"He has stopped," shouted Mr. Nestor, and it was indeed so. The big +beast, seeing again the strange craft that had frightened him before, +stood still for a moment, and then plunged off into the jungle, +trumpeting with rage. + +"Safe!" gasped Tom, as he looked at his camera to see if it had been +damaged. It seemed all right. + +"Bless my latch key!" cried Mr. Damon. "This moving picture business +isn't the most peaceful one in the world." + +"No, it has plenty of perils," agreed Mr. Nestor. + +"Come on, let's get out of here while we have the chance," suggested +Tom. "There may be another herd upon us before we know it." + +The airship was soon ascending, and Tom and his companions could look +down and see the tame elephants in the stockade trying to calm the wild +ones. Then the scene faded from sight. + +"Well, if these pictures come out all right I'll have some fine ones," +exclaimed Tom as he carried his camera to the room where he kept the +films. "I fancy an elephant drive and stampede are novelties in this +line." + +"Indeed they are," agreed Mr. Nestor. "Mr. Period made no mistake when +he picked you out, Tom, for this work. What are you going to try for +next?" + +"I'd like to get some lion and tiger pictures," said the young +inventor. "I understand this is a good district for that. As soon as +those elephants get quieted down, I'm going back to the stockade and +have a talk with the hunters." + +This he did, circling about in the airship until nearly evening. When +they again approached the stockade all was quiet, and they came to +earth. A native showed them where the white hunters had their +headquarters, in some bungalows, and Tom and his party were made +welcome. They apologized for frightening the big beasts, and the +hunters accepted their excuses. + +"As long as we got 'em, it's all right," said the head man, "though for +awhile, I didn't like your bloomin' machine." Tom entertained the +hunters aboard his craft, at which they marvelled much, and they gave +him all the information they had about the lions and tigers in the +vicinity. + +"You won't find lions and tigers in herds, like elephants though," said +the head hunter. "And you may have to photograph 'em at night, as then +is when they come out to hunt, and drink." + +"Well, I can take pictures at night," said Tom, as he showed his camera +apparatus. + +The next day, in the airship, they left for another district, where, so +the natives reported, several lions had been seen of late. They had +done much damage, too, carrying off the native cattle, and killing +several Indians. + +For nearly a week Tom circled about in his airship, keeping a sharp +lookout down below for a sign of lions that he might photograph them. +But he saw none, though he did get some pictures of a herd of Indian +deer that were well worth his trouble. + +"I think I'll have to try for a night photograph," decided Tom at last. +"I'll locate a spring where wild beasts are in the habit of coming, set +the camera with the light going, and leave it there." + +"But will the lions come up if they see the light?" asked Ned. + +"I think so," replied his chum. "I'll take a chance, anyhow. If that +doesn't work then I'll hide near by, and see what happens." + +"Bless my cartridge belt!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't mean that; do +you Tom?" + +"Of course. Come to think of it, I'm not going to leave my camera out +there for a lion to jump on, and break. As soon as I get a series of +pictures I'll bring it back to the ship, I think." + +By inquiry among the natives they learned the location of a spring +where, it was said, lions were in the habit of coming nightly to drink. + +"That's the place I want!" cried Tom. + +Accordingly the airship was headed for it, and one evening it came +gently to earth in a little clearing on the edge of the jungle, while +Koku, as was his habit, got supper. + +After the meal Tom and Ned set the camera, and then, picking out a good +spot nearby, they hid themselves to wait for what might happen. The +lens was focused on the spring, and the powerful electric light set +going. It glowed brightly, and our hero thought it might have the +effect of keeping the beasts away, but Tom figured that, after they had +looked at it for a while, and seen that it did not harm them, they +would lose their suspicions, and come within range of his machine. + +"The camera will do the rest," he said. In order not to waste films +uselessly Tom arranged a long electric wire, running it from the camera +to where he and Ned were hid. By pressing a button he could start or +stop the camera any time he wished, and, as he had a view of the spring +from his vantage point, he could have the apparatus begin taking +pictures as soon as there was some animal within focus. + +"Well, I'm getting stiff," said Ned, after an hour or so had passed in +silent darkness, the only light being the distant one on the camera. + +"So am I," said Tom. + +"I don't believe anything will come to-night," went on his chum. "Let's +go back and--" + +He stopped suddenly, for there was a crackling in the underbrush, and +the next moment the jungle vibrated to the mighty roar of a lion. + +"He's coming!" hoarsely whispered Tom. + +Both lads glanced through the trees toward the camera, and, in the +light, they saw a magnificent, tawny beast standing on the edge of the +spring. Once more he roared, as if in defiance, and then, as if +deciding that the light was not harmful, he stooped to lap up the water. + +Hardly had he done so than there was another roar, and a moment later a +second lion leaped from the dense jungle into the clearing about the +spring. The two monarchs of the forest stood there in the glare of the +light, and Tom excitedly pressed the button that started the shutter to +working, and the film to moving back of the lens. + +There was a slight clicking sound in the camera, and the lions turned +startedly. Then both growled again, and the next instant they sprang at +each other, roaring mightily. + +"A fight!" cried Tom. "A lion fight, and right in front of my camera! +It couldn't be better. This is great! This will be a film." + +"Quiet!" begged Ned. "They'll hear you, and come for us. I don't want +to be chewed up!" + +"No danger of them hearing me!" cried Tom, and he had to shout to be +heard above the roaring of the two tawny beasts, as they bit and clawed +each other, while the camera took picture after picture of them. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +A SHOT IN TIME + + +"Tom, did you ever see anything like it in your life?" + +"I never did, Ned! It's wonderful! fearful! And to think that we are +here watching it, and that thousands of people will see the same thing +thrown on a screen. Oh, look at the big one. The small lion has him +down!" + +The two lads, much thrilled, crouched down behind a screen of bushes, +watching the midnight fight between the lions. On the airship, not far +distant, there was no little alarm, for those left behind heard the +terrific roars, and feared Tom and Ned might be in some danger. But the +lions were too much occupied with their battle, to pay any attention to +anything else, and no other wild beasts were likely to come to the +spring while the two "kings" were at each other. + +It was a magnificent, but terrible battle. The big cats bit and tore at +each other, using their terrific claws and their powerful paws, one +stroke of which is said to be sufficient to break a bullock's back. +Sometimes they would roll out of the focus of the camera, and, at such +times, Tom wished he was at the machine to swing the lens around, but +he knew it would be dangerous to move. Then the beasts would roll back +into the rays of light again, and more pictures of them would be taken. + +"I guess the small one is going to win!" said Tom, after the two lions +had fought for ten minutes, and the bigger one had been down several +times. + +"He's younger," agreed Ned, "and I guess the other one has had his +share of fights. Maybe this is a battle to see which one is to rule +this part of the jungle." + +"I guess so," spoke the young inventor, as he pressed the button to +stop the camera, as the lions rolled out of focus. "Oh, look!" he cried +a moment later, as the animals again rolled into view. Tom started the +camera once more. "This is near the end," he said. + +The small lion had, by a sudden spring, landed on the back of his +rival. There was a terrific struggle, and the older beast went down, +the younger one clawing him terribly. Then, so quickly did it happen +that the boys could not take in all the details, the older lion rolled +over and over, and rid himself of his antagonist. Quickly he got to his +feet, while the smaller lion did the same. They stood for a moment +eyeing each other, their tails twitching, the hair on their backs +bristling, and all the while they uttered frightful roars. + +An instant later the larger beast sprang toward his rival. One terrible +paw was upraised. The small lion tried to dodge, but was not quick +enough. Down came the paw with terrific force, and the boys could hear +the back bone snap. Then, clawing his antagonist terribly, as he lay +disabled, the older lion, with a roar of triumph, lapped up water, and +sprang off through the jungle, leaving his dying rival beside the +spring. + +"That's the end," cried Tom, as the small lion died, and the young +inventor pressed the button stopping his camera. There was a rustle in +the leaves back of Tom and Ned, and they sprang up in alarm, but they +need not have feared, for it was only Koku, the giant, who, with a +portable electrical torch, had come to see how they had fared. + +"Mr. Tom all right?" asked the big man, anxiously. + +"Yes, and I got some fine pictures. You can carry the camera back now, +Koku. I think that roll of film is pretty well filled." + +The three of them looked at the body of the dead lion, before they went +back to the airship. I have called him "small," but, in reality, the +beast was small only in comparison with his rival, who was a tremendous +lion in size. I might add that of all the pictures Tom took, few were +more highly prized than that reel of the lion fight. + +"Bless my bear cage!" cried Mr. Damon, as Tom came back, "you certainly +have nerve, my boy." + +"You have to, in this business," agreed Tom with a laugh. "I never did +this before, and I don't know that I would want it for a steady +position, but it's exciting for a change." + +They remained near the "lion spring" as they called it all night, and +in the morning, after Koku had served a tasty breakfast, Tom headed the +airship for a district where it was said there were many antelope, and +buffaloes, also zebus. + +"I don't want to get all exciting pictures," our hero said to Mr. +Nestor. "I think that films showing wild animals at play, or quietly +feeding, will be good." + +"I'm sure they will," said Mary's father. "Get some peaceful scenes, by +all means." + +They sailed on for several days, taking a number of pictures from the +airship, when they passed over a part of the country where the view was +magnificent, and finally, stopping at a good sized village they learned +that, about ten miles out, was a district where antelope abounded. + +"We'll go there," decided Tom, "and I'll take the camera around with me +on a sort of walking trip. In that way I'll get a variety of views, and +I can make a good film." + +This plan was followed out. The airship came to rest in a beautiful +green valley, and Ned and Tom, with Mr. Damon, who begged to be taken +along, started off. + +"You can follow me in about half an hour, Koku," said Tom, "and carry +the camera back. I guess you can easily pick up our trail." + +"Oh, sure," replied the giant. Indeed, to one who had lived in the +forest, as he had all his life, before Tom found him, it was no +difficult matter to follow a trail, such as the three friends would +leave. + +Tom found signs that showed him where the antelopes were in the habit +of passing, and, with Ned and Mr. Damon, stationed himself in a +secluded spot. + +He had not long to wait before a herd of deer came past. Tom took many +pictures of the graceful creatures, for it was daylight now, and he +needed no light. Consequently there was nothing to alarm the herd. + +After having made several films of the antelope, Tom and his two +companions went farther on. They were fortunate enough to find a place +that seemed to be a regular playground of the deer. There was a large +herd there, and, getting as near as he dared, Tom focused his camera, +and began taking pictures. + +"It's as good as a play," whispered Mr. Damon, as he and Ned watched +the creatures, for they had to speak quietly. The camera made scarcely +any noise. "I'm glad I came on this trip." + +"So am I," said Ned. "Look, Tom, see the mother deer all together, and +the fawns near them. It's just as if it was a kindergarten meeting." + +"I see," whispered Tom. "I'm getting a picture of that." + +For some little time longer Tom photographed the deer, and then, +suddenly, the timid creatures all at once lifted up their heads, and +darted off. Tom and Ned, wondering what had startled them, looked +across the glade just in time to see a big tiger leap out of the tall +grass. The striped animal had been stalking the antelope, but they had +scented him just in time. + +"Get him, Tom," urged Ned, and the young inventor did so, securing +several fine views before the tiger bounded into the grass again, and +took after his prey. + +"Bless my china teacup! What's that!" suddenly cried Mr. Damon. As he +spoke there was a crashing in the bushes and, an instant later as +two-horned rhinoceros sprang into view, charging straight for the group. + +"Look out!" yelled Ned. + +"Bless my--" began Mr. Damon, but he did not finish, for, in starting +to run his foot caught in the grass, and he went down heavily. + +Tom leaped to one side, holding his camera so as not to damage it. But +he stumbled over Mr. Damon, and went down. + +With a "wuff" of rage the clumsy beast, came on, moving more rapidly +than Tom had any idea he was capable of. Hampered by his camera our +hero could not arise. The rhinoceros was almost upon him, and Ned, +catching up a club, was just going to make a rush to the rescue, when +the brute seemed suddenly to crumple up. It fell down in a heap, not +five feet from where Tom and Mr. Damon lay. + +"Good!" cried Ned. "He's dead. Shot through the heart! Who did it?" + +"I did," answered Koku quietly, stepping out of the bushes, with one of +Tom's Swift's electric rifles in his hand. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +IN A GREAT GALE + + +Tom Swift rose slowly to his feet, carefully setting his camera down, +after making sure that it was not injured. Then he looked at the huge +beast which lay dead in front of him, and, going over to the giant he +held out his hand to him. + +"Koku, you saved my life," spoke Tom. "Probably the life of Mr. Damon +also. I can't begin to thank you. It isn't the first time you've done +it, either. But I want to say that you can have anything you want, that +I've got." + +"Me like this gun pretty much," said the giant simply. + +"Then it's yours!" exclaimed Tom. "And you're the only one, except +myself, who has ever owned one." Tom's wonderful electric rifle, of +which I have told you in the book bearing that name, was one of his +most cherished inventions. + +He guarded jealously the secret of how it worked, and never sold or +gave one away, for fear that unscrupulous men might learn how to make +them, and to cause fearful havoc. For the rifle was a terrible weapon. +Koku seemed to appreciate the honor done him, as he handled the gun, +and looked from it to the dead rhinoceros. + +"Bless my blank cartridge!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, as he also got up and +came to examine the dead beast. It was the first thing he had said +since the animal had rushed at him, and he had not moved after he fell +down. He had seemingly been in a daze, but when the others heard him +use one of his favorite expressions they knew that he was all right +again. "Bless my hat!" went on the odd man. "What happened, Tom? Is +that beast really dead? How did Koku come to arrive in time?" + +"I guess he's dead all right," said Tom, giving the rhinoceros a kick. +"But I don't know how Koku happened to arrive in the nick of time, and +with the gun, too." + +"I think maybe I see something to shoot when I come after you, like you +tell me to do," spoke the giant. "I follow your trail, but I see +nothing to shoot until I come here. Then I see that animal run for you, +and I shoot." + +"And a good thing you did, too," put in Ned. "Well let's go back. My +nerves are on edge, and I want to sit quiet for a while." + +"Take the camera, Koku," ordered Tom, "and I'll carry the electric +rifle--your rifle, now," he added, and the giant grinned in delight. +They reached the airship without further incident, and, after a cup of +tea, Tom took out the exposed films and put a fresh roll in his camera, +ready for whatever new might happen. + +"Where is your next stopping place, Tom?" asked Ned, as they sat in the +main room of the airship that evening, talking over the events of the +day. They had decided to stay all night anchored on the ground, and +start off in the morning. + +"I hardly know," answered the young inventor. "I am going to set the +camera to-night, near a small spring I saw, to get some pictures of +deer coming to drink. I may get a picture of a lion or a tiger +attacking them. If I could it would be another fine film. To-morrow I +think we will start for Switzerland. But now I'm going to get the +camera ready for a night exposure. + +"Bless my check book!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't mean to say that you +are going to stay out at a spring again, Tom, and run the chance of a +tiger getting you." + +"No, I'm merely going to set the camera, attach the light and let it +work automatically this time. I've put in an extra long roll of film, +for I'm going to keep it going for a long while, and part of the time +there may be no animals there to take pictures of. No, I'm not going to +sit out to-night. I'm too tired. I'll conceal the camera in the bushes +so it won't be damaged if there's a fight. Then, as I said, we'll start +for Switzerland to-morrow." + +"Switzerland!" cried Ned. "What in the world do you want to go make a +big jump like that for? And what do you expect to get in that mountain +land?" + +"I'm going to try for a picture of an avalanche," said Tom. "Mr. +Period wants one, if I can get it. It is quite a jump, but then we'll +be flying over civilized countries most of the time, and if any +accident happens we can go down and easily make repairs. We can also +get gasolene for the motor, though I have quite a supply in the tanks, +and perhaps enough for the entire trip. At the same time we won't take +any chances. So we'll be off for Switzerland in the morning. + +"I think some avalanche pictures will be great, if you can get them," +remarked Mr. Nestor. "But, Tom, you know those big slides of ice, snow +and earth aren't made to order." + +"Oh, I know," agreed the young inventor with a smile. "I'll just have +to take my chances, and wait until one happens." + +"Bless my insurance policy!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "And when it does +happen, Tom, are you going to stand in front of it, and snap-shot it?" + +"Indeed I'm not. This business is risky and dangerous enough, without +looking for trouble. I'm going to the mountain region, and hover around +in the air, until we see an avalanche 'happen' if that is the right +word. Then I'll focus the camera on it, and the films and machinery +will do the rest." + +"Oh, that's different," remarked the odd man, with an air of relief. + +Tom and Ned soon had the camera set near the spring and then, everyone +being tired with the day's work and excitement, they retired. In the +morning there were signs around the spring that many animals had been +there in the night. There were also marks as if there had been a fight, +but of course what sort, or how desperate, no one could say. + +"If anything happened the camera got it, I'm sure of that much," +remarked Tom, as he brought in the apparatus. "I'm not going to develop +the roll, for I don't want to take the time now. I guess we must have +something, anyhow." + +"If there isn't it won't so much matter for you have plenty of other +good views," said Mr. Nestor. + +I will not go into details of the long trip to Switzerland, where, amid +the mountains of that country, Tom hoped to get the view he wanted. + +Sufficient to say that the airship made good time after leaving India. +Sometimes Tom sent the craft low down, in order to get views, and +again, it would be above the clouds. + +"Well, another day will bring us there," said Tom one evening, as he +was loading the camera with a fresh roll of films. "Then we'll have to +be on the lookout for an avalanche." + +"Yes, we're making pretty good time," remarked Ned, as he looked at the +speed gage. "I didn't know you had the motor working so fast, Tom." + +"I haven't," was the young inventor's answer, as he looked up in +surprise. "Why, we are going quite fast! It's the wind, Ned. It's +right with us, and it's carrying us along." + +Tom arose and went to the anemometer, or wind-registering instrument. +He gave a low whistle, half of alarm. + +"Fifty miles an hour she's blowing now," he said. "It came on suddenly, +too, for a little while ago it was only ten." + +"Is there any danger?" asked Mr. Nestor, for he was not very familiar +with airship perils. + +"Well, we've been in big blows before, and we generally came out all +right," returned Tom. "Still, I don't like this. Why she went up five +points since I've been looking at it!" and he pointed to the needle of +the gage, which now registered fifty-five miles an hour. + +"Bless my appendix!" gasped Mr. Damon. "It's a hurricane Tom!" + +"Something like that," put in Ned, in a low voice. + +With a suddenness that was startling, the wind increased in violence +still more. Tom ran to the pilot house. + +"What are you going to do?" Ned called. + +"See if we can't go down a bit," was Tom's answer. "I don't like this. +It may be calmer below. We're up too high as it is." + +He tried to throw over the lever controlling the deflecting rudder, +which would send the Flyer down, but he could not move it. + +"Give me a hand!" he called to Ned, but even the strength of the two +lads was not sufficient to shift it. + +"Call Koku!" gasped Tom. "If anybody can budge it the giant can!" + +Meanwhile the airship was being carried onward in the grip of a mighty +wind, so strong that its pressure on the surface of the deflecting +rudder prevented it from being shifted. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +SNAPPING AN AVALANCHE + + +"Bless my thermometer!" gasped Mr. Damon. "This is terrible!" The +airship was plunging and swaying about in the awful gale. "Can't +something be done, Tom?" + +"What has happened?" cried Mr. Nestor. "We were on a level keel before. +What is it?" + +"It's the automatic balancing rudder!" answered Tom. "Something has +happened to it. The wind may have broken it! Come on, Ned!" and he led +the way to the engine room. + +"What are you going to do? Don't you want Koku to shift the deflecting +rudder? Here he is," Ned added, as the giant came forward, in response +to a signal bell that Tom's chum had rung. + +"It's too late to try the deflecting rudder!" tried Tom. "I must see +what is the matter with our balancer." As he spoke the ship gave a +terrific plunge, and the occupants were thrown sideways. The next +moment it was on a level keel again, scudding along with the gale, but +there was no telling when the craft would again nearly capsize. + +Tom looked at the mechanism controlling the equalizing and equilibrium +rudder. It was out of order, and he guessed that the terrific wind was +responsible for it. + +"What can we do?" cried Ned, as the airship nearly rolled over. "Can't +we do anything, Tom?" + +"Yes. I'm going to try. Keep calm now. We may come out all right. This +is the worst blow we've been in since we were in Russia. Start the gas +machine full blast. I want all the vapor I can get." + +As I have explained the Flyer was a combined dirigible balloon and +aeroplane. It could be used as either, or both, in combination. At +present the gas bag was not fully inflated, and Tom had been sending +his craft along as an aeroplane. + +"What are you going to do?" cried Ned, as he pulled over the lever that +set the gas generating machine in operation. + +"I'm going up as high as I can go!" cried Tom. "If we can't go down we +must go up. I'll get above the hurricane instead of below it. Give me +all the gas you can, Ned!" + +The vapor hissed as it rushed into the big bag overhead. Tom carried +aboard his craft the chemicals needed to generate the powerful lifting +gas, of which he alone had the secret. It was more powerful than +hydrogen, and simple to make. The balloon of the Flyer was now being +distended. + +Meanwhile Tom, with Koku, Mr. Damon and Mr. Nestor to help him, worked +over the deflecting rudder, and also on the equilibrium mechanism. But +they could not get either to operate. + +Ned stood by the gas machine, and worked it to the limit. But even with +all that energy, so powerful was the wind, that the Flyer rose slowly, +the gale actually holding her down as a water-logged craft is held +below the waves. Ordinarily, with the gas machine set at its limit the +craft would have shot up rapidly. + +At times the airship would skim along on the level, and again it would +be pitched and tossed about, until it was all the occupants could do to +keep their feet. Mr. Damon was continually blessing everything he could +remember. + +"Now she's going!" suddenly cried Ned, as he looked at the dials +registering the pressure of the gas, and showing the height of the +airship above the earth. + +"Going how?" gasped Tom, as he looked over from where he was working at +the equilibrium apparatus. "Going down?" + +"Going up!" shouted Ned. "I guess we'll be all right soon!" + +It was true. Now that the bag was filled with the powerful lifting gas, +under pressure, the Flyer was beginning to get out of the dangerous +predicament into which the gale had blown her. Up and up she went, and +every foot she climbed the power of the wind became less. + +"Maybe it all happened for the best," said Tom, as he noted the height +gage. "If we had gone down, the wind might have been worse nearer the +earth." + +Later they learned that this was so. The most destructive wind storm +ever known swept across the southern part of Europe, over which they +were flying that night, and, had the airship gone down, she would +probably have been destroyed. But, going up, she got above the +wind-strata. Up and up she climbed, until, when three miles above the +earth, she was in a calm zone. It was rather hard to breathe at this +height, and Tom set the oxygen apparatus at work. + +This created in the interior of the craft an atmosphere almost like +that on the earth, and the travelers were made more at their ease. +Getting out of the terrible wind pressure made it possible to work the +deflecting rudder, though Tom had no idea of going down, as long as the +blow lasted. + +"We'll just sail along at this height until morning," he said, "and by +then the gale may be over, or we may be beyond the zone of it. Start +the propellers, Ned. I think I can manage to repair the equilibrium +rudder now." + +The propellers, which gave the forward motion to the airship, had been +stopped when it was found that the wind was carrying her along, but +they were now put in motion again, sending the Flyer forward. In a +short time Tom had the equilibrium machine in order, and matters were +now normal again. + +"But that was a strenuous time while it lasted," remarked the young +inventor, as he sat down. + +"It sure was," agreed Ned. + +"Bless my pen wiper!" cried Mr. Damon. "That was one of the few times +when I wish I'd never come with you, Tom Swift," and everyone laughed +at that. + +The Flyer was now out of danger, going along high in the air through +the night, while the gale raged below her. At Tom's suggestion, Koku +got a lunch ready, for they were all tired with their labors, and +somewhat nervous from the danger and excitement. + +"And now for sleep!" exclaimed Tom, as he pushed back his plate. "Ned, +set the automatic steering gear, and we'll see where we bring up by +morning." + +An examination, through a powerful telescope in the bright light of +morning, showed the travelers that they were over the outskirts of a +large city, which, later, they learned was Rome, Italy. + +"We've made a good trip," said Tom. "The gale had us worried, but it +sent us along at a lively clip. Now for Switzerland, and the +avalanches!" + +They made a landing at a village just outside the "Holy City," as Rome +is often called, and renewed their supply of gasolene. Naturally they +attracted a crowd of curious persons, many of whom had never seen an +airship before. Certainly few of them had ever seen one like Tom +Swift's. + +The next day found them hovering over the Alps, where Tom hoped to be +able to get the pictures of snow slides. They went down to earth at a +town near one of the big mountain ranges, and there made inquiries as +to where would be the best location to look for big avalanches. If they +went but a few miles to the north, they were told, they would be in the +desired region, and they departed for that vicinity. + +"And now we've just got to take our time, and wait for an avalanche to +happen," remarked Tom, as they were flying along over the mountain +ranges. "As Mr. Damon said, these things aren't made to order. They +just happen." + +For three days they sailed in and out over the great snow-covered peaks +of the Alps. They did not go high up, for they wanted to be near earth +when an avalanche would occur, so that near-view pictures could be +secured. Occasionally they saw parties of mountain climbers ascending +some celebrated peak, and for want of something better to photograph, +Tom "snapped" the tourists. + +"Well, I guess they're all out of avalanches this season," remarked Ned +one afternoon, when they had circled back and forth over a mountain +where, so it was said, the big snow slides were frequent. + +"It does seem so," agreed Tom. "Still, we're in no hurry. It is easier +to be up here, than it is walking around in a jungle, not knowing what +minute a tiger may jump out at you." + +"Bless my rubbers, yes!" agreed Mr. Damon. + +The sky was covered with lowering clouds, and there were occasionally +flurries of snow. Tom's airship was well above the snow line on the +mountains. The young inventor and Ned sat in the pilot house, taking +observations through a spyglass of the mountain chain below them. + +Suddenly Ned, who had the glass focused on a mighty peak, cried out: + +"There she is, Tom!" + +"What?" + +"The avalanche! The snow is beginning to slide down the mountain! Say, +it's going to be a big one, too. Got your camera ready?" + +"Sure! I've had it ready for the last three days. Put me over there, +Ned. You look after the airship, and I'll take the pictures!" + +Tom sprang to get his apparatus, while his chum hurried to the levers, +wheels and handles that controlled the Flyer. As they approached the +avalanche they could see the great mass of ice, snow, big stones, and +earth sliding down the mountain side, carrying tall trees with it. + +"This is just what I wanted!" cried Tom, as he set his camera working. +"Put me closer, Ned." + +Ned obeyed, and the airship was now hovering directly over the +avalanche, and right in its path. The big landslide, as it would have +been called in this country, met no village in its path, fortunately, +or it would have wiped it out completely. It was in a wild and desolate +region that it occurred. + +"I want to get a real close view!" cried Tom, as he got some pictures +showing a whole grove of giant trees uprooted and carried off. "Get +closer Ned, and--" + +Tom was interrupted by a cry of alarm from his chum. + +"We're falling!" yelled Ned. "Something has gone wrong. We're going +down into the avalanche!". + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +TELEGRAPH ORDERS + + +There was confusion aboard the airship. Tom, hearing Ned's cry, left +his camera, to rush to the engine room, but not before he had set the +picture apparatus to working automatically. Mr. Damon, Mr. Nestor and +Koku, alarmed by Ned's cries, ran back from the forward part of the +craft, where they had been watching the mighty mass of ice and earth as +it rushed down the side of the mountain. + +"What's wrong, Ned?" cried Tom excitedly. + +"I don't know! The propellers have stopped! We were running as an +aeroplane you know. Now we're going down!" + +"Bless my suspenders!" shouted Mr. Damon. "If we land in the midst of +that conglomeration of ice it will be the end of us." + +"But we're not going to land there!" cried Tom. + +"How are you going to stop it?" demanded Mr. Nestor. + +"By the gas machine!" answered Tom. "That will stop us from falling. +Start it up, Ned!" + +"That's right! I always forget about that! I'll have it going in a +second!" + +"Less than a second," called Tom, as he saw how near to the mighty, +rushing avalanche they were coming. + +Ned worked rapidly, and in a very short time the downward course of the +airship was checked. It floated easily above the rushing flood of ice +and earth, and Tom, seeing that his craft, and those on it, were safe, +hurried back to his camera. Meanwhile the machine had automatically +been taking pictures, but now with the young inventor to manage it, +better results would be obtained. + +Tom aimed it here and there, at the most spectacular parts of the +avalanche. The others gathered around him, after Ned had made an +inspection, and found that a broken electrical wire had caused the +propellers to stop. This was soon repaired and then, as they were +hanging in the air like a balloon, Tom took picture after picture of +the wonderful sight below them. Forest after forest was demolished. + +"This will be a great film!" Tom shouted to Ned, as the latter informed +him that the machinery was all right again. "Send me up a little. I +want to get a view from the top, looking down." + +His chum made the necessary adjustments to the mechanism and then, +there being nothing more to slide down the mountainside the avalanche +was ended. But what a mass of wreck and ruin there was! It was as if a +mighty earthquake had torn the mountain asunder. + +"It's a good thing it wasn't on a side of the mountain where people +lived," commented Ned, as the airship rose high toward the clouds. "If +it had been, there'd be nothing left of 'em. What hair-raising stunt +are you going to try next, Tom?" + +"I don't know. I expect to hear from Mr. Period soon. + +"Hear from Mr. Period?" exclaimed Mr. Nestor. "How are you going to do +that, Tom?" + +"He said he would telegraph me at Berne, Switzerland, at a certain +date, as he knew I was coming to the Alps to try for some avalanche +pictures. It's two or three days yet, before I can expect the telegram, +which of course will have to come part way by cable. In the meanwhile, +I think we'll take a little rest, and a vacation. I want to give the +airship an overhauling, and look to my camera. There's no telling what +Mr. Period may want next." + +"Then he didn't make out your programme completely before you started?" +asked Mr. Nestor. + +"No, he said he'd communicate with me from time to time. He is in touch +with what is going on in the world, you know, and if he hears of +anything exciting at any place, I'm to go there at once. You see he +wants the most sensational films he can get." + +"Yes, our company is out to give the best pictures we can secure," +spoke Mary's father, "and I think we are lucky to have Tom Swift +working for us. We already have films that no other concern can get. +And we need them." + +"I wonder what became of those men who started to make so much trouble +for you, Tom?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"Well, they seem to have disappeared," replied our hero. "Of course +they may be after me any day now, but for the time being, I've thrown +them off my track." + +"So then you don't know where you're going next?" asked Ned. + +"No, it may be to Japan, or to the North Pole. Well, I'm ready for +anything. We've got plenty of gasolene, and the Flyer can certainly +go," said Tom. + +They went down to earth in a quiet spot, just outside of a little +village, and there they remained three days, to the no small wonder of +the inhabitants. Tom wanted to see if his camera was working properly. +So he developed some of the avalanche pictures, and found them +excellent. The rest of the time was spent in making some needed repairs +to the airship, while the young inventor overhauled his Wizard machine, +that he found needed a few adjustments. + +Their arrival in Berne created quite a sensation, but they were used to +that. Tom anchored his airship just outside the city, and, accompanied +by Ned, made his way to the telegraph office. Some of the officials +there could speak English, though not very well. + +"I am expecting a message," said Tom. + +"Yes? Who for?" asked the clerk. + +"Tom Swift. It will be from America." + +As Tom said this he observed a man sitting in the corner of the office +get up hurriedly and go out. All at once his suspicions were aroused. +He thought of the attempts that had been made to get his Wizard Camera +away from him. + +"Who was that man?" he quickly asked the agent. + +"Him? Oh, he, too, is expecting a message from America. He has been +here some time." + +"Why did he go out so quickly?" Ned wanted to know. + +"Why, I can not tell. He is an Englishman. They do strange things." + +"My telegram? Is it here?" asked Tom impatiently. He wanted to get +whatever word there was from Mr. Period, and be on his way to whatever +destination the picture man might select. Perhaps, after all, his +suspicions, against the man who had so suddenly left, were unfounded. + +"Yes, there is a cablegram here for you, Monsieur Swift," said the man, +who was French. "There are charges on it, however." + +"Pay 'em, Ned, while I see what this is," directed the young inventor, +as he tore open the envelope. + +"Whew!" he whistled a moment later. "This is going some." + +"Where to now?" asked Ned. "The North Pole?" + +"No, just the opposite. Mr. Period wants me to go to Africa--the Congo +Free State. There's an uprising among the natives there, and he wants +some war pictures. Well, I guess I'll have to go." + +As Tom spoke he looked toward the door of the telegraph office, and he +saw the man, who had so hurriedly gone out a few moments before, +looking in at him. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +SUSPICIOUS STRANGERS + + +"Off to Africa; eh?" remarked Ned, as Tom put the envelope in his +pocket. "That's another long jump. But I guess the Flyer can do it." + +"Yes, I think so. I say Ned, not so loud," said Tom, who had hurried to +the side of his chum, whispered the last words. + +"What's up?" inquired Ned quickly. "Anything wrong?" + +"I don't know. But I think we are being watched. Did you notice that +fellow who was in here a minute ago, when I asked for a telegram?" + +"Yes, what about him?" + +"Well, he's looking in the door now I think. Don't turn round. Just +look up into that mirror on the wall, and you can see his reflection." + +"I understand," whispered Ned, as he turned his gaze toward the mirror +in question, a large one, with advertisements around the frame. "I see +him," he went on. "There's some one with him." + +"That's what I thought," replied Tom. "Take a good look. Whom do you +think the other chap is?" + +Ned looked long and earnestly. By means of the mirror, he could see, +perfectly plain, two men standing just outside the door of the +telegraph office. The portal was only partly open. Ned drew an old +letter from his pocket, and pretended to be showing it to Tom. But, all +the while he was gazing earnestly at the two men. Suddenly one of them +moved, giving Tom's chum a better view of his face. + +"By Jove, Tom!" the lad exclaimed in a tense whisper. "If it isn't that +Eckert fellow I'm a cow." + +"That's what I thought," spoke Tom coolly. "Not that you're a cow, Ned, +but I believe that this man is one of the moving picture partners, who +are rivals of Mr. Period. I wasn't quite sure myself after the first +glance I had of him, so I wanted you to take a look. Do you know the +other chap--the one who ran out when I asked for my telegram?" + +"No, I've never seen him before as far as I know." + +"Same here. Come on." + +"What are you going to do?" + +"Go back to the airship, and tell Mr. Nestor. As one of the directors +in the concern I'm working for. I want his advice." + +"Good idea," replied Ned, and they turned to leave the office. The +spying stranger, and William Eckert, were not in sight when the two +lads came out. + +"They got away mighty quick," remarked Tom, as he looked up and down +the street. + +"Yes, they probably saw us turn to come out, and made a quick get-away. +They might be in any one of these places along here," for the street, +on either side of the telegraph office, contained a number of hotels, +with doors opening on the sidewalk. + +"They must be on your trail yet," decided Mr. Nestor when Tom, reaching +the anchored airship, told what had happened. "Well, my advice is to go +to Africa as soon as we can. In that way we'll leave them behind, and +they won't have any chance to get your camera." + +"But what I can't understand," said Tom, "is how they knew I was coming +here. It was just as if that one man had been waiting in the telegraph +office for me to appear. I'm sorry, now, that I mentioned to Ned where +we were ordered to. But I didn't think." + +"They probably knew, anyway," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "I think this +may explain it. The rival concern in New York has been keeping track of +Mr. Period's movements. Probably they have a paid spy who may be in his +employ. They knew when he sent you a telegram, what it contained, and +where it was directed to. Then, of course, they knew you would call +here for it. What they did not know was when you would come, and so +they had to wait. That one spy was on guard, and, as soon as you came, +he went and summoned Eckert, who was waiting somewhere in the +neighborhood." + +"Bless my detective story!" cried Mr. Damon. "What a state of affairs! +They ought to be arrested, Tom." + +"It would be useless," said Mr. Nestor. "They are probably far enough +away by this time. Or else they have put others on Tom's track." + +"I'll fight my own battles!" exclaimed the young inventor. "I don't go +much on the police in a case like this, especially foreign police. +Well, my camera is all right, so far," he went on, as he took a look at +it, in the compartment where he kept it. "Some one must always remain +near it, after this. But we'll soon start for Africa, to get some +pictures of a native battle. I hope it isn't the red pygmies we have to +photograph." + +"Bless my shoe laces! Don't suggest such a thing," begged Mr. Damon, as +he recalled the strenuous times when the dwarfs held the missionaries +captive. + +It was necessary to lay in some stores and provisions, and for this +reason Tom could not at once head the airship for the African jungles. +As she remained at anchor, just outside the city, crowds of Swiss +people came out to look at the wonderful craft. But Tom and his +companions took care that no one got aboard, and they kept a strict +lookout for Americans, or Englishmen, thinking perhaps that Mr. Eckert, +or the spy, might try to get the camera. However, they did not see +them, and a few days after the receipt of the message from Mr. Period, +having stocked up, they rose high into the air, and set out to cross +the Mediterranean Sea for Africa. Tom laid a route over Tripoli, the +Sahara Desert, the French Congo, and so into the Congo Free State. In +his telegram, Mr. Period had said that the expected uprising was to +take place near Stanley Falls, on the Congo River. + +"And supposing it does not happen?" asked Mr. Damon. "What if the +natives don't fight, Tom? You'll have your trip for nothing, and will +run a lot of risk besides." + +"It's one of the chances I'm taking," replied the young inventor, and +truly, as he thought of it, he realized that the perils of the moving +picture business were greater than he had imagined. Tom hoped to get a +quick trip to the Congo, but, as they were sailing over the big desert, +there was an accident to the main motor, and the airship suddenly began +shooting toward the sands. She was easily brought up, by means of the +gas bags, and allowed to settle gently to the ground, in the vicinity +of a large oasis. But, when Tom looked at the broken machinery, he said: + +"This means a week's delay. It will take that, and longer, to fix it so +we can go on." + +"Too bad!" exclaimed Mr. Nestor. "The war may be over when we get +there. But it can't be helped." + +It took Tom and his friends even longer than he had thought to make the +repairs. In the meanwhile they camped in the desert place, which was +far from being unpleasant. Occasionally a caravan halted there, but, +for the most part, they were alone. + +"No danger of Eckert, or any of his spies coming here, I guess," said +Tom grimly as he blew on a portable forge, to weld two pieces of iron +together. + +In due time they were again on the wing, and without further incident +they were soon in the vicinity of Stanley Falls. They managed to locate +a village where there were some American missionaries established. They +were friends of Mr. and Mrs. Illington, the missionaries whom Tom had +saved from the red pygmies, as told in the "Electric Rifle" volume of +this series, and they made our hero and his friends welcome. + +"Is it true?" asked Tom, of the missionaries who lived not far from +Stanley Falls, "that there is to be a native battle? Or are we too late +for it?" + +"I am sorry to say, I fear there will be fighting among the tribesmen," +replied Mr. Janeway, one of the Christian workers. "It has not yet +taken place, though." + +"Then I'm not too late!" cried Tom, and there was exultation in his +voice. "I don't mean to be barbarous," he went on, as he saw that the +missionaries looked shocked, "but as long as they are going to fight I +want to get the pictures." + +"Oh, they'll fight all right," spoke Mrs. Janeway. "The poor, ignorant +natives here are always ready to fight. This time I think it is about +some cattle that one tribe took from another." + +"And where will the battle take place?" asked Tom. + +"Well, the rumors we have, seem to indicate that the fight will take +place about ten miles north of here. We will have notice of it before +it starts, as some of the natives, whom we have succeeded in +converting, belong to the tribe that is to be attacked. They will be +summoned to the defense of their town and then it will be time enough +for you to go. Oh, war is a terrible thing! I do not like to talk about +it. Tell me how you rescued our friends from the red pygmies," and Tom +was obliged to relate that story, which I have told in detail elsewhere. + +Several days passed, and Tom and his friends spent a pleasant time in +the African village with the missionaries. The airship and camera were +in readiness for instant use, and during this period of idleness our +hero got several fine films of animal scenes, including a number of +night-fights among the beasts at the drinking pools. One tiger battle +was especially good, from a photographic standpoint. + +One afternoon, a number of native bearers came into the town. They +preceded two white men, who were evidently sportsmen, or explorers, and +the latter had a well equipped caravan. The strangers sought the advice +of the missionaries about where big game might be found, and Tom +happened to be at the cottage of Mr. Janeway when the strangers arrived. + +The young inventor looked at them critically, as he was introduced to +them. Both men spoke with an English accent, one introducing himself as +Bruce Montgomery, and the other as Wade Kenneth. Tom decided that they +were of the ordinary type of globe-trotting Britishers, until, on his +way to his airship, he passed the place where the native bearers had +set down the luggage of the Englishmen. + +"Whew!" whistled Tom, as he caught sight of a peculiarly shaped box. +"See that, Ned?" + +"Yes, what is it? A new kind of magazine gun?" + +"It's a moving picture camera, or I lose my guess!" whispered Tom. "One +of the old fashioned kind. Those men are no more tourists, or after big +game, than I am! They're moving picture men, and they're here to get +views of that native battle! Ned, we've got to be on our guard. They +may be in the pay of that Turbot and Eckert firm, and they may try to +do us some harm!" + +"That's so!" exclaimed Ned. "We'll keep watch of them, Tom." + +As they neared their airship, there came, running down what served as +the main village street, an African who showed evidence of having come +from afar. As he ran on, he called out something in a strange tongue. +Instantly from their huts the other natives swarmed. + +"What's up now?" cried Ned. + +"Something important, I'll wager," replied Tom. "Ned, you go back to +the missionaries house, and find out what it is. I'm going to stand +guard over my camera." + +"It's come!" cried Ned a little later, as he hurried into the interior +of the airship, where Tom was busy working over a new attachment he +intended putting on his picture machine. + +"What has?" + +"War! That native, whom we saw running in, brought news that the battle +would take place day after to-morrow. The enemies of his tribe are on +the march, so the African spies say, and he came to summon all the +warriors from this town. We've got to get busy!" + +"That's so. What about those Englishmen?" + +"They were talking to the missionaries when the runner came in. They +pretended to have no interest in it, but I saw one wink to the other, +and then, very soon, they went out, and I saw them talking to their +native bearers, while they were busy over that box you said was a +picture machine." + +"I knew it, Ned! I was sure of it! Those fellows came here to trick us, +though how they ever followed our trail I don't know. Probably they +came by a fast steamer to the West Coast, and struck inland, while we +were delayed on the desert. I don't care if they are only straight +out-and-out rivals--and not chaps that are trying to take an unfair +advantage. I suppose all the big picture concerns have a tip about this +war, and they may have representatives here. I hope we get the best +views. Now come on, and give me a hand. We've got our work cut out for +us, all right." + +"Bless my red cross bandage!" cried Mr. Damon, when he heard the news. +"A native fight, eh? That will be something I haven't seen in some +time. Will there be any danger, Tom, do you think?" + +"Not unless our airship tumbles down between the two African forces," +replied our hero, "and I'll take care that it doesn't do that. We'll be +well out of reach of any of their blow guns, or arrows." + +"But I understand that many of the tribes have powder weapons," said +Mr. Nestor. + +"They have," admitted Tom, "but they are 'trader's' rifles, and don't +carry far. We won't run any risk from such old-fashioned guns." + +"A big fight; eh?" asked Koku when they told him what was before them. +"Me like to help." + +"Yes, and I guess both sides would give a premium for your services," +remarked Tom, as he gazed at his big servant. "But we'll need you with +us, Koku." + +"Oh, me stay with you, Mr. Tom," exclaimed the big man, with a grin. + +Somewhat to Tom's surprise the two Englishmen showed no further +interest in him and his airship, after the introduction at the +missionaries' bungalow. + +With the stolidity of their race the Britishers did not show any +surprise, as, some time afterward, they strolled down toward Tom's big +craft, after supper, and looked it over. Soon they went back to their +own camp, and a little later, Koku, who walked toward it, brought word +that the Englishmen were packing up. + +"They're going to start for the seat of war the first thing in the +morning," decided Tom. "Well, we'll get ahead of them. Though we can +travel faster than they can, we'll start now, and be on the ground in +good season. Besides, I don't like staying all night in the same +neighborhood with them. Get ready for a start, Ned." + +Tom did not stop to say good-bye to the Englishmen, though he bade +farewell to the missionaries, who had been so kind to him. There was +much excitement in the native town, for many of the tribesmen were +getting ready to depart to help their friends or relatives in the +impending battle. + +As dusk was falling, the big airship arose, and soon her powerful +propellers were sending her across the jungle, toward Stanley Falls in +the vicinity of which the battle was expected to take place. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +THE NATIVE BATTLE + + +"By Jove, Tom, here they come!" + +"From over by that drinking pool?" + +"Yes, just as the spies said they would. Wow, what a crowd of the black +beggars there are! And some of 'em have regular guns, too. But most of +'em have clubs, bows and arrows, blow guns, or spears." + +Tom and Ned were standing on the forward part of the airship, which was +moving slowly along, over an open plateau, in the jungle where the +native battle was about to take place. Our friends had left the town +where the missionaries lived, and had hovered over the jungle, until +they saw signs of the coming struggle. They had seen nothing of their +English rivals since coming away, but had no doubt but that the +Britishers were somewhere in the neighborhood. + +The two forces of black men, who had gone to war over a dispute about +some cattle, approached each other. There was the beating of tom-toms, +and skin drums, and many weird shouts. From their vantage point in the +air, Tom and his companions had an excellent view. The Wizard Camera +was loaded with a long reel of film, and ready for action. + +"Bless my handkerchief!" cried Mr. Damon, as he looked down on the +forces that were about to clash. "I never saw anything like this +before!" + +"I either," admitted Tom. "But, if things go right, I'm going to get +some dandy films!" + +Nearer and nearer the rival forces advanced. At first they had stared, +and shouted in wonder at the sight of the airship, hovering above them, +but their anger soon drew their attention to the fighting at hand, and, +after useless gestures toward the craft of the air, and after some of +them had vainly fired their guns or arrows at it, they paid no more +attention, but rushed on with their shouts and cries and amid the +beating of their rude drums. + +"I think I'll begin to take pictures now," said Tom, as Ned, in charge +of the ship, sent it about in a circle, giving a general view of the +rival forces. "I'll show a scene of the two crowds getting ready for +business, and, later on, when they're actually giving each other cats +and dogs, I'll get all the pictures possible." + +The camera was started while, safe in the air those on the Flyer watched +what went on below them. + +Suddenly the forward squads of the two small armies of blacks met. With +wild, weird yells they rushed at each other. The air was filled with +flying arrows and spears. The sound of the old-fashioned muzzle-loading +guns could be heard, and clouds of smoke arose. Tilting his camera, and +arranging the newly attached reflecting mirrors so as to give the +effect as if a spectator was looking at the battle from in front, +instead of from above, Tom Swift took picture after picture. + +The fight was now on. With yells of rage and defiance the Africans came +together, giving blow for blow. It was a wild melee, and those on the +airship looked on fascinated, though greatly wishing that such horrors +could be stopped. + +"How about it, Tom?" cried Ned. + +"Everything going good! I don't like this business, but now I'm in it +I'm going to stick. Put me down a little lower," answered the young +inventor. + +"All right. I say Tom, look over there." + +"Where?" + +"By that lightning-struck gum tree. See those two men, and some sort of +a machine they've got stuck up on stilts? See it?" + +"Sure. Those are the two Englishmen--my rivals! They're taking +pictures, too!" + +And then, with a crash and roar, with wild shouts and yells, with +volley after volley of firearms, clouds of smoke and flights of arrows +and spears, the native battle was in full swing, while the young +inventor, sailing above it in his airship, reeled off view after view +of the strange sight. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +A HEAVY LOSS + + +"Bless my battle axe, but this is awful!" cried Mr. Damon. + +"War is always a fearful thing," spoke Mr. Nestor. "But this is not as +bad as if the natives fought with modern weapons. See! most of them +are fighting with clubs, and their fists. They don't seem to hurt each +other very much." + +"That's so," agreed Mr. Damon. The two gentlemen were in the main +cabin, looking down on the fight below them, while Tom, with Ned to +help him change the reels of films, as they became filled with +pictures, attended to the camera. Koku was steering the craft, as he +had readily learned how to manage it. + +"Are those Englishmen taking pictures yet?" asked Tom, too busy to turn +his head, and look for himself. + +"Yes, they're still at," replied Ned. "But they seem to be having +trouble with their machine," he added as he saw one of the men leave +the apparatus, and run hurriedly back to where they had made a +temporary camp. + +"I guess it's an old-fashioned kind," commented Tom. "Say, this is +getting fierce!" he cried, as the natives got in closer contact with +each other. It was now a hand-to-hand battle. + +"I should say so!" yelled Ned. "It's a wonder those Englishmen aren't +afraid to be down on the same level with the black fighters." + +"Oh, a white person is considered almost sacred by the natives here, so +the missionaries told me," said Tom. "A black man would never think of +raising his hand to one, and the Englishmen probably know this. They're +safe enough. In fact I'm thinking of soon going down myself, and +getting some views from the ground." + +"Bless my gizzard, Tom!" cried Mr. Damon. "Don't do it!" + +"Yes, I think I will. Why, it's safe enough. Besides, if they attack us +we have the electric rifles. Ned, you tell Koku to get the guns out, to +have in readiness, and then you put the ship down. I'll take a chance." + +"Jove! You've been doing nothing but take chances since we came on this +trip!" exclaimed Ned, admiringly. "All right! Here we go," and he went +to relieve Koku at the wheel, while the giant, grinning cheerfully at +the prospect of taking part in the fight himself, got out the rifles, +including his own. + +Meanwhile the native battle went on fiercely. Many on both sides fell, +and not a few ran away, when they got the chance, their companions +yelling at them, evidently trying to shame them into coming back. + +As the airship landed, Mr. Damon, Mr. Nestor, Ned and Koku stood ready +with the deadly electric rifles, in case an attack should be made on +them. But the fighting natives paid no more attention to our friends +than they did to the two Englishmen. The latter moved their clumsy +camera from place to place, in order to get various views of the +fighting. + +"This is the best yet!" cried Tom, as, after a lull in the fight, when +the two opposing armies had drawn a little apart, they came together +again more desperately than before. "I hope the pictures are being +recorded all right. I have to go at this thing pretty much in the dark. +Say, look at the beggars fight!" he finished. + +But a battle, even between uncivilized blacks, cannot go on for very +long at a time. Many had fallen, some being quite severely injured it +seemed, being carried off by their friends. Then, with a sudden rush, +the side which, as our friends learned later, had been robbed of their +cattle, made a fierce attack, overwhelming their enemies, and +compelling them to retreat. Across the open plain the vanquished army +fled, with the others after them. Tom, meanwhile, taking pictures as +fast as he could. + +"This ends it!" he remarked to Ned, when the warriors were too far away +to make any more good views. "Now we can take a rest." + +"The Englishmen gave up some time ago," said his chum, motioning to the +two men who were taking their machine off the tripod. + +"Guess their films gave out," spoke Tom. "Well, you see it didn't do +any harm to come down, and I got some better views here." + +"Here they come back!" exclaimed Ned, as a horde of the black fellows +emerged from the jungle, and came on over the plain. + +"Hear 'em sing!" commented Tom, as the sound of a rude chant came to +their ears. "They must be the winners all right." + +"I guess so," agreed Ned. "But what about staying here now? Maybe they +won't be so friendly to us when they haven't any fighting to occupy +their minds." + +"Don't worry," advised Tom. "They won't bother us." + +And the blacks did not. They were caring for their wounded, who had not +already been taken from the field, and they paid no attention to our +friends, save to look curiously at the airship. + +"Bless my newspaper!" cried Mr. Damon, with an air of relief. "I'm +glad that's over, and we didn't have to use the electric rifles, after +all." + +"Here come the Englishmen to pay us a visit," spoke Ned a little later, +as they sat about the cabin of the Flyer. The two rival picture men +soon climbed on deck. + +"Beg pardon," said the taller of the two, addressing our hero, "but +could you lend us a roll of film? Ours are all used up, and we want to +get some more pictures before going back to our main camp." + +"I'm sorry," replied Tom, "but I use a special size, and it fits no +camera but my own." + +"Ah! might we see your camera?" asked the other Englishman. "That is, +see how it works?" + +"I don't like to be disobliging," was Tom's answer, "but it is not yet +patented and--well--" he hesitated. + +"Oh, I see!" sneered the taller visitor. "You're afraid we might steal +some of your ideas. Hum! Come on Montgomery," and, swinging on his +heels, with a military air, he hurried away, followed by his companion. + +"They don't like that, but I can't help it," remarked Tom to his +friends a little later. "I can't afford to take any chances." + +"No, you did just right," said Mr. Nestor. "Those men may be all right, +but from the fact that they are in the picture taking business I'd be +suspicious of them." + +"Well, what's next on the programme?" asked Ned as Tom put his camera +away. + +"Oh, I think we'll stay here over night," was our hero's reply. "It's +a nice location, and the gas machine needs cleaning. We can do it here, +and maybe I can get some more pictures." + +They were busy the rest of the day on the gas generator, but the main +body of natives did not come back, and the Englishmen seemed to have +disappeared. + +Everyone slept soundly that night. So soundly, in fact, that the sun +was very high when Koku was the first to awaken, His head felt +strangely dizzy, and he wondered at a queer smell in the room he had to +himself. + +"Nobody up yet," he exclaimed in surprise, as he staggered into the +main cabin. There, too, was the strange, sweetish, sickly smell. "Mr. +Tom, where you be? Time to get up!" the giant called to his master, as +he went in, and gently shook the young inventor by the shoulder. + +"Eh? What's that? What's the matter?" began Tom, and then he suddenly +sat up. "Oh, my head!" he exclaimed, putting his hands to his aching +temples. + +"And that queer smell!" added Ned, who was also awake now. + +"Bless my talcum powder!" cried Mr. Damon. "I have a splitting +headache." + +"Hum! Chloroform, if I'm any judge!" called Mr. Nestor from his berth. + +"Chloroform!" cried Tom, staggering to his feet. "I wonder." He did not +finish his sentence, but made his way to the room where his camera was +kept. "It's gone!" he cried. "We have been chloroformed in the night, +and some one has taken my Wizard Camera." + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +AFTER THE ENGLISHMEN + + +"The camera gone!" gasped Ned. + +"Did they chloroform us?" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "Bless my--" but for one +of the few times in his life, he did not know what to bless. + +"Get all the fresh air you can," hastily advised Mr. Nestor. "Koku, +open all the doors and windows," for, though it was hot during the day +in the jungle, the nights were cool, and the airship was generally +closed up. With the inrush of the fresh air every one soon felt better. + +"Is anything else gone?" asked Ned, as he followed Tom into the camera +room. + +"Yes, several rolls of unexposed films. Oh, if only they haven't got +too much of a start! I'll get it away from them!" declared Tom with +energy. + +"From who? Who took it?" asked Ned. + +"Those Englishmen, of course! Who else? I believe they are in the pay +of Turbot and Eckert. Their taking pictures was only a bluff! They got +on my trail and stuck to it. The delays we had, gave them a chance to +catch up to us. They came over to the airship, to pretend to borrow +films, just to get a look at the place, and size it up, so they could +chloroform us, and get the camera." + +"I believe you're right," declared Mr. Nestor. "We must get after those +scoundrels as quickly as possible!" + +"Bless my shoulder braces!" cried Mr. Damon. "How do you imagine they +worked that trick on us?" + +"Easily enough," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "We were all dead tired last +night, and slept like tops. They watched their chance, sneaked up, and +got in. After that it was no hard matter to chloroform each one of us +in turn, and they had the ship to themselves. They looked around, found +the camera, and made off with it." + +"Well, I'm going to get right after them!" cried Tom. "Ned, start the +motor. I'll steer for a while." + +"Hold on! Wait a minute," suggested Mr. Nestor. "I wouldn't go off in +the ship just yet, Tom." + +"Why not?" + +"Because you don't know which way to go. We must find out which trail +the Englishmen took. They have African porters with them, and those +porters doubtless know some of the blacks around here. We must inquire +of the natives which way the porters went, in carrying the goods of our +rivals, for those Englishmen would not abandon camp without taking +their baggage with them." + +"That's so," admitted the young inventor. "That will be the best plan. +Once I find which way they have gone I can easily overtake them in the +airship. And when I find 'em--" Tom paused significantly. + +"Me help you fix 'em!" cried Koku, clenching his big fist. + +"They will probably figure it out that you will take after them," said +Mr. Nestor, "but they may not count on you doing it in the Flyer, and +so they may not try to hide. It isn't going to be an easy matter to +pick a small party out of the jungle though, Tom." + +"Well, I've done more difficult things in my airships," spoke our hero. +"I'll fly low, and use the glass. I guess we can pick out their crowd +of porters, though they won't have many. Oh, my camera! I hope they +won't damage it." + +"They won't," was Ned's opinion. "It's too valuable. They want it to +take pictures with, themselves." + +"Maybe. I hope they don't open it, and see how it's made. And I'm glad +I thought to hide the picture films I've taken so far. They didn't get +those away from us, only some of the blank ones," and Tom looked again +in a secret closet, where he kept the battle-films, and the others, in +the dark, to prevent them from being light-struck, by any possible +chance. + +"Well, if we're going to make some inquiries, let's do it," suggested +Mr. Nestor. "I think I see some of the Africans over there. They have +made a temporary camp, it seems, to attend to some of their wounded." + +"Do you think we can make them understand what we want?" asked Ned. "I +don't believe they speak English." + +"Oh these blacks have been trading with white men," said Tom, "for they +have 'trader's' guns, built to look at, and not to shoot very well. I +fancy we can make ourselves understood. If not, we can use signs." + +Leaving Koku and Mr. Damon to guard the airship, Tom, Ned and Mr. +Nestor went to the African camp. There was a large party of men there, +and they seemed friendly enough. Probably winning the battle the day +before had put them in good humor, even though many of them were hurt. + +To Tom's delight he found one native who could speak a little English, +and of him they made inquiries as to what direction the Englishmen had +taken. The black talked for a while among his fellows, and then +reported to our friends that, late in the night, one of the porters, +hired by Montgomery and Kenneth, had come to camp to bid a brother +good-bye. This porter had said that his masters were in a hurry to get +away, and had started west. + +"That's it!" cried Mr. Nestor. "They're going to get somewhere so they +can make their way to the coast. They want to get out of Africa as fast +as they can." + +"And I'm going to get after 'em as fast as I can!" cried Tom grimly. +"Come on!" + +They hurried back to the airship, finding Koku and Mr. Damon peacefully +engaged in talk, no one having disturbed them. + +"Start the motor, Ned!" called his chum. "We'll see what luck we have!" + +Up into the air went the Flyer, her great propellers revolving rapidly. +Over the jungle she shot, and then, when he found that everything was +working well, and that the cleaned gas generator was operating as good +as when it was new, the young inventor slowed up, and brought the craft +down to a lower level. + +"For we don't want to run past these fellows, or shoot over their heads +in our hurry," Tom explained. "Ned, get out the binoculars. They're +easier to handle than the telescope. Then go up forward, and keep a +sharp lookout. There is something like a jungle trail below us, and it +looks to be the only one around here. They probably took that." Soon +after leaving the place where they had camped after the battle, Tom had +seen a rude path through the forest, and had followed that lead. + +On sped the Flyer, after the two Englishmen, while Tom thought +regretfully of his stolen camera. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +THE JUNGLE FIRE + + +"Well, Tom, I don't seem to see anything of them," remarked Ned that +afternoon, as he sat in the bow of the air craft, gazing from time to +time through the powerful glasses. + +"No, and I can't understand it, either," responded the young inventor, +who had come forward to relieve his chum. "They didn't have much the +start of us, and they'll have to travel very slowly. It isn't as if +they could hop on a train; and, even if they did, I could overtake them +in a short time. But they have to travel on foot through the jungle, +and can't have gone far." + +"Maybe they have bullock carts," suggested Mr. Damon. + +"The trail isn't wide enough for that," declared Tom. "We've come quite +a distance now, even if we have been running at low speed, and we +haven't seen even a black man on the trail," and he motioned to the +rude path below them. + +"They may have taken a boat and slipped down that river we crossed a +little while ago," suggested Ned. + +"That's so!" cried Tom. "Why didn't I think of it? Say! I'm going to +turn back." + +"Turn back?" + +"Yes, and go up and down the stream a way. We have time, for we can +easily run at top speed on the return trip. Then, if we don't see +anything of them on the water, we'll pick up the trail again. Put her +around, Ned, and I'll take the glasses for a while." + +The Flyer was soon shooting back over the same trail our friends had +covered, and, as Ned set the propellers going at top speed, they were +quickly hovering over a broad but shallow river, which cut through the +jungle. + +"Try it down stream first," suggested Tom, who was peering through the +binoculars. "They'd be most likely to go down, as it would be easier." + +Along over the stream swept the airship, covering several miles. + +"There's a boat!" suddenly exclaimed Mr. Nestor, pointing to a native +canoe below them. + +"Bless my paddle wheel! So it is!" cried Mr. Damon. "I believe it's +them, Tom!" + +"No, there are only natives in that craft," answered the young inventor +a moment later, as he brought the binoculars into focus. "I wish it +was them, though." + +A few more miles were covered down stream, and then Tom tried the +opposite direction. But all to no purpose. A number of boats were seen, +and several rafts, but they had no white men on them. + +"Maybe the Englishmen disguised themselves like natives, Tom," +suggested Ned. + +Our hero shook his head. + +"I could see everything in the boats, through these powerful glasses," +he replied, "and there was nothing like my camera. I'd know that a mile +off. No, they didn't take to this stream, though they probably crossed +it. We'll have to keep on the way we were going. It will soon be night, +and we'll have to camp. Then we'll take up the search to-morrow." + +It was just getting dusk, and Tom was looking about for a good place to +land in the jungle, when Ned, who was standing in the bow, cried: + +"I say, Tom, here's a native village just ahead. There's a good place +to stop, and we can stay there over night." + +"Good!" exclaimed Tom. "And, what's more, we can make some inquiries as +to whether or not the Englishmen have passed here. This is great! +Maybe we'll come out all right, after all! They can't travel at +night--or at least I don't believe they will--and if they have passed +this village we can catch them to-morrow. We'll go down." + +They were now over the native town, which was in a natural clearing in +the jungle. The natives had by this time caught sight of the big +airship over them, and were running about in terror. There was not a +man, woman or child in sight when the Flyer came down, for the +inhabitants had all fled in fright. + +"Not much of a chance to make inquiries of these folks," said Mr. +Nestor. + +"Oh, they'll come back," predicted Tom. "They are naturally curious, +and when they see that the thing isn't going to blow up, they'll gather +around. I've seen the same thing happen before." + +Tom proved a true prophet. In a little while some of the men began +straggling back, when they saw our friends walking about the airship, +as it rested on the ground. Then came the children, and then the women, +until the whole population was gathered about the airship, staring at +it wonderingly. Tom made signs of friendship, and was lucky enough to +find a native who knew a few French words. Tom was not much of a French +scholar, but he could frame a question as to the Englishmen. + +"Oui!" exclaimed the native, when he understood. Then he rattled off +something, which Tom, after having it repeated, and making signs to the +man to make sure he understood, said meant that the Englishmen had +passed through the village that morning. + +"We're on the right trail!" cried the young inventor. "They're only a +day's travel ahead of us. We'll catch them to-morrow, and get my camera +back." + +The natives soon lost all fear of the airship, and some of the chief +men even consented to come aboard. Tom gave them a few trifles for +presents, and won their friendship to such an extent that a great feast +was hastily gotten up in honor of the travelers. Big fires were +lighted, and fowls by the score were roasted. + +"Say, I'm glad we struck this place!" exclaimed Ned, as he sat on the +ground with the others, eating roast fowl. "This is all to the chicken +salad!" + +"Things are coming our way at last," remarked Tom. "We'll start the +first thing in the morning. I wish I had my camera now. I'd take a +picture of this scene. Dad would enjoy it, and so would Mrs. Baggert. +Oh, I almost wish I was home again. But if I get my camera I've got a +lot more work ahead of me." + +"What kind?" asked Ned. + +"I don't know. I'm to stop in Paris for the next instructions from Mr. +Period. He is keeping in touch with the big happenings of the world, +and he may send us to Japan, to get some earthquake pictures." + +The night was quiet after the feast, and in the morning Tom and his +friends sailed off in their airship, leaving behind the wondering and +pleased natives, for our hero handed out more presents, of small value +to him, but yet such things as the blacks prized highly. + +Once more they were flying over the trail, and they put on more speed +now, for they were fairly sure that the men they sought were ahead of +them about a day's travel. This meant perhaps twenty miles, and Tom +figured that he could cover fifteen in a hurry, and then go over the +remaining five slowly, so as not to miss his quarry. + +"Say, don't you smell something?" asked Ned a little later, when the +airship had been slowed down. "Something like smoke?" + +"Humph! I believe I do get an odor of something burning," admitted Tom, +sniffing the atmosphere. + +"Bless my pocket book!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, "look down there, boys!" +He pointed below, and, to the surprise of the lads, and no less of +himself, he saw many animals hurrying back along the jungle trail. + +There were scores of deer, leaping along, here and there a tawny lion, +and one or two tigers. Off to one side a rhinoceros crashed his way +through the tangle, and occasionally an elephant was seen. + +"That's queer," cried Ned. "And they're not paying any attention to +each other, either." + +"Something is happening," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "Those animals are +running away from something." + +"Maybe it's an elephant drive," spoke Tom. "I think--" + +But he did not finish. The smell of smoke suddenly became stronger, +and, a moment later, as the airship rose higher, in response to a +change in the angle of the deflecting rudder, which Ned shifted, all on +board saw a great volume of black smoke rolling toward the sky. + +"A jungle fire!" cried Tom. "The jungle is burning! That's why the +animals are running back this way." + +"We'd better not go on!" shouted Ned, choking a bit, as the smoke +rolled nearer. + +"No, we've got to turn back!" decided Tom. "Say, this will stop the +Englishmen! They can't go on. We'll go back to the village we left, and +wait for them. They're trapped!" And then he added soberly: "I hope my +camera doesn't get burnt up!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXII + +A DANGEROUS COMMISSION + + +"Look at that smoke!" yelled Ned, as he sent the airship about in a +great circle on the backward trail. + +"And there's plenty of blaze, too," added Tom. "See the flames eating +away! This stuff is as dry as tinder for there hasn't been any rain for +months." + +"Much hot!" was the comment of the giant, when he felt the warm wind of +the fire. + +"Bless my fountain pen!" gasped Mr. Damon, as he looked down into the +jungle. "See all those animals!" + +The trail was now thick with deer, and many small beasts, the names of +which Tom did not know. On either side could be heard larger brutes, +crashing their way forward to escape the fire behind them. + +"Oh, if you only had your camera now!" cried Ned. "You could get a +wonderful picture, Tom." + +"What's the use of wishing for it. Those Englishmen have it, and--" + +"Maybe they're using it!" interrupted Ned. "No, I don't think they +would know how to work it. Do you see anything of them, Ned?" + +"Not a sight. But they'll surely have to come back, just as you said, +unless they got ahead of the fire. They can't go on, and it would be +madness to get off the trail in a jungle like this." + +"I don't believe they could have gotten ahead of the fire," spoke Tom. +"They couldn't travel fast enough for that, and see how broad the blaze +is." + +They were now higher up, well out of the heat and smoke of the +conflagration, and they could see that it extended for many miles along +the trail, and for a mile or so on either side of it. + +"We're far enough in advance, now, to go down a bit, I guess," said +Tom, a little later. "I want to get a good view of the path, and I +can't do that from up here. I have an idea that--" + +Tom did not finish, for as the airship approached nearer the ground, he +caught up a pair of binoculars, and focussed them on something on the +trail below. + +"What is it?" cried Ned, startled by something in his chum's manner. + +"It's them! The Englishmen!" cried Tom. "See, they are racing back +along the trail. Their porters have deserted them. But they have my +camera! I can see it! I'm going down, and get it! Ned, stand by the +wheel, and make a quick landing. Then we'll go up again!" + +Tom handed the glasses to his chum, and Ned quickly verified the young +inventor's statement. There were the two rascally Englishmen. The fire +was still some distance in the rear, but was coming on rapidly. There +were no animals to be seen, for they had probably gone off on a side +trail, or had slunk deeper into the jungle. Above the distant roar of +the blaze sounded the throb of the airship's motor. The Englishmen +heard it, and looked up. Then, suddenly, they motioned to Tom to +descend. + +"That's what I'm going to do," he said aloud, but of course they could +not hear him. + +"They're waiting for us!" cried Ned. "I wonder why?" for the rascals +had come to a halt, setting down the packs they carried on the trail. +One of the things they had was undoubtedly Tom's camera. + +"They probably want us to save their lives," said Tom. "They know they +can't out-run this fire. They've given up! We have them now!" + +"Are you going to save them?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"Of course. I wouldn't let my worst enemy run the chances of danger in +that terrible blaze. I'd save them even if they had smashed my camera. +I'll go down, and get them, and take them back to the native village, +but that's as far as I will carry them. They'll have to get away as +best they can, after that." + +It was the work of but a few minutes to lower the airship to the trail. +Fortunately it widened a bit at this point, or Tom could never have +gotten his craft down through the trees. + +"Hand up that camera!" ordered our hero curtly, when he had stopped +near the Englishmen. + +"Yes, my dear chap," spoke the tall Britisher, "but will you oblige us, +by taking us--" + +"Hand up the camera first!" sharply ordered Tom again. + +They passed it to him. + +"I know we treated you beastly mean," went on Kenneth, "but, my dear +chap--" + +"Get aboard," was all Tom said, and when the rascals, with fearful +glances back into the burning jungle, did so, our hero sent his craft +high into the air again. + +"Where are you taking us, my dear chap?" asked the tall rascal. + +"Don't 'dear chap' me!" retorted Tom. "I don't want to talk to you. I'm +going to drop you at the native village." + +"But that will burn!" cried the Englishman. + +"The wind is changing," was our hero's answer. "The fire won't get to +the village. You'll be safe. Have you damaged my camera?" he asked as +he began to examine it, while Ned managed the ship. + +"No, my dear chap. You mustn't think too hard of us. We were both down +on our luck, and a chap offered us a big sum to get on your trail, and +secure the camera. He said you had filched it from him, and that he had +a right to it. Understand, we wouldn't have taken it had we known--" + +"Don't talk to me!" interrupted Tom, as he saw that his apparatus had +not been damaged. "The man who hired you was a rascal--that's all I'll +say. Put on a little more speed, Ned. I want to get rid of these 'dear +chaps' and take some pictures of the jungle fire." + +As Tom had said, the wind had changed, and was blowing the flames away +off to one side, so that the native village would be in no danger. It +was soon reached, and the Africans were surprised to see Tom's airship +back again. But he did not stay long, descending only to let the +Englishmen alight. They pleaded to be taken to the coast, making all +sorts of promises, and stating that, had they known that Turbot and +Eckert (for whom they admitted they had acted) were not telling the +truth, they never would have taken Tom's camera. + +"Don't leave us here!" they pleaded. + +"I wouldn't have you on board my airship another minute for a fortune!" +declared Tom, as he signalled to Ned to start the motor. Then the Flyer +ascended on high, leaving the plotters and started back for the fire, +of which Tom got a series of fine moving pictures. + +A week later our friends were in Paris, having made a quick trip, on +which little of incident occurred, though Tom managed to get quite a +number of good views on the way. + +He found a message awaiting him, from Mr. Period. + +"Well, where to now?" asked Ned, as his chum read the cablegram. + +"Great Scott!" cried our hero. "Talk about hair-raising jobs, this +certainly is the limit!" + +"Why, what's the matter?" + +"I've got to get some moving pictures of a volcano in action," was the +answer. "Say, if I'd known what sort of things 'Spotty' wanted, I'd +never have consented to take this trip. A volcano in action, and maybe +an earthquake on the side! This is certainly going some!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII + +AT THE VOLCANO + + +"And you've got to snap-shot a volcano?" remarked Ned to his chum, +after a moment of surprised silence. "Any particular one? Is it +Vesuvius? If it is we haven't far to go. But how does Mr. Period know +that it's going to get into action when we want it to?" + +"No, it isn't Vesuvius," replied Tom. "We've got to take another long +trip, and we'll have to go by steamer again. The message says that the +Arequipa volcano, near the city of the same name, in Peru, has started +to 'erupt,' and, according to rumor, it's acting as it did many years +ago, just before a big upheaval." + +"Bless my Pumice stones!" cried Mr. Damon. "And are you expected to get +pictures of it shooting out flames and smoke, Tom?" + +"Of course. An inactive volcano wouldn't make much of a moving picture. +Well, if we go to Peru, we won't be far from the United States, and we +can fly back home in the airship. But we've got to take the Flyer +apart, and pack up again." + +"Will you have time?" asked Mr. Nestor. "Maybe the volcano will get +into action before you arrive, and the performance will be all over +with." + +"I think not," spoke Tom, as he again read the cablegram. "Mr. Period +says he has advices from Peru to the effect that, on other occasions, +it took about a month from the time smoke was first seen coming from +the crater, before the fireworks started up. I guess we've got time +enough, but we won't waste any." + +"And I guess Montgomery and Kenneth won't be there to make trouble for +us," put in Ned. "It will be some time before they get away from that +African town, I think." + +They began work that day on taking the airship apart for transportation +to the steamer that was to carry them across the ocean. Tom decided on +going to Panama, to get a series of pictures on the work of digging +that vast canal. On inquiry he learned that a steamer was soon to sail +for Colon, so he took passage for his friends and himself on that, also +arranging for the carrying of the parts of his airship. + +It was rather hard work to take the Flyer apart, but it was finally +done, and, in about a week from the time of arriving in Paris, they +left that beautiful city. The pictures already taken were forwarded to +Mr. Period, with a letter of explanation of Tom's adventures thus far, +and an account of how his rivals had acted. + +Just before sailing, Tom received another message from his strange +employer. The cablegram read: + + +"Understand our rivals are also going to try for volcano pictures. +Can't find out who will represent Turbot and Eckert, but watch out. Be +suspicious of strangers." + + +"That's what I will!" cried Tom. "If they get my camera away from me +again, it will be my own fault." + +The voyage to Colon was not specially interesting. They ran into a +terrific storm, about half way over, and Tom took some pictures from +the steamer's bridge, the captain allowing him to do so, but warning +him to be careful. + +"I'll take Koku up there with me," said the young inventor, "and if a +wave tries to wash me overboard he'll grab me." + +And it was a good thing that he took this precaution, for, while a wave +did not get as high as the bridge, one big, green roller smashed over +the bow of the vessel, staggering her so that Tom was tossed against +the rail. He would have been seriously hurt, and his camera might have +been broken, but for the quickness of the giant. + +Koku caught his master, camera and all, in a mighty arm, and with the +other clung to a stanchion, holding Tom in safety until the ship was on +a level keel once more. + +"Thanks, Koku!" gasped Tom. "You always seem to be around when I need +you." The giant grinned happily. + +The storm blew out in a few days, and, from then on, there was pleasant +sailing. When Tom's airship had been reassembled at Colon, it created +quite a sensation among the small army of canal workers, and, for their +benefit, our hero gave several flying exhibitions. + +He then took some of the engineers on a little trip, and in turn, they +did him the favor of letting him get moving pictures of parts of the +work not usually seen. + +"And now for the volcano!" cried Tom one morning, when having shipped +to Mr. Period the canal pictures, the Flyer was sent aloft, and her +nose pointed toward Arequipa. "We've got quite a run before us." + +"How long?" asked Ned. + +"About two thousand miles. But I'm going to speed her up to the limit." +Tom was as good as his word, and soon the Flyer was shooting along at +her best rate, reeling off mile after mile, just below the clouds. + +It was a wild and desolate region over which the travelers found +themselves most of the time, though the scenery was magnificent. They +sailed over Quito, that city on the equator, and, a little later, they +passed above the Cotopaxi and Chimbarazo volcanoes. But neither of them +was in action. The Andes Mountains, as you all know, has many volcanoes +scattered along the range. Lima was the next large city, and there Tom +made a descent to inquire about the burning mountain he was shortly to +photograph. + +"It will soon be in action," the United States counsel said. "I had a +letter from a correspondent near there only yesterday, and he said the +people in the town were getting anxious. They are fearing a shower of +burning ashes, or that the eruption may be accompanied by an +earthquake." + +"Good!" cried Tom. "Oh, I don't mean it exactly that way," he hastened +to add, as he saw the counsel looking queerly at him. "I meant that I +could get pictures of both earthquake and volcano then. I don't wish +the poor people any harm." + +"Well, you're the first one I ever saw who was anxious to get next door +to a volcano," remarked the counsel. "Hold on, though, that's not quite +right. I heard yesterday that a couple of young fellows passed through +here on their way to the same place. Come to think of it, they were +moving picture men, also." + +"Great Scott!" cried Tom. "Those must be my rivals, I'll wager. I must +get right on the job. Thanks for the information," and hurrying from +the office he joined his friends on the airship, and was soon aloft +again. + +"Look, Tom, what's that?" cried Ned, about noon the next day when the +Flyer, according to their calculations must be nearing the city of +Arequipa. "See that black cloud over there. I hope it isn't a tornado, +or a cyclone, or whatever they call the big wind storms down here." + +Tom, and the others, looked to where Ned pointed. There was a column of +dense smoke hovering in the air, lazily swirling this way and that. The +airship was rapidly approaching it. + +"Why that--" began Tom, but before he could complete the sentence the +smoke was blown violently upward. It became streaked with fire, and, a +moment later, there was the echo of a tremendous explosion. + +"The volcano!" cried Tom. "The Arequipa volcano! We're here just in +time, for she's in eruption now! Come on, Ned, help me get out the +camera! Mr. Damon, you and Mr. Nestor manage the airship! Put us as +close as you dare! I'm going to get some crackerjack pictures!" + +Once more came a great report. + +"Bless my toothpick!" gasped Mr. Damon. "This is awful!" And the +airship rushed on toward the volcano which could be plainly seen now, +belching forth fire, smoke and ashes. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV + +THE MOLTEN RIVER + + +"Whew!" gasped Ned, as he stood beside Tom in the bow of the airship. +"What's that choking us, Tom?" + +"Sulphur, I guess, and gases from the volcano. The wind blew 'em over +this way. They're not dangerous, as long as there is no carbonic acid +gas given off, and I don't smell any of that, yet. Say, Ned, it's +erupting all right, isn't it?" + +"I should say so!" cried his chum. + +"Put us a little to one side, Mr. Damon," called Tom to his friend, who +was in the pilot house. "I can't get good pictures through so much +smoke. It's clearer off to the left." + +"Bless my bath robe!" cried the odd man. "You're as cool about it, Tom, +as though you were just in an ordinary race, at an aeroplane meet." + +"And why shouldn't I be?" asked our hero with a laugh, as he stopped +the mechanism of the camera until he should have a clearer view of the +volcano. "There's not much danger up here, but I want to get some views +from the level, later, and then--" + +"You don't get me down there!" interrupted Mr. Nestor, with a grim +laugh. + +They were now hovering over the volcano, but high enough up so that +none of the great stones that were being thrown out could reach them. +The column of black smoke, amid which could be seen the gleams of the +molten fires in the crater, rolled toward them, and the smell of +sulphur became stronger. + +But when, in accordance with Tom's suggestion, the airship had been +sent over to one side, they were clear of the vapor and the noxious +gas. Then, too, a better view could be had of the volcano below them. + +"Hold her down!" cried Tom, as he got in a good position, and the +propellers were slowed down so that they just overcame the influence of +a slight wind. Thus the Flyer hovered in the air, while below her the +volcano belched forth red-hot rocks, some of them immense in size, and +quantities of hot ashes and cinders. Tom had the camera going again +now, and there was every prospect of getting a startling and wonderful, +as well as rare series of moving pictures. + +"Wow! That was a big one!" cried Ned, as an unusually large mass of +rocks was thrown out, and the column of fire and smoke ascended nearly +to the hovering craft. A moment later came an explosion, louder than +any that had preceded. "We'd better be going up; hadn't we Tom?" his +chum asked. + +"A little, yes, but not too far. I want to get as many near views as I +can." + +"Bless my overshoes!" gasped Mr. Damon, as he heard Tom say that. Then +he sent some of the vapor from the generating machine into the gas bag, +and the Flyer arose slightly. + +Ned looked in the direction of the town, but could not see it, on +account of the haze. Then he directed his attention to the terrifying +sight below him. + +"It's a good thing it isn't very near the city," he said to Tom, who +was engaged in watching the automatic apparatus of the camera, to see +when he would have to put in a fresh film. "It wouldn't take much of +this sort of thing to destroy a big city. But I don't see any streams +of burning lava, such as they always say come out of a volcano." + +"It isn't time for that yet," replied Tom. "The lava comes out last, +after the top layer of stones and ashes have been blown out. They are a +sort of stopper to the volcano, I guess, like the cork of a bottle, +and, when they're out of the way, the red-hot melted rock comes out. +Then there's trouble. I want to get pictures of that." + +"Well, keep far enough away," advised Mr. Nestor, who had come forward. +"Don't take any chances. I guess your rivals won't get here in time to +take any pictures, for they can't travel as fast as we did." + +"No," agreed the young inventor, "unless some other party of them were +here ahead of us. They'll have their own troubles, though, making +pictures anything like as good as we're getting." + +"There goes another blast!" cried Ned, as a terrific explosion sounded, +and a shower of hot stuff was thrown high into the air. "If I lived in +Arequipa I'd be moving out about now." + +"There isn't much danger I guess, except from showers of burning ashes, +and volcanic dust," spoke Mr. Nestor, "and the wind is blowing it away +from the town. If it continues this way the people will be saved." + +"Unless there is so much of the red-hot lava that it will bury the +city," suggested Tom. "I hope that doesn't happen," and he could not +repress a shudder as he looked down on the awful scene below him. + +After that last explosion the volcano appeared to subside somewhat, +though great clouds of smoke and tongues of fire leaped upward. + +"I've got to put in a new reel of film!" suddenly exclaimed Tom. "While +I stop the camera, Mr. Damon, I think you and Mr. Nestor might put the +airship down to the ground. I want some views on the level." + +"What! Go down to earth with this awful volcano spouting fire?" cried +Mr. Damon. "Bless my comb and brush!" + +"We can get well down the side of the mountain," said Tom. "I won't go +into any danger, much less ask any one else to do so, and I certainly +don't want my ship damaged. We can land down there," he said, pointing +to a spot on the side of the volcanic mountain, that was some distance +removed from the mouth of the crater. "It won't take me long to get one +reel of views, and then I'll come up again." + +The two men finally gave in to Tom's argument, that there was +comparatively little danger, for they admitted that they could quickly +rise up at the first sign of danger, and accordingly the Flyer +descended. Tom quickly had a fresh reel of film inserted, and started +his camera to working, standing it on a tripod some distance from the +airship. + +Once more the volcano was "doing its prettiest," as Tom expressed it. +He glanced around, as another big explosion took place, to see if any +other picture men were on hand, but the terrible mountain seemed +deserted, though of course someone might be on the other side. + +"What's that?" suddenly cried Ned, looking apprehensively at his chum. +At the same time Tom jumped to his feet, for he had been kneeling near +the camera. + +"Bless my--" began Mr. Damon, but he got no farther, for suddenly the +solid ground began to tremble and shake. + +"An earthquake!" shouted Mr. Nestor. "Come, Tom! Get back to the ship!" +The young inventor and Ned had been the only ones to leave it, as it +rested on a spur of the mountain. + +As Tom and Ned leaped forward to save the camera which was toppling to +one side, there came a great fissure in the side of the volcano, and a +stream of molten rock, glowing white with heat, gushed out. It was a +veritable river of melted stone, and it was coming straight for the two +lads. + +"Run! Run!" cried Mr. Nestor. "We have everything ready for a quick +flight. Run, Tom! Ned!" + +The lads leaped for the Flyer, the molten rock coming nearer and +nearer, and then with a cry Koku sprang overboard and made a dash +toward his master. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV + +THE EARTHQUAKE--CONCLUSION + + +"Here, Mr. Tom. Me carry you an' Ned. You hold picture machine!" cried +the giant. "Me run faster." + +As he spoke he lifted Ned up under one arm, and caught Tom in the +other. For they were but as children to his immense strength. Tom held +on to his camera, and, thus laden down, Koku ran as he had never run +before, toward the waiting airship. + +"Come on! Come on!" shouted Mr. Damon, for he could see what Tom, Ned +and Koku could not, that the stream of lava was nearing them rapidly. + +"It's hot!" cried Ned, as a wave of warm air fanned his cheek. + +"I should say so!" cried Tom. "The volcano is full of red-hot melted +stone." + +There came a sickening shake of the earth. Koku staggered as he ran on, +but he kept his feet, and did not fall. Again came a tremendous +explosion, and a shower of fine ashes sifted over the airship, and on +Koku and his living burdens. + +"This is the worst ever!" gasped Tom. "But I've got some dandy +pictures, if we ever get away from here alive to develop them." + +"Hurry, Koku! Hurry!" begged Mr. Nestor. "Bless my shoe laces!" yelled +Mr. Damon, who was fairly jumping up and down on the deck of the Flyer. +"I'll never go near a volcano again!" + +Once more the ground shook and trembled, as the earthquake rent it. +Several cracks appeared in Koku's path, but he leaped over them with +tremendous energy. A moment later he had thrust Tom and Ned over the +rail, to the deck, and leaped aboard himself. + +"Let her go!" cried Tom. "I'll do the rest of my moving picture work, +around volcanoes and earthquakes, from up in the air!" + +The Flyer shot upward, and scarcely a moment too soon, for, an instant +after she left the ground, the stream of hot, burning and bubbling lava +rolled beneath her, and those on board could feel the heat of it +ascending. + +"Say, I'm glad we got out of that when we did," gasped Ned, as he +looked down. "You're all right, Koku." + +"That no trouble," replied the giant with a cheerful grin. "Me carry +four fellows like you," and he stretched out his big arms. Tom had at +once set his camera to working again, taking view after view. + +It was a terrifying but magnificent sight that our friends beheld, for +the earth was trembling and heaving. Great fissures opened in many +places. Into some of them streams of lava poured, for now the volcano +had opened in several places, and from each crack the melted rocks +belched out. The crater, however, was not sending into the air such +volumes of smoke and ashes as before, as most of the tremendous energy +had passed, or was being used to spout out the lava. + +The earthquake was confined to the region right about the volcano, or +there might have been a great loss of life in the city. As it was, the +damage done was comparatively slight. + +Tom continued to take views, some showing the earth as it was twisted +and torn, and other different aspects of the crater. Then, as suddenly +as the earthquake had begun, it subsided, and the volcano was less +active. + +"My! I'm glad to see that!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "I've had about enough +of horrors!" + +"And I have too," added Tom. "I'm on my last roll of film, and I can't +take many more pictures. But I guess I have all Mr. Period needs, and +we'll start for home, as soon as I finish the next roll. But I'm going +to save that for a night view. That will be a novelty." + +The volcano became active again after dark, and presented a magnificent +though terrifying aspect. As the airship hovered above it, Tom got some +of his best pictures, and then, as the last bit of film slipped along +back of the lens, the airship was headed north. + +"Now for Shopton!" cried Tom. "Our trip is ended." + +"It's too had you didn't have more film," said Ned. "I thought you had +plenty." + +"Well, I used more than I counted on, but there are enough pictures as +it is." + +"Plenty," agreed Mr. Nestor. "I'm sure our company will be very well +satisfied with them, Tom. We can't get home any too soon to suit me. +I've had enough excitement." + +"And we didn't see anything of those other fellows whom we heard +about," spoke Mr. Damon, as the big airship flew on. + +"No," said Tom. "But I'm not worrying about them." + +They made another stop in Lima, on their homeward trip, to renew their +supply of gasolene, and there learned that the rival picture men had +arrived at the volcano too late to see it in operation. This news came +to a relative of one of the two men who lived in Lima. + +"Then our views of the earthquake and the smoking mountain will be the +only ones, and your company can control the rights," said Tom to Mr. +Nestor, who agreed with him. + +In due time, and without anything out of the ordinary happening the +Flyer reached Shopton, where Tom found a warm welcome awaiting him, not +only from his father, but from a certain young lady, whose name I do +not need to mention. + +"And so you got everything you went after, didn't you, Tom," exclaimed +Mr. Period, a few days later, when he had come from New York to get the +remainder of the films. + +"Yes, and some things I didn't expect," replied Tom. "There was--" + +"Yes! Yes! I know!" interrupted the odd picture man. "It was that +jungle fire. That's a magnificent series. None better. And those +scoundrels took your camera; eh?" + +"Yes. Could you connect them with Turbot and Eckert?" asked Tom. + +"No, but I'm sure they were acting for them just the same. I had no +legal evidence to act on, however, so I had to let it go. Turbot and +Eckert won't be in it when I start selling duplicates of the films you +have. And these last ought to be the best of all. I didn't catch that +fellow when I raced after him on the dock. He got away, and has steered +clear of me since," finished Mr. Period. + +"And our rivals didn't secure any views like ours," said Tom. + +"I'm glad of it," spoke Mr. Period. "Turbot and Eckert bribed one of my +men, and so found out where I was sending messages to you. They even +got a copy of my cablegram. But it did them no good." + +"Were all the films clear that I sent you?" asked our hero. + +"Every one. Couldn't be better. The animal views were particularly +fine. You must have had your nerve with you to get some of 'em." + +"Oh, Tom always has his nerve," laughed Ned. + +"Well, how soon will you be ready to start out again?" asked the +picture man, as he packed up the last of the films which Tom gave him. +"I'd like to get some views of a Japanese earthquake, and we haven't +any polar views. I want some of them, taken as near the North Pole as +you can get." + +Tom gently shook his head. + +"What! You don't mean to say you won't get them for me?" cried Mr. +Period. "With that wonderful camera of yours you can get views no one +else ever could." + +"Then some one else will have to take them," remarked the young +inventor. "I'll lend you the camera, and an airship, and you can go +yourself, Mr. Period. I'm going to stay home for a while. I did what I +set out to do, and that's enough." + +"I'm glad you'll stay home, Tom," said his father. "Now perhaps I'll +get my gyroscope finished." + +"And I, my noiseless airship," went on our hero. "No, Mr. Period, +you'll have to excuse me this time. Why don't you go yourself?" he +asked. "You would know just what kind of pictures you wanted." + +"No, I'm a promoter of the moving picture business, and I sell films, +but I don't know how to take them," was the answer. "Besides +I--er--well, I don't exactly care for airships, Tom Swift," he finished +with a laugh. "Well, I can't thank you enough for what you did for me, +and I've brought you a check to cover your expenses, and pay you as I +agreed. All the same I'm sorry you won't start for Japan, or the North +Pole." + +"Nothing doing," said Tom with a laugh; and Mr. Period departed. + +"Have you any idea what you will do next?" asked Ned, a day or so +later, when he and Tom were in the workshop. + +"I can't tell until I finish my noiseless airship," was the answer. +"Then something may happen." + +Something did, as I shall have the pleasure of telling you about in the +next volume of this series, to be called, "Tom Swift and His Great +Searchlight; or, On the Border for Uncle Sam," and in it will be given +an account of a great lantern our hero made, and how he baffled the +smugglers with it. + +"Oh, Tom, weren't you dreadfully frightened when you saw that burning +river of lava coming toward you?" asked Mary Nestor, when the young +inventor called on her later and told her some of his adventures. "I +should have been scared to death." + +"Well, I didn't have time to get scared," answered Tom. "It all +happened so quickly, and then, too I was thinking of my camera. Next I +knew Koku grabbed me, and it was all over." + +"But those wild beasts! Didn't they frighten you, especially when the +rhinoceros charged you?" + +"If you won't let it get out, I'll make a confession to you," said Tom, +lowering his voice. "I was scared stiff that time, but don't let Ned +know it." + +"I won't," promised Mary with a laugh. And now, when Tom is in such +pleasant company, we will take leave of him for a while, knowing that, +sooner or later, he will be seeking new adventures as exciting as those +of the past. + + + + +THE END + + + +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +THE TOM SWIFT SERIES + +By VICTOR APPLETON 12mo. CLOTH. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING. COLORED +WRAPPERS. + + +These spirited tales convey In a realistic way the wonderful advances +in land and sea locomotion. Stories like these are impressed upon the +memory and their reading is productive only of good. + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR CYCLE + Or Fun and Adventure on the Road + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR BOAT + Or The Rivals of Lake Carlopa + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP + Or The Stirring cruise of the Red Cloud + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT + Or Under the Ocean for Sunken Treasure + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT + Or The Speediest car on the Road + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE + Or The castaways of Earthquake Island + +TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS + Or The Secret of Phantom Mountain + +TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE + Or The Wreck of the Airship + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER + Or The Quickest Flight on Record + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE + Or Daring Adventures In Elephant Land + +TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD + Or Marvelous Adventures Underground + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER + Or Seeking the Platinum Treasure + +TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY + Or A Daring Escape by Airship + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA + Or The Perils of Moving Picture Taking + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT + Or On the Border for Uncle Sam + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS GIANT CANNON + Or The Longest Shots on Record + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS PHOTO TELEPHONE + Or The Picture that Saved a Fortune + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AERIAL WARSHIP + Or The Naval Terror of the Seas + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL + Or The Hidden city of the Andes + + +THE BUNNY BROWN SERIES + +By LAURA LEE HOPE + +Author of the Popular "Bobbsey Twins" Books + +wrapper and text illustrations drawn by + +FLORENCE ENGLAND NOSWORTHY 12mo. DURABLY BOUND. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM +STYLE OF BINDING + + +These stories by the author of the "Bobbsey Twins" Books are eagerly +welcomed by the little folks from about five to ten years of age. Their +eyes fairly dance with delight at the lively doings of inquisitive +little Bunny Brown and his cunning, trustful sister Sue. + +Bunny was a lively little boy, very inquisitive. When he did anything, +Sue followed his leadership. They had many adventures, some comical in +the extreme. + + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE ON GRANDPA'S FARM + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE PLAYING CIRCUS + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT CAMP REST-A-WHILE + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT AUNT LU'S CITY HOME + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE IN THE BIG WOODS + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE ON AN AUTO TOUR + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AND THEIR SHETLAND PONY + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE GIVING A SHOW + BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT CHRISTMAS TREE COVE + + +THE BOBBSEY TWINS BOOKS + +For Little Men and Women + +By LAURA LEE HOPE + +Author of "The Bunny Brown" Series. Etc. 12mo. DURABLY BOUND. +ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING + + +Copyright publications which cannot be obtained elsewhere. Books that +charm the hearts of the little ones, and of which they never tire. + + THE BOBBSEY TWINS + THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN THE COUNTRY + THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT THE SEASHORE + THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT SCHOOL + THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT SNOW LODGE + THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON A HOUSEBOAT + THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT MEADOW BROOK + THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT HOME + THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN A GREAT CITY + THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON BLUEBERRY ISLAND + THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON THE DEEP BLUE SEA + THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN THE GREAT WEST + + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS SERIES + +By LAURA LEE HOPE + +Author of "The Bobbsey Twins Series." + +12mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING + +The adventures of Ruth and Alice DeVere. Their father, a widower, is an +actor who has taken up work for the "movies." Both girls wish to aid +him in his work and visit various localities to act in all sorts of +pictures. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS + Or First Appearance in Photo Dramas. + +Having lost his voice, the father of the girls goes into the movies and +the girls follow. Tells how many "parlor dramas" are filmed. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT OAK FARM + Or Queer Happenings While Taking Rural Plays. + +Full of fun in the country, the haps and mishaps of taking film plays, +and giving an account of two unusual discoveries. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS SNOWBOUND + Or The Proof on the Film. + +A tale of winter adventures in the wilderness, showing how the +photo-play actors sometimes suffer. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS UNDER THE PALMS + Or Lost in the Wilds of Florida. + +How they went to the land of palms, played many parts in dramas before +the camera; were lost, and aided others who were also lost. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT ROCKY RANCH + Or Great Days Among the Cowboys. + +All who have ever seen moving pictures of the rest west will want to +know just how they are made. This volume gives every detail and is full +of clean fun and excitement. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT SEA + Or a Pictured Shipwreck that Became Real. + +A thrilling account of the girls' experiences on the water. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS IN WAR PLAYS + Or The Sham Battles at Oak Farm. + +The girls play important parts in big battle scenes and have plenty of +hard work along with considerable fun. + + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS SERIES + +By CAPTAIN QUINCY ALLEN + +The outdoor chums are four wide-awake lads, sons of wealthy men of a +small city located on a lake. The boys love outdoor life, and are +greatly interested in hunting, fishing, and picture taking. They have +motor cycles, motor boats, canoes, etc., and during their vacations go +everywhere and have all sorts of thrilling adventures. The stories give +full directions for camping out, how to fish, how to hunt wild animals +and prepare the skins for stuffing, how to manage a canoe, how to swim, +etc. Full of the spirit of outdoor life. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS + Or The First Tour of the Rod, Gun and Camera Club. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON THE LAKE + Or Lively Adventures on Wildcat Island. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS IN THE FOREST + Or Laying the Ghost of Oak Ridge. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON THE GULF + Or Rescuing the Lost Balloonists. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS AFTER BIG GAME. + Or Perilous Adventures in the Wilderness. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON A HOUSEBOAT + Or The Rivals of the Mississippi. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS IN THE BIG WOODS + Or The Rival Hunters at Lumber Run. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS AT CABIN POINT + Or The Golden Cup Mystery. + +12mo. Averaging 240 pages. Illustrated. Handsomely bound in Cloth. + + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH SERIES + +By GERTRUDE W. MORRISON + +12mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING. + +Here is a series full of the spirit of high school life of today. The +girls are real flesh-and-blood characters, and we follow them with +interest in school and out. There are many contested matches on track +and field, and on the water, as well as doings in the classroom and on +the school stage. There it plenty of fun and excitement, all clean, +pure and wholesome. + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH + Or Rivals for all Honors. + +A stirring tale of high school life, full of fun, with a tomb of +mystery and a strange initiation. + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON LAKE LUNA + Or The Crew That Won. + +Telling of water sports and fun galore, and of fine times in camp. + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH AT BASKETBALL + Or The Great Gymnasium Mystery. + +Here we have a number of thrilling contests at basketball and in +addition, the solving of a mystery which had bothered the high school +authorities for a long while. + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON THE STAGE + Or The Play That Took the Prize. + +How the girls went In for theatricals and how one of them wrote a play +which afterward was made over for the professional stage and brought in +some much-needed money. + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON TRACK AND FIELD + Or The Girl Champions of the School League + +This story takes in high school athletics In their most approved and +up-to-date fashion. Full of fun and excitement. + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH IN CAMP + Or The Old Professor's Secret + +The girls went camping on Acorn Island and had a delightful time at +boating, swimming and picnic parties. + + + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH SERIES + +By GRAHAM B. FORBES + +Never was there a cleaner, brighter, more manly boy than Frank Allen, +the hero of this series of boys' tales, and never was there a better +crowd of lads to associate with than the students of the School. All +boys will read these stories with deep interest. The rivalry between +the towns along the river was of the keenest, and plots and counterplot +to win the champions, at baseball, at football, at boat racing, at +track athletics, and at ice hockey, were without number. Any lad +reading one volume of this series will surely want the others. + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH + Or The All Around Rivals of the School + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE DIAMOND + Or Winning Out by Pluck + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE RIVER + Or The Boat Race Plot that Failed + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE GRIDIRON + Or The Struggle for the Silver Cup + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE ICE + Or Out for the Hockey Championship + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH IN TRACK ATHLETICS + Or A Long Run that Won + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH IN WINTER SPORTS + Or Stirring Doings on Skates and Iceboats + +12mo. Illustrated. Handsomely bound In cloth, with cover design and +wrappers in color. + + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS SERIES + +By VICTOR APPLETON + +12mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING. + + +Moving pictures and photo plays are famous the world over, and in this +line of books the reader is given a full description of how the films +are made--the scenes of little dramas, indoors and out, trick pictures +to satisfy the curious, soul-stirring pictures of city affairs, life in +the Wild West, among the cowboys and Indians, thrilling rescues along +the seacoast, the daring of picture hunters in the jungle among savage +beasts, and the great risks run in picturing conditions in a land of +earthquakes. The volumes teem with adventures and will be found +interesting from first chapter to last. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS + Or Perils of a Great City Depicted. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN THE WEST + Or Taking Scenes Among the Cowboys and Indians. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS ON THE COAST + Or Showing the Perils of the Deep. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN THE JUNGLE + Or Stirring Times Among the Wild Animals. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN EARTHQUAKE LAND + Or Working Amid Many Perils. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS AND THE FLOOD + Or Perilous Days on the Mississippi. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS AT PANAMA + Or Stirring Adventures Along the Great Canal. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS UNDER THE SEA + Or The Treasure of the Lost Ship. + + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS SERIES + +By LAURA LEE HOPE Author of the "Bobbsey Twin Books" and "Bunny Brown" +Series. + + +These tales take in the various adventures participated in by several +bright, up-to-date girls who love outdoor life. They are clean and +wholesome, free from sensationalism, absorbing from the first chapter +to the last. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS OF DEEPDALE + Or Camping and Tramping for Fun and Health. + +Telling bow the girls organized their Camping and Tramping Club, how +they went on a tour, and of various adventures which befell them. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS AT RAINBOW LAKE + Or Stirring Cruise of the Motor Boat Gem. + +One of the girls becomes the proud possessor of a motor boat and +invites her club members to take a trip down the river to Rainbow Lake, +a beautiful sheet of water lying between the mountains. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN A MOTOR CAR + Or The Haunted Mansion of Shadow Valley. + +One of the girls has learned to run a big motor ear, and she invited +the club to go on a tour to visit some distant relatives. On the way +they stop at a deserted mansion and make a surprising discovery. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN A WINTER CAMP + Or Glorious Days on Skates and Ice Boats. + +In this story, the scene is shifted to a winter season. The girls have +some jolly times skating and ice boating, and visit a hunters ramp in +the big woods. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN FLORIDA + Or Wintering in the Sunny South. + +The parents of one of the girls have bought an orange grove in Florida, +and her companions are invited to visit the place. They take a trip +into the interior, where several unusual things happen. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS AT OCEAN VIEW + Or The Box that Was Found in the Sand. + +The girls have great fun and solve a mystery while on an outing along +the New England coast. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS ON PINE ISLAND + Or A Cave and What it Contained. + +A bright, healthful story, full of good times at a bungalow camp on +Pine Island. + + + +CHARMING BOOKS FOR GIRLS + + +WHEN PATTY WENT TO COLLEGE, By Jean Webster. Illustrated by C. D. +Williams. + +One of the best stories of life in a girl's college that has ever been +written. It is bright, whimsical and entertaining, lifelike, laughable +and thoroughly human. + +JUST PATTY, By Jean Webster. Illustrated by C. M. Relyea. + +Patty is full of the joy of living, fun-loving, given to ingenious +mischief for its own sake, with a disregard for pretty convention which +is an unfailing source of joy to her fellows. + +THE POOR LITTLE RICH GIRL, By Eleanor Gates. With four full page +illustrations. + +This story relates the experience of one of those unfortunate children +whose early days are passed in the companionship of a governess, seldom +seeing either parent, and famishing for natural love and tenderness. A +charming play as dramatized by the author. + +REBECCA OF SUNNYBROOK FARM, By Kate Douglas Wiggin. + +One of the most beautiful studies of childhood--Rebecca's artistic, +unusual and quaintly charming qualities stand out midst a circle of +austere New Englanders. The stage version is making a phenomenal +dramatic record. + +NEW CHRONICLES OF REBECCA, By Kate Douglas Wiggin. Illustrated by F. +C. Yohn. + +Additional episodes in the girlhood of this delightful heroine that +carry Rebecca through various stages to her eighteenth birthday. + +REBECCA MARY, By Annie Hamilton Donnell. Illustrated by Elizabeth +Shippen Green. + +This author possesses the rare gift of portraying all the grotesque +little joys and sorrows and scruples of this very small girl with a +pathos that is peculiarly genuine and appealing. + +EMMY LOU: Her Book and Heart, By George Madden Martin, illustrated by +Charles Louis Hinton. + +Emmy Lou is irresistibly lovable, because she is so absolutely real. +She is just a bewitchingly innocent, hugable little maid. The book is +wonderfully human. + + + + +BOOKS BY VICTOR APPLETON + +THE TOM SWIFT SERIES + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR-CYCLE + Or Fun and Adventures on the Road + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR-BOAT + Or The Rivals of Lake Carlopa + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP + Or the Stirring Cruise of the Red cloud + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT + Or Under the Ocean for Sunken Treasure + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT + Or the Speediest Car on the Road + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE + Or the castaways of Earthquake Island + +TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS + Or the Secret of Phantom Mountain + +TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE + Or the Wreck of the Airship + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER + Or The Quickest Flight on Record + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE + Or Daring Adventures in Elephant Land + +TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD + Or Marvelous Adventures Underground + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER + Or Seeking the Platinum Treasure + +TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY + Or A Daring Escape by Airship + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA + Or Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving Pictures + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT + Or On the Border for Uncle Sam + + + + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Tom Swift and his Wizard Camera, by Victor Appleton + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA *** + +***** This file should be named 1283.txt or 1283.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/2/8/1283/ + +Produced by Anthony Matonac + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/1283.zip b/old/1283.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..721a737 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/1283.zip diff --git a/old/old/14tom10.txt b/old/old/14tom10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..24f21d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/old/14tom10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6331 @@ +*Project Gutenberg's Etext of Tom Swift And His Wizard Camera* +#14 in the Victor Appleton's Tom Swift Series + +We name the Tom Swift files as they are numbered in the books-- +i.e. This is #14 in the series so the file name is 14tomxxx.xxx +where the x's are place holders for editon # and file type such +as 14tom10.txt and 14tom10.zip, when we do a .htm, 14tom10h.htm + + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world, be sure to check +the copyright laws for your country before posting these files!! + +Please take a look at the important information in this header. +We encourage you to keep this file on your own disk, keeping an +electronic path open for the next readers. Do not remove this. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**Etexts Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*These Etexts Prepared By Hundreds of Volunteers and Donations* + +Information on contacting Project Gutenberg to get Etexts, and +further information is included below. We need your donations. + + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA +OR +Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving Pictures + +by Victor Appleton + +April, 1998 [Etext #1283 + + +*Project Gutenberg's Etext of Tom Swift And His Wizard Camera* +*****This file should be named 14tom10.txt or 14tom10.zip****** + +Corrected EDITIONS of our etexts get a new NUMBER, 14tom11.txt. +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, 14tom10a.txt. + + +This Etext was prepared for Project Gutenberg by Anthony Matonac. + + +We are now trying to release all our books one month in advance +of the official release dates, for time for better editing. + +Please note: neither this list nor its contents are final till +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg Etexts is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. To be sure you have an +up to date first edition [xxxxx10x.xxx] please check file sizes +in the first week of the next month. Since our ftp program has +a bug in it that scrambles the date [tried to fix and failed] a +look at the file size will have to do, but we will try to see a +new copy has at least one byte more or less. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +fifty hours is one conservative estimate for how long it we take +to get any etext selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. This +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If our value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour this year as we release thirty-two text +files per month: or 400 more Etexts in 1996 for a total of 800. +If these reach just 10% of the computerized population, then the +total should reach 80 billion Etexts. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away One Trillion Etext +Files by the December 31, 2001. [10,000 x 100,000,000=Trillion] +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only 10% of the present number of computer users. 2001 +should have at least twice as many computer users as that, so it +will require us reaching less than 5% of the users in 2001. + + +We need your donations more than ever! + + +All donations should be made to "Project Gutenberg/CMU": and are +tax deductible to the extent allowable by law. (CMU = Carnegie- +Mellon University). + +For these and other matters, please mail to: + +Project Gutenberg +P. O. Box 2782 +Champaign, IL 61825 + +When all other email fails try our Executive Director: +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +We would prefer to send you this information by email +(Internet, Bitnet, Compuserve, ATTMAIL or MCImail). + +****** +If you have an FTP program (or emulator), please +FTP directly to the Project Gutenberg archives: +[Mac users, do NOT point and click. . .type] + +ftp uiarchive.cso.uiuc.edu +login: anonymous +password: your@login +cd etext/etext90 through /etext96 +or cd etext/articles [get suggest gut for more information] +dir [to see files] +get or mget [to get files. . .set bin for zip files] +GET INDEX?00.GUT +for a list of books +and +GET NEW GUT for general information +and +MGET GUT* for newsletters. + +**Information prepared by the Project Gutenberg legal advisor** +(Three Pages) + + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this etext, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you can distribute copies of this etext if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS ETEXT +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +etext, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this etext by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this etext on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM ETEXTS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG- +tm etexts, is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor +Michael S. Hart through the Project Gutenberg Association at +Carnegie-Mellon University (the "Project"). Among other +things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this etext +under the Project's "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +To create these etexts, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's etexts and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other etext medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] the Project (and any other party you may receive this +etext from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext) disclaims all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this etext within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS ETEXT IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE ETEXT OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold the Project, its directors, +officers, members and agents harmless from all liability, cost +and expense, including legal fees, that arise directly or +indirectly from any of the following that you do or cause: +[1] distribution of this etext, [2] alteration, modification, +or addition to the etext, or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this etext electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + etext or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this etext in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word pro- + cessing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The etext, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The etext may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the etext (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + etext in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the etext refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Project of 20% of the + net profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Association/Carnegie-Mellon + University" within the 60 days following each + date you prepare (or were legally required to prepare) + your annual (or equivalent periodic) tax return. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +The Project gratefully accepts contributions in money, time, +scanning machines, OCR software, public domain etexts, royalty +free copyright licenses, and every other sort of contribution +you can think of. Money should be paid to "Project Gutenberg +Association / Carnegie-Mellon University". + +*END*THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS*Ver.04.29.93*END* + + + + + +This Etext was prepared for Project Gutenberg by Anthony Matonac. + + + + + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA +OR +Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving Pictures + +BY +VICTOR APPLETON + + + + +CONTENTS +CHAPTER + + +I A STRANGE OFFER +II A MAN IN THE SNOW BANK +III TOM MAKES UP HIS MIND +IV HELD FAST +V TOM GETS A WARNING +VI TRYING THE CAMERA +VII WHAT THE CAMERA CAUGHT +VIII PHOTOS FROM THE AIRSHIP +IX OFF FOR INDIA +X UNEXPECTED EXCITEMENT +XI AN ELEPHANT STAMPEDE +XII THE LION FIGHT +XIII A SHOT IN TIME +XIV IN A GREAT GALE +XV SNAPPING AN AVALANCHE +XVI TELEGRAPH ORDERS +XVII SUSPICIOUS STRANGERS +XVIII THE NATIVE BATTLE +XIX A HEAVY LOSS +XX AFTER THE ENGLISHMEN +XXI THE JUNGLE FIRE +XXII A DANGEROUS COMMISSION +XXIII AT THE VOLCANO +XXIV THE MOLTEN RIM +XXV THE EARTHQUAKE--CONCLUSION + + + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA + + + + +CHAPTER I - A STRANGE OFFER + + + +"Some one to see you, Mr. Tom." + +It was Koku, or August, as he was sometimes called, the new +giant servant of Tom Swift, who made this announcement to the +young inventor. + +"Who is it, Koku?" inquired Tom, looking up from his work-bench +in the machine shop, where he was busy over a part of the motor +for his new noiseless airship. "Any one I know? Is it the +'Blessing Man?'" for so Koku had come to call Mr. Damon, an +eccentric friend of Tom's. + +"No, not him. A strange man. I never see before. He say he got +quick business." + +"Quick business; eh? I guess you mean important, Koku," for +this gigantic man, one of a pair that Tom had brought with him +after his captivity in "Giant Land," as he called it, could not +speak English very well, as yet. "Important business; eh, Koku? +Did he send in his card?" + +"No, Mr. Tom. Him say he have no card. You not know him, but he +very much what you call--recited." + +"Excited I guess you mean, Koku. Well, tell him to wait a few +minutes, and I'll see him. You can show him in then. But I say, +Koku," and Tom paused as he looked at the big man, who had +attached himself to our hero, as a sort of personal helper and +bodyguard. + +"Yes, Mr. Tom; what is it?" + +"Don't let him go poking around the shop. He might look at some +of my machines that I haven't got fully patented yet. Is he in +the front office?" + +"That's where him am. He be lookin' at pictures on the walls." + +"Oh, that's all right then. Just keep him there. And, Koku, +don't let him come back in the shop here, until I get ready to +see him. I'll ring the bell when I am." + +"All right, Mr. Tom." + +Koku, very proud of his, mission of keeping guard over the +strange visitor, marched from the room with his big strides, his +long arms and powerful hands swinging at his sides, for Koku, or +August, as Tom had rechristened him, and as he often called him +(for it was in the month of August that he had located the +giants) was a very powerful man. A veritable giant, being +extremely tall, and big in proportion. + +"Be sure. Don't let him in here, Koku!" called Tom, in an +additional warning, as his new servant left the main shop. + +"Sure not!" exclaimed Koku, very earnestly. + +"I don't know who he may be," mused Tom, as he began putting +away the parts to his new noiseless motor, so that the stranger +could not see them, and profit thereby. "It looks rather funny, +not sending in his name. It may be some one who thinks he can +spring a trick on me, and get some points about my inventions, or +dad's. + +"It may even be somebody sent on by Andy Foger, or his father. +I can't be too careful. I'll just put everything away that isn't +fully covered by patents, and then if he wants to infringe on any +of the machines I can sue him." + +Tom looked about the shop, which was filled with strange +machinery, most of which had been made by himself, or his father, +or under their combined directions. There was a big biplane in +one corner, a small monoplane in another, parts of a submarine +boat hanging up overhead, and a small, but very powerful, +electric auto waiting to have some repairs made to it, for on his +last trip in it Tom Swift had suffered a slight accident. + +"There, I guess he can't see anything but what I want him to," +mused Tom, as he put away the last part of a new kind of motor, +from which he hoped great things. "Let's see, yes, it's out of +sight now. I wish Ned Newton, or Mr. Damon were here to be a +witness in case he starts anything. But then I have Koku, even if +he doesn't speak much English yet. If it comes to blows--well, I +wouldn't want that giant to hit me," finished Tom with a laugh, +as he rang the bell to announce to his servant that the visitor +might be shown in. + +There was a sound outside the door that separated the business +office from the main shop, and Tom heard Koku exclaim: + +"Hold on! Wait! I go first. You wait!" + +"What's the matter with me going ahead?" demanded a quick, +snappy voice. "I'm in a hurry, and--" + +"You wait! I go first," was the giant's reply, and then came +the sound of a scuffle. + +"Ouch! Say! Hold on there, my man! Take your hand off my +shoulder! You're crushing me with those big fingers of yours!" + +This was evidently the visitor remonstrating with the giant. + +"Humph! I guess Koku must have grabbed him," said Tom softly. +"I don't like that sort of a visitor. What's his hurry getting in +here?" and our hero looked about, to see if he had a weapon at +hand in case of an attack. Often cranks had forced their way into +his shop, with pet inventions which they wanted him to perfect +after they had themselves failed. Tom saw a heavy iron bar at +hand, and knew this would serve to protect him. + +"You come after me!" exclaimed Koku, when the voice of the +other had ceased. "Do you stand under me?" + +"Oh, yes, I understand all right. I'll keep back. But I didn't +mean anything. I'm just in a hurry to see Tom Swift, that is all. +I'm always in a hurry in fact. I've lost nearly a thousand +dollars this morning, just by this delay. I want to see Mr. Swift +at once; and have a talk with him." + +"Another crank, I guess," mused Tom. "Well, I'm not going to +waste much time on him." + +A moment later the door opened, and into the shop stepped Koku, +followed by a short, stout, fussy little man, wearing a flaming +red tie, but otherwise his clothes were not remarkable. + +"Is this Mr. Tom Swift?" asked the stranger, as he advanced and +held out his hand to the young man. + +"Yes," answered Tom, looking carefully at the visitor. He did +not seem to be dangerous, he had no weapon, and, Tom was relieved +to note that he did not carry some absurd machine, or appliance, +that he had made, hoping to get help in completing it. The youth +was trying to remember if he had ever seen the stranger before, +but came to the conclusion that he had not. + +"Sorry to take up your time," went on the man, "but I just had +to see you. No one else will do. I've heard lots about you. That +was a great stunt you pulled off, getting those giants for the +circus. This is one; isn't he?" and he nodded toward Koku. + +"Yes," replied Tom, wondering if the little man was in such a +hurry why he did not get down to business. + +"I thought so," the caller went on, as he shook hands with Tom. +"Once you felt his grip you'd know he was a giant, even if you +didn't see him. Yes, that was a great stunt. And going to the +caves of ice, too, and that diamond-making affair. All of 'em +great. I--" + +"How did you know about them?" interrupted Tom, wishing the man +would tell his errand. + +"Oh, you're better known than you have any idea of, Tom Swift. +As soon as I got this idea of mine I said right away, to some of +the others in my business, I says, says I, 'Tom Swift is the boy +for us. I'll get him to undertake this work, and then it will be +done to the Queen's taste. Tom's the boy who can do it,' I says, +and they all agreed with me. So I came here to-day, and I'm sorry +I had to wait to see you, for I'm the busiest man in the world, I +believe, and, as I said, I've lost about a thousand dollars +waiting to have a talk with you. I--" + +"I am sorry," interrupted Tom, and he was not very cordial. +"But I was busy, and--" + +"All right! All right! Don't apologize!" broke in the man in +rapid tones, while both Tom, and his servant, Koku, looked in +surprise at the quick flow of language that came from him. "Don't +apologize for the world. It's my fault for bothering you. And +I'll lose several thousand dollars, willingly, if you'll +undertake this job. I'll make money from it as it is. It's worth +ten thousand dollars to you, I should say, and I'm willing to pay +that." + +He looked about, as though for a seat, and Tom, apologizing for +his neglect in offering one, shoved a box forward. + +"We don't have chairs in here," said the young inventor with a +smile. "Now if you will tell me what you--" + +"I'm coming right to it. I'll get down to business in a +moment," interrupted the man as he sat down on the box, not +without a grunt or two, I for he was very stout. "I'm going to +introduce myself in just a second, and then I'm going to tell you +who I am. And I hope you'll take up my offer, though it may seem +a strange one." + +The man took out a pocketbook, and began searching through it, +evidently for some card or paper. + +"He's as odd as Mr. Damon is, when he's blessing everything," +mused Tom, as he watched the man. + +"I thought I had a card with me, but I haven't," the visitor +went on. "No matter. I'm James Period--promoter of all kinds of +amusement enterprises, from a merry-go-'round to a theatrical +performance. I want you to--" + +"No more going after giants," interrupted. Tom. "It's too +dangerous, and I haven't time--" + +"No, it has nothing to do with giants," spoke Mr. Period, as he +glanced up at Koku, who towered over him as he sat on the box +near Tom. + +"Well?" returned Tom. + +"This is something entirely new. It has never been done before, +though if you should happen to be able to get a picture of giants +don't miss the opportunity." + +"Get a picture?" exclaimed Tom, wondering if, after all, his +visitor might not be a little insane. + +"Pictures, yes. Listen. I'm James Period. Jim, if you like it +better, or just plain 'Spotty.' That's what most of my friends +call me. Get the idea? A period is a spot. I'm a Period, therefor +I'm a spot. But that isn't the real reason. It's because I'm +always Johnny on the Spot when anything is happening. If it's a +big boxing exhibition, I'm there. If it's a coronation, I'm +there, or some of my men are. If it's a Durbar in India, you'll +find Spotty on the spot. That's me. If there's going to be a +building blown up with dynamite--I'm on hand; or some of my men. +If there's a fire I get there as soon as the engines do--if it's +a big one. Always on the spot--that's me--James Period--Spotty +for short. Do you get me?" and he drew a long breath and looked +at Tom, his head on one side. + +"I understand that you are--" + +"In the moving picture business," interrupted Mr. Period, who +never seemed to let Tom finish a sentence. "I'm the biggest +moving picture man in the world--not in size, but in business. I +make all the best films. You've seen some of 'em I guess. Every +one of 'em has my picture on the end of the film. Shows up great. +Advertising scheme--get me?" + +"Yes," replied Tom, as he recalled that he had seen some of the +films in question, and good ones they were too. "I see your +point, but--" + +"You want to know why I come to you; don't you?" again +interrupted "Spotty," with a laugh. "Well, I'll tell you. I need +you in my business. I want you to invent a new kind of moving +picture camera. A small light one--worked by electricity--a +regular wizard camera. I want you to take it up in an airship +with you, and then go to all sorts of wild and strange countries, +Africa, India--the jungles--get pictures of wild animals at peace +and fighting--herds of elephants--get scenes of native wars-- +earthquakes--eruptions of volcanoes--all the newest and most +wonderful pictures you can. You'll have to make a new kind of +camera to do it. The kind we use won't do the trick. + +"Now do you get me? I'm going to give you ten thousand dollars, +above all your expenses, for some films such as I've been +speaking of. I want novelty. Got to have it in my business! You +can do it. Now will you?" + +"I hardly think--" began Tom. + +"Don't answer me now," broke in Mr. Period. "Take four minutes +to think it over. Or even five. I guess I can wait that long. +Take five minutes. I'll wait while you make up your mind, but I +know you'll do it. Five minutes--no more,' and hastily getting up +off the box Mr. Period began impatiently pacing up and down the +shop. + + + + +CHAPTER II - A MAN IN THE SNOW BANK + + +Tom Swift looked somewhat in surprise at his strange visitor. +It had all happened so suddenly, the offer had been such a +strange one, the man himself--Mr. Period--was so odd, that our +hero hardly knew what to think. The moving picture agent +continued pacing up and down the room now and then looking at his +watch as if to note when the five minutes had passed. + +"No," said Tom to himself. "I'm not going to take this offer. +There's too much work and risk attached to it. I want to stay at +home and work on my noiseless motor for the airship. After that-- +well--I don't know what I'll do. I'll tell Mr. Period that he +needn't wait the five minutes. My mind is made up now!" + +But as Tom was about to make this announcement, and dismiss his +caller, he looked again at the visitor. There was something +attractive about him--about his hasty way of talking, about his +manner of interrupting, about the way he proposed matters. Tom +was interested in spite of himself. + +"Well," he reflected, "I may as well wait until the five +minutes are up, anyhow." + +Koku, the giant servant, glanced at his young master, as if to +ask if there was anything that he could do. Tom shook his head, +and then the big man strolled over to the other side of the +machine shop, at the same time keeping a careful eye on Mr. +Period. + +While Tom is waiting for the time to expire, I will take a few +minutes to tell you something more about him. Those of my friends +who have read the previous books in this series need no +introduction to my hero, but those who may chance upon this as +their first book in the Tom Swift series, will like to be more +formally introduced. + +Tom, whose mother had been dead some years, lived with his +father, Barton Swift, in the town of Shopton. Mr. Swift was an +inventor of prominence, and his son was fast following in his +footsteps. A Mrs. Baggert kept house for the Swifts, and another +member of the household was Eradicate Sampson, an aged colored +man, who said he used to "eradicate" the dirt. He had been with +Tom on many trips, but of late was getting old and feeble. Then +there was Garret Jackson, an engineer employed by the Swifts. +These were all the immediate members of the household. + +Tom had a chum, Ned Newton, who used to work in a bank, and +there was a girl, Mary Nestor, a daughter of Amos Nestor, in +which young lady Tom was much interested. + +Eradicate Sampson had a mule, Boomerang, of whom he thought +almost as much as he did of Tom. Eradicate was a faithful friend +and servant, but, of late, Koku, or August, the giant, had rather +supplanted him. I must not forget Mr. Wakefield Damon, of +Waterfield, a village near Shopton. Mr. Damon was an odd man, +always blessing everything. He and Tom were good friends, and had +been on many trips together. + +The first book of the series was called "Tom Swift and His +Motor-Cycle," and related how Tom bought the cycle from Mr. +Damon, after the latter had met with an accident on it, and it +was in this way that our hero became acquainted with the odd man. + +Tom had many adventures on his motor-cycle, and, later on he +secured a motor-boat, in which he beat his enemy, Andy Foger, in +a race. Next Tom built an airship, and in this he went on a +wonderful trip. Returning from this he and his father heard about +a treasure sunken under the ocean. In his submarine boat Tom +secured the valuables, and made a large sum for himself. + +In his electric runabout, which was the swiftest car on the +road, Tom was able to save from ruin a bank in which his father +was interested, and, a short time after that, he went on a trip +in an airship, with a man who had invented a new kind. The +airship was smashed, and fell to Earthquake Island, where there +were some refugees from a shipwreck, among them being the parents +of Mary Nestor. In the volume called "Tom Swift and His Wireless +Message," I told how he saved these people. + +When Tom went among the diamond makers he had more strange +adventures, on that trip discovering the secret of phantom +mountain. He had bad luck when he went to the caves of ice, for +there his airship was wrecked. + +When Tom made the trip in his sky racer he broke all records +for an aerial flight, incidentally saving his father's life. It +was some time after this when he invented an electric rifle, and +went to elephant land, to rescue some missionaries from the red +pygmies. + +The eleventh volume of the series is called "Tom Swift in the +Land of Gold," and relates his adventures underground, while the +next one tells of a new machine he invented--an air-glider-- +which he used to save the exiles of Siberia, incidentally, on +that trip, finding a valuable deposit of platinum. + +As I have said, it was on his trip to giant land that Tom got +his big servant. This book, the thirteenth of the series, is +called "Tom Swift in Captivity," for the giants captured him and +his friends, and it was only by means of their airship that they +made their daring escape. + +Tom had been back from the strange land some time now. One +giant he had turned over to the circus representative for whom he +had undertaken the mission, and the other he retained to work +around his shop, as Eradicate was getting too old. It was now +winter, and there had been quite a fall of snow the day before +Mr. Period, the odd moving picture man, called on Tom. There were +many big drifts outside the building. + +Tom had fitted up a well-equipped shop, where he and his father +worked on their inventions. Occasionally Ned Newton, or Mr. +Damon, would come over to help them, but of late Tom had been so +busy on his noiseless motor that he had not had time to even see +his friends. + +"Well, I guess the five minutes have passed, and my mind is +made up," thought Tom, as he looked at his watch. "I might as +well tell Mr. Period that I can't undertake his commission. In +the first place it isn't going to be an easy matter to make an +electric moving picture camera. I'd have to spend a lot of time +studying up the subject, and then I might not be able to get it +to work right. + +"And, again, I can't spare the time to go to all sorts of wild +and impossible places to get the pictures. It's all well enough +to talk about getting moving pictures of natives in battle, or +wild beasts fighting, or volcanoes in action, but it isn't so +easy to do it. Then, too, I'd have to make some changes in my +airship if I went on that trip. No, I can't go. I'll tell him +he'll have to find some one else." + +Mr. Period pulled out his watch, opened it quickly, snapped it +shut again, and exclaimed: + +"Well, how about it, Tom Swift? When can you start! The sooner +the better for me! You'll want some money for expenses I think. I +brought my check book along, also a fountain pen. I'll give you a +thousand dollars now, for I know making an electric moving +picture camera isn't going to be cheap work. Then, when you get +ready to start off in your airship, you'll need more money. I'll +be Johnny-on-the-spot all right, and have it ready for you. Now +when do you think you can start?" + +He sat down at a bench, and began filling out a check. + +"Hold on!" cried Tom, amused in spite of himself. "Don't sign +that check, Mr. Period. I'm not going." + +"Not going?" The man's face showed blank amazement. + +"No," went on Tom. "I can't spare the time. I'm sorry, but +you'll have to get some one else." + +"Some one else? But who can I get?" + +"Why, there are plenty who would be glad of the chance." + +"But they can't invent an electric moving picture camera, and, +if they could, they wouldn't know enough to take pictures with +it. It's got to be you or no one, Tom Swift. Look here, I'll make +it fifteen thousand dollars above expenses." + +"No, I'm sorry, but I can't go. My work here keeps me too busy. + +"Oh, pshaw! Now, look here, Tom Swift! Do you know who sent me +to see you?" + +"It was Mr. Nestor, who has a daughter named Mary, I believe. +Mr. Nestor is one of the directors in our company, and one day, +when he told me about you sending a wireless message from +Earthquake Island, I knew you would be the very man for me. So +now you see you'll be doing Mr. Nestor a favor, as well as me, if +you go on this trip." + +Tom was somewhat surprised, yet he realized that Mr. Period was +speaking the truth. Mr. Nestor was identified with many new +enterprises. Yet the youth was firm. + +"I really can't go," said our hero. "I'd like to, but I can't. +I'd like to oblige Mr. Nestor, for--well, for more reasons than +one," and Tom blushed slightly. "But it is out of the question. I +really can't go." + +"But you must!" insisted the camera man. "I won't take 'no' for +an answer. You've got to go, Tom Swift, do you hear that? You've +go to go?" + +Mr. Period was apparently very much excited. He strode over to +Tom and smote his hands together to emphasize what he said. Then +he shook his finger at Tom, to impress the importance of the +matter on our hero. + +"You've just got to go!" he cried. "You're the only one who can +help me, Tom. Do go! I'll pay you well, and--oh, well, I know you +don't need the money, exactly, but--say, you've got to go!" + +In his earnestness Mr. Period laid his hand on Tom's arm. The +next instant something happened. + +With a few big strides Koku was beside the picture man. With +great quickness he grasped Mr. Period by the coat collar, lifted +him off his feet with one hand, and walked over to a window with +him, easily lifting him above the floor. + +With one fling the giant tossed the short, stout gentleman out +into a snow bank, while Tom looked on, too surprised to do +anything, even if he had had the chance. + +"There. You touch Tom Swift again, and I sit on you and keep +you under snow!" cried the giant, while Mr. Period kicked and +squirmed about in the drift, as Tom made a leap forward to help +him out. + + + + +CHAPTER III - TOM MAKES UP HIS MIND + + +"Great Scott!" yelled the picture man. "What in the world +happened to me? Did I get kicked by that mule Boomerang of +Eradicate's, that I've heard so much about? Or was it an +earthquake, such as I want to get a picture of? What happened?" + +He was still floundering about in the deep bank of snow that +was just outside the window. Fortunately the sash had been up, +and Koku had tossed Mr. Period through the open window. +Otherwise, had there been glass, the well-meaning, but +unreasoning giant would probably have thrown his victim through +that, and he might have been badly cut. Tom had the window open +for fresh air, as it was rather close in the shop. + +"Why, Koku!" exclaimed the young inventor, as he leaned out of +the window, and extended his hand to the moving picture man to +help him out of the drift. "What do von mean by that?" Have you +gone crazy?" + +"No, but no one shall lay hands on my master!" declared the +giant half savagely. "I have vowed to always protect you from +danger, in return for what you did for me. I saw this man lay his +hand on you. In another moment he might have killed you, had not +Koku been here. There is no danger when I am by," and he +stretched out his huge arms, and looked ferocious. "I have turned +over that man, your enemy!" he added. + +"Yes, you overturned me all right," admitted Mr. Period, as he +got to his feet, and crawled in through the window to the shop +again. "I went head over heels. I'm glad it was clean snow, and +not a mud bank, Tom. What in the world is the matter with him?" + +"I guess he thought you were going to harm me, said Tom in a +low voice, as the picture man came in the shop. "Koku is very +devoted to me, and sometimes he makes trouble," the youth went +on. "But he means it all for the best. I am very sorry for what +happened," and Tom aided Mr. Period in brushing the snow off his +garments. "Koku, you must beg the pardon of this gentleman," Tom +directed. + +"What for?" the giant wanted to know. + +"For throwing him into the snow. It is not allowed to do such +things in this country, even though it is in Giant Land. Beg his +pardon. + +"I shall not," said the giant calmly, for Tom had taught him to +speak fairly good English, though sometimes he got his words +backwards. + +"The man was about to kill you, and I stopped him--I will stop +him once more, though if he does not like the snow, I can throw +him somewhere else." + +"No! No! You must not do it!" cried Tom. "He meant no harm. He +is my friend." + +"I am glad to hear you say that," exclaimed the picture man. "I +have hopes that you will do what I want." + +"He your friend?" asked Koku wonderingly. "Certainly; and you +must beg his pardon for what you did," insisted Tom. + +"Very well. I am glad you did not hurt yourself," said the +giant, and with that "apology" he stalked out of the room, his +feelings evidently very much disturbed. + +"Ha! Ha!" laughed Mr. Period. "I guess he can't see any one but +you, Tom. But never mind. I know he didn't mean anything, and, as +I'm none the worse I'll forgive him. My necktie isn't spotted; is +it?" + +"No, the snow didn't seem to do that any harm," replied the +young inventor, as he looked at the brilliant piece of red silk +around Mr. Period's collar. + +"I am very particular about my neckties," went on the picture +man. "I always wear one color. My friends never forget me then." + +Tom wondered how they could ever forget him, even though he +wore no tie, for his figure and face were such as to not easily +be forgotten. + +"I'm glad it's not soiled," went on "Spotty" as he liked to be +called. "Now, Tom, you said you were my friend. Prove it by +accepting my offer. Build that wizard camera, and get me some +moving pictures that will be a sensation. Say you will!" + +He looked appealingly at Tom, and, remembering the rather rude +and unexpected treatment to which Koku had submitted the +gentleman, Tom felt his mind changing. Still he was not yet ready +to give in. He rather liked the idea the more he thought of it, +but he felt that he had other duties, and much to occupy him at +home, especially if he perfected his silent motor. + +"Will you go?" asked Mr. Period, picking up his fountain pen +and check book, that he had laid aside when he walked over to +Tom, just before the giant grasped him. "Say you will." + +The young inventor was silent a moment. He thought over the +many adventures he had gone through--in the caves of ice, in the +city of gold, escaping from the giants, and the red pygmies--He +went over the details of his trips through the air, of the +dangers under the seas, of those he had escaped from on +Earthquake Island. Surely e was entitled to a little rest at +home. + +And yet there was a lure to it all. A certain fascination that +was hard to resist. Mr. Period must have seen what was going on +in Tom's mind, for he said: + +"I know you're going. I can see it. Why, it will be just the +very thing you need. You'll get more fame out of this thing than +from any of your other inventions. Come, say you'll do it. + +"I'll tell you what I'll do !" he went on eagerly. "After you +make the camera, and take a lot of films, showing strange and +wonderful scenes, I'll put at the end of each film, next to my +picture, your name, and a statement showing that you took the +originals. How's that? Talk about being advertised! Why you can't +beat it! Millions of people will read your name at the picture +shows every night." + +"I am not looking for advertisements," said Tom, with a laugh. + +"Well, then, think of the benefit you will be to science," went +on Mr. Period quickly. "Think of the few people who have seen +wild animals as they are, of those who have ever seen an earth- +quake, or a volcano in action. You can go to Japan, and get +pictures of earthquakes. They have them on tap there. And as for +volcanoes, why the Andes mountains are full of 'em. Think of how +many people will be thankful to you for showing them these +wonderful scenes." + +"And think of what might happen if I should take a tumble into +a crack in the earth, or down a hot volcano, or fall into a +jungle when there was a fight on among the elephants," suggested +Tom. "My airship might take a notion to go down when I was doing +the photographing," he added. + +"No. Nothing like that will happen to Tom Swift," was the +confident answer of the picture man. "I've read of your doings. +You don't have accidents that you can't get the better of. But +come, I know you're thinking of it, and I'm sure you'll go. Let +me make you out this check, sign a contract which I have all +ready, and then get to work on the camera." + +Tom was silent a moment. Then he said: + +"Well, I admit that there is something attractive about it. I +hoped I was going to stay home. for a long time. But--" + +"Then you'll go!" cried Mr. Period eagerly. "Here's the money," +and he quickly filled out a check for Tom's first expenses, +holding the slip of paper toward the young inventor. + +"Wait a minute! Hold on!" cried Tom. "Not so fast if you +please. I haven't yet made up my mind." + +"But you will; won't you?" asked Mr. Period. + +"Well, I'll make up my mind, one way or the other," replied the +young man. "I won't say I'll go, but--" + +"I'll tell you what I'll do!" interrupted Mr. Period. "I'm a +busy man, and every second is worth money to me. But I'll wait +for you to make up your mind. I'll give you until to-morrow +night. How's that? Fair, isn't it?" + +"Yes--I think so. I am afraid--" + +"I'm not!" broke in the picture man. "I know you'll decide to +go. Think of the fun and excitement you'll have. Now I've taken +up a lot of your time, and I'm going to leave you alone. I'll be +back tomorrow evening for my answer. But I know you're going to +get those moving pictures for me. Is that giant of yours +anywhere about?" he asked, as he looked cautiously around before +leaving the shop. "I don't want to fall into his hands again." + +"I don't blame you," agreed Tom. "I never knew him to act that +way before. But I'll go to the gate with you, and Koku will +behave him self. I am sorry--" + +"Don't mention it !" broke in the picture man. "It was worth +all I suffered, if you go, and I know you will. Don't trouble +yourself to come out. I can find my way, and if your giant comes +after me, I'll call for help." + +He hurried out before Tom could follow, and, hearing the gate +click a little later, and no call for help coming, our hero +concluded that his visitor had gotten safely away. + +"Well, what am I going to do about it?" mused Tom, as he +resumed work on his silent motor. He had not been long engaged in +readjusting some of the valves, when he was again interrupted. + +This time it was his chum, Ned Newton, who entered, and, as Ned +was well known to the giant, nothing happened. + +"Well, what's up, Tom?" asked Ned. + +"Why, did you notice anything unusual?" asked Tom. + +"I saw Koku standing at the gate a while ago, looking down the +road at a short stout man, with a red tie. Your giant seemed +rather excited about something." + +"Oh, yes. I'll tell you about it," and Tom related the details +of Mr. Period's visit. + +"Are you going to take his offer?" asked Ned. + +"I've got until tomorrow to make up my mind. What would you do, +Ned?" + +"Why, I'd take it in a minute, if I knew how to make an +electric camera. I suppose it has to be a very speedy one, to +take the kind of pictures he wants. Wait, hold on, I've just +thought of a joke. It must be a swift camera--catch on--you're +Swift, and you make a swift camera; see the point?" + +"I do," confessed Tom, with a laugh. "Well, Ned, I've been +thinking it over, but I can't decide right away. I will tomorrow +night, though." + +"Then I'm coming over, and hear what it is. If you decide to +go, maybe you'll take me along." + +"I certainly will, and Mr. Damon, too." + +"How about the giant?" + +"Well, I guess there'll be room for him. But I haven't decided +yet. Hand me that wrench over there; will you," and then Tom and +Ned began talking about the new apparatus on which the young +inventor was working. + +True to his promise Mr. Period called the next evening. He +found Tom, Ned and Mr. Swift in the library, talking over various +matters. + +"Well, Tom, have you made up your mind?" asked the caller, when +Mrs. Baggert, the housekeeper, had shown him into the room. "I +hope you have, and I hope it is favorable to me." + +"Yes," said Tom slowly, "I've thought it all over, and I have +decided that I will--" + +At that moment there was a loud shouting outside the house, and +the sound of some one running rapidly through the garden that was +just outside the low library window--a garden now buried deep +under snow. + +"What's that?" cried Ned, jumping to his feet. + +"That was Koku's voice," replied Tom, "and I guess he was +chasing after some one." + +"They'll need help if that giant gets hold of them," spoke Mr. +Period solemnly, while the noise outside increased in volume. + + + + +CHAPTER IV - HELD FAST + + +"Here, Tom! Come back! Where are you going?" cried aged Mr. +Swift, as his son started toward the window. + +"I'm going to see what's up, and who it is that Koku is +chasing," replied the young inventor. + +As he spoke he opened the window, which went all the way down +to the floor. He stepped out on a small balcony, put his hand on +the railing, and was about to leap over. Back of him was his +father, Mr. Period and Ned. + +"Come back! You may get hurt!" urged Mr. Swift. He had aged +rapidly in the last few months, and had been obliged to give up +most of his inventive work. Naturally, he was very nervous about +his son. + +"Don't worry, dad; replied the youth. "I'm not in much danger +when Koku is around." + +"That's right, agreed the moving picture man. "I'd sooner have +that giant look after me than half a dozen policemen." + +The noise had now grown fainter, but the sound of the pursuit +could still be heard. Koku was shouting in his hearty tones, and +there was the noise of breaking twigs as the chase wound in and +out of the garden shrubbery. + +Tom paused a moment, to let his eyes get somewhat used to the +darkness. There was a crescent moon, that gave a little light, +and the snow on the ground made it possible to notice objects +fairly well. + +"See anything?" asked Ned, as he joined his chum on the +balcony. + +"No, but I'm going to have a closer look. Here goes!" and Tom +leaped to the ground. + +"I'm with you," added Ned, as he followed. + +Then came another voice, shouting: + +"Dat's de way! Catch him! I'se comm', I is! Ef we gits him +we'll tie him up, an' let Boomerang walk on him!" + +"Here comes Eradicate," announced Tom, with a look back toward +his chum, and a moment later the aged colored man, who had +evidently started on the chase with Koku, but who had been left +far behind, swung totteringly around the corner of the house. + +"Did ye cotch him, Massa Tom?" asked Eradicate. "Did ye cotch +de raskil?" + +"Not yet, Rad. But Koku is after him. Who was he, and what did +he do?" + +"Didn't do nuffin yit, Massa Tom, 'case as how he didn't git no +chance," replied the colored man, as he hurried along as rapidly +as he could beside the two youths. "Koku and I was too quick for +him. Koku an' me was a-sittin' in my shack, sort of talkin' +togedder, when we hears a racket neah de chicken house. I'se +mighty partial t' de chickens, an' I didn't want nobody t' 'sturb +'em. Koku was jes' de same, an' when we hears dat noise, up we +jumps, an' gits t' chasm.' He runned dis way, an' us was arter +him, but land lub yo', ole Eradicate ain't so spry as he uster be +an' Koku an' de chicken thief got ahead ob me. Leastwise he ain't +no chicken thief yit, 'case as how he didn't git in de coop, but +he meant t' be one, jes' de same." + +"Are you sure he was after the chickens?" asked Tom, with quick +suspicion in his mind, for, several times of late, unscrupulous +persons had tried to enter his shop, to get knowledge of his +valuable inventions before they were patented. + +"Course he were arter de chickens," replied Eradicate. "But he +didn't git none." + +"Come on, Ned!" cried Tom, breaking into a run. "I want to +catch whoever this was. Did you see him, Rad?" + +"Only jes' had a glimpse ob his back." + +"Well, you go back to the house and tell father and Mr. Period +about it. Ned and I will go on with Koku. I hope to get the +fellow." + +"Why, Tom?" asked his chum. + +"Because I think he was after bigger game than chickens. My +noiseless motor, for the new airship, is nearly complete, and it +may have been some one trying to get that. I received an offer +from a concern the other day, who wished to purchase it, and, +when I refused to sell, they seemed rather put out." + +The two lads raced on, while Eradicate tottered back to the +house, where he found Mr. Swift and the picture man awaiting him. + +"I guess he got away," remarked Ned, after he and his chum had +covered nearly the length of the big garden. + +"I'm afraid so," agreed Tom. "I can't hear Koku any more. +Still, I'm not going to give up." + +Pantingly they ran on, and, a little later, they met the big +man coming back. + +"Did he get away?" asked Tom. + +"Yes, Mr. Tom, he scaped me all right." + +"Escaped you mean, Koku. Well, never mind. You did your best." + +"I would like to have hold of him," spoke the giant, as he +stretched out his big arms. + +"Did you know who he was?" inquired Ned. + +"No, I couldn't see his face," and he gave the same description +of the affair as had Eradicate. + +"Was it a full grown man, or some one about my size?" Tom +wanted to know. + +"A man," replied the giant. + +"Why do you ask that?" inquired Ned, as the big fellow went on +to resume his talk with Eradicate, and the two chums turned to go +into the house, after the fruitless chase. + +"Because, I thought it might be Andy Foger," was Tom's reply. +"It would be just like him, but if it was a man, it couldn't be +him. Andy's rather short." + +"Besides, he doesn't live here any more," said Ned. + +"I know, but I heard Sam Snedecker, who used to be pretty thick +with him, saying the other day that he expected a visit from +Andy. I hope he doesn't come back to Shopton, even for a day, for +he always tries to make trouble for me. Well, let's go in, and +tell 'em all about our chase after a chicken thief." + +"And so he got away?" remarked Mr. Swift, when Tom had +completed his story. + +"Yes," answered the young inventor, as he closed, and locked, +the low library window, for there was a chilly breeze blowing. "I +think I will have to rig up the burglar alarm on my shop again. I +don't want to take any chances." + +"Do you remember what we were talking about, when that +interruption came?" asked Mr. Period, after a pause. "You were +saying, Tom, that you had made up your mind, and that was as far +as you got. What is your answer to my offer?" + +"Well," spoke the lad slowly, and with a smile, "I think I +will--" + +"Now don't say 'no'"; interrupted the picture man. "If you are +going to say 'no' take five minutes more, or even ten, and think +it over carefully. I want you--" + +"I wasn't going to say 'no,'" replied Tom. "I have decided to +accept your offer, and I'll get right at work on the electrical +camera, and see what I can do in the way of getting moving +pictures for you." + +"You will? Say, that's great! That's fine! I knew you would +accept, but I was the least bit afraid you might not, without +more urging." + +"Of course," began Tom, "it will take--" + +"Not another word. Just wait a minute," interrupted Mr. Period +in his breezy fashion. "Take this." + +He quickly filled out a check and handed it to Tom. + +"Now sign this contract, which merely says that you will do +your best to get pictures for me, and that you won't do it for +any other concern, and everything will be all right. Sign there," +he added, pointing to a dotted line, and thrusting a fountain pen +into Tom's hand. The lad read over the agreement, which was fair +enough, and signed it, and Ned affixed his name as a witness. + +"Now when can you go?" asked Mr. Period eagerly. + +"Not before Spring, I'm afraid," replied Torn. "I have first to +make the camera, and then my airship needs overhauling if I am to +go on such long trips as will be necessary in case I am to get +views of wild beasts in the jungle." + +"Well, make it as soon as you can," begged Mr. Period. "I can +have the films early next Fall then, and they will be in season +for the Winter runs at the theatres. Now, I'm the busiest man in +the world, and I believe I have lost five hundred dollars by +coming here to-night. Still, I don't regret it. I'm going back +now, and I'll expect to hear from you when you are ready to +start. There's my address. Good-bye," and thrusting a card into +Tom's hand he hurried out of the room. + +"Won't you stop all night?" called Mr. Swift after him. + +"Sorry. I'd like to but can't. Got a big contract I must close +in New York to-morrow morning. I've ordered a special train to be +at the Shopton station in half an hour, and I must catch that. +Good night!" and Mr. Period hurried away. + +"Say, he's a hustler all right!" exclaimed Ned. + +"Yes, and I've got to hustle if I invent that camera," added +Tom. "It's got to be a specially fast one, and one that can take +pictures from a long distance. Electricity is the thing to use, I +guess." + +"Then you are really going off on this trip. Tom?" asked his +father, rather wistfully. + +"I'm afraid I am," replied his son. "I thought I could stay at +home for a while, but it seems not." + +"I was in hopes you could give me a little time to help me on +my gyroscope invention," went on the aged man. "But I suppose it +will keep until you come back. It is nearly finished." + +"Yes, and I don't like stopping work on my noiseless motor," +spoke Tom. "But that will have to wait, too." + +"Do you know where you are going?" inquired Ned. + +"Well, I'll have to do considerable traveling I suppose to get +all the films he wants. But once I'm started I'll like it I +guess. Of course you're coming, Ned." + +"I hope so." + +"Of course you are!" insisted Tom, as if that settled it. "And +I'm sure Mr. Damon will go also. I haven't seen him in some time. +I hope he isn't ill." + +Tom started work on his Wizard Camera, as he called it, the +next day--that is he began drawing the designs, and planning how +to construct it. Ned helped him, and Koku was on hand in case he +was needed, but there was little he could do, as yet. Tom made an +inspection of his shop the morning after the chicken thief scare, +but nothing seemed to have been disturbed. + +A week passed, and Tom had all the plans drawn for the camera. +He had made several experiments with different forms of +electricity for operating the mechanism, and had decided on a +small, but very powerful, storage battery to move the film, and +take the pictures. + +This storage battery, which would be inside the camera, would +operate it automatically. That is, the camera could be set up any +place, in the jungle, or on the desert, it could be left alone, +and would take pictures without any one being near it. Tom +planned to have it operate at a certain set time, and stop at a +certain time, and he could set the dials to make this time any +moment of the day or night. For there was to be a powerful light +in connection with the camera, in order that night views might be +taken. Besides being automatic the camera could be worked by +hand. + +When it was not necessary to have the camera operate by the +storage battery, it could be connected to wires and worked by an +ordinary set of batteries, or by a dynamo. This was for use on +the airship, where there was a big electrical machine. I shall +tell you more about the camera as the story proceeds. + +One afternoon Tom was alone in the shop, for he had sent Koku +on an errand, and Eradicate was off in a distant part of the +grounds, doing some whitewashing, which was his specialty. Ned +had not come over, and Mr. Swift, having gone to see some +friends, and Mrs. Baggert being at the store, Tom, at this +particular time, was rather isolated. + +He was conducting some delicate electrical experiments, and to +keep the measuring instruments steady he had closed all the +windows and doors of his shop. The young inventor was working at +a bench in one corner, and near him, standing upright, was a +heavy shaft of iron, part of his submarine, wrapped in burlap, +and padded, to keep it from rusting. + +"Now," said Tom to himself, as he mixed two kinds of acid in a +jar, to produce a new sort of electrical current, "I will see if +this is any better than the first way in which I did it." + +He was careful about pouring out the powerful stuff, but, in +spite of this, he spilled a drop on his finger. It burned like +fire, and, instinctively, he jerked his hand back. + +The next instant there was a series of happenings. Tom's elbow +came in contact with another jar of acid, knocking it over, and +spilling it into the retort where he had been mixing the first +two liquids. There was a hissing sound, as the acids combined, +and a thick, white vapor arose, puffing into Tom's face, and +making him gasp. + +He staggered back, brushed against the heavy iron shaft in the +corner, and it fell sideways against him, knocking him to the +floor, and dropping across his thighs. The padding on it saved +him from broken bones, but the shaft was so heavy, that after it +was on him, Tom could not move. He was held fast on the floor of +his shop, unable to use his legs, and prevented from getting up. + +For a moment Tom was stunned, and then he called: + +"Help! Help! Eradicate! Koku! Help!" + +He waited a moment, but there was only a silence. + +And then Tom smelled a strange odor--an odor of a choking gas +that seemed to smother him. + +"It's the acids!" he cried. "They're generating gas! And I'm +held fast here! The place is closed up tight, and I can't move! +Help! Help!" + +But there was no one at hand to aid Tom, and every moment the +fumes of the gas became stronger. Desperately the youth struggled +to rid himself of the weight of the shaft, but he could not. And +then he felt his senses leaving him, for the powerful gas was +making him unconscious. + + + + +CHAPTER V - TOM GETS A WARNING + + +"Bless my shoe buttons!" exclaimed a voice, as a man came +toward Tom's shop, a little later. "Bless my very necktie! This +is odd. I go to the house, and find no one there. I come out +here, and not a soul is about. Tom Swift can't have gone off on +another one of his wonderful trips, without sending me word. I +know he wouldn't do that. And yet, bless my watch and chain, I +can't find any one!" + +It was Mr. Damon who spoke, as my old readers have already +guessed. He peered into one of the shop windows, and saw +something like a fog filling the place. + +"That's strange," he went on. "I don't see Tom there, and yet +it looks as if an experiment was going on. I wonder--" + +Mr. Damon heard some one coming up behind him, and turned to +see Koku the giant, who was returning . from the errand on which +Tom had sent him. + +"Oh, Koku, it's you; is it?" the odd man asked. "Bless my cuff +buttons! Where is Tom?" + +"In shop I guess." + +"I don't see him. Still I had better look. There doesn't seem +to be any one about." + +Mr. Damon opened the shop door, and was met by such an outward +rush of choking gas that he staggered back. + +"Bless my--" he began but he had to stop, to cough and gasp. +"There must have been some sort of an accident," he cried, as he +got his lungs full of fresh air. "A bad accident! Tom could never +work in that atmosphere. Whew!" + +"Accident! What is matter?" cried Koku stepping to the doorway. +He, too choked and gasped, but his was such a strong and rugged +nature, and his lungs held such a supply of air, that it took +more than mere gas to knock him out. He peered in through the +wreaths of the acid vapor, and saw the body of his master, lying +on the floor--held down by the heavy iron. + +In another instant Koku had rushed in, holding his breath, for, +now that he was inside the place, the gas made even him feel +weak. + +"Come back! Come back!" cried Mr. Damon. 'You'll be smothered! +Wait until the gas escapes!" + +"Then Mr. Tom die!" cried the giant. "I get him--or I no come +out." + +With one heave of his powerful right arm, Koku lifted the heavy +shaft from Tom's legs. Then, gathering the lad up in his left +arm, as if he were a baby, Koku staggered out into the fresh air, +almost falling with his burden, as he neared Mr. Damon, for the +giant was, well-nigh overcome. + +"Bless my soul!" cried the odd man. "Is he--is he--" + +He did not finish the sentence, but, as Koku laid Tom down on +the overcoat of Mr. Damon, which the latter quickly spread on the +snow, the eccentric man put his hand over the heart of the young +inventor. + +"It beats!" he murmured. "He's alive, but very weak. We must +get a doctor at once. I'll do what I can. There's no time to +spare. Bless my--" + +But Mr. Damon concluded that there was no time for blessing +anything, and so he stopped short. + +"Carry him up to the house, Koku," he said. "I know where there +are some medicines, and I'll try to revive him while we're +waiting for the doctor Hurry!" + +Tom was laid on a lounge, and, just then, Mrs. Baggert came in. + +"Telephone for the doctor!" cried Mr. Damon to the housekeeper, +who kept her nerve, and did not get excited. "I'll give Tom some +ammonia, and other stimulants, and see if I can bring him around. +Koku, get me some cold water." + +The telephone was soon carrying the message to the doctor, who +promised to come at once. Koku, in spite of his size, was quick, +and soon brought the water, into which Mr. Damon put some strong +medicine, that he found in a closet. Tom's eyelids fluttered as +the others forced some liquid between his lips. + +"He's coming around!" cried the eccentric man. "I guess he'll +be all right, Koku." + +"Koku glad," said the giant simply, for he loved Tom with a +deep devotion. + +"Yes, Koku, if it hadn't been for you, though, I don't believe +that he would be alive. That was powerful gas, and a few seconds +more in there might have meant the end of Tom. I didn't see him +lying on the floor, until after you rushed in. Bless my +thermometer! It is very strange." + +They gave Tom more medicine, rubbed his arms and legs, and held +ammonia under his nose. Slowly he opened his eyes, and in a faint +voice asked: + +"Where--am--I?" + +"In your own house," replied Mr. Damon, cheerfully. "How do you +feel?" + +"I'm--all--right--now," said Tom slowly. He, felt his strength +coming gradually back, and he remembered what had happened, +though he did not yet know how he had been saved. The doctor came +in at this moment, with a small medical battery, which completed +the restorative work begun by the others. Soon Tom could sit up, +though he was still weak and rather sick. + +"Who brought me out?" he asked, when he had briefly told how +the accident occurred. + +"Koku did," replied Mr. Damon. "I guess none of the rest of us +could have lifted the iron shaft from your legs." + +"It's queer how that fell," said Tom, with a puzzled look on +his face. "I didn't hit it hard enough to bring it down. Beside, +I had it tied to nails, driven into the wall, to prevent just +such an accident as this. I must see about it when I get well." + +"Not for a couple of days," exclaimed the doctor grimly. +"You've got to stay in bed a while yet. You had a narrow escape, +Tom Swift." + +"Well, I'm glad I went to Giant Land," said the young inventor, +with a wan smile. "Otherwise I'd never have Koku," and he looked +affectionately at the big man, who laughed happily. In nature +Koku was much like a child. + +Mr. Swift came home a little later, and Ned Newton called, both +being very much surprised to hear of the accident. As for +Eradicate, the poor old colored man was much affected, and would +have sat beside Tom's bed all night, had they allowed him. + +Our hero recovered rapidly, once the fumes of the gas left his +system, and, two days later, he was able to go out to the shop +again. At his request everything had been left just as it was +after he had been brought out. Of course the fumes of the gas +were soon dissipated, when the door was opened, and the acids, +after mingling and giving off the vapor, had become neutralized, +so that they were now harmless. + +"Now I'm going to see what made that shaft fall," said Tom to +Ned, as the two chums walked over to the bench where the young +inventor had been working. "The tap I gave it never ought to have +brought it down." + +Together they examined the thin, but strong, cords that had +been passed around the shaft, having been fastened to two nails, +driven into the wall. + +"Look!" cried Tom, pointing to one of the cords. + +"What is it?" asked Ned. + +"The strands were partly cut through, so that only a little jar +was enough to break the remaining ones," went on Tom. "They've +been cut with a knife, too, and not frayed by vibration against +the nail, as might be the case. Ned, someone has been in my shop, +meddling, and he wanted this shaft to fall. This is a trick!" + +"Great Scott, Tom! You don't suppose any one wanted that shaft +to fall on you; do you?" + +"No, I don't believe that. Probably some one wanted to damage +the shaft, or he might have thought it would topple over against +the bench, and break some of my tools, instruments or machinery. +I do delicate experiments here, and it wouldn't take much of a +blow to spoil them. That's why those cords were cut." + +"Who did it? Do you think Andy Foger--" + +"No, I think it was the man Koku thought was a chicken thief, +and whom we chased the other night. I've got to be on my guard. I +wonder if--" + +Tom was interrupted by the appearance of Koku, who came out of +the shop with a letter the postman had just left. + +"I don't know that writing very well, and yet it looks +familiar," said Tom, as he tore open the missive. "Hello, here's +more trouble!" he exclaimed as he hastily read it. + +"What's up now?" asked Ned. + +"This is from Mr. Period, the picture man," went on the young +inventor. It's a warning." + +"A warning?" + +"Yes. He says: + + +"'Dear Tom. Be on your guard. I understand that a rival moving +picture concern is after you. They want to make you an offer, and +get you away from me. But I trust you. Don't have anything to do +with these other fellows. And, at the same time, don't give them +a hint as to our plans. Don't tell them anything about your new +camera. There is a lot of jealousy and rivalry in this business +and they are all after me. They'll probably come to see you, but +be on your guard. They know that I have been negotiating with +you. Remember the alarm the other night.'" + + + + +CHAPTER VI - TRYING THE CAMERA + + +"Well, what do you think of that?" cried Ned, as his chum +finished. + +"It certainly isn't very pleasant," replied Tom. "I wonder why +those chaps can't let me alone? Why don't they invent cameras of +their own? Why are they always trying to get my secret +inventions?" + +"I suppose they can't do things for themselves," answered Ned. +"And then, again, your machinery always works, Tom, and some that +your rivals make, doesn't." + +"Well, maybe that's it," admitted our hero, as he put away the +letter. "I will be on the watch, just as I have been before. I've +got the burglar alarm wires adjusted on the shop now, and when +these rival moving picture men come after me they'll get a short +answer." + +For several days nothing happened, and Tom and Ned worked hard +on the Wizard Camera. It was nearing completion, and they were +planning, soon, to give it a test, when, one afternoon, two +strangers, in a powerful automobile, came to the Swift homestead. +They inquired for Tom, and, as he was out in the shop, with Ned +and Koku, and as he often received visitors out there, Mrs. +Baggert sent out the two men, who left their car in front of the +house. + +As usual, Tom had the inner door to his shop locked, and when +Koku brought in a message that two strangers would like to see +the young inventor, Tom remarked: + +"I guess it's the rival picture men, Ned. We'll see what they +have to say." + +"Which of you is Tom Swift?" asked the elder of the two men, as +Tom and Ned entered the front office, for our hero knew better +than to admit the strangers to the shop. + +"I am," replied Tom. + +"Well, we're men of business," went on the speaker, "and there +is no use beating about the bush. I am Mr. Wilson Turbot, and +this is my partner, Mr. William Eckert. We are in the business of +making moving picture films, and I understand that you are +associated with Mr. Period in this line. 'Spotty' we call him." + +"Yes, I am doing some work for Mr. Period," admitted Tom, +cautiously. + +"Have you done any yet?" + +"No, but I expect to." + +"What kind of a camera are you going to use?" asked Mr. Eckert +eagerly. + +"I must decline to answer that," replied Tom, a bit stiffly. + +"Oh, that's all right," spoke Mr. Turbot, good naturedly. "Only +'Spotty' was bragging that you were making a new kind of film for +him, and we wondered if it was on the market." + +"We are always looking for improvements," added Mr. Eckert. + +"This camera isn't on the market," replied Tom, on his guard as +to how he answered. + +The two men whispered together for a moment, and then Mr. +Turbot said: + +"Well, as I remarked, we're men of business, and there's no use +beating about the bush. We've heard of you, Tom Swift, and we +know you can do things. Usually, in this world, every man has his +price, and we're willing to pay big to get what we want. I don't +know what offer Mr. Period made to you, but I'll say this: We'll +give you double what he offered, for the exclusive rights to your +camera, whenever it's on the market, and we'll pay you a handsome +salary to work for us." + +"I'm sorry, but I can't consider the offer," replied Tom +firmly. "I have given my word to Mr. Period. I have a contract +with him, and I cannot break it." + +"Offer him three times what Period did," said Mr. Eckert, in a +hoarse whisper that Tom heard. + +"It would be useless!" exclaimed our hero. "I wouldn't go back +on my word for a hundred times the price I am to get. I am not in +this business so much for the money, as I am for the pleasure of +it." + +The men were silent a moment. There were ugly looks on their +faces. They looked sharply at Tom and Ned. Then Mr. Eckert said: + +"You'll regret this, Tom Swift. We are the biggest firm of +moving picture promoters in the world. We always get what we +want." + +"You won't get my camera," replied Tom calmly. + +"I don't know about that!" exclaimed Mr. Turbot, as he made a +hasty stride toward Tom, who stood in front of the door leading +to the shop--the shop where his camera, almost ready for use, was +on a bench. "I guess if we--" + +"Koku!" suddenly called Tom. + +The giant stepped into the front office. He had been standing +near the door, inside the main shop. Mr. Turbot who had stretched +forth his hand, as though to seize Tom, and his companion, who +had advanced toward Ned, fairly jumped back in fright at the +sight of the big man. + +"Koku," went on Tom, in even tones, "just show these gentlemen +to the front door--and lock it after them," he added +significantly, as he turned back into the shop, followed by Ned. + +"Yes, Mr. Tom," answered the giant, and then, with his big +hand, and brawny fist, he gently turned the two men toward the +outer door. They were gasping in surprise as they looked at the +giant. + +"You'll be sorry for this, Tom Swift!" exclaimed Mr. Turbot. +"You'll regret not having taken our offer. This Period chat is +only a small dealer. We can do better by you. You'll regret--" + +"You'll regret coming here again," snapped Tom, as he closed +the door of his shop, leaving Koku to escort the baffled plotters +to their auto. Shortly afterward Tom and Ned heard the car +puffing away. + +"Well, they came, just as Mr. Period said they would," spoke +Tom, slowly. + +"Yes, and they went away again!" exclaimed Ned with a laugh. +"They had their trip for nothing. Say, did you see how they +stared at Koku?" + +"Yes, he's a helper worth having, in cases like these." + +Tom wrote a full account of what had happened and sent it to +Mr. Period. He received in reply a few words, thanking him for +his loyalty, and again warning him to be on his guard. + +In the meanwhile, work went on rapidly on the Wizard Camera. +Briefly described it was a small square box, with a lens +projecting from it. Inside, however, was complicated machinery, +much too complicated for me to describe. Tom Swift had put in his +best work on this wonderful machine. As I have said, it could be +worked by a storage battery, by ordinary electric current from a +dynamo, or by hand. On top was a new kind of electric light. This +was small and compact, but it threw out powerful beams. With the +automatic arrangement set, and the light turned on, the camera +could be left at a certain place after dark, and whatever went on +in front of it would be reproduced on the moving roll of film +inside. + +In the morning the film could be taken out, developed, and the +pictures thrown on a screen in the usual way, familiar to all who +have been in a moving picture theatre. With the reproducing +machines Tom had nothing to do, as they were already perfected. +His task had been to make the new-style camera, and it was nearly +completed. + +A number of rolls of films could be packed into the camera, and +they could be taken out, or inserted, in daylight. Of course +after one film had been made, showing any particular scene any +number of films could be made from this "master" one. Just as is +done with the ordinary moving picture camera. Tom had an +attachment to show when one roll was used, and when another +needed inserting. + +For some time after the visit of the rival moving picture men, +Tom was on his guard. Both house and shop were fitted with +burglar alarms, but they did not ring. Eradicate and Koku were +told to be on watch, but there was nothing for them to do. + +"Well," remarked Tom to Ned, one afternoon, when they had both +worked hard, "I think it's about finished. Of course it needs +polishing, and there may be some adjusting to do, but my camera +is now ready to take pictures--at least I'm going to give it a +test." + +"Have you the rolls of films?" + +"Yes, half a dozen of 'em And I'm going to try the hardest test +first." + +"Which one is that?" + +"The night test. I'm going to place the camera out in the yard, +facing my shop. Then you and I, and some of the others, will go +out, pass in front of it, do various stunts, and, in the morning +we'll develop the films and see what we have." + +"Why, are you going to leave the camera out, all night?" + +"Sure. I'm going to give it the hardest kind of a test." + +"But are you and I going to stay up all night to do stunts in +front of it?" + +"No, indeed. I'm going to let it take what ever pictures happen +to come along to be taken after we get through making some +special early ones. You see my camera will be a sort of watch +dog, only of course it won't catch any one--that is, only their +images will be caught on the film. + +"Oh, I see," exclaimed Ned, and then he helped Tom fix the +machine for the test. + + + + +CHAPTER VII - WHAT THE CAMERA CAUGHT + + +"Well, is she working, Tom?" asked our hero's chum, a little +later, when they had set the camera up on a box in the garden. It +pointed toward the main shop door, and from the machine came a +clicking sound. The electric light was glowing. + +"Yes, it's all ready," replied Tom. "Now just act as if it +wasn't there. You walk toward the shop. Do anything you please. +Pretend you are coming in to see me on business. Act as if it was +daytime. I'll stand here and receive you. Later, I'll get dad out +here, Koku and Eradicate. I wish Mr. Period was here to see the +test, but perhaps it's just as well for me to make sure it works +before be sees it." + +"All right, Tom, here I come." + +Ned advanced toward the shop. He tried to act as though the +camera was not taking pictures of him, at the rate of several a +second, but he forgot himself, and turned to look at the staring +lens. Then Tom, with a laugh, advanced to meet him, shaking hands +with him. Then the lads indulged in a little skylarking. They +threw snowballs at each other, taking care, however to keep +within range of the lens. Of course when Tom worked the camera +himself, he could point it wherever he wanted to, but it was now +automatic. + +Then the lads went to the shop, and came out again. They did +several other things. Later Koku, and Eradicate did some +"stunts," as Tom called them. Mr. Swift, too, was snapped, but +Mrs. Baggert refused to come out. + +"Well, I guess that will do for now," said Tom, as he stopped +the mechanism. "I've just thought of something," he added. "If I +leave the light burning, it will scare away, before they got in +front of the lens, any one who might come along. I'll have to +change that part of it." + +"How can you fix it?" asked Ned. + +"Easily. I'll rig up some flash lights, just ordinary +photographing flashlights, you know. I'll time them to go off one +after the other, and connect them with an electric wire to the +door of my shop." + +"Then your idea is--" began Ned. + +"That some rascals may try to enter my shop at night. Not this +particular night, but any night. If they come to-night we'll be +ready for them." + +"An' can't yo'-all take a picture ob de chicken coop?" asked +Eradicate. "Dat feller may come back t' rob mah hens." + +"With the lens pointing toward the shop," spoke Tom, "it will +also take snap shots of any one who tries to enter the coop. So, +if the chicken thief does come, Rad, we'll have a picture of +him." + +Tom and Ned soon had the flashlights in place, and then they +went to bed, listening, at times, for the puff that would +indicate that the camera was working. But the night passed +without incident, rather to Tom's disappointment. However, in the +morning, he developed the film of the first pictures taken in the +evening. Soon they were dry enough to be used in the moving +picture machine, which Tom had bought, and set up in a dark room. + +"There we are!" he cried, as the first images were thrown on +the white screen. "As natural as life, Ned! My camera works all +right!" + +"That's so. Look! There's where I hit you with a snowball!" +cried his chum, as the skylarking scene was reached. + +"Mah goodness!" cried Eradicate, when he saw himself walking +about on the screen, as large as life. "Dat shorely am +wonderful." + +"It is spirits!" cried Koku, as he saw himself depicted. + +"I wish we had some of the other pictures to show," spoke Tom. +"I mean some unexpected midnight visitors." + +For several nights in succession the camera was set to "snap" +any one who might try to enter the shop. The flashlights were +also in place. Tom and Ned, the latter staying at his chum's +house that week, were beginning to think they would have their +trouble for their pains. But one night something happened. + +It was very dark, but the snow on the ground made a sort of +glow that relieved the blackness. The camera had been set as +usual, and Tom and Ned went to bed. + +It must have been about midnight when they were both awakened +by hearing the burglar alarm go off. At the same time there were +several flashes of fire from the garden. + +"There she goes!" cried Ned. + +"Yes, they're trying to get into the shed," added Tom, as a +glance at the burglar-alarm indicator on the wall of the room, +showed that the shop door was being tried. "Come on!" + +"I'm with you!" yelled Ned. + +They lost little time getting into their clothes, for they had +laid them out in readiness for putting on quickly. Down the +stairs they raced, but ere they reached the garden they heard +footsteps running along the wall toward the road. + +"Who's there?" cried Tom, but there was no answer. + +"Koku! Eradicate!" yelled Ned. + +"Yais, sah, I'se comm'!" answered the colored man, and the +voice of the giant was also heard. The flashlights had ceased +popping before this, and when the two lads and their helpers had +reached the shop, there was no one in sight. + +"The camera's there all right!" cried Tom in relief as he +picked it up from the box. "Now to see what it caught. Did you +see anything of the fellows, Koku, or Eradicate?" Both said they +had not, but Eradicate, after examining the chicken house door by +the aid of a lighted match, cried out: + +"Somebody's been tryin' t' git in heah, Massa Tom. I kin see +where de do's been scratched." + +"Well, maybe we'll have the picture for you to look at in the +morning," said Tom. + +The films were developed in the usual way in the morning, but +the pictures were so small that Tom could not make out the +features or forms of the men. And it was plain that at least +three men had been around the coop and shop. + +By the use of alcohol and an electric fan Tom soon had the +films dry enough to use. Then the moving picture machine was set +up in a dark room, and all gathered to see what would be thrown +on the screen, greatly enlarged. + +First came several brilliant flashes of light, and then, as the +entrance to the shop loomed into view, a dark figure seemed to +walk across the canvas. But it did not stop at the shop door. +Instead it went to the chicken coop, and, as the man reached that +door, he began working to get it open. Of course it had all taken +place in a few seconds, for, as soon as the flashlights went off, +the intruders had run away. But they had been there long enough +to have their pictures taken. + +The man at the chicken coop turned around as the lights +flashed, and he was looking squarely at the camera. Of course +this made his face very plain to the audience, as Tom turned the +crank of the reproducing machine. + +"Why, it's a colored man!" cried Ned in surprise. + +"Yes, I guess it's only an ordinary chicken thief, after all," +remarked Tom. + +There was a gasp from Eradicate. + +"Fo' de land sakes!" he cried. "De raskil! Ef dat ain't mah own +second cousin, what libs down by de ribber! An' to t'ink dat +Samuel 'Rastus Washington Jackson Johnson, mah own second cousin, +should try t' rob mah chicken coop! Oh, won't I gib it t' him!" + +"Are you sure, Rad?" asked Tom. + +"Suah? Sartin I'se suah, Massa Tom," was the answer as the +startled colored man on the screen stared at the small audience. +"I'd know. dat face ob his'n anywhere." + +"Well, I guess he's the only one we caught last night," said +Tom, as the disappointed chicken thief ran away, and so out of +focus But the next instant there came another series of +flashlight explosions on the screen, and there, almost as plainly +as if our friends were looking at them, they saw two men +stealthily approaching the shop. They, too, as the chicken thief +had done, tried the door, and then, they also, startled by the +flashes, turned around. + +"Look!" cried Ned. + +"Great Scott !" exclaimed Tom. "Those are the two rivals of Mr. +Period! They are Mr. Turbot and Mr. Eckert!" + +"Same men I pushed out!" cried Koku, much excited. + +There was no doubt of it, and, as the images faded from the +screen, caused by the men running away, Tom and Ned realized that +their rivals had tried to put their threat into execution--the +threat of making Tom wish he had taken their offer. + +"I guess they came to take my camera,--but, instead the camera +took them," said the young inventor grimly. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII - PHOTOS FROM THE AIRSHIP + + +"Well, Tom, how is it going?" asked a voice at the door of the +shop where the young inventor was working. He looked up quickly +to behold Mr. Nestor, father of Mary, in which young lady, as I +have said, Tom was much interested. "How is the moving picture +camera coming on?" + +"Pretty good, Mr. Nestor. Come in. I guess Koku knew you all +right. I told him to let in any of my friends, but I have to keep +him there on guard." + +"So I understand. They nearly got in the other night, but I +hear that your camera caught them." + +"Yes, that proved that the machine is a success, even if we +didn't succeed in arresting the men." + +"Did you try?" + +"Yes, I sent copies of the film, showing Turbot and Eckert +trying to break into my shop, to Mr. Period, and he had enlarged +photographs made, and went to the police. They said it was rather +flimsy evidence on which to arrest anybody, and so they didn't +act. However, we sent copies of the pictures to Turbot and Eckert +themselves, so they know that we know they were here, and I guess +they'll steer clear of me after this." + +"I guess so, Tom," agreed Mr. Nestor with a laugh. "But what +about the chicken thief?" + +"Oh, Eradicate attended to his second cousin. He went to see +him, showed him a print from the film, and gave him to understand +that he'd be blown up with dynamite, or kicked by Boomerang, if +he ever came around here again, and so Samuel 'Rastus Washington +Jackson Johnson will be careful about visiting strange chicken +coops, after this." + +"I believe you, Tom. But how is the camera coming on?" + +"Very well. I am making a few changes in it, and I expect to +get my biggest airship in readiness for the trip in about a week, +and then I'll try taking pictures from her. But I understand that +you are interested in Mr. Period's business, Mr. Nestor?" + +"Yes, I own some stock in the company, and, Tom, that's what I +came over to see you about. I need a vacation. Mary and her +mother are going away this Spring for a long visit, and I was +wondering if you couldn't take me with you on the trips you will +make to get moving pictures for our concern." + +"Of. course I can, Mr. Nestor. "I'll be glad to do it." + +"And there is another thing, Tom," went on Mr. Nestor, soberly. +"I've got a good deal of my fortune tied up in this moving +picture affair. I want to see you win out--I don't want our +rivals to get ahead of us." + +"They shan't get ahead of us." + +"You see, Tom, it's this way. There is a bitter fight on +between our concern and that controlled by our rivals. Each is +trying to get the business of a large chain of moving picture +theatres throughout the United States. These theatre men are +watching us both, and the contracts for next season will go to +the concern showing the best line of films. If our rivals get +ahead of us--well, it will just about ruin our company,--and +about ruin me too, I guess." + +"I shall do my very best," answered our hero. + +"Is Mr. Damon going along?" + +"Well, I have just written to ask him. I sent the letter +yesterday. + +"Doesn't he know what you contemplate?" + +"Not exactly. You see when he came, that time I was overcome by +the fumes from the acids, everything was so upset that I didn't +get a chance to tell him. He's been away on business ever since, +but returned yesterday. I certainly hope that he goes with us. +Ned Newton is coming, and with you, and Koku and myself, it will +be a nicer party." + +"Then you are going to take Koku?" + +"I think I will. I'm a little worried about what these rival +moving picture men might do, and if I get into trouble with them, +my giant helper would come in very useful, to pick one up and +throw him over a tree top, for instance." + +"Indeed, yes," agreed Mr. Nestor, with a laugh. "But I hope +nothing like that happens." + +"Nothing like that happens?" suddenly asked a voice. "Bless my +bookcase! but there always seems to be something going on here. +What's up now, Tom Swift?" + +"Nothing much, Mr. Damon," replied our hero, as he recognized +his odd friend. "We were just talking about moving pictures, Mr. +Damon, and about you. Did you get my letter?" + +"I did, Tom." + +"And are you going with us?" + +"Tom, did you ever know me to refuse an invitation from you? I +guess not! Of course I'm going. But, for mercy sakes, don't tell +my wife! She mustn't know about it until the last minute, and +then she'll be so surprised, when I tell her, that she won't +think of objecting. Don't let her know." + +Tom laughed, and promised, and then the three began talking of +the prospective trip. After a bit Ned Newton joined the party. + +Tom showed the two men how his new camera worked. He had made +several improvements on it since the first pictures were taken, +and now it was almost perfect. Mr. Period had been out to see it +work, and said it was just the apparatus needed. + +"You can get films with that machine," he said, "that will be +better than any pictures ever thrown on a screen. My fortune will +be made, Tom, and yours too, if you can only get pictures that +are out of the ordinary. There will be some hair-raising work, I +expect, but you can do it." + +"I'll try," spoke Tom. "I have--" + +"Hold on! I know what you are going to say," interrupted Mr. +Period. "You are going to say that you've gone through some +strenuous times already. I know you have, but you're going to +have more soon. I think I'll send you to India first." + +"To India!" exclaimed Tom, for Mr. Period had spoken of that as +if it was but a journey downtown. + +"Yes, India. I want a picture of an elephant drive, and if you +can get pictures of the big beasts in a stampede, so much the +better. Then, too, the Durbar is on now, and that will make a +good film. How soon can you start for Calcutta?" + +"Well, I've got to overhaul the airship," said Tom. "That will +take about three weeks. The camera is practically finished. I can +leave in a month, I guess." + +"Good. We'll have fine weather by that time. Are you going all +the way by your airship?" + +"No, I think it will be best to take that apart, ship it by +steamer, and go that way ourselves. I can put the airship +together in India, and then use it to get to any other part of +Europe, Asia or Africa you happen to want pictures from." + +"Good! Well, get to work now, and I'll see you again." + +In the days that followed, Tom and Ned were kept busy. There +was considerable to do on the airship, in the way of overhauling +it. This craft was Tom's largest, and was almost like the one in +which he had gone to the caves of ice, where it was wrecked. It +had been, however, much improved. + +The craft was a sort of combined dirigible balloon, and +aeroplane, and could be used as either. There was a machine on +board for generating gas, to use in the balloon part of it, and +the ship, which was named the Flyer, could carry several persons. + +"Bless my shoe laces!" cried Mr. Damon one day as he looked at +Koku. "If we take him along in the airship, will we be able to +float, Tom?" + +"Oh, yes. The airship is plenty big enough. Besides, we are not +going to take along a very large party, and the camera is not +heavy. Oh, we'll be all right. I suppose you'll be on hand to- +morrow, Mr. Damon?" + +"To-morrow? What for?" + +"We're going to take the picture machine up in the airship, and +get some photos from the sky. I expect to make some films from +high in the air, as well as some in the regular way, on the +ground, and I want a little practice. Come around about two +o'clock, and we'll have a trial flight." + +"All right. I will. But don't let my wife know I'm going up in +an airship again. She's read of so many accidents lately, that +she's nervous about having me take a trip." + +"Oh, I won't tell," promised Tom with a laugh, and he worked +away harder than ever, for there were many little details to +perfect. The weather was now getting warm, as there was an early +spring, and it was pleasant out of doors. + +The moving picture camera was gotten in readiness. Extra rolls +of films were on hand, and the big airship, in which they were to +go up, for their first test of taking pictures from high in the +air, had been wheeled out of the shed. + +"Are you going up very far?" asked Mr. Nestor of Tom, and the +young inventor thought that Mary's father was a trifle nervous. +He had not made many flights, and then only a little way above +the ground, with Tom. + +"Not very high," replied our hero. "You see I want to get +pictures that will be large, and if I'm too far away I can't do +it." + +"Glad to hear it, replied Mr. Nestor, with a note of relief in +his voice. "Though I suppose to fall a thousand feet isn't much +different from falling a hundred when you consider the results." + +"Not much," admitted Tom frankly. + +"Bless my feather bed!" cried Mr. Damon. "Please don't talk of +falling, when we're going up in an airship. It makes me nervous." + +"We'll not fall!" declared Tom confidently. + +Mr. Period sent his regrets, that he could not be present at +the trial, stating in his letter that he was the busiest man in +the world, and that his time was worth about a dollar a minute +just at present. He, however, wished Tom all success. Tom's first +effort was to sail along, with the lens of the camera pointed +straight toward the earth. He would thus get, if successful, a +picture that, when thrown on the screen, would give the +spectators the idea that they were looking down from a moving +balloon. For that reason Tom was not going to fly very high, as +he wanted to get all the details possible. + +"All aboard!" cried the young inventor, when he had seen to it +that his airship was in readiness for a flight. The camera had +been put aboard, and the lens pointed toward earth through a hole +in the main cabin floor. All who were expected to make the trip +with Tom were on hand, Koku taking the place of Eradicate this +time, as the colored man was too aged and feeble to go along. + +"All ready?" asked Ned, who stood in the steering tower, with +his hand on the starting lever, while Tom was at the camera to +see that it worked properly. + +"All ready," answered the young inventor, and, an instant +later, they shot upward, as the big propellers whizzed around. + +Tom at once started the camera to taking pictures rapidly, as +he wanted the future audience to get a perfect idea of how it +looked to go up in a balloon, leaving the earth behind. Then as +the Flyer moved swiftly over woods and fields, Tom moved the lens +from side to side, to get different views. + +"Say! This is great!" cried Mr. Nestor, to whom air-riding was +much of a novelty. "Are you getting good pictures, Tom?" + +"I can't tell until we develop them. But the machine seems to +be working all right. I'm going to sail back now, and get some +views of our own house from up above." + +They had sailed around the town of Shopton, to the neighboring +villages, over woods and fields. Now they were approaching +Shopton again. + +"Bless my heart!" suddenly exclaimed Mr. Damon, who was looking +toward the earth, as they neared Tom's house. + +"What is it?" asked our hero, glancing up from the picture +machine, the registering dial of which he was examining. + +"Look there! At your shop, Tom! There seems to be a lot of +smoke coming from it!" + +They were almost over Tom's shop now, and, as Mr. Damon had +said, there was considerable smoke rolling above it. + +"I guess Eradicate is burning up papers and trash," was Ned's +opinion. + +Tom looked to where the camera pointed, he was right over his +shop now, and could see a dense vapor issuing from the door. + +That isn't Eradicate!" cried the young inventor. "My shop is on +fire! I've got to make a quick drop, and save it! There are a lot +of valuable models, and machines in there! Send us down, Ned, as +fast as she'll go!" + + + + +CHAPTER IX - OFF FOR INDIA + + +"Bless my hose reel!" cried Mr. Damon, as the airship took a +quick lurch toward the earth. "Things are always happening to you, Tom Swift! Your shop on fire! How +did it happen?" + +"Look!" suddenly cried Ned, before Tom had a chance to answer. +"There's a man running away from the shop, Tom!" + +All saw him, and, as the airship rushed downward it could be +seen that he was a fellow dressed in ragged garments, a veritable +tramp. + +"I guess that fire didn't happen," said Tom significantly. "It +was deliberately set. Oh, if we can only get there before it +gains too much headway!" + +"I like to catch that fellow!" exclaimed Koku, shaking his big +fist at the retreating tramp. "I fix him!" + +On rushed the airship, and the man who had probably started the +fire, glanced up at it. Tom suddenly turned the lens of his +Wizard Camera toward him. The mechanism inside, which had been +stopped, started clicking again, as the young inventor switched +on the electric current. + +"What are you doing?" cried Ned, as he guided the airship +toward the shop, whence clouds of smoke were rolling. + +"Taking his picture," replied Tom. "It may come in useful for +evidence." + +But he was not able to get many views of the fellow, for the +latter must have suspected what was going on. He quickly made a +dive for the bushes, and was soon lost to sight. Tom shut off his +camera. + +"Bless my life preserver!" cried Mr. Damon. "There comes your +father, Tom, and Mrs. Baggert! They've got buckets! They're going +to put out the fire!" + +"Why don't they think to use the hose?" cried the young +inventor, for he had his shop equipped With many hose lines, and +an electrically driven pump. The hose! The hose, dad!" shouted +Tom, but it is doubtful if his father or Mrs. Baggert heard him, +for the engine of the airship was making much noise. However, the +two with the buckets looked up, and waved their hands to those on +the Flyer. + +"There's Eradicate!" yelled Ned. "He's got the hose all right!" +The colored man was beginning to unreel a line. + +"That's what it needs!" exclaimed Tom. "Now there's some chance +to save the shop." + +"We'll be there ourselves to take a hand in a few seconds!" +cried Mr. Damon, forgetting to bless anything. + +"The scoundrel who started this fire, and those back of him, +ought to be imprisoned for life!" declared Mr. Nestor. + +A moment later Ned had landed the airship within a short +distance of the shop. In an instant the occupants of the craft +had leaped out, and Tom, after a hasty glance to see that his +valuable camera was safe, dashed toward the building crying: + +"Never mind the pails, dad! Use the hose! there's a nozzle at +the back door. Go around there, and play the water on from that +end." + +Eradicate, with his line of hose, had disappeared into the shop +through the front door, and the others pressed in after him, +heedless of the dense smoke. + +"Is it blazing much, Rad?" cried Tom. + +"Can't see no blaze at all, Mass a Tom," replied the colored +man. "Dere's a heap of suffin in de middle ob de flo', an' dat's +what's raisin' all de rumpus." + +They all saw it a moment later, a smoldering heap of rags and +paper on the concrete floor of the shop. Eradicate turned his +hose on it, there was a hissing sound, a cloud of steam arose, +and the fire was practically out, though much smoke remained. + +"Jove! that was a lucky escape!" exclaimed Tom, as he looked +around when the vapor had partly cleared away. "No damage done at +all, as far as I can see. I wonder what the game was? Did you see +anything of a tramp around here?" he asked of his father. + +"No, Tom. I have been busy in the house. So has Mrs. Baggert. +Suddenly she called my attention to the smoke coming from the +door, and we ran out." + +"I seen it, too," added Eradicate. "I was doin' some +whitewashin', an' I run up as soon as I could." + +"We saw the tramp all right, but he got away," said Tom, and he +told how he had taken pictures of him. "I don't believe it would +be much use to look for him now, though." + +"Me look," spoke Koku significantly, as he hurried off in the +direction taken by the tramp. He came back later, not having +found him. + +"What do you think of it, Tom?" asked Ned, when the excitement +had calmed down, and the pile of burned rags had been removed. It +was found that oil and chemicals had been put on them to cause a +dense smoke. + +"I think it was the work of those fellows who are after my +camera," replied the young inventor. "They are evidently watching +me, and when they saw us all go off in the airship they thought +probably that the coast was clear." + +"But why should they start a fire?" + +"I don't know, but probably to create a lot of smoke, and +excitement, so that they could search, and not be detected. Maybe +the fellow after he found that the camera was gone, wanted to +draw those in the house out to the shop, so he could have a clear +field to search in my room for any drawings that would give him a +dew as to how my machine works. They certainly did not want to +burn the shop, for that pile of rags could have smoldered all +day on the concrete floor, without doing any harm. Robbery was +the motive, I think." + +"The police ought to be notified," declared Mr. Nestor. +"Develop those pictures, Tom, and I'll take the matter up with +the police. Maybe they can identify the tramp from the +photographs." + +But this proved impossible. Tom had secured several good films, +not only in the first views he took, giving the spectators the +impression that they were going up in an airship, but also those +showing the shop on fire, and the tramp running away, were very +plain. + +The police made a search for the incendiary, but of course did +not find him. Mr. Period came to Shopton, and declared it was his +belief that his rivals, Turbot and Eckert, had had a hand in the +matter. But it was only a suspicion, though Tom himself believed +the same thing. Still nothing could be accomplished. + +"The thing to do, now that the camera works all right, is for +you to hit the trail for India at once," suggested the picture +man. "They won't follow you there. Get me some pictures of the +Durbar, of elephants being captured, of tiger fights, anything +exciting." + +"I'll do my--" began Tom. + +"Wait, I'm not through," interrupted the excitable man. "Then +go get some volcanoes, earthquakes--anything that you think would +be interesting. I'll keep in touch with you, and cable +occasionally. Get all the films you can. When will you start?" + +"I can leave inside of two weeks," replied Tom. + +"Then do it, and, meanwhile, be on your guard." + +It was found that a few changes were needed on the camera. And +some adjustments to the airship. Another trial flight was made, +and some excellent pictures taken. Then Tom and his friends +prepared to take the airship apart. and pack it for shipment to +Calcutta. It was to go on the same steamer as themselves, and of +course the Wizard Camera would accompany Tom. He took along many +rolls of films, enough, he thought, for many views. He was also +to send back to Mr. Period from time to time, the exposed rolls +of film, so they could be developed, and printed in the United +States, as Tom would not have very good facilities for this on +the airship, and to reproduce them there was almost out of the +question. Still he did fit up a small dark room aboard the Flyer, +where he could develop pictures if he wished. + +There was much to be done, but hard work accomplished it, and +finally the party was ready to start for India. Tom said good-bye +to Mary Nestor, of course, and her father accompanied our hero +from the Nestor house to the Swift homestead, where the start was +to take place. + +Eradicate bade his master a tearful good-bye, and there was +moisture in the eyes of Mr. Swift, as he shook hands with his +son. + +"Take care of yourself, Tom," he said. "Don't run too many +risks. This moving picture taking isn't as easy as it sounds. +It's more than just pointing your camera at things. Write if you +get a chance, or send me a message." + +Tom promised, and then bade farewell to Mrs. Baggert. All were +assembled, Koku, Mr. Damon, who blessed everything he saw, and +some things he did not, Ned, Mr. Nestor and Tom. The five were to +go by train to New York, there to go aboard the steamer. + +Their journey to the metropolis was uneventful. Mr. Period met +them at the steamship dock, after Tom had seen to it that the +baggage, and the parts of the airship were safely aboard. + +"I wish I were going along!" exclaimed the picture man. "It's +going to be a great trip. But I can't spare the time. I'm the +busiest man in the world. I lose about a thousand dollars just +coming down to see you off, but it's a good investment. I don't +mind it. Now, Tom, good luck, and don't forget, I want exciting +views." + +"I'll try--" began our here,. + +"Wait, I know what you're going to say!" interrupted Mr. +Period. "You'll do it, of course. Well, I must be going. I will-- +Great Scott!" and Mr. Period interrupted himself. "He has the +nerve to come here!" + +"Who?" asked Tom. + +"Wilson Turbot, the rascal! He's trying to balk me at the last +minute, I believe. I'm going to see what he means!" and with +this, the excited Mr. Period rushed down the gangplank, toward +the man at whom he had pointed--one of the men who had tried to +buy Tom's picture taking camera. + +A moment later the steamer's whistle blew, the last belated +passenger rushed up the gangplank, it was drawn in, and the +vessel began to move away from the dock. Tom and his friends were +on their way to India, and the last glimpse they had of Mr. +Period was as he was chasing along the pier, after Mr. Turbot. + + + + +CHAPTER X - UNEXPECTED EXCITEMENT + + +"Well, what do you know about that, Tom?" asked Ned, as they +stood on deck watching the chase. "Isn't he the greatest ever-- +Mr. Period, I mean?" + +"He certainly is. I'd like to see what happens when he catches +that Turbot chap." + +"Bless my pocket handkerchief!" cried Mr. Damon. "I don't +believe he will. Mr. Period's legs aren't long enough for fast +running." + +"Those scoundrels were after us, up to the last minute," spoke +Mr. Nestor, as the ship moved farther out from the dock. Tom and +his friends could no longer see the excitable picture man after +his rival, but there was a commotion in the crowd, and it seemed +as if he had caught the fellow. + +"Well, we're free of him now," spoke the young inventor, with a +breath of relief. "That is, unless they have set some one else on +our trail," and he looked carefully at the passengers near him, +to detect, if possible, any who might look like spies in the pay +of the rival moving picture concern, or any suspicious characters +who might try to steal the valuable camera, that was now safely +locked in Tom's cabin. Our hero, however, saw no one to worry +about. He resolved to remain on his guard. + +Friends and relatives were waving farewells to one another, and +the band was playing, as the big vessel drew out into the North, +or Hudson, river, and steamed for the open sea. + +Little of interest marked the first week of the voyage. All +save Koku had done much traveling before, and it was no novelty +to them. The giant, however, was amused and delighted with +everything, even the most commonplace things he saw. He was a +source of wonder to all the other passengers, and, in a way, he +furnished much excitement. + +One day several of the sailors were on deck, shifting one of +the heavy anchors. They went about it in their usual way, all +taking hold, and "heaving" together with a "chanty," or song, to +enliven their work. But they did not make much progress, and one +of the mates got rather excited about it. + +"Here, shiver my timbers!" he cried. "Lively now! Lay about +you, and get that over to the side!" + +"Yo! Heave! Ho!" called the leader of the sailor gang. + +The anchor did not move, for it had either caught on some +projection, or the men were not using their strength. + +"Lively! Lively!" cried the mate. + +Suddenly Koku, who was in the crowd of passengers watching the +work, pushed his way to where the anchor lay. With a powerful, +but not rough action, he shoved the sailors aside. Then, stooping +over, he took a firm grip of the big piece of iron, planted his +feet well apart on the deck, and lifted the immense mass in his +arms. There was a round of applause from the group of passengers. + +"Where you want him?" Koku calmly asked of the mate, as he +stood holding the anchor. + +"Blast my marlin spikes!" cried the mate. "I never see the like +of this afore! Put her over there, shipmate. If I had you on a +voyage or two you'd be running the ship, instead of letting the +screw push her along. Put her over there," and he indicated where +he wanted the anchor. + +Koku calmly walked along the deck, laid the anchor down as if +it was an ordinary weight, and passed over to where Tom stood +looking on in amused silence. There were murmurs of surprise from +the passengers at the giant's strength, and the sailors went +forward much abashed. + +"Say, I'd give a good bit to have a bodyguard like that," +exclaimed a well-known millionaire passenger, who, it was +reported, was in constant fear of attacks, though they had never +taken place. "I wonder if I could get him." + +He spoke to Tom about it, but our hero would not listen to a +proposition to part with Koku. Besides, it is doubtful if the +simple giant would leave the lad who had brought him away from +his South American home. But, if Koku was wonderfully strong, +and, seemingly afraid of nothing, there were certain things he +feared. + +One afternoon, for the amusement of the passengers, a net was +put overboard, sunk to a considerable depth, and hauled up with a +number of fishes in it. Some of the finny specimens were good for +eating, and others were freaks, strange and curious. + +Koku was in the throng that gathered on deck to look at the +haul. Suddenly a small fish, but very hideous to look at, leaped +from the net and flopped toward the giant. With a scream of fear +Koku jumped to one side, and ran down to his stateroom. He could +not be induced to come on deck until Tom assured him that the +fishes had been disposed of. Thus Koku was a mixture of giant and +baby. But he was a general favorite on the ship, and often gave +exhibitions of his strength. + +Meanwhile Tom and his friends had been on the lookout for any +one who might be trailing them. But they saw no suspicious +characters among the passengers, and, gradually, they began to +feel that they had left their enemies behind. + +The weather was pleasant, and the voyage very enjoyable. Tom +and the others had little to do, and they were getting rather +impatient for the time to come when they could put the airship +together, and sail off over the jungle, to get moving pictures of +the elephants. + +"Have you any films in the camera now?" asked Ned of his chum +on day, as they sat on deck together. + +"Yes, it's all ready for instant use. Even the storage battery +is charged. Why?" + +"Oh, I was just wondering. I was thinking we might somehow see +something we could take pictures of." + +"Not much out here," said Tom, as he looked across the watery +expanse. As he did so, he saw a haze of smoke dead ahead. "We'll +pass a steamer soon," he went on, "but that wouldn't make a good +picture. It's too common." + +As the two lads watched, the smoke became blacker, and the +cloud it formed grew much larger. + +"They're burning a lot of coal on that ship," remarked Ned. +"Must be trying for a speed record." + +A little later a sailor stationed himself in the crow's nest, +and focused a telescope on the smoke. An officer, on deck, seemed +to be waiting for a report from the man aloft. + +"That's rather odd," remarked Ned. "I never knew them to take +so much interest in a passing steamer before; and we've gone by +several of late." + +"That's right," agreed Tom. "I wonder--" + +At that moment the officer, looking up, called out: + +"Main top!" + +"Aye, aye, sir," answered the sailor with the glass. "She's a +small steamer, sir, and she's on fire!" + +"That's what I feared. Come down. I'll tell the captain. We +must crowd on all steam, and go to the rescue." + +"Did you hear that?" cried Ned to Tom, as the officer hurried +to the bridge, where the captain awaited him. "A steamer on fire +at sea, Tom! why don't you--" + +"I'm going to!" interrupted the young inventor, as he started +for his cabin on the run. "I'm going to get some moving pictures +of the rescue! That will be a film worth having." + +A moment later the Belchar, the vessel on which our friends had +embarked, increased her speed, while sudden excitement developed +on board. + +As the Belchar approached the burning steamer, which had +evidently seen her, and was making all speed toward her, the +cloud of smoke became more dense, and a dull flame could be seen +reflected in the water. + +"She's going fast!" cried Mr. Nestor, as he joined Ned on deck. + +"Bless my insurance policy!" cried Mr. Damon. "What a strange +happening! Where's Tom Swift?" + +"Gone for his camera," answered his chum. "He's going to get +some pictures of the rescue." + +"All hands man the life boats!" cried an officer, and several +sailors sprang to the davits, ready to lower the boats, when the +steamers should be near enough together. + +Up on deck came Tom, with his wonderful camera. + +"Here you go, Ned!" he called. "Give me a hand. I'm going to +start the film now." + + + + +CHAPTER XI - AN ELEPHANT STAMPEDE + + +"Lower away!" + +"Stand by the life boats!" + +"Let go! Pull hearty!" + +These and other commands marked the beginning of the rescue, +as the sailors manned the davit-falls, and put the boats into the +water. The burning steamer had now come to a stop, not far away +from the Belchar, which was also lay-to. There was scarcely any +sea running, and no wind, so that the work of rescuing was not +difficult from an ordinary standpoint. But there was grave +danger, because the fire on the doomed vessel was gaining +rapidly. + +"That's oil burning," remarked an officer, and it seemed so, +from the dense clouds of smoke that rolled upward. + +"Is she working, Tom?" asked Ned, as he helped his chum to hold +the wonderful camera steady on the rail, so that a good view of +the burning steamer could be had. + +"Yes, the film is running. Say, I wonder if they'll get 'em all +off?" + +"Oh, I think so. There aren't many passengers. I guess it's a +tramp freighter." + +They could look across the gap of water, and see the terrified +passengers and crew crowding to the rail, holding out their hands +appealingly to the brave sailors who were lustily and rapidly, +pulling toward them in life boats. + +At times a swirl of smoke would hide those on the doomed vessel +from the sight of the passengers on the Belchar, and on such +occasions the frightened screams of women could be heard. Once, +as the smoke cleared away, a woman, with a child in her arms, +giving a backward glance toward the flames that were now +enveloping the stern of the vessel, attempted to leap overboard. + +Many hands caught her, however, and all this was registered on +the film of Tom's camera, which was working automatically. As the +two vessels drifted along, Tom and Ned shifted the lens so as to +keep the burning steamer, and the approaching lifeboats, in +focus. + +"There's the first rescue!" cried Ned, as the woman who had +attempted to leap overboard, was, with her child, carefully +lowered into a boat. "Did you get that, Tom?" + +"I certainly did. This will make a good picture. I think I'll +send it back to Mr. Period as soon as we reach port." + +"Maybe you could develop it on board here, and show it. I +understand there's a dark room, and the captain said one of his +officers, who used to be in the moving picture business, had a +reproducing machine." + +"Then that's what I'll do!" cried Tom. "I'll have our captain +charge all the Belchar passengers admission, and we'll get up a +fund for the fire sufferers. They'll probably lose all their +baggage." + +"That will be great!" exclaimed Ned. + +The rescue was now in full swing, and, in a short time all the +passengers and crew had been transferred to the life boats. Tom +got a good picture of the captain of the burning steamer being +the last to leave his vessel. Then the approaching life boats, +with their loads of sailors, and rescued ones, were caught on the +films. + +"Are you all off?" cried the captain of the Belchar to the +unfortunate skipper of the doomed ship. + +"All off, yes, thank you. It is a mercy you were at hand. I +have a cargo of oil. You had better stand off, for she'll explode +in a few minutes." + +"I must get a picture of that!" declared Tom as the Belchar got +under way again. "That will cap the climax, and make a film that +will be hard to beat." + +A few moments later there was a tremendous explosion on the +tramp oiler. A column of wreckage and black smoke shot skyward, +and Tom secured a fine view of it. Then the wreck disappeared +beneath the waves, while the rescuing steamer sailed on, with +those who had been saved. They had brought off only the things +they wore, for the fire had occurred suddenly, and spread +rapidly. Kind persons aboard the Belchar looked after the +unfortunates. Luckily there was not a large passenger list on the +tramp. And the crew was comparatively small, so it was not hard +work to make room for them, or take care of them, aboard the +Belchar. + +Tom developed his pictures, and produced then in one of the +large saloons, on a machine he borrowed from the man of whom Ned +had spoken. A dollar admission was charged, and the crowd was so +large that Tom had to give two performances. The films, showing +the burning steamer and the rescue, were excellent, and enough +money was realized to aid, most substantially, the unfortunate +passengers and crew. + +A few days later a New York bound steamer was spoken, and on it +Tom sent the roll of developed films to Mr. Period, with a letter +of explanation. + +I will not give all the details of the rest of the voyage. +Sufficient to say that no accidents marred it, nor did Tom +discover any suspicious characters aboard. In due time our +friends arrived at Calcutta, and were met by an agent of Mr. +Period, for he had men in all quarters of the world, making films +for him. + +This agent took Tom and his party to a hotel, and arranged to +have the airship parts sent to a large open shed, not far away, +where it could be put together. The wonderful scenes in the +Indian city interested Tom and his companions for a time, but +they had observed so many strange sights from time to time that +they did not marvel greatly. Koku, however, was much delighted. +He was like a child. + +"What are you going to do first?" asked Ned, when they had +recovered from the fatigue of the ocean voyage and had settled +themselves in the hotel. + +"Put the airship together," replied our hero, "and then, after +getting some Durbar pictures, we'll head for the jungle. I want +to get some elephant pictures, showing the big beasts being +captured." + +Mr. Period's agent was a great help to them in this. He secured +native helpers, who aided Tom in assembling the airship, and in a +week or two it was ready for a flight. The wonderful camera, too, +was looked over, and the picture agent said he had never seen a +better one. + +"It can take the kind of pictures I never could," he said. "I +get Calcutta street scenes for Mr. Period, and occasionally I +strike a good one. But I wish I had your chance." + +Tom invited him to come along in the airship, but the agent, +who only looked after Mr. Period's interests as a side issue, +could not leave his work. + +The airship was ready for a flight, stores and provisions had +been put on board, there was enough gasoline for the motor, and +gas for the balloon bag, to carry the Flyer thousands of miles. +The moving picture camera had been tested after the sea voyage, +and had been found to work perfectly. Many rolls of films were +taken along. Tom got some fine views of the Durbar of India, and +his airship created a great sensation. + +"Now I guess we're all ready for the elephants," said Tom one +day as he came back from an inspection of the airship as it +rested in the big shed. "We'll start to-morrow morning, and head +for the jungle." + +Amid the cries from a throng of wondering and awed natives, and +with the farewells of Mr. Period's agent ringing in their ears, +Tom and his party made an early start. The Flyer rose like a +bird, and shot across the city, while on the house tops many +people watches the strange sight. Tom did not start his camera +working, as Mr. Period's agent said he had made many pictures of +the Indian city, and even one taken from an airship, would not be +much of a novelty. + +Tom had made inquiries, and learned that by a day's travel in +his airship (though it would have been much longer ordinarily) he +could reach a jungle where elephants might be found. Of course +there was nothing certain about it, as the big animals roamed all +over, being in one district one day, and on the next, many miles +off. + +Gradually the city was left behind, and some time later the +airship was sailing along over the jungle. After the start, when +Ned and Tom, with Mr. Damon helping occasionally, had gotten the +machinery into proper adjustment, the Flyer almost ran herself. +Then Tom took his station forward, with his camera in readiness, +and a powerful spyglass at hand, so that he might see the +elephants from a distance. + +He had been told that, somewhere in the district for which he +was headed, an elephant drive was contemplated. He hoped to be on +hand to get pictures of it, and so sent his airship ahead at top +speed. + +On and on they rode, being as much at ease in the air as they +would have been if traveling in a parlor car. They did not fly +high, as it was necessary to be fairly close to the earth to get +good pictures. + +"Well, I guess we won't have any luck to-day," remarked Ned, as +night approached, and they had had no sight of the elephants. +They had gone over mile after mile of jungle, but had seen few +wild beasts in sufficient numbers to make it worth while to focus +the camera on them. + +"We'll float along to-night," decided Tom, "and try again in +the morning." + +It was about ten o'clock the next day, when Ned, who had +relieved Tom on watch, uttered a cry: + +"What is it?" asked his chum, as he rushed forward. "Has +anything happened?" + +"Lots!" cried Ned. "Look!" He pointed down below. Tom saw, +crashing through the jungle, a big herd of elephants. Behind +them, almost surrounding them, in fact, was a crowd of natives in +charge of white hunters, who were driving the herd toward a +stockade. + +"There's a chance for a grand picture!" exclaimed Tom, as he +got the camera ready. "Take charge of the ship, Ned. Keep her +right over the big animals, and I'll work the camera." + +Quickly he focused the lens on the strange scene below him. +There was a riot of trumpeting from the elephants. The beaters +and hunters shouted and yelled. Then they saw the airship and +waved their hands to Tom and his friends, but whether to welcome +them, or warn them away, could not be told. + +The elephants were slowly advancing toward the stockade. Tom +was taking picture after picture of them, when suddenly as the +airship came lower, in response to a signal to Ned from the young +inventor, one of the huge pachyderms looked up, and saw the +strange sight. He might have taken it for an immense bird. At any +rate he gave a trumpet of alarm, and the next minute, with +screams of rage and fear, the elephants turned, and charged in a +wild stampede on those who were driving them toward the stockade. + +"Look!" cried Ned. "Those hunters and natives will be killed!" + +"I'm afraid so!" shouted Tom, as he continued to focus his +camera on the wonderful sight. + + + + +CHAPTER XII - THE LION FIGHT + + +Crashing through the jungle the huge beasts turned against +those who had, been driving them on toward the stockade. With +wild shouts and yells, the hunters and their native helpers tried +to turn back the elephant tide, but it was useless. The animals +had been frightened by the airship, and were following their +leader, a big bull, that went crashing against great trees, +snapping them off as if they were pipe stems. + +"Say, this is something like!" cried Ned, as he guided the +airship over the closely packed body of elephants, so Tom could +get good pictures, for the herd had divided, and a small number +had gone off with one of the other bulls. + +"Yes, I'll get some great pictures," agreed Tom, as he looked +in through a red covered opening in the camera, to see how much +film was left. + +The airship was now so low down that Tom, and the others, could +easily make out the faces of the hunters, and the native helpers. +One of the hunters, evidently the chief, shaking his fist at our +hero, cried: + +"Can't you take your blooming ship out of the way, my man? It's +scaring the beasts, and we've been a couple of weeks on this +drive. We don't want to lose all our work. Take your bloody ship +away!" + +"I guess he must be an Englishman," remarked Mr. Nestor, with a +laugh. + +"Bless my dictionary, I should say so," agreed Mr. Damon. +"Bloody, blooming ship! The idea!" + +"Well, I suppose we have scared the beasts," said Tom. "We +ought to get out of the way. Put her up, Ned, and we'll come down +some distance in advance." + +"Why, aren't you going to take any more views of the +elephants?" + +"Yes, but I've got enough of a view from above. Besides, I've +got to put in a fresh reel of film, and I might as well get out +of their sight to do it. Maybe that will quiet them, and the +hunters can turn them back toward the stockade. If they do, I +have another plan." + +"What is it?" his chum wanted to know. + +"I'm going to make a landing, set up my camera at the entrance +to the stockade, and get a series of pictures as the animals come +in. I think that will be a novelty. + +"That certainly will," agreed Mr. Nestor. "I am sure Mr. Period +will appreciate that. But won't it be dangerous, Tom?" + +"I suppose so, but I'm getting used to danger," replied our +hero, with a laugh. + +Ned put the ship high into the air, as Tom shut off the power +from the camera. Then the Flyer was sent well on in advance of +the stampede of elephants, so they could no longer see it, or +hear the throb of the powerful engines. Tom hoped that this would +serve to quiet the immense creatures. + +As the travelers flew on, over the jungle, they could still +hear the racket made by the hunters and beaters, and the shrill +trumpeting of the elephants, as they crashed through the forest. + +Tom at once began changing the film in the camera, and Ned +altered the course of the airship, to send it back toward the +stockade, which they had passed just before coming upon the herd +of elephants. + +I presume most of my readers know what an elephant drive is +like. A stockade, consisting of heavy trees, is made in the +jungle. It is like the old fashioned forts our forefathers used +to make, for a defense against the Indians. There is a broad +entrance to it, and, when all is in readiness, the beaters go out +into the jungle, with the white hunters, to round up the +elephants. A number of tame pachyderms are taken along to +persuade the wild ones to follow. + +Gradually the elephants are gathered together in a large body, +and gently driven toward the stockade. The tame elephants go in +first, and the others follow. Then the entrance is closed, and +all that remains to be done is to tame the wild beasts, a not +very easy task. + +"Are you all ready?" asked Ned, after a bit, as he saw Tom come +forward with the camera. + +"Yes, I'm loaded for some more excitement. You can put me right +over the stockade now, Ned, and when we see the herd coming back +I'll go down, and take some views from the ground." + +"I think they've got 'em turned," said Mr. Damon. "It sounds as +if they were coming back this way." + +A moment later they had a glimpse of the herd down below. It +was true that the hunters had succeeded in stopping the stampede, +and once more the huge beasts were going in the right direction. + +"There's a good place to make a landing," suggested Tom, as he +saw a comparatively clear place in the jungle. "It's near the +stockade, and, in case of danger, I can make a quick get-away." + +"What kind of danger are you looking for?" asked Ned, as he +shifted the deflecting rudder. + +"Oh, one of the beasts might take a notion to chase me." + +The landing was made, and Tom, taking Ned and Mr. Nestor with +him, and leaving the others to manage the airship in case a quick +flight would be necessary, made his way along a jungle trail to +the entrance to the stockade. He carried his camera with him, for +it was not heavy. + +On came the elephants, frightened by the shouts and cries of +the beaters, and the firing of guns. The young inventor took his +place near the stockade entrance, and, as the elephants advanced +through the forest, tearing up trees and bushes, Tom got some +good pictures of them. + +Suddenly the advance of the brutes was checked, and the +foremost of them raised their trunks, trumpeted in anger, and +were about to turn back again. + +"Get away from that bloomin' gate!" shouted a hunter to Tom. +"You're scaring them as bad as your airship did." + +"Yes, they won't go in with you there!" added another man. + +Tom slipped around the corner of the stockade, out of sight, +and from that vantage point he took scores of pictures, as the +tame animals led the wild ones into the fenced enclosure. Then +began another wild scene as the gate was closed. + +The terrified animals rushed about, trying in vain to find a +way of escape. Tom managed to climb up on top of the logs, and +got some splendid pictures. But this was nearly his undoing. For, +just as the last elephant rushed in, a big bull charged against +the stockade, and jarred Tom so that he was on the point of +falling. His one thought was about his camera, and he looked to +see if he could drop it on the soft grass, so it would not be +damaged. + +He saw Koku standing below him, the giant having slipped out of +the airship, to see the beasts at closer range. + +"Catch this, Koku!" cried Tom, tossing the big man his precious +camera, and the giant caught it safely. But Tom's troubles were +not over. A moment later, as the huge elephant again rammed the +fence, Tom fell off, but fortunately outside. Then the large +beast, seeing a small opening in the gate that was not yet +entirely closed, made for it. A moment later he was rushing +straight at Tom, who was somewhat stunned by his fall, though it +was not a severe one. + +"Look out!" yelled Ned. + +"Take a tree, Tom!" cried Mr. Nestor. + +The elephant paid no attention to any one but Tom, whom he +seemed to think had caused all his trouble. The young inventor +dashed to one side, and then started to run toward the airship, +for which Ned and Mr. Nestor were already making. The elephant +hunters at last succeeded in closing the gate, blocking the +chance of any more animals to escape. + +"Run, Tom! Run!" yelled Ned, and Tom ran as he had never run +before. The elephant was close after him though, crashing through +the jungle. Tom could see the airship just ahead of him. + +Suddenly he felt something grasp him from behind. He thought +surely it was the elephant's trunk, but a quick glance over his +shoulder showed him the friendly face of Koku, the giant. + +"Me run for you," said Koku, as he caught Tom up under one arm, +and, carrying the camera under the other, he set off at top +speed. Now Koku could run well at times, and this time he did. He +easily outdistanced the elephant, and, a little later, he set Tom +down on the deck of the airship, with the camera beside him. Then +Ned and Mr. Nestor came up panting, having run to one side. + +"Quick!" cried Tom. "We must get away before the elephant +charges the Flyer." + +"He has stopped," shouted Mr. Nestor, and it was indeed so. The +big beast, seeing again the strange craft that had frightened him +before, stood still for a moment, and then plunged off into the +jungle, trumpeting with rage. + +"Safe!" gasped Tom, as he looked at his camera to see if it had +been damaged. It seemed all right. + +"Bless my latch key!" cried Mr. Damon. "This moving picture +business isn't the most peaceful one in the world." + +"No, it has plenty of perils," agreed Mr. Nestor. + +"Come on, let's get out of here while we have the chance," +suggested Tom. "There may be another herd upon us before we know +it." + +The airship was soon ascending, and Tom and his companions +could look down and see the tame elephants in the stockade trying +to calm the wild ones. Then the scene faded from sight. + +"Well, if these pictures come out all right I'll have some fine +ones," exclaimed Tom as he carried his camera to the room where +he kept the films. "I fancy an elephant drive and stampede are +novelties in this line." + +"Indeed they are," agreed Mr. Nestor. "Mr. Period made no +mistake when he picked you out, Tom, for this work. What are you +going to try for next?" + +"I'd like to get some lion and tiger pictures," said the young +inventor. "I understand this is a good district for that. As soon +as those elephants get quieted down, I'm going back to the +stockade and have a talk with the hunters." + +This he did, circling about in the airship until nearly +evening. When they again approached the stockade all was quiet, +and they came to earth. A native showed them where the white +hunters had their headquarters, in some bungalows, and Tom and +his party were made welcome. They apologized for frightening the +big beasts, and the hunters accepted their excuses. + +"As long as we got 'em, it's all right," said the head man, +"though for awhile, I didn't like your bloomin' machine." Tom +entertained the hunters aboard his craft, at which they marvelled +much, and they gave him all the information they had about the +lions and tigers in the vicinity. + +"You won't find lions and tigers in herds, like. elephants +though," said the head hunter. "And you may have to photograph +'em at night, as then is when they come out to hunt, and drink." + +"Well, I can take pictures at night," said Tom, as he showed +his camera apparatus. + +The next day, in the airship, they left for another district, +where, so the natives reported, several lions had been seen of +late. They had done much damage, too, carrying off the native +cattle, and killing several Indians. + +For nearly a week Tom circled about in his airship, keeping a +sharp lookout down below for a sign of lions that he might +photograph them. But he saw none, though he did get some pictures +of a herd of Indian deer that were well worth his trouble. + +"I think I'll have to try for a night photograph," decided Tom +at last. "I'll locate a spring where wild beasts are in the habit +of coming, set the camera with the light going, and leave it +there." + +"But will the lions come up if they see the light?" asked Ned. + +"I think so," replied his chum. "I'll take a chance, anyhow. If +that doesn't work then I'll hide near by, and see what happens." + +"Bless my cartridge belt!" cried Mr. Damon. +"You don't mean that; do you Tom?" + +"Of course. Come to think of it, I'm not going to leave my +camera out there for a lion to jump on, and break. As soon as I +get a series of pictures I'll bring it back to the ship, I +think." + +By inquiry among the natives they learned the location of a +spring where, it was said, lions were in the habit of coming +nightly to drink. + +"That's the place I want!" cried Tom. + +Accordingly the airship was headed for it, and one evening it +came gently to earth in a little clearing on the edge of the +jungle, while Koku, as was his habit, got supper. + +After the meal Tom and Ned set the camera, and then, picking +out a good spot nearby, they hid themselves to wait for what +might happen. The lens was focused on the spring, and the +powerful electric light set going. It glowed brightly, and our +hero thought it might have the effect of keeping the beasts away, +but Tom figured that, after they had looked at it for a while, +and seen that it did not harm them, they would lose their +suspicions, and come within range of his machine. + +"The camera will do the rest," he said. In order not to waste +films uselessly Tom arranged a long electric wire, running it +from the camera to where he and Ned were hid. By pressing a +button he could start or stop the camera any time he wished, and, +as he had a view of the spring from his vantage point, he could +have the apparatus begin taking pictures as soon as there was +some animal within focus. + +"Well, I'm getting stiff," said Ned, after an hour or so had +passed in silent darkness, the only light being the distant one +on the camera. + +"So am I," said Tom. + +"I don't believe anything will come to-night," went on his +chum. "Let's go back and--" + +He stopped suddenly, for there was a crackling in the +underbrush, and the next moment the jungle vibrated to the mighty +roar of a lion. + +"He's coming!" hoarsely whispered Tom. + +Both lads glanced through the trees toward the camera, and, in +the light, they saw a magnificent, tawny beast standing on the +edge of the spring. Once more he roared, as if in defiance, and +then, as if deciding that the light was not harmful, he stooped +to lap up the water + +Hardly had he done so than there was another roar, and a moment +later a second lion leaped from the dense jungle into the +clearing about the spring. The two monarchs of the forest stood +there in the glare of the light, and Tom excitedly pressed the +button that started the shutter to working, and the film to +moving back of the lens. + +There was a slight clicking sound in the camera, and the lions +turned startedly. Then both growled again, and the next instant +they sprang at each other, roaring mightily. + +"A fight!" cried Tom. "A lion fight, and right in front of my +camera! It couldn't be better. This is great! This will be a +film." + +"Quiet!" begged Ned. "They'll hear you, and come for us. I +don't want to be chewed up!" + +"No danger of them hearing me!" cried Tom. and he had to shout +to be heard above the roaring of the two tawny beasts, as they +bit and clawed each other, while the camera took picture after +picture of them. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII - A SHOT IN TIME + + +"Tom, did you ever see anything like it in your life?" + +"I never did, Ned! It's wonderful! fearful! And to think that +we are here watching it, and that thousands of people will see +the same thing thrown on a screen. Oh, look at the big one. The +small lion has him down!" + +The two lads, much thrilled, crouched down behind a screen of +bushes, watching the midnight fight between the lions. On the +airship, not far distant, there was no little alarm, for those +left behind heard the terrific roars, and feared Tom and Ned +might be in some danger. But the lions were too much occupied +with their battle, to pay any attention to anything else, and no +other wild beasts were likely to come to the spring while the two +"kings" were at each other. + +It was a magnificent, but terrible battle. The big cats bit and +tore at each other, using their terrific claws and their powerful +paws, one stroke of which is said to be sufficient to break a +bullock's back. Sometimes they would roll out of the focus of the +camera, and, at such times, Tom wished he was at the machine to +swing the lens around, but he knew it would be dangerous to move. +Then the beasts would roll back into the rays of light again, and +more pictures of them would be taken. + +"I guess the small one is going to win!" said Tom, after the +two lions had fought for ten minutes, and the bigger one had been +down several times. + +"He's younger," agreed Ned, "and I guess the other one has had +his share of fights. Maybe this is a battle to see which one is +to rule this part of the jungle." + +"I guess so," spoke the young inventor, as he pressed the +button to stop the camera, as the lions rolled out of focus. "Oh, +look!" he cried a moment later, as the animals again rolled into +view. Tom started the camera once more. "This is near the end," +he said. + +The small lion had, by a sudden spring, landed on the back of +his rival. There was a terrific struggle, and the older beast +went down, the younger one clawing him terribly. Then, so quickly +did it happen that the boys could not take in all the details, +the older lion rolled over and over, and rid himself of his +antagonist. Quickly he got to his feet, while the smaller lion +did the same. They stood for a moment eyeing each other, their +tails twitching, the hair on their backs bristling, and all the +while they uttered frightful, roars. + +An instant later the larger beast sprang toward his rival. One +terrible paw was upraised. The small lion tried to dodge, but was +not quick enough. Down came the paw with terrific force, and the +boys could hear the back bone snap. Then, clawing his antagonist +terribly, as he lay disabled, the older lion, with a roar of +triumph, lapped up water, and sprang off through the jungle, +leaving his dying rival beside the spring. + +"That's the end," cried Tom, as the small lion died, and the +young inventor pressed the button stopping his camera. There was +a rustle in the leaves back of Tom and Ned, and they sprang up in +alarm, but they need not have feared, for it was only Koku, the +giant, who, with a portable electrical torch, had come to see how +they had fared. + +"Mr. Tom all right?" asked the big man, anxiously. + +"Yes, and I got some fine pictures. You can carry the camera +back now, Koku. I think that roll of film is pretty well filled." + +The three of them looked at the body of the dead lion, before +they went back to the airship. I have called him "small," but, in +reality, the ;beast was small only in comparison with his rival, +who was a tremendous lion in size. I might add that of all the +pictures Tom took, few were more highly prized than that reel of +the lion fight. + +"Bless my bear cage!" cried Mr. Damon, as Tom came back, "you +certainly have nerve, my boy." + +"You have to, in this business," agreed Tom with a laugh. "I +never did this before, and I don't know that I would want it for +a steady position, but it's exciting for a change." + +They remained near the "lion spring" as they called it all +night, and in the morning, after Koku had served a tasty +breakfast, Tom headed the airship for a district where it was +said there were many antelope, and buffaloes, also zebus. + +"I don't want to get all exciting pictures," our hero said to +Mr. Nestor. "I think that films showing wild animals at play, or +quietly feeding, will be good." + +"I'm sure they will," said Mary's father. "Get some peaceful +scenes, by all means." + +They sailed on for several days, taking a number of pictures +from the airship, when they passed over a part of the country +where the view was magnificent, and finally, stopping at a good +sized village they learned that, about ten miles out, was a +district where antelope abounded. + +"We'll go there," decided Tom, "and I'll take the camera around +with me on a sort of walking trip. In that way I'll get a variety +of views, and I can make a good film." + +This plan was followed out. The airship came to rest in a +beautiful green valley, and Ned and Tom, with Mr. Damon, who +begged to be taken along, started off. + +"You can follow me in about half an hour, Koku," said Tom, "and +carry the camera back. I guess you can easily pick up our trail." + +"Oh, sure," replied the giant. Indeed, to one who had lived in +the forest, as he had all his life, before Tom found him, it was +no difficult matter to follow a trail, such as the three friends +would leave. + +Tom found signs that showed him where the antelopes were in the +habit of passing, and, with Ned and Mr. Damon, stationed himself +in a secluded spot. + +He had not long to wait before a herd of deer came past. Tom +took many pictures of the graceful creatures, for it was daylight +now, and he needed no light. Consequently there was nothing to +alarm the herd. + +After having made several films of the antelope, Tom and his +two companions went farther on. They were fortunate enough to +find a place that seemed to be a regular playground of the deer. +There was a large herd there, and, getting as near as he dared, +Tom focused his camera, and began taking pictures. + +"It's as good as a play," whispered Mr. Damon, as he and Ned +watched the creatures, for they had to speak quietly. The camera +made scarcely any noise. "I'm glad I came on this trip." + +"So am I," said Ned. "Look, Tom, see the mother deer all +together, and the fawns near them. It's just as if it was a +kindergarten meeting." + +"I see," whispered Tom. "I'm getting a picture of that." + +For some little time longer Tom photographed the deer, and +then, suddenly, the timid creatures all at once lifted up their +heads, and darted off. Tom and Ned, wondering what had startled +them, looked across the glade just in time to see a big tiger +leap out of the tall grass. The striped animal had been stalking +the antelope, but they had scented him just in time. + +"Get him, Tom," urged Ned, and the young inventor did so, +securing several fine views be. fore the tiger bounded into the +grass again, and took after his prey. + +"Bless my china teacup! What's that!" suddenly cried Mr. Damon. +As he spoke there was a crashing in the bushes and, an instant +later as two-horned rhinoceros sprang into view, charging +straight for the group. + +"Look out!" yelled Ned. + +"Bless my--" began Mr. Damon, but he did not finish, for, in +starting to run his foot caught in the grass, and he went down +heavily. + +Tom leaped to one side, holding his camera so as not to damage +it. But he stumbled over Mr. Damon, and went down. + +With a "wuff" of rage the clumsy beast, came on, moving more +rapidly than Tom had any idea he was capable of. Hampered by his +camera our hero could not arise. The rhinoceros was almost upon +him, and Ned, catching up a club, was just going to make a rush +to the rescue, when the brute seemed suddenly to crumple up. It +fell down in a heap, not five feet from where Tom and Mr. Damon +lay. + +"Good!" cried Ned. "He's dead. Shot through the heart! Who did +it?" + +"I did," answered Koku quietly, stepping out of the bushes, +with one of Tom's Swift's electric rifles in his hand. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV - IN A GREAT GALE + + +Tom Swift rose slowly to his feet, carefully setting his camera +down, after making sure that it was not injured. Then he looked +at the huge beast which lay dead in front of him, and, going over +to the giant he held out his hand to him. + +"Koku, you saved my life," spoke Tom. "Probably the life of Mr. +Damon also. I can't begin to thank you. It isn't the first time +you've done it, either. But I want to say that you can have +anything you want, that I've got." + +"Me like this gun pretty much," said the giant simply. + +"Then it's yours!" exclaimed Tom. "And you're the only one, +except myself, who has ever owned one." Tom's wonderful electric +rifle, of which I have told you in the book bearing that name, +was one of his most cherished inventions. + +He guarded jealously the secret of how it worked, and never +sold or gave one away, for fear that unscrupulous men might learn +how to make them, and to cause fearful havoc. For the rifle was a +terrible weapon. Koku seemed to appreciate the honor done him, as +he handled the gun, and looked from it to the dead rhinoceros. + +"Bless my blank cartridge!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, as he also got +up and came to examine the dead beast. It was the first thing he +had said since the animal had rushed at him, and he had not moved +after he fell down. He had seemingly been in a daze, but when the +others heard him use one of his favorite expressions they knew +that he was all right again. "Bless my hat!" went on the odd man. +"What happened, Tom? Is that beast really dead? How did Koku come +to arrive in time?" + +"I guess he's dead all right," said Tom, giving the rhinoceros +a kick. "But I don't know how Koku happened to arrive in the nick +of time, and with the gun, too." + +"I think maybe I see something to shoot when I come after you, +like you tell me to do," spoke the giant. "I follow your trail, +but I see nothing to shoot until I come here. Then I see that +animal run for you, and I shoot." + +"And a good thing you did, too," put in Ned. "Well let's go +back. My nerves are on edge, and I want to sit quiet for a +while." + +"Take the camera, Koku," ordered Tom, "and I'll carry the +electric rifle--your rifle, now," he added, and the giant grinned +in delight. They reached the airship without further incident, +and, after a cup of tea, Tom took out the exposed films and put a +fresh roll in his camera, ready for whatever new might happen. + +"Where is your next stopping place, Tom?" asked Ned, as they +sat in the main room of the airship that evening, talking over +the events of the day. They had decided to stay all night +anchored on the ground, and start off in the morning. + +"I hardly know, answered the young inventor. "I am going to set +the camera to-night, near a small spring I saw, to get some +pictures of deer coming to drink. I may get a picture of a lion +or a tiger attacking them. If I could it would be another fine +film. To-morrow I think we will start for Switzerland. But now +I'm going to get the camera ready for a night exposure. + +"Bless my check book!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't mean to say +that you are going to stay out at a spring again, Tom, and run +the chance of a tiger getting you." + +"No, I'm merely going to set the camera, attach the light and +let it work automatically this time. I've put in an extra long +roll of film, for I'm going to keep it going for a long while, +and part of the time there may be no animals there to take +pictures of. No, I'm not going to sit out to-night. I'm too +tired. I'll conceal the camera in the bushes so it won't be +damaged if there's a fight. Then, as I said, we'll start for +Switzerland to-morrow." + +"Switzerland!" cried Ned. "What in the world do you want to go +make a big jump like that for? And what do you expect to get in +that mountain land?" + +"I'm going to try for a picture of an avalanche," said Tom. +"Mr. Period wants one, if I can get it. It is quite a jump, but +then we'll be flying over civilized countries most of the time, +and if any accident happens we can go down and easily make +repairs. We can also get gasolene for the motor, though I have +quite a supply in the tanks, and perhaps enough for the entire +trip. At the same time we won't take any chances. So we'll be off +for Switzerland in the morning. + +"I think some avalanche pictures will be great, if you can get +them," remarked Mr. Nestor. "But, Tom, you know those big slides +of ice, snow and earth aren't made to order." + +"Oh, I know," agreed the young inventor with a smile. "I'll +just have to take my chances, and wait until one happens." + +"Bless my insurance policy!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "And when it +does happen, Tom, are you going to stand in front of it, and +snap-shot it?" + +"Indeed I'm not. This business is risky and dangerous enough, +without looking for trouble. I'm going to the mountain region, +and hover around in the air, until we see an avalanche 'happen' +if that is the right word. Then I'll focus the camera on it, and +the films and machinery will do the rest." + +"Oh, that's different," remarked the odd man, with an air of +relief. + +Tom and Ned soon had the camera set near the spring and then, +everyone being tired with the day's work and excitement, they +retired. In the morning there were signs around the spring that +many animals had been there in the night. There were also marks +as if there had been a fight, but of course what sort, or how +desperate, no one could say. + +"If anything happened the camera got it, I'm sure of that +much," remarked Tom, as he brought in the apparatus. "I'm not +going to develop the roll, for I don't want to take the time +now. I guess we must have something, anyhow." + +"If there isn't it won't so much matter for you have plenty of +other good views," said Mr. Nestor. + +I will not go into details of the long trip to Switzerland, +where, amid the mountains of that country, Tom hoped to get the +view he wanted. + +Sufficient to say that the airship made good time after leaving +India. Sometimes Tom sent the craft low down, in order to get +views, and again, it would be above the clouds. + +"Well, another day will bring us there," said +Tom one evening, as he was loading the camera +with a fresh roll of films. "Then we'll have to +be on the lookout for an avalanche." + +"Yes, we're making pretty good time," remarked Ned, as he +looked at the speed gage. "I didn't know you had the motor +working so fast, Tom." + +"I haven't," was the young inventor's answer, as he looked up +in surprise. "Why, we are going quite fast! It's the wind, Ned. +It's right with us, and it's carrying us along." + +Tom arose and went to the anemometer, or wind-registering +instrument. He gave a low whistle, half of alarm. + +"Fifty miles an hour she's blowing now," he said. "It came on +suddenly, too, for a little while ago it was only ten." + +"Is there any danger?" asked Mr. Nestor, for he was not very +familiar with airship perils. + +"Well, we've been in big blows before, and we generally came +out all right," returned Tom. "Still, I don't like this. Why she +went up five points since I've been looking at it!" and he +pointed to the needle of the gage, which now registered +fifty-five miles an hour. + +"Bless my appendix!" gasped Mr. Damon. "It's a hurricane Tom!" + +"Something like that," put in Ned, in a low voice. + +With a suddenness that was startling, the wind increased in +violence still more. Tom ran to the pilot house. + +"What are you going to do?" Ned called. + +"See if we can't go down a bit," was Tom's answer. "I don't +like this. It may be calmer below. We're up too high as it is." + +He tried to throw over the lever controlling the deflecting +rudder, which would send the Flyer down, but he could not move +it. + +"Give me a hand!" he called to Ned, but even the strength of +the two lads was not sufficient to shift it. + +"Call Koku!" gasped Tom. "If anybody can budge it the giant +can!" + +Meanwhile the airship was being carried onward in the grip of a +mighty wind, so strong that its pressure on the surface of the +deflecting rudder prevented it from being shifted. + + + + +CHAPTER XV - SNAPPING AN AVALANCHE + + +"Bless my thermometer!" gasped Mr. Damon. "This is terrible!" +The airship was plunging and swaying about in the awful gale. +"Can't something be done, Tom?" + +"What has happened?" cried Mr. Nestor. "We were on a level keel +before. What is it?" + +"It's the automatic balancing rudder!" answered Tom. "Something +has happened to it. The wind may have broken it! Come on, Ned!" +and he led the way to the engine room. + +"What are you going to do? Don't you want Koku to shift the +deflecting rudder? Here he is," Ned added, as the giant came +forward, in response to a signal bell that Tom's chum had rung. + +"It's too late to try the deflecting rudder!" tried Tom. "I +must see what is the matter with our balancer." As he spoke the +ship gave a terrific plunge, and the occupants were thrown +sideways. The next moment it was on a level keel again, scudding +along with the gale, but there was no telling when the craft +would again nearly capsize. + +Tom looked at the mechanism controlling the equalizing and +equilibrium rudder. It was out of order, and he guessed that the +terrific wind was responsible for it. + +"What can we do?" cried Ned, as the airship nearly rolled over. +"Can't we do anything, Tom?" + +"Yes. I'm going to try. Keep calm now. We may come out all +right. This is the worst blow we've been in since we were in +Russia. Start the gas machine full blast. I want all the vapor I +can get." + +As I have explained the Flyer was a combined dirigible balloon +and aeroplane. It could be used as either, or both, in +combination. At present the gas bag was not fully inflated, and +Tom had been sending his craft along as an aeroplane. + +"What are you going to do?" cried Ned, as he pulled over the +lever that set the gas generating machine in operation. + +"I'm going up as high as I can go!" cried Tom. "If we can't go +down we must go up. I'll get above the hurricane instead of below +it. Give me all the gas you can, Ned!" + +The vapor hissed as it rushed into the big bag overhead. Tom +carried aboard his craft the chemicals needed to generate the +powerful lifting gas, of which he alone had the secret. It was +more powerful than hydrogen, and simple to make. The balloon of +the Flyer was now being distended. + +Meanwhile Tom, with Koku, Mr. Damon and Mr. Nestor to help him, +worked over the deflecting rudder, and also on the equilibrium +mechanism. But they could not get either to operate. + +Ned stood by the gas machine, and worked it to the limit. But +even with all that energy, so powerful was the wind, that the +Flyer rose slowly, the gale actually holding her down as a +water-logged craft is held below the waves. Ordinarily, with the +gas machine set at its limit the craft would have shot up +rapidly. + +At times the airship would skim along on the level, and again +it would be pitched and tossed about, until it was all the +occupants could do to keep their feet. Mr. Damon was continually +blessing everything he could remember. + +"Now she's going!" suddenly cried Ned, as he looked at the +dials registering the pressure of the gas, and showing the height +of the airship above the earth. + +"Going how?" gasped Tom, as he looked over from where he was +working at the equilibrium apparatus. "Going down?" + +"Going up!" shouted Ned. "I guess we'll be all right soon!" + +It was true. Now that the bag was filled with the powerful +lifting gas, under pressure, the Flyer was beginning to get out +of the dangerous predicament into which the gale had blown her, +Up and up she went, and every foot she climbed the power of the +wind became less. + +"Maybe it all happened for the best," said Tom, as he noted the +height gage. "If we had gone down, the wind might have been worse +nearer the earth." + +Later they learned that this was so. The most destructive wind +storm ever known swept across the southern part of Europe, over +which they were flying that night, and, had the airship gone +down, she would probably have been destroyed. But, going up, she +got above the wind-strata. Up and up she climbed, until, when +three miles above the earth, she was in a calm zone. It was +rather hard to breathe at this height, and Tom set the oxygen +apparatus at work. + +This created in the interior of the craft an atmosphere almost +like that on the earth, and the travelers were made more at their +ease. Getting out of the terrible wind pressure made it possible +to work the deflecting rudder, though Tom had no idea of going +down, as long as the blow lasted. + +"We'll just sail along at this height until morning," he said, +"and by then the gale may be over, or we may be beyond the zone +of it. Start the propellers, Ned. I think I can manage to repair +the equilibrium rudder now." + +The propellers, which gave the forward motion to the airship, +had been stopped when it was found that the wind was carrying her +along, but they were now put in motion again, sending the Flyer +forward. In a short time Tom had the equilibrium machine in +order, and matters were now normal again. + +"But that was a strenuous time while it lasted," remarked the +young inventor, as he sat down. + +"It sure was," agreed Ned. + +"Bless my pen wiper!" cried Mr. Damon. "That was one of the few +times when I wish I'd never come with you, Tom Swift," and +everyone laughed at that. + +The Flyer was now out of danger, going along high in the air +through the night, while the gale raged below her. At Tom's +suggestion, Koku got a lunch ready, for they were all tired with +their labors, and somewhat nervous from the danger and +excitement. + +"And now for sleep!" exclaimed Tom, as he pushed back his +plate. "Ned, set the automatic steering gear, and we'll see where +we bring up by morning." + +An examination, through a powerful telescope in the bright +light of morning, showed the travelers that they were over the +outskirts of a large city, which, later, they learned was Rome, +Italy. + +"We've made a good trip," said Tom. "The gale had us worried, +but it sent us along at a lively clip. Now for Switzerland, and +the avalanches!" + +They made a landing at a village just outside the "Holy City," +as Rome is often called, and renewed their supply of gasolene. +Naturally they attracted a crowd of curious persons, many of whom +had never seen an airship before. Certainly few of them had ever +seen one like Tom Swift's. + +The next day found them hovering over the Alps, where Tom hoped +to be able to get the pictures of snow slides. They went down to +earth at a town near one of the big mountain ranges, and there +made inquiries as to where would be the best location to look for +big avalanches. If they went but a few miles to the north, they +were told, they would be in the desired region, and they departed +for that vicinity. + +"And now we've just got to take our time, and wait for an +avalanche to happen," remarked Tom, as they were flying along +over the mountain ranges. "As Mr. Damon said, these things aren't +made to order. They just happen." + +For three days they sailed in and out over the great +snow-covered peaks of the Alps. They did not go high up, for they +wanted to be near earth when an avalanche would occur, so that +near-view pictures could be secured. Occasionally they saw +parties of mountain climbers ascending some celebrated peak, and +for want of something better to photograph, Tom "snapped" the +tourists. + +"Well, I guess they're all out of avalanches this season," +remarked Ned one afternoon, when they had circled back and forth +over a mountain where, so it was said, the big snow slides were +frequent. + +"It does seem so," agreed Tom. "Still, we're in no hurry. It is +easier to be up here, than it is walking around in a jungle, not +knowing what minute a tiger may jump out at you." + +"Bless my rubbers, yes!" agreed Mr. Damon. + +The sky was covered with lowering clouds, and there were +occasionally flurries of snow. Tom's airship was well above the +snow line on the mountains. The young inventor and Ned sat in the +pilot house, taking observations through a spyglass of the +mountain chain below them. + +Suddenly Ned, who had the glass focused on a mighty peak, cried +out: + +"There she is, Tom!" + +"What?" + +"The avalanche! The snow is beginning to slide down the +mountain! Say, it's going to be a big one, too. Got your camera +ready?" + +"Sure! I've had it ready for the last three days. Put me over +there, Ned. You look after the airship, and I'll take the +pictures!" + +Tom sprang to get his apparatus, while his chum hurried to the +levers, wheels and handles that controlled the Flyer. As they +approached the avalanche they could see the great mass of ice, +snow, big stones, and earth sliding down the mountain side, +carrying tall trees with it. + +"This is just what I wanted!" cried Tom, as he set his camera +working. "Put me closer, Ned." + +Ned obeyed, and the airship was now hovering directly over the +avalanche, and right in its path. The big landslide, as it would +have been called in this country, met no village in its path, +fortunately, or it would have wiped it out completely. It was in +a wild and desolate region that it occurred. + +"I want to get a real close view!" cried Tom, as he got some +pictures showing a whole grove of giant trees uprooted and +carried off. "Get closer Ned, and--" + +Tom was interrupted by a cry of alarm from his chum. + +"We're falling!" yelled Ned. "Something has gone wrong. We're +going down into the avalanche!". + + + + +CHAPTER XVI - TELEGRAPH ORDERS + + +There was confusion aboard the airship. Tom, hearing Ned's cry, +left his camera, to rush to the engine room, but not before he +had set the picture apparatus to working automatically. Mr. +Damon, Mr. Nestor and Koku, alarmed by Ned's cries, ran back from +the forward part of the craft, where they had been watching the +mighty mass of ice and earth as it rushed down the side of the +mountain. + +"What's wrong, Ned?" cried Tom excitedly. + +"I don't know! The propellers have stopped! We were running as +an aeroplane you know. Now we're going down!" + +"Bless my suspenders!" shouted Mr. Damon. "If we land in the +midst of that conglomeration of ice it will be the end of us." + +"But we're not going to land there!" cried Tom. + +How are you going to stop it?" demanded Mr. Nestor. + +"By the gas machine!" answered Tom. "That will stop us from +falling. Start it up, Ned!" + +"That's right! I always forget about that! I'll have it going +in a second!" + +"Less than a second," called Tom, as he saw how near to the +mighty, rushing avalanche they were coming. + +Ned worked rapidly, and in a very short time the downward +course of the airship was checked. It floated easily above the +rushing flood of ice and earth, and Tom, seeing that his craft, +and those on it, were safe, hurried back to his camera. Meanwhile +the machine had automatically been taking pictures, but now with +the young inventor to manage it, better results would be +obtained. + +Tom aimed it here and there, at the most spectacular parts of +the avalanche. The others gathered around him, after Ned had made +an inspection, and found that a broken electrical wire had caused +the propellers to stop. This was soon repaired and then, as they +were hanging in the air like a balloon, Tom took picture after +picture of the wonderful sight below them. Forest after forest +was demolished. + +"This will be a great film!" Tom shouted to Ned, as the latter +informed him that the machinery was all right again. "Send me up +a little. I want to get a view from the top, looking down." + +His chum made the necessary adjustments to the mechanism and +then, there being nothing more to slide down the mountainside the +avalanche was ended. But what a mass of wreck and ruin there was! +It was as if a mighty earthquake had torn the mountain asunder. + +"It's a good thing it wasn't on a side of the mountain where +people lived," commented Ned, as the airship rose high toward the +clouds. "If it had been, there'd be nothing left of 'em. What +hair-raising stunt are you going to try next, Tom?" + +"I don't know. I expect to hear from Mr. Period soon. + +"Hear from Mr. Period?" exclaimed Mr. Nestor. "How are you +going to do that, Tom?" + +"He said he would telegraph me at Berne, Switzerland, at a +certain date, as he knew I was coming to the Alps to try for some +avalanche pictures. It's two or three days yet, before I can +expect the telegram, which of course will have to come part way +by cable. In the meanwhile, I think we'll take a little rest, and +a vacation. I want to give the airship an overhauling, and look +to my camera. There's no telling what Mr. Period may want next." + +"Then he didn't make out your programme completely before you +started?" asked Mr. Nestor. + +"No, he said he'd communicate with me from time to time. He is +in touch with what is going on in the world, you know, and if he +hears of anything exciting at any place, I'm to go there at once. +You see he wants the most sensational films he can get." + +"Yes, our company is out to give the best pictures we can +secure," spoke Mary's father, "and I think we are lucky to have +Tom Swift working for us. We already have films that no other +concern can get. And we need them." + +"I wonder what became of those men who started to make so much +trouble for you, Tom?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"Well, they seem to have disappeared," replied our hero. "Of +course they may be after me any day now, but for the time being, +I've thrown them off my track." + +"So then you don't know where you're going next?" asked Ned. + +"No, it may be to Japan, or to the North Pole. Well, I'm ready +for anything. We've got plenty of gasolene, and the Flyer can +certainly go," said Tom. + +They went down to earth in a quiet spot, just outside of a +little village, and there they remained three days, to the no +small wonder of the inhabitants. Tom wanted to see if his camera +was working properly. So he developed some of the avalanche +pictures, and found them excellent. The rest of the time was +spent in making some needed repairs to the airship, while the +young inventor overhauled his Wizard machine, that he found +needed a few adjustments. + +Their arrival in Berne created quite a sensation, but they were +used to that. Tom anchored his airship just outside the city, +and, accompanied by Ned, made his way to the telegraph office. +Some of the officials there could speak English, though not very +well. + +"I am expecting a message," said Tom. + +"Yes? Who for?" asked the clerk. + +"Tom Swift. It will be from America." + +As Tom said this he observed a man sitting in the corner of the +office get up hurriedly and go out. All at once his suspicions +were aroused. He thought of the attempts that had been made to +get his Wizard Camera away from him. + +"Who was that man?" he quickly asked the agent. + +"Him? Oh, he, too, is expecting a message from America. He has +been here some time." + +"Why did he go out so quickly?" Ned wanted to know. + +"Why, I can not tell. He is an Englishman. They do strange +things." + +"My telegram? Is it here?" asked Tom impatiently. He wanted to +get whatever word there was from Mr. Period, and be on his way to +whatever destination the picture man might select. Perhaps, after +all, his suspicions, against the man who had so suddenly left, +were unfounded. + +"Yes, there is a cablegram here for you, Monsieur Swift," said +the man, who was French. "There are charges on it, however." + +"Pay 'em, Ned, while I see what this is," directed the young +inventor, as he tore open the envelope. + +"Whew!" he whistled a moment later. "This is going some." + +"Where to now?" asked Ned. "The North Pole?" + +"No, just the opposite. Mr. Period wants me to go to Africa-- +the Congo Free State. There's an uprising among the natives +there, and he wants some war pictures. Well, I guess I'll have to +go." + +As Tom spoke he looked toward the door of the telegraph office, +and he saw the man, who had so hurriedly gone out a few moments +before, looking in at him. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII - SUSPICIOUS STRANGERS + + +"Off to Africa; eh?" remarked Ned, as Tom put the envelope in +his pocket. "That's another long jump. But I guess the Flyer can +do it, + +"Yes, I think so. I say Ned, not so loud," said Tom, who had +hurried to the side of his chum, whispered the last words. + +"What's up?" inquired Ned quickly. "Anything wrong?" + +"I don't know. But I think we are being watched. Did you notice +that fellow who was in here a minute ago, when I asked for a +telegram?" + +"Yes, what about him?" + +"Well, he's looking in the door now I think. Don't turn round. +Just look up into that mirror on the wall, and you can see his +reflection." + +"I understand," whispered Ned, as he turned his gaze toward the +mirror in question, a large one, with advertisements around the +frame. "I see him," he went on. "There's some one with him." + +"That's what I thought," replied Tom. "Take a good look. Whom +do you think the other chap is?" + +Ned looked long and earnestly. By means of the mirror, he could +see, perfectly plain, two men standing just outside the door of +the telegraph office. The portal was only partly open. Ned drew +an old letter from his pocket, and pretended to be showing it to +Tom. But, all the while he was gazing earnestly at the two men. +Suddenly one of them moved, giving Tom's chum a better view of +his face. + +"By Jove, Tom!" the lad exclaimed in a tense whisper. "If it +isn't that Eckert fellow I'm a cow." + +"That's what I thought," spoke Tom coolly. "Not that you're a +cow, Ned, but I believe that this man is one of the moving +picture partners, who are rivals of Mr. Period. I wasn't quite +sure myself after the first glance I had of him, so I wanted you +to take a look. Do you know the other chap--the one who ran out +when I asked for my telegram?" + +"No, I've never seen him before as far as I know." + +"Same here. Come on." + +"What are you going to do?" + +"Go back to the airship, and tell Mr. Nestor. As one of the +directors in the concern I'm working for. I want his advice." + +"Good idea," replied Ned, and they turned to leave the office. +The spying stranger, and William Eckert, were not in sight when +the two lads came out. + +"They got away mighty quick," remarked Tom, as he looked up and +down the street. + +"Yes, they probably saw us turn to come out, and made a quick +get-away. They might be in any one of these places along here," +for the street, on either side of the telegraph office, contained +a number of hotels, with doors opening on the sidewalk. + +"They must be on your trail yet," decided Mr. Nestor when Tom, +reaching the anchored airship, told what had happened. "Well, my +advice is to go to Africa as soon as we can. In that way we'll +leave them behind, and they won't have any chance to get your +camera." + +"But what I can't understand," said Tom, "is how they knew I +was coming here. It was just as if that one man had been waiting +in the telegraph office for me to appear. I'm sorry, now, that I +mentioned to Ned where we were ordered to. But I didn't think." + +"They probably knew, anyway," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "I +think this may explain it. The rival concern in New York has been +keeping track of Mr. Period's movements. Probably they have a +paid spy who may be in his employ. They knew when he sent you a +telegram, what it contained, and where it was directed to. Then, +of course, they knew you would call here for it. What they did +not know was when you would come, and so they had to wait. That +one spy was on guard, and, as soon as you came, he went and +summoned Eckert, who was waiting somewhere in the neighborhood." + +"Bless my detective story!" cried Mr. Damon. "What a state of +affairs! They ought to be arrested, Tom." + +"It would be useless," said Mr. Nestor. "They are probably far +enough away by this time. Or else they have put others on Tom's +track." + +"I'll fight my own battles!" exclaimed the young inventor. "I +don't go much on the police in a case like this, especially foreign +police. Well, my camera is all right, so far," he went on, as he +took a look at it, in the compartment where he kept it. "Some one +must always remain near it, after this. But we'll soon start for +Africa, to get some pictures of a native battle. I hope it isn't +the red pygmies we have to photograph." + +"Bless my shoe laces! Don't suggest such a thing," begged Mr. +Damon, as he recalled the strenuous times when the dwarfs held +the missionaries captive. + +It was necessary to lay in some stores and provisions, and for +this reason Tom could not at once head the airship for the +African jungles. As she remained at anchor, just outside the +city, crowds of Swiss people came out to look at the wonderful +craft. But Tom and his companions took care that no one got +aboard, and they kept a strict lookout for Americans, or +Englishmen, thinking perhaps that Mr. Eckert, or the spy, might +try to get the camera. However, they did not see them, and a few +days after the receipt of the message from Mr. Period, having +stocked up, they rose high into the air, and set out to cross the +Mediterranean Sea for Africa. Tom laid a route over Tripoli, the +Sahara Desert, the French Congo, and so into the Congo Free +State. In his telegram, Mr. Period had said that the expected +uprising was to take place near Stanley Falls, on the Congo +River. + +"And supposing it does not happen?" asked Mr. Damon. "What if +the natives don't fight, Tom? You'll have your trip for nothing, +and Will run a lot of risk besides." + +"It's one of the chances I'm taking," replied the young +inventor, and truly, as he thought of it, he realized that the +perils of the moving picture business were greater than he had +imagined. Tom hoped to get a quick trip to the Congo, but, as +they were sailing over the big desert, there was an accident to +the main motor, and the airship suddenly began shooting toward +the sands. She was easily brought up, by means of the gas bags, +and allowed to settle gently to the ground, in the vicinity of a +large oasis. But, when Tom looked at the broken machinery, he +said: + +"This means a week's delay. It will take that, and longer, to +fix it so we can go on." + +"Too bad!" exclaimed Mr. Nestor. "The war may be over when we +get there. But it can't be helped." + +It took Tom and his friends even longer than he had thought to +make the repairs. In the meanwhile they camped in the desert +place, which was far from being unpleasant. Occasionally a +caravan halted there, but, for the most part, they were alone. + +"No danger of Eckert, or any of his spies coming here, I +guess," said Tom grimly as he blew on a portable forge, to weld +two pieces of iron together. + +In due time they were again on the wing, and without further +incident they were soon in the vicinity of Stanley Falls. They +managed to locate a village where there were some American +missionaries established. They were friends of Mr. and Mrs. +Illington, the missionaries whom Tom had saved from the red +pygmies, as told in the "Electric Rifle" volume of this series, +and they made our hero and his friends welcome. + +"Is it true?" asked Tom, of the missionaries who lived not far +from Stanley Falls, "that there is to be a native battle? Or are +we too late for it?" + +"I am sorry to say, I fear there will be fighting among the +tribesmen," replied Mr. Janeway, one of the Christian workers. +"It has not yet taken place, though." + +"Then I'm not too late!" cried Tom, and there was exultation in +his voice. "I don't mean to be barbarous," he went on, as he saw +that the missionaries looked shocked, "but as long as they are +going to fight I want to get the pictures." + +"Oh, they'll fight all right," spoke Mrs. Janeway. "The poor, +ignorant natives here are always ready to fight. This time I +think it is about some cattle that one tribe took from another." + +"And where will the battle take place?" asked Tom. + +"Well, the rumors we have, seem to indicate that the fight will +take place about ten miles north of here. We will have notice of +it before it starts, as some of the natives, whom we have +succeeded in converting, belong to the tribe that is to be +attacked. They will be summoned to the defense of their town and +then it will be time enough for you to go. Oh, war is a terrible +thing! I do not like to talk about it. Tell me how you rescued +our friends from the red pygmies," and Tom was obliged to relate +that story, which I have told in detail elsewhere. + +Several days passed, and Tom and his friends spent a pleasant +time in the African village with the missionaries. The airship +and camera were in readiness for instant use, and during this +period of idleness our hero got several fine films of animal +scenes, including a number of night-fights among the beasts at +the drinking pools. One tiger battle was especially good, from a +photographic standpoint. + +One afternoon, a number of native bearers came into the town. +They preceded two white men, who were evidently sportsmen, or +explorers, and the latter had a well equipped caravan. The +strangers sought the advice of the missionaries about where big +game might be found, and Tom happened to be at the cottage of Mr. +Janeway when the strangers arrived. + +The young inventor looked at them critically, as he was +introduced to them. Both men spoke with an English accent, one +introducing himself as Bruce Montgomery, and the other as Wade +Kenneth. Tom decided that they were of the ordinary type of +globe-trotting Britishers, until, on his way to his airship, he +passed the place where the native bearers had set down the +luggage of the Englishmen. + +"Whew!" whistled Tom, as he caught sight of a peculiarly shaped +box. "See that, Ned?" + +"Yes, what is it? A new kind of magazine gun?" + +"It's a moving picture camera, or I lose my guess!" whispered +Tom. "One of the old fashioned kind. Those men are no more +tourists, or after big game, than I am! They're moving picture +men, and they're here to get views of that native battle! Ned, +we've got to be on our guard. They may be in the pay of that +Turbot and Eckert firm, and they may try to do us some harm!" + +"That's so!" exclaimed Ned. "We'll keep watch of them, Tom." + +As they neared their airship, there came, running down what +served as the main village street, an African who showed evidence +of having come from afar. As he ran on, he called out something +in a strange tongue. Instantly from their huts the other natives +swarmed. + +"What's up now?" cried Ned. + +"Something important, I'll wager," replied Tom. "Ned, you go +back to the missionaries house, and find out what it is. I'm +going to stand guard over my camera." + +"It's come!" cried Ned a little later, as he hurried into the +interior of the airship, where Tom was busy working over a new +attachment he intended putting on his picture machine. + +"What has?" + +"War! That native, whom we saw running in, brought news that +the battle would take place day after to-morrow. The enemies of +his tribe are on the march, so the African spies say, and he came +to summon all the warriors from this town. We've got to get +busy!" + +"That's so. What about those Englishmen?" + +"They were talking to the missionaries when the runner came in. +They pretended to have no interest in it, but I saw one wink to +the other, and then, very soon, they went out, and I saw them +talking to their native bearers, while they were busy over that +box you said was a picture machine." + +"I knew it, Ned! I was sure of it! Those fellows came here to +trick us, though how they ever followed our trail I don't know. +Probably they came by a fast steamer to the West Coast, and +struck inland, while we were delayed on the desert. I don't care +if they are only straight out-and-out rivals--and not chaps that +are trying to take an unfair advantage. I suppose all the big +picture concerns have a tip about this war, and they may have +representatives here. I hope we get the best views. Now come on, +and give me a hand. We've got our work cut out for us, all +right." + +"Bless my red cross bandage!" cried Mr. Damon, when he heard +the news. "A native fight, eh? That will be something I haven't +seen in some time. Will there be any danger, Tom, do you think?" + +"Not unless our airship tumbles down between the two African +forces," replied our hero, "and I'll take care that it doesn't do +that. "We'll be well out of reach of any of their blow guns, or +arrows." + +"But I understand that many of the tribes have powder weapons," +said Mr. Nestor. + +"They have," admitted Tom, "but they are 'trader's' rifles, and +don't carry far. We won't run any risk from such old-fashioned +guns." + +"A big fight; eh?" asked Koku when they told him what was +before them. "Me like to help." + +"Yes, and I guess both sides would give a premium for your +services," remarked Tom, as he gazed at his big servant. "But +we'll need you with us, Koku." + +"Oh, me stay with you, Mr. Tom," exclaimed the big man, with a +grin. + +Somewhat to Tom's surprise the two Englishmen showed no further +interest in him and his airship, after the introduction at the +missionaries' bungalow. + +With the stolidity of their race the Britishers did not show +any surprise, as, some time afterward, they strolled down toward +Tom's big craft, after supper, and looked it over. Soon they went +back to their own camp, and a little later, Koku, who walked +toward it, brought word that the Englishmen were packing up. + +"They're going to start for the seat of war the first thing in +the morning," decided Tom. "Well, we'll get ahead of them. Though +we can travel faster than they can, we'll start now, and be on +the ground in good season. Besides, I don't like staying all +night in the same neighborhood with them. Get ready for a start, +Ned." + +Tom did not stop to say good-bye to the Englishmen, though he +bade farewell to the missionaries, who had been so kind to him. +There was much excitement in the native town, for many of the +tribesmen were getting ready to depart to help their friends or +relatives in the impending battle. + +As dusk was falling, the big airship arose, and soon her +powerful propellers were sending her across the jungle, toward +Stanley Falls in the vicinity of which the battle was expected to +take place. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII - THE NATIVE BATTLE + + +"By Jove, Tom, here they come!" + +"From over by that drinking pool?" + +"Yes, just as the spies said they would. Wow, what a crowd of +the black beggars there are! And some of 'em have regular guns, +too. But most of 'em have clubs, bows and arrows, blow guns, or +spears." + +Tom and Ned were standing on the forward part of the airship, +which was moving slowly along, over an open plateau, in the +jungle where the native battle was about to take place. Our +friends had left the town where the missionaries lived, and had +hovered over the jungle, until they saw signs of the coming +struggle. They had seen nothing of their English rivals since +coming away, but had no doubt but that the Britishers were +somewhere in the neighborhood. + +The two forces of black men, who had gone to war over a dispute +about some cattle, approached each other. There was the beating +of tom-toms, and skin drums, and many weird shouts. From their +vantage point in the air, Tom and his companions had an excellent +view. The Wizard Camera was loaded with a long reel of film, and +ready for action. + +"Bless my handkerchief!" cried Mr. Damon, as he looked down on +the forces that were about to clash. "I never saw anything like +this before!" + +"I either," admitted Tom. "But, if things go right, I'm going +to get some dandy films!" + +Nearer and nearer the rival forces advanced. At first they had +stared, and shouted in wonder at the sight of the airship, +hovering above them, but their anger soon drew their attention to +the fighting at hand, and, after useless gestures toward the +craft of the air, and after some of them had vainly fired their +guns or arrows at it, they paid no more attention, but rushed on +with their shouts and cries and amid the beating of their rude +drums. + +"I think I'll begin to take pictures now," said Tom, as Ned, in +charge of the ship, sent it about in a circle, giving a general +view of the rival forces. "I'll show a scene of the two crowds +getting ready for business, and, later on, when they're actually +giving each other cats and dogs, I'll get all the pictures +possible." + +The camera was started while, safe in the a those on the Flyer +watched what went on below them. + +Suddenly the forward squads of the two small armies of blacks +met. With wild, weird yells they rushed at each other. The air +was filled with flying arrows and spears. The sound of the old- +fashioned muzzle-loading guns could he heard, and clouds of smoke +arose. Tilting his camera, and arranging the newly attached +reflecting mirrors so as to give the effect as if a spectator was +looking at the battle from in front, instead of from above, Tom +Swift took picture after picture. + +The fight was now on. With yells of rage and defiance the +Africans came together, giving blow for blow. It was a wild +melee, and those on the airship looked on fascinated, though +greatly wishing that such horrors could be stopped. + +"How about it, Tom?" cried Ned. + +"Everything going good! I don't like this business, but now I'm +in it I'm going to stick. Put me down a little lower," answered +the young inventor. + +"All right. I say Tom, look over there." + +"Where?" + +"By that lightning-struck gum tree. See those two men, and some +sort of a machine they've got stuck up on stilts? See it?" + +"Sure. Those are the two Englishmen--my rivals! They're taking +pictures, too!" + +And then, with a crash and roar, with wild shouts and yells, +with volley after volley of firearms, clouds of smoke and flights +of arrows and spears, the native battle was in full swing, while +the young inventor, sailing above it in his airship, reeled off +view after view of the strange sight. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX - A HEAVY LOSS + + +"Bless my battle axe, but this is awful!" cried Mr. Damon. + +"War is always a fearful thing," spoke Mr. Nestor. "But this is +not as bad as if the natives fought with modern weapons. See! +most of them are fighting with clubs, and their fists. They don't +seem to hurt each other very much." + +"That's so," agreed Mr. Damon. The two gentlemen were in the +main cabin, looking down on the fight below them, while Tom, with +Ned to help him change the reels of films, as they became filled +with pictures, attended to the camera. Koku was steering the +craft, as he had readily learned how to manage it. + +"Are those Englishmen taking pictures yet?" asked Tom, too busy +to turn his head, and look for himself. + +"Yes, they're still at," replied Ned. "But they seem to be +having trouble with their machine," he added as he saw one of the +men leave the apparatus, and run hurriedly back to where they had +made a temporary camp. + +"I guess it's an old-fashioned kind," commented Tom. "Say, this +is getting fierce!" he cried, as the natives got in closer +contact with each other. It was now a hand-to-hand battle. + +"I should say so!" yelled Ned. "It's a wonder those Englishmen +aren't afraid to be down on the same level with the black +fighters." + +"Oh, a white person is considered almost sacred by the natives +here, so the missionaries told me," said Tom. "A black man would +never think of raising his hand to one, and the Englishmen +probably know this. They're safe enough. In fact I'm thinking of +soon going down myself, and getting some views from the ground." + +"Bless my gizzard, Tom!" cried Mr. Damon. "Don't do it!" + +"Yes, I think I will. Why, it's safe enough. Besides, if they +attack us we have the electric rifles. Ned, you tell Koku to get +the guns out, to have in readiness, and then you put the ship +down. I'll take a chance." + +"Jove! You've been doing nothing but take chances since we came +on this trip!" exclaimed Ned, admiringly. "All right! Here we +go," and he went to relieve Koku at the wheel, while the giant, +grinning cheerfully at the prospect of taking part in the fight +himself, got out the rifles, including his own. + +Meanwhile the native battle went on fiercely. Many on both +sides fell, and not a few ran away, when they got the chance, +their companions yelling at them, evidently trying to shame them +into coming back. + +As the airship landed, Mr. Damon, Mr. Nestor, Ned and Koku +stood ready with the deadly electric rifles, in case an attack +should be made on them. But the fighting natives paid no more +attention to our friends than they did to the two Englishmen. +The latter moved their clumsy camera from place to place, in +order to get various views of the fighting. + +"This is the best yet!" cried Tom, as, after a lull in the +fight, when the two opposing armies had drawn a little apart, +they came together again more desperately than before. "I hope +the pictures are being recorded all right. I have to go at this +thing pretty much in the dark. Say, look at the beggars fight!" +he finished. + +But a battle, even between uncivilized blacks, cannot go on for +very long at a time. Many had fallen, some being quite severely +injured it seemed, being carried off by their friends. Then, with +a sudden rush, the side which, as our friends learned later, had +been robbed of their cattle, made a fierce attack, overwhelming +their enemies, and compelling them to retreat. Across the open +plain the vanquished army fled, with the others after them. Tom, +meanwhile, taking pictures as fast as he could. + +"This ends it!" he remarked to Ned, when the warriors were too +far away to make any more good views. "Now we can take a rest." + +"The Englishmen gave up some time ago," said his chum, +motioning to the two men who were taking their machine off the +tripod. + +"Guess their films gave out," spoke Tom. "Well, you see it +didn't do any harm to come down, and I got some better views +here." + +"Here they come back!" exclaimed Ned, as a horde of the black +fellows emerged f row the jungle, and came on over the plain. + +"Hear 'em sing!" commented Tom, as the sound of a rude chant +came to their ears. "They must be the winners all right." + +"I guess so," agreed Ned. "But what about staying here now? +Maybe they won't be so friendly to us when they haven't any +fighting to occupy their minds." + +"Don't worry," advised Tom. "They won't bother us." + +And the blacks did not. They were caring for their wounded, who +had not already been taken from the field, and they paid no +attention to our friends, save to look curiously at the airship. + +"Bless my newspaper!" cried Mr. Damon, with an air of relief. +"I'm glad that's over, and we didn't have to use the electric +rifles, after all." + +"Here come the Englishmen to pay us a visit," spoke Ned a +little later, as they sat about the cabin of the Flyer. The two +rival picture men soon climbed on deck. + +"Beg pardon," said the taller of the two, addressing our hero, +"but could you lend us a roll of film? Ours are all used up, and +we want to get some more pictures before going back to our main +camp." + +"I'm sorry," replied Tom, "but I use a special size, and it +fits no camera but my own." + +"Ah! might we see your camera?" asked the other Englishman. +"That is, see how it works?" + +"I don't like to be disobliging," was Tom's answer, "but it is +not yet patented and--well--" he hesitated. + +"Oh, I see!" sneered the taller visitor. "You're afraid we +might steal some of your ideas. Hum!" Come on Montgomery," and, +swinging on his heels, with a military air, he hurried away, +followed by his companion. + +"They don't like that, but I can't help it," remarked Tom to +his friends a little later. "I can't afford to take any chances." + +"No, you did just right," said Mr. Nestor. "Those men may be +all right, but from the fact that they are in the picture taking +business I'd be suspicious of them." + +"Well, what's next on the programme?" asked Ned as Tom put his +camera away. + +"Oh, I think we'll stay here over night," was our hero's reply. +"It's a nice location, and the gas machine needs cleaning. We can +do it here, and maybe I can get some more pictures." + +They were busy the rest of the day on the gas generator, but +the main body of natives did not come back, and the Englishmen +seemed to have disappeared. + +Everyone slept soundly that night. So soundly, in fact, that +the sun was very high when Koku was the first to awaken, His head +felt strangely dizzy, and he wondered at a queer smell in the +room he had to himself. + +"Nobody up yet," he exclaimed in surprise, as he staggered into +the main cabin. There, too, was the strange, sweetish, sickly +smell. "Mr. Tom, where you be? Time to get up!" the giant called +to his master, as he went in, and gently shook the young inventor +by the shoulder. + +"Eh? What's that? What's the matter?" began Tom, and then he +suddenly sat up. "Oh, my head!" he exclaimed, putting his hands +to his aching temples. + +"And that queer smell!" added Ned, who was also awake now. + +"Bless my talcum powder!" cried Mr. Damon. "I have a splitting +headache." + +"Hum! Chloroform, if I'm any judge!" called Mr. Nestor from his +berth. + +"Chloroform!" cried Tom, staggering to his feet. "I wonder" He +did not finish his sentence, but made his way to the room where +his camera was kept. "It's gone!" he cried. "We have been +chloroformed in the night, and some one has taken my Wizard +Camera." + + + + +CHAPTER XX - AFTER THE ENGLISHMEN + + +"The camera gone!" gasped Ned. + +"Did they chloroform us?" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "Bless my--" but +for one of the few times in his life, he did not know what to +bless. + +"Get all the fresh air you can," hastily advised Mr. Nestor. +"Koku, open all the doors and windows," for, though it was hot +during the day in the jungle, the nights were cool, and the +airship was generally closed up. With the inrush of the fresh air +every one soon felt better. + +"Is anything else gone?" asked Ned, as he followed Tom into the +camera room. + +"Yes, several rolls of unexposed films. Oh, if only they +haven't got too much of a start! I'll get it away from them!" +declared Tom with energy. + +"From who? Who took it?" asked Ned. + +"Those Englishmen, of course! Who else? I believe they are in +the pay of Turbot and Eckert. Their taking pictures was only a +bluff! They got on my trail and stuck to it. The delays we had, +gave them a chance to catch up to us. They came over to the +airship, to pretend to borrow films, just to get a look at the +place, and size it up, so they could chloroform us, and get the +camera." + +"I believe you're right," declared Mr. Nestor. "We must get +after those scoundrels as quickly as possible!" + +"Bless my shoulder braces!" cried Mr. Damon. "How do you +imagine they worked that trick on us?" + +"Easily enough," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "We were all dead +tired last night, and slept like tops. They watched their chance, +sneaked up, and got in. After that it was no hard matter to +chloroform each one of us in turn, and they had the ship to +themselves. They looked around, found the camera, and made off +with it." + +"Well, I'm going to get right after them!" cried Tom. "Ned, +start the motor. I'll steer for a while." + +"Hold on! Wait a minute," suggested Mr. Nestor. "I wouldn't go +off in the ship just yet,~ Tom." + +"Why not?" + +"Because you don't know which way to go. We must find out which +trail the Englishmen took. They have African porters with them, +and those porters doubtless know some of the blacks around here. +We must inquire of the natives which way the porters went, in +carrying the goods of our rivals, for those Englishmen would not +abandon camp without taking their baggage with them." + +"That's so," admitted the young inventor. "That will be the +best plan. Once I find which way they have gone I can easily +overtake them in the airship. And when I find 'em--" Tom paused +significantly. + +"Me help you fix 'em!" cried Koku, clenching his big fist. + +"They will probably figure it out that you will take after +them," said Mr. Nestor, "but they may not count on you doing it +in the Flyer, and so they may not try to hide. It isn't going to +be an easy matter to pick a small party out of the jungle though, +Tom." + +"Well, I've done more difficult things in my airships," spoke +our hero. "I'll fly low, and use the glass. I guess we can pick +out their crowd of porters, though they won't have many. Oh, my +camera! I hope they won't damage it." + +"They won't," was Ned's opinion. "It's too valuable. They want +it to take pictures with, themselves." + +"Maybe. I hope they don't open it, and see how it's made. And +I'm glad I thought to hide the picture films I've taken so far. +They didn't get those away from us, only some of the blank. +ones," and Tom looked again in a secret closet. where he kept the +battle-films, and the others, in the dark, to prevent them from +being light-struck, by any possible chance. + +"Well, if we're going to make some inquiries, let's do it," +suggested Mr. Nestor. "I think I see some of the Africans over +there. They have made a temporary camp, it seems, to attend to +some of their wounded." + +"Do you think we can make them understand what we want?" asked +Ned. "I don't believe they speak English." + +"Oh these blacks have been trading with white men," said Tom, +"for they have 'trader's' guns, built to look at, and not to +shoot very well. I fancy we can make ourselves understood. If +not, we can use signs." + +Leaving Koku and Mr. Damon to guard the airship, Tom, Ned and +Mr. Nestor went to the African camp. There was a large party of +men there, and they seemed friendly enough. Probably winning the +battle the day before had put them in good humor, even though +many of them were hurt. + +To Tom's delight he found one native who could speak a little +English, and of him they made inquiries as to what direction the +Englishmen had taken. The black talked for a while among his +fellows, and then reported to our friends that, late in the +night, one of the porters, hired by Montgomery and Kenneth, had +come to camp to bid a brother good-bye. This porter had said that +his masters were in a hurry to get away, and had started west. + +"That's it!" cried Mr. Nestor. "They're going to get somewhere +so they can make their way to the coast. They want to get out of +Africa as fast as they can." + +"And I'm going to get after 'em as fast as I can!" cried Tom +grimly. "Come on!" + +They hurried back to the airship, finding Koku and Mr. Damon +peacefully engaged in talk, no one having disturbed them. + +"Start the motor, Ned!" called his chum. "We'll see what luck +we have!" + +Up into the air went the Flyer, her great propellers revolving +rapidly. Over the jungle she shot, and then, when he found that +everything was working well, and that the cleaned gas generator +was operating as good as when it was new, the young inventor +slowed up, and brought the craft down to a lower level. + +"For we don't want to run past these fellows, or shoot over +their heads in our hurry," Tom explained. "Ned, get out the +binoculars. They're easier to handle than the telescope. Then go +up forward, and keep a sharp lookout. There is something like a +jungle trail below us, and it looks to be the only one around +here. They probably took that." Soon after leaving the place +where they had camped after the battle, Tom had seen a rude path +through the forest, and had followed that lead. + +On sped the Flyer, after the two Englishmen, +while Tom thought regretfully of his stolen +camera. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI - THE JUNGLE FIRE + + +"Well, Tom, I don't seem to see anything of them," remarked Ned +that afternoon, as he sat in the bow of the air craft, gazing +from time to time through the powerful glasses. + +"No, and I can't understand it, either," responded the young +inventor, who had come for-ward to relieve his chum. "They didn't +have much the start of us, and they'll have to travel very +slowly. It isn't as if they could hop on a train; and, even if +they did, I could overtake them in a short time. But they have to +travel on foot through the jungle, and can't have gone far." + +"'Maybe they have bullock carts," suggested +Mr. Damon. + +'~The trail isn't wide enough for that," declared Tom. "We've +come quite a distance now, even if we have been running at low +speed, and we haven't seen even a black man on the trail," and he +motioned to the rude path below them. + +"They may have taken a boat and slipped down that river we +crossed a little while ago," suggested Ned. + +"That's so!" cried Tom. "Why didn't I think of it? Say! I'm +going to turn back." + +"Turn back?" + +"Yes, and go up and down the stream a way. We have time, for we +can easily run at top speed on the return trip. Then, if we don't +see anything of them on the water, we'll pick up the trail again. +Put her around, Ned, and I'll take the glasses for a while." + +The Flyer was soon shooting back over the same trail our +friends had covered, and, as Ned set the propellers going at top +speed, they were quickly hovering over a broad but shallow river, +which cut through the jungle. + +"Try it down stream first," suggested Tom, who was peering +through the binoculars. "They'd be most likely to go down, as it +would be easier." + +Along over the stream swept the airship, covering several +miles. + +"There's a boat!" suddenly exclaimed Mr. Nestor, pointing to a +native canoe below them. + +"Bless my paddle wheel! So it is!" cried Mr. Damon. "I believe +it's them, Tom!" + +"No, there are only natives in that craft," answered the young +inventor a moment later, as he brought the binoculars into focus. +"I wish it was them, though." + +A few more miles were covered down stream, and then Tom tried +the opposite direction. But all to no purpose. A number of boats +were seen, and several rafts, but they had no white men on them. + +"Maybe the Englishmen disguised themselves like natives, Tom," +suggested Ned. + +Our hero shook his head. + +"I could see everything in the boats, through these powerful +glasses," he replied, "and there was nothing like my camera. "I'd +know that a mile off. No, they didn't take to this stream, though +they probably crossed it. We'll have to keep on the way we were +going. It will soon be night, and we'll have to camp. Then we'll +take up the search to-morrow." + +It was just getting dusk, and Tom was looking about for a good +place to land in the jungle, when Ned, who was standing in the +bow, cried: + +"I say, Tom, here's a native village just ahead. There's a good +place to stop, and we can stay there over night." + +"Good!" exclaimed Tom. "And, what's more, we can make some +inquiries as to whether or not the Englishmen have passed here. +This is great! Maybe we'll come out all right, after all! They +can't travel at night--or at least I don't believe they will--and +if they have passed this village we can catch them to-morrow. +We'll go down." + +They were now over the native town, which was in a natural +clearing in the jungle. The natives had by this time caught +sight of the big airship over them, and were running about in +terror. There was not a man, woman or child in sight when the +Flyer came down, for the inhabitants had all fled in fright. + +"Not much of a chance to make inquiries of these folks," said +Mr. Nestor. + +"Oh, they'll come back," predicted Tom. "They are naturally +curious, and when they see that the thing isn't going to blow up, +they'll gather around. I've seen the same thing happen before." + +Tom proved a true prophet. In a little while some of the men +began straggling back, when they saw our friends walking about +the airship, as it rested on the ground. Then came the children, +and then the women, until the whole population was gathered about +the airship, staring at it wonderingly. Tom made signs of +friendship, and was lucky enough to find a native who knew a few +French words. Tom was not much of a French scholar, but he could +frame a question as to the Englishmen. + +"Oui!" exclaimed the native, when he understood. Then he +rattled off something, which Tom, after having it repeated, and +making signs to the man to make sure he understood, said meant +that the Englishmen had passed through the village that morning. + +"We're on the right trail!" cried the young inventor. "They're +only a day's travel ahead of us. We'll catch them to-morrow, and +get my camera back." + +The natives soon lost all fear of the airship, and some of the +chief men even consented to come aboard. Tom gave them a few +trifles for presents, and won their friendship to such an extent +that a great feast was hastily gotten up in honor of the +travelers. Big fires were lighted, and fowls by the score were +roasted. + +"Say, I'm glad we struck this place!" exclaimed Ned, as he sat +on the ground with the others, eating roast fowl. "This is all to +the chicken salad!" + +"Things are coming our way at last," remarked Tom. "We'll start +the first thing in the morning. I wish I had my camera now. I'd +take a picture of this scene. Dad would enjoy it, and so would +Mrs. Baggert. Oh, I almost wish I was home again. But if I get my +camera I've got a lot more work ahead of me." + +"What kind?" asked Ned. + +"I don't know. I'm to stop in Paris for the next instructions +from Mr. Period. He is keeping in touch with the big happenings +of the world, and he may send us to Japan, to get some earthquake +pictures." + +The night was quiet after the feast, and in the morning Tom and +his friends sailed off in their airship, leaving behind the +wondering and pleased natives, for our hero handed out more +presents, of small value to him, but yet such things as the +blacks prized highly. + +Once more they were flying over the trail, and they put on more +speed now, for they were fairly sure that the men they sought +were ahead of them about a day's travel. This meant perhaps +twenty miles, and Tom figured that he could cover fifteen in a +hurry, and then go over the remaining five slowly, so as not to +miss his quarry. + +"Say, don't you smell something?" asked Ned a little later, +when the airship had been slowed down. "Something like smoke?" + +"Humph! I believe I do get an odor of something burning," +admitted Tom, sniffing the atmosphere. + +"Bless my pocket book!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, "look down there, +boys!" He pointed below, and, to the surprise of the lads, and no +less of himself, he saw many animals hurrying back along the +jungle trail. + +There were scores of deer, leaping along, here and there a +tawny lion, and one or two tigers. Off to one side a rhinoceros +crashed his way through the tangle, and occasionally an elephant +was seen. + +"That's queer," cried Ned. "And they're not paying any +attention to each other, either." + +"Something is happening," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "Those +animals are running away from something." + +"Maybe it's an elephant drive," spoke Tom. "I think--" + +But he did not finish. The smell of smoke suddenly became +stronger, and, a moment later, as the airship rose higher, in +response to a change in the angle of the deflecting rudder, which +Ned shifted, all on board saw a great volume of black smoke +rolling toward the sky. + +"A jungle fire!" cried Tom. "The jungle is burning! That's why +the animals are running back this way." + +"We'd better not go on!" shouted Ned, choking a bit, as the +smoke rolled nearer. + +"No, we've got to turn back!" decided Tom. "Say, this will stop +the Englishmen! They can't go on. We'll go back to the village we +left, and wait for them. They're trapped!" And then he added +soberly: "I hope my camera doesn't get burnt up!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXII - A DANGEROUS COMMISSION + + +"Look at that smoke!" yelled Ned, as he sent the airship about +in a great circle on the backward trail. + +"And there's plenty of blaze, too," added Tom. "See the flames +eating away! This stuff is as dry as tinder for there hasn't been +any rain for months." + +"Much hot!" was the comment of the giant, when he felt the warm +wind of the fire. + +"Bless my fountain pen!" gasped Mr. Damon, as he looked down +into the jungle. "See all those animals!" + +The trail was now thick with deer, and many small beasts, the +names of which Tom did not know. On either side could be heard +larger brutes, crashing their way forward to escape the fire +behind them. + +"Oh, if you only had your camera now!" cried Ned. "You could +get a wonderful picture, Tom." + +"What's the use of wishing for it. Those Englishmen have it, +and--" + +"Maybe they're using it!" interrupted Ned. "No, I don't think +they would know how to work it. Do you see anything of them, +Ned?" + +"Not a sight. But they'll surely have to come back, just as you +said, unless they got ahead of the fire. They can't go on, and it +would be madness to get off the trail in a jungle like this." + +"I don't believe they could have gotten ahead of the fire," +spoke Tom. "They couldn't travel fast enough for that, and see +how broad the blaze is." + +They were now higher up, well out of the heat and smoke of the +conflagration, and they could see that it extended for many miles +along the trail, and for a mile or so on either side of it. + +"We're far enough in advance, now, to go down a bit, I guess," +said Tom, a little later. "I want to get a good view of the path, +and I can't do that from up here. I have an idea that--" + +Tom did not finish, for as the airship approached nearer the +ground, he caught up a pair of binoculars, and focussed them on +something on the trail below. + +"What is it?" cried Ned, startled by something in his chum's +manner. + +"It's them! The Englishmen!" cried Tom. "See, they are racing +back along the trail. Their porters have deserted them. But they +have my camera! I can see it! I'm going down, and get it! Ned, +stand by the wheel, and make a quick landing. Then we'll go up +again!" + +Tom handed the glasses to his chum, and Ned quickly verified +the young inventor's statement. There were the two rascally +Englishmen. The fire was still some distance in the rear, but was +coming on rapidly. There were no animals to be seen, for they had +probably gone off on a side trail, or had slunk deeper into the +jungle. Above the distant roar of the blaze sounded the throb of +the airship's motor. The Englishmen heard it, and looked up. +Then, suddenly, they motioned to Tom to descend. + +"That's what I'm going to do," he said aloud, but of course +they could not hear him. + +"They're waiting for us!" cried Ned. "I wonder why?" for the +rascals had come to a halt, setting down the packs they carried +on the trail. One of the things they had was undoubtedly Tom's +camera. + +"They probably want us to save their lives," said Tom. "They +know they can't out-run this fire. They've given up! We have them +now!" + +"Are you going to save them?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"Of course. I wouldn't let my worst enemy run the chances of +danger in that terrible blaze. I'd save them even if they had +smashed my camera. I'll go down, and get them, and take them back +to the native village, but that's as far as I will carry them. +They'll have to get away as best they can, after that." + +It was the work of but a few minutes to lower the airship to +the trail. Fortunately it widened a bit at this point, or Tom +could never have gotten his craft down through the trees. + +"Hand up that camera!" ordered our hero curtly, when he had +stopped near the Englishmen. + +"Yes, my dear chap," spoke the tall Britisher, "but will you +oblige us, by taking us--" + +"Hand up the camera first!" sharply ordered Tom again. + +They passed it to him. + +"I know we treated you beastly mean," went on Kenneth, "but, my +dear chap--" + +"Get aboard," was all Tom said, and when the rascals, with +fearful glances back into the burning jungle, did so, our hero +sent his craft high into the air again. + +"Where are you taking us, my dear chap?" asked the tall rascal. + +"Don't 'dear chap' me!" retorted Tom. "I don't want to talk to +you. I'm going to drop you at the native village." + +"But that will burn!" cried the Englishman. + +"The wind is changing," was our hero's answer. "The fire won't +get to the village. You'll be safe. Have you damaged my camera?" +he asked as he began to examine it, while Ned managed the ship. + +"No, my dear chap. You mustn't think too hard of us. We were +both down on our luck, and a chap offered us a big sum to get on +your trail, and secure the camera. He said you had filched it +from him, and that he had a right to it. Understand, we wouldn't +have taken it had we known--" + +"Don't talk to me!" interrupted Tom, as he saw that his +apparatus had not been damaged. "The man who hired you was a +rascal--that's all I'll say. Put on a little more speed, Ned. I +want to get rid of these 'dear chaps' and take some pictures of +the jungle fire." + +As Tom had said, the wind had changed, and was blowing the +flames away off to one side, so that the native village would be +in no danger. It was soon reached, and the Africans were +surprised to see Tom's airship back again. But he did not stay +long, descending only to let the Englishmen alight. They pleaded +to be taken to the coast, making all sorts of promises, and +stating that, had they known that Turbot and Eckert (for whom +they admitted they had acted) were not telling the truth, they +never would have taken Tom's camera. + +"Don't leave us here!" they pleaded. + +"I wouldn't have you on board my airship another minute for a +fortune!" declared Tom, as he signalled to Ned to start the +motor. Then the Flyer ascended on high, leaving the plotters and +started back for the fire, of which Tom got a series of fine +moving pictures. + +A week later our friends were in Paris, having made a quick +trip, on which little of incident occurred, though Tom managed to +get quite a number of good views on the way. + +He found a message awaiting him, from Mr. Period. + +"Well, where to now?" asked Ned, as his chum read the +cablegram. + +"Great Scott!" cried our hero. "Talk about hair-raising jobs, +this certainly is the limit!" + +"Why, what's the matter?" + +"I've got to get some moving pictures of a volcano in action," +was the answer. "Say, if I'd known what sort of things 'Spotty' +wanted, I'd never have consented to take this trip. A volcano in +action, and maybe an earthquake on the side! This is certainly +going some!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII - AT THE VOLCANO + + +"And you've got to snap-shot a volcano?" remarked Ned to his +chum, after a moment of surprised silence. "Any particular one? +Is it Vesuvius? If it is we haven't far to go. But how does Mr. +Period know that it's going to get into action when we want it to?" + +"No, it isn't Vesuvius," replied Tom. "We've got to take +another long trip, and we'll have to go by steamer again. The +message says that the Arequipa volcano, near the city of the same +name, in Peru, has started to 'erupt,' and, according to rumor, +it's acting as it did many years ago, just before a big +upheaval." + +"Bless my Pumice stones!" cried Mr. Damon. "And are you +expected to get pictures of it shooting out flames and smoke, +Tom?" + +"Of course. An inactive volcano wouldn't make much of a moving +picture. Well, if we go to Peru, we won't be far from the United +States, and we can fly back home in the airship. But we've got to +take the Flyer apart, and pack up again." + +"Will you have time?" asked Mr. Nestor. "Maybe the volcano will +get into action before you arrive, and the performance will be +all over with." + +"I think not," spoke Tom, as he again read the cablegram. "Mr. +Period says he has advices from Peru to the effect that, on other +occasions, it took about a month from the time smoke was first +seen coming from the crater, before the fireworks started up. I +guess we've got time enough, but we won't waste any." + +"And I guess Montgomery and Kenneth won't be there to make +trouble for us," put in Ned. "It will be some time before they +get away from that African town, I think." + +They began work that day on taking the airship apart for +transportation to the steamer that was to carry them across the +ocean. Tom decided on going to Panama, to get a series of +pictures on the work of digging that vast canal. On inquiry he +learned that a steamer was soon to sail for Colon, so he took +passage for his friends and himself on that, also arranging for +the carrying of the parts of his airship. + +It was rather hard work to take the Flyer apart, but it was +finally done, and, in about a week from the time of arriving in +Paris, they left that beautiful city. The pictures already taken +were forwarded to Mr. Period, with a letter of explanation of +Tom's adventures thus far, and an account of how his rivals had +acted. + +Just before sailing, Tom received another message from his +strange employer. The cablegram read: + + +"Understand our rivals are also going to try for volcano +pictures. Can't find out who will represent Turbot and Eckert, +but watch out. Be suspicious of strangers." + + +"That's what I will!" cried Tom. "If they get my camera away +from me again, it will be my own fault." + +The voyage to Colon was not specially interesting. They ran +into a terrific storm, about half way over, and Tom took some +pictures from the steamer's bridge, the captain allowing him to +do so, but warning him to be careful. + +"I'll take Koku up there with me," said the young inventor, +"and if a wave tries to wash me overboard he'll grab me." + +And it was a good thing that he took this precaution, for, +while a wave did not get as high as the bridge, one big, green +roller smashed over the bow of the vessel, staggering her so that +Tom was tossed against the rail. He would have been seriously +hurt, and his camera might have been broken, but for the +quickness of the giant. + +Koku caught his master, camera and all, in a mighty arm, and +with the other clung to a stanchion, holding Tom in safety until +the ship was on a level keel once more. + +"Thanks, Koku!" gasped Tom. "You always seem to be around when +I need you." The giant grinned happily. + +The storm blew out in a few days, and, from then on, there was +pleasant sailing. When Tom's airship had been reassembled at +Colon, it created quite a sensation among the small army of canal +workers, and, for their benefit, our hero gave several flying +exhibitions. + +He then took some of the engineers on a little trip, and in +turn, they did him the favor of letting him get moving pictures +of parts of the work not usually seen. + +"And now for the volcano!" cried Tom one morning, when having +shipped to Mr. Period the canal pictures, the Flyer was sent +aloft, and her nose pointed toward Arequipa. "We've got quite a +run before us." + +"How long?" asked Ned. + +"About two thousand miles. But I'm going to speed her up to the +limit." Tom was as good as his word, and soon the Flyer was +shooting along at her best rate, reeling off mile after mile, +just below the clouds. + +It was a wild and desolate region over which the travelers +found themselves most of the time, though the scenery was +magnificent. They sailed over Quito, that city on the equator, +and, a little later, they passed above the Cotopaxi and +Chimbarazo volcanoes. But neither of them was in action. The +Andes Mountains, as you all know, has many volcanoes scattered +along the range. Lima was the next large city, and there Tom made +a descent to inquire about the burning mountain he was shortly to +photograph. + +"It will soon be in action," the United States counsel said. "I +had a letter from a correspondent near there only yesterday, and +he said the people in the town were getting anxious. They are +fearing a shower of burning ashes, or that the eruption may be +accompanied by an earthquake." + +"Good!" cried Tom. "Oh, I don't mean it exactly that way," he +hastened to add, as he saw the counsel looking queerly at him. "I +meant that I could get pictures of both earthquake and volcano +then. I don't wish the poor people any harm." + +"Well, you're the first one I ever saw who was anxious to get +next door to a volcano," remarked the counsel. "Hold on, though, +that's not quite right. I heard yesterday that a couple of young +fellows passed through here on their way to the same place. Come +to think of it, they were moving picture men, also." + +"Great Scott!" cried Tom. "Those must be my rivals, I'll wager. +I must get right on the job. Thanks for the information," and +hurrying front the office he joined his friends on the airship. +and was soon aloft again. + +"Look, Tom, what's that?" cried Ned, about noon the next day +when the Flyer, according to their calculations must be nearing +the city of Arequipa. "See that black cloud over there. I hope +it isn't a tornado, or a cyclone, or whatever they call the big +wind storms down here." + +Tom, and the others, looked to where Ned pointed. There was a +column of dense smoke hovering in the air, lazily swirling this +way and that. The airship was rapidly approaching it. + +"Why that--" began Tom, but before he could complete the +sentence the smoke was blown violently upward. It became streaked +with fire, and, a moment later, there was the echo of a +tremendous explosion. + +"The volcano!" cried Tom. "The Arequipa volcano! We're here +just in time, for she's in eruption now! Come on, Ned, help me +get out the camera! Mr. Damon, you and Mr. Nestor manage the +airship! Put us as close as you dare! I'm going to get some +crackerjack pictures!" + +Once more came a great report. + +"Bless my toothpick!" gasped Mr. Damon. "This is awful!" And +the airship rushed on toward the volcano which could be plainly +seen now, belching forth fire, smoke and ashes. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV - THE MOLTEN RIVER + + +"Whew!" gasped Ned, as he stood beside Tom in the bow of the +airship. "What's that choking us, Tom?" + +"Sulphur, I guess, and gases from the volcano. The wind blew +'em over this way. They're not dangerous, as long as there is no +carbonic acid gas given off, and I don't smell any of that, yet. +Say, Ned, it's erupting all right, isn't it?" + +"I should say so!" cried his chum. + +"Put us a little to one side, Mr. Damon," called Tom to his +friend, who was in the pilot house. "I can't get good pictures +through so much smoke. "It's clearer off to the left." + +"Bless my bath robe!" cried the odd man. "You're as cool about +it, Tom, as though you were just in an ordinary race, at an +aeroplane meet." + +"And why shouldn't I be?" asked our hero with a laugh, as he +stopped the mechanism of the camera until he should have a +clearer view of the volcano. "There's not much danger up here, +but I want to get some views from the level, later, and then--" + +"You don't get me down there!" interrupted Mr. Nestor, with a +grim laugh. + +They were now hovering over the volcano, but high enough up so +that none of the great stones that were being thrown out could +reach them. The column of black smoke, amid which could be seen +the gleams of the molten fires in the crater, rolled toward them, +and the smell of sulphur became stronger. + +But when, in accordance with Tom's suggestion, the airship had +been sent over to one side, they were clear of the vapor and the +noxious gas. Then, too, a better view could be had of the volcano +below them. + +"Hold her down!" cried Tom, as he got in a good position, and +the propellers were slowed down so that they just overcame the +influence of a slight wind. Thus the Flyer hovered in the air, +while below her the volcano belched forth red-hot rocks, some of +them immense in size, and quantities of hot ashes and cinders. +Tom had the camera going again now, and there was every prospect +of getting a startling and wonderful, as well as rare series of +moving pictures. + +"Wow! That was a big one!" cried Ned, as an unusually large +mass of rocks was thrown out, and the column of fire and smoke +ascended nearly to the hovering craft. A moment later came an +explosion, louder than any that had preceded. "We'd better be +going up; hadn't we Tom?" his chum asked. + +"A little, yes, but not too far. I want to get as many near +views as I can." + +"Bless my overshoes!" gasped Mr. Damon, as he heard Tom say +that. Then he sent some of the vapor from the generating machine +into the gas bag, and the Flyer arose slightly. + +Ned looked in the direction of the town, but could not see it, +on account of the haze. Then he directed his attention to the +terrifying sight below him. + +"It's a good thing it isn't very near the city," he said to +Tom, who was engaged in watching the automatic apparatus of the +camera, to see when he would have to put in a fresh film. "It +wouldn't take much of this sort of thing to destroy a big city. +But I don't see any streams of burning lava, such as they always +say come out of a volcano." + +"It isn't time for that yet," replied Tom. "The lava comes out +last, after the top layer of stones and ashes have been blown +out. They are a sort of stopper to the volcano, I guess, like the +cork of a bottle, and, when they're out of the way, the red-hot +melted rock comes out. Then there's trouble. I want to get +pictures of that." + +"Well, keep far enough away," advised Mr. Nestor, who had come +forward. "Don't take any chances. I guess your rivals won't get +here in time to take any pictures, for they can't travel as fast +as we did." + +"No," agreed the young inventor, "unless some other party of +them were here ahead of us. They'll have their own troubles, +though, making pictures anything like as good as we're getting." + +"There goes another blast!" cried Ned, as a terrific explosion +sounded, and a shower of hot stuff was thrown high into the air. +"If I lived in Arequipa I'd be moving out about now." + +"There isn't much danger I guess, except from showers of +burning ashes, and volcanic dust," spoke Mr. Nestor, "and the +wind is blowing it away from the town. If it continues this way +the people will be saved." + +"Unless there is so much of the red-hot lava that it will bury +the city," suggested Tom. "I hope that doesn't happen," and he +could not repress a shudder as he looked down on the awful scene +below him. + +After that last explosion the volcano appeared to subside +somewhat, though great clouds of smoke and tongues of fire leaped +upward. + +"I've got to put in a new reel of film!" suddenly exclaimed +Tom. "While I stop the camera, Mr. Damon, I think you and Mr. +Nestor might put the airship down to the ground. I want some +views on the level." + +"What! Go down to earth with this awful volcano spouting fire?" +cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my comb and brush!" + +"We can get well down the side of the mountain," said Tom. "I +won't go into any danger, much less ask any one else to do so, +and I certainly don't want my ship damaged. We can land down +there," he said, pointing to a spot on the side of the volcanic +mountain, that was some distance removed from the mouth of the +crater. It won't take me long to get one reel of views, and then +I'll come up again." + +The two men finally gave in to Tom's argument, that there was +comparatively little danger, for they admitted that they could +quickly rise up at the first sign of danger, and accordingly the +Flyer descended. Tom quickly had a fresh reel of film inserted, +and started his camera to working, standing it on a tripod some +distance from the airship. + +Once more the volcano was "doing its prettiest," as Tom +expressed it. He glanced around, as another big explosion took +place, to see if any other picture men were on hand, but the +terrible mountain seemed deserted, though of course someone might +be on the other side. + +"What's that?" suddenly cried Ned, looking apprehensively at +his chum. At the same time Tom jumped to his feet, for he had +been kneeling near the camera. + +"Bless my--" began Mr. Damon, but he got no farther, for +suddenly the solid ground began to tremble and shake. + +"An earthquake!" shouted Mr. Nestor. "Come, Tom! Get back to +the ship!" The young inventor and Ned had been the only ones to +leave it, as it rested on a spur of the mountain. + +As Tom and Ned leaped forward to save the camera which was +toppling to one side, there came a great fissure in the side of +the volcano, and a stream of molten rock, glowing white with +heat, gushed out. It was a veritable river of melted stone, and +it was coming straight for the two lads. + +"Run! Run!" cried Mr. Nestor. "We have everything ready for a +quick flight. "Run, Tom! Ned!" + +The lads leaped for the Flyer, the molten rock coming nearer +and nearer, and then with a cry Koku sprang overboard and made a +dash toward his master. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV - THE EARTHQUAKE--CONCLUSION + + +"Here, Mr. Tom. Me carry you an' Ned. You hold picture machine!" +cried the giant. "Me run faster." + +As he spoke he lifted Ned up under one arm, and caught Tom in +the other. For they were but as children to his immense strength. +Tom held on to his camera, and, thus laden down, Koku ran as he +had never run before, toward the waiting airship. + +"Come on! Come on!" shouted Mr. Damon, for he could see what +Tom, Ned and Koku could not, that the stream of lava was nearing +them rapidly. + +"It's hot!" cried Ned, as a wave of warm air fanned his cheek. + +"I should say so!" cried Tom. "The volcano is full of red-hot +melted stone." + +There came a sickening shake of the earth. Koku staggered as he +ran on, but he kept his feet, and did not fall. Again came a +tremendous explosion, and a shower of fine ashes sifted over the +airship, and on Koku and his living burdens. + +"This is the worst ever!" gasped Tom. "But I've got some dandy +pictures, if we ever get away from here alive to develop them." + +"Hurry, Koku! Hurry!" begged Mr. Nestor. "Bless my shoe laces!" +yelled Mr. Damon, who was fairly jumping up and down on the deck +of the Flyer. "I'll never go near a volcano again!" + +Once more the ground shook and trembled, as the earthquake rent +it. Several cracks appeared in Koku's path, but he leaped over +them with tremendous energy. A moment later he had thrust Tom and +Ned over the rail, to the deck, and leaped aboard himself. + +"Let her go!" cried Tom. "I'll do the rest of my moving picture +work, around volcanoes and earthquakes, from up in the air!" + +The Flyer shot upward, and scarcely a moment too soon, for, an +instant after she left the ground, the stream of hot, burning and +bubbling lava rolled beneath her, and those on board could feel +the heat of it ascending. + +"Say, I'm glad we got out of that when we did," gasped Ned, as +he looked down. "You're all right, Koku." + +"That no trouble," replied the giant with a cheerful grin. "Me +carry four fellows like you," and he stretched out his big arms. +Tom had at once set his camera to working again, taking view +after view. + +It was a terrifying but magnificent sight that our friends +beheld, for the earth was trembling and heaving. Great fissures +opened in many places. Into some of them streams of lava poured, +for now the volcano had opened in several places, and from each +crack the melted rocks belched out. The crater, however, was not +sending into the air such volumes of smoke and ashes as before, +as most of the tremendous energy had passed, or was being used to +spout out the lava. + +The earthquake was confined to the region right about the +volcano, or there might have been a great loss of life in the +city. As it was, the damage done was comparatively slight. + +Tom continued to take views, some showing the earth as it was +twisted and torn, and other different aspects of the crater. +Then, as suddenly as the earthquake had begun, it subsided, and +the volcano was less active. + +"My! I'm glad to see that!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "I've had +about enough of horrors!" + +"And I have too," added Tom. "I'm on my last roll of film, and +I can't take many more pictures. But I guess I have all Mr. +Period needs, and we'll start for home, as soon as I finish the +next roll. But I'm going to save that for a night view. That will +he a novelty." + +The volcano became active again after dark, and presented a +magnificent though terrifying aspect. As the airship hovered +above it, Tom got some of his best pictures, and then, as the +last bit of film slipped along back of the lens, the airship was +headed north. + +"Now for Shopton!" cried Tom. "Our trip is ended." + +"It's too had you didn't have more film," said Ned. "I thought +you had plenty." + +"Well, I used more than I counted on, but there are enough +pictures as it is." + +"Plenty," agreed Mr. Nestor. "I'm sure our company will be very +well satisfied with them, Tom. We can't get home any too soon to +suit me. I've had enough excitement." + +"And we didn't see anything of those other fellows whom we +heard about," spoke Mr. Damon, as the big airship flew on. + +"No," said Tom. "But I'm not worrying about them." + +They made another stop in Lima, on their homeward trip, to +renew their supply of gasolene, and there learned that the rival +picture men had arrived at the volcano too late to see it in +operation. This news came to a relative of one of the two men who +lived in Lima. + +"Then our views of the earthquake and the smoking mountain will +be the only ones, and your company can control the rights," said +Tom to Mr. Nestor, who agreed with him. + +In due time, and without anything out of the ordinary happening +the Flyer reached Shopton, where Tom found a warm welcome +awaiting him, not only from his father, but from a certain young +lady, whose name I do not need to mention. + +"And so you got everything you went after, didn't you, Tom," +exclaimed Mr. Period, a few days later, when he had come from New +York to get the remainder of the films. + +"Yes, and some things I didn't expect," replied Tom. "There +was--" + +"Yes! Yes! I know!" interrupted the odd picture man. "It was +that jungle fire. That's a magnificent series. None better. And +those scoundrels took your camera; eh?" + +"Yes. Could you connect them with Turbot and Eckert?" asked +Tom. + +"No, but I'm sure they were acting for them just the same. I +had no legal evidence to act on, however, so I had to let it go. +Turbot and Eckert won't be in it when I start selling duplicates +of the films you have. And these last ought to be the best of +all. I didn't catch that fellow when I raced after him on the +dock. He got away, and has steered clear of me since," finished +Mr. Period. + +"And our rivals didn't secure any views like ours," said Tom. + +"I'm glad of it," spoke Mr. Period. "Turbot and Eckert bribed +one of my men, and so found out where I was sending messages to +you. They even got a copy of my cablegram. But it did them no +good." + +"Were all the films clear that I sent you?" asked our hero. + +"Every one. Couldn't be better. The animal views were +particularly fine. You must have had your nerve with you to get +some of 'em." + +"Oh, Tom always has his nerve," laughed Ned. + +"Well, how soon will you be ready to start out again?" asked +the picture man, as he packed up the last of the films which Tom +gave him. "I'd like to get some views of a Japanese earthquake, +and we haven't any polar views. I want some of them, taken as +near the North Pole as you can get." + +Tom gently shook his head. + +"What! You don't mean to say you won't get them for me?" cried +Mr. Period. "With that wonderful camera of yours you can get +views no one else ever could." + +"Then some one else will have to take them," remarked the young +inventor. "I'll lend you the camera, and an airship, and you can +go yourself, Mr. Period. I'm going to stay home for a while. I +did what I set out to do, and that's enough." + +"I'm glad you'll stay home, Tom," said his father. "Now perhaps +I'll get my gyroscope finished." + +"And I, my noiseless airship," went on our hero. "No, Mr. +Period, you'll have to excuse me this time. Why don't you go +yourself?" he asked. "You would know just what kind of pictures +you wanted." + +"No, I'm a promoter of the moving picture business, and I sell +films, but I don't know hew to take them," was the answer. +"Besides I--er--well, I don't exactly care for airships, Tom +Swift," he finished with a laugh. "Well, I can't thank you enough +for what you did for me, and I've brought you a check to cover +your expenses, and pay you as I agreed. All the same I'm sorry +you won't start for Japan, or the North Pole." + +"Nothing doing," said Tom with a laugh; and Mr. Period +departed. + +"Have you any idea what you will do next?" asked Ned, a day or +so later, when he and Tom were in the workshop. + +"I can't tell until I finish my noiseless airship," was the +answer. "Then something may happen." + +Something did, as I shall have the pleasure of telling you +about in the next volume of this series, to be called, "Tom Swift +and His Great Searchlight; or, On the Border for Uncle Sam," and +in it will be given an account of a great lantern our hero made, +and how he baffled the smugglers with it. + +"Oh, Tom, weren't you dreadfully frightened when you saw that +burning river of lava coming toward you?" asked Mary Nestor, when +the young inventor called on her later and told her some of his +adventures. "I should have been scared to death." + +"Well, I didn't have time to get scared," answered Tom. "It all +happened so quickly, and then, too I was thinking of my camera. +Next I knew Koku grabbed me, and it was all over." + +"But those wild beasts! Didn't they frighten you, especially +when the rhinoceros charged you?" + +"If you won't let it get out, I'll make a confession to you," +said Tom, lowering his voice. "I was scared stiff that time, but +don't let Ned know it." + +"I won't," promised Mary with a laugh. And now, when Tom is in +such pleasant company, we will take leave of him for a while, +knowing that. sooner or later, he will be seeking new adventures +as exciting as those of the past. + +THE END +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +THE TOM SWIFT SERIES + +By VICTOR APPLETON +12mo. CLOTH. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING. COLORED WRAPPERS. + + +These spirited tales convey In a realistic way the wonderful +advances in land and sea locomotion. Stories like these are +impressed upon the memory and their reading is productive only of +good. + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR CYCLE +Or Fun and Adventure on the Road + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR BOAT +Or The Rivals of Lake Carlopa + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP +Or The Stirring cruise of the Red Cloud + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT +Or Under the Ocean for Sunken Treasure + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT +Or The Speediest car on the Road + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE +Or The castaways of Earthquake Island + +TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS +Or The Secret of Phantom Mountain + +TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE +Or The Wreck of the Airship + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER +Or The Quickest Flight on Record + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE +Or Daring Adventures In Elephant Land + +TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD +Or Marvelous Adventures Underground + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER +Or Seeking the Platinum Treasure + +TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY +Or A Daring Escape by Airship + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA +Or The Perils of Moving Picture Taking + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT +Or On the Border for Uncle Sam + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS GIANT CANNON +Or The Longest Shots on Record + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS PHOTO TELEPHONE +Or The Picture that Saved a Fortune + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AERIAL WARSHIP +Or The Naval Terror of the Seas + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL +Or The Hidden city of the Andes + + +THE BUNNY BROWN SERIES + +By LAURA LEE HOPE + +Author of the Popular "Bobbsey Twins" Books + +wrapper and text illustrations drawn by + +FLORENCE ENGLAND NOSWORTHY +12mo. DURABLY BOUND. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING + + +These stories by the author of the "Bobbsey Twins" Books are +eagerly welcomed by the little folks from about five to ten years +of age. Their eyes fairly dance with delight at the lively doings +of inquisitive little Bunny Brown and his cunning, trustful +sister Sue. + +Bunny was a lively little boy. very inquisitive. When he did +anything, Sue followed his leadership. They had many adventures, +some comical in the extreme. + +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE ON GRANDPA'S FARM +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE PLAYING CIRCUS +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT CAMP REST-A-WHILE +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT AUNT LU'S CITY HOME +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE IN THE BIG WOODS +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE ON AN AUTO TOUR +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AND THEIR SHETLAND PONY +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE GIVING A SHOW +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT CHRISTMAS TREE COVE + + +THE BOBBSEY TWINS BOOKS + +For Little Men and Women + +By LAURA LEE HOPE + +Author of 'The Bunny Brown" Series. Etc. +12mo. DURABLY BOUND. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING + + +Copyright publications which cannot be obtained elsewhere. +Books that charm the hearts of the little ones, and of which they +never tire. + +THE BOBBSEY TWINS +THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN THE COUNTRY +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT THE SEASHORE +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT SCHOOL +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT SNOW LODGE +THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON A HOUSEBOAT +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT MEADOW BROOK +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT HOME +THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN A GREAT CITY +THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON BLUEBERRY ISLAND +THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON THE DEEP BLUE SEA +THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN THE GREAT WEST + + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS SERIES + +By LAURA LEE HOPE + +Author of "The Bobbsey Twins Series." + +l2mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING + +The adventures of Ruth and Alice DeVere. Their father, a widower, +is an actor who has taken up work for the "movies." Both girls +wish to aid him in his work and visit various localities to act +in all sorts of pictures. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS +Or First Appearance in Photo Dramas. + +Having lost his voice, the father of the girls goes into the +movies and the girls follow. Tells how many "parlor dramas" are +filmed. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT OAK FARM +Or Queer Happenings While Taking Rural Plays. + +Full of fun in the country, the haps and mishaps of taking film +plays, and giving an account of two unusual discoveries. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS SNOWBOUND +Or The Proof on the Film. + +A tale of winter adventures in the wilderness, showing how the +photo-play actors sometimes suffer. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS UNDER THE PALMS +Or Lost in the Wilds of Florida. + +How they went to the land of palms, played many parts in dramas +before the camera; were lost, and aided others who were also +lost. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT ROCKY RANCH +Or Great Days Among the Cowboys. + +All who have ever seen moving pictures of the rest west will +want to know just how they are made. This volume gives every +detail and is full of clean fun and excitement. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT SEA +Or a Pictured Shipwreck that Became Real. + +A thrilling account of the girls' experiences on the water. + +THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS IN WAR PLAYS +Or The Sham Battles at Oak Farm. + +The girls play important parts in big battle scenes and have +plenty of hard work along with considerable fun. + + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS SERIES + +By CAPTAIN QUINCY ALLEN + +The outdoor chums are four wide-awake lads, sons of wealthy men +of a small city located on a lake. The boys love outdoor life, +and are greatly interested in hunting, fishing, and picture +taking. They have motor cycles, motor boats, canoes, etc., and +during their vacations go everywhere and have all sorts of +thrilling adventures. The stories give full directions for +camping out, how to fish, how to hunt wild animals and prepare +the skins for stuffing, how to manage a canoe, how to swim, etc. +Full of the spirit of outdoor life. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS +Or The First Tour of the Rod, Gun and Camera Club. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON THE LAKE +Or Lively Adventures on Wildcat Island. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS IN THE FOREST +Or Laying the Ghost of Oak Ridge. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON THE GULF +Or Rescuing the Lost Balloonists. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS AFTER BIG GAME. +Or Perilous Adventures in the Wilderness. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON A HOUSEBOAT +Or The Rivals of the Mississippi. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS IN THE BIG WOODS +Or The Rival Hunters at Lumber Run. + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS AT CABIN POINT +Or The Golden Cup Mystery. + +12mo. Averaging 240 pages. Illustrated. Handsomely bound in +Cloth. + + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH SERIES + +By GERTRUDE W. MORRISON + +l2mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING. + +Here is a series full of the spirit of high school life of today. +The girls are real flesh-and-blood characters, and we follow them +with interest in school and out. There are many contested matches +on track and field, and on the water, as well as doings in the +classroom and on the school stage. There it plenty of fun and +excitement, all clean, pure and wholesome. + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH +Or Rivals for all Honors. + +A stirring tale of high school life, full of fun, with a tomb +of mystery and a strange initiation. + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON LAKE LUNA +Or The Crew That Won. + +Telling of water sports and fun galore, and of fine times in +camp. + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH AT BASKETBALL +Or The Great Gymnasium Mystery. + +Here we have a number of thrilling contests at basketball and +in addition, the solving of a mystery which had bothered the high +school authorities for a long while, + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON THE STAGE +Or The Play That Took the Prize. + +How the girls went In for theatricals and how one of them wrote +a play which afterward was made over for the professional stage +and brought in some much-needed money. + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON TRACK AND FIELD +Or The Girl Champions of the School League + +This story takes in high school athletics In their most +approved and up-to-date fashion. Full of fun and excitement. + +THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH IN CAMP +Or The Old Professor's Secret + +The girls went camping on Acorn Island and had a delightful +time at boating, swimming and picnic parties. + + + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH SERIES + +By GRAHAM B. FORBES + +Never was there a cleaner, brighter, more manly boy than Frank +Allen, the hero of this series of boys' tales, and never was +there a better crowd of lads to associate with than the students +of the School. All boys will read these stories with deep +interest. The rivalry between the towns along the river was of +the keenest, and plots and counterplot to win the champions, at +baseball, at football, at boat racing, at track athletics, and at +ice hockey, were without number. Any lad reading one volume of +this series will surely want the others. + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH +Or The All Around Rivals of the School + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE DIAMOND +Or Winning Out by Pluck + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE RIVER +Or The Boat Race Plot that Failed + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE GRIDIRON +Or The Struggle for the Silver Cup + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE ICE +Or Out for the Hockey Championship + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH IN TRACK ATHLETICS +Or A Long Run that Won + +THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH IN WINTER SPORTS +Or Stirring Doings on Skates and Iceboats + +I2mo. Illustrated. Handsomely bound In cloth, with cover design +and wrappers in color. + + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS SERIES + +By VICTOR APPLETON + +l2mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING. + + +Moving pictures and photo plays are famous the world over, and +in this line of books the reader is given a full description of +how the films are made--the scenes of little dramas, indoors and +out, trick pictures to satisfy the curious, soul-stirring +pictures of city affairs, life in the Wild West, among the +cowboys and Indians, thrilling rescues along the seacoast, the +daring of picture hunters in the jungle among savage beasts, and +the great risks run in picturing conditions in a land of +earthquakes. The volumes teem with adventures and will be found +interesting from first chapter to last. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS +Or Perils of a Great City Depicted. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN THE WEST +Or Taking Scenes Among the Cowboys and Indians. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS ON THE COAST +Or Showing the Perils of the Deep. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN THE JUNGLE +Or Stirring Times Among the Wild Animals. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN EARTHQUAKE LAND +Or Working Amid Many Perils. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS AND THE FLOOD +Or Perilous Days on the Mississippi. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS AT PANAMA +Or Stirring Adventures Along the Great Canal. + +THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS UNDER THE SEA +Or The Treasure of the Lost Ship. + + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS SERIES + +By LAURA LEE HOPE +Author of the "Bobbsey Twin Books" and "Bunny Brown" Series. + + +These tales take in the various adventures participated in by +several bright, up-to-date girls who love outdoor life. They are +clean and wholesome, free from sensationalism, absorbing from the +first chapter to the last. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS OF DEEPDALE +Or Camping and Tramping for Fun and Health. + +Telling bow the girls organized their Camping and Tramping +Club, how they went on a tour, and of various adventures which +befell them. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS AT RAINBOW LAKE +Or Stirring Cruise of the Motor Boat Gem. + +One of the girls becomes the proud possessor of a motor boat +and invites her club members to take a trip down the river to +Rainbow Lake, a beautiful sheet of water lying between the +mountains. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN A MOTOR CAR +Or The Haunted Mansion of Shadow Valley. + +One of the girls has learned to run a big motor ear, and she +invited the club to go on a tour to visit some distant relatives. +On the way they stop at a deserted mansion and make a surprising +discovery. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN A WINTER CAMP +Or Glorious Days on Skates and Ice Boats. + +In this story, the scene is shifted to a winter season. The +girls have some jolly times skating and ice boating, and visit a +hunters ramp in the big woods. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN FLORIDA +Or Wintering in the Sunny South. + +The parents of one of the girls have bought an orange grove in +Florida, and her companions are invited to visit the place. They +take a trip into the interior, where several unusual things +happen. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS AT OCEAN VIEW +Or The Box that Was Found in the Sand. + +The girls have great fun and solve a mystery while on an outing +along the New England coast. + +THE OUTDOOR GIRLS ON PINE ISLAND +Or A Cave and What it Contained. + +A bright, healthful story, full of good times at a bungalow +camp on Pine Island. + + + +CHARMING BOOKS FOR GIRLS + + +WHEN PATTY WENT TO COLLEGE, By Jean Webster. +Illustrated by C. D. Williams. + +One of the best stories of life in a girl's college that has +ever been written. It is bright, whimsical and entertaining, +lifelike, laughable and thoroughly human. + +JUST PATTY, By Jean Webster. +Illustrated by C. M. Relyea. + +Patty is full of the joy of living, fun-loving, given to +ingenious mischief for its own sake, with a disregard for pretty +convention which is an unfailing source of joy to her fellows. + +THE POOR LITTLE RICH GIRL, By Eleanor Gates. +With four full page illustrations. + +This story relates the experience of one of those unfortunate +children whose early days are passed in the companionship of a +governess, seldom seeing either parent, and famishing for natural +love and tenderness. A charming play as dramatized by the author. + +REBECCA OF SUNNYBROOK FARM, By Kate Douglas Wiggin. + +One of the most beautiful studies of childhood--Rebecca's +artistic, unusual and quaintly charming qualities stand out midst +a circle of austere New Englanders. The stage version is making a +phenomenal dramatic record. + +NEW CHRONICLES OF REBECCA, By Kate Douglas Wiggin. +Illustrated by F. C. Yohn. + +Additional episodes in the girlhood of this delightful heroine +that carry Rebecca through various stages to her eighteenth +birthday. + +REBECCA MARY, By Annie Hamilton Donnell. +Illustrated by Elizabeth Shippen Green. + +This author possesses the rare gift of portraying all the +grotesque little joys and sorrows and scruples of this very small +girl with a pathos that is peculiarly genuine and appealing. + +EMMY LOU: Her Book and Heart, By George Madden Martin, +illustrated by Charles Louis Hinton. + +Emmy Lou is irresistibly lovable, because she is so absolutely +real. She is just a bewitchingly innocent, hugable little maid. +The book is wonderfully human. + + + + +BOOKS BY VICTOR APPLETON + +THE TOM SWIFT SERIES + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR-CYCLE +Or Fun and Adventures on the Road +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR-BOAT +Or The Rivals of Lake Carlopa +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP +Or the Stirring Cruise of the Red cloud +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT +Or Under the Ocean for Sunken Treasure +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT +Or the Speediest Car on the Road +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE +Or the castaways of Earthquake Island +TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS +Or the Secret of Phantom Mountain +TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE +Or the Wreck of the Airship +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER +Or The Quickest Flight on Record +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE +Or Daring Adventures in Elephant Land +TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD +Or Marvelous Adventures Underground +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER +Or Seeking the Platinum Treasure +TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY +Or A Daring Escape by Airship +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA +Or Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving Pictures +TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT +Or On the Border for Uncle Sam + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Etext of Tom Swift And His Wizard Camera + diff --git a/old/old/14tom10.zip b/old/old/14tom10.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3868d02 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/old/14tom10.zip diff --git a/old/old/14tom10h.htm b/old/old/14tom10h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e7709e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/old/14tom10h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,6413 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<html> +<head> +<title>Tom Swift and his Wizard Camera</title> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content= +"text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> +<style type="text/css"> +<!-- +p { margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .75em; + } + h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; + } + hr { width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; + } + ol {margin-left:40%; margin-right:15%; text-align: left; + } + + body{margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + } +--> +</style> +</head> + +<body> + +<pre> +*Project Gutenberg's Etext of Tom Swift And His Wizard Camera* +#14 in the Victor Appleton's Tom Swift Series + +We name the Tom Swift files as they are numbered in the books-- +i.e. This is #14 in the series so the file name is 14tomxxx.xxx +where the x's are place holders for editon # and file type such +as 14tom10.txt and 14tom10.zip, when we do a .htm, 14tom10h.htm + + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world, be sure to check +the copyright laws for your country before posting these files!! + +Please take a look at the important information in this header. +We encourage you to keep this file on your own disk, keeping an +electronic path open for the next readers. Do not remove this. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**Etexts Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*These Etexts Prepared By Hundreds of Volunteers and Donations* + +Information on contacting Project Gutenberg to get Etexts, and +further information is included below. We need your donations. + + +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA +OR +Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving Pictures + +by Victor Appleton + +April, 1998 [Etext #1283 + + +*Project Gutenberg's Etext of Tom Swift And His Wizard Camera* +*****This file should be named 14tom10.txt or 14tom10.zip****** + +Corrected EDITIONS of our etexts get a new NUMBER, 14tom11.txt. +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, 14tom10a.txt. + + +This Etext was prepared for Project Gutenberg by Anthony Matonac. + + +We are now trying to release all our books one month in advance +of the official release dates, for time for better editing. + +Please note: neither this list nor its contents are final till +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg Etexts is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. To be sure you have an +up to date first edition [xxxxx10x.xxx] please check file sizes +in the first week of the next month. Since our ftp program has +a bug in it that scrambles the date [tried to fix and failed] a +look at the file size will have to do, but we will try to see a +new copy has at least one byte more or less. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +fifty hours is one conservative estimate for how long it we take +to get any etext selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. This +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If our value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour this year as we release thirty-two text +files per month: or 400 more Etexts in 1996 for a total of 800. +If these reach just 10% of the computerized population, then the +total should reach 80 billion Etexts. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away One Trillion Etext +Files by the December 31, 2001. [10,000 x 100,000,000=Trillion] +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only 10% of the present number of computer users. 2001 +should have at least twice as many computer users as that, so it +will require us reaching less than 5% of the users in 2001. + + +We need your donations more than ever! + + +All donations should be made to "Project Gutenberg/CMU": and are +tax deductible to the extent allowable by law. (CMU = Carnegie- +Mellon University). + +For these and other matters, please mail to: + +Project Gutenberg +P. O. Box 2782 +Champaign, IL 61825 + +When all other email fails try our Executive Director: +Michael S. Hart (hart@pobox.com) + +We would prefer to send you this information by email +(Internet, Bitnet, Compuserve, ATTMAIL or MCImail). + +****** +If you have an FTP program (or emulator), please +FTP directly to the Project Gutenberg archives: +[Mac users, do NOT point and click. . .type] + +ftp uiarchive.cso.uiuc.edu +login: anonymous +password: your@login +cd etext/etext90 through /etext96 +or cd etext/articles [get suggest gut for more information] +dir [to see files] +get or mget [to get files. . .set bin for zip files] +GET INDEX?00.GUT +for a list of books +and +GET NEW GUT for general information +and +MGET GUT* for newsletters. + +**Information prepared by the Project Gutenberg legal advisor** +(Three Pages) + + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this etext, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you can distribute copies of this etext if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS ETEXT +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +etext, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this etext by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this etext on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM ETEXTS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG- +tm etexts, is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor +Michael S. Hart through the Project Gutenberg Association at +Carnegie-Mellon University (the "Project"). Among other +things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this etext +under the Project's "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +To create these etexts, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's etexts and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other etext medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] the Project (and any other party you may receive this +etext from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext) disclaims all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this etext within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS ETEXT IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE ETEXT OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold the Project, its directors, +officers, members and agents harmless from all liability, cost +and expense, including legal fees, that arise directly or +indirectly from any of the following that you do or cause: +[1] distribution of this etext, [2] alteration, modification, +or addition to the etext, or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this etext electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + etext or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this etext in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word pro- + cessing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The etext, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The etext may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the etext (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + etext in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the etext refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Project of 20% of the + net profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Association/Carnegie-Mellon + University" within the 60 days following each + date you prepare (or were legally required to prepare) + your annual (or equivalent periodic) tax return. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +The Project gratefully accepts contributions in money, time, +scanning machines, OCR software, public domain etexts, royalty +free copyright licenses, and every other sort of contribution +you can think of. Money should be paid to "Project Gutenberg +Association / Carnegie-Mellon University". + +*END*THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS*Ver.04.29.93*END* + + + + + +This Etext was prepared for Project Gutenberg by Anthony Matonac. +</pre> + +<hr /> +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h1>TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA</h1> +<br /><br /> +<h3>OR</h3> +<h2>Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving Pictures</h2> + +<br /><br /> +<h3>BY</h3> +<h2>VICTOR APPLETON</h2> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2>CONTENTS</h2> + +<ol type="I"> +<li><a href="#ch1">A STRANGE OFFER</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch2">A MAN IN THE SNOW BANK</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch3">TOM MAKES UP HIS MIND</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch4">HELD FAST</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch5">TOM GETS A WARNING</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch6">TRYING THE CAMERA</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch7">WHAT THE CAMERA CAUGHT</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch8">PHOTOS FROM THE AIRSHIP</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch9">OFF FOR INDIA</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch10">UNEXPECTED EXCITEMENT</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch11">AN ELEPHANT STAMPEDE</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch12">THE LION FIGHT</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch13">A SHOT IN TIME</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch14">IN A GREAT GALE</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch15">SNAPPING AN AVALANCHE</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch16">TELEGRAPH ORDERS</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch17">SUSPICIOUS STRANGERS</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch18">THE NATIVE BATTLE</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch19">A HEAVY LOSS</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch20">AFTER THE ENGLISHMEN</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch21">THE JUNGLE FIRE</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch22">A DANGEROUS COMMISSION</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch23">AT THE VOLCANO</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch24">THE MOLTEN RIM</a></li> +<li><a href="#ch25">THE EARTHQUAKE--CONCLUSION</a></li> +</ol> +<hr /> +<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /> + +<h2><a name="ch1" id="ch1">CHAPTER I -- A STRANGE OFFER</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Some one to see you, Mr. Tom." </p> + +<p>It was Koku, or August, as he was sometimes called, the new +giant servant of Tom Swift, who made this announcement to the +young inventor.</p> + +<p>"Who is it, Koku?" inquired Tom, looking up from his work-bench +in the machine shop, where he was busy over a part of the motor +for his new noiseless airship. "Any one I know? Is it the +'Blessing Man?'" for so Koku had come to call Mr. Damon, an +eccentric friend of Tom's. </p> + +<p>"No, not him. A strange man. I never see before. He say he got +quick business."</p> + +<p>"Quick business; eh? I guess you mean important, Koku," for this +gigantic man, one of a pair that Tom had brought with him after +his captivity in "Giant Land," as he called it, could not speak +English very well, as yet. "Important business; eh, Koku? Did he +send in his card?" </p> + +<p>"No, Mr. Tom. Him say he have no card. You not know him, but +he very much what you call--recited."</p> + +<p>"Excited I guess you mean, Koku. Well, tell him to wait a few +minutes, and I'll see him. You can show him in then. But I say, +Koku," and Tom paused as he looked at the big man, who had +attached himself to our hero, as a sort of personal helper and +bodyguard. </p> + +<p>"Yes, Mr. Tom; what is it?"</p> + +<p>"Don't let him go poking around the shop. He might look at some +of my machines that I haven't got fully patented yet. Is he in +the front office?" </p> + +<p>"That's where him am. He be lookin' at pictures on the +walls."</p> + +<p>"Oh, that's all right then. Just keep him there. And, Koku, don't +let him come back in the shop here, until I get ready to see him. +I'll ring the bell when I am." </p> + +<p>"All right, Mr. Tom."</p> + +<p>Koku, very proud of his, mission of keeping guard over the +strange visitor, marched from the room with his big strides, his +long arms and powerful hands swinging at his sides, for Koku, or +August, as Tom had rechristened him, and as he often called him +(for it was in the month of August that he had located the +giants) was a very powerful man. A veritable giant, being +extremely tall, and big in proportion. </p> + +<p>"Be sure. Don't let him in here, Koku!" called Tom, in an +additional warning, as his new servant left the main shop.</p> + +<p>"Sure not!" exclaimed Koku, very earnestly. </p> + +<p>"I don't know who he may be," mused Tom, as he began putting +away the parts to his new noiseless motor, so that the stranger +could not see them, and profit thereby. "It looks rather funny, +not sending in his name. It may be some one who thinks he can +spring a trick on me, and get some points about my inventions, or +dad's.</p> + +<p>"It may even be somebody sent on by Andy Foger, or his father. I +can't be too careful. I'll just put everything away that isn't +fully covered by patents, and then if he wants to infringe on any +of the machines I can sue him." </p> + +<p>Tom looked about the shop, which was filled with strange +machinery, most of which had been made by himself, or his father, +or under their combined directions. There was a big biplane in +one corner, a small monoplane in another, parts of a submarine +boat hanging up overhead, and a small, but very powerful, +electric auto waiting to have some repairs made to it, for on his +last trip in it Tom Swift had suffered a slight accident.</p> + +<p>"There, I guess he can't see anything but what I want him to," +mused Tom, as he put away the last part of a new kind of motor, +from which he hoped great things. "Let's see, yes, it's out of +sight now. I wish Ned Newton, or Mr. Damon were here to be a +witness in case he starts anything. But then I have Koku, even if +he doesn't speak much English yet. If it comes to blows--well, I +wouldn't want that giant to hit me," finished Tom with a laugh, +as he rang the bell to announce to his servant that the visitor +might be shown in. </p> + +<p>There was a sound outside the door that separated the business +office from the main shop, and Tom heard Koku exclaim:</p> + +<p>"Hold on! Wait! I go first. You wait!" </p> + +<p>"What's the matter with me going ahead?" demanded a quick, +snappy voice. "I'm in a hurry, and--"</p> + +<p>"You wait! I go first," was the giant's reply, and then came the +sound of a scuffle. </p> + +<p>"Ouch! Say! Hold on there, my man! Take your hand off my +shoulder! You're crushing me with those big fingers of +yours!"</p> + +<p>This was evidently the visitor remonstrating with the giant. </p> + +<p>"Humph! I guess Koku must have grabbed him," said Tom softly. +"I don't like that sort of a visitor. What's his hurry getting in +here?" and our hero looked about, to see if he had a weapon at +hand in case of an attack. Often cranks had forced their way into +his shop, with pet inventions which they wanted him to perfect +after they had themselves failed. Tom saw a heavy iron bar at +hand, and knew this would serve to protect him.</p> + +<p>"You come after me!" exclaimed Koku, when the voice of the other +had ceased. "Do you stand under me?" </p> + +<p>"Oh, yes, I understand all right. I'll keep back. But I didn't +mean anything. I'm just in a hurry to see Tom Swift, that is all. +I'm always in a hurry in fact. I've lost nearly a thousand +dollars this morning, just by this delay. I want to see Mr. Swift +at once; and have a talk with him."</p> + +<p>"Another crank, I guess," mused Tom. "Well, I'm not going to +waste much time on him." </p> + +<p>A moment later the door opened, and into the shop stepped +Koku, followed by a short, stout, fussy little man, wearing a +flaming red tie, but otherwise his clothes were not +remarkable.</p> + +<p>"Is this Mr. Tom Swift?" asked the stranger, as he advanced and +held out his hand to the young man. </p> + +<p>"Yes," answered Tom, looking carefully at the visitor. He did +not seem to be dangerous, he had no weapon, and, Tom was relieved +to note that he did not carry some absurd machine, or appliance, +that he had made, hoping to get help in completing it. The youth +was trying to remember if he had ever seen the stranger before, +but came to the conclusion that he had not.</p> + +<p>"Sorry to take up your time," went on the man, "but I just had to +see you. No one else will do. I've heard lots about you. That was +a great stunt you pulled off, getting those giants for the +circus. This is one; isn't he?" and he nodded toward Koku. </p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Tom, wondering if the little man was in such a +hurry why he did not get down to business.</p> + +<p>"I thought so," the caller went on, as he shook hands with Tom. +"Once you felt his grip you'd know he was a giant, even if you +didn't see him. Yes, that was a great stunt. And going to the +caves of ice, too, and that diamond-making affair. All of 'em +great. I--" </p> + +<p>"How did you know about them?" interrupted Tom, wishing the +man would tell his errand.</p> + +<p>"Oh, you're better known than you have any idea of, Tom Swift. As +soon as I got this idea of mine I said right away, to some of the +others in my business, I says, says I, 'Tom Swift is the boy for +us. I'll get him to undertake this work, and then it will be done +to the Queen's taste. Tom's the boy who can do it,' I says, and +they all agreed with me. So I came here to-day, and I'm sorry I +had to wait to see you, for I'm the busiest man in the world, I +believe, and, as I said, I've lost about a thousand dollars +waiting to have a talk with you. I--" </p> + +<p>"I am sorry," interrupted Tom, and he was not very cordial. +"But I was busy, and--"</p> + +<p>"All right! All right! Don't apologize!" broke in the man in +rapid tones, while both Tom, and his servant, Koku, looked in +surprise at the quick flow of language that came from him. "Don't +apologize for the world. It's my fault for bothering you. And +I'll lose several thousand dollars, willingly, if you'll +undertake this job. I'll make money from it as it is. It's worth +ten thousand dollars to you, I should say, and I'm willing to pay +that." </p> + +<p>He looked about, as though for a seat, and Tom, apologizing +for his neglect in offering one, shoved a box forward.</p> + +<p>"We don't have chairs in here," said the young inventor with a +smile. "Now if you will tell me what you--" </p> + +<p>"I'm coming right to it. I'll get down to business in a +moment," interrupted the man as he sat down on the box, not +without a grunt or two, I for he was very stout. "I'm going to +introduce myself in just a second, and then I'm going to tell you +who I am. And I hope you'll take up my offer, though it may seem +a strange one."</p> + +<p>The man took out a pocketbook, and began searching through it, +evidently for some card or paper. </p> + +<p>"He's as odd as Mr. Damon is, when he's blessing everything," +mused Tom, as he watched the man.</p> + +<p>"I thought I had a card with me, but I haven't," the visitor went +on. "No matter. I'm James Period--promoter of all kinds of +amusement enterprises, from a merry-go-'round to a theatrical +performance. I want you to--" </p> + +<p>"No more going after giants," interrupted. Tom. "It's too +dangerous, and I haven't time--"</p> + +<p>"No, it has nothing to do with giants," spoke Mr. Period, as he +glanced up at Koku, who towered over him as he sat on the box +near Tom. </p> + +<p>"Well?" returned Tom.</p> + +<p>"This is something entirely new. It has never been done before, +though if you should happen to be able to get a picture of giants +don't miss the opportunity." </p> + +<p>"Get a picture?" exclaimed Tom, wondering if, after all, his +visitor might not be a little insane.</p> + +<p>"Pictures, yes. Listen. I'm James Period. Jim, if you like it +better, or just plain 'Spotty.' That's what most of my friends +call me. Get the idea? A period is a spot. I'm a Period, therefor +I'm a spot. But that isn't the real reason. It's because I'm +always Johnny on the Spot when anything is happening. If it's a +big boxing exhibition, I'm there. If it's a coronation, I'm +there, or some of my men are. If it's a Durbar in India, you'll +find Spotty on the spot. That's me. If there's going to be a +building blown up with dynamite--I'm on hand; or some of my men. +If there's a fire I get there as soon as the engines do--if it's +a big one. Always on the spot--that's me--James Period--Spotty +for short. Do you get me?" and he drew a long breath and looked +at Tom, his head on one side. </p> + +<p>"I understand that you are--"</p> + +<p>"In the moving picture business," interrupted Mr. Period, who +never seemed to let Tom finish a sentence. "I'm the biggest +moving picture man in the world--not in size, but in business. I +make all the best films. You've seen some of 'em I guess. Every +one of 'em has my picture on the end of the film. Shows up great. +Advertising scheme--get me?" </p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Tom, as he recalled that he had seen some of +the films in question, and good ones they were too. "I see your +point, but--"</p> + +<p>"You want to know why I come to you; don't you?" again +interrupted "Spotty," with a laugh. "Well, I'll tell you. I need +you in my business. I want you to invent a new kind of moving +picture camera. A small light one--worked by electricity--a +regular wizard camera. I want you to take it up in an airship +with you, and then go to all sorts of wild and strange countries, +Africa, India--the jungles--get pictures of wild animals at peace +and fighting--herds of elephants--get scenes of native +wars-earthquakes--eruptions of volcanoes--all the newest and most +wonderful pictures you can. You'll have to make a new kind of +camera to do it. The kind we use won't do the trick. </p> + +<p>"Now do you get me? I'm going to give you ten thousand +dollars, above all your expenses, for some films such as I've +been speaking of. I want novelty. Got to have it in my business! +You can do it. Now will you?"</p> + +<p>"I hardly think--" began Tom. </p> + +<p>"Don't answer me now," broke in Mr. Period. "Take four minutes +to think it over. Or even five. I guess I can wait that long. +Take five minutes. I'll wait while you make up your mind, but I +know you'll do it. Five minutes--no more,' and hastily getting up +off the box Mr. Period began impatiently pacing up and down the +shop.</p> + +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch2" id="ch2">CHAPTER II -- A MAN IN THE SNOW BANK</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>Tom Swift looked somewhat in surprise at his strange visitor. It +had all happened so suddenly, the offer had been such a strange +one, the man himself--Mr. Period--was so odd, that our hero +hardly knew what to think. The moving picture agent continued +pacing up and down the room now and then looking at his watch as +if to note when the five minutes had passed. </p> + +<p>"No," said Tom to himself. "I'm not going to take this offer. +There's too much work and risk attached to it. I want to stay at +home and work on my noiseless motor for the airship. After +that-well--I don't know what I'll do. I'll tell Mr. Period that +he needn't wait the five minutes. My mind is made up now!"</p> + +<p>But as Tom was about to make this announcement, and dismiss his +caller, he looked again at the visitor. There was something +attractive about him--about his hasty way of talking, about his +manner of interrupting, about the way he proposed matters. Tom +was interested in spite of himself. </p> + +<p>"Well," he reflected, "I may as well wait until the five +minutes are up, anyhow."</p> + +<p>Koku, the giant servant, glanced at his young master, as if to +ask if there was anything that he could do. Tom shook his head, +and then the big man strolled over to the other side of the +machine shop, at the same time keeping a careful eye on Mr. +Period. </p> + +<p>While Tom is waiting for the time to expire, I will take a few +minutes to tell you something more about him. Those of my friends +who have read the previous books in this series need no +introduction to my hero, but those who may chance upon this as +their first book in the Tom Swift series, will like to be more +formally introduced.</p> + +<p>Tom, whose mother had been dead some years, lived with his +father, Barton Swift, in the town of Shopton. Mr. Swift was an +inventor of prominence, and his son was fast following in his +footsteps. A Mrs. Baggert kept house for the Swifts, and another +member of the household was Eradicate Sampson, an aged colored +man, who said he used to "eradicate" the dirt. He had been with +Tom on many trips, but of late was getting old and feeble. Then +there was Garret Jackson, an engineer employed by the Swifts. +These were all the immediate members of the household. </p> + +<p>Tom had a chum, Ned Newton, who used to work in a bank, and +there was a girl, Mary Nestor, a daughter of Amos Nestor, in +which young lady Tom was much interested.</p> + +<p>Eradicate Sampson had a mule, Boomerang, of whom he thought +almost as much as he did of Tom. Eradicate was a faithful friend +and servant, but, of late, Koku, or August, the giant, had rather +supplanted him. I must not forget Mr. Wakefield Damon, of +Waterfield, a village near Shopton. Mr. Damon was an odd man, +always blessing everything. He and Tom were good friends, and had +been on many trips together. </p> + +<p>The first book of the series was called "Tom Swift and His +Motor-Cycle," and related how Tom bought the cycle from Mr. +Damon, after the latter had met with an accident on it, and it +was in this way that our hero became acquainted with the odd +man.</p> + +<p>Tom had many adventures on his motor-cycle, and, later on he +secured a motor-boat, in which he beat his enemy, Andy Foger, in +a race. Next Tom built an airship, and in this he went on a +wonderful trip. Returning from this he and his father heard about +a treasure sunken under the ocean. In his submarine boat Tom +secured the valuables, and made a large sum for himself. </p> + +<p>In his electric runabout, which was the swiftest car on the +road, Tom was able to save from ruin a bank in which his father +was interested, and, a short time after that, he went on a trip +in an airship, with a man who had invented a new kind. The +airship was smashed, and fell to Earthquake Island, where there +were some refugees from a shipwreck, among them being the parents +of Mary Nestor. In the volume called "Tom Swift and His Wireless +Message," I told how he saved these people.</p> + +<p>When Tom went among the diamond makers he had more strange +adventures, on that trip discovering the secret of phantom +mountain. He had bad luck when he went to the caves of ice, for +there his airship was wrecked. </p> + +<p>When Tom made the trip in his sky racer he broke all records +for an aerial flight, incidentally saving his father's life. It +was some time after this when he invented an electric rifle, and +went to elephant land, to rescue some missionaries from the red +pygmies.</p> + +<p>The eleventh volume of the series is called "Tom Swift in the +Land of Gold," and relates his adventures underground, while the +next one tells of a new machine he invented--an air-glider-which +he used to save the exiles of Siberia, incidentally, on that +trip, finding a valuable deposit of platinum. </p> + +<p>As I have said, it was on his trip to giant land that Tom got +his big servant. This book, the thirteenth of the series, is +called "Tom Swift in Captivity," for the giants captured him and +his friends, and it was only by means of their airship that they +made their daring escape.</p> + +<p>Tom had been back from the strange land some time now. One giant +he had turned over to the circus representative for whom he had +undertaken the mission, and the other he retained to work around +his shop, as Eradicate was getting too old. It was now winter, +and there had been quite a fall of snow the day before Mr. +Period, the odd moving picture man, called on Tom. There were +many big drifts outside the building. </p> + +<p>Tom had fitted up a well-equipped shop, where he and his +father worked on their inventions. Occasionally Ned Newton, or +Mr. Damon, would come over to help them, but of late Tom had been +so busy on his noiseless motor that he had not had time to even +see his friends.</p> + +<p>"Well, I guess the five minutes have passed, and my mind is made +up," thought Tom, as he looked at his watch. "I might as well +tell Mr. Period that I can't undertake his commission. In the +first place it isn't going to be an easy matter to make an +electric moving picture camera. I'd have to spend a lot of time +studying up the subject, and then I might not be able to get it +to work right. </p> + +<p>"And, again, I can't spare the time to go to all sorts of wild +and impossible places to get the pictures. It's all well enough +to talk about getting moving pictures of natives in battle, or +wild beasts fighting, or volcanoes in action, but it isn't so +easy to do it. Then, too, I'd have to make some changes in my +airship if I went on that trip. No, I can't go. I'll tell him +he'll have to find some one else."</p> + +<p>Mr. Period pulled out his watch, opened it quickly, snapped it +shut again, and exclaimed: </p> + +<p>"Well, how about it, Tom Swift? When can you start! The sooner +the better for me! You'll want some money for expenses I think. I +brought my check book along, also a fountain pen. I'll give you a +thousand dollars now, for I know making an electric moving +picture camera isn't going to be cheap work. Then, when you get +ready to start off in your airship, you'll need more money. I'll +be Johnny-on-the-spot all right, and have it ready for you. Now +when do you think you can start?"</p> + +<p>He sat down at a bench, and began filling out a check. </p> + +<p>"Hold on!" cried Tom, amused in spite of himself. "Don't sign +that check, Mr. Period. I'm not going."</p> + +<p>"Not going?" The man's face showed blank amazement. </p> + +<p>"No," went on Tom. "I can't spare the time. I'm sorry, but +you'll have to get some one else."</p> + +<p>"Some one else? But who can I get?" </p> + +<p>"Why, there are plenty who would be glad of the chance."</p> + +<p>"But they can't invent an electric moving picture camera, and, if +they could, they wouldn't know enough to take pictures with it. +It's got to be you or no one, Tom Swift. Look here, I'll make it +fifteen thousand dollars above expenses." </p> + +<p>"No, I'm sorry, but I can't go. My work here keeps me too +busy.</p> + +<p>"Oh, pshaw! Now, look here, Tom Swift! Do you know who sent me to +see you?" </p> + +<p>"It was Mr. Nestor, who has a daughter named Mary, I believe. +Mr. Nestor is one of the directors in our company, and one day, +when he told me about you sending a wireless message from +Earthquake Island, I knew you would be the very man for me. So +now you see you'll be doing Mr. Nestor a favor, as well as me, if +you go on this trip."</p> + +<p>Tom was somewhat surprised, yet he realized that Mr. Period was +speaking the truth. Mr. Nestor was identified with many new +enterprises. Yet the youth was firm. </p> + +<p>"I really can't go," said our hero. "I'd like to, but I can't. +I'd like to oblige Mr. Nestor, for--well, for more reasons than +one," and Tom blushed slightly. "But it is out of the question. I +really can't go."</p> + +<p>"But you must!" insisted the camera man. "I won't take 'no' for +an answer. You've got to go, Tom Swift, do you hear that? You've +go to go?" </p> + +<p>Mr. Period was apparently very much excited. He strode over to +Tom and smote his hands together to emphasize what he said. Then +he shook his finger at Tom, to impress the importance of the +matter on our hero.</p> + +<p>"You've just got to go!" he cried. "You're the only one who can +help me, Tom. Do go! I'll pay you well, and--oh, well, I know you +don't need the money, exactly, but--say, you've got to go!" </p> + +<p>In his earnestness Mr. Period laid his hand on Tom's arm. The +next instant something happened.</p> + +<p>With a few big strides Koku was beside the picture man. With +great quickness he grasped Mr. Period by the coat collar, lifted +him off his feet with one hand, and walked over to a window with +him, easily lifting him above the floor. </p> + +<p>With one fling the giant tossed the short, stout gentleman out +into a snow bank, while Tom looked on, too surprised to do +anything, even if he had had the chance.</p> + +<p>"There. You touch Tom Swift again, and I sit on you and keep you +under snow!" cried the giant, while Mr. Period kicked and +squirmed about in the drift, as Tom made a leap forward to help +him out.</p> + +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch3" id="ch3">CHAPTER III -- TOM MAKES UP HIS MIND</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Great Scott!" yelled the picture man. "What in the world +happened to me? Did I get kicked by that mule Boomerang of +Eradicate's, that I've heard so much about? Or was it an +earthquake, such as I want to get a picture of? What +happened?"</p> + +<p>He was still floundering about in the deep bank of snow that was +just outside the window. Fortunately the sash had been up, and +Koku had tossed Mr. Period through the open window. Otherwise, +had there been glass, the well-meaning, but unreasoning giant +would probably have thrown his victim through that, and he might +have been badly cut. Tom had the window open for fresh air, as it +was rather close in the shop. </p> + +<p>"Why, Koku!" exclaimed the young inventor, as he leaned out of +the window, and extended his hand to the moving picture man to +help him out of the drift. "What do von mean by that?" Have you +gone crazy?"</p> + +<p>"No, but no one shall lay hands on my master!" declared the giant +half savagely. "I have vowed to always protect you from danger, +in return for what you did for me. I saw this man lay his hand on +you. In another moment he might have killed you, had not Koku +been here. There is no danger when I am by," and he stretched out +his huge arms, and looked ferocious. "I have turned over that +man, your enemy!" he added. </p> + +<p>"Yes, you overturned me all right," admitted Mr. Period, as he +got to his feet, and crawled in through the window to the shop +again. "I went head over heels. I'm glad it was clean snow, and +not a mud bank, Tom. What in the world is the matter with +him?"</p> + +<p>"I guess he thought you were going to harm me, said Tom in a low +voice, as the picture man came in the shop. "Koku is very devoted +to me, and sometimes he makes trouble," the youth went on. "But +he means it all for the best. I am very sorry for what happened," +and Tom aided Mr. Period in brushing the snow off his garments. +"Koku, you must beg the pardon of this gentleman," Tom directed.</p> + +<p>"What for?" the giant wanted to know.</p> + +<p>"For throwing him into the snow. It is not allowed to do such +things in this country, even though it is in Giant Land. Beg his +pardon. </p> + +<p>"I shall not," said the giant calmly, for Tom had taught him +to speak fairly good English, though sometimes he got his words +backwards.</p> + +<p>"The man was about to kill you, and I stopped him--I will stop +him once more, though if he does not like the snow, I can throw +him somewhere else." </p> + +<p>"No! No! You must not do it!" cried Tom. "He meant no harm. He +is my friend."</p> + +<p>"I am glad to hear you say that," exclaimed the picture man. "I +have hopes that you will do what I want." </p> + +<p>"He your friend?" asked Koku wonderingly. "Certainly; and you +must beg his pardon for what you did," insisted Tom.</p> + +<p>"Very well. I am glad you did not hurt yourself," said the giant, +and with that "apology" he stalked out of the room, his feelings +evidently very much disturbed. </p> + +<p>"Ha! Ha!" laughed Mr. Period. "I guess he can't see any one +but you, Tom. But never mind. I know he didn't mean anything, +and, as I'm none the worse I'll forgive him. My necktie isn't +spotted; is it?"</p> + +<p>"No, the snow didn't seem to do that any harm," replied the young +inventor, as he looked at the brilliant piece of red silk around +Mr. Period's collar. </p> + +<p>"I am very particular about my neckties," went on the picture +man. "I always wear one color. My friends never forget me +then."</p> + +<p>Tom wondered how they could ever forget him, even though he wore +no tie, for his figure and face were such as to not easily be +forgotten. </p> + +<p>"I'm glad it's not soiled," went on "Spotty" as he liked to be +called. "Now, Tom, you said you were my friend. Prove it by +accepting my offer. Build that wizard camera, and get me some +moving pictures that will be a sensation. Say you will!"</p> + +<p>He looked appealingly at Tom, and, remembering the rather rude +and unexpected treatment to which Koku had submitted the +gentleman, Tom felt his mind changing. Still he was not yet ready +to give in. He rather liked the idea the more he thought of it, +but he felt that he had other duties, and much to occupy him at +home, especially if he perfected his silent motor. </p> + +<p>"Will you go?" asked Mr. Period, picking up his fountain pen +and check book, that he had laid aside when he walked over to +Tom, just before the giant grasped him. "Say you will."</p> + +<p>The young inventor was silent a moment. He thought over the many +adventures he had gone through--in the caves of ice, in the city +of gold, escaping from the giants, and the red pygmies--He went +over the details of his trips through the air, of the dangers +under the seas, of those he had escaped from on Earthquake +Island. Surely e was entitled to a little rest at home. </p> + +<p>And yet there was a lure to it all. A certain fascination that +was hard to resist. Mr. Period must have seen what was going on +in Tom's mind, for he said:</p> + +<p>"I know you're going. I can see it. Why, it will be just the very +thing you need. You'll get more fame out of this thing than from +any of your other inventions. Come, say you'll do it. </p> + +<p>"I'll tell you what I'll do !" he went on eagerly. "After you +make the camera, and take a lot of films, showing strange and +wonderful scenes, I'll put at the end of each film, next to my +picture, your name, and a statement showing that you took the +originals. How's that? Talk about being advertised! Why you can't +beat it! Millions of people will read your name at the picture +shows every night."</p> + +<p>"I am not looking for advertisements," said Tom, with a laugh.</p> + +<p>"Well, then, think of the benefit you will be to science," +went on Mr. Period quickly. "Think of the few people who have +seen wild animals as they are, of those who have ever seen an +earthquake, or a volcano in action. You can go to Japan, and get +pictures of earthquakes. They have them on tap there. And as for +volcanoes, why the Andes mountains are full of 'em. Think of how +many people will be thankful to you for showing them these +wonderful scenes."</p> + +<p>"And think of what might happen if I should take a tumble into a +crack in the earth, or down a hot volcano, or fall into a jungle +when there was a fight on among the elephants," suggested Tom. +"My airship might take a notion to go down when I was doing the +photographing," he added.</p> + +<p>"No. Nothing like that will happen to Tom Swift," was the +confident answer of the picture man. "I've read of your doings. +You don't have accidents that you can't get the better of. But +come, I know you're thinking of it, and I'm sure you'll go. Let +me make you out this check, sign a contract which I have all +ready, and then get to work on the camera."</p> + +<p>Tom was silent a moment. Then he said: </p> + +<p>"Well, I admit that there is something attractive about it. I +hoped I was going to stay home. for a long time. But--"</p> + +<p>"Then you'll go!" cried Mr. Period eagerly. "Here's the money," +and he quickly filled out a check for Tom's first expenses, +holding the slip of paper toward the young inventor. </p> + +<p>"Wait a minute! Hold on!" cried Tom. "Not so fast if you +please. I haven't yet made up my mind."</p> + +<p>"But you will; won't you?" asked Mr. Period. </p> + +<p>"Well, I'll make up my mind, one way or the other," replied +the young man. "I won't say I'll go, but--"</p> + +<p>"I'll tell you what I'll do!" interrupted Mr. Period. "I'm a busy +man, and every second is worth money to me. But I'll wait for you +to make up your mind. I'll give you until to-morrow night. How's +that? Fair, isn't it?" </p> + +<p>"Yes--I think so. I am afraid--"</p> + +<p>"I'm not!" broke in the picture man. "I know you'll decide to go. +Think of the fun and excitement you'll have. Now I've taken up a +lot of your time, and I'm going to leave you alone. I'll be back +tomorrow evening for my answer. But I know you're going to get +those moving pictures for me. Is that giant of yours anywhere +about?" he asked, as he looked cautiously around before leaving +the shop. "I don't want to fall into his hands again." </p> + +<p>"I don't blame you," agreed Tom. "I never knew him to act that +way before. But I'll go to the gate with you, and Koku will +behave him self. I am sorry--"</p> + +<p>"Don't mention it !" broke in the picture man. "It was worth all +I suffered, if you go, and I know you will. Don't trouble +yourself to come out. I can find my way, and if your giant comes +after me, I'll call for help." </p> + +<p>He hurried out before Tom could follow, and, hearing the gate +click a little later, and no call for help coming, our hero +concluded that his visitor had gotten safely away.</p> + +<p>"Well, what am I going to do about it?" mused Tom, as he resumed +work on his silent motor. He had not been long engaged in +readjusting some of the valves, when he was again interrupted.</p> + +<p>This time it was his chum, Ned Newton, who entered, and, as +Ned was well known to the giant, nothing happened.</p> + +<p>"Well, what's up, Tom?" asked Ned. </p> + +<p>"Why, did you notice anything unusual?" asked Tom.</p> + +<p>"I saw Koku standing at the gate a while ago, looking down the +road at a short stout man, with a red tie. Your giant seemed +rather excited about something." </p> + +<p>"Oh, yes. I'll tell you about it," and Tom related the details +of Mr. Period's visit.</p> + +<p>"Are you going to take his offer?" asked Ned. </p> + +<p>"I've got until tomorrow to make up my mind. What would you +do, Ned?"</p> + +<p>"Why, I'd take it in a minute, if I knew how to make an electric +camera. I suppose it has to be a very speedy one, to take the +kind of pictures he wants. Wait, hold on, I've just thought of a +joke. It must be a swift camera--catch on--you're Swift, and you +make a swift camera; see the point?" </p> + +<p>"I do," confessed Tom, with a laugh. "Well, Ned, I've been +thinking it over, but I can't decide right away. I will tomorrow +night, though."</p> + +<p>"Then I'm coming over, and hear what it is. If you decide to go, +maybe you'll take me along." </p> + +<p>"I certainly will, and Mr. Damon, too."</p> + +<p>"How about the giant?" </p> + +<p>"Well, I guess there'll be room for him. But I haven't decided +yet. Hand me that wrench over there; will you," and then Tom and +Ned began talking about the new apparatus on which the young +inventor was working.</p> + +<p>True to his promise Mr. Period called the next evening. He found +Tom, Ned and Mr. Swift in the library, talking over various +matters. </p> + +<p>"Well, Tom, have you made up your mind?" asked the caller, +when Mrs. Baggert, the housekeeper, had shown him into the room. +"I hope you have, and I hope it is favorable to me."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Tom slowly, "I've thought it all over, and I have +decided that I will--" </p> + +<p>At that moment there was a loud shouting outside the house, +and the sound of some one running rapidly through the garden that +was just outside the low library window--a garden now buried deep +under snow.</p> + +<p>"What's that?" cried Ned, jumping to his feet. </p> + +<p>"That was Koku's voice," replied Tom, "and I guess he was +chasing after some one."</p> + +<p>"They'll need help if that giant gets hold of them," spoke Mr. +Period solemnly, while the noise outside increased in volume.</p> + +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch4" id="ch4">CHAPTER IV -- HELD FAST</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Here, Tom! Come back! Where are you going?" cried aged Mr. +Swift, as his son started toward the window.</p> + +<p>"I'm going to see what's up, and who it is that Koku is chasing," +replied the young inventor. </p> + +<p>As he spoke he opened the window, which went all the way down +to the floor. He stepped out on a small balcony, put his hand on +the railing, and was about to leap over. Back of him was his +father, Mr. Period and Ned.</p> + +<p>"Come back! You may get hurt!" urged Mr. Swift. He had aged +rapidly in the last few months, and had been obliged to give up +most of his inventive work. Naturally, he was very nervous about +his son. </p> + +<p>"Don't worry, dad; replied the youth. "I'm not in much danger +when Koku is around."</p> + +<p>"That's right, agreed the moving picture man. "I'd sooner have +that giant look after me than half a dozen policemen." </p> + +<p>The noise had now grown fainter, but the sound of the pursuit +could still be heard. Koku was shouting in his hearty tones, and +there was the noise of breaking twigs as the chase wound in and +out of the garden shrubbery.</p> + +<p>Tom paused a moment, to let his eyes get somewhat used to the +darkness. There was a crescent moon, that gave a little light, +and the snow on the ground made it possible to notice objects +fairly well. </p> + +<p>"See anything?" asked Ned, as he joined his chum on the +balcony.</p> + +<p>"No, but I'm going to have a closer look. Here goes!" and Tom +leaped to the ground. </p> + +<p>"I'm with you," added Ned, as he followed.</p> + +<p>Then came another voice, shouting: </p> + +<p>"Dat's de way! Catch him! I'se comm', I is! Ef we gits him +we'll tie him up, an' let Boomerang walk on him!"</p> + +<p>"Here comes Eradicate," announced Tom, with a look back toward +his chum, and a moment later the aged colored man, who had +evidently started on the chase with Koku, but who had been left +far behind, swung totteringly around the corner of the house.</p> + +<p>"Did ye cotch him, Massa Tom?" asked Eradicate. "Did ye cotch +de raskil?"</p> + +<p>"Not yet, Rad. But Koku is after him. Who was he, and what did he +do?" </p> + +<p>"Didn't do nuffin yit, Massa Tom, 'case as how he didn't git +no chance," replied the colored man, as he hurried along as +rapidly as he could beside the two youths. "Koku and I was too +quick for him. Koku an' me was a-sittin' in my shack, sort of +talkin' togedder, when we hears a racket neah de chicken house. +I'se mighty partial t' de chickens, an' I didn't want nobody t' +'sturb 'em. Koku was jes' de same, an' when we hears dat noise, +up we jumps, an' gits t' chasm.' He runned dis way, an' us was +arter him, but land lub yo', ole Eradicate ain't so spry as he +uster be an' Koku an' de chicken thief got ahead ob me. Leastwise +he ain't no chicken thief yit, 'case as how he didn't git in de +coop, but he meant t' be one, jes' de same."</p> + +<p>"Are you sure he was after the chickens?" asked Tom, with quick +suspicion in his mind, for, several times of late, unscrupulous +persons had tried to enter his shop, to get knowledge of his +valuable inventions before they were patented. </p> + +<p>"Course he were arter de chickens," replied Eradicate. "But he +didn't git none."</p> + +<p>"Come on, Ned!" cried Tom, breaking into a run. "I want to catch +whoever this was. Did you see him, Rad?" </p> + +<p>"Only jes' had a glimpse ob his back."</p> + +<p>"Well, you go back to the house and tell father and Mr. Period +about it. Ned and I will go on with Koku. I hope to get the +fellow." </p> + +<p>"Why, Tom?" asked his chum.</p> + +<p>"Because I think he was after bigger game than chickens. My +noiseless motor, for the new airship, is nearly complete, and it +may have been some one trying to get that. I received an offer +from a concern the other day, who wished to purchase it, and, +when I refused to sell, they seemed rather put out." </p> + +<p>The two lads raced on, while Eradicate tottered back to the +house, where he found Mr. Swift and the picture man awaiting +him.</p> + +<p>"I guess he got away," remarked Ned, after he and his chum had +covered nearly the length of the big garden. </p> + +<p>"I'm afraid so," agreed Tom. "I can't hear Koku any more. +Still, I'm not going to give up."</p> + +<p>Pantingly they ran on, and, a little later, they met the big man +coming back. </p> + +<p>"Did he get away?" asked Tom.</p> + +<p>"Yes, Mr. Tom, he scaped me all right." </p> + +<p>"Escaped you mean, Koku. Well, never mind. You did your +best."</p> + +<p>"I would like to have hold of him," spoke the giant, as he +stretched out his big arms. </p> + +<p>"Did you know who he was?" inquired Ned.</p> + +<p>"No, I couldn't see his face," and he gave the same description +of the affair as had Eradicate. </p> + +<p>"Was it a full grown man, or some one about my size?" Tom +wanted to know.</p> + +<p>"A man," replied the giant. </p> + +<p>"Why do you ask that?" inquired Ned, as the big fellow went on +to resume his talk with Eradicate, and the two chums turned to go +into the house, after the fruitless chase.</p> + +<p>"Because, I thought it might be Andy Foger," was Tom's reply. "It +would be just like him, but if it was a man, it couldn't be him. +Andy's rather short." </p> + +<p>"Besides, he doesn't live here any more," said Ned.</p> + +<p>"I know, but I heard Sam Snedecker, who used to be pretty thick +with him, saying the other day that he expected a visit from +Andy. I hope he doesn't come back to Shopton, even for a day, for +he always tries to make trouble for me. Well, let's go in, and +tell 'em all about our chase after a chicken thief." </p> + +<p>"And so he got away?" remarked Mr. Swift, when Tom had +completed his story.</p> + +<p>"Yes," answered the young inventor, as he closed, and locked, the +low library window, for there was a chilly breeze blowing. "I +think I will have to rig up the burglar alarm on my shop again. I +don't want to take any chances." </p> + +<p>"Do you remember what we were talking about, when that +interruption came?" asked Mr. Period, after a pause. "You were +saying, Tom, that you had made up your mind, and that was as far +as you got. What is your answer to my offer?"</p> + +<p>"Well," spoke the lad slowly, and with a smile, "I think I +will--" </p> + +<p>"Now don't say 'no'"; interrupted the picture man. "If you are +going to say 'no' take five minutes more, or even ten, and think +it over carefully. I want you--"</p> + +<p>"I wasn't going to say 'no,'" replied Tom. "I have decided to +accept your offer, and I'll get right at work on the electrical +camera, and see what I can do in the way of getting moving +pictures for you." </p> + +<p>"You will? Say, that's great! That's fine! I knew you would +accept, but I was the least bit afraid you might not, without +more urging."</p> + +<p>"Of course," began Tom, "it will take--" </p> + +<p>"Not another word. Just wait a minute," interrupted Mr. Period +in his breezy fashion. "Take this."</p> + +<p>He quickly filled out a check and handed it to Tom. </p> + +<p>"Now sign this contract, which merely says that you will do +your best to get pictures for me, and that you won't do it for +any other concern, and everything will be all right. Sign there," +he added, pointing to a dotted line, and thrusting a fountain pen +into Tom's hand. The lad read over the agreement, which was fair +enough, and signed it, and Ned affixed his name as a witness.</p> + +<p>"Now when can you go?" asked Mr. Period eagerly. </p> + +<p>"Not before Spring, I'm afraid," replied Torn. "I have first +to make the camera, and then my airship needs overhauling if I am +to go on such long trips as will be necessary in case I am to get +views of wild beasts in the jungle."</p> + +<p>"Well, make it as soon as you can," begged Mr. Period. "I can +have the films early next Fall then, and they will be in season +for the Winter runs at the theatres. Now, I'm the busiest man in +the world, and I believe I have lost five hundred dollars by +coming here to-night. Still, I don't regret it. I'm going back +now, and I'll expect to hear from you when you are ready to +start. There's my address. Good-bye," and thrusting a card into +Tom's hand he hurried out of the room. </p> + +<p>"Won't you stop all night?" called Mr. Swift after him.</p> + +<p>"Sorry. I'd like to but can't. Got a big contract I must close in +New York to-morrow morning. I've ordered a special train to be at +the Shopton station in half an hour, and I must catch that. Good +night!" and Mr. Period hurried away. </p> + +<p>"Say, he's a hustler all right!" exclaimed Ned.</p> + +<p>"Yes, and I've got to hustle if I invent that camera," added Tom. +"It's got to be a specially fast one, and one that can take +pictures from a long distance. Electricity is the thing to use, I +guess." </p> + +<p>"Then you are really going off on this trip. Tom?" asked his +father, rather wistfully.</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid I am," replied his son. "I thought I could stay at +home for a while, but it seems not." </p> + +<p>"I was in hopes you could give me a little time to help me on +my gyroscope invention," went on the aged man. "But I suppose it +will keep until you come back. It is nearly finished."</p> + +<p>"Yes, and I don't like stopping work on my noiseless motor," +spoke Tom. "But that will have to wait, too." </p> + +<p>"Do you know where you are going?" inquired Ned.</p> + +<p>"Well, I'll have to do considerable traveling I suppose to get +all the films he wants. But once I'm started I'll like it I +guess. Of course you're coming, Ned." </p> + +<p>"I hope so."</p> + +<p>"Of course you are!" insisted Tom, as if that settled it. "And +I'm sure Mr. Damon will go also. I haven't seen him in some time. +I hope he isn't ill." </p> + +<p>Tom started work on his Wizard Camera, as he called it, the +next day--that is he began drawing the designs, and planning how +to construct it. Ned helped him, and Koku was on hand in case he +was needed, but there was little he could do, as yet. Tom made an +inspection of his shop the morning after the chicken thief scare, +but nothing seemed to have been disturbed.</p> + +<p>A week passed, and Tom had all the plans drawn for the camera. He +had made several experiments with different forms of electricity +for operating the mechanism, and had decided on a small, but very +powerful, storage battery to move the film, and take the +pictures. </p> + +<p>This storage battery, which would be inside the camera, would +operate it automatically. That is, the camera could be set up any +place, in the jungle, or on the desert, it could be left alone, +and would take pictures without any one being near it. Tom +planned to have it operate at a certain set time, and stop at a +certain time, and he could set the dials to make this time any +moment of the day or night. For there was to be a powerful light +in connection with the camera, in order that night views might be +taken. Besides being automatic the camera could be worked by +hand.</p> + +<p>When it was not necessary to have the camera operate by the +storage battery, it could be connected to wires and worked by an +ordinary set of batteries, or by a dynamo. This was for use on +the airship, where there was a big electrical machine. I shall +tell you more about the camera as the story proceeds. </p> + +<p>One afternoon Tom was alone in the shop, for he had sent Koku +on an errand, and Eradicate was off in a distant part of the +grounds, doing some whitewashing, which was his specialty. Ned +had not come over, and Mr. Swift, having gone to see some +friends, and Mrs. Baggert being at the store, Tom, at this +particular time, was rather isolated.</p> + +<p>He was conducting some delicate electrical experiments, and to +keep the measuring instruments steady he had closed all the +windows and doors of his shop. The young inventor was working at +a bench in one corner, and near him, standing upright, was a +heavy shaft of iron, part of his submarine, wrapped in burlap, +and padded, to keep it from rusting. </p> + +<p>"Now," said Tom to himself, as he mixed two kinds of acid in a +jar, to produce a new sort of electrical current, "I will see if +this is any better than the first way in which I did it."</p> + +<p>He was careful about pouring out the powerful stuff, but, in +spite of this, he spilled a drop on his finger. It burned like +fire, and, instinctively, he jerked his hand back. </p> + +<p>The next instant there was a series of happenings. Tom's elbow +came in contact with another jar of acid, knocking it over, and +spilling it into the retort where he had been mixing the first +two liquids. There was a hissing sound, as the acids combined, +and a thick, white vapor arose, puffing into Tom's face, and +making him gasp.</p> + +<p>He staggered back, brushed against the heavy iron shaft in the +corner, and it fell sideways against him, knocking him to the +floor, and dropping across his thighs. The padding on it saved +him from broken bones, but the shaft was so heavy, that after it +was on him, Tom could not move. He was held fast on the floor of +his shop, unable to use his legs, and prevented from getting up.</p> + +<p>For a moment Tom was stunned, and then he called:</p> + +<p>"Help! Help! Eradicate! Koku! Help!" </p> + +<p>He waited a moment, but there was only a silence.</p> + +<p>And then Tom smelled a strange odor--an odor of a choking gas +that seemed to smother him. </p> + +<p>"It's the acids!" he cried. "They're generating gas! And I'm +held fast here! The place is closed up tight, and I can't move! +Help! Help!"</p> + +<p>But there was no one at hand to aid Tom, and every moment the +fumes of the gas became stronger. Desperately the youth struggled +to rid himself of the weight of the shaft, but he could not. And +then he felt his senses leaving him, for the powerful gas was +making him unconscious. </p> + +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch5" id="ch5">CHAPTER V -- TOM GETS A WARNING</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Bless my shoe buttons!" exclaimed a voice, as a man came +toward Tom's shop, a little later. "Bless my very necktie! This +is odd. I go to the house, and find no one there. I come out +here, and not a soul is about. Tom Swift can't have gone off on +another one of his wonderful trips, without sending me word. I +know he wouldn't do that. And yet, bless my watch and chain, I +can't find any one!"</p> + +<p>It was Mr. Damon who spoke, as my old readers have already +guessed. He peered into one of the shop windows, and saw +something like a fog filling the place. </p> + +<p>"That's strange," he went on. "I don't see Tom there, and yet +it looks as if an experiment was going on. I wonder--"</p> + +<p>Mr. Damon heard some one coming up behind him, and turned to see +Koku the giant, who was returning . from the errand on which Tom +had sent him. </p> + +<p>"Oh, Koku, it's you; is it?" the odd man asked. "Bless my cuff +buttons! Where is Tom?"</p> + +<p>"In shop I guess." </p> + +<p>"I don't see him. Still I had better look. There doesn't seem +to be any one about."</p> + +<p>Mr. Damon opened the shop door, and was met by such an outward +rush of choking gas that he staggered back. </p> + +<p>"Bless my--" he began but he had to stop, to cough and gasp. +"There must have been some sort of an accident," he cried, as he +got his lungs full of fresh air. "A bad accident! Tom could never +work in that atmosphere. Whew!"</p> + +<p>"Accident! What is matter?" cried Koku stepping to the doorway. +He, too choked and gasped, but his was such a strong and rugged +nature, and his lungs held such a supply of air, that it took +more than mere gas to knock him out. He peered in through the +wreaths of the acid vapor, and saw the body of his master, lying +on the floor--held down by the heavy iron. </p> + +<p>In another instant Koku had rushed in, holding his breath, +for, now that he was inside the place, the gas made even him feel +weak.</p> + +<p>"Come back! Come back!" cried Mr. Damon. 'You'll be smothered! +Wait until the gas escapes!" </p> + +<p>"Then Mr. Tom die!" cried the giant. "I get him--or I no come +out."</p> + +<p>With one heave of his powerful right arm, Koku lifted the heavy +shaft from Tom's legs. Then, gathering the lad up in his left +arm, as if he were a baby, Koku staggered out into the fresh air, +almost falling with his burden, as he neared Mr. Damon, for the +giant was, well-nigh overcome. </p> + +<p>"Bless my soul!" cried the odd man. "Is he--is he--"</p> + +<p>He did not finish the sentence, but, as Koku laid Tom down on the +overcoat of Mr. Damon, which the latter quickly spread on the +snow, the eccentric man put his hand over the heart of the young +inventor. </p> + +<p>"It beats!" he murmured. "He's alive, but very weak. We must +get a doctor at once. I'll do what I can. There's no time to +spare. Bless my--"</p> + +<p>But Mr. Damon concluded that there was no time for blessing +anything, and so he stopped short. </p> + +<p>"Carry him up to the house, Koku," he said. "I know where +there are some medicines, and I'll try to revive him while we're +waiting for the doctor Hurry!"</p> + +<p>Tom was laid on a lounge, and, just then, Mrs. Baggert came in.</p> + +<p>"Telephone for the doctor!" cried Mr. Damon to the +housekeeper, who kept her nerve, and did not get excited. "I'll +give Tom some ammonia, and other stimulants, and see if I can +bring him around. Koku, get me some cold water."</p> + +<p>The telephone was soon carrying the message to the doctor, who +promised to come at once. Koku, in spite of his size, was quick, +and soon brought the water, into which Mr. Damon put some strong +medicine, that he found in a closet. Tom's eyelids fluttered as +the others forced some liquid between his lips. </p> + +<p>"He's coming around!" cried the eccentric man. "I guess he'll +be all right, Koku."</p> + +<p>"Koku glad," said the giant simply, for he loved Tom with a deep +devotion. </p> + +<p>"Yes, Koku, if it hadn't been for you, though, I don't believe +that he would be alive. That was powerful gas, and a few seconds +more in there might have meant the end of Tom. I didn't see him +lying on the floor, until after you rushed in. Bless my +thermometer! It is very strange."</p> + +<p>They gave Tom more medicine, rubbed his arms and legs, and held +ammonia under his nose. Slowly he opened his eyes, and in a faint +voice asked: </p> + +<p>"Where--am--I?"</p> + +<p>"In your own house," replied Mr. Damon, cheerfully. "How do you +feel?" </p> + +<p>"I'm--all--right--now," said Tom slowly. He, felt his strength +coming gradually back, and he remembered what had happened, +though he did not yet know how he had been saved. The doctor came +in at this moment, with a small medical battery, which completed +the restorative work begun by the others. Soon Tom could sit up, +though he was still weak and rather sick.</p> + +<p>"Who brought me out?" he asked, when he had briefly told how the +accident occurred. </p> + +<p>"Koku did," replied Mr. Damon. "I guess none of the rest of us +could have lifted the iron shaft from your legs."</p> + +<p>"It's queer how that fell," said Tom, with a puzzled look on his +face. "I didn't hit it hard enough to bring it down. Beside, I +had it tied to nails, driven into the wall, to prevent just such +an accident as this. I must see about it when I get well." </p> + +<p>"Not for a couple of days," exclaimed the doctor grimly. +"You've got to stay in bed a while yet. You had a narrow escape, +Tom Swift."</p> + +<p>"Well, I'm glad I went to Giant Land," said the young inventor, +with a wan smile. "Otherwise I'd never have Koku," and he looked +affectionately at the big man, who laughed happily. In nature +Koku was much like a child. </p> + +<p>Mr. Swift came home a little later, and Ned Newton called, +both being very much surprised to hear of the accident. As for +Eradicate, the poor old colored man was much affected, and would +have sat beside Tom's bed all night, had they allowed him.</p> + +<p>Our hero recovered rapidly, once the fumes of the gas left his +system, and, two days later, he was able to go out to the shop +again. At his request everything had been left just as it was +after he had been brought out. Of course the fumes of the gas +were soon dissipated, when the door was opened, and the acids, +after mingling and giving off the vapor, had become neutralized, +so that they were now harmless. </p> + +<p>"Now I'm going to see what made that shaft fall," said Tom to +Ned, as the two chums walked over to the bench where the young +inventor had been working. "The tap I gave it never ought to have +brought it down."</p> + +<p>Together they examined the thin, but strong, cords that had been +passed around the shaft, having been fastened to two nails, +driven into the wall. </p> + +<p>"Look!" cried Tom, pointing to one of the cords.</p> + +<p>"What is it?" asked Ned. </p> + +<p>"The strands were partly cut through, so that only a little +jar was enough to break the remaining ones," went on Tom. +"They've been cut with a knife, too, and not frayed by vibration +against the nail, as might be the case. Ned, someone has been in +my shop, meddling, and he wanted this shaft to fall. This is a +trick!"</p> + +<p>"Great Scott, Tom! You don't suppose any one wanted that shaft to +fall on you; do you?" </p> + +<p>"No, I don't believe that. Probably some one wanted to damage +the shaft, or he might have thought it would topple over against +the bench, and break some of my tools, instruments or machinery. +I do delicate experiments here, and it wouldn't take much of a +blow to spoil them. That's why those cords were cut."</p> + +<p>"Who did it? Do you think Andy Foger--" </p> + +<p>"No, I think it was the man Koku thought was a chicken thief, +and whom we chased the other night. I've got to be on my guard. I +wonder if--"</p> + +<p>Tom was interrupted by the appearance of Koku, who came out of +the shop with a letter the postman had just left. </p> + +<p>"I don't know that writing very well, and yet it looks +familiar," said Tom, as he tore open the missive. "Hello, here's +more trouble!" he exclaimed as he hastily read it.</p> + +<p>"What's up now?" asked Ned. </p> + +<p>"This is from Mr. Period, the picture man," went on the young +inventor. It's a warning."</p> + +<p>"A warning?" </p> + +<p>"Yes. He says:</p> + +<p>"'Dear Tom. Be on your guard. I understand that a rival moving +picture concern is after you. They want to make you an offer, and +get you away from me. But I trust you. Don't have anything to do +with these other fellows. And, at the same time, don't give them +a hint as to our plans. Don't tell them anything about your new +camera. There is a lot of jealousy and rivalry in this business +and they are all after me. They'll probably come to see you, but +be on your guard. They know that I have been negotiating with +you. Remember the alarm the other night.'" </p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch6" id="ch6">CHAPTER VI -- TRYING THE CAMERA</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Well, what do you think of that?" cried Ned, as his chum +finished.</p> + +<p>"It certainly isn't very pleasant," replied Tom. "I wonder why +those chaps can't let me alone? Why don't they invent cameras of +their own? Why are they always trying to get my secret +inventions?" </p> + +<p>"I suppose they can't do things for themselves," answered Ned. +"And then, again, your machinery always works, Tom, and some that +your rivals make, doesn't."</p> + +<p>"Well, maybe that's it," admitted our hero, as he put away the +letter. "I will be on the watch, just as I have been before. I've +got the burglar alarm wires adjusted on the shop now, and when +these rival moving picture men come after me they'll get a short +answer." </p> + +<p>For several days nothing happened, and Tom and Ned worked hard +on the Wizard Camera. It was nearing completion, and they were +planning, soon, to give it a test, when, one afternoon, two +strangers, in a powerful automobile, came to the Swift homestead. +They inquired for Tom, and, as he was out in the shop, with Ned +and Koku, and as he often received visitors out there, Mrs. +Baggert sent out the two men, who left their car in front of the +house.</p> + +<p>As usual, Tom had the inner door to his shop locked, and when +Koku brought in a message that two strangers would like to see +the young inventor, Tom remarked: </p> + +<p>"I guess it's the rival picture men, Ned. We'll see what they +have to say."</p> + +<p>"Which of you is Tom Swift?" asked the elder of the two men, as +Tom and Ned entered the front office, for our hero knew better +than to admit the strangers to the shop. </p> + +<p>"I am," replied Tom.</p> + +<p>"Well, we're men of business," went on the speaker, "and there is +no use beating about the bush. I am Mr. Wilson Turbot, and this +is my partner, Mr. William Eckert. We are in the business of +making moving picture films, and I understand that you are +associated with Mr. Period in this line. 'Spotty' we call him."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I am doing some work for Mr. Period," admitted Tom, +cautiously.</p> + +<p>"Have you done any yet?" </p> + +<p>"No, but I expect to."</p> + +<p>"What kind of a camera are you going to use?" asked Mr. Eckert +eagerly. </p> + +<p>"I must decline to answer that," replied Tom, a bit +stiffly.</p> + +<p>"Oh, that's all right," spoke Mr. Turbot, good naturedly. "Only +'Spotty' was bragging that you were making a new kind of film for +him, and we wondered if it was on the market." </p> + +<p>"We are always looking for improvements," added Mr. +Eckert.</p> + +<p>"This camera isn't on the market," replied Tom, on his guard as +to how he answered. </p> + +<p>The two men whispered together for a moment, and then Mr. +Turbot said:</p> + +<p>"Well, as I remarked, we're men of business, and there's no use +beating about the bush. We've heard of you, Tom Swift, and we +know you can do things. Usually, in this world, every man has his +price, and we're willing to pay big to get what we want. I don't +know what offer Mr. Period made to you, but I'll say this: We'll +give you double what he offered, for the exclusive rights to your +camera, whenever it's on the market, and we'll pay you a handsome +salary to work for us." </p> + +<p>"I'm sorry, but I can't consider the offer," replied Tom +firmly. "I have given my word to Mr. Period. I have a contract +with him, and I cannot break it."</p> + +<p>"Offer him three times what Period did," said Mr. Eckert, in a +hoarse whisper that Tom heard. </p> + +<p>"It would be useless!" exclaimed our hero. "I wouldn't go back +on my word for a hundred times the price I am to get. I am not in +this business so much for the money, as I am for the pleasure of +it."</p> + +<p>The men were silent a moment. There were ugly looks on their +faces. They looked sharply at Tom and Ned. Then Mr. Eckert said:</p> + +<p>"You'll regret this, Tom Swift. We are the biggest firm of +moving picture promoters in the world. We always get what we +want."</p> + +<p>"You won't get my camera," replied Tom calmly. </p> + +<p>"I don't know about that!" exclaimed Mr. Turbot, as he made a +hasty stride toward Tom, who stood in front of the door leading +to the shop--the shop where his camera, almost ready for use, was +on a bench. "I guess if we--"</p> + +<p>"Koku!" suddenly called Tom. </p> + +<p>The giant stepped into the front office. He had been standing +near the door, inside the main shop. Mr. Turbot who had stretched +forth his hand, as though to seize Tom, and his companion, who +had advanced toward Ned, fairly jumped back in fright at the +sight of the big man.</p> + +<p>"Koku," went on Tom, in even tones, "just show these gentlemen to +the front door--and lock it after them," he added significantly, +as he turned back into the shop, followed by Ned. </p> + +<p>"Yes, Mr. Tom," answered the giant, and then, with his big +hand, and brawny fist, he gently turned the two men toward the +outer door. They were gasping in surprise as they looked at the +giant.</p> + +<p>"You'll be sorry for this, Tom Swift!" exclaimed Mr. Turbot. +"You'll regret not having taken our offer. This Period chat is +only a small dealer. We can do better by you. You'll regret--"</p> + +<p>"You'll regret coming here again," snapped Tom, as he closed +the door of his shop, leaving Koku to escort the baffled plotters +to their auto. Shortly afterward Tom and Ned heard the car +puffing away.</p> + +<p>"Well, they came, just as Mr. Period said they would," spoke Tom, +slowly. </p> + +<p>"Yes, and they went away again!" exclaimed Ned with a laugh. +"They had their trip for nothing. Say, did you see how they +stared at Koku?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, he's a helper worth having, in cases like these." </p> + +<p>Tom wrote a full account of what had happened and sent it to +Mr. Period. He received in reply a few words, thanking him for +his loyalty, and again warning him to be on his guard.</p> + +<p>In the meanwhile, work went on rapidly on the Wizard Camera. +Briefly described it was a small square box, with a lens +projecting from it. Inside, however, was complicated machinery, +much too complicated for me to describe. Tom Swift had put in his +best work on this wonderful machine. As I have said, it could be +worked by a storage battery, by ordinary electric current from a +dynamo, or by hand. On top was a new kind of electric light. This +was small and compact, but it threw out powerful beams. With the +automatic arrangement set, and the light turned on, the camera +could be left at a certain place after dark, and whatever went on +in front of it would be reproduced on the moving roll of film +inside. </p> + +<p>In the morning the film could be taken out, developed, and the +pictures thrown on a screen in the usual way, familiar to all who +have been in a moving picture theatre. With the reproducing +machines Tom had nothing to do, as they were already perfected. +His task had been to make the new-style camera, and it was nearly +completed.</p> + +<p>A number of rolls of films could be packed into the camera, and +they could be taken out, or inserted, in daylight. Of course +after one film had been made, showing any particular scene any +number of films could be made from this "master" one. Just as is +done with the ordinary moving picture camera. Tom had an +attachment to show when one roll was used, and when another +needed inserting. </p> + +<p>For some time after the visit of the rival moving picture men, +Tom was on his guard. Both house and shop were fitted with +burglar alarms, but they did not ring. Eradicate and Koku were +told to be on watch, but there was nothing for them to do.</p> + +<p>"Well," remarked Tom to Ned, one afternoon, when they had both +worked hard, "I think it's about finished. Of course it needs +polishing, and there may be some adjusting to do, but my camera +is now ready to take pictures--at least I'm going to give it a +test." </p> + +<p>"Have you the rolls of films?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, half a dozen of 'em And I'm going to try the hardest test +first." </p> + +<p>"Which one is that?"</p> + +<p>"The night test. I'm going to place the camera out in the yard, +facing my shop. Then you and I, and some of the others, will go +out, pass in front of it, do various stunts, and, in the morning +we'll develop the films and see what we have." </p> + +<p>"Why, are you going to leave the camera out, all night?"</p> + +<p>"Sure. I'm going to give it the hardest kind of a test." </p> + +<p>"But are you and I going to stay up all night to do stunts in +front of it?"</p> + +<p>"No, indeed. I'm going to let it take what ever pictures happen +to come along to be taken after we get through making some +special early ones. You see my camera will be a sort of watch +dog, only of course it won't catch any one--that is, only their +images will be caught on the film. </p> + +<p>"Oh, I see," exclaimed Ned, and then he helped Tom fix the +machine for the test.</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch7" id="ch7">CHAPTER VII -- WHAT THE CAMERA CAUGHT</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Well, is she working, Tom?" asked our hero's chum, a little +later, when they had set the camera up on a box in the garden. It +pointed toward the main shop door, and from the machine came a +clicking sound. The electric light was glowing. </p> + +<p>"Yes, it's all ready," replied Tom. "Now just act as if it +wasn't there. You walk toward the shop. Do anything you please. +Pretend you are coming in to see me on business. Act as if it was +daytime. I'll stand here and receive you. Later, I'll get dad out +here, Koku and Eradicate. I wish Mr. Period was here to see the +test, but perhaps it's just as well for me to make sure it works +before be sees it."</p> + +<p>"All right, Tom, here I come." </p> + +<p>Ned advanced toward the shop. He tried to act as though the +camera was not taking pictures of him, at the rate of several a +second, but he forgot himself, and turned to look at the staring +lens. Then Tom, with a laugh, advanced to meet him, shaking hands +with him. Then the lads indulged in a little skylarking. They +threw snowballs at each other, taking care, however to keep +within range of the lens. Of course when Tom worked the camera +himself, he could point it wherever he wanted to, but it was now +automatic.</p> + +<p>Then the lads went to the shop, and came out again. They did +several other things. Later Koku, and Eradicate did some +"stunts," as Tom called them. Mr. Swift, too, was snapped, but +Mrs. Baggert refused to come out. </p> + +<p>"Well, I guess that will do for now," said Tom, as he stopped +the mechanism. "I've just thought of something," he added. "If I +leave the light burning, it will scare away, before they got in +front of the lens, any one who might come along. I'll have to +change that part of it."</p> + +<p>"How can you fix it?" asked Ned. </p> + +<p>"Easily. I'll rig up some flash lights, just ordinary +photographing flashlights, you know. I'll time them to go off one +after the other, and connect them with an electric wire to the +door of my shop."</p> + +<p>"Then your idea is--" began Ned. </p> + +<p>"That some rascals may try to enter my shop at night. Not this +particular night, but any night. If they come to-night we'll be +ready for them."</p> + +<p>"An' can't yo'-all take a picture ob de chicken coop?" asked +Eradicate. "Dat feller may come back t' rob mah hens." </p> + +<p>"With the lens pointing toward the shop," spoke Tom, "it will +also take snap shots of any one who tries to enter the coop. So, +if the chicken thief does come, Rad, we'll have a picture of +him."</p> + +<p>Tom and Ned soon had the flashlights in place, and then they went +to bed, listening, at times, for the puff that would indicate +that the camera was working. But the night passed without +incident, rather to Tom's disappointment. However, in the +morning, he developed the film of the first pictures taken in the +evening. Soon they were dry enough to be used in the moving +picture machine, which Tom had bought, and set up in a dark room.</p> + +<p>"There we are!" he cried, as the first images were thrown on +the white screen. "As natural as life, Ned! My camera works all +right!"</p> + +<p>"That's so. Look! There's where I hit you with a snowball!" cried +his chum, as the skylarking scene was reached. </p> + +<p>"Mah goodness!" cried Eradicate, when he saw himself walking +about on the screen, as large as life. "Dat shorely am +wonderful."</p> + +<p>"It is spirits!" cried Koku, as he saw himself depicted. </p> + +<p>"I wish we had some of the other pictures to show," spoke Tom. +"I mean some unexpected midnight visitors."</p> + +<p>For several nights in succession the camera was set to "snap" any +one who might try to enter the shop. The flashlights were also in +place. Tom and Ned, the latter staying at his chum's house that +week, were beginning to think they would have their trouble for +their pains. But one night something happened. </p> + +<p>It was very dark, but the snow on the ground made a sort of +glow that relieved the blackness. The camera had been set as +usual, and Tom and Ned went to bed.</p> + +<p>It must have been about midnight when they were both awakened by +hearing the burglar alarm go off. At the same time there were +several flashes of fire from the garden. </p> + +<p>"There she goes!" cried Ned.</p> + +<p>"Yes, they're trying to get into the shed," added Tom, as a +glance at the burglar-alarm indicator on the wall of the room, +showed that the shop door was being tried. "Come on!" </p> + +<p>"I'm with you!" yelled Ned.</p> + +<p>They lost little time getting into their clothes, for they had +laid them out in readiness for putting on quickly. Down the +stairs they raced, but ere they reached the garden they heard +footsteps running along the wall toward the road. </p> + +<p>"Who's there?" cried Tom, but there was no answer.</p> + +<p>"Koku! Eradicate!" yelled Ned. </p> + +<p>"Yais, sah, I'se comm'!" answered the colored man, and the +voice of the giant was also heard. The flashlights had ceased +popping before this, and when the two lads and their helpers had +reached the shop, there was no one in sight.</p> + +<p>"The camera's there all right!" cried Tom in relief as he picked +it up from the box. "Now to see what it caught. Did you see +anything of the fellows, Koku, or Eradicate?" Both said they had +not, but Eradicate, after examining the chicken house door by the +aid of a lighted match, cried out: </p> + +<p>"Somebody's been tryin' t' git in heah, Massa Tom. I kin see +where de do's been scratched."</p> + +<p>"Well, maybe we'll have the picture for you to look at in the +morning," said Tom. </p> + +<p>The films were developed in the usual way in the morning, but +the pictures were so small that Tom could not make out the +features or forms of the men. And it was plain that at least +three men had been around the coop and shop.</p> + +<p>By the use of alcohol and an electric fan Tom soon had the films +dry enough to use. Then the moving picture machine was set up in +a dark room, and all gathered to see what would be thrown on the +screen, greatly enlarged. </p> + +<p>First came several brilliant flashes of light, and then, as +the entrance to the shop loomed into view, a dark figure seemed +to walk across the canvas. But it did not stop at the shop door. +Instead it went to the chicken coop, and, as the man reached that +door, he began working to get it open. Of course it had all taken +place in a few seconds, for, as soon as the flashlights went off, +the intruders had run away. But they had been there long enough +to have their pictures taken.</p> + +<p>The man at the chicken coop turned around as the lights flashed, +and he was looking squarely at the camera. Of course this made +his face very plain to the audience, as Tom turned the crank of +the reproducing machine. </p> + +<p>"Why, it's a colored man!" cried Ned in surprise.</p> + +<p>"Yes, I guess it's only an ordinary chicken thief, after all," +remarked Tom. </p> + +<p>There was a gasp from Eradicate.</p> + +<p>"Fo' de land sakes!" he cried. "De raskil! Ef dat ain't mah own +second cousin, what libs down by de ribber! An' to t'ink dat +Samuel 'Rastus Washington Jackson Johnson, mah own second cousin, +should try t' rob mah chicken coop! Oh, won't I gib it t' him!"</p> + +<p>"Are you sure, Rad?" asked Tom.</p> + +<p>"Suah? Sartin I'se suah, Massa Tom," was the answer as the +startled colored man on the screen stared at the small audience. +"I'd know. dat face ob his'n anywhere." </p> + +<p>"Well, I guess he's the only one we caught last night," said +Tom, as the disappointed chicken thief ran away, and so out of +focus But the next instant there came another series of +flashlight explosions on the screen, and there, almost as plainly +as if our friends were looking at them, they saw two men +stealthily approaching the shop. They, too, as the chicken thief +had done, tried the door, and then, they also, startled by the +flashes, turned around.</p> + +<p>"Look!" cried Ned. </p> + +<p>"Great Scott !" exclaimed Tom. "Those are the two rivals of +Mr. Period! They are Mr. Turbot and Mr. Eckert!"</p> + +<p>"Same men I pushed out!" cried Koku, much excited. </p> + +<p>There was no doubt of it, and, as the images faded from the +screen, caused by the men running away, Tom and Ned realized that +their rivals had tried to put their threat into execution--the +threat of making Tom wish he had taken their offer.</p> + +<p>"I guess they came to take my camera,--but, instead the camera +took them," said the young inventor grimly. </p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch8" id="ch8">CHAPTER VIII -- PHOTOS FROM THE AIRSHIP</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Well, Tom, how is it going?" asked a voice at the door of the +shop where the young inventor was working. He looked up quickly +to behold Mr. Nestor, father of Mary, in which young lady, as I +have said, Tom was much interested. "How is the moving picture +camera coming on?"</p> + +<p>"Pretty good, Mr. Nestor. Come in. I guess Koku knew you all +right. I told him to let in any of my friends, but I have to keep +him there on guard." </p> + +<p>"So I understand. They nearly got in the other night, but I +hear that your camera caught them."</p> + +<p>"Yes, that proved that the machine is a success, even if we +didn't succeed in arresting the men." </p> + +<p>"Did you try?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, I sent copies of the film, showing Turbot and Eckert trying +to break into my shop, to Mr. Period, and he had enlarged +photographs made, and went to the police. They said it was rather +flimsy evidence on which to arrest anybody, and so they didn't +act. However, we sent copies of the pictures to Turbot and Eckert +themselves, so they know that we know they were here, and I guess +they'll steer clear of me after this." </p> + +<p>"I guess so, Tom," agreed Mr. Nestor with a laugh. "But what +about the chicken thief?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, Eradicate attended to his second cousin. He went to see him, +showed him a print from the film, and gave him to understand that +he'd be blown up with dynamite, or kicked by Boomerang, if he +ever came around here again, and so Samuel 'Rastus Washington +Jackson Johnson will be careful about visiting strange chicken +coops, after this." </p> + +<p>"I believe you, Tom. But how is the camera coming on?"</p> + +<p>"Very well. I am making a few changes in it, and I expect to get +my biggest airship in readiness for the trip in about a week, and +then I'll try taking pictures from her. But I understand that you +are interested in Mr. Period's business, Mr. Nestor?" </p> + +<p>"Yes, I own some stock in the company, and, Tom, that's what I +came over to see you about. I need a vacation. Mary and her +mother are going away this Spring for a long visit, and I was +wondering if you couldn't take me with you on the trips you will +make to get moving pictures for our concern."</p> + +<p>"Of. course I can, Mr. Nestor. "I'll be glad to do it." </p> + +<p>"And there is another thing, Tom," went on Mr. Nestor, +soberly. "I've got a good deal of my fortune tied up in this +moving picture affair. I want to see you win out--I don't want +our rivals to get ahead of us."</p> + +<p>"They shan't get ahead of us." </p> + +<p>"You see, Tom, it's this way. There is a bitter fight on +between our concern and that controlled by our rivals. Each is +trying to get the business of a large chain of moving picture +theatres throughout the United States. These theatre men are +watching us both, and the contracts for next season will go to +the concern showing the best line of films. If our rivals get +ahead of us--well, it will just about ruin our company,--and +about ruin me too, I guess."</p> + +<p>"I shall do my very best," answered our hero. </p> + +<p>"Is Mr. Damon going along?"</p> + +<p>"Well, I have just written to ask him. I sent the letter +yesterday. </p> + +<p>"Doesn't he know what you contemplate?"</p> + +<p>"Not exactly. You see when he came, that time I was overcome by +the fumes from the acids, everything was so upset that I didn't +get a chance to tell him. He's been away on business ever since, +but returned yesterday. I certainly hope that he goes with us. +Ned Newton is coming, and with you, and Koku and myself, it will +be a nicer party." </p> + +<p>"Then you are going to take Koku?"</p> + +<p>"I think I will. I'm a little worried about what these rival +moving picture men might do, and if I get into trouble with them, +my giant helper would come in very useful, to pick one up and +throw him over a tree top, for instance." </p> + +<p>"Indeed, yes," agreed Mr. Nestor, with a laugh. "But I hope +nothing like that happens."</p> + +<p>"Nothing like that happens?" suddenly asked a voice. "Bless my +bookcase! but there always seems to be something going on here. +What's up now, Tom Swift?" </p> + +<p>"Nothing much, Mr. Damon," replied our hero, as he recognized +his odd friend. "We were just talking about moving pictures, Mr. +Damon, and about you. Did you get my letter?"</p> + +<p>"I did, Tom." </p> + +<p>"And are you going with us?"</p> + +<p>"Tom, did you ever know me to refuse an invitation from you? I +guess not! Of course I'm going. But, for mercy sakes, don't tell +my wife! She mustn't know about it until the last minute, and +then she'll be so surprised, when I tell her, that she won't +think of objecting. Don't let her know." </p> + +<p>Tom laughed, and promised, and then the three began talking of +the prospective trip. After a bit Ned Newton joined the +party.</p> + +<p>Tom showed the two men how his new camera worked. He had made +several improvements on it since the first pictures were taken, +and now it was almost perfect. Mr. Period had been out to see it +work, and said it was just the apparatus needed. </p> + +<p>"You can get films with that machine," he said, "that will be +better than any pictures ever thrown on a screen. My fortune will +be made, Tom, and yours too, if you can only get pictures that +are out of the ordinary. There will be some hair-raising work, I +expect, but you can do it."</p> + +<p>"I'll try," spoke Tom. "I have--" </p> + +<p>"Hold on! I know what you are going to say," interrupted Mr. +Period. "You are going to say that you've gone through some +strenuous times already. I know you have, but you're going to +have more soon. I think I'll send you to India first."</p> + +<p>"To India!" exclaimed Tom, for Mr. Period had spoken of that as +if it was but a journey downtown. </p> + +<p>"Yes, India. I want a picture of an elephant drive, and if you +can get pictures of the big beasts in a stampede, so much the +better. Then, too, the Durbar is on now, and that will make a +good film. How soon can you start for Calcutta?"</p> + +<p>"Well, I've got to overhaul the airship," said Tom. "That will +take about three weeks. The camera is practically finished. I can +leave in a month, I guess." </p> + +<p>"Good. We'll have fine weather by that time. Are you going all +the way by your airship?"</p> + +<p>"No, I think it will be best to take that apart, ship it by +steamer, and go that way ourselves. I can put the airship +together in India, and then use it to get to any other part of +Europe, Asia or Africa you happen to want pictures from." </p> + +<p>"Good! Well, get to work now, and I'll see you again."</p> + +<p>In the days that followed, Tom and Ned were kept busy. There was +considerable to do on the airship, in the way of overhauling it. +This craft was Tom's largest, and was almost like the one in +which he had gone to the caves of ice, where it was wrecked. It +had been, however, much improved. </p> + +<p>The craft was a sort of combined dirigible balloon, and +aeroplane, and could be used as either. There was a machine on +board for generating gas, to use in the balloon part of it, and +the ship, which was named the Flyer, could carry several +persons.</p> + +<p>"Bless my shoe laces!" cried Mr. Damon one day as he looked at +Koku. "If we take him along in the airship, will we be able to +float, Tom?" </p> + +<p>"Oh, yes. The airship is plenty big enough. Besides, we are +not going to take along a very large party, and the camera is not +heavy. Oh, we'll be all right. I suppose you'll be on hand +tomorrow, Mr. Damon?"</p> + +<p>"To-morrow? What for?" </p> + +<p>"We're going to take the picture machine up in the airship, +and get some photos from the sky. I expect to make some films +from high in the air, as well as some in the regular way, on the +ground, and I want a little practice. Come around about two +o'clock, and we'll have a trial flight."</p> + +<p>"All right. I will. But don't let my wife know I'm going up in an +airship again. She's read of so many accidents lately, that she's +nervous about having me take a trip." </p> + +<p>"Oh, I won't tell," promised Tom with a laugh, and he worked +away harder than ever, for there were many little details to +perfect. The weather was now getting warm, as there was an early +spring, and it was pleasant out of doors.</p> + +<p>The moving picture camera was gotten in readiness. Extra rolls of +films were on hand, and the big airship, in which they were to go +up, for their first test of taking pictures from high in the air, +had been wheeled out of the shed. </p> + +<p>"Are you going up very far?" asked Mr. Nestor of Tom, and the +young inventor thought that Mary's father was a trifle nervous. +He had not made many flights, and then only a little way above +the ground, with Tom.</p> + +<p>"Not very high," replied our hero. "You see I want to get +pictures that will be large, and if I'm too far away I can't do +it." </p> + +<p>"Glad to hear it, replied Mr. Nestor, with a note of relief in +his voice. "Though I suppose to fall a thousand feet isn't much +different from falling a hundred when you consider the +results."</p> + +<p>"Not much," admitted Tom frankly. </p> + +<p>"Bless my feather bed!" cried Mr. Damon. "Please don't talk of +falling, when we're going up in an airship. It makes me +nervous."</p> + +<p>"We'll not fall!" declared Tom confidently. </p> + +<p>Mr. Period sent his regrets, that he could not be present at +the trial, stating in his letter that he was the busiest man in +the world, and that his time was worth about a dollar a minute +just at present. He, however, wished Tom all success. Tom's first +effort was to sail along, with the lens of the camera pointed +straight toward the earth. He would thus get, if successful, a +picture that, when thrown on the screen, would give the +spectators the idea that they were looking down from a moving +balloon. For that reason Tom was not going to fly very high, as +he wanted to get all the details possible.</p> + +<p>"All aboard!" cried the young inventor, when he had seen to it +that his airship was in readiness for a flight. The camera had +been put aboard, and the lens pointed toward earth through a hole +in the main cabin floor. All who were expected to make the trip +with Tom were on hand, Koku taking the place of Eradicate this +time, as the colored man was too aged and feeble to go along.</p> + +<p>"All ready?" asked Ned, who stood in the steering tower, with +his hand on the starting lever, while Tom was at the camera to +see that it worked properly.</p> + +<p>"All ready," answered the young inventor, and, an instant later, +they shot upward, as the big propellers whizzed around. </p> + +<p>Tom at once started the camera to taking pictures rapidly, as +he wanted the future audience to get a perfect idea of how it +looked to go up in a balloon, leaving the earth behind. Then as +the Flyer moved swiftly over woods and fields, Tom moved the lens +from side to side, to get different views.</p> + +<p>"Say! This is great!" cried Mr. Nestor, to whom air-riding was +much of a novelty. "Are you getting good pictures, Tom?" </p> + +<p>"I can't tell until we develop them. But the machine seems to +be working all right. I'm going to sail back now, and get some +views of our own house from up above."</p> + +<p>They had sailed around the town of Shopton, to the neighboring +villages, over woods and fields. Now they were approaching +Shopton again. </p> + +<p>"Bless my heart!" suddenly exclaimed Mr. Damon, who was +looking toward the earth, as they neared Tom's house.</p> + +<p>"What is it?" asked our hero, glancing up from the picture +machine, the registering dial of which he was examining. </p> + +<p>"Look there! At your shop, Tom! There seems to be a lot of +smoke coming from it!"</p> + +<p>They were almost over Tom's shop now, and, as Mr. Damon had said, +there was considerable smoke rolling above it. </p> + +<p>"I guess Eradicate is burning up papers and trash," was Ned's +opinion.</p> + +<p>Tom looked to where the camera pointed, he was right over his +shop now, and could see a dense vapor issuing from the door. </p> + +<p>That isn't Eradicate!" cried the young inventor. "My shop is +on fire! I've got to make a quick drop, and save it! There are a +lot of valuable models, and machines in there! Send us down, Ned, +as fast as she'll go!"</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch9" id="ch9">CHAPTER IX -- OFF FOR INDIA</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Bless my hose reel!" cried Mr. Damon, as the airship took a +quick lurch toward the earth. "Things are always happening to +you, Tom Swift! Your shop on fire! How did it happen?" </p> + +<p>"Look!" suddenly cried Ned, before Tom had a chance to answer. +"There's a man running away from the shop, Tom!"</p> + +<p>All saw him, and, as the airship rushed downward it could be seen +that he was a fellow dressed in ragged garments, a veritable +tramp. </p> + +<p>"I guess that fire didn't happen," said Tom significantly. "It +was deliberately set. Oh, if we can only get there before it +gains too much headway!"</p> + +<p>"I like to catch that fellow!" exclaimed Koku, shaking his big +fist at the retreating tramp. "I fix him!" </p> + +<p>On rushed the airship, and the man who had probably started +the fire, glanced up at it. Tom suddenly turned the lens of his +Wizard Camera toward him. The mechanism inside, which had been +stopped, started clicking again, as the young inventor switched +on the electric current.</p> + +<p>"What are you doing?" cried Ned, as he guided the airship toward +the shop, whence clouds of smoke were rolling. </p> + +<p>"Taking his picture," replied Tom. "It may come in useful for +evidence."</p> + +<p>But he was not able to get many views of the fellow, for the +latter must have suspected what was going on. He quickly made a +dive for the bushes, and was soon lost to sight. Tom shut off his +camera. </p> + +<p>"Bless my life preserver!" cried Mr. Damon. "There comes your +father, Tom, and Mrs. Baggert! They've got buckets! They're going +to put out the fire!"</p> + +<p>"Why don't they think to use the hose?" cried the young inventor, +for he had his shop equipped With many hose lines, and an +electrically driven pump. The hose! The hose, dad!" shouted Tom, +but it is doubtful if his father or Mrs. Baggert heard him, for +the engine of the airship was making much noise. However, the two +with the buckets looked up, and waved their hands to those on the +Flyer. </p> + +<p>"There's Eradicate!" yelled Ned. "He's got the hose all +right!" The colored man was beginning to unreel a line.</p> + +<p>"That's what it needs!" exclaimed Tom. "Now there's some chance +to save the shop." </p> + +<p>"We'll be there ourselves to take a hand in a few seconds!" +cried Mr. Damon, forgetting to bless anything.</p> + +<p>"The scoundrel who started this fire, and those back of him, +ought to be imprisoned for life!" declared Mr. Nestor. </p> + +<p>A moment later Ned had landed the airship within a short +distance of the shop. In an instant the occupants of the craft +had leaped out, and Tom, after a hasty glance to see that his +valuable camera was safe, dashed toward the building crying:</p> + +<p>"Never mind the pails, dad! Use the hose! there's a nozzle at the +back door. Go around there, and play the water on from that end."</p> + +<p>Eradicate, with his line of hose, had disappeared into the +shop through the front door, and the others pressed in after him, +heedless of the dense smoke.</p> + +<p>"Is it blazing much, Rad?" cried Tom. </p> + +<p>"Can't see no blaze at all, Mass a Tom," replied the colored +man. "Dere's a heap of suffin in de middle ob de flo', an' dat's +what's raisin' all de rumpus."</p> + +<p>They all saw it a moment later, a smoldering heap of rags and +paper on the concrete floor of the shop. Eradicate turned his +hose on it, there was a hissing sound, a cloud of steam arose, +and the fire was practically out, though much smoke remained.</p> + +<p>"Jove! that was a lucky escape!" exclaimed Tom, as he looked +around when the vapor had partly cleared away. "No damage done at +all, as far as I can see. I wonder what the game was? Did you see +anything of a tramp around here?" he asked of his father.</p> + +<p>"No, Tom. I have been busy in the house. So has Mrs. Baggert. +Suddenly she called my attention to the smoke coming from the +door, and we ran out." </p> + +<p>"I seen it, too," added Eradicate. "I was doin' some +whitewashin', an' I run up as soon as I could."</p> + +<p>"We saw the tramp all right, but he got away," said Tom, and he +told how he had taken pictures of him. "I don't believe it would +be much use to look for him now, though." </p> + +<p>"Me look," spoke Koku significantly, as he hurried off in the +direction taken by the tramp. He came back later, not having +found him.</p> + +<p>"What do you think of it, Tom?" asked Ned, when the excitement +had calmed down, and the pile of burned rags had been removed. It +was found that oil and chemicals had been put on them to cause a +dense smoke. </p> + +<p>"I think it was the work of those fellows who are after my +camera," replied the young inventor. "They are evidently watching +me, and when they saw us all go off in the airship they thought +probably that the coast was clear."</p> + +<p>"But why should they start a fire?" </p> + +<p>"I don't know, but probably to create a lot of smoke, and +excitement, so that they could search, and not be detected. Maybe +the fellow after he found that the camera was gone, wanted to +draw those in the house out to the shop, so he could have a clear +field to search in my room for any drawings that would give him a +dew as to how my machine works. They certainly did not want to +burn the shop, for that pile of rags could have smoldered all day +on the concrete floor, without doing any harm. Robbery was the +motive, I think."</p> + +<p>"The police ought to be notified," declared Mr. Nestor. "Develop +those pictures, Tom, and I'll take the matter up with the police. +Maybe they can identify the tramp from the photographs." </p> + +<p>But this proved impossible. Tom had secured several good +films, not only in the first views he took, giving the spectators +the impression that they were going up in an airship, but also +those showing the shop on fire, and the tramp running away, were +very plain.</p> + +<p>The police made a search for the incendiary, but of course did +not find him. Mr. Period came to Shopton, and declared it was his +belief that his rivals, Turbot and Eckert, had had a hand in the +matter. But it was only a suspicion, though Tom himself believed +the same thing. Still nothing could be accomplished. </p> + +<p>"The thing to do, now that the camera works all right, is for +you to hit the trail for India at once," suggested the picture +man. "They won't follow you there. Get me some pictures of the +Durbar, of elephants being captured, of tiger fights, anything +exciting."</p> + +<p>"I'll do my--" began Tom. </p> + +<p>"Wait, I'm not through," interrupted the excitable man. "Then +go get some volcanoes, earthquakes--anything that you think would +be interesting. I'll keep in touch with you, and cable +occasionally. Get all the films you can. When will you +start?"</p> + +<p>"I can leave inside of two weeks," replied Tom. </p> + +<p>"Then do it, and, meanwhile, be on your guard."</p> + +<p>It was found that a few changes were needed on the camera. And +some adjustments to the airship. Another trial flight was made, +and some excellent pictures taken. Then Tom and his friends +prepared to take the airship apart. and pack it for shipment to +Calcutta. It was to go on the same steamer as themselves, and of +course the Wizard Camera would accompany Tom. He took along many +rolls of films, enough, he thought, for many views. He was also +to send back to Mr. Period from time to time, the exposed rolls +of film, so they could be developed, and printed in the United +States, as Tom would not have very good facilities for this on +the airship, and to reproduce them there was almost out of the +question. Still he did fit up a small dark room aboard the Flyer, +where he could develop pictures if he wished. </p> + +<p>There was much to be done, but hard work accomplished it, and +finally the party was ready to start for India. Tom said good-bye +to Mary Nestor, of course, and her father accompanied our hero +from the Nestor house to the Swift homestead, where the start was +to take place.</p> + +<p>Eradicate bade his master a tearful good-bye, and there was +moisture in the eyes of Mr. Swift, as he shook hands with his +son. </p> + +<p>"Take care of yourself, Tom," he said. "Don't run too many +risks. This moving picture taking isn't as easy as it sounds. +It's more than just pointing your camera at things. Write if you +get a chance, or send me a message."</p> + +<p>Tom promised, and then bade farewell to Mrs. Baggert. All were +assembled, Koku, Mr. Damon, who blessed everything he saw, and +some things he did not, Ned, Mr. Nestor and Tom. The five were to +go by train to New York, there to go aboard the steamer. </p> + +<p>Their journey to the metropolis was uneventful. Mr. Period met +them at the steamship dock, after Tom had seen to it that the +baggage, and the parts of the airship were safely aboard.</p> + +<p>"I wish I were going along!" exclaimed the picture man. "It's +going to be a great trip. But I can't spare the time. I'm the +busiest man in the world. I lose about a thousand dollars just +coming down to see you off, but it's a good investment. I don't +mind it. Now, Tom, good luck, and don't forget, I want exciting +views." </p> + +<p>"I'll try--" began our here,.</p> + +<p>"Wait, I know what you're going to say!" interrupted Mr. Period. +"You'll do it, of course. Well, I must be going. I will-Great +Scott!" and Mr. Period interrupted himself. "He has the nerve to +come here!" </p> + +<p>"Who?" asked Tom.</p> + +<p>"Wilson Turbot, the rascal! He's trying to balk me at the last +minute, I believe. I'm going to see what he means!" and with +this, the excited Mr. Period rushed down the gangplank, toward +the man at whom he had pointed--one of the men who had tried to +buy Tom's picture taking camera. </p> + +<p>A moment later the steamer's whistle blew, the last belated +passenger rushed up the gangplank, it was drawn in, and the +vessel began to move away from the dock. Tom and his friends were +on their way to India, and the last glimpse they had of Mr. +Period was as he was chasing along the pier, after Mr. +Turbot.</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch10" id="ch10">CHAPTER X -- UNEXPECTED EXCITEMENT</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Well, what do you know about that, Tom?" asked Ned, as they +stood on deck watching the chase. "Isn't he the greatest ever-Mr. +Period, I mean?" </p> + +<p>"He certainly is. I'd like to see what happens when he catches +that Turbot chap."</p> + +<p>"Bless my pocket handkerchief!" cried Mr. Damon. "I don't believe +he will. Mr. Period's legs aren't long enough for fast running."</p> + +<p>"Those scoundrels were after us, up to the last minute," spoke +Mr. Nestor, as the ship moved farther out from the dock. Tom and +his friends could no longer see the excitable picture man after +his rival, but there was a commotion in the crowd, and it seemed +as if he had caught the fellow.</p> + +<p>"Well, we're free of him now," spoke the young inventor, with a +breath of relief. "That is, unless they have set some one else on +our trail," and he looked carefully at the passengers near him, +to detect, if possible, any who might look like spies in the pay +of the rival moving picture concern, or any suspicious characters +who might try to steal the valuable camera, that was now safely +locked in Tom's cabin. Our hero, however, saw no one to worry +about. He resolved to remain on his guard. </p> + +<p>Friends and relatives were waving farewells to one another, +and the band was playing, as the big vessel drew out into the +North, or Hudson, river, and steamed for the open sea.</p> + +<p>Little of interest marked the first week of the voyage. All save +Koku had done much traveling before, and it was no novelty to +them. The giant, however, was amused and delighted with +everything, even the most commonplace things he saw. He was a +source of wonder to all the other passengers, and, in a way, he +furnished much excitement. </p> + +<p>One day several of the sailors were on deck, shifting one of +the heavy anchors. They went about it in their usual way, all +taking hold, and "heaving" together with a "chanty," or song, to +enliven their work. But they did not make much progress, and one +of the mates got rather excited about it.</p> + +<p>"Here, shiver my timbers!" he cried. "Lively now! Lay about you, +and get that over to the side!" </p> + +<p>"Yo! Heave! Ho!" called the leader of the sailor gang.</p> + +<p>The anchor did not move, for it had either caught on some +projection, or the men were not using their strength. </p> + +<p>"Lively! Lively!" cried the mate.</p> + +<p>Suddenly Koku, who was in the crowd of passengers watching the +work, pushed his way to where the anchor lay. With a powerful, +but not rough action, he shoved the sailors aside. Then, stooping +over, he took a firm grip of the big piece of iron, planted his +feet well apart on the deck, and lifted the immense mass in his +arms. There was a round of applause from the group of passengers.</p> + +<p>"Where you want him?" Koku calmly asked of the mate, as he +stood holding the anchor.</p> + +<p>"Blast my marlin spikes!" cried the mate. "I never see the like +of this afore! Put her over there, shipmate. If I had you on a +voyage or two you'd be running the ship, instead of letting the +screw push her along. Put her over there," and he indicated where +he wanted the anchor. </p> + +<p>Koku calmly walked along the deck, laid the anchor down as if +it was an ordinary weight, and passed over to where Tom stood +looking on in amused silence. There were murmurs of surprise from +the passengers at the giant's strength, and the sailors went +forward much abashed.</p> + +<p>"Say, I'd give a good bit to have a bodyguard like that," +exclaimed a well-known millionaire passenger, who, it was +reported, was in constant fear of attacks, though they had never +taken place. "I wonder if I could get him." </p> + +<p>He spoke to Tom about it, but our hero would not listen to a +proposition to part with Koku. Besides, it is doubtful if the +simple giant would leave the lad who had brought him away from +his South American home. But, if Koku was wonderfully strong, +and, seemingly afraid of nothing, there were certain things he +feared.</p> + +<p>One afternoon, for the amusement of the passengers, a net was put +overboard, sunk to a considerable depth, and hauled up with a +number of fishes in it. Some of the finny specimens were good for +eating, and others were freaks, strange and curious. </p> + +<p>Koku was in the throng that gathered on deck to look at the +haul. Suddenly a small fish, but very hideous to look at, leaped +from the net and flopped toward the giant. With a scream of fear +Koku jumped to one side, and ran down to his stateroom. He could +not be induced to come on deck until Tom assured him that the +fishes had been disposed of. Thus Koku was a mixture of giant and +baby. But he was a general favorite on the ship, and often gave +exhibitions of his strength.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile Tom and his friends had been on the lookout for any one +who might be trailing them. But they saw no suspicious characters +among the passengers, and, gradually, they began to feel that +they had left their enemies behind. </p> + +<p>The weather was pleasant, and the voyage very enjoyable. Tom +and the others had little to do, and they were getting rather +impatient for the time to come when they could put the airship +together, and sail off over the jungle, to get moving pictures of +the elephants.</p> + +<p>"Have you any films in the camera now?" asked Ned of his chum on +day, as they sat on deck together. </p> + +<p>"Yes, it's all ready for instant use. Even the storage battery +is charged. Why?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, I was just wondering. I was thinking we might somehow see +something we could take pictures of." </p> + +<p>"Not much out here," said Tom, as he looked across the watery +expanse. As he did so, he saw a haze of smoke dead ahead. "We'll +pass a steamer soon," he went on, "but that wouldn't make a good +picture. It's too common."</p> + +<p>As the two lads watched, the smoke became blacker, and the cloud +it formed grew much larger. </p> + +<p>"They're burning a lot of coal on that ship," remarked Ned. +"Must be trying for a speed record."</p> + +<p>A little later a sailor stationed himself in the crow's nest, and +focused a telescope on the smoke. An officer, on deck, seemed to +be waiting for a report from the man aloft. </p> + +<p>"That's rather odd," remarked Ned. "I never knew them to take +so much interest in a passing steamer before; and we've gone by +several of late."</p> + +<p>"That's right," agreed Tom. "I wonder--" </p> + +<p>At that moment the officer, looking up, called out:</p> + +<p>"Main top!" </p> + +<p>"Aye, aye, sir," answered the sailor with the glass. "She's a +small steamer, sir, and she's on fire!"</p> + +<p>"That's what I feared. Come down. I'll tell the captain. We must +crowd on all steam, and go to the rescue." </p> + +<p>"Did you hear that?" cried Ned to Tom, as the officer hurried +to the bridge, where the captain awaited him. "A steamer on fire +at sea, Tom! why don't you--"</p> + +<p>"I'm going to!" interrupted the young inventor, as he started for +his cabin on the run. "I'm going to get some moving pictures of +the rescue! That will be a film worth having." </p> + +<p>A moment later the Belchar, the vessel on which our friends +had embarked, increased her speed, while sudden excitement +developed on board.</p> + +<p>As the Belchar approached the burning steamer, which had +evidently seen her, and was making all speed toward her, the +cloud of smoke became more dense, and a dull flame could be seen +reflected in the water. </p> + +<p>"She's going fast!" cried Mr. Nestor, as he joined Ned on +deck.</p> + +<p>"Bless my insurance policy!" cried Mr. Damon. "What a strange +happening! Where's Tom Swift?" </p> + +<p>"Gone for his camera," answered his chum. "He's going to get +some pictures of the rescue."</p> + +<p>"All hands man the life boats!" cried an officer, and several +sailors sprang to the davits, ready to lower the boats, when the +steamers should be near enough together. </p> + +<p>Up on deck came Tom, with his wonderful camera.</p> + +<p>"Here you go, Ned!" he called. "Give me a hand. I'm going to +start the film now." </p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch11" id="ch11">CHAPTER XI -- AN ELEPHANT STAMPEDE</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Lower away!"</p> + +<p>"Stand by the life boats!" </p> + +<p>"Let go! Pull hearty!"</p> + +<p>These and other commands marked the beginning of the rescue, as +the sailors manned the davit-falls, and put the boats into the +water. The burning steamer had now come to a stop, not far away +from the Belchar, which was also lay-to. There was scarcely any +sea running, and no wind, so that the work of rescuing was not +difficult from an ordinary standpoint. But there was grave +danger, because the fire on the doomed vessel was gaining +rapidly. </p> + +<p>"That's oil burning," remarked an officer, and it seemed so, +from the dense clouds of smoke that rolled upward.</p> + +<p>"Is she working, Tom?" asked Ned, as he helped his chum to hold +the wonderful camera steady on the rail, so that a good view of +the burning steamer could be had. </p> + +<p>"Yes, the film is running. Say, I wonder if they'll get 'em +all off?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, I think so. There aren't many passengers. I guess it's a +tramp freighter." </p> + +<p>They could look across the gap of water, and see the terrified +passengers and crew crowding to the rail, holding out their hands +appealingly to the brave sailors who were lustily and rapidly, +pulling toward them in life boats.</p> + +<p>At times a swirl of smoke would hide those on the doomed vessel +from the sight of the passengers on the Belchar, and on such +occasions the frightened screams of women could be heard. Once, +as the smoke cleared away, a woman, with a child in her arms, +giving a backward glance toward the flames that were now +enveloping the stern of the vessel, attempted to leap overboard.</p> + +<p>Many hands caught her, however, and all this was registered on +the film of Tom's camera, which was working automatically. As the +two vessels drifted along, Tom and Ned shifted the lens so as to +keep the burning steamer, and the approaching lifeboats, in +focus.</p> + +<p>"There's the first rescue!" cried Ned, as the woman who had +attempted to leap overboard, was, with her child, carefully +lowered into a boat. "Did you get that, Tom?" </p> + +<p>"I certainly did. This will make a good picture. I think I'll +send it back to Mr. Period as soon as we reach port."</p> + +<p>"Maybe you could develop it on board here, and show it. I +understand there's a dark room, and the captain said one of his +officers, who used to be in the moving picture business, had a +reproducing machine." </p> + +<p>"Then that's what I'll do!" cried Tom. "I'll have our captain +charge all the Belchar passengers admission, and we'll get up a +fund for the fire sufferers. They'll probably lose all their +baggage."</p> + +<p>"That will be great!" exclaimed Ned. </p> + +<p>The rescue was now in full swing, and, in a short time all the +passengers and crew had been transferred to the life boats. Tom +got a good picture of the captain of the burning steamer being +the last to leave his vessel. Then the approaching life boats, +with their loads of sailors, and rescued ones, were caught on the +films.</p> + +<p>"Are you all off?" cried the captain of the Belchar to the +unfortunate skipper of the doomed ship. </p> + +<p>"All off, yes, thank you. It is a mercy you were at hand. I +have a cargo of oil. You had better stand off, for she'll explode +in a few minutes."</p> + +<p>"I must get a picture of that!" declared Tom as the Belchar got +under way again. "That will cap the climax, and make a film that +will be hard to beat." </p> + +<p>A few moments later there was a tremendous explosion on the +tramp oiler. A column of wreckage and black smoke shot skyward, +and Tom secured a fine view of it. Then the wreck disappeared +beneath the waves, while the rescuing steamer sailed on, with +those who had been saved. They had brought off only the things +they wore, for the fire had occurred suddenly, and spread +rapidly. Kind persons aboard the Belchar looked after the +unfortunates. Luckily there was not a large passenger list on the +tramp. And the crew was comparatively small, so it was not hard +work to make room for them, or take care of them, aboard the +Belchar.</p> + +<p>Tom developed his pictures, and produced then in one of the large +saloons, on a machine he borrowed from the man of whom Ned had +spoken. A dollar admission was charged, and the crowd was so +large that Tom had to give two performances. The films, showing +the burning steamer and the rescue, were excellent, and enough +money was realized to aid, most substantially, the unfortunate +passengers and crew. </p> + +<p>A few days later a New York bound steamer was spoken, and on +it Tom sent the roll of developed films to Mr. Period, with a +letter of explanation.</p> + +<p>I will not give all the details of the rest of the voyage. +Sufficient to say that no accidents marred it, nor did Tom +discover any suspicious characters aboard. In due time our +friends arrived at Calcutta, and were met by an agent of Mr. +Period, for he had men in all quarters of the world, making films +for him. </p> + +<p>This agent took Tom and his party to a hotel, and arranged to +have the airship parts sent to a large open shed, not far away, +where it could be put together. The wonderful scenes in the +Indian city interested Tom and his companions for a time, but +they had observed so many strange sights from time to time that +they did not marvel greatly. Koku, however, was much delighted. +He was like a child.</p> + +<p>"What are you going to do first?" asked Ned, when they had +recovered from the fatigue of the ocean voyage and had settled +themselves in the hotel. </p> + +<p>"Put the airship together," replied our hero, "and then, after +getting some Durbar pictures, we'll head for the jungle. I want +to get some elephant pictures, showing the big beasts being +captured."</p> + +<p>Mr. Period's agent was a great help to them in this. He secured +native helpers, who aided Tom in assembling the airship, and in a +week or two it was ready for a flight. The wonderful camera, too, +was looked over, and the picture agent said he had never seen a +better one. </p> + +<p>"It can take the kind of pictures I never could," he said. "I +get Calcutta street scenes for Mr. Period, and occasionally I +strike a good one. But I wish I had your chance."</p> + +<p>Tom invited him to come along in the airship, but the agent, who +only looked after Mr. Period's interests as a side issue, could +not leave his work. </p> + +<p>The airship was ready for a flight, stores and provisions had +been put on board, there was enough gasoline for the motor, and +gas for the balloon bag, to carry the Flyer thousands of miles. +The moving picture camera had been tested after the sea voyage, +and had been found to work perfectly. Many rolls of films were +taken along. Tom got some fine views of the Durbar of India, and +his airship created a great sensation.</p> + +<p>"Now I guess we're all ready for the elephants," said Tom one day +as he came back from an inspection of the airship as it rested in +the big shed. "We'll start to-morrow morning, and head for the +jungle." </p> + +<p>Amid the cries from a throng of wondering and awed natives, +and with the farewells of Mr. Period's agent ringing in their +ears, Tom and his party made an early start. The Flyer rose like +a bird, and shot across the city, while on the house tops many +people watches the strange sight. Tom did not start his camera +working, as Mr. Period's agent said he had made many pictures of +the Indian city, and even one taken from an airship, would not be +much of a novelty.</p> + +<p>Tom had made inquiries, and learned that by a day's travel in his +airship (though it would have been much longer ordinarily) he +could reach a jungle where elephants might be found. Of course +there was nothing certain about it, as the big animals roamed all +over, being in one district one day, and on the next, many miles +off. </p> + +<p>Gradually the city was left behind, and some time later the +airship was sailing along over the jungle. After the start, when +Ned and Tom, with Mr. Damon helping occasionally, had gotten the +machinery into proper adjustment, the Flyer almost ran herself. +Then Tom took his station forward, with his camera in readiness, +and a powerful spyglass at hand, so that he might see the +elephants from a distance.</p> + +<p>He had been told that, somewhere in the district for which he was +headed, an elephant drive was contemplated. He hoped to be on +hand to get pictures of it, and so sent his airship ahead at top +speed. </p> + +<p>On and on they rode, being as much at ease in the air as they +would have been if traveling in a parlor car. They did not fly +high, as it was necessary to be fairly close to the earth to get +good pictures.</p> + +<p>"Well, I guess we won't have any luck to-day," remarked Ned, as +night approached, and they had had no sight of the elephants. +They had gone over mile after mile of jungle, but had seen few +wild beasts in sufficient numbers to make it worth while to focus +the camera on them. </p> + +<p>"We'll float along to-night," decided Tom, "and try again in +the morning."</p> + +<p>It was about ten o'clock the next day, when Ned, who had relieved +Tom on watch, uttered a cry: </p> + +<p>"What is it?" asked his chum, as he rushed forward. "Has +anything happened?"</p> + +<p>"Lots!" cried Ned. "Look!" He pointed down below. Tom saw, +crashing through the jungle, a big herd of elephants. Behind +them, almost surrounding them, in fact, was a crowd of natives in +charge of white hunters, who were driving the herd toward a +stockade. </p> + +<p>"There's a chance for a grand picture!" exclaimed Tom, as he +got the camera ready. "Take charge of the ship, Ned. Keep her +right over the big animals, and I'll work the camera."</p> + +<p>Quickly he focused the lens on the strange scene below him. There +was a riot of trumpeting from the elephants. The beaters and +hunters shouted and yelled. Then they saw the airship and waved +their hands to Tom and his friends, but whether to welcome them, +or warn them away, could not be told. </p> + +<p>The elephants were slowly advancing toward the stockade. Tom +was taking picture after picture of them, when suddenly as the +airship came lower, in response to a signal to Ned from the young +inventor, one of the huge pachyderms looked up, and saw the +strange sight. He might have taken it for an immense bird. At any +rate he gave a trumpet of alarm, and the next minute, with +screams of rage and fear, the elephants turned, and charged in a +wild stampede on those who were driving them toward the +stockade.</p> + +<p>"Look!" cried Ned. "Those hunters and natives will be killed!"</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid so!" shouted Tom, as he continued to focus his +camera on the wonderful sight.</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch12" id="ch12">CHAPTER XII -- THE LION FIGHT</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>Crashing through the jungle the huge beasts turned against those +who had, been driving them on toward the stockade. With wild +shouts and yells, the hunters and their native helpers tried to +turn back the elephant tide, but it was useless. The animals had +been frightened by the airship, and were following their leader, +a big bull, that went crashing against great trees, snapping them +off as if they were pipe stems. </p> + +<p>"Say, this is something like!" cried Ned, as he guided the +airship over the closely packed body of elephants, so Tom could +get good pictures, for the herd had divided, and a small number +had gone off with one of the other bulls.</p> + +<p>"Yes, I'll get some great pictures," agreed Tom, as he looked in +through a red covered opening in the camera, to see how much film +was left. </p> + +<p>The airship was now so low down that Tom, and the others, +could easily make out the faces of the hunters, and the native +helpers. One of the hunters, evidently the chief, shaking his +fist at our hero, cried:</p> + +<p>"Can't you take your blooming ship out of the way, my man? It's +scaring the beasts, and we've been a couple of weeks on this +drive. We don't want to lose all our work. Take your bloody ship +away!" </p> + +<p>"I guess he must be an Englishman," remarked Mr. Nestor, with +a laugh.</p> + +<p>"Bless my dictionary, I should say so," agreed Mr. Damon. +"Bloody, blooming ship! The idea!" </p> + +<p>"Well, I suppose we have scared the beasts," said Tom. "We +ought to get out of the way. Put her up, Ned, and we'll come down +some distance in advance."</p> + +<p>"Why, aren't you going to take any more views of the elephants?" +</p> + +<p>"Yes, but I've got enough of a view from above. Besides, I've +got to put in a fresh reel of film, and I might as well get out +of their sight to do it. Maybe that will quiet them, and the +hunters can turn them back toward the stockade. If they do, I +have another plan."</p> + +<p>"What is it?" his chum wanted to know. </p> + +<p>"I'm going to make a landing, set up my camera at the entrance +to the stockade, and get a series of pictures as the animals come +in. I think that will be a novelty.</p> + +<p>"That certainly will," agreed Mr. Nestor. "I am sure Mr. Period +will appreciate that. But won't it be dangerous, Tom?" </p> + +<p>"I suppose so, but I'm getting used to danger," replied our +hero, with a laugh.</p> + +<p>Ned put the ship high into the air, as Tom shut off the power +from the camera. Then the Flyer was sent well on in advance of +the stampede of elephants, so they could no longer see it, or +hear the throb of the powerful engines. Tom hoped that this would +serve to quiet the immense creatures. </p> + +<p>As the travelers flew on, over the jungle, they could still +hear the racket made by the hunters and beaters, and the shrill +trumpeting of the elephants, as they crashed through the +forest.</p> + +<p>Tom at once began changing the film in the camera, and Ned +altered the course of the airship, to send it back toward the +stockade, which they had passed just before coming upon the herd +of elephants. </p> + +<p>I presume most of my readers know what an elephant drive is +like. A stockade, consisting of heavy trees, is made in the +jungle. It is like the old fashioned forts our forefathers used +to make, for a defense against the Indians. There is a broad +entrance to it, and, when all is in readiness, the beaters go out +into the jungle, with the white hunters, to round up the +elephants. A number of tame pachyderms are taken along to +persuade the wild ones to follow.</p> + +<p>Gradually the elephants are gathered together in a large body, +and gently driven toward the stockade. The tame elephants go in +first, and the others follow. Then the entrance is closed, and +all that remains to be done is to tame the wild beasts, a not +very easy task. </p> + +<p>"Are you all ready?" asked Ned, after a bit, as he saw Tom +come forward with the camera.</p> + +<p>"Yes, I'm loaded for some more excitement. You can put me right +over the stockade now, Ned, and when we see the herd coming back +I'll go down, and take some views from the ground." </p> + +<p>"I think they've got 'em turned," said Mr. Damon. "It sounds +as if they were coming back this way."</p> + +<p>A moment later they had a glimpse of the herd down below. It was +true that the hunters had succeeded in stopping the stampede, and +once more the huge beasts were going in the right direction. </p> + +<p>"There's a good place to make a landing," suggested Tom, as he +saw a comparatively clear place in the jungle. "It's near the +stockade, and, in case of danger, I can make a quick +get-away."</p> + +<p>"What kind of danger are you looking for?" asked Ned, as he +shifted the deflecting rudder. </p> + +<p>"Oh, one of the beasts might take a notion to chase me."</p> + +<p>The landing was made, and Tom, taking Ned and Mr. Nestor with +him, and leaving the others to manage the airship in case a quick +flight would be necessary, made his way along a jungle trail to +the entrance to the stockade. He carried his camera with him, for +it was not heavy. </p> + +<p>On came the elephants, frightened by the shouts and cries of +the beaters, and the firing of guns. The young inventor took his +place near the stockade entrance, and, as the elephants advanced +through the forest, tearing up trees and bushes, Tom got some +good pictures of them.</p> + +<p>Suddenly the advance of the brutes was checked, and the foremost +of them raised their trunks, trumpeted in anger, and were about +to turn back again. </p> + +<p>"Get away from that bloomin' gate!" shouted a hunter to Tom. +"You're scaring them as bad as your airship did."</p> + +<p>"Yes, they won't go in with you there!" added another man. </p> + +<p>Tom slipped around the corner of the stockade, out of sight, +and from that vantage point he took scores of pictures, as the +tame animals led the wild ones into the fenced enclosure. Then +began another wild scene as the gate was closed.</p> + +<p>The terrified animals rushed about, trying in vain to find a way +of escape. Tom managed to climb up on top of the logs, and got +some splendid pictures. But this was nearly his undoing. For, +just as the last elephant rushed in, a big bull charged against +the stockade, and jarred Tom so that he was on the point of +falling. His one thought was about his camera, and he looked to +see if he could drop it on the soft grass, so it would not be +damaged. </p> + +<p>He saw Koku standing below him, the giant having slipped out +of the airship, to see the beasts at closer range.</p> + +<p>"Catch this, Koku!" cried Tom, tossing the big man his precious +camera, and the giant caught it safely. But Tom's troubles were +not over. A moment later, as the huge elephant again rammed the +fence, Tom fell off, but fortunately outside. Then the large +beast, seeing a small opening in the gate that was not yet +entirely closed, made for it. A moment later he was rushing +straight at Tom, who was somewhat stunned by his fall, though it +was not a severe one. </p> + +<p>"Look out!" yelled Ned.</p> + +<p>"Take a tree, Tom!" cried Mr. Nestor. </p> + +<p>The elephant paid no attention to any one but Tom, whom he +seemed to think had caused all his trouble. The young inventor +dashed to one side, and then started to run toward the airship, +for which Ned and Mr. Nestor were already making. The elephant +hunters at last succeeded in closing the gate, blocking the +chance of any more animals to escape.</p> + +<p>"Run, Tom! Run!" yelled Ned, and Tom ran as he had never run +before. The elephant was close after him though, crashing through +the jungle. Tom could see the airship just ahead of him. </p> + +<p>Suddenly he felt something grasp him from behind. He thought +surely it was the elephant's trunk, but a quick glance over his +shoulder showed him the friendly face of Koku, the giant.</p> + +<p>"Me run for you," said Koku, as he caught Tom up under one arm, +and, carrying the camera under the other, he set off at top +speed. Now Koku could run well at times, and this time he did. He +easily outdistanced the elephant, and, a little later, he set Tom +down on the deck of the airship, with the camera beside him. Then +Ned and Mr. Nestor came up panting, having run to one side. </p> + +<p>"Quick!" cried Tom. "We must get away before the elephant +charges the Flyer."</p> + +<p>"He has stopped," shouted Mr. Nestor, and it was indeed so. The +big beast, seeing again the strange craft that had frightened him +before, stood still for a moment, and then plunged off into the +jungle, trumpeting with rage. </p> + +<p>"Safe!" gasped Tom, as he looked at his camera to see if it +had been damaged. It seemed all right.</p> + +<p>"Bless my latch key!" cried Mr. Damon. "This moving picture +business isn't the most peaceful one in the world." </p> + +<p>"No, it has plenty of perils," agreed Mr. Nestor.</p> + +<p>"Come on, let's get out of here while we have the chance," +suggested Tom. "There may be another herd upon us before we know +it." </p> + +<p>The airship was soon ascending, and Tom and his companions +could look down and see the tame elephants in the stockade trying +to calm the wild ones. Then the scene faded from sight.</p> + +<p>"Well, if these pictures come out all right I'll have some fine +ones," exclaimed Tom as he carried his camera to the room where +he kept the films. "I fancy an elephant drive and stampede are +novelties in this line." </p> + +<p>"Indeed they are," agreed Mr. Nestor. "Mr. Period made no +mistake when he picked you out, Tom, for this work. What are you +going to try for next?"</p> + +<p>"I'd like to get some lion and tiger pictures," said the young +inventor. "I understand this is a good district for that. As soon +as those elephants get quieted down, I'm going back to the +stockade and have a talk with the hunters." </p> + +<p>This he did, circling about in the airship until nearly +evening. When they again approached the stockade all was quiet, +and they came to earth. A native showed them where the white +hunters had their headquarters, in some bungalows, and Tom and +his party were made welcome. They apologized for frightening the +big beasts, and the hunters accepted their excuses.</p> + +<p>"As long as we got 'em, it's all right," said the head man, +"though for awhile, I didn't like your bloomin' machine." Tom +entertained the hunters aboard his craft, at which they marvelled +much, and they gave him all the information they had about the +lions and tigers in the vicinity. </p> + +<p>"You won't find lions and tigers in herds, like. elephants +though," said the head hunter. "And you may have to photograph +'em at night, as then is when they come out to hunt, and +drink."</p> + +<p>"Well, I can take pictures at night," said Tom, as he showed his +camera apparatus. </p> + +<p>The next day, in the airship, they left for another district, +where, so the natives reported, several lions had been seen of +late. They had done much damage, too, carrying off the native +cattle, and killing several Indians.</p> + +<p>For nearly a week Tom circled about in his airship, keeping a +sharp lookout down below for a sign of lions that he might +photograph them. But he saw none, though he did get some pictures +of a herd of Indian deer that were well worth his trouble. </p> + +<p>"I think I'll have to try for a night photograph," decided Tom +at last. "I'll locate a spring where wild beasts are in the habit +of coming, set the camera with the light going, and leave it +there."</p> + +<p>"But will the lions come up if they see the light?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"I think so," replied his chum. "I'll take a chance, anyhow. +If that doesn't work then I'll hide near by, and see what +happens."</p> + +<p>"Bless my cartridge belt!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't mean that; +do you Tom?" </p> + +<p>"Of course. Come to think of it, I'm not going to leave my +camera out there for a lion to jump on, and break. As soon as I +get a series of pictures I'll bring it back to the ship, I +think."</p> + +<p>By inquiry among the natives they learned the location of a +spring where, it was said, lions were in the habit of coming +nightly to drink. </p> + +<p>"That's the place I want!" cried Tom.</p> + +<p>Accordingly the airship was headed for it, and one evening it +came gently to earth in a little clearing on the edge of the +jungle, while Koku, as was his habit, got supper. </p> + +<p>After the meal Tom and Ned set the camera, and then, picking +out a good spot nearby, they hid themselves to wait for what +might happen. The lens was focused on the spring, and the +powerful electric light set going. It glowed brightly, and our +hero thought it might have the effect of keeping the beasts away, +but Tom figured that, after they had looked at it for a while, +and seen that it did not harm them, they would lose their +suspicions, and come within range of his machine.</p> + +<p>"The camera will do the rest," he said. In order not to waste +films uselessly Tom arranged a long electric wire, running it +from the camera to where he and Ned were hid. By pressing a +button he could start or stop the camera any time he wished, and, +as he had a view of the spring from his vantage point, he could +have the apparatus begin taking pictures as soon as there was +some animal within focus. </p> + +<p>"Well, I'm getting stiff," said Ned, after an hour or so had +passed in silent darkness, the only light being the distant one +on the camera.</p> + +<p>"So am I," said Tom. </p> + +<p>"I don't believe anything will come to-night," went on his +chum. "Let's go back and--"</p> + +<p>He stopped suddenly, for there was a crackling in the underbrush, +and the next moment the jungle vibrated to the mighty roar of a +lion. </p> + +<p>"He's coming!" hoarsely whispered Tom.</p> + +<p>Both lads glanced through the trees toward the camera, and, in +the light, they saw a magnificent, tawny beast standing on the +edge of the spring. Once more he roared, as if in defiance, and +then, as if deciding that the light was not harmful, he stooped +to lap up the water </p> + +<p>Hardly had he done so than there was another roar, and a +moment later a second lion leaped from the dense jungle into the +clearing about the spring. The two monarchs of the forest stood +there in the glare of the light, and Tom excitedly pressed the +button that started the shutter to working, and the film to +moving back of the lens.</p> + +<p>There was a slight clicking sound in the camera, and the lions +turned startedly. Then both growled again, and the next instant +they sprang at each other, roaring mightily. </p> + +<p>"A fight!" cried Tom. "A lion fight, and right in front of my +camera! It couldn't be better. This is great! This will be a +film."</p> + +<p>"Quiet!" begged Ned. "They'll hear you, and come for us. I don't +want to be chewed up!" </p> + +<p>"No danger of them hearing me!" cried Tom. and he had to shout +to be heard above the roaring of the two tawny beasts, as they +bit and clawed each other, while the camera took picture after +picture of them.</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch13" id="ch13">CHAPTER XIII -- A SHOT IN TIME</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Tom, did you ever see anything like it in your life?" </p> + +<p>"I never did, Ned! It's wonderful! fearful! And to think that +we are here watching it, and that thousands of people will see +the same thing thrown on a screen. Oh, look at the big one. The +small lion has him down!"</p> + +<p>The two lads, much thrilled, crouched down behind a screen of +bushes, watching the midnight fight between the lions. On the +airship, not far distant, there was no little alarm, for those +left behind heard the terrific roars, and feared Tom and Ned +might be in some danger. But the lions were too much occupied +with their battle, to pay any attention to anything else, and no +other wild beasts were likely to come to the spring while the two +"kings" were at each other. </p> + +<p>It was a magnificent, but terrible battle. The big cats bit +and tore at each other, using their terrific claws and their +powerful paws, one stroke of which is said to be sufficient to +break a bullock's back. Sometimes they would roll out of the +focus of the camera, and, at such times, Tom wished he was at the +machine to swing the lens around, but he knew it would be +dangerous to move. Then the beasts would roll back into the rays +of light again, and more pictures of them would be taken.</p> + +<p>"I guess the small one is going to win!" said Tom, after the two +lions had fought for ten minutes, and the bigger one had been +down several times. </p> + +<p>"He's younger," agreed Ned, "and I guess the other one has had +his share of fights. Maybe this is a battle to see which one is +to rule this part of the jungle."</p> + +<p>"I guess so," spoke the young inventor, as he pressed the button +to stop the camera, as the lions rolled out of focus. "Oh, look!" +he cried a moment later, as the animals again rolled into view. +Tom started the camera once more. "This is near the end," he +said. </p> + +<p>The small lion had, by a sudden spring, landed on the back of +his rival. There was a terrific struggle, and the older beast +went down, the younger one clawing him terribly. Then, so quickly +did it happen that the boys could not take in all the details, +the older lion rolled over and over, and rid himself of his +antagonist. Quickly he got to his feet, while the smaller lion +did the same. They stood for a moment eyeing each other, their +tails twitching, the hair on their backs bristling, and all the +while they uttered frightful, roars.</p> + +<p>An instant later the larger beast sprang toward his rival. One +terrible paw was upraised. The small lion tried to dodge, but was +not quick enough. Down came the paw with terrific force, and the +boys could hear the back bone snap. Then, clawing his antagonist +terribly, as he lay disabled, the older lion, with a roar of +triumph, lapped up water, and sprang off through the jungle, +leaving his dying rival beside the spring. </p> + +<p>"That's the end," cried Tom, as the small lion died, and the +young inventor pressed the button stopping his camera. There was +a rustle in the leaves back of Tom and Ned, and they sprang up in +alarm, but they need not have feared, for it was only Koku, the +giant, who, with a portable electrical torch, had come to see how +they had fared.</p> + +<p>"Mr. Tom all right?" asked the big man, anxiously. </p> + +<p>"Yes, and I got some fine pictures. You can carry the camera +back now, Koku. I think that roll of film is pretty well +filled."</p> + +<p>The three of them looked at the body of the dead lion, before +they went back to the airship. I have called him "small," but, in +reality, the ;beast was small only in comparison with his rival, +who was a tremendous lion in size. I might add that of all the +pictures Tom took, few were more highly prized than that reel of +the lion fight. </p> + +<p>"Bless my bear cage!" cried Mr. Damon, as Tom came back, "you +certainly have nerve, my boy."</p> + +<p>"You have to, in this business," agreed Tom with a laugh. "I +never did this before, and I don't know that I would want it for +a steady position, but it's exciting for a change." </p> + +<p>They remained near the "lion spring" as they called it all +night, and in the morning, after Koku had served a tasty +breakfast, Tom headed the airship for a district where it was +said there were many antelope, and buffaloes, also zebus.</p> + +<p>"I don't want to get all exciting pictures," our hero said to Mr. +Nestor. "I think that films showing wild animals at play, or +quietly feeding, will be good." </p> + +<p>"I'm sure they will," said Mary's father. "Get some peaceful +scenes, by all means."</p> + +<p>They sailed on for several days, taking a number of pictures from +the airship, when they passed over a part of the country where +the view was magnificent, and finally, stopping at a good sized +village they learned that, about ten miles out, was a district +where antelope abounded. </p> + +<p>"We'll go there," decided Tom, "and I'll take the camera +around with me on a sort of walking trip. In that way I'll get a +variety of views, and I can make a good film."</p> + +<p>This plan was followed out. The airship came to rest in a +beautiful green valley, and Ned and Tom, with Mr. Damon, who +begged to be taken along, started off. </p> + +<p>"You can follow me in about half an hour, Koku," said Tom, +"and carry the camera back. I guess you can easily pick up our +trail."</p> + +<p>"Oh, sure," replied the giant. Indeed, to one who had lived in +the forest, as he had all his life, before Tom found him, it was +no difficult matter to follow a trail, such as the three friends +would leave. </p> + +<p>Tom found signs that showed him where the antelopes were in +the habit of passing, and, with Ned and Mr. Damon, stationed +himself in a secluded spot.</p> + +<p>He had not long to wait before a herd of deer came past. Tom took +many pictures of the graceful creatures, for it was daylight now, +and he needed no light. Consequently there was nothing to alarm +the herd. </p> + +<p>After having made several films of the antelope, Tom and his +two companions went farther on. They were fortunate enough to +find a place that seemed to be a regular playground of the deer. +There was a large herd there, and, getting as near as he dared, +Tom focused his camera, and began taking pictures.</p> + +<p>"It's as good as a play," whispered Mr. Damon, as he and Ned +watched the creatures, for they had to speak quietly. The camera +made scarcely any noise. "I'm glad I came on this trip." </p> + +<p>"So am I," said Ned. "Look, Tom, see the mother deer all +together, and the fawns near them. It's just as if it was a +kindergarten meeting."</p> + +<p>"I see," whispered Tom. "I'm getting a picture of that." </p> + +<p>For some little time longer Tom photographed the deer, and +then, suddenly, the timid creatures all at once lifted up their +heads, and darted off. Tom and Ned, wondering what had startled +them, looked across the glade just in time to see a big tiger +leap out of the tall grass. The striped animal had been stalking +the antelope, but they had scented him just in time.</p> + +<p>"Get him, Tom," urged Ned, and the young inventor did so, +securing several fine views be. fore the tiger bounded into the +grass again, and took after his prey. </p> + +<p>"Bless my china teacup! What's that!" suddenly cried Mr. +Damon. As he spoke there was a crashing in the bushes and, an +instant later as two-horned rhinoceros sprang into view, charging +straight for the group.</p> + +<p>"Look out!" yelled Ned. </p> + +<p>"Bless my--" began Mr. Damon, but he did not finish, for, in +starting to run his foot caught in the grass, and he went down +heavily.</p> + +<p>Tom leaped to one side, holding his camera so as not to damage +it. But he stumbled over Mr. Damon, and went down. </p> + +<p>With a "wuff" of rage the clumsy beast, came on, moving more +rapidly than Tom had any idea he was capable of. Hampered by his +camera our hero could not arise. The rhinoceros was almost upon +him, and Ned, catching up a club, was just going to make a rush +to the rescue, when the brute seemed suddenly to crumple up. It +fell down in a heap, not five feet from where Tom and Mr. Damon +lay.</p> + +<p>"Good!" cried Ned. "He's dead. Shot through the heart! Who did +it?" </p> + +<p>"I did," answered Koku quietly, stepping out of the bushes, +with one of Tom's Swift's electric rifles in his hand.</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch14" id="ch14">CHAPTER XIV -- IN A GREAT GALE</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>Tom Swift rose slowly to his feet, carefully setting his camera +down, after making sure that it was not injured. Then he looked +at the huge beast which lay dead in front of him, and, going over +to the giant he held out his hand to him. </p> + +<p>"Koku, you saved my life," spoke Tom. "Probably the life of +Mr. Damon also. I can't begin to thank you. It isn't the first +time you've done it, either. But I want to say that you can have +anything you want, that I've got."</p> + +<p>"Me like this gun pretty much," said the giant simply. </p> + +<p>"Then it's yours!" exclaimed Tom. "And you're the only one, +except myself, who has ever owned one." Tom's wonderful electric +rifle, of which I have told you in the book bearing that name, +was one of his most cherished inventions.</p> + +<p>He guarded jealously the secret of how it worked, and never sold +or gave one away, for fear that unscrupulous men might learn how +to make them, and to cause fearful havoc. For the rifle was a +terrible weapon. Koku seemed to appreciate the honor done him, as +he handled the gun, and looked from it to the dead rhinoceros.</p> + +<p>"Bless my blank cartridge!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, as he also +got up and came to examine the dead beast. It was the first thing +he had said since the animal had rushed at him, and he had not +moved after he fell down. He had seemingly been in a daze, but +when the others heard him use one of his favorite expressions +they knew that he was all right again. "Bless my hat!" went on +the odd man. "What happened, Tom? Is that beast really dead? How +did Koku come to arrive in time?"</p> + +<p>"I guess he's dead all right," said Tom, giving the rhinoceros a +kick. "But I don't know how Koku happened to arrive in the nick +of time, and with the gun, too." </p> + +<p>"I think maybe I see something to shoot when I come after you, +like you tell me to do," spoke the giant. "I follow your trail, +but I see nothing to shoot until I come here. Then I see that +animal run for you, and I shoot."</p> + +<p>"And a good thing you did, too," put in Ned. "Well let's go back. +My nerves are on edge, and I want to sit quiet for a while." </p> + +<p>"Take the camera, Koku," ordered Tom, "and I'll carry the +electric rifle--your rifle, now," he added, and the giant grinned +in delight. They reached the airship without further incident, +and, after a cup of tea, Tom took out the exposed films and put a +fresh roll in his camera, ready for whatever new might +happen.</p> + +<p>"Where is your next stopping place, Tom?" asked Ned, as they sat +in the main room of the airship that evening, talking over the +events of the day. They had decided to stay all night anchored on +the ground, and start off in the morning. </p> + +<p>"I hardly know, answered the young inventor. "I am going to +set the camera to-night, near a small spring I saw, to get some +pictures of deer coming to drink. I may get a picture of a lion +or a tiger attacking them. If I could it would be another fine +film. To-morrow I think we will start for Switzerland. But now +I'm going to get the camera ready for a night exposure.</p> + +<p>"Bless my check book!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't mean to say +that you are going to stay out at a spring again, Tom, and run +the chance of a tiger getting you." </p> + +<p>"No, I'm merely going to set the camera, attach the light and +let it work automatically this time. I've put in an extra long +roll of film, for I'm going to keep it going for a long while, +and part of the time there may be no animals there to take +pictures of. No, I'm not going to sit out to-night. I'm too +tired. I'll conceal the camera in the bushes so it won't be +damaged if there's a fight. Then, as I said, we'll start for +Switzerland to-morrow."</p> + +<p>"Switzerland!" cried Ned. "What in the world do you want to go +make a big jump like that for? And what do you expect to get in +that mountain land?" </p> + +<p>"I'm going to try for a picture of an avalanche," said Tom. +"Mr. Period wants one, if I can get it. It is quite a jump, but +then we'll be flying over civilized countries most of the time, +and if any accident happens we can go down and easily make +repairs. We can also get gasolene for the motor, though I have +quite a supply in the tanks, and perhaps enough for the entire +trip. At the same time we won't take any chances. So we'll be off +for Switzerland in the morning.</p> + +<p>"I think some avalanche pictures will be great, if you can get +them," remarked Mr. Nestor. "But, Tom, you know those big slides +of ice, snow and earth aren't made to order." </p> + +<p>"Oh, I know," agreed the young inventor with a smile. "I'll +just have to take my chances, and wait until one happens."</p> + +<p>"Bless my insurance policy!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "And when it +does happen, Tom, are you going to stand in front of it, and +snap-shot it?" </p> + +<p>"Indeed I'm not. This business is risky and dangerous enough, +without looking for trouble. I'm going to the mountain region, +and hover around in the air, until we see an avalanche 'happen' +if that is the right word. Then I'll focus the camera on it, and +the films and machinery will do the rest."</p> + +<p>"Oh, that's different," remarked the odd man, with an air of +relief. </p> + +<p>Tom and Ned soon had the camera set near the spring and then, +everyone being tired with the day's work and excitement, they +retired. In the morning there were signs around the spring that +many animals had been there in the night. There were also marks +as if there had been a fight, but of course what sort, or how +desperate, no one could say.</p> + +<p>"If anything happened the camera got it, I'm sure of that much," +remarked Tom, as he brought in the apparatus. "I'm not going to +develop the roll, for I don't want to take the time now. I guess +we must have something, anyhow." </p> + +<p>"If there isn't it won't so much matter for you have plenty of +other good views," said Mr. Nestor.</p> + +<p>I will not go into details of the long trip to Switzerland, +where, amid the mountains of that country, Tom hoped to get the +view he wanted. </p> + +<p>Sufficient to say that the airship made good time after +leaving India. Sometimes Tom sent the craft low down, in order to +get views, and again, it would be above the clouds.</p> + +<p>"Well, another day will bring us there," said Tom one evening, as +he was loading the camera with a fresh roll of films. "Then we'll +have to be on the lookout for an avalanche." </p> + +<p>"Yes, we're making pretty good time," remarked Ned, as he +looked at the speed gage. "I didn't know you had the motor +working so fast, Tom."</p> + +<p>"I haven't," was the young inventor's answer, as he looked up in +surprise. "Why, we are going quite fast! It's the wind, Ned. It's +right with us, and it's carrying us along." </p> + +<p>Tom arose and went to the anemometer, or wind-registering +instrument. He gave a low whistle, half of alarm.</p> + +<p>"Fifty miles an hour she's blowing now," he said. "It came on +suddenly, too, for a little while ago it was only ten." </p> + +<p>"Is there any danger?" asked Mr. Nestor, for he was not very +familiar with airship perils.</p> + +<p>"Well, we've been in big blows before, and we generally came out +all right," returned Tom. "Still, I don't like this. Why she went +up five points since I've been looking at it!" and he pointed to +the needle of the gage, which now registered fifty-five miles an +hour. </p> + +<p>"Bless my appendix!" gasped Mr. Damon. "It's a hurricane +Tom!"</p> + +<p>"Something like that," put in Ned, in a low voice. </p> + +<p>With a suddenness that was startling, the wind increased in +violence still more. Tom ran to the pilot house.</p> + +<p>"What are you going to do?" Ned called. </p> + +<p>"See if we can't go down a bit," was Tom's answer. "I don't +like this. It may be calmer below. We're up too high as it +is."</p> + +<p>He tried to throw over the lever controlling the deflecting +rudder, which would send the Flyer down, but he could not move +it. </p> + +<p>"Give me a hand!" he called to Ned, but even the strength of +the two lads was not sufficient to shift it.</p> + +<p>"Call Koku!" gasped Tom. "If anybody can budge it the giant can!"<br /> + +<p>Meanwhile the airship was being carried onward in the grip of +a mighty wind, so strong that its pressure on the surface of the +deflecting rudder prevented it from being shifted.</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch15" id="ch15">CHAPTER XV -- SNAPPING AN AVALANCHE</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Bless my thermometer!" gasped Mr. Damon. "This is terrible!" The +airship was plunging and swaying about in the awful gale. "Can't +something be done, Tom?" </p> + +<p>"What has happened?" cried Mr. Nestor. "We were on a level +keel before. What is it?"</p> + +<p>"It's the automatic balancing rudder!" answered Tom. "Something +has happened to it. The wind may have broken it! Come on, Ned!" +and he led the way to the engine room. </p> + +<p>"What are you going to do? Don't you want Koku to shift the +deflecting rudder? Here he is," Ned added, as the giant came +forward, in response to a signal bell that Tom's chum had +rung.</p> + +<p>"It's too late to try the deflecting rudder!" tried Tom. "I must +see what is the matter with our balancer." As he spoke the ship +gave a terrific plunge, and the occupants were thrown sideways. +The next moment it was on a level keel again, scudding along with +the gale, but there was no telling when the craft would again +nearly capsize. </p> + +<p>Tom looked at the mechanism controlling the equalizing and +equilibrium rudder. It was out of order, and he guessed that the +terrific wind was responsible for it.</p> + +<p>"What can we do?" cried Ned, as the airship nearly rolled over. +"Can't we do anything, Tom?" </p> + +<p>"Yes. I'm going to try. Keep calm now. We may come out all +right. This is the worst blow we've been in since we were in +Russia. Start the gas machine full blast. I want all the vapor I +can get."</p> + +<p>As I have explained the Flyer was a combined dirigible balloon +and aeroplane. It could be used as either, or both, in +combination. At present the gas bag was not fully inflated, and +Tom had been sending his craft along as an aeroplane. </p> + +<p>"What are you going to do?" cried Ned, as he pulled over the +lever that set the gas generating machine in operation.</p> + +<p>"I'm going up as high as I can go!" cried Tom. "If we can't go +down we must go up. I'll get above the hurricane instead of below +it. Give me all the gas you can, Ned!" </p> + +<p>The vapor hissed as it rushed into the big bag overhead. Tom +carried aboard his craft the chemicals needed to generate the +powerful lifting gas, of which he alone had the secret. It was +more powerful than hydrogen, and simple to make. The balloon of +the Flyer was now being distended.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile Tom, with Koku, Mr. Damon and Mr. Nestor to help him, +worked over the deflecting rudder, and also on the equilibrium +mechanism. But they could not get either to operate. </p> + +<p>Ned stood by the gas machine, and worked it to the limit. But +even with all that energy, so powerful was the wind, that the +Flyer rose slowly, the gale actually holding her down as a +water-logged craft is held below the waves. Ordinarily, with the +gas machine set at its limit the craft would have shot up +rapidly.</p> + +<p>At times the airship would skim along on the level, and again it +would be pitched and tossed about, until it was all the occupants +could do to keep their feet. Mr. Damon was continually blessing +everything he could remember. </p> + +<p>"Now she's going!" suddenly cried Ned, as he looked at the +dials registering the pressure of the gas, and showing the height +of the airship above the earth.</p> + +<p>"Going how?" gasped Tom, as he looked over from where he was +working at the equilibrium apparatus. "Going down?" </p> + +<p>"Going up!" shouted Ned. "I guess we'll be all right +soon!"</p> + +<p>It was true. Now that the bag was filled with the powerful +lifting gas, under pressure, the Flyer was beginning to get out +of the dangerous predicament into which the gale had blown her, +Up and up she went, and every foot she climbed the power of the +wind became less. </p> + +<p>"Maybe it all happened for the best," said Tom, as he noted +the height gage. "If we had gone down, the wind might have been +worse nearer the earth."</p> + +<p>Later they learned that this was so. The most destructive wind +storm ever known swept across the southern part of Europe, over +which they were flying that night, and, had the airship gone +down, she would probably have been destroyed. But, going up, she +got above the wind-strata. Up and up she climbed, until, when +three miles above the earth, she was in a calm zone. It was +rather hard to breathe at this height, and Tom set the oxygen +apparatus at work. </p> + +<p>This created in the interior of the craft an atmosphere almost +like that on the earth, and the travelers were made more at their +ease. Getting out of the terrible wind pressure made it possible +to work the deflecting rudder, though Tom had no idea of going +down, as long as the blow lasted.</p> + +<p>"We'll just sail along at this height until morning," he said, +"and by then the gale may be over, or we may be beyond the zone +of it. Start the propellers, Ned. I think I can manage to repair +the equilibrium rudder now." </p> + +<p>The propellers, which gave the forward motion to the airship, +had been stopped when it was found that the wind was carrying her +along, but they were now put in motion again, sending the Flyer +forward. In a short time Tom had the equilibrium machine in +order, and matters were now normal again.</p> + +<p>"But that was a strenuous time while it lasted," remarked the +young inventor, as he sat down. </p> + +<p>"It sure was," agreed Ned.</p> + +<p>"Bless my pen wiper!" cried Mr. Damon. "That was one of the few +times when I wish I'd never come with you, Tom Swift," and +everyone laughed at that. </p> + +<p>The Flyer was now out of danger, going along high in the air +through the night, while the gale raged below her. At Tom's +suggestion, Koku got a lunch ready, for they were all tired with +their labors, and somewhat nervous from the danger and +excitement.</p> + +<p>"And now for sleep!" exclaimed Tom, as he pushed back his plate. +"Ned, set the automatic steering gear, and we'll see where we +bring up by morning." </p> + +<p>An examination, through a powerful telescope in the bright +light of morning, showed the travelers that they were over the +outskirts of a large city, which, later, they learned was Rome, +Italy.</p> + +<p>"We've made a good trip," said Tom. "The gale had us worried, but +it sent us along at a lively clip. Now for Switzerland, and the +avalanches!" </p> + +<p>They made a landing at a village just outside the "Holy City," +as Rome is often called, and renewed their supply of gasolene. +Naturally they attracted a crowd of curious persons, many of whom +had never seen an airship before. Certainly few of them had ever +seen one like Tom Swift's.</p> + +<p>The next day found them hovering over the Alps, where Tom hoped +to be able to get the pictures of snow slides. They went down to +earth at a town near one of the big mountain ranges, and there +made inquiries as to where would be the best location to look for +big avalanches. If they went but a few miles to the north, they +were told, they would be in the desired region, and they departed +for that vicinity. </p> + +<p>"And now we've just got to take our time, and wait for an +avalanche to happen," remarked Tom, as they were flying along +over the mountain ranges. "As Mr. Damon said, these things aren't +made to order. They just happen."</p> + +<p>For three days they sailed in and out over the great snow-covered +peaks of the Alps. They did not go high up, for they wanted to be +near earth when an avalanche would occur, so that near-view +pictures could be secured. Occasionally they saw parties of +mountain climbers ascending some celebrated peak, and for want of +something better to photograph, Tom "snapped" the tourists. </p> + +<p>"Well, I guess they're all out of avalanches this season," +remarked Ned one afternoon, when they had circled back and forth +over a mountain where, so it was said, the big snow slides were +frequent.</p> + +<p>"It does seem so," agreed Tom. "Still, we're in no hurry. It is +easier to be up here, than it is walking around in a jungle, not +knowing what minute a tiger may jump out at you." </p> + +<p>"Bless my rubbers, yes!" agreed Mr. Damon.</p> + +<p>The sky was covered with lowering clouds, and there were +occasionally flurries of snow. Tom's airship was well above the +snow line on the mountains. The young inventor and Ned sat in the +pilot house, taking observations through a spyglass of the +mountain chain below them. </p> + +<p>Suddenly Ned, who had the glass focused on a mighty peak, +cried out:</p> + +<p>"There she is, Tom!" </p> + +<p>"What?"</p> + +<p>"The avalanche! The snow is beginning to slide down the mountain! +Say, it's going to be a big one, too. Got your camera ready?"</p> + +<p>"Sure! I've had it ready for the last three days. Put me over +there, Ned. You look after the airship, and I'll take the +pictures!"</p> + +<p>Tom sprang to get his apparatus, while his chum hurried to the +levers, wheels and handles that controlled the Flyer. As they +approached the avalanche they could see the great mass of ice, +snow, big stones, and earth sliding down the mountain side, +carrying tall trees with it. </p> + +<p>"This is just what I wanted!" cried Tom, as he set his camera +working. "Put me closer, Ned."</p> + +<p>Ned obeyed, and the airship was now hovering directly over the +avalanche, and right in its path. The big landslide, as it would +have been called in this country, met no village in its path, +fortunately, or it would have wiped it out completely. It was in +a wild and desolate region that it occurred. </p> + +<p>"I want to get a real close view!" cried Tom, as he got some +pictures showing a whole grove of giant trees uprooted and +carried off. "Get closer Ned, and--"</p> + +<p>Tom was interrupted by a cry of alarm from his chum. </p> + +<p>"We're falling!" yelled Ned. "Something has gone wrong. We're +going down into the avalanche!".</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch16" id="ch16">CHAPTER XVI -- TELEGRAPH ORDERS</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>There was confusion aboard the airship. Tom, hearing Ned's cry, +left his camera, to rush to the engine room, but not before he +had set the picture apparatus to working automatically. Mr. +Damon, Mr. Nestor and Koku, alarmed by Ned's cries, ran back from +the forward part of the craft, where they had been watching the +mighty mass of ice and earth as it rushed down the side of the +mountain. </p> + +<p>"What's wrong, Ned?" cried Tom excitedly.</p> + +<p>"I don't know! The propellers have stopped! We were running as an +aeroplane you know. Now we're going down!" </p> + +<p>"Bless my suspenders!" shouted Mr. Damon. "If we land in the +midst of that conglomeration of ice it will be the end of +us."</p> + +<p>"But we're not going to land there!" cried Tom. </p> + +<p>How are you going to stop it?" demanded Mr. Nestor.</p> + +<p>"By the gas machine!" answered Tom. "That will stop us from +falling. Start it up, Ned!" </p> + +<p>"That's right! I always forget about that! I'll have it going +in a second!"</p> + +<p>"Less than a second," called Tom, as he saw how near to the +mighty, rushing avalanche they were coming. </p> + +<p>Ned worked rapidly, and in a very short time the downward +course of the airship was checked. It floated easily above the +rushing flood of ice and earth, and Tom, seeing that his craft, +and those on it, were safe, hurried back to his camera. Meanwhile +the machine had automatically been taking pictures, but now with +the young inventor to manage it, better results would be +obtained.</p> + +<p>Tom aimed it here and there, at the most spectacular parts of the +avalanche. The others gathered around him, after Ned had made an +inspection, and found that a broken electrical wire had caused +the propellers to stop. This was soon repaired and then, as they +were hanging in the air like a balloon, Tom took picture after +picture of the wonderful sight below them. Forest after forest +was demolished. </p> + +<p>"This will be a great film!" Tom shouted to Ned, as the latter +informed him that the machinery was all right again. "Send me up +a little. I want to get a view from the top, looking down."</p> + +<p>His chum made the necessary adjustments to the mechanism and +then, there being nothing more to slide down the mountainside the +avalanche was ended. But what a mass of wreck and ruin there was! +It was as if a mighty earthquake had torn the mountain asunder.</p> + +<p>"It's a good thing it wasn't on a side of the mountain where +people lived," commented Ned, as the airship rose high toward the +clouds. "If it had been, there'd be nothing left of 'em. What +hair-raising stunt are you going to try next, Tom?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know. I expect to hear from Mr. Period soon. </p> + +<p>"Hear from Mr. Period?" exclaimed Mr. Nestor. "How are you +going to do that, Tom?"</p> + +<p>"He said he would telegraph me at Berne, Switzerland, at a +certain date, as he knew I was coming to the Alps to try for some +avalanche pictures. It's two or three days yet, before I can +expect the telegram, which of course will have to come part way +by cable. In the meanwhile, I think we'll take a little rest, and +a vacation. I want to give the airship an overhauling, and look +to my camera. There's no telling what Mr. Period may want next."</p> + +<p>"Then he didn't make out your programme completely before you +started?" asked Mr. Nestor.</p> + +<p>"No, he said he'd communicate with me from time to time. He is in +touch with what is going on in the world, you know, and if he +hears of anything exciting at any place, I'm to go there at once. +You see he wants the most sensational films he can get." </p> + +<p>"Yes, our company is out to give the best pictures we can +secure," spoke Mary's father, "and I think we are lucky to have +Tom Swift working for us. We already have films that no other +concern can get. And we need them."</p> + +<p>"I wonder what became of those men who started to make so much +trouble for you, Tom?" asked Mr. Damon. </p> + +<p>"Well, they seem to have disappeared," replied our hero. "Of +course they may be after me any day now, but for the time being, +I've thrown them off my track."</p> + +<p>"So then you don't know where you're going next?" asked Ned. </p> + +<p>"No, it may be to Japan, or to the North Pole. Well, I'm ready +for anything. We've got plenty of gasolene, and the Flyer can +certainly go," said Tom.</p> + +<p>They went down to earth in a quiet spot, just outside of a little +village, and there they remained three days, to the no small +wonder of the inhabitants. Tom wanted to see if his camera was +working properly. So he developed some of the avalanche pictures, +and found them excellent. The rest of the time was spent in +making some needed repairs to the airship, while the young +inventor overhauled his Wizard machine, that he found needed a +few adjustments. </p> + +<p>Their arrival in Berne created quite a sensation, but they +were used to that. Tom anchored his airship just outside the +city, and, accompanied by Ned, made his way to the telegraph +office. Some of the officials there could speak English, though +not very well.</p> + +<p>"I am expecting a message," said Tom. </p> + +<p>"Yes? Who for?" asked the clerk.</p> + +<p>"Tom Swift. It will be from America." </p> + +<p>As Tom said this he observed a man sitting in the corner of +the office get up hurriedly and go out. All at once his +suspicions were aroused. He thought of the attempts that had been +made to get his Wizard Camera away from him.</p> + +<p>"Who was that man?" he quickly asked the agent. </p> + +<p>"Him? Oh, he, too, is expecting a message from America. He has +been here some time."</p> + +<p>"Why did he go out so quickly?" Ned wanted to know. </p> + +<p>"Why, I can not tell. He is an Englishman. They do strange +things."</p> + +<p>"My telegram? Is it here?" asked Tom impatiently. He wanted to +get whatever word there was from Mr. Period, and be on his way to +whatever destination the picture man might select. Perhaps, after +all, his suspicions, against the man who had so suddenly left, +were unfounded. </p> + +<p>"Yes, there is a cablegram here for you, Monsieur Swift," said +the man, who was French. "There are charges on it, however."</p> + +<p>"Pay 'em, Ned, while I see what this is," directed the young +inventor, as he tore open the envelope. </p> + +<p>"Whew!" he whistled a moment later. "This is going some."</p> + +<p>"Where to now?" asked Ned. "The North Pole?" </p> + +<p>"No, just the opposite. Mr. Period wants me to go to +Africa-the Congo Free State. There's an uprising among the +natives there, and he wants some war pictures. Well, I guess I'll +have to go."</p> + +<p>As Tom spoke he looked toward the door of the telegraph office, +and he saw the man, who had so hurriedly gone out a few moments +before, looking in at him. </p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch17" id="ch17">CHAPTER XVII -- SUSPICIOUS STRANGERS</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Off to Africa; eh?" remarked Ned, as Tom put the envelope in +his pocket. "That's another long jump. But I guess the Flyer can +do it,</p> + +<p>"Yes, I think so. I say Ned, not so loud," said Tom, who had +hurried to the side of his chum, whispered the last words. </p> + +<p>"What's up?" inquired Ned quickly. "Anything wrong?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know. But I think we are being watched. Did you notice +that fellow who was in here a minute ago, when I asked for a +telegram?" </p> + +<p>"Yes, what about him?"</p> + +<p>"Well, he's looking in the door now I think. Don't turn round. +Just look up into that mirror on the wall, and you can see his +reflection." </p> + +<p>"I understand," whispered Ned, as he turned his gaze toward +the mirror in question, a large one, with advertisements around +the frame. "I see him," he went on. "There's some one with +him."</p> + +<p>"That's what I thought," replied Tom. "Take a good look. Whom do +you think the other chap is?" </p> + +<p>Ned looked long and earnestly. By means of the mirror, he +could see, perfectly plain, two men standing just outside the +door of the telegraph office. The portal was only partly open. +Ned drew an old letter from his pocket, and pretended to be +showing it to Tom. But, all the while he was gazing earnestly at +the two men. Suddenly one of them moved, giving Tom's chum a +better view of his face.</p> + +<p>"By Jove, Tom!" the lad exclaimed in a tense whisper. "If it +isn't that Eckert fellow I'm a cow." </p> + +<p>"That's what I thought," spoke Tom coolly. "Not that you're a +cow, Ned, but I believe that this man is one of the moving +picture partners, who are rivals of Mr. Period. I wasn't quite +sure myself after the first glance I had of him, so I wanted you +to take a look. Do you know the other chap--the one who ran out +when I asked for my telegram?"</p> + +<p>"No, I've never seen him before as far as I know." </p> + +<p>"Same here. Come on."</p> + +<p>"What are you going to do?" </p> + +<p>"Go back to the airship, and tell Mr. Nestor. As one of the +directors in the concern I'm working for. I want his advice."</p> + +<p>"Good idea," replied Ned, and they turned to leave the office. +The spying stranger, and William Eckert, were not in sight when +the two lads came out. </p> + +<p>"They got away mighty quick," remarked Tom, as he looked up +and down the street.</p> + +<p>"Yes, they probably saw us turn to come out, and made a quick +get-away. They might be in any one of these places along here," +for the street, on either side of the telegraph office, contained +a number of hotels, with doors opening on the sidewalk. </p> + +<p>"They must be on your trail yet," decided Mr. Nestor when Tom, +reaching the anchored airship, told what had happened. "Well, my +advice is to go to Africa as soon as we can. In that way we'll +leave them behind, and they won't have any chance to get your +camera."</p> + +<p>"But what I can't understand," said Tom, "is how they knew I was +coming here. It was just as if that one man had been waiting in +the telegraph office for me to appear. I'm sorry, now, that I +mentioned to Ned where we were ordered to. But I didn't think."</p> + +<p>"They probably knew, anyway," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "I +think this may explain it. The rival concern in New York has been +keeping track of Mr. Period's movements. Probably they have a +paid spy who may be in his employ. They knew when he sent you a +telegram, what it contained, and where it was directed to. Then, +of course, they knew you would call here for it. What they did +not know was when you would come, and so they had to wait. That +one spy was on guard, and, as soon as you came, he went and +summoned Eckert, who was waiting somewhere in the +neighborhood."</p> + +<p>"Bless my detective story!" cried Mr. Damon. "What a state of +affairs! They ought to be arrested, Tom." </p> + +<p>"It would be useless," said Mr. Nestor. "They are probably far +enough away by this time. Or else they have put others on Tom's +track."</p> + +<p>"I'll fight my own battles!" exclaimed the young inventor. "I +don't go much on the police in a case like this, especially +foreign police. Well, my camera is all right, so far," he went +on, as he took a look at it, in the compartment where he kept it. +"Some one must always remain near it, after this. But we'll soon +start for Africa, to get some pictures of a native battle. I hope +it isn't the red pygmies we have to photograph." </p> + +<p>"Bless my shoe laces! Don't suggest such a thing," begged Mr. +Damon, as he recalled the strenuous times when the dwarfs held +the missionaries captive.</p> + +<p>It was necessary to lay in some stores and provisions, and for +this reason Tom could not at once head the airship for the +African jungles. As she remained at anchor, just outside the +city, crowds of Swiss people came out to look at the wonderful +craft. But Tom and his companions took care that no one got +aboard, and they kept a strict lookout for Americans, or +Englishmen, thinking perhaps that Mr. Eckert, or the spy, might +try to get the camera. However, they did not see them, and a few +days after the receipt of the message from Mr. Period, having +stocked up, they rose high into the air, and set out to cross the +Mediterranean Sea for Africa. Tom laid a route over Tripoli, the +Sahara Desert, the French Congo, and so into the Congo Free +State. In his telegram, Mr. Period had said that the expected +uprising was to take place near Stanley Falls, on the Congo +River. </p> + +<p>"And supposing it does not happen?" asked Mr. Damon. "What if +the natives don't fight, Tom? You'll have your trip for nothing, +and Will run a lot of risk besides."</p> + +<p>"It's one of the chances I'm taking," replied the young inventor, +and truly, as he thought of it, he realized that the perils of +the moving picture business were greater than he had imagined. +Tom hoped to get a quick trip to the Congo, but, as they were +sailing over the big desert, there was an accident to the main +motor, and the airship suddenly began shooting toward the sands. +She was easily brought up, by means of the gas bags, and allowed +to settle gently to the ground, in the vicinity of a large oasis. +But, when Tom looked at the broken machinery, he said: </p> + +<p>"This means a week's delay. It will take that, and longer, to +fix it so we can go on."</p> + +<p>"Too bad!" exclaimed Mr. Nestor. "The war may be over when we get +there. But it can't be helped." </p> + +<p>It took Tom and his friends even longer than he had thought to +make the repairs. In the meanwhile they camped in the desert +place, which was far from being unpleasant. Occasionally a +caravan halted there, but, for the most part, they were +alone.</p> + +<p>"No danger of Eckert, or any of his spies coming here, I guess," +said Tom grimly as he blew on a portable forge, to weld two +pieces of iron together. </p> + +<p>In due time they were again on the wing, and without further +incident they were soon in the vicinity of Stanley Falls. They +managed to locate a village where there were some American +missionaries established. They were friends of Mr. and Mrs. +Illington, the missionaries whom Tom had saved from the red +pygmies, as told in the "Electric Rifle" volume of this series, +and they made our hero and his friends welcome.</p> + +<p>"Is it true?" asked Tom, of the missionaries who lived not far +from Stanley Falls, "that there is to be a native battle? Or are +we too late for it?" </p> + +<p>"I am sorry to say, I fear there will be fighting among the +tribesmen," replied Mr. Janeway, one of the Christian workers. +"It has not yet taken place, though."</p> + +<p>"Then I'm not too late!" cried Tom, and there was exultation in +his voice. "I don't mean to be barbarous," he went on, as he saw +that the missionaries looked shocked, "but as long as they are +going to fight I want to get the pictures." </p> + +<p>"Oh, they'll fight all right," spoke Mrs. Janeway. "The poor, +ignorant natives here are always ready to fight. This time I +think it is about some cattle that one tribe took from +another."</p> + +<p>"And where will the battle take place?" asked Tom. </p> + +<p>"Well, the rumors we have, seem to indicate that the fight +will take place about ten miles north of here. We will have +notice of it before it starts, as some of the natives, whom we +have succeeded in converting, belong to the tribe that is to be +attacked. They will be summoned to the defense of their town and +then it will be time enough for you to go. Oh, war is a terrible +thing! I do not like to talk about it. Tell me how you rescued +our friends from the red pygmies," and Tom was obliged to relate +that story, which I have told in detail elsewhere.</p> + +<p>Several days passed, and Tom and his friends spent a pleasant +time in the African village with the missionaries. The airship +and camera were in readiness for instant use, and during this +period of idleness our hero got several fine films of animal +scenes, including a number of night-fights among the beasts at +the drinking pools. One tiger battle was especially good, from a +photographic standpoint. </p> + +<p>One afternoon, a number of native bearers came into the town. +They preceded two white men, who were evidently sportsmen, or +explorers, and the latter had a well equipped caravan. The +strangers sought the advice of the missionaries about where big +game might be found, and Tom happened to be at the cottage of Mr. +Janeway when the strangers arrived.</p> + +<p>The young inventor looked at them critically, as he was +introduced to them. Both men spoke with an English accent, one +introducing himself as Bruce Montgomery, and the other as Wade +Kenneth. Tom decided that they were of the ordinary type of +globe-trotting Britishers, until, on his way to his airship, he +passed the place where the native bearers had set down the +luggage of the Englishmen. </p> + +<p>"Whew!" whistled Tom, as he caught sight of a peculiarly +shaped box. "See that, Ned?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, what is it? A new kind of magazine gun?" </p> + +<p>"It's a moving picture camera, or I lose my guess!" whispered +Tom. "One of the old fashioned kind. Those men are no more +tourists, or after big game, than I am! They're moving picture +men, and they're here to get views of that native battle! Ned, +we've got to be on our guard. They may be in the pay of that +Turbot and Eckert firm, and they may try to do us some harm!"</p> + +<p>"That's so!" exclaimed Ned. "We'll keep watch of them, Tom." </p> + +<p>As they neared their airship, there came, running down what +served as the main village street, an African who showed evidence +of having come from afar. As he ran on, he called out something +in a strange tongue. Instantly from their huts the other natives +swarmed.</p> + +<p>"What's up now?" cried Ned. </p> + +<p>"Something important, I'll wager," replied Tom. "Ned, you go +back to the missionaries house, and find out what it is. I'm +going to stand guard over my camera."</p> + +<p>"It's come!" cried Ned a little later, as he hurried into the +interior of the airship, where Tom was busy working over a new +attachment he intended putting on his picture machine. </p> + +<p>"What has?"</p> + +<p>"War! That native, whom we saw running in, brought news that the +battle would take place day after to-morrow. The enemies of his +tribe are on the march, so the African spies say, and he came to +summon all the warriors from this town. We've got to get busy!"</p> + +<p>"That's so. What about those Englishmen?"</p> + +<p>"They were talking to the missionaries when the runner came in. +They pretended to have no interest in it, but I saw one wink to +the other, and then, very soon, they went out, and I saw them +talking to their native bearers, while they were busy over that +box you said was a picture machine." </p> + +<p>"I knew it, Ned! I was sure of it! Those fellows came here to +trick us, though how they ever followed our trail I don't know. +Probably they came by a fast steamer to the West Coast, and +struck inland, while we were delayed on the desert. I don't care +if they are only straight out-and-out rivals--and not chaps that +are trying to take an unfair advantage. I suppose all the big +picture concerns have a tip about this war, and they may have +representatives here. I hope we get the best views. Now come on, +and give me a hand. We've got our work cut out for us, all +right."</p> + +<p>"Bless my red cross bandage!" cried Mr. Damon, when he heard the +news. "A native fight, eh? That will be something I haven't seen +in some time. Will there be any danger, Tom, do you think?" </p> + +<p>"Not unless our airship tumbles down between the two African +forces," replied our hero, "and I'll take care that it doesn't do +that. "We'll be well out of reach of any of their blow guns, or +arrows."</p> + +<p>"But I understand that many of the tribes have powder weapons," +said Mr. Nestor. </p> + +<p>"They have," admitted Tom, "but they are 'trader's' rifles, +and don't carry far. We won't run any risk from such +old-fashioned guns."</p> + +<p>"A big fight; eh?" asked Koku when they told him what was before +them. "Me like to help." </p> + +<p>"Yes, and I guess both sides would give a premium for your +services," remarked Tom, as he gazed at his big servant. "But +we'll need you with us, Koku."</p> + +<p>"Oh, me stay with you, Mr. Tom," exclaimed the big man, with a +grin. </p> + +<p>Somewhat to Tom's surprise the two Englishmen showed no +further interest in him and his airship, after the introduction +at the missionaries' bungalow.</p> + +<p>With the stolidity of their race the Britishers did not show any +surprise, as, some time afterward, they strolled down toward +Tom's big craft, after supper, and looked it over. Soon they went +back to their own camp, and a little later, Koku, who walked +toward it, brought word that the Englishmen were packing up. </p> + +<p>"They're going to start for the seat of war the first thing in +the morning," decided Tom. "Well, we'll get ahead of them. Though +we can travel faster than they can, we'll start now, and be on +the ground in good season. Besides, I don't like staying all +night in the same neighborhood with them. Get ready for a start, +Ned."</p> + +<p>Tom did not stop to say good-bye to the Englishmen, though he +bade farewell to the missionaries, who had been so kind to him. +There was much excitement in the native town, for many of the +tribesmen were getting ready to depart to help their friends or +relatives in the impending battle. </p> + +<p>As dusk was falling, the big airship arose, and soon her +powerful propellers were sending her across the jungle, toward +Stanley Falls in the vicinity of which the battle was expected to +take place.</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch18" id="ch18">CHAPTER XVIII -- THE NATIVE BATTLE</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"By Jove, Tom, here they come!" </p> + +<p>"From over by that drinking pool?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, just as the spies said they would. Wow, what a crowd of the +black beggars there are! And some of 'em have regular guns, too. +But most of 'em have clubs, bows and arrows, blow guns, or +spears." </p> + +<p>Tom and Ned were standing on the forward part of the airship, +which was moving slowly along, over an open plateau, in the +jungle where the native battle was about to take place. Our +friends had left the town where the missionaries lived, and had +hovered over the jungle, until they saw signs of the coming +struggle. They had seen nothing of their English rivals since +coming away, but had no doubt but that the Britishers were +somewhere in the neighborhood.</p> + +<p>The two forces of black men, who had gone to war over a dispute +about some cattle, approached each other. There was the beating +of tom-toms, and skin drums, and many weird shouts. From their +vantage point in the air, Tom and his companions had an excellent +view. The Wizard Camera was loaded with a long reel of film, and +ready for action. </p> + +<p>"Bless my handkerchief!" cried Mr. Damon, as he looked down on +the forces that were about to clash. "I never saw anything like +this before!"</p> + +<p>"I either," admitted Tom. "But, if things go right, I'm going to +get some dandy films!" </p> + +<p>Nearer and nearer the rival forces advanced. At first they had +stared, and shouted in wonder at the sight of the airship, +hovering above them, but their anger soon drew their attention to +the fighting at hand, and, after useless gestures toward the +craft of the air, and after some of them had vainly fired their +guns or arrows at it, they paid no more attention, but rushed on +with their shouts and cries and amid the beating of their rude +drums.</p> + +<p>"I think I'll begin to take pictures now," said Tom, as Ned, in +charge of the ship, sent it about in a circle, giving a general +view of the rival forces. "I'll show a scene of the two crowds +getting ready for business, and, later on, when they're actually +giving each other cats and dogs, I'll get all the pictures +possible." </p> + +<p>The camera was started while, safe in the a those on the Flyer +watched what went on below them.</p> + +<p>Suddenly the forward squads of the two small armies of blacks +met. With wild, weird yells they rushed at each other. The air +was filled with flying arrows and spears. The sound of the +oldfashioned muzzle-loading guns could he heard, and clouds of +smoke arose. Tilting his camera, and arranging the newly attached +reflecting mirrors so as to give the effect as if a spectator was +looking at the battle from in front, instead of from above, Tom +Swift took picture after picture. </p> + +<p>The fight was now on. With yells of rage and defiance the +Africans came together, giving blow for blow. It was a wild +melee, and those on the airship looked on fascinated, though +greatly wishing that such horrors could be stopped.</p> + +<p>"How about it, Tom?" cried Ned. </p> + +<p>"Everything going good! I don't like this business, but now +I'm in it I'm going to stick. Put me down a little lower," +answered the young inventor.</p> + +<p>"All right. I say Tom, look over there." </p> + +<p>"Where?"</p> + +<p>"By that lightning-struck gum tree. See those two men, and some +sort of a machine they've got stuck up on stilts? See it?" </p> + +<p>"Sure. Those are the two Englishmen--my rivals! They're taking +pictures, too!"</p> + +<p>And then, with a crash and roar, with wild shouts and yells, with +volley after volley of firearms, clouds of smoke and flights of +arrows and spears, the native battle was in full swing, while the +young inventor, sailing above it in his airship, reeled off view +after view of the strange sight. </p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch19" id="ch19">CHAPTER XIX -- A HEAVY LOSS</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Bless my battle axe, but this is awful!" cried Mr. Damon.</p> + +<p>"War is always a fearful thing," spoke Mr. Nestor. "But this is +not as bad as if the natives fought with modern weapons. See! +most of them are fighting with clubs, and their fists. They don't +seem to hurt each other very much." </p> + +<p>"That's so," agreed Mr. Damon. The two gentlemen were in the +main cabin, looking down on the fight below them, while Tom, with +Ned to help him change the reels of films, as they became filled +with pictures, attended to the camera. Koku was steering the +craft, as he had readily learned how to manage it.</p> + +<p>"Are those Englishmen taking pictures yet?" asked Tom, too busy +to turn his head, and look for himself. </p> + +<p>"Yes, they're still at," replied Ned. "But they seem to be +having trouble with their machine," he added as he saw one of the +men leave the apparatus, and run hurriedly back to where they had +made a temporary camp.</p> + +<p>"I guess it's an old-fashioned kind," commented Tom. "Say, this +is getting fierce!" he cried, as the natives got in closer +contact with each other. It was now a hand-to-hand battle. </p> + +<p>"I should say so!" yelled Ned. "It's a wonder those Englishmen +aren't afraid to be down on the same level with the black +fighters."</p> + +<p>"Oh, a white person is considered almost sacred by the natives +here, so the missionaries told me," said Tom. "A black man would +never think of raising his hand to one, and the Englishmen +probably know this. They're safe enough. In fact I'm thinking of +soon going down myself, and getting some views from the ground."</p> + +<p>"Bless my gizzard, Tom!" cried Mr. Damon. "Don't do it!"</p> + +<p>"Yes, I think I will. Why, it's safe enough. Besides, if they +attack us we have the electric rifles. Ned, you tell Koku to get +the guns out, to have in readiness, and then you put the ship +down. I'll take a chance." </p> + +<p>"Jove! You've been doing nothing but take chances since we +came on this trip!" exclaimed Ned, admiringly. "All right! Here +we go," and he went to relieve Koku at the wheel, while the +giant, grinning cheerfully at the prospect of taking part in the +fight himself, got out the rifles, including his own.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile the native battle went on fiercely. Many on both sides +fell, and not a few ran away, when they got the chance, their +companions yelling at them, evidently trying to shame them into +coming back. </p> + +<p>As the airship landed, Mr. Damon, Mr. Nestor, Ned and Koku +stood ready with the deadly electric rifles, in case an attack +should be made on them. But the fighting natives paid no more +attention to our friends than they did to the two Englishmen. The +latter moved their clumsy camera from place to place, in order to +get various views of the fighting.</p> + +<p>"This is the best yet!" cried Tom, as, after a lull in the fight, +when the two opposing armies had drawn a little apart, they came +together again more desperately than before. "I hope the pictures +are being recorded all right. I have to go at this thing pretty +much in the dark. Say, look at the beggars fight!" he finished.</p> + +<p>But a battle, even between uncivilized blacks, cannot go on +for very long at a time. Many had fallen, some being quite +severely injured it seemed, being carried off by their friends. +Then, with a sudden rush, the side which, as our friends learned +later, had been robbed of their cattle, made a fierce attack, +overwhelming their enemies, and compelling them to retreat. +Across the open plain the vanquished army fled, with the others +after them. Tom, meanwhile, taking pictures as fast as he +could.</p> + +<p>"This ends it!" he remarked to Ned, when the warriors were too +far away to make any more good views. "Now we can take a rest."</p> + +<p>"The Englishmen gave up some time ago," said his chum, +motioning to the two men who were taking their machine off the +tripod.</p> + +<p>"Guess their films gave out," spoke Tom. "Well, you see it didn't +do any harm to come down, and I got some better views here." </p> + +<p>"Here they come back!" exclaimed Ned, as a horde of the black +fellows emerged f row the jungle, and came on over the plain.</p> + +<p>"Hear 'em sing!" commented Tom, as the sound of a rude chant came +to their ears. "They must be the winners all right." </p> + +<p>"I guess so," agreed Ned. "But what about staying here now? +Maybe they won't be so friendly to us when they haven't any +fighting to occupy their minds."</p> + +<p>"Don't worry," advised Tom. "They won't bother us." </p> + +<p>And the blacks did not. They were caring for their wounded, +who had not already been taken from the field, and they paid no +attention to our friends, save to look curiously at the +airship.</p> + +<p>"Bless my newspaper!" cried Mr. Damon, with an air of relief. +"I'm glad that's over, and we didn't have to use the electric +rifles, after all." </p> + +<p>"Here come the Englishmen to pay us a visit," spoke Ned a +little later, as they sat about the cabin of the Flyer. The two +rival picture men soon climbed on deck.</p> + +<p>"Beg pardon," said the taller of the two, addressing our hero, +"but could you lend us a roll of film? Ours are all used up, and +we want to get some more pictures before going back to our main +camp." </p> + +<p>"I'm sorry," replied Tom, "but I use a special size, and it +fits no camera but my own."</p> + +<p>"Ah! might we see your camera?" asked the other Englishman. "That +is, see how it works?" </p> + +<p>"I don't like to be disobliging," was Tom's answer, "but it is +not yet patented and--well--" he hesitated.</p> + +<p>"Oh, I see!" sneered the taller visitor. "You're afraid we might +steal some of your ideas. Hum!" Come on Montgomery," and, +swinging on his heels, with a military air, he hurried away, +followed by his companion. </p> + +<p>"They don't like that, but I can't help it," remarked Tom to +his friends a little later. "I can't afford to take any +chances."</p> + +<p>"No, you did just right," said Mr. Nestor. "Those men may be all +right, but from the fact that they are in the picture taking +business I'd be suspicious of them." </p> + +<p>"Well, what's next on the programme?" asked Ned as Tom put his +camera away.</p> + +<p>"Oh, I think we'll stay here over night," was our hero's reply. +"It's a nice location, and the gas machine needs cleaning. We can +do it here, and maybe I can get some more pictures." </p> + +<p>They were busy the rest of the day on the gas generator, but +the main body of natives did not come back, and the Englishmen +seemed to have disappeared.</p> + +<p>Everyone slept soundly that night. So soundly, in fact, that the +sun was very high when Koku was the first to awaken, His head +felt strangely dizzy, and he wondered at a queer smell in the +room he had to himself. </p> + +<p>"Nobody up yet," he exclaimed in surprise, as he staggered +into the main cabin. There, too, was the strange, sweetish, +sickly smell. "Mr. Tom, where you be? Time to get up!" the giant +called to his master, as he went in, and gently shook the young +inventor by the shoulder.</p> + +<p>"Eh? What's that? What's the matter?" began Tom, and then he +suddenly sat up. "Oh, my head!" he exclaimed, putting his hands +to his aching temples. </p> + +<p>"And that queer smell!" added Ned, who was also awake now.</p> + +<p>"Bless my talcum powder!" cried Mr. Damon. "I have a splitting +headache." </p> + +<p>"Hum! Chloroform, if I'm any judge!" called Mr. Nestor from +his berth.</p> + +<p>"Chloroform!" cried Tom, staggering to his feet. "I wonder" He +did not finish his sentence, but made his way to the room where +his camera was kept. "It's gone!" he cried. "We have been +chloroformed in the night, and some one has taken my Wizard +Camera." </p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch20" id="ch20">CHAPTER XX -- AFTER THE ENGLISHMEN</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"The camera gone!" gasped Ned.</p> + +<p>"Did they chloroform us?" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "Bless my--" but +for one of the few times in his life, he did not know what to +bless. </p> + +<p>"Get all the fresh air you can," hastily advised Mr. Nestor. +"Koku, open all the doors and windows," for, though it was hot +during the day in the jungle, the nights were cool, and the +airship was generally closed up. With the inrush of the fresh air +every one soon felt better.</p> + +<p>"Is anything else gone?" asked Ned, as he followed Tom into the +camera room. </p> + +<p>"Yes, several rolls of unexposed films. Oh, if only they +haven't got too much of a start! I'll get it away from them!" +declared Tom with energy.</p> + +<p>"From who? Who took it?" asked Ned. </p> + +<p>"Those Englishmen, of course! Who else? I believe they are in +the pay of Turbot and Eckert. Their taking pictures was only a +bluff! They got on my trail and stuck to it. The delays we had, +gave them a chance to catch up to us. They came over to the +airship, to pretend to borrow films, just to get a look at the +place, and size it up, so they could chloroform us, and get the +camera."</p> + +<p>"I believe you're right," declared Mr. Nestor. "We must get after +those scoundrels as quickly as possible!" </p> + +<p>"Bless my shoulder braces!" cried Mr. Damon. "How do you +imagine they worked that trick on us?"</p> + +<p>"Easily enough," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "We were all dead +tired last night, and slept like tops. They watched their chance, +sneaked up, and got in. After that it was no hard matter to +chloroform each one of us in turn, and they had the ship to +themselves. They looked around, found the camera, and made off +with it." </p> + +<p>"Well, I'm going to get right after them!" cried Tom. "Ned, +start the motor. I'll steer for a while."</p> + +<p>"Hold on! Wait a minute," suggested Mr. Nestor. "I wouldn't go +off in the ship just yet,~ Tom." </p> + +<p>"Why not?"</p> + +<p>"Because you don't know which way to go. We must find out which +trail the Englishmen took. They have African porters with them, +and those porters doubtless know some of the blacks around here. +We must inquire of the natives which way the porters went, in +carrying the goods of our rivals, for those Englishmen would not +abandon camp without taking their baggage with them." </p> + +<p>"That's so," admitted the young inventor. "That will be the +best plan. Once I find which way they have gone I can easily +overtake them in the airship. And when I find 'em--" Tom paused +significantly.</p> + +<p>"Me help you fix 'em!" cried Koku, clenching his big fist. </p> + +<p>"They will probably figure it out that you will take after +them," said Mr. Nestor, "but they may not count on you doing it +in the Flyer, and so they may not try to hide. It isn't going to +be an easy matter to pick a small party out of the jungle though, +Tom."</p> + +<p>"Well, I've done more difficult things in my airships," spoke our +hero. "I'll fly low, and use the glass. I guess we can pick out +their crowd of porters, though they won't have many. Oh, my +camera! I hope they won't damage it." </p> + +<p>"They won't," was Ned's opinion. "It's too valuable. They want +it to take pictures with, themselves."</p> + +<p>"Maybe. I hope they don't open it, and see how it's made. And I'm +glad I thought to hide the picture films I've taken so far. They +didn't get those away from us, only some of the blank. ones," and +Tom looked again in a secret closet. where he kept the +battle-films, and the others, in the dark, to prevent them from +being light-struck, by any possible chance. </p> + +<p>"Well, if we're going to make some inquiries, let's do it," +suggested Mr. Nestor. "I think I see some of the Africans over +there. They have made a temporary camp, it seems, to attend to +some of their wounded."</p> + +<p>"Do you think we can make them understand what we want?" asked +Ned. "I don't believe they speak English." </p> + +<p>"Oh these blacks have been trading with white men," said Tom, +"for they have 'trader's' guns, built to look at, and not to +shoot very well. I fancy we can make ourselves understood. If +not, we can use signs."</p> + +<p>Leaving Koku and Mr. Damon to guard the airship, Tom, Ned and Mr. +Nestor went to the African camp. There was a large party of men +there, and they seemed friendly enough. Probably winning the +battle the day before had put them in good humor, even though +many of them were hurt. </p> + +<p>To Tom's delight he found one native who could speak a little +English, and of him they made inquiries as to what direction the +Englishmen had taken. The black talked for a while among his +fellows, and then reported to our friends that, late in the +night, one of the porters, hired by Montgomery and Kenneth, had +come to camp to bid a brother good-bye. This porter had said that +his masters were in a hurry to get away, and had started +west.</p> + +<p>"That's it!" cried Mr. Nestor. "They're going to get somewhere so +they can make their way to the coast. They want to get out of +Africa as fast as they can." </p> + +<p>"And I'm going to get after 'em as fast as I can!" cried Tom +grimly. "Come on!"</p> + +<p>They hurried back to the airship, finding Koku and Mr. Damon +peacefully engaged in talk, no one having disturbed them. </p> + +<p>"Start the motor, Ned!" called his chum. "We'll see what luck +we have!"</p> + +<p>Up into the air went the Flyer, her great propellers revolving +rapidly. Over the jungle she shot, and then, when he found that +everything was working well, and that the cleaned gas generator +was operating as good as when it was new, the young inventor +slowed up, and brought the craft down to a lower level. </p> + +<p>"For we don't want to run past these fellows, or shoot over +their heads in our hurry," Tom explained. "Ned, get out the +binoculars. They're easier to handle than the telescope. Then go +up forward, and keep a sharp lookout. There is something like a +jungle trail below us, and it looks to be the only one around +here. They probably took that." Soon after leaving the place +where they had camped after the battle, Tom had seen a rude path +through the forest, and had followed that lead.</p> + +<p>On sped the Flyer, after the two Englishmen, while Tom thought +regretfully of his stolen camera. </p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch21" id="ch21">CHAPTER XXI -- THE JUNGLE FIRE</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Well, Tom, I don't seem to see anything of them," remarked +Ned that afternoon, as he sat in the bow of the air craft, gazing +from time to time through the powerful glasses.</p> + +<p>"No, and I can't understand it, either," responded the young +inventor, who had come for-ward to relieve his chum. "They didn't +have much the start of us, and they'll have to travel very +slowly. It isn't as if they could hop on a train; and, even if +they did, I could overtake them in a short time. But they have to +travel on foot through the jungle, and can't have gone far." </p> + +<p>"'Maybe they have bullock carts," suggested Mr. Damon.</p> + +<p>'~The trail isn't wide enough for that," declared Tom. "We've +come quite a distance now, even if we have been running at low +speed, and we haven't seen even a black man on the trail," and he +motioned to the rude path below them. </p> + +<p>"They may have taken a boat and slipped down that river we +crossed a little while ago," suggested Ned.</p> + +<p>"That's so!" cried Tom. "Why didn't I think of it? Say! I'm going +to turn back." </p> + +<p>"Turn back?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, and go up and down the stream a way. We have time, for we +can easily run at top speed on the return trip. Then, if we don't +see anything of them on the water, we'll pick up the trail again. +Put her around, Ned, and I'll take the glasses for a while." </p> + +<p>The Flyer was soon shooting back over the same trail our +friends had covered, and, as Ned set the propellers going at top +speed, they were quickly hovering over a broad but shallow river, +which cut through the jungle.</p> + +<p>"Try it down stream first," suggested Tom, who was peering +through the binoculars. "They'd be most likely to go down, as it +would be easier." </p> + +<p>Along over the stream swept the airship, covering several +miles.</p> + +<p>"There's a boat!" suddenly exclaimed Mr. Nestor, pointing to a +native canoe below them. </p> + +<p>"Bless my paddle wheel! So it is!" cried Mr. Damon. "I believe +it's them, Tom!"</p> + +<p>"No, there are only natives in that craft," answered the young +inventor a moment later, as he brought the binoculars into focus. +"I wish it was them, though." </p> + +<p>A few more miles were covered down stream, and then Tom tried +the opposite direction. But all to no purpose. A number of boats +were seen, and several rafts, but they had no white men on +them.</p> + +<p>"Maybe the Englishmen disguised themselves like natives, Tom," +suggested Ned. </p> + +<p>Our hero shook his head.</p> + +<p>"I could see everything in the boats, through these powerful +glasses," he replied, "and there was nothing like my camera. "I'd +know that a mile off. No, they didn't take to this stream, though +they probably crossed it. We'll have to keep on the way we were +going. It will soon be night, and we'll have to camp. Then we'll +take up the search to-morrow." </p> + +<p>It was just getting dusk, and Tom was looking about for a good +place to land in the jungle, when Ned, who was standing in the +bow, cried:</p> + +<p>"I say, Tom, here's a native village just ahead. There's a good +place to stop, and we can stay there over night." </p> + +<p>"Good!" exclaimed Tom. "And, what's more, we can make some +inquiries as to whether or not the Englishmen have passed here. +This is great! Maybe we'll come out all right, after all! They +can't travel at night--or at least I don't believe they will--and +if they have passed this village we can catch them to-morrow. +We'll go down."</p> + +<p>They were now over the native town, which was in a natural +clearing in the jungle. The natives had by this time caught sight +of the big airship over them, and were running about in terror. +There was not a man, woman or child in sight when the Flyer came +down, for the inhabitants had all fled in fright. </p> + +<p>"Not much of a chance to make inquiries of these folks," said +Mr. Nestor.</p> + +<p>"Oh, they'll come back," predicted Tom. "They are naturally +curious, and when they see that the thing isn't going to blow up, +they'll gather around. I've seen the same thing happen before."</p> + +<p>Tom proved a true prophet. In a little while some of the men +began straggling back, when they saw our friends walking about +the airship, as it rested on the ground. Then came the children, +and then the women, until the whole population was gathered about +the airship, staring at it wonderingly. Tom made signs of +friendship, and was lucky enough to find a native who knew a few +French words. Tom was not much of a French scholar, but he could +frame a question as to the Englishmen.</p> + +<p>"Oui!" exclaimed the native, when he understood. Then he rattled +off something, which Tom, after having it repeated, and making +signs to the man to make sure he understood, said meant that the +Englishmen had passed through the village that morning. </p> + +<p>"We're on the right trail!" cried the young inventor. "They're +only a day's travel ahead of us. We'll catch them to-morrow, and +get my camera back."</p> + +<p>The natives soon lost all fear of the airship, and some of the +chief men even consented to come aboard. Tom gave them a few +trifles for presents, and won their friendship to such an extent +that a great feast was hastily gotten up in honor of the +travelers. Big fires were lighted, and fowls by the score were +roasted. </p> + +<p>"Say, I'm glad we struck this place!" exclaimed Ned, as he sat +on the ground with the others, eating roast fowl. "This is all to +the chicken salad!"</p> + +<p>"Things are coming our way at last," remarked Tom. "We'll start +the first thing in the morning. I wish I had my camera now. I'd +take a picture of this scene. Dad would enjoy it, and so would +Mrs. Baggert. Oh, I almost wish I was home again. But if I get my +camera I've got a lot more work ahead of me." </p> + +<p>"What kind?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"I don't know. I'm to stop in Paris for the next instructions +from Mr. Period. He is keeping in touch with the big happenings +of the world, and he may send us to Japan, to get some earthquake +pictures." </p> + +<p>The night was quiet after the feast, and in the morning Tom +and his friends sailed off in their airship, leaving behind the +wondering and pleased natives, for our hero handed out more +presents, of small value to him, but yet such things as the +blacks prized highly.</p> + +<p>Once more they were flying over the trail, and they put on more +speed now, for they were fairly sure that the men they sought +were ahead of them about a day's travel. This meant perhaps +twenty miles, and Tom figured that he could cover fifteen in a +hurry, and then go over the remaining five slowly, so as not to +miss his quarry. </p> + +<p>"Say, don't you smell something?" asked Ned a little later, +when the airship had been slowed down. "Something like +smoke?"</p> + +<p>"Humph! I believe I do get an odor of something burning," +admitted Tom, sniffing the atmosphere. </p> + +<p>"Bless my pocket book!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, "look down there, +boys!" He pointed below, and, to the surprise of the lads, and no +less of himself, he saw many animals hurrying back along the +jungle trail.</p> + +<p>There were scores of deer, leaping along, here and there a tawny +lion, and one or two tigers. Off to one side a rhinoceros crashed +his way through the tangle, and occasionally an elephant was +seen. </p> + +<p>"That's queer," cried Ned. "And they're not paying any +attention to each other, either."</p> + +<p>"Something is happening," was Mr. Nestor's opinion. "Those +animals are running away from something." </p> + +<p>"Maybe it's an elephant drive," spoke Tom. "I think--"</p> + +<p>But he did not finish. The smell of smoke suddenly became +stronger, and, a moment later, as the airship rose higher, in +response to a change in the angle of the deflecting rudder, which +Ned shifted, all on board saw a great volume of black smoke +rolling toward the sky. </p> + +<p>"A jungle fire!" cried Tom. "The jungle is burning! That's why +the animals are running back this way."</p> + +<p>"We'd better not go on!" shouted Ned, choking a bit, as the smoke +rolled nearer. </p> + +<p>"No, we've got to turn back!" decided Tom. "Say, this will +stop the Englishmen! They can't go on. We'll go back to the +village we left, and wait for them. They're trapped!" And then he +added soberly: "I hope my camera doesn't get burnt up!"</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch22" id="ch22">CHAPTER XXII -- A DANGEROUS COMMISSION</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Look at that smoke!" yelled Ned, as he sent the airship about in +a great circle on the backward trail. </p> + +<p>"And there's plenty of blaze, too," added Tom. "See the flames +eating away! This stuff is as dry as tinder for there hasn't been +any rain for months."</p> + +<p>"Much hot!" was the comment of the giant, when he felt the warm +wind of the fire. </p> + +<p>"Bless my fountain pen!" gasped Mr. Damon, as he looked down +into the jungle. "See all those animals!"</p> + +<p>The trail was now thick with deer, and many small beasts, the +names of which Tom did not know. On either side could be heard +larger brutes, crashing their way forward to escape the fire +behind them. </p> + +<p>"Oh, if you only had your camera now!" cried Ned. "You could +get a wonderful picture, Tom."</p> + +<p>"What's the use of wishing for it. Those Englishmen have it, +and--" </p> + +<p>"Maybe they're using it!" interrupted Ned. "No, I don't think +they would know how to work it. Do you see anything of them, +Ned?"</p> + +<p>"Not a sight. But they'll surely have to come back, just as you +said, unless they got ahead of the fire. They can't go on, and it +would be madness to get off the trail in a jungle like this."</p> + +<p>"I don't believe they could have gotten ahead of the fire," +spoke Tom. "They couldn't travel fast enough for that, and see +how broad the blaze is."</p> + +<p>They were now higher up, well out of the heat and smoke of the +conflagration, and they could see that it extended for many miles +along the trail, and for a mile or so on either side of it. </p> + +<p>"We're far enough in advance, now, to go down a bit, I guess," +said Tom, a little later. "I want to get a good view of the path, +and I can't do that from up here. I have an idea that--"</p> + +<p>Tom did not finish, for as the airship approached nearer the +ground, he caught up a pair of binoculars, and focussed them on +something on the trail below. </p> + +<p>"What is it?" cried Ned, startled by something in his chum's +manner.</p> + +<p>"It's them! The Englishmen!" cried Tom. "See, they are racing +back along the trail. Their porters have deserted them. But they +have my camera! I can see it! I'm going down, and get it! Ned, +stand by the wheel, and make a quick landing. Then we'll go up +again!" </p> + +<p>Tom handed the glasses to his chum, and Ned quickly verified +the young inventor's statement. There were the two rascally +Englishmen. The fire was still some distance in the rear, but was +coming on rapidly. There were no animals to be seen, for they had +probably gone off on a side trail, or had slunk deeper into the +jungle. Above the distant roar of the blaze sounded the throb of +the airship's motor. The Englishmen heard it, and looked up. +Then, suddenly, they motioned to Tom to descend.</p> + +<p>"That's what I'm going to do," he said aloud, but of course they +could not hear him. </p> + +<p>"They're waiting for us!" cried Ned. "I wonder why?" for the +rascals had come to a halt, setting down the packs they carried +on the trail. One of the things they had was undoubtedly Tom's +camera.</p> + +<p>"They probably want us to save their lives," said Tom. "They know +they can't out-run this fire. They've given up! We have them +now!" </p> + +<p>"Are you going to save them?" asked Mr. Damon.</p> + +<p>"Of course. I wouldn't let my worst enemy run the chances of +danger in that terrible blaze. I'd save them even if they had +smashed my camera. I'll go down, and get them, and take them back +to the native village, but that's as far as I will carry them. +They'll have to get away as best they can, after that." </p> + +<p>It was the work of but a few minutes to lower the airship to +the trail. Fortunately it widened a bit at this point, or Tom +could never have gotten his craft down through the trees.</p> + +<p>"Hand up that camera!" ordered our hero curtly, when he had +stopped near the Englishmen. </p> + +<p>"Yes, my dear chap," spoke the tall Britisher, "but will you +oblige us, by taking us--"</p> + +<p>"Hand up the camera first!" sharply ordered Tom again. </p> + +<p>They passed it to him.</p> + +<p>"I know we treated you beastly mean," went on Kenneth, "but, my +dear chap--" </p> + +<p>"Get aboard," was all Tom said, and when the rascals, with +fearful glances back into the burning jungle, did so, our hero +sent his craft high into the air again.</p> + +<p>"Where are you taking us, my dear chap?" asked the tall rascal.</p> + +<p>"Don't 'dear chap' me!" retorted Tom. "I don't want to talk to +you. I'm going to drop you at the native village."</p> + +<p>"But that will burn!" cried the Englishman. </p> + +<p>"The wind is changing," was our hero's answer. "The fire won't +get to the village. You'll be safe. Have you damaged my camera?" +he asked as he began to examine it, while Ned managed the +ship.</p> + +<p>"No, my dear chap. You mustn't think too hard of us. We were both +down on our luck, and a chap offered us a big sum to get on your +trail, and secure the camera. He said you had filched it from +him, and that he had a right to it. Understand, we wouldn't have +taken it had we known--" </p> + +<p>"Don't talk to me!" interrupted Tom, as he saw that his +apparatus had not been damaged. "The man who hired you was a +rascal--that's all I'll say. Put on a little more speed, Ned. I +want to get rid of these 'dear chaps' and take some pictures of +the jungle fire."</p> + +<p>As Tom had said, the wind had changed, and was blowing the flames +away off to one side, so that the native village would be in no +danger. It was soon reached, and the Africans were surprised to +see Tom's airship back again. But he did not stay long, +descending only to let the Englishmen alight. They pleaded to be +taken to the coast, making all sorts of promises, and stating +that, had they known that Turbot and Eckert (for whom they +admitted they had acted) were not telling the truth, they never +would have taken Tom's camera. </p> + +<p>"Don't leave us here!" they pleaded.</p> + +<p>"I wouldn't have you on board my airship another minute for a +fortune!" declared Tom, as he signalled to Ned to start the +motor. Then the Flyer ascended on high, leaving the plotters and +started back for the fire, of which Tom got a series of fine +moving pictures. </p> + +<p>A week later our friends were in Paris, having made a quick +trip, on which little of incident occurred, though Tom managed to +get quite a number of good views on the way.</p> + +<p>He found a message awaiting him, from Mr. Period. </p> + +<p>"Well, where to now?" asked Ned, as his chum read the +cablegram.</p> + +<p>"Great Scott!" cried our hero. "Talk about hair-raising jobs, +this certainly is the limit!" </p> + +<p>"Why, what's the matter?"</p> + +<p>"I've got to get some moving pictures of a volcano in action," +was the answer. "Say, if I'd known what sort of things 'Spotty' +wanted, I'd never have consented to take this trip. A volcano in +action, and maybe an earthquake on the side! This is certainly +going some!" </p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch23" id="ch23">CHAPTER XXIII -- AT THE VOLCANO</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"And you've got to snap-shot a volcano?" remarked Ned to his +chum, after a moment of surprised silence. "Any particular one? +Is it Vesuvius? If it is we haven't far to go. But how does Mr. +Period know that it's going to get into action when we want it +to?"</p> + +<p>"No, it isn't Vesuvius," replied Tom. "We've got to take another +long trip, and we'll have to go by steamer again. The message +says that the Arequipa volcano, near the city of the same name, +in Peru, has started to 'erupt,' and, according to rumor, it's +acting as it did many years ago, just before a big upheaval."</p> + +<p>"Bless my Pumice stones!" cried Mr. Damon. "And are you +expected to get pictures of it shooting out flames and smoke, +Tom?"</p> + +<p>"Of course. An inactive volcano wouldn't make much of a moving +picture. Well, if we go to Peru, we won't be far from the United +States, and we can fly back home in the airship. But we've got to +take the Flyer apart, and pack up again." </p> + +<p>"Will you have time?" asked Mr. Nestor. "Maybe the volcano +will get into action before you arrive, and the performance will +be all over with."</p> + +<p>"I think not," spoke Tom, as he again read the cablegram. "Mr. +Period says he has advices from Peru to the effect that, on other +occasions, it took about a month from the time smoke was first +seen coming from the crater, before the fireworks started up. I +guess we've got time enough, but we won't waste any." </p> + +<p>"And I guess Montgomery and Kenneth won't be there to make +trouble for us," put in Ned. "It will be some time before they +get away from that African town, I think."</p> + +<p>They began work that day on taking the airship apart for +transportation to the steamer that was to carry them across the +ocean. Tom decided on going to Panama, to get a series of +pictures on the work of digging that vast canal. On inquiry he +learned that a steamer was soon to sail for Colon, so he took +passage for his friends and himself on that, also arranging for +the carrying of the parts of his airship. </p> + +<p>It was rather hard work to take the Flyer apart, but it was +finally done, and, in about a week from the time of arriving in +Paris, they left that beautiful city. The pictures already taken +were forwarded to Mr. Period, with a letter of explanation of +Tom's adventures thus far, and an account of how his rivals had +acted.</p> + +<p>Just before sailing, Tom received another message from his +strange employer. The cablegram read: </p> + +<p>"Understand our rivals are also going to try for volcano +pictures. Can't find out who will represent Turbot and Eckert, +but watch out. Be suspicious of strangers."</p> + +<p>"That's what I will!" cried Tom. "If they get my camera away from +me again, it will be my own fault." </p> + +<p>The voyage to Colon was not specially interesting. They ran +into a terrific storm, about half way over, and Tom took some +pictures from the steamer's bridge, the captain allowing him to +do so, but warning him to be careful.</p> + +<p>"I'll take Koku up there with me," said the young inventor, "and +if a wave tries to wash me overboard he'll grab me." </p> + +<p>And it was a good thing that he took this precaution, for, +while a wave did not get as high as the bridge, one big, green +roller smashed over the bow of the vessel, staggering her so that +Tom was tossed against the rail. He would have been seriously +hurt, and his camera might have been broken, but for the +quickness of the giant.</p> + +<p>Koku caught his master, camera and all, in a mighty arm, and with +the other clung to a stanchion, holding Tom in safety until the +ship was on a level keel once more. </p> + +<p>"Thanks, Koku!" gasped Tom. "You always seem to be around when +I need you." The giant grinned happily.</p> + +<p>The storm blew out in a few days, and, from then on, there was +pleasant sailing. When Tom's airship had been reassembled at +Colon, it created quite a sensation among the small army of canal +workers, and, for their benefit, our hero gave several flying +exhibitions. </p> + +<p>He then took some of the engineers on a little trip, and in +turn, they did him the favor of letting him get moving pictures +of parts of the work not usually seen.</p> + +<p>"And now for the volcano!" cried Tom one morning, when having +shipped to Mr. Period the canal pictures, the Flyer was sent +aloft, and her nose pointed toward Arequipa. "We've got quite a +run before us." </p> + +<p>"How long?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"About two thousand miles. But I'm going to speed her up to the +limit." Tom was as good as his word, and soon the Flyer was +shooting along at her best rate, reeling off mile after mile, +just below the clouds. </p> + +<p>It was a wild and desolate region over which the travelers +found themselves most of the time, though the scenery was +magnificent. They sailed over Quito, that city on the equator, +and, a little later, they passed above the Cotopaxi and +Chimbarazo volcanoes. But neither of them was in action. The +Andes Mountains, as you all know, has many volcanoes scattered +along the range. Lima was the next large city, and there Tom made +a descent to inquire about the burning mountain he was shortly to +photograph.</p> + +<p>"It will soon be in action," the United States counsel said. "I +had a letter from a correspondent near there only yesterday, and +he said the people in the town were getting anxious. They are +fearing a shower of burning ashes, or that the eruption may be +accompanied by an earthquake." </p> + +<p>"Good!" cried Tom. "Oh, I don't mean it exactly that way," he +hastened to add, as he saw the counsel looking queerly at him. "I +meant that I could get pictures of both earthquake and volcano +then. I don't wish the poor people any harm."</p> + +<p>"Well, you're the first one I ever saw who was anxious to get +next door to a volcano," remarked the counsel. "Hold on, though, +that's not quite right. I heard yesterday that a couple of young +fellows passed through here on their way to the same place. Come +to think of it, they were moving picture men, also." </p> + +<p>"Great Scott!" cried Tom. "Those must be my rivals, I'll +wager. I must get right on the job. Thanks for the information," +and hurrying front the office he joined his friends on the +airship. and was soon aloft again.</p> + +<p>"Look, Tom, what's that?" cried Ned, about noon the next day when +the Flyer, according to their calculations must be nearing the +city of Arequipa. "See that black cloud over there. I hope it +isn't a tornado, or a cyclone, or whatever they call the big wind +storms down here." </p> + +<p>Tom, and the others, looked to where Ned pointed. There was a +column of dense smoke hovering in the air, lazily swirling this +way and that. The airship was rapidly approaching it.</p> + +<p>"Why that--" began Tom, but before he could complete the sentence +the smoke was blown violently upward. It became streaked with +fire, and, a moment later, there was the echo of a tremendous +explosion. </p> + +<p>"The volcano!" cried Tom. "The Arequipa volcano! We're here +just in time, for she's in eruption now! Come on, Ned, help me +get out the camera! Mr. Damon, you and Mr. Nestor manage the +airship! Put us as close as you dare! I'm going to get some +crackerjack pictures!"</p> + +<p>Once more came a great report. </p> + +<p>"Bless my toothpick!" gasped Mr. Damon. "This is awful!" And +the airship rushed on toward the volcano which could be plainly +seen now, belching forth fire, smoke and ashes.</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch24" id="ch24">CHAPTER XXIV -- THE MOLTEN RIVER</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Whew!" gasped Ned, as he stood beside Tom in the bow of the +airship. "What's that choking us, Tom?" </p> + +<p>"Sulphur, I guess, and gases from the volcano. The wind blew +'em over this way. They're not dangerous, as long as there is no +carbonic acid gas given off, and I don't smell any of that, yet. +Say, Ned, it's erupting all right, isn't it?"</p> + +<p>"I should say so!" cried his chum. </p> + +<p>"Put us a little to one side, Mr. Damon," called Tom to his +friend, who was in the pilot house. "I can't get good pictures +through so much smoke. "It's clearer off to the left."</p> + +<p>"Bless my bath robe!" cried the odd man. "You're as cool about +it, Tom, as though you were just in an ordinary race, at an +aeroplane meet." </p> + +<p>"And why shouldn't I be?" asked our hero with a laugh, as he +stopped the mechanism of the camera until he should have a +clearer view of the volcano. "There's not much danger up here, +but I want to get some views from the level, later, and +then--"</p> + +<p>"You don't get me down there!" interrupted Mr. Nestor, with a +grim laugh. </p> + +<p>They were now hovering over the volcano, but high enough up so +that none of the great stones that were being thrown out could +reach them. The column of black smoke, amid which could be seen +the gleams of the molten fires in the crater, rolled toward them, +and the smell of sulphur became stronger.</p> + +<p>But when, in accordance with Tom's suggestion, the airship had +been sent over to one side, they were clear of the vapor and the +noxious gas. Then, too, a better view could be had of the volcano +below them. </p> + +<p>"Hold her down!" cried Tom, as he got in a good position, and +the propellers were slowed down so that they just overcame the +influence of a slight wind. Thus the Flyer hovered in the air, +while below her the volcano belched forth red-hot rocks, some of +them immense in size, and quantities of hot ashes and cinders. +Tom had the camera going again now, and there was every prospect +of getting a startling and wonderful, as well as rare series of +moving pictures.</p> + +<p>"Wow! That was a big one!" cried Ned, as an unusually large mass +of rocks was thrown out, and the column of fire and smoke +ascended nearly to the hovering craft. A moment later came an +explosion, louder than any that had preceded. "We'd better be +going up; hadn't we Tom?" his chum asked. </p> + +<p>"A little, yes, but not too far. I want to get as many near +views as I can."</p> + +<p>"Bless my overshoes!" gasped Mr. Damon, as he heard Tom say that. +Then he sent some of the vapor from the generating machine into +the gas bag, and the Flyer arose slightly. </p> + +<p>Ned looked in the direction of the town, but could not see it, +on account of the haze. Then he directed his attention to the +terrifying sight below him.</p> + +<p>"It's a good thing it isn't very near the city," he said to Tom, +who was engaged in watching the automatic apparatus of the +camera, to see when he would have to put in a fresh film. "It +wouldn't take much of this sort of thing to destroy a big city. +But I don't see any streams of burning lava, such as they always +say come out of a volcano." </p> + +<p>"It isn't time for that yet," replied Tom. "The lava comes out +last, after the top layer of stones and ashes have been blown +out. They are a sort of stopper to the volcano, I guess, like the +cork of a bottle, and, when they're out of the way, the red-hot +melted rock comes out. Then there's trouble. I want to get +pictures of that."</p> + +<p>"Well, keep far enough away," advised Mr. Nestor, who had come +forward. "Don't take any chances. I guess your rivals won't get +here in time to take any pictures, for they can't travel as fast +as we did." </p> + +<p>"No," agreed the young inventor, "unless some other party of +them were here ahead of us. They'll have their own troubles, +though, making pictures anything like as good as we're +getting."</p> + +<p>"There goes another blast!" cried Ned, as a terrific explosion +sounded, and a shower of hot stuff was thrown high into the air. +"If I lived in Arequipa I'd be moving out about now." </p> + +<p>"There isn't much danger I guess, except from showers of +burning ashes, and volcanic dust," spoke Mr. Nestor, "and the +wind is blowing it away from the town. If it continues this way +the people will be saved."</p> + +<p>"Unless there is so much of the red-hot lava that it will bury +the city," suggested Tom. "I hope that doesn't happen," and he +could not repress a shudder as he looked down on the awful scene +below him. </p> + +<p>After that last explosion the volcano appeared to subside +somewhat, though great clouds of smoke and tongues of fire leaped +upward.</p> + +<p>"I've got to put in a new reel of film!" suddenly exclaimed Tom. +"While I stop the camera, Mr. Damon, I think you and Mr. Nestor +might put the airship down to the ground. I want some views on +the level." </p> + +<p>"What! Go down to earth with this awful volcano spouting +fire?" cried Mr. Damon. "Bless my comb and brush!"</p> + +<p>"We can get well down the side of the mountain," said Tom. "I +won't go into any danger, much less ask any one else to do so, +and I certainly don't want my ship damaged. We can land down +there," he said, pointing to a spot on the side of the volcanic +mountain, that was some distance removed from the mouth of the +crater. It won't take me long to get one reel of views, and then +I'll come up again." </p> + +<p>The two men finally gave in to Tom's argument, that there was +comparatively little danger, for they admitted that they could +quickly rise up at the first sign of danger, and accordingly the +Flyer descended. Tom quickly had a fresh reel of film inserted, +and started his camera to working, standing it on a tripod some +distance from the airship.</p> + +<p>Once more the volcano was "doing its prettiest," as Tom expressed +it. He glanced around, as another big explosion took place, to +see if any other picture men were on hand, but the terrible +mountain seemed deserted, though of course someone might be on +the other side. </p> + +<p>"What's that?" suddenly cried Ned, looking apprehensively at +his chum. At the same time Tom jumped to his feet, for he had +been kneeling near the camera.</p> + +<p>"Bless my--" began Mr. Damon, but he got no farther, for suddenly +the solid ground began to tremble and shake. </p> + +<p>"An earthquake!" shouted Mr. Nestor. "Come, Tom! Get back to +the ship!" The young inventor and Ned had been the only ones to +leave it, as it rested on a spur of the mountain.</p> + +<p>As Tom and Ned leaped forward to save the camera which was +toppling to one side, there came a great fissure in the side of +the volcano, and a stream of molten rock, glowing white with +heat, gushed out. It was a veritable river of melted stone, and +it was coming straight for the two lads. </p> + +<p>"Run! Run!" cried Mr. Nestor. "We have everything ready for a +quick flight. "Run, Tom! Ned!"</p> + +<p>The lads leaped for the Flyer, the molten rock coming nearer and +nearer, and then with a cry Koku sprang overboard and made a dash +toward his master. </p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /><br /><br /> +<h2><a name="ch25" id="ch25">CHAPTER XXV -- THE EARTHQUAKE -- CONCLUSION</a></h2> +<br /><br /> + +<p>"Here, Mr. Tom. Me carry you an' Ned. You hold picture +machine!" cried the giant. "Me run faster."</p> + +<p>As he spoke he lifted Ned up under one arm, and caught Tom in the +other. For they were but as children to his immense strength. Tom +held on to his camera, and, thus laden down, Koku ran as he had +never run before, toward the waiting airship. </p> + +<p>"Come on! Come on!" shouted Mr. Damon, for he could see what +Tom, Ned and Koku could not, that the stream of lava was nearing +them rapidly.</p> + +<p>"It's hot!" cried Ned, as a wave of warm air fanned his cheek.</p> + +<p>"I should say so!" cried Tom. "The volcano is full of red-hot +melted stone."</p> + +<p>There came a sickening shake of the earth. Koku staggered as he +ran on, but he kept his feet, and did not fall. Again came a +tremendous explosion, and a shower of fine ashes sifted over the +airship, and on Koku and his living burdens. </p> + +<p>"This is the worst ever!" gasped Tom. "But I've got some dandy +pictures, if we ever get away from here alive to develop +them."</p> + +<p>"Hurry, Koku! Hurry!" begged Mr. Nestor. "Bless my shoe laces!" +yelled Mr. Damon, who was fairly jumping up and down on the deck +of the Flyer. "I'll never go near a volcano again!" </p> + +<p>Once more the ground shook and trembled, as the earthquake +rent it. Several cracks appeared in Koku's path, but he leaped +over them with tremendous energy. A moment later he had thrust +Tom and Ned over the rail, to the deck, and leaped aboard +himself.</p> + +<p>"Let her go!" cried Tom. "I'll do the rest of my moving picture +work, around volcanoes and earthquakes, from up in the air!" </p> + +<p>The Flyer shot upward, and scarcely a moment too soon, for, an +instant after she left the ground, the stream of hot, burning and +bubbling lava rolled beneath her, and those on board could feel +the heat of it ascending.</p> + +<p>"Say, I'm glad we got out of that when we did," gasped Ned, as he +looked down. "You're all right, Koku." </p> + +<p>"That no trouble," replied the giant with a cheerful grin. "Me +carry four fellows like you," and he stretched out his big arms. +Tom had at once set his camera to working again, taking view +after view.</p> + +<p>It was a terrifying but magnificent sight that our friends +beheld, for the earth was trembling and heaving. Great fissures +opened in many places. Into some of them streams of lava poured, +for now the volcano had opened in several places, and from each +crack the melted rocks belched out. The crater, however, was not +sending into the air such volumes of smoke and ashes as before, +as most of the tremendous energy had passed, or was being used to +spout out the lava. </p> + +<p>The earthquake was confined to the region right about the +volcano, or there might have been a great loss of life in the +city. As it was, the damage done was comparatively slight.</p> + +<p>Tom continued to take views, some showing the earth as it was +twisted and torn, and other different aspects of the crater. +Then, as suddenly as the earthquake had begun, it subsided, and +the volcano was less active. </p> + +<p>"My! I'm glad to see that!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "I've had +about enough of horrors!"</p> + +<p>"And I have too," added Tom. "I'm on my last roll of film, and I +can't take many more pictures. But I guess I have all Mr. Period +needs, and we'll start for home, as soon as I finish the next +roll. But I'm going to save that for a night view. That will he a +novelty." </p> + +<p>The volcano became active again after dark, and presented a +magnificent though terrifying aspect. As the airship hovered +above it, Tom got some of his best pictures, and then, as the +last bit of film slipped along back of the lens, the airship was +headed north.</p> + +<p>"Now for Shopton!" cried Tom. "Our trip is ended." </p> + +<p>"It's too had you didn't have more film," said Ned. "I thought +you had plenty."</p> + +<p>"Well, I used more than I counted on, but there are enough +pictures as it is." </p> + +<p>"Plenty," agreed Mr. Nestor. "I'm sure our company will be +very well satisfied with them, Tom. We can't get home any too +soon to suit me. I've had enough excitement."</p> + +<p>"And we didn't see anything of those other fellows whom we heard +about," spoke Mr. Damon, as the big airship flew on. </p> + +<p>"No," said Tom. "But I'm not worrying about them."</p> + +<p>They made another stop in Lima, on their homeward trip, to renew +their supply of gasolene, and there learned that the rival +picture men had arrived at the volcano too late to see it in +operation. This news came to a relative of one of the two men who +lived in Lima. </p> + +<p>"Then our views of the earthquake and the smoking mountain +will be the only ones, and your company can control the rights," +said Tom to Mr. Nestor, who agreed with him.</p> + +<p>In due time, and without anything out of the ordinary happening +the Flyer reached Shopton, where Tom found a warm welcome +awaiting him, not only from his father, but from a certain young +lady, whose name I do not need to mention. </p> + +<p>"And so you got everything you went after, didn't you, Tom," +exclaimed Mr. Period, a few days later, when he had come from New +York to get the remainder of the films.</p> + +<p>"Yes, and some things I didn't expect," replied Tom. "There +was--" </p> + +<p>"Yes! Yes! I know!" interrupted the odd picture man. "It was +that jungle fire. That's a magnificent series. None better. And +those scoundrels took your camera; eh?"</p> + +<p>"Yes. Could you connect them with Turbot and Eckert?" asked Tom.</p> + +<p>"No, but I'm sure they were acting for them just the same. I +had no legal evidence to act on, however, so I had to let it go. +Turbot and Eckert won't be in it when I start selling duplicates +of the films you have. And these last ought to be the best of +all. I didn't catch that fellow when I raced after him on the +dock. He got away, and has steered clear of me since," finished +Mr. Period.</p> + +<p>"And our rivals didn't secure any views like ours," said Tom.</p> + +<p>"I'm glad of it," spoke Mr. Period. "Turbot and Eckert bribed +one of my men, and so found out where I was sending messages to +you. They even got a copy of my cablegram. But it did them no +good."</p> + +<p>"Were all the films clear that I sent you?" asked our hero. </p> + +<p>"Every one. Couldn't be better. The animal views were +particularly fine. You must have had your nerve with you to get +some of 'em."</p> + +<p>"Oh, Tom always has his nerve," laughed Ned. </p> + +<p>"Well, how soon will you be ready to start out again?" asked +the picture man, as he packed up the last of the films which Tom +gave him. "I'd like to get some views of a Japanese earthquake, +and we haven't any polar views. I want some of them, taken as +near the North Pole as you can get."</p> + +<p>Tom gently shook his head. </p> + +<p>"What! You don't mean to say you won't get them for me?" cried +Mr. Period. "With that wonderful camera of yours you can get +views no one else ever could."</p> + +<p>"Then some one else will have to take them," remarked the young +inventor. "I'll lend you the camera, and an airship, and you can +go yourself, Mr. Period. I'm going to stay home for a while. I +did what I set out to do, and that's enough." </p> + +<p>"I'm glad you'll stay home, Tom," said his father. "Now +perhaps I'll get my gyroscope finished."</p> + +<p>"And I, my noiseless airship," went on our hero. "No, Mr. Period, +you'll have to excuse me this time. Why don't you go yourself?" +he asked. "You would know just what kind of pictures you wanted."</p> + +<p>"No, I'm a promoter of the moving picture business, and I sell +films, but I don't know hew to take them," was the answer. +"Besides I--er--well, I don't exactly care for airships, Tom +Swift," he finished with a laugh. "Well, I can't thank you enough +for what you did for me, and I've brought you a check to cover +your expenses, and pay you as I agreed. All the same I'm sorry +you won't start for Japan, or the North Pole."</p> + +<p>"Nothing doing," said Tom with a laugh; and Mr. Period departed.</p> + +<p>"Have you any idea what you will do next?" asked Ned, a day or +so later, when he and Tom were in the workshop.</p> + +<p>"I can't tell until I finish my noiseless airship," was the +answer. "Then something may happen." </p> + +<p>Something did, as I shall have the pleasure of telling you +about in the next volume of this series, to be called, "Tom Swift +and His Great Searchlight; or, On the Border for Uncle Sam," and +in it will be given an account of a great lantern our hero made, +and how he baffled the smugglers with it.</p> + +<p>"Oh, Tom, weren't you dreadfully frightened when you saw that +burning river of lava coming toward you?" asked Mary Nestor, when +the young inventor called on her later and told her some of his +adventures. "I should have been scared to death." </p> + +<p>"Well, I didn't have time to get scared," answered Tom. "It +all happened so quickly, and then, too I was thinking of my +camera. Next I knew Koku grabbed me, and it was all over."</p> + +<p>"But those wild beasts! Didn't they frighten you, especially when +the rhinoceros charged you?" </p> + +<p>"If you won't let it get out, I'll make a confession to you," +said Tom, lowering his voice. "I was scared stiff that time, but +don't let Ned know it."</p> + +<p>"I won't," promised Mary with a laugh. And now, when Tom is in +such pleasant company, we will take leave of him for a while, +knowing that. sooner or later, he will be seeking new adventures +as exciting as those of the past. </p> + +<p>THE END</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /> +<p>THE TOM SWIFT SERIES</p> + +<p>By VICTOR APPLETON <br /> +12mo. CLOTH. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING. COLORED WRAPPERS. </p> + +<p>These spirited tales convey In a realistic way the wonderful +advances in land and sea locomotion. Stories like these are +impressed upon the memory and their reading is productive only of +good.</p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR CYCLE <br /> +Or Fun and Adventure on the Road</p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR BOAT<br /> +Or The Rivals of Lake Carlopa</p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP <br /> +Or The Stirring cruise of the Red Cloud</p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT<br /> +Or Under the Ocean for Sunken Treasure</p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT <br /> +Or The Speediest car on the Road </p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESSMESSAGE<br /> +Or The castaways of Earthquake Island </p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS <br /> +Or The Secret of Phantom Mountain</p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OFICE<br /> +Or The Wreck of the Airship </p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER <br /> +Or The Quickest Flight on Record </p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE<br /> +Or Daring Adventures In Elephant Land </p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD <br /> +Or Marvelous Adventures Underground </p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER<br /> +Or Seeking the Platinum Treasure </p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY <br /> +Or A Daring Escape by Airship </p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA<br /> +Or The Perils of Moving Picture Taking </p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT <br /> +Or On the Border for Uncle Sam </p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT AND HIS GIANT CANNON<br /> +Or The Longest Shots on Record </p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT AND HIS PHOTO TELEPHONE<br /> +Or The Picture that Saved a Fortune </p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT AND HIS AERIAL WARSHIP<br /> +Or The Naval Terror of the Seas </p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL <br /> +Or The Hidden city of the Andes</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /> +<p>THE BUNNY BROWN SERIES <br /> +By LAURA LEE HOPE</p> + +<p>Author of the Popular "Bobbsey Twins" Books </p> + +<p>wrapper and text illustrations drawn by</p> + +<p>FLORENCE ENGLAND NOSWORTHY<br /> +12mo. DURABLY BOUND. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING </p> +<br /> + +<p>These stories by the author of the "Bobbsey Twins" Books are +eagerly welcomed by the little folks from about five to ten years +of age. Their eyes fairly dance with delight at the lively doings +of inquisitive little Bunny Brown and his cunning, trustful +sister Sue.</p> + +<p>Bunny was a lively little boy. very inquisitive. When he did +anything, Sue followed his leadership. They had many adventures, +some comical in the extreme. </p> + +<p>BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE<br /> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE ON GRANDPA'S FARM <br /> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE PLAYING CIRCUS<br /> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT CAMP REST-A-WHILE <br /> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT AUNT LU'S CITY HOME <br /> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE IN THE BIG WOODS <br /> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE ON AN AUTO TOUR <br /> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AND THEIR SHETLAND PONY<br /> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE GIVING A SHOW <br /> +BUNNY BROWN AND HIS SISTER SUE AT CHRISTMAS TREE COVE</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /> +<p>THE BOBBSEY TWINS BOOKS</p> + +<p>For Little Men and Women</p> + +<p>By LAURA LEE HOPE</p> <br /> + +<p>Author of 'The Bunny Brown" Series. Etc.<br /> +12mo. DURABLY BOUND. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING</p> +<br /> + +<p>Copyright publications which cannot be obtained elsewhere. Books +that charm the hearts of the little ones, and of which they never +tire.</p> + +<p>THE BOBBSEY TWINS <br /> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN THE COUNTRY <br /> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT THE SEASHORE <br /> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT SCHOOL <br /> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT SNOW LODGE <br /> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON A HOUSEBOAT <br /> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT MEADOW BROOK <br /> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS AT HOME <br /> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN A GREAT CITY<br /> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON BLUEBERRY ISLAND <br /> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS ON THE DEEP BLUE SEA <br /> +THE BOBBSEY TWINS IN THE GREAT WEST</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /> +<p>THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS SERIES </p> + +<p>By LAURA LEE HOPE</p> + +<p>Author of "The Bobbsey Twins Series." </p> + +<p>l2mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING</p> + +<br /> +<p>The adventures of Ruth and Alice DeVere. Their father, a widower, +is an actor who has taken up work for the "movies." Both girls +wish to aid him in his work and visit various localities to act +in all sorts of pictures. </p> + +<br /> +<p>THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS<br /> +Or First Appearance in Photo Dramas.</p> + +<p>Having lost his voice, the father of the girls goes into the +movies and the girls follow. Tells how many "parlor dramas" are +filmed. </p> + + +<br /> +<p>THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT OAK FARM <br /> +Or Queer Happenings While Taking Rural Plays.</p> + +<p>Full of fun in the country, the haps and mishaps of taking film +plays, and giving an account of two unusual discoveries. </p> + + +<br /> +<p>THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS SNOWBOUND<br /> +Or The Proof on the Film.</p> + +<p>A tale of winter adventures in the wilderness, showing how the +photo-play actors sometimes suffer. </p> + + +<br /> +<p>THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS UNDER THE PALMS<br /> +Or Lost in the Wilds of Florida.</p> + +<p>How they went to the land of palms, played many parts in dramas +before the camera; were lost, and aided others who were also +lost. </p> + + +<br /> +<p>THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT ROCKY RANCH<br /> +Or Great Days Among the Cowboys.</p> + +<p>All who have ever seen moving pictures of the rest west will want +to know just how they are made. This volume gives every detail +and is full of clean fun and excitement. </p> + + +<br /> +<p>THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS AT SEA<br /> +Or a Pictured Shipwreck that Became Real.</p> + +<p>A thrilling account of the girls' experiences on the water. </p> + + +<br /> +<p>THE MOVING PICTURE GIRLS IN WAR PLAYS<br /> +Or The Sham Battles at Oak Farm.</p> + +<p>The girls play important parts in big battle scenes and have +plenty of hard work along with considerable fun. </p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /> +<p>THE OUTDOOR CHUMS SERIES</p> + +<p>By CAPTAIN QUINCY ALLEN </p> + +<p>The outdoor chums are four wide-awake lads, sons of wealthy +men of a small city located on a lake. The boys love outdoor +life, and are greatly interested in hunting, fishing, and picture +taking. They have motor cycles, motor boats, canoes, etc., and +during their vacations go everywhere and have all sorts of +thrilling adventures. The stories give full directions for +camping out, how to fish, how to hunt wild animals and prepare +the skins for stuffing, how to manage a canoe, how to swim, etc. +Full of the spirit of outdoor life.</p> + +<br /> +<p>THE OUTDOOR CHUMS <br /> +Or The First Tour of the Rod, Gun and Camera Club. </p> + +<p>THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON THE LAKE<br /> +Or Lively Adventures on Wildcat Island.</p> + +<p>THE OUTDOOR CHUMS IN THE FOREST<br /> +Or Laying the Ghost of Oak Ridge.</p> + +<p>THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON THE GULF<br /> +Or Rescuing the Lost Balloonists.</p> + +<p>THE OUTDOOR CHUMS AFTER BIG GAME.<br /> +Or Perilous Adventures in the Wilderness. </p> + +<p>THE OUTDOOR CHUMS ON A HOUSEBOAT<br /> +Or The Rivals of the Mississippi.</p> + +<p>THE OUTDOOR CHUMS IN THE BIG WOODS<br /> +Or The Rival Hunters at Lumber Run. </p> + +<p>THE OUTDOOR CHUMS AT CABIN POINT<br /> +Or The Golden Cup Mystery.</p> + +<p>12mo. Averaging 240 pages. Illustrated. Handsomely bound in +Cloth. </p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /> +<p>THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH SERIES</p> + +<p>By GERTRUDE W. MORRISON </p> + +<p>l2mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING.</p> + +<p>Here is a series full of the spirit of high school life of today. +The girls are real flesh-and-blood characters, and we follow them +with interest in school and out. There are many contested matches +on track and field, and on the water, as well as doings in the +classroom and on the school stage. There it plenty of fun and +excitement, all clean, pure and wholesome. </p> + +<br /> +<p>THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH <br /> +Or Rivals for all Honors.</p> + +<p>A stirring tale of high school life, full of fun, with a tomb of +mystery and a strange initiation. </p> + + +<br /> +<p>THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON LAKE LUNA<br /> +Or The Crew That Won.</p> + +<p>Telling of water sports and fun galore, and of fine times in +camp. </p> + +<br /> +<p>THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH AT BASKETBALL<br /> +Or The Great Gymnasium Mystery.</p> + +<p>Here we have a number of thrilling contests at basketball and in +addition, the solving of a mystery which had bothered the high +school authorities for a long while, </p> + +<br /> +<p>THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON THE STAGE<br /> +Or The Play That Took the Prize.</p> + +<p>How the girls went In for theatricals and how one of them wrote a +play which afterward was made over for the professional stage and +brought in some much-needed money. </p> + +<br /> +<p>THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH ON TRACK AND FIELD<br /> +Or The Girl Champions of the School League</p> + +<p>This story takes in high school athletics In their most approved +and up-to-date fashion. Full of fun and excitement. </p> + +<br /> +<p>THE GIRLS OF CENTRAL HIGH IN CAMP<br /> +Or The Old Professor's Secret</p> + +<p>The girls went camping on Acorn Island and had a delightful time +at boating, swimming and picnic parties.</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /> +<p>THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH SERIES </p> + +<p>By GRAHAM B. FORBES</p> + +<p>Never was there a cleaner, brighter, more manly boy than Frank +Allen, the hero of this series of boys' tales, and never was +there a better crowd of lads to associate with than the students +of the School. All boys will read these stories with deep +interest. The rivalry between the towns along the river was of +the keenest, and plots and counterplot to win the champions, at +baseball, at football, at boat racing, at track athletics, and at +ice hockey, were without number. Any lad reading one volume of +this series will surely want the others. </p> + +<br /> +<p>THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH +Or The All Around Rivals of the School</p> + +<p>THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE DIAMOND <br /> +Or Winning Out by Pluck</p> + +<p>THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE RIVER <br /> +Or The Boat Race Plot that Failed</p> + +<p>THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE GRIDIRON<br /> +Or The Struggle for the Silver Cup </p> + +<p>THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH ON THE ICE<br /> +Or Out for the Hockey Championship</p> + +<p>THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH IN TRACK ATHLETICS<br /> +Or A Long Run that Won </p> + +<p>THE BOYS OF COLUMBIA HIGH IN WINTER SPORTS<br /> +Or Stirring Doings on Skates and Iceboats</p> + +<p>I2mo. Illustrated. Handsomely bound In cloth, with cover design +and wrappers in color. </p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /> +<p>THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS SERIES</p> + +<p>By VICTOR APPLETON </p> + +<p>l2mo. BOUND IN CLOTH. ILLUSTRATED. UNIFORM STYLE OF BINDING.</p> + +<p>Moving pictures and photo plays are famous the world over, and in +this line of books the reader is given a full description of how +the films are made--the scenes of little dramas, indoors and out, +trick pictures to satisfy the curious, soul-stirring pictures of +city affairs, life in the Wild West, among the cowboys and +Indians, thrilling rescues along the seacoast, the daring of +picture hunters in the jungle among savage beasts, and the great +risks run in picturing conditions in a land of earthquakes. The +volumes teem with adventures and will be found interesting from +first chapter to last. </p> + +<br /> +<p>THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS<br /> +Or Perils of a Great City Depicted.</p> + +<p>THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN THE WEST<br /> +Or Taking Scenes Among the Cowboys and Indians. </p> + +<p>THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS ON THE COAST<br /> +Or Showing the Perils of the Deep.</p> + +<p>THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN THE JUNGLE<br /> +Or Stirring Times Among the Wild Animals. </p> + +<p>THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS IN EARTHQUAKE LAND<br /> +Or Working Amid Many Perils.</p> + +<p>THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS AND THE FLOOD<br /> +Or Perilous Days on the Mississippi. </p> + +<p>THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS AT PANAMA<br /> +Or Stirring Adventures Along the Great Canal.</p> + +<p>THE MOVING PICTURE BOYS UNDER THE SEA<br /> +Or The Treasure of the Lost Ship. </p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /> +<p>THE OUTDOOR GIRLS SERIES</p> + +<p>By LAURA LEE HOPE <br /> +Author of the "Bobbsey Twin Books" and "Bunny Brown" Series. </p> + +<br /> +<p>These tales take in the various adventures participated in by +several bright, up-to-date girls who love outdoor life. They are +clean and wholesome, free from sensationalism, absorbing from the +first chapter to the last.</p> + +<br /> +<p>THE OUTDOOR GIRLS OF DEEPDALE <br /> +Or Camping and Tramping for Fun and Health. </p> + +<p>Telling bow the girls organized their Camping and Tramping +Club, how they went on a tour, and of various adventures which +befell them.</p> + +<br /> +<p>THE OUTDOOR GIRLS AT RAINBOW LAKE<br /> +Or Stirring Cruise of the Motor Boat Gem. </p> + +<p>One of the girls becomes the proud possessor of a motor boat +and invites her club members to take a trip down the river to +Rainbow Lake, a beautiful sheet of water lying between the +mountains.</p> + +<br /> +<p>THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN A MOTOR CAR<br /> +Or The Haunted Mansion of Shadow Valley. </p> + +<p>One of the girls has learned to run a big motor ear, and she +invited the club to go on a tour to visit some distant relatives. +On the way they stop at a deserted mansion and make a surprising +discovery.</p> + +<br /> +<p>THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN A WINTER CAMP<br /> +Or Glorious Days on Skates and Ice Boats. </p> + +<p>In this story, the scene is shifted to a winter season. The +girls have some jolly times skating and ice boating, and visit a +hunters ramp in the big woods.</p> + +<br /> +<p>THE OUTDOOR GIRLS IN FLORIDA <br /> +Or Wintering in the Sunny South.</p> + +<p>The parents of one of the girls have bought an orange grove in +Florida, and her companions are invited to visit the place. They +take a trip into the interior, where several unusual things +happen.</p> + +<br /> +<p>THE OUTDOOR GIRLS AT OCEAN VIEW<br /> +Or The Box that Was Found in the Sand. </p> + +<p>The girls have great fun and solve a mystery while on an +outing along the New England coast.</p> + +<br /> +<p>THE OUTDOOR GIRLS ON PINE ISLAND <br /> +Or A Cave and What it Contained.</p> + +<p>A bright, healthful story, full of good times at a bungalow +camp on Pine Island.</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /> +<p>CHARMING BOOKS FOR GIRLS</p> + +<br /> +<p>WHEN PATTY WENT TO COLLEGE, By Jean Webster.<br /> +Illustrated by C. D. Williams. </p> + +<p>One of the best stories of life in a girl's college that has +ever been written. It is bright, whimsical and entertaining, +lifelike, laughable and thoroughly human.</p> + +<br /> +<p>JUST PATTY, By Jean Webster. <br /> +Illustrated by C. M. Relyea. </p> + +<p>Patty is full of the joy of living, fun-loving, given to +ingenious mischief for its own sake, with a disregard for pretty +convention which is an unfailing source of joy to her +fellows.</p> + +<br /> +<p>THE POOR LITTLE RICH GIRL, By Eleanor Gates. <br /> +With four full page illustrations. </p> + +<p>This story relates the experience of one of those unfortunate +children whose early days are passed in the companionship of a +governess, seldom seeing either parent, and famishing for natural +love and tenderness. A charming play as dramatized by the +author.</p> + +<br /> +<p>REBECCA OF SUNNYBROOK FARM, By Kate Douglas Wiggin. </p> + +<p>One of the most beautiful studies of childhood--Rebecca's +artistic, unusual and quaintly charming qualities stand out midst +a circle of austere New Englanders. The stage version is making a +phenomenal dramatic record.</p> + +<br /> +<p>NEW CHRONICLES OF REBECCA, By Kate Douglas Wiggin. <br /> +Illustrated by F. C. Yohn. </p> + +<p>Additional episodes in the girlhood of this delightful heroine +that carry Rebecca through various stages to her eighteenth +birthday.</p> + +<br /> +<p>REBECCA MARY, By Annie Hamilton Donnell.<br /> +Illustrated by Elizabeth Shippen Green. </p> + +<p>This author possesses the rare gift of portraying all the +grotesque little joys and sorrows and scruples of this very small +girl with a pathos that is peculiarly genuine and appealing.</p> + +<br /> +<p>EMMY LOU: Her Book and Heart, By George Madden Martin,<br /> +illustrated by Charles Louis Hinton. </p> + +<p>Emmy Lou is irresistibly lovable, because she is so absolutely +real. She is just a bewitchingly innocent, hugable little maid. +The book is wonderfully human.</p> +<hr /> + +<br /><br /> +<p>BOOKS BY VICTOR APPLETON</p> + +<p>THE TOM SWIFT SERIES</p> + +<p>TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR-CYCLE<br /> +Or Fun and Adventures on the Road <br /> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR-BOAT <br /> +Or The Rivals of Lake Carlopa<br /> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP <br /> +Or the Stirring Cruise of the Red cloud<br /> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT <br /> +Or Under the Ocean for Sunken Treasure <br /> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT <br /> +Or the Speediest Car on the Road <br /> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE <br /> +Or the castaways of Earthquake Island <br /> +TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS <br /> +Or the Secret of Phantom Mountain <br /> +TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE <br /> +Or the Wreck of the Airship <br /> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER <br /> +Or The Quickest Flight on Record <br /> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE <br /> +Or Daring Adventures in Elephant Land <br /> +TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD <br /> +Or Marvelous Adventures Underground <br /> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER <br /> +Or Seeking the Platinum Treasure <br /> +TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY <br /> +Or A Daring Escape by Airship <br /> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA <br /> +Or Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving Pictures <br /> +TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT <br /> +Or On the Border for Uncle Sam</p> + + +<pre> +End of Project Gutenberg's Etext of Tom Swift And His Wizard +Camera</pre> + +</body> +</html> + + diff --git a/old/old/14tom10h.zip b/old/old/14tom10h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8bcc691 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/old/14tom10h.zip diff --git a/old/old/14tom10l.lit b/old/old/14tom10l.lit Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b257230 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/old/14tom10l.lit diff --git a/old/old/14tom10l.zip b/old/old/14tom10l.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1b0b17a --- /dev/null +++ b/old/old/14tom10l.zip diff --git a/old/old/14tom10p.prc b/old/old/14tom10p.prc Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c4bc398 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/old/14tom10p.prc diff --git a/old/old/14tom10p.zip b/old/old/14tom10p.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1288288 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/old/14tom10p.zip |